L30 Line Current Differential System

g

Title Page

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential

System

UR Series Instruction Manual

L30 revision: 5.9x

Manual P/N: 1601-9050-W1 (GEK-113383)

Copyright © 2011 GE Multilin

GE Multilin

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario

Canada L6E 1B3

Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098

Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com

*1601-9050-W1*

E83849

LISTED

IND.CONT. EQ.

52TL

831776A2.CDR

RE

GISTERED

G

IISO9001:2000

E MULTILI

N

GE Multilin's Quality Management

System is registered to

ISO9001:2000

QMI # 005094

UL # A3775

g

Addendum

GE Multilin

ADDENDUM

This addendum contains information that relates to the L30 Line Current Differential System, version 5.9x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113383 (revision W1) but are not included in the current L30 operations.

The following functions and items are not yet available with the current version of the L30 relay:

• Signal sources SRC 3 to SRC 6.

Table of Contents

1.

GETTING STARTED

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1

CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1

1.1.2

INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW

1.2.1

INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2

HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3

1.2.3

SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4

1.2.4

IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3.1

PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5

1.3.2

INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5

1.3.3

CONFIGURING THE L30 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS..................................... 1-6

1.3.4

USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE....................................................... 1-9

1.3.5

CONNECTING TO THE L30 RELAY ............................................................... 1-15

1.4 UR HARDWARE

1.4.1

MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-16

1.4.2

COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-16

1.4.3

FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-16

1.5 USING THE RELAY

1.5.1

FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-17

1.5.2

MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-17

1.5.3

MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-17

1.5.4

RELAY ACTIVATION ....................................................................................... 1-17

1.5.5

RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-18

1.5.6

FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-18

1.5.7

COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-19

2.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION

2.1.1

OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1.2

FEATURES ........................................................................................................ 2-3

2.1.3

ORDERING ........................................................................................................ 2-4

2.1.4

REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................................................. 2-9

2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING

2.2.1

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-11

2.2.2

CHANNEL MONITOR ...................................................................................... 2-12

2.2.3

LOOPBACK TEST ........................................................................................... 2-13

2.2.4

DIRECT TRANSFER TRIPPING ..................................................................... 2-13

2.3 FUNCTIONALITY

2.3.1

PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ................................................ 2-14

2.3.2

METERING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS ............................................... 2-14

2.3.3

OTHER FUNCTIONS....................................................................................... 2-15

2.4 SPECIFICATIONS

2.4.1

PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 2-17

2.4.2

USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-19

2.4.3

MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-20

2.4.4

METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-21

2.4.5

INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-21

2.4.6

POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-22

2.4.7

OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-22

2.4.8

COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-24

2.4.9

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-25

2.4.10

ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-25

2.4.11

TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-26

2.4.12

PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-26

2.4.13

APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-27

2.4.14

MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-27

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System v

3.

HARDWARE

4.

HUMAN INTERFACES

5.

vi

SETTINGS


3.1 DESCRIPTION

3.1.1

PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................................................3-1

3.1.2

MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION......................................................3-6

3.1.3

REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT ...............................................................................3-8

3.2 WIRING

3.2.1

TYPICAL WIRING ..............................................................................................3-9

3.2.2

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH................................................................................3-10

3.2.3

CONTROL POWER..........................................................................................3-10

3.2.4

CT AND VT MODULES ....................................................................................3-11

3.2.5

PROCESS BUS MODULES .............................................................................3-13

3.2.6

CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS................................................................3-13

3.2.7

TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................3-21

3.2.8

RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ..............................................................................3-22

3.2.9

CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-22

3.2.10

IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-25

3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS

3.3.1

DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-27

3.3.2

FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-28

3.3.3

FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-28

3.3.4

G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-29

3.3.5

RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-32

3.3.6

RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-34

3.3.7

G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-34

3.3.8

IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-35

3.3.9

C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-37

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

3.4.1

OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-39

3.4.2

MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE..............................3-39

3.4.3

MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS .........................................................3-40

3.4.4

INITIAL SETUP OF THE ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE...............................3-40

3.4.5

CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE .................3-44

3.4.6

UPLOADING L30 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE..........................................3-47

3.4.7

ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS...................................................3-49

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1

4.1.2

CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1

4.1.3

ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1

4.1.4

ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

4.2.1

SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-4

4.2.2

SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS ................................4-8

4.2.3

SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-10

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4.3.1

FACEPLATE .....................................................................................................4-13

4.3.2

LED INDICATORS............................................................................................4-14

4.3.3

CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-17

4.3.4

DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-23

4.3.5

KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................4-23

4.3.6

BREAKER CONTROL ......................................................................................4-23

4.3.7

MENUS .............................................................................................................4-24

4.3.8

CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-26

5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1

SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1

5.1.2

INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4

5.1.3

INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5

L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

GE Multilin


5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.1

SECURITY ......................................................................................................... 5-8

5.2.2

DISPLAY PROPERTIES .................................................................................. 5-12

5.2.3

CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ............................................................................. 5-14

5.2.4

COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 5-15

5.2.5

MODBUS USER MAP...................................................................................... 5-37

5.2.6

REAL TIME CLOCK ......................................................................................... 5-37

5.2.7

FAULT REPORTS ........................................................................................... 5-38

5.2.8

OSCILLOGRAPHY .......................................................................................... 5-40

5.2.9

DATA LOGGER ............................................................................................... 5-42

5.2.10

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ..................................................................... 5-44

5.2.11

USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS ........................................................ 5-47

5.2.12

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ........................................................................... 5-47

5.2.13

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-49

5.2.14

FLEX STATE PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 5-54

5.2.15

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ....................................................................... 5-55

5.2.16

INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-57

5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES

5.3.1

REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-58

5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4.1

AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-59

5.4.2

POWER SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 5-60

5.4.3

SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 5-61

5.4.4

87L POWER SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 5-64

5.4.5

BREAKERS...................................................................................................... 5-70

5.4.6

DISCONNECT SWITCHES ............................................................................. 5-74

5.4.7

FLEXCURVES™.............................................................................................. 5-77

5.4.8

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT.................................................................... 5-84

5.5 FLEXLOGIC™

5.5.1

INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™ ............................................................. 5-100

5.5.2

FLEXLOGIC™ RULES .................................................................................. 5-109

5.5.3

FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION........................................................................ 5-109

5.5.4

FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE ............................................................................. 5-110

5.5.5

FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................. 5-114

5.5.6

FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS ................................................................................. 5-114

5.5.7

FLEXELEMENTS™ ....................................................................................... 5-115

5.5.8

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ........................................................................... 5-119

5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.6.1

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 5-120

5.6.2

SETTING GROUP ......................................................................................... 5-120

5.6.3

LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS ................................................................ 5-120

5.6.4

PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-126

5.6.5

NEUTRAL CURRENT ................................................................................... 5-138

5.6.6

GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-145

5.6.7

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-148

5.6.8

BREAKER FAILURE ...................................................................................... 5-150

5.6.9

VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-158

5.6.10

SUPERVISING ELEMENTS .......................................................................... 5-165

5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.7.1

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 5-167

5.7.2

TRIP BUS....................................................................................................... 5-167

5.7.3

SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-169

5.7.4

SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-170

5.7.5

UNDERFREQUENCY .................................................................................... 5-176

5.7.6

SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-177

5.7.7

AUTORECLOSE ............................................................................................ 5-181

5.7.8

DIGITAL ELEMENTS ..................................................................................... 5-187

5.7.9

DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-190

5.7.10

MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-192

5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5.8.1

CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-202

5.8.2

VIRTUAL INPUTS .......................................................................................... 5-204

5.8.3

CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-205

5.8.4

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-207

L30 Line Current Differential System vii

6.

ACTUAL VALUES


5.8.5

REMOTE DEVICES........................................................................................5-208

5.8.6

REMOTE INPUTS ..........................................................................................5-209

5.8.7

REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...............................................5-210

5.8.8

REMOTE OUTPUTS ......................................................................................5-211

5.8.9

DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS..................................................................5-211

5.8.10

RESETTING ...................................................................................................5-214

5.8.11

IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS ......................................................................5-214

5.8.12

IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .....................................................................5-215

5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5.9.1

DCMA INPUTS ...............................................................................................5-216

5.9.2

RTD INPUTS ..................................................................................................5-217

5.9.3

DCMA OUTPUTS ...........................................................................................5-219

5.10 TESTING

5.10.1

TEST MODE ...................................................................................................5-222

5.10.2

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS...........................................................................5-223

5.10.3

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS.......................................................................5-224

5.10.4

CHANNEL TESTS ..........................................................................................5-225

5.10.5

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES .........................................5-225

6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1

ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1

6.2 STATUS

6.2.1

CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................................6-3

6.2.2

VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3

6.2.3

REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3

6.2.4

REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...................................................6-4

6.2.5

DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-4

6.2.6

CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................................6-4

6.2.7

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................6-5

6.2.8

AUTORECLOSE.................................................................................................6-5

6.2.9

REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................6-5

6.2.10

CHANNEL TESTS ..............................................................................................6-6

6.2.11

DIGITAL COUNTERS.........................................................................................6-7

6.2.12

SELECTOR SWITCHES ....................................................................................6-7

6.2.13

FLEX STATES ....................................................................................................6-8

6.2.14

IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .........................................................................6-8

6.2.15

ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-8

6.2.16

ETHERNET SWITCH .........................................................................................6-9

6.3 METERING

6.3.1

METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-10

6.3.2

DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT..............................................................................6-13

6.3.3

SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-14

6.3.4

SYNCHROCHECK ...........................................................................................6-17

6.3.5

TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-17

6.3.6

FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................6-18

6.3.7

IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-18

6.3.8

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ....................................................................6-19

6.3.9

TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................6-20

6.4 RECORDS

6.4.1

FAULT REPORTS ............................................................................................6-21

6.4.2

EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-21

6.4.3

OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-22

6.4.4

DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-22

6.4.5

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS .................................................6-22

6.4.6

BREAKER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................6-23

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

6.5.1

MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-24

6.5.2

FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-24

viii L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

7.

COMMANDS AND

TARGETS


7.1 COMMANDS

7.1.1

COMMANDS MENU .......................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.2

VIRTUAL INPUTS .............................................................................................. 7-1

7.1.3

CLEAR RECORDS ............................................................................................ 7-2

7.1.4

SET DATE AND TIME ....................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.5

RELAY MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 7-3

7.1.6

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT.................................................. 7-3

7.2 TARGETS

7.2.1

TARGETS MENU............................................................................................... 7-6

7.2.2

TARGET MESSAGES ....................................................................................... 7-6

7.2.3

RELAY SELF-TESTS......................................................................................... 7-6

8.

SECURITY

8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

8.1.1

OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1.2

PASSWORD SECURITY MENU ....................................................................... 8-2

8.1.3

LOCAL PASSWORDS ....................................................................................... 8-2

8.1.4

REMOTE PASSWORDS ................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.5

ACCESS SUPERVISION ................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.6

DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS ....................................................... 8-4

8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY

8.2.1

SETTINGS TEMPLATES ................................................................................... 8-6

8.2.2

SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS ............................. 8-10

8.2.3

SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY .................................................................... 8-12

8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

8.3.1

OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................... 8-15

8.3.2

ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................. 8-15

8.3.3

ADDING A NEW USER ................................................................................... 8-15

8.3.4

MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES ................................................................... 8-16

9.

THEORY OF OPERATION

9.1 OVERVIEW

9.1.1

L30 DESIGN ...................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.2

L30 ARCHITECTURE ........................................................................................ 9-1

9.1.3

REMOVAL OF DECAYING OFFSET................................................................. 9-2

9.1.4

PHASELET COMPUTATION ............................................................................. 9-2

9.1.5

DISTURBANCE DETECTION............................................................................ 9-3

9.1.6

FAULT DETECTION .......................................................................................... 9-3

9.1.7

GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT............................................................... 9-4

9.1.8

CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION ........................................................................... 9-5

9.1.9

FREQUENCY TRACKING AND PHASE LOCKING .......................................... 9-6

9.1.10

FREQUENCY DETECTION ............................................................................... 9-7

9.1.11

PHASE DETECTION ......................................................................................... 9-7

9.1.12

PHASE LOCKING FILTER .............................................................................. 9-10

9.1.13

MATCHING PHASELETS ................................................................................ 9-11

9.1.14

START-UP ....................................................................................................... 9-11

9.1.15

HARDWARE AND COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS ............................. 9-11

9.1.16

ONLINE ESTIMATE OF MEASUREMENT ERRORS ..................................... 9-12

9.1.17

CT SATURATION DETECTION ...................................................................... 9-13

9.1.18

CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION ..................................................... 9-13

9.1.19

DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT CHARACTERISTICS........................................... 9-14

9.1.20

RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION.......................................................................... 9-15

9.2 OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS

9.2.1

DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 9-16

9.2.2

TRIP DECISION EXAMPLE............................................................................. 9-18

9.2.3

TRIP DECISION TEST .................................................................................... 9-18

9.3 FAULT LOCATOR

9.3.1

DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 9-20

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System ix

10. APPLICATION OF

SETTINGS

11. COMMISSIONING

A. FLEXANALOG AND

FLEXINTEGER

PARAMETERS

B. MODBUS

COMMUNICATIONS

C. IEC 61850

x

COMMUNICATIONS


10.1 CT REQUIREMENTS

10.1.1

INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................10-1

10.1.2

CALCULATION EXAMPLE 1............................................................................10-1

10.1.3

CALCULATION EXAMPLE 2............................................................................10-2

10.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS

10.2.1

INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................10-3

10.2.2

CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP ...............................................................10-3

10.2.3

CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 .......................................................................10-3

10.2.4

CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2 .......................................................................10-3

10.2.5

CURRENT DIFF BREAK POINT ......................................................................10-3

10.2.6

CT TAP .............................................................................................................10-4

10.3 CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS

10.3.1

DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................10-6

10.3.2

COMPENSATION METHOD 1 .........................................................................10-6

10.3.3


10.3.4


10.4 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENTS

10.4.1

INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT ERROR DURING L30 SYNCHRONIZATION .10-9

11.1 TESTING

11.1.1

CHANNEL TESTING ........................................................................................11-1

11.1.2

CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TESTS .............................................................11-2

11.1.3

CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL..............................................................................11-3

11.1.4

LOCAL-REMOTE RELAY TESTS ....................................................................11-4

A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

A.1.1

FLEXANALOG ITEMS ....................................................................................... A-1

A.1.2

FLEXINTEGER ITEMS ...................................................................................... A-8

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.1.1

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... B-1

B.1.2

PHYSICAL LAYER ............................................................................................ B-1

B.1.3

DATA LINK LAYER ........................................................................................... B-1

B.1.4

CRC-16 ALGORITHM ....................................................................................... B-2

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.2.1

SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ................................................................... B-3

B.2.2

READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ........... B-3

B.2.3

EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)........................................... B-4

B.2.4

STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)....................................... B-4

B.2.5

STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................ B-5

B.2.6

EXCEPTION RESPONSES............................................................................... B-5

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.3.1

OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS........................................................ B-6

B.3.2

MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ............................................................... B-7

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

B.4.1

MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................. B-9

B.4.2

DATA FORMATS............................................................................................. B-61

C.1 OVERVIEW

C.1.1

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... C-1

C.1.2

COMMUNICATION PROFILES ......................................................................... C-1


GE Multilin


C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION

C.2.1

OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................C-2

C.2.2

GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES .................................................................C-2

C.2.3

GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES ..............................................................C-2

C.2.4

GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE

DATAC-2

C.2.5

GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .........................................C-2

C.2.6

MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES...........................................................C-3

C.2.7

PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES ...............................................C-3

C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION

C.3.1

BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING ........................................................C-5

C.3.2

FILE TRANSFER ...............................................................................................C-5

C.3.3

TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING .......................................................................C-5

C.3.4

LOGICAL DEVICE NAME ..................................................................................C-5

C.3.5

LOCATION .........................................................................................................C-5

C.3.6

LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES ..................................................................C-6

C.3.7

CONNECTION TIMING .....................................................................................C-6

C.3.8

NON-IEC 61850 DATA ......................................................................................C-6

C.3.9

COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES .....................................................C-6

C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE

C.4.1

OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................C-7

C.4.2

GSSE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................C-7

C.4.3

FIXED GOOSE ..................................................................................................C-7

C.4.4

CONFIGURABLE GOOSE.................................................................................C-7

C.4.5

ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE...........................................C-9

C.4.6

GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................C-10

C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP

C.5.1

OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................C-11

C.5.2

CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS...........................................................C-12

C.5.3

ABOUT ICD FILES...........................................................................................C-13

C.5.4

CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ..............................C-17

C.5.5

ABOUT SCD FILES .........................................................................................C-17

C.5.6

IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ...........................C-20

C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

C.6.1

ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT.................................................C-22

C.6.2

ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................C-22

C.6.3

ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT .........................................C-23

C.7 LOGICAL NODES

C.7.1

LOGICAL NODES TABLE ...............................................................................C-26

D. IEC 60870-5-104

COMMUNICATIONS

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

D.1.1

INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1

D.1.2

POINT LIST........................................................................................................D-9

E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS

F. MISCELLANEOUS

GE Multilin

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.1.1

DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE ..........................................................................E-1

E.1.2

IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ...............................................................................E-4

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.1

BINARY INPUT POINTS....................................................................................E-8

E.2.2

BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT ......................................................E-9

E.2.3

COUNTERS .....................................................................................................E-10

E.2.4

ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................E-11

F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1

REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1

F.1.2

CHANGES TO THE L30 MANUAL .................................................................... F-1

L30 Line Current Differential System xi


F.2 ABBREVIATIONS

F.2.1

STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-4

F.3 WARRANTY

F.3.1

GE MULTILIN WARRANTY............................................................................... F-6

xii L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new GE Mutilin structured template.

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all NOTE, CAUTION and WARNING icons in this document are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, or downtime.

1

WARNING CAUTION

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

1.

Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.

2.

View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.

L30

Technical Support:

Tel: (905) 294-6222

Fax: (905) 201-2098

Line Differential Relay

GE Multilin

http://www.GEmultilin.com

RATINGS:

Control Power:

Contact Inputs:

Contact Outputs:

88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA

300V DC Max 10mA

Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A

360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break

4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W

®

®

Made in

Canada

Model:

Mods:

Wiring Diagram:

Inst. Manual:

Serial Number:

Firmware:

Mfg. Date:

L90G00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A

000

831782A3

GEK-113496

MAZB98000029

D

2008/01/05

- M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -

831814A1.CDR

Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

3.

Ensure that the following items are included:

• GE EnerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format).

For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEmultilin.com

.

If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE

Multilin immediately.

NOTE

GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Multilin

215 Anderson Avenue

Markham, Ontario

Canada L6E 1B3

TELEPHONE: (905) 294-6222,

FAX: (905) 201-2098

1-800-547-8629 (North America only)

E-MAIL: [email protected]

HOME PAGE: http://www.GEmultilin.com

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System 1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED

1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

1

Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems.

Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).

It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs.

Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.

High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3 milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard.

IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available, enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.

1-2 L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW

1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE a) UR BASIC DESIGN

The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or another UR device.

Input Elements

Contact Inputs

Virtual Inputs

Analog Inputs

CT Inputs

VT Inputs

Remote Inputs

Direct Inputs

Input

Status

Table

CPU Module

Protective Elements

Logic Gates

Pickup

Dropout

Operate

Output

Status

Table

Output Elements

Contact Outputs

Virtual Outputs

Analog Outputs

Remote Outputs

-DNA

-USER

Direct Outputs

1

LAN

Programming

Device

Operator

Interface

827822A2.CDR

Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.

Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into logic signals used by the relay.

Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used to control field devices.

b) UR SIGNAL TYPES

The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and ‘dry’ contacts are supported.

The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic™ equations.

The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).

The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.

The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.

The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.

The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.

GE Multilin


1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED

1 c) UR SCAN OPERATION

The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic program (FlexLogic™ equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.

Read Inputs

Solve Logic

Protection elements serviced by sub-scan

Protective Elements

PKP

DPO

OP

Set Outputs

827823A1.CDR

Figure 1–3: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION

1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as required. This is achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.

Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as “a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates that data”. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept, one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control, hmi, communications, or any functional entity in the system.

Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the L30 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection, transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.

1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS

As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in

“elements”. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to elements section in chapter 5.

Examples of simple elements, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Control elements section of chapter 5. A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to Flex-

Logic™ section in chapter 5.


GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.

The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.

The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.

• Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)

• Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP

• Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher

• 128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)

• 200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive

• Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color)

• RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay

The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the L30 and the EnerVista UR Setup software.

• US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686

• US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2

• PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem

1.3.2 INSTALLATION

1

After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.

1.

Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.

2.

Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software.

3.

When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.

4.

Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.

5.

In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the “L30 Line Current Differential System” from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software

GE Multilin


1

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED

release, or select “CD” if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the L30.

6.

EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation program.

7.

Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed.

8.

Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.

9.

Click Finish to end the installation. The UR-series device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista

Launchpad window, as shown below.

1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE L30 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a) OVERVIEW

The user can connect remotely to the L30 through the rear RS485 port or the rear Ethernet port with a PC running the

EnerVista UR Setup software. The L30 can also be accessed locally with a laptop computer through the front panel RS232 port or the rear Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.


GE Multilin


• To configure the L30 for remote access via the rear RS485 port(s), refer to the Configuring Serial Communications section.

• To configure the L30 for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, refer to the Configuring Ethernet Communications section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering.

• To configure the L30 for local access with a laptop through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, refer to the

Using the Quick Connect Feature section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering for Ethernet communications.

b) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is not described in this section; see the Using the Quick Connect Feature section for details on configuring the RS232 port.

A GE Multilin F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is will be required. Refer to the F485 instruction manual for additional details.

1.

Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com

). See the Software Installation section for installation details.

2.

Select the “UR” device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.

3.

Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.

4.

Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Location 1” as the site name. Click the OK button when complete.

5.

The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.

6.

Click the Add Device button to define the new device.

7.

Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.

8.

Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications.

1

GE Multilin

Figure 1–4: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS



1

9.

Enter the relay slave address, COM port, baud rate, and parity settings from the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COM-

MUNICATIONS

ÖØ

SERIAL PORTS

menu in their respective fields.

10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the L30 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.

11. Click “OK” when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or

Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.

The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the L30 section to begin communications.

c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.

1.



2.


3.

Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.

4.

Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Location 2” as the site name. Click the OK button when complete.

5.

The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.

6.

Click the Add Device button to define the new device.

7.

Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.

8.

Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.

1-8

Figure 1–5: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS


GE Multilin


9.

Enter the relay IP address specified in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

NETWORK

Ö

IP

ADDRESS

) in the “IP Address” field.

10. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PROD-

UCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

MODBUS PROTOCOL

menu.

11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the L30 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting values.

12. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or

Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.

The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the L30 section to begin communications.

1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the laptop computer to the front panel RS232 port with a straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable.

1.



2.


3.

Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.

1

4.

Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect.

5.

The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named

“Quick Connect” and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the L30 device.

Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the L30. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the L30 model number.

b) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS

To use the Quick Connect feature to access the L30 from a laptop through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard.

1.

Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed.

2.

Navigate to the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

NETWORK

Ö

IP ADDRESS

setting.

3.

Enter an IP address of “1.1.1.1” and select the ENTER key to save the value.

4.

In the same menu, select the

SUBNET IP MASK

setting.

5.

Enter a subnet IP address of “255.0.0.0” and press the ENTER key to save the value.

GE Multilin



1

Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the laptop to the rear Ethernet port. The pinout for an Ethernet crossover cable is shown below.

1

2

3

4 5 6

7

8

6

7

4

5

2

3

8

END 1

Pin Wire color

1 White/orange

Orange

White/green

Blue

White/blue

Green

White/brown

Brown

Diagram

6

7

4

5

2

3

8

END 2

Pin Wire color

1 White/green

Green

White/orange

Blue

White/blue

Orange

White/brown

Brown

Diagram

842799A1.CDR

Figure 1–6: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT

Now, assign the laptop computer an IP address compatible with the relay’s IP address.

1.

From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.

2.

Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.


GE Multilin


3.

Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.

1

4.

Click on the “Use the following IP address” box.

5.

Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the L30 relay and the last number different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).

6.

Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the L30 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).

7.

Click OK to save the values.

Before continuing, it will be necessary to test the Ethernet connection.

1.

Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing “cmd”.

2.

Type the following command:

C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1

3.

If the connection is successful, the system will return four replies as follows:

Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255




Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),

Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:

Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms

4.

Note that the values for time

and

TTL

will vary depending on local network configuration.

If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the


command:

GE Multilin



1


Request timed out.

Request timed out.

Request timed out.

Request timed out.






Verify the physical connection between the L30 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

NETWORK

Ö

IP ADDRESS

setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.

If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the


command:


Hardware error.

Hardware error.

Hardware error.

Hardware error.






Verify the physical connection between the L30 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

NETWORK

Ö

IP ADDRESS

setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.

If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1

command:


Destination host unreachable.









Verify the IP address is programmed in the local PC by entering the ipconfig command in the command window.

C:\WINNT>ipconfig

Windows 2000 IP Configuration

Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:

Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :

IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0

Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :

Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS suffix . :

IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2

Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0

Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :

C:\WINNT>

It may be necessary to restart the laptop for the change in IP address to take effect (Windows 98 or NT).


GE Multilin


Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, it is necessary to disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer.

1.

Start the Internet Explorer software.

2.

Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click on Connections tab.

3.

Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.

1

4.

Ensure that the “Use a proxy server for your LAN” box is not checked.

If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the L30 relay.

1.

Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE enerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com


2.

Start the Internet Explorer software.

3.


4.

Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.

5.

Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the L30, then click Connect.

6.

The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named

“Quick Connect” and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the L30 device.

Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the L30. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the L30 model number.

When direct communications with the L30 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:

1.

From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.

2.

Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.

3.

Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.

GE Multilin


1

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

4.

Set the computer to “Obtain a relay address automatically” as shown below.

1 GETTING STARTED

If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the L30 relay.

AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES

The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an Ethernet network.

Using the Quick Connect feature, a single click of the mouse will trigger the software to automatically detect any UR-series relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software will then proceed to configure all settings and order code options in the Device Setup menu, for the purpose of communicating to multiple relays. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate, in seconds, all UR-series devices in a particular location.


GE Multilin


1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE L30 RELAY

1.

Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:

1

Quick action hot links

Expand the site list by double-clicking or selecting the +/– box.

Communications status indicators:

Green = OK

Red = No communications

UR icon = report is open

842743A3.CDR

2.

The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.

3.

If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).

If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.

Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.

4.

The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.

Refer to chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.

NOTE

QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS

The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to several functions that are often performed when using L30 relays. From the online window, users can select which relay to interrogate from a pull-down window, then click on the button for the action they wish to perform. The following quick action functions are available:

• View the L30 event record.

• View the last recorded oscillography record.

• View the status of all L30 inputs and outputs.

• View all of the L30 metering values.

• View the L30 protection summary.

GE Multilin


1.4 UR HARDWARE 1 GETTING STARTED

1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING

1

Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS carefully.

1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS

The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the CPU communications ports section of chapter 3.

Figure 1–7: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate through the L30 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the L30 rear communications port. The converter terminals

(+, –, GND) are connected to the L30 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU communications

ports section in chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120

Ω, 1 nF) as described in the chapter 3.

1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY

All messages are displayed on a 2

× 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.


GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY

1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD

Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.

The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.

The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.

The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.

1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION

1

Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages:

• Actual values.

• Settings.

• Commands.

• Targets.

• User displays (when enabled).

1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY

The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (

), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE

UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.

HIGHEST LEVEL

SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

PASSWORD

SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL:

Restricted

SETTINGS

1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION

The relay is defaulted to the “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the “Programmed” state.

Select the menu message

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

INSTALLATION

Ö

RELAY SETTINGS

RELAY SETTINGS:

Not Programmed

GE Multilin


1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED

1

To put the relay in the “Programmed” state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The faceplate

Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.

1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS

It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:

1. COMMAND

The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations:

• change state of virtual inputs

• clear event records

• clear oscillography records

• operate user-programmable pushbuttons

2. SETTING

The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.

Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.

NOTE

1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION

FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the Flex-

Logic™ section in Chapter 5 for additional details.


GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY

1.5.7 COMMISSIONING

The L30 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. Since the L30 is a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required.

Furthermore, the L30 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors

(see the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that L30 maintenance be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.

In-service maintenance:

1.

Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the corresponding system).

2.

Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.

3.

LED test.

4.

Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.

5.

Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

Out-of-service maintenance:

1.

Check wiring connections for firmness.

2.

Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required.

3.

Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay settings schedule).

4.

Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing.

5.

Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.

6.

Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

7.

LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.

Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:

1.

View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.

If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for prompt service.

1

GE Multilin


1

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED


GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION

2.1.1 OVERVIEW

The L30 Line Current Differential System is a digital current differential relay system with an integral communications channel interface.

The L30 is intended to provide complete protection for transmission lines of any voltage level. Both three phase and single phase tripping schemes are available. Models of the L30 are available for application on both two and three terminal lines.

The L30 uses per phase differential at 64 kbps transmitting two phaselets per cycle. The current differential scheme is based on innovative patented techniques developed by GE. The L30 algorithms are based on the Fourier transform– phaselet approach and an adaptive statistical restraint. The restraint is similar to a traditional percentage differential scheme, but is adaptive based on relay measurements. When used with a 64 kbps channel, the innovative phaselets approach yields an operating time of 1.0 to 1.5 cycles (typical). The adaptive statistical restraint approach provides both more sensitive and more accurate fault sensing. This allows the L30 to detect relatively higher impedance single line to ground faults that existing systems may not. The basic current differential element operates on current input only. Long lines with significant capacitance can benefit from charging current compensation if terminal voltage measurements are applied to the relay. The voltage input is also used for some protection and monitoring features such as directional elements, fault locator, metering, and distance backup.

The L30 is designed to operate over different communications links with various degrees of noise encountered in power systems and communications environments. Since correct operation of the relay is completely dependent on data received from the remote end, special attention must be paid to information validation. The L30 incorporates a high degree of security by using a 32-bit CRC (cyclic redundancy code) inter-relay communications packet.

In addition to current differential protection, the relay provides multiple backup protection for phase and ground faults. For overcurrent protection, the time overcurrent curves may be selected from a selection of standard curve shapes or a custom

FlexCurve™ for optimum co-ordination.

The L30 incorporates charging current compensation for applications on very long transmission lines without loss of sensitivity. The line capacitive current is removed from the terminal phasors.

For breaker-and-a-half or ring applications, the L30 design provides secure operation during external faults with possible

CT saturation.

Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).

2

Table 2–1: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

DEVICE

NUMBER

25

27P

27X

50BF

50G

50N

50P

50_2

51G

51N

FUNCTION

Synchrocheck

Phase undervoltage

Auxiliary undervoltage

Breaker failure

Ground instantaneous overcurrent

Neutral instantaneous overcurrent

Phase instantaneous overcurrent

Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent

Ground time overcurrent

Neutral time overcurrent

67N

67P

79

81U

87L

DEVICE

NUMBER

51P

51_2

52

59P

59X

FUNCTION

Phase time overcurrent

Negative-sequence time overcurrent

AC circuit breaker

Phase overvoltage

Auxiliary overvoltage

Neutral directional overcurrent

Phase directional overcurrent

Automatic recloser

Underfrequency

Segregated line current differential

GE Multilin


2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

52

2

Monitoring

79

CLOSE TRIP

50P

50_2 51P 51_2

50BF

87L 67P 50N 51N 67N

25

Data from/to remote end

(via dedicated communications)

FlexElement

TM

Metering

Transducer inputs 59P

27P

50G 51G

59X 27X

L30 Line Differential Relay

Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION

Breaker arcing current (I

2 t)

Breaker control

Contact inputs (up to 96)

Contact outputs (up to 64)

Control pushbuttons

CT failure detector

Data logger

Digital counters (8)

Digital elements (48)

Direct inputs (8 per pilot channel)

Disconnect switches

DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol

Event recorder

FUNCTION

Fault locator and fault reporting

FlexElements™ (8)

FlexLogic™ equations

IEC 61850 communications (optional)

Channel tests

Metering: Current, voltage, power, frequency, power factor, 87L current, local and remote phasors

Modbus communications

Modbus user map

Non-volatile latches

Non-volatile selector switch

Oscillography

FUNCTION

Setting groups (6)

Stub bus

Synchrophasors

Time synchronization over SNTP

Transducer inputs and outputs

User-definable displays

User-programmable LEDs

User-programmable pushbuttons

User-programmable self-tests

Virtual inputs (64)

Virtual outputs (96)

VT fuse failure

831815A2.CDR


GE Multilin


2.1.2 FEATURES

LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL:

• Phase segregated, high-speed digital current differential system.

• Overhead and underground AC transmission lines, series compensated lines.

• Two-terminal and three-terminal line applications.

• Zero-sequence removal for application on lines with tapped transformers connected in a grounded wye on the line side.

• GE phaselets approach based on the Discrete Fourier Transform with 64 samples per cycle and transmitting two timestamped phaselets per cycle.

• Adaptive restraint approach improving sensitivity and accuracy of fault sensing.

• Accommodates in-zone transformer with a magnitude and phase compensation and second harmonic inhibit during transformer magnetizing inrush.

• Continuous clock synchronization via the distributed synchronization technique.

• Increased transient stability through DC decaying offset removal.

• Accommodates up to five times CT ratio differences.

• Peer-to-peer (master-master) architecture changing to master-slave via DTT (if channel fails) at 64 kbps.

• Charging current compensation.

• Interfaces direct fiber, multiplexed RS422 and G.703 connections with relay ID check.

• Per-phase line differential protection direct transfer trip plus eight user-assigned pilot signals via the communications channel.

• Secure 32-bit CRC protection against communications errors.

• Channel asymmetry (up to 10 ms) compensation using GPS satellite-controlled clock.

BACKUP PROTECTION:

• DTT provision for pilot schemes.

• Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent directional phase overcurrent protection.

• Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent directional zero-sequence protection.

• Two-element time overcurrent and two-element instantaneous overcurrent negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

• Undervoltage and overvoltage protection.

ADDITIONAL PROTECTION:

• Breaker failure protection.

• Stub bus protection.

• VT and CT supervision.

• GE Multilin sources approach allowing grouping of different CTs and VTs from multiple input channels.

• Open pole detection.

• Breaker trip coil supervision and seal-in of trip command.

• FlexLogic™ allowing creation of user-defined distributed protection and control logic.

CONTROL:

• One and two breaker configuration for breaker-and-a-half and ring bus schemes, pushbutton control from the relay.

• Auto-reclosing and synchrochecking.

• Breaker arcing current.

2

GE Multilin



2

MONITORING:

• Oscillography of current, voltage, FlexLogic™ operands, and digital signals (1

× 128 cycles to 31 × 8 cycles configurable).

• Events recorder: 1024 events.

• Fault locator.

METERING:

• Actual 87L remote phasors, differential current, channel delay, and channel asymmetry at all line terminals of line current differential protection.

• Line current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor, and frequency.

COMMUNICATIONS:

• Front panel RS232 port: 19.2 kbps.

• One or two rear RS485 ports: up to 115 kbps.

• 10Base-F Ethernet port supporting the IEC 61850 protocol.

2.1.3 ORDERING a) OVERVIEW

The L30 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit and consists of the following modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay communications.

Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).

Order codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm

for the latest details concerning L30 ordering options.

NOTE

The order code structure is dependent on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules (regular CT/VT modules or the HardFiber modules). The order code options are described in the following sub-sections.


GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION b) ORDER CODES WITH TRADITIONAL CTS AND VTS

The order codes for the horizontal mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.

Table 2–3: L30 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)

BASE UNIT

CPU

SOFTWARE

(IEC 61850 options not available with type E CPUs)

MOUNT/COATING

L30

L30

FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY

*

|

E

G

H

J

K

L

M

S

POWER SUPPLY

(redundant supply must be same type as main supply)

CT/VT MODULES

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

TRANSDUCER

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

(select a maximum of 3 per unit)

|

XX

4A

|

|

|

4B

4C

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

5C

6L

6M

6N

6P

6R

5D

5E

5F

6D

6E

6F

6G

6H

6K

4D

4L

67

6A

6B

6C

|

XX

4A

|

|

|

4B

4C

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

5C

6L

6M

6N

6P

6R

5D

5E

5F

6D

6E

6F

6G

6H

6K

4D

4L

67

6A

6B

6C

|

XX

4A

|

|

|

4B

4C

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

5C

6L

6M

6N

6P

6R

5D

5E

5F

6D

6E

6F

6G

6H

6K

4D

4L

67

6A

6B

6C

8F

8H

8L

8N

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

H

L

L

|

|

H

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

* - F

|

C

D

R

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

|

U

L

N

K

M

Q

T

V

A

P

G

S

B

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

H

A

*

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

00

|

|

|

03

06

|

|

|

**

|

07

18

19

24

25

26

27

- H - L - N - S

INTER-RELAY

COMMUNICATIONS


|

XX

4A

|

|

|

4B

4C

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

5C

6L

6M

6N

6P

6R

5D

5E

5F

6D

6E

6F

6G

6H

6K

4D

4L

67

6A

6B

6C

- U

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

73

74

75

76

77

2F

2G

2H

|

|

72

5D

5E

5F

2A

2B

2E

7M

7N

7P

7Q

7R

7S

7G

7H

7I

7J

7K

7L

7T

7V

7W

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

5C

6L

6M

6N

6P

6R

6D

6E

6F

6G

6H

6K

4D

4L

67

6A

6B

6C

|

XX

4A

|

|

|

4B

4C

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

W/X

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

73

74

75

76

77

2F

2G

2H

2S

2T

72

2A

2B

2E

|

|

|

7M

7N

7P

7Q

7R

7S

7G

7H

7I

7J

7K

7L

7T

7V

7W

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

RH

|

RL

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

Full Size Horizontal Mount

Base Unit

RS485 and RS485

RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F

RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F

RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX

RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX

RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX

RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch

No software options

IEC 61850

One phasor measurement unit (PMU)

IEC 61850 and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)

Synchrocheck and three-pole autoreclose

Synchrocheck, three-pole autoreclose, IEC 61850, and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)

In-zone transformer protection

In-zone transformer protection and IEC 61850

In-zone transformer protection and and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)

In-zone transformer protection, IEC 61850, and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)

Horizontal (19” rack)

Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating

English display

French display

Russian display

Chinese display

English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons

French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons

Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons

Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons

Enhanced front panel with English display

Enhanced front panel with French display

Enhanced front panel with Russian display

Enhanced front panel with Chinese display

Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons

Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons

Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons

Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons

125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply

125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply

24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply

24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply

Standard 4CT/4VT

Standard 8CT

Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)

Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)

No Module

4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs

4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs

4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs

16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing

14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs

8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs

2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs


8 Form-C outputs

16 digital inputs

4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs

8 Fast Form-C outputs

4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs


4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs

2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs


4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs


2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs


4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs


2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 1 Form-A latching output, 8 digital inputs

4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)

8 RTD inputs

4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)

4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs

8 dcmA inputs

C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode


Bi-phase, single channel

Bi-phase, dual channel

IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel

IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels

Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)

Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage supply (48 V DC)

1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel


Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER

Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER



820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel


1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel


Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode


Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED

820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels


1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels

1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels

Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED


Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED


Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER

G.703, 1 Channel

G.703, 2 Channels

RS422, 1 Channel

RS422, 2 Channels, 2 Clock Inputs

RS422, 2 Channels

2

GE Multilin



The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.

2

Table 2–4: L30 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)

BASE UNIT

CPU

SOFTWARE


MOUNT/COATING


POWER SUPPLY

CT/VT MODULES

L30

L30


*

|

E

G

H

J

K

L

M

TRANSDUCER

INPUTS/OUTPUTS


INTER-RELAY

COMMUNICATIONS


V

B

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

03

06

07

18

19

24

25

26

27

|

|

|

|

00

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

8F

8H

8L

8N

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

F

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

|

D

R

A |

|

|

K |

M |

Q |

U

L

N

T |

V |

H

L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

* - F

|

- H - L - N

XX

4A

4B

4C

4D

4L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

5C

5D

5E

5F

6R

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

6H

6K

6L

6M

6N

6P

67

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

6G

- R

7J

7K

7L

7M

7N

7P

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

7G

7H

7I

7Q

7R

7S

7T

7V

7W

73

74

75

76

77

7A

2B

2E

2F

2G

2H

72

|

|

|

|

2A

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

XX

4A

4B

4C

4D

4L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

6R

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

5C

5D

5E

5F

6H

6K

6L

6M

6N

6P

67

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

6G

XX

4A

4B

4C

4D

4L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

6R

6S

6T

6U

6V

5A

5C

5D

5E

5F

6H

6K

6L

6M

6N

6P

67

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

6G

Reduced Size Vertical Mount

Base Unit

RS485 and RS485







No software options

IEC 61850

Phasor measurement unit (PMU)

IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU)







Vertical (3/4 rack)

Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating

English display

French display

Russian display

Chinese display











Standard 4CT/4VT

Standard 8CT

Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)

Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics (required for PMU option)

No Module









8 Form-C outputs

16 digital inputs















4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)

8 RTD inputs

4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)

4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs

8 dcmA inputs





























G.703, 1 Channel

G.703, 2 Channels

RS422, 1 Channel


RS422, 2 Channels


GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION c) ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES

The order codes for the horizontal mount units with the process bus module are shown below.

Table 2–5: L30 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)

BASE UNIT

CPU

SOFTWARE


MOUNT/COATING

L30

L30


*

|

E

G

H

J

K

L

M

POWER SUPPLY

(redundant supply must be same type as main supply)

PROCESS BUS MODULE


INTER-RELAY

COMMUNICATIONS


D

R

A

|

|

C

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

|

L

N

T

M

Q

U

V

P

G

S

B

K

*

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

H

A

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

00

03

|

|

|

06

07

|

|

|

**

|

18

19

24

25

26

27

- H

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

81

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

XX

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

H

H

L

L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

* - F

|

- L - N - S

XX

4A

4B

4C

4D

4L

67

6A

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

6H

6K

6L

6M

6N

6P

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

6G

6R

6S

6T

6U

6V

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

XX

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

- U

7L

7M

7N

7P

7Q

7R

7G

7H

7I

7J

7K

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

72

73

74

75

76

77

7S

7T

7V

7W

2A

2B

2E

2F

2G

2H

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

XX

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

W/X

7L

7M

7N

7P

7Q

7R

7G

7H

7I

7J

7K

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

72

73

74

75

76

77

7S

7T

7V

7W

2A

2B

2E

2F

2G

2H

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

XX

|

|

|

|

|

|

RH

|

RL

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

XX

4A

4B

4C

4D

4L

67

6A

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

6H

6K

6L

6M

6N

6P

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

6G

6R

6S

6T

6U

6V

Full Size Horizontal Mount

Base Unit

RS485 and RS485







No software options

IEC 61850

One phasor measurement unit (PMU)

IEC 61850 and one phasor measurement unit (PMU)







Horizontal (19” rack)

Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating

English display

French display

Russian display

Chinese display

English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons

French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons

Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons

Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons










125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply


24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply

Eight-port digital process bus module

No Module









8 Form-C outputs

16 digital inputs











































G.703, 1 Channel

G.703, 2 Channels

RS422, 1 Channel


RS422, 2 Channels

2

GE Multilin



The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with the process bus module are shown below.

2

Table 2–6: L30 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)

BASE UNIT

CPU

SOFTWARE


MOUNT/COATING

L30

L30


POWER SUPPLY

PROCESS BUS MODULE


*

|

E

G

H

J

K

L

M

INTER-RELAY

COMMUNICATIONS


V

B

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

03

06

07

18

19

24

25

26

27

|

|

|

|

00

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

XX

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

F

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

|

D

R

A |

|

|

K |

M |

Q |

U

L

N

T |

V |

H

L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

* - F

|

- H - L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

XX

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

81

|

|

|

|

|

|

- N - R

7Q

7R

7S

7T

7V

7W

7J

7K

7L

7M

7N

7P

7D

7E

7F

7G

7H

7I

75

76

77

7A

7B

7C

2G

2H

72

73

74

|

|

2A

2B

2E

2F

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

XX

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

4C

4D

4L

67

6A

6B

XX

4A

4B

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

6M

6N

6P

6R

6S

6T

6U

6V

6C

6D

6E

6F

6G

6H

6K

6L

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

**

|

Reduced Size Vertical Mount

Base Unit

RS485 and RS485







No software options

IEC 61850

Phasor measurement unit (PMU)

IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU)







Vertical (3/4 rack)

Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating

English display

French display

Russian display

Chinese display











Eight-port digital process bus module

No Module









8 Form-C outputs

16 digital inputs











































G.703, 1 Channel

G.703, 2 Channels

RS422, 1 Channel


RS422, 2 Channels


GE Multilin


2.1.4 REPLACEMENT MODULES

Replacement modules can be ordered separately as shown below. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.

Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the L30 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are available as replacement modules.

NOTE

Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm

for the latest details concerning L30 ordering options.

NOTE

The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below.

2

Table 2–7: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS

-

POWER SUPPLY

(redundant supply only available in horizontal units; must be same type as main supply)

CPU

FACEPLATE/DISPLAY

DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

CT/VT

MODULES

(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

UR

|

|

|

|

7P

7Q

7R

7S

7T

7W

7J

7K

7L

7M

7N

7D

7E

7F

7G

7H

7I

75

76

77

7A

7B

7C

2H

2S

2T

72

73

74

8M

8N

8R

2A

2B

2E

2F

2G

6V

8F

8G

8H

8J

8L

6P

6R

6S

6T

6U

6G

6H

6K

6L

6M

6N

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

4A

4B

4C

4D

4L

67

3U

3L

3N

3T

3V

3G

3S

3B

3K

3M

3Q

9S

3C

3D

3R

3A

3P

9E

9G

9H

9J

9K

9L

9M

9N

**

1H

1L

RH

RH

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

| 125 / 250 V AC/DC

24 to 48 V (DC only) redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only)

RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and 10/100Base-T

RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch

Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display

Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display

Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display

Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display

Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display

Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display

Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display

Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display

















8 Form-C outputs

16 digital inputs














2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs

Standard 4CT/4VT

Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT

Standard 8CT

Sensitive Ground 8CT

Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics

Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics







Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)

Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC)





IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel

IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels

















G.703, 1 Channel

G.703, 2 Channels

RS422, 1 Channel

RS422, 2 Channels

GE Multilin



The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below.

2

Table 2–8: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS

-

POWER SUPPLY

CPU

FACEPLATE/DISPLAY

DIGITAL

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

CT/VT

MODULES

(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

UR

|

|

|

|

7J

7K

7L

7M

7N

7P

7D

7E

7F

7G

7H

7I

7Q

7R

7S

7T

7W

76

77

7A

7B

7C

2G

2H

72

73

74

75

8N

8R

2A

2B

2E

2F

8G

8H

8J

8L

8M

6R

6S

6T

6U

6V

8F

6H

6K

6L

6M

6N

6P

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

6G

3V

4A

4B

4C

4D

4L

67

6A

3M

3Q

3U

3L

3N

3T

9N

3F

3D

3R

3K

3K

9H

9J

9K

9L

9M

**

1H

1L

9E

9G

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

*

| 125 / 250 V AC/DC

24 to 48 V (DC only)

RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)

RS485 and 10/100Base-T

Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display

Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display

Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display

Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display

















8 Form-C outputs

16 digital inputs














2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs

Standard 4CT/4VT

Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT

Standard 8CT

Sensitive Ground 8CT

Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics

Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics





























G.703, 1 Channel

G.703, 2 Channels

RS422, 1 Channel

RS422, 2 Channels


GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING

2.2PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING 2.2.1 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

Dedicated inter-relay communications may operate over 64 kbps digital channels or dedicated fiber optic channels. Available interfaces include:

• RS422 at 64 kbps

• G.703 at 64 kbps

• Dedicated fiber optics at 64 kbps. The fiber optic options include:

– 820 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.

– 1300 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.

– 1300 nm single-mode fiber with an ELED transmitter.

– 1300 nm single-mode fiber with a laser transmitter.

– 1550 nm single-mode fiber with a laser transmitter.

– IEEE C37.94 820 nm multi-mode fiber with an LED transmitter.

All fiber optic options use an ST connector. L30 models are available for use on two or three terminal lines. A two terminal line application requires one bidirectional channel. However, in two terminal line applications, it is also possible to use an

L30 relay with two bidirectional channels. The second bidirectional channel will provide a redundant backup channel with automatic switchover if the first channel fails.

The L30 current differential relay is designed to function in a peer-to-peer or master-to-master architecture. In the peer-topeer architecture, all relays in the system are identical and perform identical functions in the current differential scheme. In order for every relay on the line to be a peer, each relay must be able to communicate with all of the other relays. If there is a failure in communications among the relays, the relays will revert to a master-to-peer architecture on a three-terminal system, with the master as the relay that has current phasors from all terminals. Using two different operational modes increases the dependability of the current differential scheme on a three-terminal system by reducing reliance on communications.

The main difference between a master and a slave L30 is that only a master relay performs the actual current differential calculation, and only a master relay communicates with the relays at all other terminals of the protected line.

At least one master L30 relay must have live communications to all other terminals in the current differential scheme; the other L30 relays on that line may operate as slave relays. All master relays in the scheme will be equal, and each will perform all functions. Each L30 relay in the scheme will determine if it is a master by comparing the number of terminals on the line to the number of active communication channels.

The slave terminals only communicate with the master; there is no slave-to-slave communications path. As a result, a slave

L30 relay cannot calculate the differential current. When a master L30 relay issues a local trip signal, it also sends a direct transfer trip (DTT) signal to all of the other L30 relays on the protected line.

If a slave L30 relay issues a trip from one of its backup functions, it can send a transfer trip signal to its master and other slave relays if such option is designated. Because a slave cannot communicate with all the relays in the differential scheme, the master will then “broadcast” the direct transfer trip (DTT) signal to all other terminals.

The slave L30 Relay performs the following functions:

• Samples currents and voltages.

• Removes DC offset from the current via the mimic algorithm.

• Creates phaselets.

• Calculates sum of squares data.

• Transmits current data to all master L30 relays.

• Performs all local relaying functions.

• Receives current differential DTT and Direct Input signals from all other L30 relays.

• Transmits direct output signals to all communicating relays.

• Sends synchronization information of local clock to all other L30 clocks.

2

GE Multilin


2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING

2

The master L30 relay performs the following functions:

• Performs all functions of a slave L30.

• Receives current phasor information from all relays.

• Performs the current differential algorithm.

• Sends a current differential DTT signal to all L30 relays on the protected line.

In the peer-to-peer mode, all L30 relays act as masters.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

IED-1

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Optional redundant channel

Typical two-terminal application

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

IED-2

IED-1

Tx

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx Rx Tx Rx

CHn

IED-3

CHn

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

IED-2

Typical three-terminal application

Figure 2–2: COMMUNICATIONS PATHS

831009A5.CDR

2.2.2 CHANNEL MONITOR

The L30 has logic to detect that the communications channel is deteriorating or has failed completely. This can provide an alarm indication and disable the current differential protection. Note that a failure of the communications from the master to a slave does not prevent the master from performing the current differential algorithm; failure of the communications from a slave to the master will prevent the master from performing the correct current differential logic. Channel propagation delay is being continuously measured and adjusted according to changes in the communications path. Every relay on the protection system can assigned an unique ID to prevent advertent loopbacks at multiplexed channels.


GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING

2.2.3 LOOPBACK TEST

This option allows the user to test the relay at one terminal of the line by looping the transmitter output to the receiver input; at the same time, the signal sent to the remote will not change. A local loopback feature is included in the relay to simplify single ended testing.

2.2.4 DIRECT TRANSFER TRIPPING

The L30 includes provision for sending and receiving a single-pole direct transfer trip (DTT) signal from current differential protection between the L30 relays at the line terminals using the pilot communications channel. The user may also initiate an additional eight pilot signals with an L30 communications channel to create trip, block, or signaling logic. A FlexLogic™ operand, an external contact closure, or a signal over the LAN communication channels can be assigned for that logic.

2

GE Multilin


2.3 FUNCTIONALITY 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.3FUNCTIONALITY

2.3.1 PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS

2

• Current differential protection: The current differential algorithms used in the L30 Line Current Differential System are based on the Fourier transform phaselet approach and an adaptive statistical restraint. The L30 uses per-phase differential at 64 kbps with two phaselets per cycle. A detailed description of the current differential algorithms is found in chapter 8. The current differential protection can be set in a percentage differential scheme with a single or dual slope.

• Backup protection: In addition to the primary current differential protection, the L30 Line Current Differential System incorporates backup functions that operate on the local relay current only, such as directional phase overcurrent, directional neutral overcurrent, negative-sequence overcurrent, undervoltage, overvoltage, and distance protection.

• Multiple setting groups: The relay can store six groups of settings. They may be selected by user command, a configurable contact input or a FlexLogic™ equation to allow the relay to respond to changing conditions.

• User-programmable logic: In addition to the built-in protection logic, the relay may be programmed by the user via

FlexLogic™ equations.

• Configurable inputs and outputs: All of the contact converter inputs (digital inputs) to the relay may be assigned by the user to directly block a protection element, operate an output relay or serve as an input to FlexLogic™ equations.

All of the outputs, except for the self test critical alarm contacts, may also be assigned by the user.

2.3.2 METERING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS

• Metering: The relay measures all input currents and calculates both phasors and symmetrical components. When AC potential is applied to the relay via the optional voltage inputs, metering data includes phase and neutral current, phase voltage, three phase and per phase W, VA, and var, and power factor. Frequency is measured on either current or voltage inputs. They may be called onto the local display or accessed via a computer. All terminal current phasors and differential currents are also displayed at all relays, allowing the user opportunity to analyze correct polarization of currents at all terminals.

• Event records: The relay has a sequence of events recorder which combines the recording of snapshot data and oscillography data. Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including input contact changes, measuring-element pickup and operation, FlexLogic™ equation changes, and self-test status. The relay stores up to

1024 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest microsecond. This provides the information needed to determine a sequence of events, which can reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation after system events.

• Oscillography: The relay stores oscillography data at a sampling rate of 64 times per cycle. The relay can store a maximum of 64 records. Each oscillography file includes a sampled data report consisting of:

– Instantaneous sample of the selected currents and voltages (if AC potential is used),

– The status of each selected contact input.

– The status of each selected contact output.

– The status of each selected measuring function.

– The status of various selected logic signals, including virtual inputs and outputs.

The captured oscillography data files can be accessed via the remote communications ports on the relay.

• CT failure and current unbalance alarm: The relay has current unbalance alarm logic. The unbalance alarm may be supervised by a zero-sequence voltage detector. The user may block the relay from tripping when the current unbalance alarm operates.

• Trip circuit monitor: On those outputs designed for trip duty, a trip voltage monitor will continuously measure the DC voltage across output contacts to determine if the associated trip circuit is intact. If the voltage dips below the minimum voltage or the breaker fails to open or close after a trip command, an alarm can be activated.

• Self-test: The most comprehensive self testing of the relay is performed during a power-up. Because the system is not performing any protection activities at power-up, tests that would be disruptive to protection processing may be performed. The processors in the CPU and all CT/VT modules participate in startup self-testing. Self-testing checks approximately 85 to 90% of the hardware, and CRC/check-sum verification of all PROMs is performed. The proces-


GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.3 FUNCTIONALITY

sors communicate their results to each other so that if any failures are detected, they can be reported to the user. Each processor must successfully complete its self tests before the relay begins protection activities.

During both startup and normal operation, the CPU polls all plug-in modules and checks that every one answers the poll. The CPU compares the module types that identify themselves to the relay order code stored in memory and declares an alarm if a module is either non-responding or the wrong type for the specific slot. When running under normal power system conditions, the relay processors will have idle time. During this time, each processor performs background self-tests that are not disruptive to the foreground processing.

2.3.3 OTHER FUNCTIONS a) ALARMS

The relay contains a dedicated alarm relay, the critical failure alarm, housed in the power supply module. This output relay is not user programmable. This relay has form-C contacts and is energized under normal operating conditions. The critical failure alarm will become de-energized if the relay self test algorithms detect a failure that would prevent the relay from properly protecting the transmission line.

b) LOCAL USER INTERFACE

The local user interface (on the faceplate) consists of a 2

× 20 liquid crystal display (LCD) and keypad. The keypad and display may be used to view data from the relay, to change settings in the relay, or to perform control actions. Also, the faceplate provides LED indications of status and events.

c) TIME SYNCHRONIZATION

The relay includes a clock which can run freely from the internal oscillator or be synchronized from an external IRIG-B signal. With the external signal, all relays wired to the same synchronizing signal will be synchronized to within 0.1 millisecond.

d) FUNCTION DIAGRAMS

2

I

Sample Raw

Value

V

Sample Raw

Value

Sample

Hold

Master

Clock

Remote Relay dV dt

Offset

Removal

Compute

Phaselets

Disturbance

Detector

67P&N

50P,N&G

Charging Current

Comp.

Offset

Removal

Compute

Phaselets

UR Platform

Phasors

Computations

51P,N&G

27P

Filter

Compute

Phaselets

PFLL Status

Phase and Frequency

Locked Loop (PFLL)

Frequency

Deviation

Phase

Deviation

Communications

Interface

PHASELETS TO REMOTE

PHASELETS FROM REMOTE

Direct Transfer Trip

Figure 2–3: L30 BLOCK DIAGRAM

59P

21P&G

87L

Algorithm

Trip Output

Configurable

Logic

831732A3.CDR

GE Multilin


2

2.3 FUNCTIONALITY 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Peer Peer

Clock

Sampling

Control

Sample

Currents and

Voltages

Raw

Sample

Remove Decaying

Offset and

Charging Current

Time Stamp

Communication

Time

Stamps

Ping-pong

Algorithm

Clock

Control

Phase

Deviation

Phase Deviation

Estimate

Phase Angle

Uncertainties

Estimate Phase

Angle Correction from GPS signal

Frequency

Deviation

Compute

Frequency

Deviation

Compute Positive

Sequence

Currents

Channel

Control

Phaselets

Compute

Phaselets

Phasors

Phaselets

Align Phaselets

Compute Phasors and

Variance Parameters

Phaselets

Fault

Detector

Disturbance

Detector

Trip Output

Logic

Figure 2–4: MAIN SOFTWARE MODULES

831749A1.CDR


GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 SPECIFICATIONS

2.4SPECIFICATIONS

2.4.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

NOTE

The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic™ operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using

FlexLogic™ to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic™ equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.

LINE CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L)

Application: 2 or 3 terminal line, series compensated line, tapped line, with charging current compensation

Pickup current level: 0.20 to 4.00 pu in steps of 0.01

CT Tap (CT mismatch factor): 0.20 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01

Slope # 1:

Slope # 2:

1 to 50%

1 to 70%

Breakpoint between slopes: 0.0 to 20.0 pu in steps of 0.1

Zero-sequence current differential (87LG):

87LG pickup level:

87LG slope:

0.05 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01

1 to 50%

87LG pickup delay:

DTT:

0.00 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01

Direct Transfer Trip (1 and 3 pole) to remote L90

1.0 to 1.5 power cycles duration Operating Time:

Asymmetrical channel delay compensation using GPS: asymmetry up to 10 ms

In-zone transformer group compensation: 0 to 330° in steps of 30°

Inrush inhibit level:

Inrush inhibit mode:

1.0 to 40.0%f

0

in steps of 0.1

per-phase, 2-out-of-3, average

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC

Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup

Level accuracy:

0.1 to 2.0

× CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated

(whichever is greater)

> 2.0

× CT rating

±1.5% of reading

Overreach: <2%

Pickup delay:

Reset delay:

Operate time:

Timing accuracy:

0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

<16 ms at 3

× pickup at 60 Hz

(Phase/Ground IOC)

<20 ms at 3

× pickup at 60 Hz

(Neutral IOC)

Operate at 1.5

× pickup

±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC

Current: Phasor or RMS

Pickup level:

Dropout level:

Level accuracy: for 0.1 to 2.0

× CT: for > 2.0

× CT:

Curve shapes:

Curve multiplier:

Reset type:

Timing accuracy:

0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

97% to 98% of pickup

±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated


±1.5% of reading > 2.0

× CT rating

IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely

Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short

Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/

Extremely Inverse; I

2 t; FlexCurves™

(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve)

Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of

0.01

Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)

Operate at > 1.03

× actual pickup

±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle


NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC

Current: Phasor

Pickup level:

Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Curve shapes:

0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

97% to 98% of pickup

±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated

(whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating

±1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating

IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely

Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short

Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/

Extremely Inverse; I

2 t; FlexCurves™

(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve)

Curve multiplier (Time dial): 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

Reset type:

Timing accuracy:

Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) and Linear

Operate at > 1.03

× actual pickup

±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle


NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC

Current: Phasor

Pickup level:

Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Overreach:

Pickup delay:

Reset delay:

Operate time:

Timing accuracy:

0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

97 to 98% of pickup

0.1 to 2.0

× CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater);

> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.5% of reading

< 2%

0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

< 20 ms at 3

× pickup at 60 Hz

Operate at 1.5

× pickup


2

GE Multilin



2

PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Relay connection: 90

°

(quadrature)

Quadrature voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (V

BC

), phase

B (V

CA

), phase C (V

AB

); ACB phase seq.: phase A (V

CB

), phase B (V

AC

), phase C (V

BA

)

Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu

Characteristic angle: 0 to 359

°

in steps of 1

Angle accuracy: ±2°

Operation time (FlexLogic™ operands):

Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):

<

12 ms, typically

Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):

<

8 ms, typically

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse

Polarizing:

Polarizing voltage:

Polarizing current:

Operating current:

Level sensing:

Restraint, K:

Characteristic angle:

Limit angle:

Angle accuracy:

Offset impedance:

Pickup level:

Dropout level:

Operation time:

Voltage, Current, Dual

V_0 or VX

IG

I_0

3

× (|I_0| – K × |I_1|), IG

0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001

–90 to 90° in steps of 1

40 to 90° in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse

±2°

0.00 to 250.00

Ω in steps of 0.01

0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01

97 to 98%

< 16 ms at 3

× pickup at 60 Hz

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

Voltage: Phasor only

Pickup level:

Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Curve shapes:

Curve multiplier:

Timing accuracy:

0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

102 to 103% of pickup

±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V

GE IAV Inverse;

Definite Time (0.1s base curve)

Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of

0.01

Operate at < 0.90

× pickup

±3.5% of operate time or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)

AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE


Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Curve shapes:

Curve multiplier:

Timing accuracy:

102 to 103% of pickup


GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time

Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

±3% of operate time or ±4 ms



PHASE OVERVOLTAGE

Voltage: Phasor only

Pickup level:

Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Pickup delay:

Operate time:

Timing accuracy:

0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

97 to 98% of pickup


0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s

< 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz


AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE


Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Pickup delay:

Reset delay:

Timing accuracy:

Operate time:

97 to 98% of pickup


0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01


±3% of operate time or ±4 ms


< 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE


Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Pickup delay:

Reset delay:

Time accuracy:

Operate time:

97 to 98% of pickup




±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater

< 30 ms at 1.10

× pickup at 60 Hz

UNDERFREQUENCY

Minimum signal: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

Pickup level:

Dropout level:

Level accuracy:

Time delay:

20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

pickup + 0.03 Hz

±0.001 Hz

0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

Timer accuracy:

Operate time:

±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change

Typical times are average operate times including variables such as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may vary by

±0.5 cycles.

BREAKER FAILURE

Mode: 1-pole, 3-pole

Current supervision:

Current supv. pickup: phase, neutral current

0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Current supv. dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup

Current supv. accuracy:

0.1 to 2.0

× CT rating: ±0.75% of reading or ±2% of rated

(whichever is greater) above 2

× CT rating:

±2.5% of reading


GE Multilin


BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

Principle: accumulates breaker duty (I

2 t) and measures fault duration

Initiation: programmable per phase from any Flex-

Logic™ operand

Compensation for auxiliary relays: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

Alarm threshold: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1

Fault duration accuracy: 0.25 of a power cycle

Availability: 1 per CT bank with a minimum of 2

SYNCHROCHECK

Max voltage difference: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1

Max angle difference: 0 to 100

°

in steps of 1

Max freq. difference: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01

Dead source function: None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or

DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2

(L = Live, D = Dead)

AUTORECLOSURE

Single breaker applications, 3-pole tripping schemes

Up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout

Independent dead time setting before each shot

Possibility of changing protection settings after each shot with

FlexLogic™

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

Thermal overload curves: IEC 255-8 curve

Base current:

Overload (k) factor:

Trip time constant:

Reset time constant:



0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1

0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1

Minimum reset time: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1

Timing accuracy (cold curve): ±100 ms or 2%, whichever is greater

Timing accuracy (hot curve): ±500 ms or 2%, whichever is greater for I

p

< 0.9 × k × I

b

and I / (k × I

b

) > 1.1

TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC™)

Number of elements: 6

Number of inputs:

Operate time:

Time accuracy:

16

<2 ms at 60 Hz

±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater

2.4.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS

2

FLEXLOGIC™

Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable)

Lines of code:

Internal variables:

512

64

Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),

NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers

Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual input

Number of timers:

Pickup delay:

Dropout delay:

32

0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1

0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1

FLEXCURVES™

Number:

Reset points:

Operate points:

Time delay:

FLEX STATES

Number:

Programmability:

4 (A through D)

40 (0 through 1 of pickup)

80 (1 through 20 of pickup)

0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses any logical variable, contact, or virtual input

FLEXELEMENTS™

Number of elements:

Operating signal:

8 any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode

Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value

Operating mode: level, delta

Comparator direction: over, under

Pickup Level: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Hysteresis:

Delta dt:

0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1

20 ms to 60 days

Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

Type: set-dominant or reset-dominant

Number:

Output:

Execution sequence:

16 (individually programmed) stored in non-volatile memory as input prior to protection, control, and

FlexLogic™

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs

Number: 48 plus trip and alarm

Programmability:

Reset mode: from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input self-reset or latched

GE Multilin


2.4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

LED TEST

Initiation:

Number of tests:

Duration of full test:

Test sequence 1:

Test sequence 2:

Test sequence 3: from any digital input or user-programmable condition

3, interruptible at any time approximately 3 minutes all LEDs on all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

Number of displays:

Lines of display:

16

2

× 20 alphanumeric characters

Parameters: up to 5, any Modbus register addresses

Invoking and scrolling: keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

Number of pushbuttons: 7

Operation: drive FlexLogic™ operands

OSCILLOGRAPHY

Maximum records:

Sampling rate:

Triggers:

Data:

Data storage:

64

64 samples per power cycle any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; FlexLogic™ equation

AC input channels; element state; digital input state; digital output state in non-volatile memory

EVENT RECORDER

Capacity:

Time-tag:

Triggers:

Data storage:

1024 events to 1 microsecond any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; self-test events in non-volatile memory

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)

Number of pushbuttons: 12 (standard faceplate);

16 (enhanced faceplate)

Mode:

Display message:

Drop-out timer:

Autoreset timer:

Hold timer: self-reset, latched

2 lines of 20 characters each

0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05

0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1


SELECTOR SWITCH


Upper position limit:

Selecting mode:

Time-out timer:

Control inputs:

Power-up mode:

1 to 7 in steps of 1 time-out or acknowledge


step-up and 3-bit restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/ restore mode

DIGITAL ELEMENTS


Operating signal:

Pickup delay:

Dropout delay:

Timing accuracy: any FlexLogic™ operand

0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater

2.4.3 MONITORING

DATA LOGGER

Number of channels:

Parameters:

Sampling rate:

Trigger:

Mode:

Storage capacity:

1 to 16 any available analog actual value

15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 any FlexLogic™ operand continuous or triggered

(NN is dependent on memory)

1-second rate:

01 channel for NN days

16 channels for NN days

↓

60-minute rate:

01 channel for NN days

16 channels for NN days


GE Multilin


FAULT LOCATOR

Number of independent fault locators: 1 per CT bank

Method:

Voltage source: single-ended wye-connected VTs, delta-connected

VTs and neutral voltage, delta-connected

VTs and zero-sequence current (approximation)

Maximum accuracy if: fault resistance is zero or fault currents from all line terminals are in phase

Relay accuracy:

Worst-case accuracy:

±1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)

VT

%error

+

CT

%error

+

Z

Line%error

+

METHOD

%error

+ user data user data user data see chapter 8

RELAY ACCURACY

%error

+ (1.5%)

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

Output format: per IEEE C37.118 standard

Number of channels:

TVE (total vector error) <1%

Triggering: frequency, voltage, current, power, rate of change of frequency, user-defined

Reporting rate:

14 synchrophasors, 8 analogs, 16 digitals

Number of clients:

1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second

One over TCP/IP port, two over UDP/IP ports

AC ranges: As indicated in appropriate specifications sections

Network reporting format: 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers

Network reporting style: rectangular (real and imaginary) or polar

(magnitude and angle) coordinates

Post-filtering:

Calibration: none, 3-point, 5-point, 7-point

±5°

2.4.4 METERING

2

RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND

Accuracy at

0.1 to 2.0

× CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated

> 2.0 × CT rating:


±1.0% of reading

RMS VOLTAGE

Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V

REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at

–0.8

< PF ≤ –1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0

REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at –0.2

≤ PF ≤ 0.2

APPARENT POWER (VA)

Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading

FREQUENCY

Accuracy at

V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu:

I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu:

I > 0.25 pu:

±0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement)

±0.05 Hz

±0.001 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)

2.4.5 INPUTS

AC CURRENT

CT rated primary:

CT rated secondary:

Nominal frequency:

Relay burden:

Current withstand:

1 to 50000 A

1 A or 5 A by connection

20 to 65 Hz

< 0.2 VA at rated secondary

Conversion range:

Standard CT: 0.02 to 46

× CT rating RMS symmetrical

Sensitive Ground CT module:

0.002 to 4.6

× CT rating RMS symmetrical

20 ms at 250 times rated

1 sec. at 100 times rated continuous at 3 times rated

Short circuit rating: 150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250

V maximum (primary current to external

CT)

AC VOLTAGE

VT rated secondary:

VT ratio:

Nominal frequency:

Relay burden:

Conversion range:

Voltage withstand:

50.0 to 240.0 V

1.00 to 24000.00

20 to 65 Hz; the nominal system frequency should be chosen as 50 Hz or

60 Hz only.

< 0.25 VA at 120 V

1 to 275 V continuous at 260 V to neutral

1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral

CONTACT INPUTS

Dry contacts:

Wet contacts:

1000

Ω maximum

300 V DC maximum

Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V

Tolerance: ±10%

Contacts per common return: 4

Recognition time:

Debounce time:

< 1 ms

0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)

GE Multilin



2

CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Dry contacts: 1000

Ω maximum

Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum

Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V

Tolerance: ±10%

Contacts per common return: 2

Recognition time:

Debounce time:

< 1 ms

0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)

Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA

Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms

DCMA INPUTS

Current input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,

Input impedance:

0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)

379

Ω ±10%

Conversion range:

Accuracy:

Type:

–1 to + 20 mA DC

±0.2% of full scale

Passive

RTD INPUTS

Types (3-wire):

Sensing current:

Range:

Accuracy:

Isolation:

100

Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10

Ω Copper

5 mA

–50 to +250°C

±2°C

36 V pk-pk

IRIG-B INPUT

Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk

DC shift:

Input impedance:

Isolation:

TTL

22 k

Ω

2 kV

REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs

Number of remote devices: 16

Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On

Number of remote DPS inputs: 5

LOW RANGE

Nominal DC voltage:

Minimum DC voltage:

24 to 48 V

20 V

Maximum DC voltage: 60 V

Voltage loss hold-up: 20 ms duration at nominal

NOTE: Low range is DC only.

HIGH RANGE

Nominal DC voltage:

Minimum DC voltage:

125 to 250 V

88 V

Maximum DC voltage: 300 V

Nominal AC voltage:

Minimum AC voltage:

100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz

88 V at 25 to 100 Hz

Maximum AC voltage: 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz

Voltage loss hold-up: 200 ms duration at nominal

2.4.6 POWER SUPPLY

ALL RANGES

Volt withstand:

Power consumption:

2

× Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms typical = 15 to 20 W/VA maximum = 50 W/VA contact factory for exact order code consumption

INTERNAL FUSE

RATINGS

Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V

High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V

INTERRUPTING CAPACITY

AC:

DC:

100 000 A RMS symmetrical

10 000 A

FORM-A RELAY

Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90

Carry continuous: 6 A

Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

VOLTAGE CURRENT

24 V

48 V

125 V

250 V

1 A

0.5 A

0.3 A

0.2 A

Operate time:

Contact material:

< 4 ms silver alloy

2.4.7 OUTPUTS

LATCHING RELAY



Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max.

Operate time:

Contact material:

< 4 ms silver alloy

Control:

Control mode: separate operate and reset inputs operate-dominant or reset-dominant

FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC

Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA

FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR

Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA


GE Multilin


FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY



Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

VOLTAGE CURRENT

24 V

48 V

125 V

250 V

1 A

0.5 A

0.3 A

0.2 A

Operate time:

Contact material:

< 8 ms silver alloy

FAST FORM-C RELAY

Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)

Minimum load impedance:

INPUT

VOLTAGE

250 V DC

120 V DC

48 V DC

24 V DC

IMPEDANCE

2 W RESISTOR

20 K

Ω

5 K

Ω

2 K

Ω

2 K

Ω

1 W RESISTOR

50 K

2 K

2 K

2 K

Ω

Ω

Ω

Ω

Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.

Operate time: < 0.6 ms

Internal Limiting Resistor: 100

Ω, 2 W

SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY

Operate and release time: <100

μs

Maximum voltage: 265 V DC

Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C

Make and carry: for 0.2 s: for 0.03 s

Breaking capacity:

30 A as per ANSI C37.90

300 A

UL508 Utility application

(autoreclose scheme)

Industrial application

Operations/ interval

5000 ops /

1 s-On, 9 s-Off

5 ops /

0.2 s-On,

0.2 s-Off within 1 minute

10000 ops /

0.2 s-On,

30 s-Off

Break capability

(0 to 250 V

DC)

1000 ops /

0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off

3.2 A

L/R = 10 ms

1.6 A

L/R = 20 ms

0.8 A

L/R = 40 ms

10 A

L/R = 40 ms

10 A

L/R = 40 ms


IRIG-B OUTPUT

Amplitude:

Maximum load:

Time delay:

Isolation:

10 V peak-peak RS485 level

100 ohms

1 ms for AM input

40

μs for DC-shift input

2 kV

CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT

(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)

Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC

Isolation: ±300 Vpk

REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Standard output points: 32

User output points: 32

DCMA OUTPUTS

Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Max. load resistance: 12 k

Ω for –1 to 1 mA range

12 k

Ω for 0 to 1 mA range

600

Ω for 4 to 20 mA range

Accuracy: ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range

±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range

±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range

99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms

Isolation: 1.5 kV

Driving signal: any FlexAnalog quantity

Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of

0.001

ETHERNET SWITCH (HIGH VOLTAGE, TYPE 2S)

Nominal DC voltage: 110 to 240 V DC

Minimum DC voltage: 88 V DC

Maximum DC voltage: 300 V DC

Input Current:

Nominal AC voltage:

0.9 A DC maximum

100 to 240 V AC, 0.26 to 0.16 A/26 to 39

VA at 50/60 Hz

Minimum AC voltage: 85 V AC, 0.31 A/22 VA at 50/60 Hz

Maximum AC voltage: 265 V AC, 0.16 A/42 VA at 50/60 Hz

Internal fuse: 3 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO

BLO;

Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:

SCD-A 003

ETHERNET SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE, TYPE 2T)

Nominal voltage: 48 V DC, 0.31 A/15 W

Minimum voltage:

Maximum voltage:

Internal fuse:

30 V DC, 0.43 A/16 W

60 V DC

5 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO

BLO;

Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:

SCD-A 005

2

GE Multilin



2

RS232

Front port:

RS485

1 or 2 rear ports:

19.2 kbps, Modbus

®

RTU

Typical distance:

Isolation:

ETHERNET (FIBER)

Up to 115 kbps, Modbus

®

RTU, isolated together at 36 Vpk

1200 m

2 kV

PARAMETER

Wavelength

Connector

Transmit power

Receiver sensitivity

Power budget

Maximum input power

Typical distance

Duplex

Redundancy

10MB MULTI-

MODE

820 nm

ST

–20 dBm

–30 dBm

10 dB

–7.6 dBm

FIBER TYPE

100MB MULTI-

MODE

100MB SINGLE-

MODE

1310 nm

ST

–20 dBm

–30 dBm

10 dB

–14 dBm

1310 nm

SC

–15 dBm

–30 dBm

15 dB

–7 dBm

1.65 km full/half yes

2 km full/half yes

15 km full/half yes

The UR-2S and UR-2T only support 100 Mb multimode

ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)

Modes: 10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect)

Connector: RJ45

SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)


2.4.8 COMMUNICATIONS

ETHERNET SWITCH FIBER OPTIC PORTS

Maximum fiber segment length calculation:

The maximum fiber segment length between two adjacent switches or between a switch and a device is calculated as follows. First, calculate the optical power budget (OPB) of each device using the manufacturer’s data sheets.

OPB

=

P

T MIN

)

–

P

R MIN

) where OPB = optical power budget, P

T

= transmitter output power, and P

R

= receiver sensitivity.

The worst case optical power budget (OPB

WORST

) is then calculated by taking the lower of the two calculated power budgets, subtracting 1 dB for LED aging, and then subtracting the total insertion loss. The total insertion loss is calculated by multiplying the number of connectors in each single fiber path by 0.5 dB. For example, with a single fiber cable between the two devices, there will be a minimum of two connections in either transmit or receive fiber paths for a total insertion loss of 1db for either direction:

Total insertion loss = number of connectors

×

0.5 dB

= 2

×

0.5 dB = 1.0 dB

The worst-case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S modules using a single fiber cable is:

OPB

WORST

=

OPB

–

1 dB (LED aging)

– total insertion loss

10dB

–

1dB

–

1dB

=

8dB

To calculate the maximum fiber length, divide the worst-case optical power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance specified in the manufacturer data sheets. For example, typical attenuation for 62.5/125

μm glass fiber optic cable is approximately 2.8 dB per km. In our example, this would result in the following maximum fiber length:

Maximum fiber length

=

OPB (in dB)

------------------------------------------------------cable loss (in dB/km)

=

2.8 dB/km

=

2.8km

The customer must use the attenuation specified within the manufacturer data sheets for accurate calculation of the maximum fiber length.

ETHERNET SWITCH 10/100BASE-T PORTS

Connector type: RJ45

MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS

Unshielded twisted pair: 100 m (328 ft.)

Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)

MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS

10Base-T (CAT 3, 4, 5 UTP): 100 m (328 ft.)

100Base-TX (CAT 5 UTP):100 m (328 ft.)

Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)


GE Multilin


2.4.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE

RS422

G.703

TYPICAL DISTANCE

1200 m

100 m

NOTE

RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by the user.

LINK POWER BUDGET

EMITTER,

FIBER TYPE

820 nm LED,

Multimode

1300 nm LED,

Multimode

1300 nm ELED,

Singlemode

1300 nm Laser,

Singlemode

1550 nm Laser,

Singlemode

TRANSMIT

POWER

–20 dBm

RECEIVED

SENSITIVITY

–30 dBm

–21 dBm

–23 dBm

–1 dBm

+5 dBm

–30 dBm

–32 dBm

–30 dBm

–30 dBm

POWER

BUDGET

10 dB

9 dB

9 dB

29 dB

35 dB

NOTE

NOTE

These power budgets are calculated from the manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity.

The power budgets for the 1300nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values will deviate based on component tolerance. On average, the output power will decrease as the temperature is increased by a factor 1dB / 5°C.

MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE

820 nm LED, Multimode

1300 nm LED, Multimode

1300 nm ELED, Singlemode

1300 nm Laser, Singlemode

1550 nm Laser, Singlemode

MAX. OPTICAL

INPUT POWER

–7.6 dBm

–11 dBm

–14 dBm

–14 dBm

–14 dBm

TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE CABLE

TYPE

820 nm LED, multimode

62.5/125

μm

1300 nm LED, multimode

62.5/125

μm

1300 nm ELED, single mode

9/125

μm

1300 nm Laser, single mode

9/125

μm

1550 nm Laser, single-mode

9/125

μm

CONNECTOR

TYPE

ST

TYPICAL

DISTANCE

1.65 km

ST

ST

ST

ST

3.8 km

11.4 km

64 km

105 km

NOTE

Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses will vary from one installation to another, the distance covered by your system may vary.

CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)

ST connector 2 dB

FIBER LOSSES

820 nm multimode

1300 nm multimode

3 dB/km

1 dB/km

1300 nm singlemode 0.35 dB/km

1550 nm singlemode 0.25 dB/km

Splice losses: One splice every 2 km, at 0.05 dB loss per splice.

SYSTEM MARGIN

3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses.

Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES

Storage temperature: –40 to 85°C

Operating temperature: –40 to 60°C; the LCD contrast may be impaired at temperatures less than –

20°C

HUMIDITY

Humidity: operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at

55°C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1,

6days).

2.4.10 ENVIRONMENTAL

OTHER

Altitude:

Pollution degree:

Overvoltage category: II

2000 m (maximum)

II

Ingress protection: IP20 front, IP10 back

2

GE Multilin



2.4.11 TYPE TESTS

2

L30 TYPE TESTS

TEST

Dielectric voltage withstand

Impulse voltage withstand

Damped oscillatory

Electrostatic discharge

RF immunity

Fast transient disturbance

Surge immunity

Conducted RF immunity

Power frequency immunity

Voltage interruption and ripple DC

Radiated and conducted emissions

Sinusoidal vibration

Shock and bump

Seismic

Power magnetic immunity

Pulse magnetic immunity

Damped magnetic immunity

Voltage dip and interruption

Damped oscillatory

REFERENCE STANDARD

EN60255-5

EN60255-5

IEC61000-4-18 / IEC60255-22-1

EN61000-4-2 / IEC60255-22-2

EN61000-4-3 / IEC60255-22-3

EN61000-4-4 / IEC60255-22-4

EN61000-4-5 / IEC60255-22-5

EN61000-4-6 / IEC60255-22-6

EN61000-4-7 / IEC60255-22-7

IEC60255-11

CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25

IEC60255-21-1

IEC60255-21-2

IEC60255-21-3

IEC61000-4-8

IEC61000-4-9

IEC61000-4-10

IEC61000-4-11

IEC61000-4-12

Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz IEC61000-4-16

Voltage ripple IEC61000-4-17

Ingress protection IEC60529

Cold

Hot

Humidity

IEC60068-2-1

IEC60068-2-2

IEC60068-2-30

Damped oscillatory

RF immunity

Safety

Safety

Safety

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

UL508

UL C22.2-14

UL1053

TEST LEVEL

2.2 kV

5 kV

2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM

Level 3

Level 3

Class A and B

Level 3 and 4

Level 3

Class A and B

12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts

Class A

Class 1

Class 1

Class 1

Level 5

Level 4

Level 4

0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts

2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM

Level 4

15% ripple

IP40 front, IP10 back

–40°C for 16 hours

85°C for 16 hours

6 days, variant 1

2.5 kV, 1 MHz

20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz e83849 NKCR e83849 NKCR7 e83849 NKCR

2.4.12 PRODUCTION TESTS

THERMAL

Products go through an environmental test based upon an

Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.


GE Multilin


2.4.13 APPROVALS

APPROVALS

COMPLIANCE

CE compliance

North America

MOUNTING

---

---

---

APPLICABLE

COUNCIL DIRECTIVE

Low voltage directive

EMC directive

ACCORDING TO

EN60255-5

EN60255-26 / EN50263

EN61000-6-5

UL508

UL1053

C22.2 No. 14

Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.

2.4.14 MAINTENANCE

CLEANING

Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.

NOTE

Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.

2

GE Multilin


2



GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION

3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT a) HORIZONTAL UNITS

The L30 Line Current Differential System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate.

The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.

The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port.

The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment.

The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.

3

11.016”

[279,81 mm]

9.687”

[246,05 mm]

6.995”

[177,67 mm]

17.56”

[446,02 mm]

19.040”

[483,62 mm]

Figure 3–1: L30 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)

7.460”

[189,48 mm]

6.960”

[176,78 mm]

842807A1.CDR

GE Multilin


3

3.1 DESCRIPTION

18.370”

[466,60 mm]

CUT-OUT

0.280”

[7,11 mm]

Typ. x 4

4.000”

[101,60 mm]

17.750”

[450,85 mm]

842808A1.CDR

Figure 3–2: L30 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)

3 HARDWARE

Figure 3–3: L30 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL) b) VERTICAL UNITS

The L30 Line Current Differential System is available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate.

The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.

The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port.

The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment.


GE Multilin


The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.

7.482”

1.329”

11.015”

13.560”

3

15.000” 14.025”

4.000”

9.780”

Figure 3–4: L30 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)

843809A1.CDR

GE Multilin


3

3.1 DESCRIPTION

e

UR SERIES

3 HARDWARE

Figure 3–5: L30 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

For details on side mounting L30 devices with the enhanced front panel, refer to the following documents available online from the GE Multilin website.

• GEK-113180: UR-series UR-V side-mounting front panel assembly instructions.

• GEK-113181: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertical UR-series device.

• GEK-113182: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertically-mounted horizontal UR-series device.

For details on side mounting L30 devices with the standard front panel, refer to the figures below.


GE Multilin


3

GE Multilin

Figure 3–6: L30 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION (STANDARD PANEL)


3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE

3

Figure 3–7: L30 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION

WARNING

Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation!

WARNING

Proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!

The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots.

The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left, once the thumb screw has been removed, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and allows easy access to all modules in the L30.


GE Multilin


842812A1.CDR

Figure 3–8: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

The standard faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.

3

Figure 3–9: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

To properly remove a module, the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits.

To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/ inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously.

When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

All CPU modules except the 9E are equipped with 10/100Base-T or 100Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.

NOTE

GE Multilin


3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE

3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT

3

X W V

Tx1

Rx1

Tx1

Tx2

Rx2

Tx2

U c

L30

Line Differential Relay

GE Multilin

T

Technical Support:

Tel: (905) 294-6222

Fax: (905) 201-2098

S R

http://www.GEmultilin.com

P N b a c b a c

M

RATINGS:

Control Power:

Contact Inputs:

Contact Outputs:

88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA

300V DC Max 10mA

Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A

360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break

4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W

®

®

Made in

Canada

L K J

Model:

Mods:

Wiring Diagram:

Inst. Manual:

Serial Number:

Firmware:

Mfg. Date:

L30D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A

000

831817

GEK-113496

MAZB98000029

D

2008/01/05

H

- M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -

G F b a c b a c b a

3

4

1 b

2 a

1

2

3

4

D

IN

OUT

Tx1

Rx1

CH1

Tx

Rx

CH2

Tx2

Rx2

B

3

4

1 b

2

7

8

5

6 a

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

Optional

Ethernet switch

Optional direct input/output module

Optional contact input/ output module

Optional contact input/output module

Optional

CT/VT or contact input/output module

Optional contact input/output module

CT/VT module

Figure 3–10: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!

CPU module

(Ethernet not available when ordered with

Ethernet switch)

Power supply module

831816A1.CDR

WARNING

The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.

3-8

Figure 3–11: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2WIRING

3.2 WIRING

3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING

A B C

TYPICAL CONFIGURATION

THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE

(5 Amp)

52

TRIPPING DIRECTION

N

OPTIONAL

This diagram is based on the following order code:

L90-H00-HCL-F8F-H6G-L6D-N6K-S6C-U6H-W7A

This diagram provides an example of how the device is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on wiring based on various configurations.

TO

REMOTE

L90

DC

AC or DC

H8b

U7a

U7c

U8a

U8c

U7b

U8b

H7a

H7c

H8a

H8c

H7b

H5a

H5c

H6a

H6c

H5b

L7a

L7c

L8a

L8c

L7b

L8b

L5a

L5c

L6a

L6c

L5b

L1a

L1c

L2a

L2c

L1b

L3a

L3c

L4a

L4c

L3b

Tx2 Rx2

B1b

B1a

B2b

B3a

B3b

B5b

B6b

B6a

B8a

B8b

HI

LO

Tx1 Rx1

CONTACT INPUT L1a

CONTACT INPUT L1c

CONTACT INPUT L2a

CONTACT INPUT L2c

COMMON L1b

CONTACT INPUT L3a

CONTACT INPUT L3c

CONTACT INPUT L4a

CONTACT INPUT L4c

COMMON L3b

CONTACT INPUT L5a

CONTACT INPUT L5c

CONTACT INPUT L6a

CONTACT INPUT L6c

COMMON L5b

CONTACT INPUT L7a

CONTACT INPUT L7c

CONTACT INPUT L8a

CONTACT INPUT L8c

COMMON L7b

SURGE

FIBER

CHANNEL 1

FIBER

CHANNEL 2

CRITICAL

FAILURE

48 V DC

OUTPUT

CONTROL

POWER

SURGE

FILTER

CURRENT INPUTS

8F

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUT H5a

CONTACT INPUT H5c

CONTACT INPUT H6a

CONTACT INPUT H6c

COMMON H5b

CONTACT INPUT H7a

CONTACT INPUT H7c

CONTACT INPUT H8a

CONTACT INPUT H8c

COMMON H7b

SURGE

CONTACT INPUT U7a

CONTACT INPUT U7c

CONTACT INPUT U8a

CONTACT INPUT U8c

COMMON U7b

SURGE

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

GE Consumer & Industrial

Multilin

L30

LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY

VOLTAGE INPUTS

6G

6H

H1

V

H2

V

H3

V

H4

V

U1

V

I

I

U2

V

I

U3

V

I

U4

V

I

U5

V

I

U6

V

I

I

I

I

N1

DB-9

RS-232

(front)

S2

S3

N2

N3

N4

N5

N6

N7

N8

S1

S4

S5

CONTACTS SHOWN

WITH NO

CONTROL POWER

S6

S7

S8

S4b

S4c

S5a

S5b

S5c

S6a

S6b

S6c

S7a

S7b

S7c

S8a

S8b

S8c

S1a

S1b

S1c

S2a

S2b

S2c

S3a

S3b

S3c

S4a

U3c

U4a

U4b

U4c

U5a

U5b

U5c

U6a

U6b

U6c

U1a

U1b

U1c

U2a

U2b

U2c

U3a

U3b

H1a

H1b

H1c

H2a

H2b

H2c

H3a

H3b

H3c

H4a

H4b

H4c

N4b

N4c

N5a

N5b

N5c

N6a

N6b

N6c

N7a

N7b

N7c

N8a

N8b

N8c

N1a

N1b

N1c

N2a

N2b

N2c

N3a

N3b

N3c

N4a

TC

2

TC

1

TXD

RXD

SGND

6

7

8

9

UR

1

2

3

4

5

9 PIN

CONNECTOR

COMPUTER

1 8

2

3

4

5

3

2

20

7

RXD

TXD

SGND

6

7

6

4

8

9

5

22

25 PIN

CONNECTOR

PERSONAL

COMPUTER

3

GE Multilin

No. 10AWG minimum

MODULES MUST BE

GROUNDED IF

TERMINAL IS

PROVIDED

831817A1.CDR

GROUND BUS

X

7

W

COM

V U

6

Inputs/ outputs

*

T S

6

Inputs/ outputs

*

R P

MODULE ARRANGEMENT

N M L K J H

6

Inputs/ outputs

*

6

Inputs/ outputs

*

6

Inputs/ outputs

(Rear view)

G

8

F

CT/VT

* Optional

D

9

CPU

B

1

Power supply

Figure 3–12: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM


3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE

3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH

3

The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table:

Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE

MODULE

TYPE

4

5

2

3

6

1

1

1

7

8

9

MODULE FUNCTION

Power supply

Power supply

Power supply

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Analog inputs/outputs

Digital inputs/outputs

G.703

RS422

CT/VT

CPU

TERMINALS

FROM

High (+); Low (+); (–)

48 V DC (+) and (–)

Relay terminals

N/A

N/A

N/A

All except 8b

All

All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a

All except 6a, 7b, 8a

All

All

TO

Chassis

Chassis

Chassis

N/A

N/A

N/A

Chassis

Chassis

Chassis

Chassis

Chassis

Chassis

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH

(AC)

2000 V AC for 1 minute



N/A

N/A

N/A

< 50 V DC



< 50 V DC



Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can

be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute.

3.2.3 CONTROL POWER

CAUTION

CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY

RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY

OCCUR!

NOTE

The L30 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.

The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical specifica-

tions section of chapter 2 for additional details):

• Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal.

• High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.

The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.

The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the

Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see the Self-test errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.

For high reliability systems, the L30 has a redundant option in which two L30 power supplies are placed in parallel on the bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply.


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:

LED INDICATION

CONTINUOUS ON

ON / OFF CYCLING

OFF

POWER SUPPLY

OK

Failure

Failure

AC or DC

NOTE:

14 gauge stranded wire with suitable disconnect devices is recommended.

Heavy copper conductor or braided wire

AC or DC

3.2 WIRING

3

Switchgear ground bus

B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b

FILTER SURGE

–

+

LOW

CONTROL

POWER

+

HIGH

UR-series protection system

+

—

OPTIONAL

ETHERNET SWITCH

827759AA.CDR

Figure 3–13: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION

3.2.4 CT AND VT MODULES

A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6 are intended for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.

Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).

CAUTION

Verify that the connection made to the relay nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.

CT/VT modules may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to

50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.

The above modules are available with enhanced diagnostics. These modules can automatically detect CT/VT hardware failure and take the relay out of service.

CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram.

The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown below. Twisted-pair cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.

GE Multilin


3.2 WIRING

UNSHIELDED CABLE

Source

A B C N

Ground connection to neutral must be on the source side

G

Ground outside CT

3 HARDWARE

SHIELDED CABLE

A

Source

B C

Stress cone shields

3

LOAD

LOAD

Figure 3–14: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION

996630A5

The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features.

Substitute the tilde “~” symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.

NOTE

To ground; must be on load side

Current inputs

8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)

Voltage inputs

Current inputs

8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)

Figure 3–15: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

842766A3.CDR


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING

3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES

The L30 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. This module is designed to interface with the GE Multilin

HardFiber system, allowing bi-directional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber merging units, known as Bricks. The HardFiber system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions, FlexLogic™, metering, and communications.

The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits.

• Drastically reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the L30 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations.

• Integrates seamlessly with existing L30 applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the traditional CT/VT modules.

• Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging.

For additional details on the HardFiber system, refer to GE publication GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.

3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

3

Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered.

The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.

The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The L30 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used.

The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D module).

The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot position, row number, and column position.

Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On =

1” when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current exceeds about

80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow.

Block diagrams are shown below for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact outputs.

GE Multilin



3 a) Voltage with optional

current monitoring

~#a

I

V

~#b

~#c

If Idc 1mA, otherwise

Cont Op 1

Cont Op 1

= “VOn”

= “VOff”

Load

+

Voltage monitoring only

V

b) Current with optional

voltage monitoring

~#a

I ~#b

~#c

If Idc 80mA,

Cont Op 1

= “IOn” otherwise

Cont Op 1

= “IOff”

Load

+

Current monitoring only

V

I

~#a

~#b

If Idc 80mA,

Cont Op 1

= “IOn”


Cont Op 1

= “VOn”

Cont Op 1

= “VOff”

Load

V

~#c

Both voltage and current monitoring

+

I

~#a

~#b

If Idc 80mA,

Cont Op 1

= “IOn” otherwise

Cont Op 1

= “IOff”


Cont Op 1

= “VOn”

Cont Op 1 = “VOff”

Load

~#c

Both voltage and current monitoring

(external jumper a-b is required)

+

~#a

~#b

Load

~#c

+

c) No monitoring

827862A3.CDR

Figure 3–16: FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE CONTACT OUTPUTS WITH VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MONITORING

The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (

CONT OP # VON

,

CONT OP # VOFF

, and

CONT OP # ION

) which can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control command.

Refer to the Digital elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.

WARNING

Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels!

NOTE

USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS

For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance.

The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-

A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500

Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number sign “#” appears, substitute the contact number

NOTE

NOTE

When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the Flex-

Logic™ operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).


GE Multilin


Table 3–2: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-A

Form-C

Form-C

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~6B MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

~5

~6

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-A

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~6C MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1

~2

Form-C

Form-C

~3

~4

~5

~6

~7

~8

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

~6D MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1a, ~1c

~2a, ~2c

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~3a, ~3c

~4a, ~4c

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~6E MODULE

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-C

~2

~3

~4

~5a, ~5c

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

2 Inputs

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~6F MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1 Fast Form-C

~2

~3

~4

~5

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

~6

~7

~8

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

~6K MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

~5

~6

~7

~8

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

Fast Form-C

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~2

~3

~4

~6L MODULE

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-A

Form-A

Form-C

Form-C

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~6G MODULE

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-A

~2

~3

~4

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~6M MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

Form-A

Form-A

Form-C

Form-C

~5

~6

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-C

Form-C

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~6H MODULE

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-A

~2

~3

~4

~5

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

~6

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~6N MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~6P MODULE

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-A

~2

~3

~4

~5

~6

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~6R MODULE

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-A

~2

~3

~4

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-C

Form-C

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~6S MODULE

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-A

~2

~3

~4

~5

~6

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

Form-C

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

~1

~6T MODULE

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

Form-A

~2

~3

~4

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

3

GE Multilin


3.2 WIRING

~6U MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

~5

~6

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

Form-A

Form-A

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

3

~4B MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

~5

Not Used

Solid-State

Not Used

Solid-State

Not Used

~6

~7

~8

Solid-State

Not Used

Solid-State

~6V MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT OR

INPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

Form-A

Form-A

Form-C

2 Outputs

~5a, ~5c

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~67 MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

~5

~6

~7

~8

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

Form-A

~4C MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

~5

Not Used

Solid-State

Not Used

Solid-State

Not Used

~6

~7

~8

Solid-State

Not Used

Solid-State

~4D MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1a, ~1c

~2a, ~2c

~3a, ~3c

~4a, ~4c

~5a, ~5c

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

~6a, ~6c

~7a, ~7c

~8a, ~8c

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

2 Inputs

3 HARDWARE

~4A MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

Not Used

Solid-State

Not Used

Solid-State

~5

~6

~7

~8

Not Used

Solid-State

Not Used

Solid-State

~4L MODULE

TERMINAL

ASSIGNMENT

OUTPUT

~1

~2

~3

~4

~5

2 Outputs

2 Outputs

2 Outputs

2 Outputs

2 Outputs

~6

~7

~8

2 Outputs

2 Outputs

Not Used


GE Multilin


3

842762A2.CDR

GE Multilin

Figure 3–17: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)



3

~ 1a

~ 1b

~ 1c

~ 2a

~ 2b

~ 2c

~ 3a

~ 3b

~ 3c

~ 4a

~

4b

~ 4c

~ 5a

~ 5b

~ 5c

~ 6a

~ 6b

~ 6c

~

7a

~ 7b

~ 7c

~

8a

~ 8b

~ 8c

~ 1

~ 2

~

3

~

4

~ 5

~ 6

~ 7

~ 8

~

7a

~ 7c

~ 8a

~

8c

~ 7b

~ 5a

~ 5c

~ 6a

~ 6c

~ 5b

~ 8b SURGE

DIGITAL I/O 6L

~ 1

~ 2

~

3

~

4

V

I

V

I

~ 1a

~

~

1b

1c

~ 2a

~

~

2b

2c

~

~

~ 3a

3b

3c

~

~

~ 4a

4b

4c

~ 7a

~ 7c

~ 8a

~ 8c

~ 7b

~ 8b SURGE

DIGITAL I/O 6M

~ 1

~ 2

~

3

~

4

~ 5

~ 6

V

I

V

I

~ 1a

~

~

1b

1c

~ 2a

~

~

2b

2c

~

~

~ 3a

3b

3c

~

~

~ 4a

4b

4c

~

~

5a

5b

~ 5c

~

~

6a

6b

~ 6c

~ 7a

~ 7c

~ 8a

~ 8c

~ 7b

~ 5a

~ 5c

~

6a

~ 6c

~ 5b

~ 8b

~ 7a

~ 7c

~

8a

~ 8c

~ 7b

~ 8b

~

5a

~ 5c

~ 6a

~

6c

~ 5b

SURGE

DIGITAL I/O 6N

~ 1

~ 2

~ 3

~

4

~ 1

~ 2

V

I

V

I

V

I

V

I

~ 1a

~ 1b

~

~

1c

2a

~

~

2b

2c

~ 3a

~

~

3b

3c

~ 4a

~

~

4b

4c

~ 7a

~ 7c

~

8a

~ 8c

~ 7b

~ 8b

~ 7a

~

7c

~ 8a

~ 8c

~

7b

~ 8b

SURGE

DIGITAL I/O 6P

~ 1

~ 2

~ 3

~

4

~

5

~ 6

V

I

V

I

V

I

V

I

V

I

V

I

~

7a

~ 7c

~ 8a

~

8c

~ 7b

~ 5a

~ 5c

~ 6a

~ 6c

~

5b

~ 8b

SURGE

DIGITAL I/O

6R

~ 3

~ 4

~

~

1a

1b

~

~

~ 1c

2a

2b

~

~

~ 2c

3a

3b

~

~

3c

4a

~ 4b

~

4c

SURGE

DIGITAL I/O

6S

~

1

~

2

~ 3

~ 4

SURGE

DIGITAL I/O 6T

~ 1

~ 2

~

3

~

4

~ 1a

~

~

1b

1c

~ 2a

~

~

2b

2c

~

~

~ 3a

3b

3c

~

~

4a

4b

~ 4c

~

7a

~ 7c

~ 8a

~

8c

~ 7b

~ 8b SURGE

DIGITAL I/O

6U

~ 5

~ 6

~ 1

~ 2

~ 3

~ 4

~ 5

~ 6

~

1a

~ 1b

~

~

1c

2a

~ 2b

~

~

2c

3a

~ 3b

~

~

3c

4a

~

~

4b

4c

~ 5a

~

~

5b

5c

~ 6a

~

~

6b

6c

842763A2.CDR

Figure 3–18: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)

CAUTION

CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CON-

NECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.

~

~

3a

3b

~

~

~ 3c

4a

4b

~

~

~ 4c

5a

5b

~

~

~ 1a

1b

1c

~

~

2a

2b

~ 2c

~

~

~ 5c

6a

6b

~ 6c

~ 3a

~

~

3b

3c

~ 4a

~

~

4b

4c

~ 1a

~

~

1b

1c

~ 2a

~

~

2b

2c

~

~

5a

5b

~ 5c

~

~

6a

6b

~ 6c


GE Multilin


CONTACT INPUTS:

A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.

A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC.

The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as

17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.

(Dry)

DIGITAL I/O 6B

~ 7a

~ 7c

~

~

8a

8c

+

+

+

+

~

~

CONTACT IN 8a

~ 7b

-

~ 8b SURGE

24-250V

(Wet)

~

~

~

~

DIGITAL I/O 6B

~ 7a

7c

8a

8c

+

+

+

+

~

~

CONTACT IN 8a

7b

-

~ 8b SURGE

3

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

1b

1a

2b

3a -

3b +

5b HI+

6b LO+

6a

8a

-

8b

CRITICAL

FAILURE

48 VDC

OUTPUT

CONTROL

POWER

SURGE

FILTER

827741A4.CDR

Figure 3–19: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.

NOTE

Contact outputs may be ordered as form-a or form-C. The form-A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.

There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend using an external DC supply.

NOTE

GE Multilin


3


USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:

The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to establish circuit continuity – an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.

The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.

current

50 to 70 mA

3 mA time

25 to 50 ms 842749A1.CDR

Figure 3–20: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with autoburnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to

50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over.

Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Contact Input

and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.

The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF


CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON


CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH

CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH

= OFF

= ON



NOTE

842751A1.CDR

Figure 3–21: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES

The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.


GE Multilin


3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.

Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.

Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/ output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.

Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.

NOTE

3

GE Multilin

Figure 3–22: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING


3


3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT

A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the L30 faceplate for programming with a personal computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the

RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.

The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.

NOTE

Figure 3–23: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION

3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS a) OPTIONS

In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the L30 provides two additional communication ports or a managed six-port Ethernet switch, depending on the installed CPU module.

The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.

NOTE

Table 3–3: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS

9J

9K

9L

9M

CPU TYPE

9E

9G

9H

COM1

RS485

10Base-F and 10Base-T

Redundant 10Base-F

100Base-FX

Redundant 100Base-FX

100Base-FX

Redundant 100Base-FX

COM2

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485

RS485


GE Multilin


Ground at remote device



Shielded twisted-pairs

Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

D1b

D2b

D3b

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

+

―

COMMON

+

―

COMMON

+

―

BNC

BNC

RS485

COM1

RS485

COM2

IRIG-B input

IRIG-B output

MM fiber optic cable


Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

Tx1

Rx1

10Base-FL

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

10Base-T

+

―

COMMON

+

―

BNC

NORMAL

RS485

COM2

IRIG-B input

BNC

IRIG-B output



Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

Tx1

Rx1

10Base-FL

Tx2

Rx2

10Base-F

NORMAL

ALTERNATE

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

10Base-T

+

―

COMMON

+

― IRIG-B input

BNC

RS485

COM2

BNC

IRIG-B output




Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

Tx1

Rx1

100Base-FL NORMAL

Tx2

Rx2

100Base-F

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

+

―

COMMON

+

―

ALTERNATE

IRIG-B input

BNC

RS485

COM2

BNC

IRIG-B output



SM fiber optic cable


Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

+

―

COMMON

+

―

BNC

BNC

RS485

COM2

IRIG-B input

IRIG-B output

Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

100Base-FL NORMAL COM1

+

―

COMMON

+

―

RS485

COM2

IRIG-B input

BNC

BNC

IRIG-B output



Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

Tx1

Rx1

100Base-FL

NORMAL COM1

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

+

―

COMMON

+

―

RS485

COM2

IRIG-B input

BNC

BNC

IRIG-B output


SM fiber optic cable


Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable

100Base-FL NORMAL

D1a

D2a

D3a

D4b

D4a

100Base-F ALTERNATE

+

―

COMMON

+

―

RS485

COM2

IRIG-B input

BNC

BNC

IRIG-B output

842765A7.CDR

Figure 3–24: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING b) RS485 PORTS

RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these ports, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,

SCADA system or PLC is possible.

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–” terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–” terminals connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices require a shared

3

GE Multilin



3

reference, or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common. Some systems allow the shield (drain wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the L30 COM terminal (#3); others function correctly only if the common wire is connected to the L30 COM terminal, but insulated from the shield.

To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to be grounded at more than one point, install resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each grounding point. Each relay should also be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.

Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.

Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.

Figure 3–25: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS

ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED

CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.

CAUTION

OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.

CAUTION

The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.

Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode and single-mode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9H, 9J, 9K,

9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, and 9R. The 9H, 9K, 9M, and 9R modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.

The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter, 62.5 µm for 100 Mbps.

For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.

3.2.10 IRIG-B

3

IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within

1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.

GPS CONNECTION

OPTIONAL

IRIG-B

TIME CODE

GENERATOR

(DC SHIFT OR

AMPLITUDE MODULATED

SIGNAL CAN BE USED)

+

-

GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE

TO OTHER DEVICES

(DC-SHIFT ONLY)

Figure 3–26: IRIG-B CONNECTION

RELAY

4B IRIG-B(+)

4A IRIG-B(-)

BNC (IN)

BNC (OUT)

RECEIVER

REPEATER

827756A5.CDR

GE Multilin



The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connection, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal even when a relay in the series is powered down.

3

Figure 3–27: IRIG-B REPEATER

Using an amplitude modulated receiver will cause errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.

NOTE

NOTE

Using an amplitude modulated receiver will also cause errors of up to 1 ms in metered synchrophasor values.

Using the IRIG-B repeater function in conjunction with synchrophasors is not recommended, as the repeater adds a 40

μs delay to the IRIG-B signal. This results in a 1° error for each consecutive device in the string as reported in synchrophasors.


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS

3.3PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION

A special inter-relay communications module is available for the L30. This module is plugged into slot “W” in horizontally mounted units and slot “R” in vertically mounted units. Inter-relay channel communications is not the same as 10/100Base-

F interface communications (available as an option with the CPU module). Channel communication is used for sharing data among relays.

The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces as shown in the table below.

Table 3–4: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

7I

7J

7K

7L

7M

7N

7P

7Q

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

7G

7H

7R

7S

7T

7V

7W

74

75

76

77

2S

2T

72

73

MODULE

2A

2B

2E

2F

2G

2H

SPECIFICATION

C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode

C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode

Bi-phase, 1 channel

Bi-phase, 2 channel

IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel

IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels

Managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply

Managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply

1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel

1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 2 channels

Channel 1 - RS422; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser

Channel 1 - G.703; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser

IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel

IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels

820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel

1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel

1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel

1300 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel

Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode

Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode

Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED

820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels

1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels

1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels

1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels

Channel 1: RS422, channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED

Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED

Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED

Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser

Channel 1: G.703, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser

G.703, 1 channel

G.703, 2 channels

RS422, 1 channel

RS422, 2 channels, 2 clock inputs

RS422, 2 channels

All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors. For two-terminal applications, each L30 relay requires at least one communications channel.

3

GE Multilin


3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE

NOTE

The current differential function must be “Enabled” for the communications module to properly operate.

Refer to

SETTINGS

ÖØ

GROUPED ELEMENTS

Ö

LINE DIFFERENTIAL

Ö

CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

menu.

The fiber optic modules (7A to 7W) are designed for back-to-back connections of UR-series relays only. For connections to higher-order systems, use the 72 to 77 modules or the 2A and 2B modules.

NOTE

OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.

CAUTION

3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS

3

The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.

Module: 7A / 7B / 7C

Connection Location: Slot X

7H / 7I / 7J

Slot X

RX1

TX1

RX1

TX1

RX2

TX2

1 Channel 2 Channels

831719A2.CDR

Figure 3–28: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES

3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS

The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.

Module:

Connection Location:

72/ 7D

Slot X

TX1

73/ 7K

Slot X

TX1

RX1 RX1

TX2

RX2

1 Channel 2 Channels

831720A3.CDR

Figure 3–29: LASER FIBER MODULES

WARNING

When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.


GE Multilin


3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE a) DESCRIPTION

The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.

The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

DIRECT I/O

ÖØ

DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to this module.

NOTE

AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.

G.703

channel 1

Surge

G.703

channel 2

Surge

Shield

Tx –

Rx –

Tx +

Rx +

Shield

Tx –

Rx –

Tx +

Rx +

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

7b

8a

8b

6a

6b

7a

842773A2.CDR

Figure 3–30: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.

NOTE

G.703

CHANNEL 1

SURGE

G.703

CHANNEL 2

Shld.

Tx -

Rx -

Tx +

Rx +

Shld.

Tx -

Rx -

Tx +

Rx +

X

X

X

X

X

X

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

X

X

X

X

6a

6b

7a

7b

X 8a

X

8b

X 1a

X 1b

X 2a

X 2b

X 3a

X 3b

X 6a

X 6b

X 7a

X 7b

X 8a

X

8b

Shld.

Tx -

Rx -

Tx +

Rx +

Shld.

Tx -

Rx -

Tx +

Rx +

G.703

CHANNEL 1

SURGE

G.703

CHANNEL 2

SURGE SURGE

831727A3.CDR

Figure 3–31: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES

Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that “A” is equivalent to “+” and

“B” is equivalent to “–”.

b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1.

Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S). The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control

power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.

2.

Remove the module cover screw.

3.

Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.

4.

Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes.

5.

Replace the top cover and the cover screw.

3

GE Multilin


3


6.

Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 3–32: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

Table 3–5: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS

SWITCHES

S1

S5 and S6

FUNCTION

OFF

→ octet timing disabled

ON

→ octet timing 8 kHz

S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF

→ loop timing mode

S5 = ON and S6 = OFF

→ internal timing mode

S5 = OFF and S6 = ON

→ minimum remote loopback mode

S5 = ON and S6 = ON

→ dual loopback mode

c) G.703 OCTET TIMING

If octet timing is enabled (on), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When L30s are connected back to back, octet timing should be disabled (off).

d) G.703 TIMING MODES

There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).

• Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing

(S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).

• Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =

OFF).


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:

3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS

842752A1.CDR

e) G.703 TEST MODES

In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.

3

DMR G7X

DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter

G7X = G.703 Transmitter

G7R = G.703 Receiver

DMX G7R

842774A1.CDR

Figure 3–33: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE

In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/ transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.

Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.

DMR G7X

DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter

G7X = G.703 Transmitter

G7R = G.703 Receiver

DMX G7R

Figure 3–34: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE

842775A1.CDR

GE Multilin



3

3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE a) DESCRIPTION

There are three RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T), dual-channel

RS422 (module 7W), and dual-channel dual-clock RS422 (module 7V). The modules can be configured to run at 64 or

128 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable is recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.

The two-channel two-clock RS422 interface (module 7V) is intended for use with two independent channel banks with two independent clocks. It is intended for situations where a single clock for both channels is not acceptable.

NOTE

The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:

• Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both.

• Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.

The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.

Single-channel RS422 module

~

~

~

~

~

3b

3a

2a

4b

6a

~

~

~

7a

8b

~

2b

8a

Tx –

Rx –

Tx +

Rx +

Shield

COM

RS422

Clock

Surge

~ indicates the slot position

Dual-channel RS422 module

~

~

~

3b

3a

2a

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

4b

6a

5b

5a

4a

6b

7b

7a

8b

2b

8a

Tx –

Rx –

Tx +

Rx +

Shield

Tx –

Rx –

Tx +

Rx +

Shield

COM

RS422 channel 1

RS422 channel 2

Clock

Surge

842776A3.CDR

Figure 3–35: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.

All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.

RS422

CHANNEL 1

CLOCK

SURGE

Shld.

+

–

COM

Tx–

Rx–

Tx–

Rx+

W

W

3b

3a

W

W

W

W

2a

4b

6a

7a

W

W

W

8b

2b

8a

+

W

W

3b

3a

W

W

W

W

2a

4b

6a

7a

W

W

W

8b

2b

8a

Tx–

Rx–

Tx+

Rx+

Shld.

+

–

COM

RS422

CHANNEL 1

CLOCK

SURGE

64 kHz

831809A1.CDR

Figure 3–36: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS

The RS422 interface may be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the clock inputs of the UR–RS422 interface in the usual fashion.

In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2.


GE Multilin


By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both UR–RS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the UR–RS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the

G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.

RS422

CHANNEL 1

CLOCK

RS422

CHANNEL 2

SURGE

Tx1(+)

Tx1(-)

Rx1(+)

Rx1(-)

Shld.

+

–

Tx2(+)

Tx2(-)

Rx2(+)

Rx2(-)

Shld.

com

W 2a

W 3b

W 4b

W 3a

W 6a

W 7a

W 8b

W 4a

W 5b

W 6b

W 5a

W 7b

W 2b

W 8a

Data module 1

Signal name

SD(A) - Send data

SD(B) - Send data

RD(A) - Received data

RD(B) - Received data

RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)

RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)

RT(A) - Receive timing

RT(B) - Receive timing

CS(A) - Clear To send

CS(B) - Clear To send

Local loopback

Remote loopback

Signal ground

ST(A) - Send timing

ST(B) - Send timing

Data module 2

Signal name

TT(A) - Terminal timing

TT(B) - Terminal timing

SD(A) - Send data

SD(B) - Send data

RD(A) - Received data

RD(B) - Received data

RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)

RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)

CS(A) - Clear To send

CS(B) - Clear To send

Local loopback

Remote loopback

Signal ground

ST(A) - Send timing

ST(B) - Send timing

831022A3.CDR

Figure 3–37: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION

Data module 1 provides timing to the L30 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.

c) TRANSMIT TIMING

The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.

3

Tx Clock

Tx Data

GE Multilin

Figure 3–38: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS


3.3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE d) RECEIVE TIMING

The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.

NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.

To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock.

3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE

3

The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.

AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.

WARNING

When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver.

~ 1a

~

~

1b

~

2b

2a

~

~

~

~

3a

3b

4b

6a

COM

Tx1 +

Rx1 –

Tx1 –

Rx1 +

Shield

Clock

(channel 1)

RS422 channel 1

~

Tx2 Rx2

8a

Fiber channel 2

Surge

842777A1.CDR

Figure 3–39: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units.

3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE

The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.

WARNING

When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.

~

~

1a

1b

~ 2a

~

~

~ 2b

3a

3b

Tx2

Shield

Tx –

Rx –

Tx +

Rx +

Rx2

G.703

channel 1

Surge

Fiber channel 2

842778A1.CDR

Figure 3–40: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION


GE Multilin


3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE

The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 76, and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE

C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) for 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of

8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.

The specifications for the module are as follows:.

• IEEE standard: C37.94 for 2

× 64 kbps optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules).

• Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber.

• Fiber optic mode: multi-mode.

• Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km.

• Fiber optic connector: type ST.

• Wavelength: 830 ±40 nm.

• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.

The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.

3

The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as shown below.

The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.

842753A1.CDR

For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.

GE Multilin



3

For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.

The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:

1.

Remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 76 or 77 module):

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.

The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.

2.


3.


4.

Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).

5.


6.

Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

3-36

Figure 3–41: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING


GE Multilin


3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE

The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.

The specifications for the module are as follows:

• Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1

× 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps).

• Fiber optic cable type: 9/125

μm core diameter optical fiber.

• Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver.

• Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km.

• Fiber optic connector: type ST.

• Wavelength: 1300 ±40 nm.

• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.

The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports C37.94SM as shown below.

3

It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.

The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.

842753A1.CDR

For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.

GE Multilin



3

For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.

The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:

1.

Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B):

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.

The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.

2.


3.


4.

Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).

5.


6.

Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

3-38

Figure 3–42: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

3.4MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3.4.1 OVERVIEW

The type 2S and 2T embedded managed switch modules are supported by UR-series relays containing type 9S CPU modules with revisions 5.5x and higher. The modules communicate to the L30 through an internal Ethernet port (referred to as the UR port or port 7) and provide an additional six external Ethernet ports: two 10/100Base-T ports and four multimode ST

100Base-FX ports.

NOTE

The Ethernet switch module should be powered up before or at the same time as the L30. Otherwise, the switch module will not be detected on power up and the

EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: ORDERCODE XXX

self-test warning will be issued.

3.4.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE

The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10/100Base-T and four multimode ST 100Base-FX external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module. In addition, a serial console port is accessible from the front of the module (requires the front panel faceplate to be open).

The pin assignment for the console port signals is shown in the following table.

3

Table 3–6: CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT

PIN

1

2

3

4

5

6 to 9

SIGNAL

CD

RXD

TXD

N/A

GND

N/A

DESCRIPTION

Carrier detect (not used)

Receive data (input)

Transmit data (output)

Not used

Signal ground

Not used

GE Multilin

Two 10/100Base-T ports

Four 100Base-FX multimode ports with ST connectors

RS232 console port

Independent power supply. Options:

2S: high-voltage

2T: low-voltage

FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW

842867A2.CDR

Figure 3–43: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES HARDWARE



The wiring for the managed Ethernet switch module is shown below.

3 HARDWARE

3





Tx1

Rx1

100Base-FX

Tx2

Rx2

100Base-FX

Tx1

Rx1

100Base-FX

Tx1

Rx1

100Base-FX

Fiber ports

100Base-T cable

100Base-T cable

110 to 250 V DC

100 to 240 V AC

+

–

10/100Base-T

Copper ports

W1a

W2b

W1a

10/100Base-T

+

―

GROUND

Power supply

842835A1.CDR

Figure 3–44: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE WIRING

3.4.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS

The 10/100Base-T and 100Base-FX ports have LED indicators to indicate the port status.

The 10/100Base-T ports have three LEDs to indicate connection speed, duplex mode, and link activity. The 100Base-FX ports have one LED to indicate linkup and activity.

Connection speed indicator (OFF = 10 Mbps; ON = 100 Mbps)

Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)

Duplex mode indicator (OFF = half-duplex; ON = full-duplex)

Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)

Figure 3–45: ETHERNET SWITCH LED INDICATORS

842868A2.CDR

3.4.4 INITIAL SETUP OF THE ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE a) DESCRIPTION

Upon initial power up of a L30 device with an installed Ethernet switch, the front panel trouble LED will be illuminated and the

ENET MODULE OFFLINE

error message will be displayed. It will be necessary to configure the Ethernet switch and then place it online. This involves two steps:

1.

Configuring the network settings on the local PC.

2.

Configuring the L30 switch module through EnerVista UR Setup.

These procedures are described in the following sections. When the L30 is properly configured, the LED will be off and the error message will be cleared.


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES b) CONFIGURING LAN COMMUNICATIONS

The following procedure describes how to initially configure the Ethernet switch to work on your LAN.

1.

Initiate communications from a PC to the L30 through a front panel serial connection (refer to the Configuring serial

communications section in chapter 1 for details), or if you are familiar with the UR keypad you can use it to set up the network IP address and check the Modbus slave address and Modbus TCP port.

2.

Ensure that the PC and the L30 are on the same IP network.

If your computer is on another network or has a dynamic IP address assigned upon a network login, then setup your own IP address as follows

2.1.

From the Windows Start Menu, select the Settings > Network Connections menu item.

2.2.

Right-click on the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item. This will open the LAN properties window.

2.3.

Click the Properties button as shown below.

3

Click the Properties button

GE Multilin


827790A1.CDR

3-41

3

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3 HARDWARE

2.4.

The following window is displayed. Select the Use the Following IP Address option and enter appropriate IP

address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway values. It may be necessary to contact your network administrator for assistance.

Click here to setup IP address

827803A1.CDR

2.5.

Save the settings by clicking the OK button.

2.6.

Click the Close button to exit the LAN properties window.

3.

Connect your PC to port 1 or port 2 of the Ethernet switch module (with an RJ-45 – CAT5 cable).

4.

Verify that the two LEDs beside the connected port turn green.

5.

After few seconds you should see your local area connection attempting to connect to the switch. Once connected, check your IP address by going to bottom of your screen and right-clicking the Local Area Connection icon as shown below.


GE Multilin


Alternately, you can open a command window (type “cmd” from the Run item in the Start menu) and enter the ipconfig command.

6.

Now that the PC should be able to communicate to the UR relay through the UR Setup software.

c) INITIAL ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE SETUP

This procedure describes how to configure the L30 switch module through EnerVista UR Setup. Before starting this procedure, ensure that the local PC is properly configured on the same network as the L30 device as shown in the previous section.

1.

Launch the EnerVista UR Setup software.

2.

Click the Device Setup button.

3.

Click the Add Site button. This will launch the Device Setup window.

4.

Set the Interface option to “Ethernet” and enter the IP Address, Slave Address, and Modbus Port values as shown below.

3

New site

Old site

Interface is Ethernet now

Make sure these settings are correct

827804A1.CDR

5.

Click the Read Order Code button. You should be able to communicate with the L30 device regardless of the value of the Ethernet switch IP address and even though the front panel display states that the Ethernet module is offline.

GE Multilin



6.

Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item as shown below.

3

7.

Enter (or verify) the MAC Address, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP Address settings.

8.

Click the Save button. It will take few seconds to save the settings to the Ethernet switch module and the following message displayed.

9.

Verify that the target message is cleared and that the L30 displays the MAC address of the Ethernet switch in the

Actual Values > Status > Ethernet Switch window.

The L30 device and the Ethernet switch module communications setup is now complete.

3.4.5 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE

A suitable IP/gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation. The

Switch has been shipped with a default IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Consult your network administrator to determine if the default IP address, subnet mask or default gateway needs to be modified.

Do not connect to network while configuring the switch module.

CAUTION


GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES a) CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MODULE IP SETTINGS

In our example configuration of both the Switch’s IP address and subnet mask must be changed to 3.94.247.229 and

255.255.252.0 respectively. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway can be configured using either EnerVista

UR Setup software, the Switch’s Secure Web Management (SWM), or through the console port using CLI.

1.

Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item to open the

Ethernet switch configuration window.

2.

Enter “3.94.247.229” in the IP Address field and “255.255.252.0” in the Subnet Mask field, then click OK.

The software will send the new settings to the L30 and prompt as follows when complete.

3.

Cycle power to the L30 and switch module to activate the new settings.

b) SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE

The L30 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file. This file contains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard L30 settings file.

This feature allows the switch module settings to be saved locally before performing firmware upgrades. Saving settings files is also highly recommended before making any change to the module configuration or creating new setting files.

The following procedure describes how to save local settings files for the Ethernet switch module.

1.

Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.

2.

Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >

Retreive Settings File item from the device settings tree.

3

GE Multilin



The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.

3 HARDWARE

3

3.

Enter an appropriate folder and file name and click Save.

All settings files will be saved as text files and the corresponding file extension automatically assigned.

c) UPLOADING ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS FILES TO THE MODULE

The following procedure describes how to upload local settings files to the Ethernet switch module. It is highly recommended that the current settings are saved to a settings file before uploading a new settings file.

It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch. When transferring settings files from one switch to another, the user must reconfigure the IP address.

NOTE

1.

Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.

2.

Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >

Transfer Settings File item from the device settings tree.

The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.

3.

Navigate to the folder containing the Ethernet switch settings file, select the file, then click Open.

The settings file will be transferred to the Ethernet switch and the settings uploaded to the device.


GE Multilin


3.4.6 UPLOADING L30 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE a) DESCRIPTION

This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a UR-2S or UR-2T switch module.

There are several ways of updating firmware on a switch module:

• Using the EnerVista UR Setup software.

• Serially using the L30 switch module console port.

• Using FTP or TFTP through the L30 switch module console port.

It is highly recommended to use the EnerVista UR Setup software to upgrade firmware on a L30 switch module.

Firmware upgrades using the serial port, TFTP, and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual.

NOTE

3 b) SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION

The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site. Use the following procedure to determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch

1.

Log into the switch using the EnerVista web interface.

The default switch login ID is “manager” and the default password is “manager”.

NOTE

The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen.

Version: 2.1 beta

842869A1.CDR

2.

Using the EnerVista UR Setup program, select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch

> Firmware Upload menu item.

GE Multilin



The following popup screen will appear warning that the settings will be lost when the firmware is upgraded.

3

It is highly recommended that you save the switch settings before upgrading the firmware.

NOTE

3.

After saving the settings file, proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning.

Another window will open, asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded.

4.

Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch, and select the Open option.

Note

3-48

The following window will pop up, indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress.

If the firmware load was successful, the following window will appear:


GE Multilin


The switch will automatically reboot after a successful firmware file transfer.

NOTE

5.

Once the firmware has been successfully uploaded to the switch module, load the settings file using the procedure described earlier.

3.4.7 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS

The following table provides details about Ethernet module self-test errors.

Be sure to enable the

ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL

setting in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS

menu and the relevant

PORT 1 EVENTS

through

PORT 6 EVENTS

settings under the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

ETH-

ERNET SWITCH

menu.

Table 3–7: ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS

ACTIVATION SETTING (SET

AS ENABLED)

ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL

EVENT NAME

ETHERNET MODULE

OFFLINE

EVENT CAUSE

No response has been received from the Ethernet module after five successive polling attempts.

PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6

EVENTS

No setting required; the L30 will read the state of a general purpose input/output port on the main CPU upon power-up and create the error if there is a conflict between the input/ output state and the order code.

ETHERNET PORT 1

OFFLINE to ETHERNET

PORT 6 OFFLINE

EQUIPMENT

MISMATCH: Card XXX

Missing

An active Ethernet port has returned a FAILED status.

The L30 has not detected the presence of the Ethernet switch via the bus board.

POSSIBLE CAUSES

• Loss of switch power.

• IP/gateway/subnet.

• Incompatibility between the CPU and the switch module.

• UR port (port 7) configured incorrectly or blocked

• Switch IP address assigned to another device in the same network.

• Ethernet connection broken.

• An inactive port’s events have been enabled.

The L30 failed to see the switch module on power-up, because switch won’t power up or is still powering up. To clear the fault, cycle power to the L30.

3

GE Multilin


3



GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.

The alternate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (refer to the Faceplate inter-

face section in this chapter).

The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (off-line) or connected (on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device.

In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.

The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every L30 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows

®

95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.

4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST

To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the L30 section in Chapter 1 for details.

4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a) ENGAGING A DEVICE

The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the L30 relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays.

b) USING SETTINGS FILES

The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:

• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.

• While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay.

• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.

Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings:

• Device definition

• Product setup

• System setup

• FlexLogic™

• Grouped elements

• Control elements

• Inputs/outputs

• Testing

Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.

The following communications settings are not transferred to the L30 with settings files.

Modbus Slave Address

Modbus IP Port Number

RS485 COM1 Baud Rate

RS485 COM1 Parity

COM1 Minimum Response Time

4

GE Multilin


4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4

RS485 COM2 Baud Rate

RS485 COM2 Parity

COM2 Minimum Response Time

COM2 Selection

RRTD Slave Address

RRTD Baud Rate

IP Address

IP Subnet Mask

Gateway IP Address

Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number

Network Address NSAP

IEC61850 Config GOOSE ConfRev

When a settings file is loaded to a L30 that is in-service, the following sequence will occur.

1.

The L30 will take itself out of service.

2.

The L30 will issue a

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED

major self-test error.

3.

The L30 will close the critical fail contact.

c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC™

You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically generated logic diagram.

d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.

e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following

• Event recorder

The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest.

• Oscillography

The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.

f) FILE SUPPORT

• Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.

• Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any

Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.

New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.

g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES

The firmware of a L30 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.


GE Multilin

3

10

4

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

2

1 6

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

NOTE

Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.

The

EEPROM DATA ERROR

message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.

4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW

The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:

1.

Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view.

2.

Main window menu bar.

3.

Main window tool bar.

4.

Site list control bar window.

5.

Settings list control bar window.

6.

Device data view windows, with common tool bar.

7.

Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar.

8.

Workspace area with data view tabs.

9.

Status bar.

10. Quick action hot links.

4

7

5

GE Multilin

9

8

Figure 4–1: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW


842786A2.CDR

4-3

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES

Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.

In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on the specific settings.

The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.

The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes.

The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the L30 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.

NOTE

4 a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files.

1.

Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.

The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing mode.

Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.

1.

Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.

The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length.

3.

Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.

The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.

b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in

EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic™ equation editor settings are locked.

1.

Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.

3.

Enter the template password then click OK.

4.

Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.


GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.

Figure 4–2: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

5.

Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.

The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.

4

Figure 4–3: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

6.

Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.

7.

Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.

c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.

The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.

1.

Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.

GE Multilin


4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES

The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.

3.


The settings file template is now secured with password protection.

When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It does not need to be added after the template is created.

NOTE

4 d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:

• Display only those settings available for editing.

• Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.

Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.

1.


2.

Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.

3.

Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.

Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

4-6

Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.

Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the

Template Mode > View In Template Mode

command.

The template specifies that only the settings be available.

Pickup and Curve

842858A1.CDR

Figure 4–4: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND


GE Multilin


Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.

Typical settings tree view without template applied.

Typical settings tree view with template applied via the


command.

842860A1.CDR

Figure 4–5: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND

Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.

1.


2.

Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.

3.


Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

4



Template Mode > View All Settings

command.

The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.

842859A1.CDR

Figure 4–6: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new settings template.

1.

Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.

3.

Enter the template password and click OK to continue.

GE Multilin



4.

Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.


The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.

4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS

4

The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic™ equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical FlexLogic™ applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within


Secured FlexLogic™ equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.

a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION ENTRIES

The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic™ equation.

1.

Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature.

2.

Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.

By default, all FlexLogic™ entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.

3.

Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them.

The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.

Figure 4–7: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE

4.

Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template.

5.

Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.

6.

Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic™ equation.


GE Multilin


Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic™ entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic™ entries in the above procedure is shown below.

Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied.

Typical the

FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via


command.

842861A1.CDR

Figure 4–8: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES

The FlexLogic™ entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.

4

Figure 4–9: SECURED FLEXLOGIC™ IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER

A settings file and associated FlexLogic™ equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired

FlexLogic™ entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number.

1.

Select the settings file in the offline window.

2.

Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.

GE Multilin



The following window is displayed.


4

Figure 4–10: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

3.

Enter the serial number of the L30 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.

The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic™ equations are now locked to the L30 device specified by the serial number.

4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY

A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a L30 device have been changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a L30 device, the date, time, and serial number of the L30 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the L30 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.

The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the L30 device or obtained from the L30 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings file.

1

SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE

The serial number and last setting change date are stored in the UR-series device.

The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer date are added to the settings file when settings files are transferred to the device.

Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the

UR-series device to determine if security has been compromised.

2

SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE

SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND

ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.

Figure 4–11: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.


842864A1.CDR

GE Multilin


1.

The transfer date of a setting file written to a L30 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.

2.

Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.

a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an L30 device.

The L30 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in settings file device definition

4

842863A1.CDR

Figure 4–12: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in settings report

Figure 4–13: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

842862A1.CDR

GE Multilin


4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The L30 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual

Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in online device actual values page

4

842865A1.CDR

Figure 4–14: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

PRODUCT INFO

Ö

MODEL INFORMATION

ÖØ

SERIAL NUMBER

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

PRODUCT INFO

Ö


ÖØ

LAST SETTING CHANGE c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature

• If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is removed from the settings file.

• If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.

• If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed from the settings file.

• If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings file.


GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.3.1 FACEPLATE a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.

The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules.

Five column LED indicator panel

Display

Keypad

Front panel

RS232 port

User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16

Figure 4–15: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE

842810A1.CDR

b) STANDARD FACEPLATE

The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.

The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal arrangement of the faceplate panels.

LED panel 1 LED panel 2 LED panel 3

4

Display

Front panel

RS232 port

GE Multilin

Small user-programmable

(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7

User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 12

Keypad

827801A7.CDR

Figure 4–16: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS


4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES

The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.

DISPLAY

MENU

HELP

ESCAPE

ENTER

MESSAGE

VALUE

1

0

7

4

8

5

2

.

3

+/-

9

6

KEYPAD

LED PANEL 3

4

LED PANEL 2

STATUS

IN SERVICE

TROUBLE

TEST MODE

TRIP

ALARM

PICKUP

EVENT CAUSE

VOLTAGE

CURRENT

FREQUENCY

OTHER

PHASE A

PHASE B

PHASE C

NEUTRAL/GROUND

RESET

USER 1

USER 2

USER 3

LED PANEL 1

Figure 4–17: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4.3.2 LED INDICATORS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.

The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUT/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

RESETTING

menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.

The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.

842811A1.CDR

Figure 4–18: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The status indicators in the first column are described below.

• IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are

OK, and that the device has been programmed.


GE Multilin


• TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.

• TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode.

• TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.

• ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched.

• PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.

The event cause indicators in the first column are described below.

Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either

“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.

All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.

• VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved.

• CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved.

• FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved.

• OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved.

• PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved.

• PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved.

• PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved.

• NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.

The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label package of every L30, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.

User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

b) STANDARD FACEPLATE

The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUT/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

RESETTING

menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.

The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.

4

STATUS

IN SERVICE

TROUBLE

TEST MODE

TRIP

ALARM

PICKUP

EVENT CAUSE

VOLTAGE

CURRENT

FREQUENCY

OTHER

PHASE A

PHASE B

PHASE C

NEUTRAL/GROUND

Figure 4–19: LED PANEL 1

RESET

USER 1

USER 2

USER 3

842781A1.CDR

GE Multilin



4

STATUS INDICATORS:

• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the relay has been programmed.

• TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.

• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.

• TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.

• ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched.

• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.

EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:

Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either

“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.

All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.

• VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.

• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.

• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.

• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.

• PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved.

• PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved.

• PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved.

• NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.

USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS:

The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided.

User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

Figure 4–20: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)

DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2:

The default labels are intended to represent:


842782A1.CDR

GE Multilin


• GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.

• BREAKER 1(2) OPEN: The breaker is open.

• BREAKER 1(2) CLOSED: The breaker is closed.

• BREAKER 1(2) TROUBLE: A problem related to the breaker has been detected.

• SYNCHROCHECK NO1(2) IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element.

• RECLOSE ENABLED: The recloser is operational.

• RECLOSE DISABLED: The recloser is not operational.

• RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: A reclose operation is in progress.

• RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The recloser is not operational and requires a reset.

The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The

LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained in the following section.

4

842784A1.CDR

Figure 4–21: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)

4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The following procedure requires the pre-requisites listed below.

• EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational.

• The L30 settings have been saved to a settings file.

• The L30 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur and printed.

• Small-bladed knife.

This procedure describes how to create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display.

1.

Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.

GE Multilin



2.

Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window will be displayed.

4

Figure 4–22: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW

3.

Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided.

4.

Feed the L30 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.

5.

When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.

6.

Remove the L30 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.

It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user.

NOTE

The label package shipped with every L30 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet, and the label removal tool.

If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.

The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool.

1.

Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.


GE Multilin


2.

Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.


The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the L30 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels.

1.

Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay.

4

2.

Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the LED label.

GE Multilin



3.

Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.


4

4.

Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.

The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the L30 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels.

1.

Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay.


GE Multilin


2.

Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.

3.

Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.

4

GE Multilin



4.

Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons, as shown below.

4 b) STANDARD FACEPLATE

Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/

This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.

1.

Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin part number: 1501-0014).

Push in and gently lift up the cover.

842771A1.CDR

2.

Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the plastic covers.

( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )

F60 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY

842722A1.CDR

3.

Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.

4.

Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.


GE Multilin


The following items are required to customize the L30 display module:

• Black and white or color printer (color preferred).

• Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template.

• 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069), and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).

The following procedure describes how to customize the L30 display module:

1.

Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.

2.

When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.

3.

Print the template(s) to a local printer.

4.

From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.

5.

Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.

4.3.4 DISPLAY

All messages are displayed on a 2

× 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.

4.3.5 KEYPAD

4

Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.

The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.

The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.

The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.

4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL a) INTRODUCTION

The L30 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker, which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic™ operand. A setting is provided to assign names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.

For the following discussion it is assumed the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

BREAKERS

Ö

BREAKER 1(2)

Ö

BREAKER

FUNCTION

setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.

b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING

Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.

For the following discussion it is assumed the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

BREAKERS

Ö

BREAKER 1(2)

ÖØ

BREAKER

1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL

setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.

GE Multilin


4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.

d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS

For the following example setup, the

(Name)

field represents the user-programmed variable name.

For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The

USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.

4

ENTER COMMAND

PASSWORD

Press USER 1

To Select Breaker

BKR1-(Name) SELECTED

USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP

This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a

COMMAND PASSWORD

is required; i.e. if

COMMAND PASSWORD

is enabled and no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.

This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.

This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2) and (3) below:

(1)

USER 2 OFF/ON

To Close BKR1-(Name)

If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to close breaker 1.

(2)

USER 3 OFF/ON

To Open BKR1-(Name)

If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to open breaker 1.

(3)

BKR2-(Name) SELECTED

USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP

If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),

(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.

Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.

e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to that described above for two breakers.

4.3.7 MENUS a) NAVIGATION

Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages:

• Actual values.

• Settings.

• Commands.

• Targets.

• User displays (when enabled).


GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE b) HIERARCHY

The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (

), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE

UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.

HIGHEST LEVEL

SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

PASSWORD

SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL:

Restricted

SETTINGS

c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION

ACTUAL VALUES

STATUS

Ø

SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

Ø

SETTINGS

PASSWORD

SECURITY

Ø

Ø

ACCESS LEVEL:

Restricted

Ø

PASSWORD

SECURITY

Ø

DISPLAY

PROPERTIES

Ø

FLASH MESSAGE

TIME: 1.0 s

Ø

DEFAULT MESSAGE

INTENSITY: 25%

Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.

Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page contains settings to configure the relay.

Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for . Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.

From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).

Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for

Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the remaining setting messages for this sub-header.

Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message.

Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header.

Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for

Display Properties.

To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader, repeatedly press the MESSAGE DOWN key. The last message appears as shown.

4

GE Multilin



4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define what values are acceptable for a setting.

4

FLASH MESSAGE

Ø

MINIMUM: 0.5

MAXIMUM: 10.0

For example, select the

MESSAGE TIME

setting.

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

DISPLAY PROPERTIES

Ö

FLASH

Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key again to view the next context sensitive help message.

Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.

• 0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MES-

SAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.

• VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed.

While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.

FLASH MESSAGE

Ø

NEW SETTING

HAS BEEN STORED

As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are being entered.

Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press

ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.

b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is comprised of two or more members.

ACCESS LEVEL:

Restricted

For example, the selections available for

ACCESS LEVEL

are "Restricted", "Command",

"Setting", and "Factory Service".

Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the

VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection.

ACCESS LEVEL:

Setting

Ø

NEW SETTING

HAS BEEN STORED

If the

ACCESS LEVEL

needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing

ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process.

c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.


GE Multilin


There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.

For example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”.

1.

Press the decimal to enter text edit mode.

2.

Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.

3.

Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.

4.

Press ENTER to store the text.

5.

If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.

d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY

RELAY SETTINGS:

Not Programmed

When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.

To change the

RELAY SETTINGS

: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:

1.

Press the MENU key until the

SETTINGS

header flashes momentarily and the

PRODUCT SETUP

message appears on the display.

2.

Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the

PASSWORD SECURITY


3.

Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the

INSTALLATION


4.


RELAY SETTINGS:

Not Programmed message is displayed.

4

SETTINGS

Ø

SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD

SECURITY

DISPLAY

PROPERTIES

↓

INSTALLATION

RELAY SETTINGS:

Not Programmed

5.

After the

RELAY SETTINGS:

Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the selection to "Programmed".

6.

Press the ENTER key.

RELAY SETTINGS:

Not Programmed

RELAY SETTINGS:

Programmed

NEW SETTING

HAS BEEN STORED

7.

When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the

In Service LED will turn on.

e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

The L30 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.

GE Multilin



4

Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.

To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows:

1.

Press the MENU key until the

SETTINGS

header flashes momentarily and the

PRODUCT SETUP


2.


ACCESS LEVEL


3.

Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the

CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS


4.


CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD

or

CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD


PASSWORD

SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL:

Restricted

CHANGE LOCAL

PASSWORDS

CHANGE COMMAND

PASSWORD: No

CHANGE SETTING

PASSWORD: No

ENCRYPTED COMMAND

PASSWORD: ---------

ENCRYPTED SETTING

PASSWORD: ---------

5.

After the

CHANGE...PASSWORD

message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the selection to “Yes”.

6.

Press the ENTER key and the display will prompt you to

ENTER NEW PASSWORD

.

7.

Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key.

8.

When the

VERIFY NEW PASSWORD

is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER.

CHANGE SETTING

PASSWORD: No

CHANGE SETTING

PASSWORD: Yes

ENTER NEW

PASSWORD: ##########

VERIFY NEW

PASSWORD: ##########

NEW PASSWORD

HAS BEEN STORED

9.

When the

NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED

message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be active.

f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.

In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding encrypted password from the

PASSWORD

SECURITY

menu to the Factory for decoding.

g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY

When an incorrect command or setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a 3-minute time span, the

LOCAL ACCESS DENIED

FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “On” and the L30 will not allow settings or command level access via the faceplate interface for the next five minutes, or in the event that an incorrect Command Or Set-


GE Multilin


ting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a 3-minute time span, the

REMOTE ACCESS DENIED

FlexLogic™ operand will be set to

“

On

”

and the L30 will not allow settings or command access via the any external communications interface for the next five minutes.

In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the


FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “On” and the L30 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes.

The


FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “Off” after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.

4

GE Multilin


4



GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW

SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETUP

GE Multilin

5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU

SECURITY

DISPLAY

PROPERTIES

CLEAR RELAY

RECORDS

COMMUNICATIONS

MODBUS USER MAP

REAL TIME

CLOCK

FAULT REPORTS

OSCILLOGRAPHY

DATA LOGGER

USER-PROGRAMMABLE

LEDS


SELF TESTS

CONTROL

PUSHBUTTONS


PUSHBUTTONS

FLEX STATE

PARAMETERS

USER-DEFINABLE

DISPLAYS

INSTALLATION

AC INPUTS

POWER SYSTEM

SIGNAL SOURCES

87L POWER SYSTEM

BREAKERS


See page 5-8.

See page 5-12.

See page 5-14.

See page 5-15.

See page 5-37.

See page 5-37.

See page 5-38.

See page 5-40.

See page 5-42.

See page 5-44.

See page 5-47.

See page 5-47.

See page 5-49.

See page 5-54.

See page 5-55.

See page 5-57.

See page 5-59.

See page 5-60.

See page 5-61.

See page 5-64.

See page 5-70.

5-1

5

5

5.1 OVERVIEW

SETTINGS

FLEXLOGIC

SETTINGS


SETTINGS

CONTROL ELEMENTS

SETTINGS

INPUTS / OUTPUTS

5-2

SWITCHES

FLEXCURVES

PHASOR MEASUREMENT

UNIT

FLEXLOGIC

EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC

TIMERS

FLEXELEMENTS

NON-VOLATILE

LATCHES

SETTING GROUP 1

SETTING GROUP 2

↓

SETTING GROUP 6

TRIP BUS

SETTING GROUPS

SELECTOR SWITCH

UNDERFREQUENCY

SYNCHROCHECK

AUTORECLOSE


DIGITAL COUNTERS

MONITORING

ELEMENTS

CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-74.

See page 5-77.

See page 5-84.

See page 5-114.

See page 5-114.

See page 5-115.

See page 5-119.

See page 5-120.

See page 5-167.

See page 5-169.

See page 5-170.

See page 5-176.

See page 5-177.

See page 5-181.

See page 5-187.

See page 5-190.

See page 5-192.

See page 5-202.


5 SETTINGS

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

SETTINGS

TRANSDUCER I/O

SETTINGS

TESTING

GE Multilin

VIRTUAL INPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUTS

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

REMOTE DEVICES

REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTE DPS INPUTS

REMOTE OUTPUTS

DNA BIT PAIRS

REMOTE OUTPUTS

UserSt BIT PAIRS

DIRECT

RESETTING

IEC 61850

GOOSE ANALOGS

IEC 61850

GOOSE UINTEGERS

DCMA INPUTS

RTD INPUTS

DCMA OUTPUTS

TEST MODE

FUNCTION: Disabled

TEST MODE FORCING:

On

FORCE CONTACT

INPUTS

FORCE CONTACT

OUTPUTS

CHANNEL TESTS

PMU

TEST VALUES

See page 5-204.

See page 5-205.

See page 5-207.

See page 5-208.

See page 5-209.

See page 5-210.

See page 5-211.

See page 5-211.

See page 5-211.

See page 5-214.

See page 5-214.

See page 5-215.

See page 5-216.

See page 5-217.

See page 5-219.

See page 5-222.

See page 5-222.

See page 5-223.

See page 5-224.

See page 5-225.

See page 5-225.

5.1 OVERVIEW

5


5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS

5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS

5

In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog parameter actual values as the input.

The exception to the above rule are the digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.

NOTE

Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active setting group.

The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).

Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:

pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)

For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT.

Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or primary current to which the sum is scaled (that is, normalized to the larger of the two rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 =

300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary.

For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay.

For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:

13800

----------------

14400

×

120

=

115 V

(EQ 5.1)

For wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:

13800

----------------

14400

×

120

----------

3

=

66.4 V

(EQ 5.2)

Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:

• FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as “Enabled”. The factory default is “Disabled”. Once programmed to “Enabled”, any element associated with the function becomes active and all options become available.

• NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.

• SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.

• PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.

• PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup and operate output states.

• RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the

Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

• BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.

• TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to “Disabled”, no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to

“Self-Reset”, the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to “Latched”, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay.

• EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout or operate states are recorded by the event recorder. When set to “Disabled”, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to

“Enabled”, events are created for:

(Element) PKP (pickup)

(Element) DPO (dropout)

(Element) OP (operate)

The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.

5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES a) BACKGROUND

The L30 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the

AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements.

Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels.

The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation.

A mechanism called a source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.

To illustrate the concept of sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer winding 1. The current into winding 1 is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT connections). The same considerations apply to transformer winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.

5

GE Multilin


5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS

CT1

through current

CT2

UR-series relay

Winding 1 current

Winding 1

Power transformer

Winding 2

5

CT3 CT4

827791A3.CDR

Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings.

A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.

Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.

The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above diagram, the user configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as “Wdg1 I”.

Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the protection elements and as metered quantities.

b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION

CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.

A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group, hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,

7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.

Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:

The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.

ITEM

CT/VT Module

CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel)

VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel)

MAXIMUM NUMBER

2

8

4


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.

For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.

Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,

F5, L1, L5, S1, and S5.

The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.

The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.

5

GE Multilin


5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS

5

5.2PRODUCT SETUP a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL:

Restricted

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CHANGE LOCAL

PASSWORDS

ACCESS

SUPERVISION

DUAL PERMISSION

SECURITY ACCESS

MESSAGE

PASSWORD ACCESS

EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

Factory Service (for factory use only)

See page 5–9.

See page 5–10.

See page 5–11.

Range: Disabled, Enabled

5.2.1 SECURITY

Two levels of password security are provided via the

ACCESS LEVEL

setting: command and setting. The factory service level is not available and intended for factory use only.

The following operations are under command password supervision:

• Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad.

• Changing the state of virtual inputs.

• Clearing the event records.

• Clearing the oscillography records.

• Clearing fault reports.

• Changing the date and time.

• Clearing the breaker arcing current.

• Clearing the data logger.

• Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.

The following operations are under setting password supervision:

• Changing any setting.

• Test mode operation.

The command and setting passwords are defaulted to “0” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to “0”, the password security feature is disabled.


Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.

When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the L30, the remote password must be used. If the connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.

The

PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS

settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.

The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic™ operands.

• ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.

• ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.

• ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.

• ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.

• ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.

• ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.

• ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.

• ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.

The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic™ operands and events are updated every five seconds.

A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands shown above.

NOTE b) LOCAL PASSWORDS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ


CHANGE LOCAL

PASSWORDS

CHANGE COMMAND

PASSWORD: No

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

CHANGE SETTING

PASSWORD: No

MESSAGE


PASSWORD: ----------

Range: 0 to 9999999999

Note: ---------- indicates no password

MESSAGE


PASSWORD: ----------

Range: 0 to 9999999999


Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.

When a


or


setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is invoked:

1.

ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.

2.

VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.

3.

NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.

To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the

ACCESS LEVEL

setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according to the access level timeout setting values.

If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding

ENCRYPTED PASSWORD

.

If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.

NOTE

5

GE Multilin


5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS c) REMOTE PASSWORDS

The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the

Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.

5

Figure 5–2: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to “0”. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password.

1.

Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.

2.

Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.

3.

Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.

4.

If the original password is not “0”, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send

Password to Device button.

5.

The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the


item.

If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password value.

d) ACCESS SUPERVISION

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ

ACCESS SUPERVISION

ACCESS

SUPERVISION

ACCESS LEVEL

TIMEOUTS

Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

INVALID ATTEMPTS

BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3

Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1

MESSAGE

PASSWORD LOCKOUT

DURATION: 5 min

The following access supervision settings are available.


GE Multilin


• INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the

LOCAL ACCESS DENIED

or


FlexLogic™ operands are set to “On”. These operands are returned to the “Off” state upon expiration of the lockout.

• PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the L30 will lockout password access after the number of invalid password entries specified by the

INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT

setting has occurred.

The L30 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

FlexLogic™ operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.

The

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

operand is reset with the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

ÖØ

RESET UNAUTHORIZED

ALARMS

command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The operand does not generate events or targets.

The access level timeout settings are shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ


Ö

ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS

ACCESS LEVEL

TIMEOUTS

COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 5 min



MESSAGE

SETTING LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 30 min

These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.

• COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level.

• SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level.

e) DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ

DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

DUAL PERMISSION

SECURITY ACCESS

LOCAL SETTING AUTH:

On

Range: selected FlexLogic™ operands (see below)

Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE

REMOTE SETTING AUTH:

On


MESSAGE

ACCESS AUTH

TIMEOUT: 30 min.

The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.

The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.

• LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.

Valid values for the FlexLogic™ operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.

If this setting is “On“, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this setting is any contact input on FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the local setting password to gain setting access.

If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain setting access, then the

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

message is displayed on the front panel.

• REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.

5

GE Multilin



If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required). If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.

• ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable when the

LOCAL SETTING AUTH

setting is programmed to any operand except “On”. The state of the FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the

ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT

setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.

The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product

Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.

5

The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.


The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off”. The state of the

FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.

5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


DISPLAY

PROPERTIES

LANGUAGE:

English

FLASH MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DEFAULT MESSAGE

TIMEOUT: 300 s

DEFAULT MESSAGE

INTENSITY: 25 %

SCREEN SAVER

FEATURE: Disabled

SCREEN SAVER WAIT

TIME: 30 min

CURRENT CUT-OFF

LEVEL: 0.020 pu

VOLTAGE CUT-OFF

LEVEL: 1.0 V

Range: English; English, French; English, Russian;

English, Chinese

(range dependent on order code)

Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1

Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%

Visible only if a VFD is installed


Visible only if an LCD is installed

Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1

Visible only if an LCD is installed

Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001

Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1


GE Multilin


Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.

• LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is dependent on the order code of the relay.

• FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.

• DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.

• DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.

• SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the L30 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the

SCREEN SAVER FEATURE

is “Enabled”, the LCD backlighting is turned off after the

DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT

followed by the

SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME

, providing that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting is turned on.

• CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The L30 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the

CURRENT

CUT-OFF LEVEL

setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.

This setting does not affect the 87L metering cutoff, which is constantly at 0.02 pu.

• VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The L30 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.

The

CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL

and the

VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL

are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections:

3-phase power cut-off =

3

×


× ×

VT primary

×

CT primary

VT secondary

For Wye connections:

3-phase power cut-off

=

3

×


×


×

VT primary

×

CT primary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

VT secondary

×

CT primary per-phase power cut-off =


×


VT secondary

× where VT primary = VT secondary

× VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary × CT ratio.

For example, given the following settings:


: “0.02 pu”


: “1.0 V”

PHASE CT PRIMARY

: “100 A”

PHASE VT SECONDARY

: “66.4 V”

PHASE VT RATIO

: “208.00 : 1"

PHASE VT CONNECTION

: “Delta”.

(EQ 5.3)

(EQ 5.4)

(EQ 5.5)

5

GE Multilin



5

We have:

CT primary = “100 A”, and

VT primary =

PHASE VT SECONDARY

x

PHASE VT RATIO

= 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V

The power cut-off is therefore: power cut-off = (


×


× CT primary × VT primary)/VT secondary

= ( 3

× 0.02 pu × 1.0 V × 100 A × 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V

= 720.5 watts

Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.

NOTE

Lower the


and


with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02

pu” for


and “1.0 V” for


are recommended.

5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

CLEAR RELAY

RECORDS

CLEAR FAULT REPORTS:

Off

MESSAGE

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?

No

CLEAR DATA LOGGER:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CLEAR ARC AMPS 1:

Off

CLEAR ARC AMPS 2:

Off

CLEAR CHNL STATUS:

Off

RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:

Off









Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic™ operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the L30 responds to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic™ operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.

Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.

For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied.

1.

Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

menu:

CLEAR DEMAND:

“

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

”

2.

Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT

SETUP

ÖØ

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

Ö

USER PUSHBUTTON 1

menu:

PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION:

“Self-reset”

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME:

“0.20 s”


GE Multilin


5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

COMMUNICATIONS

SERIAL PORTS

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

NETWORK

MODBUS PROTOCOL

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DNP PROTOCOL

DNP / IEC104

POINT LISTS

IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

WEB SERVER

HTTP PROTOCOL

TFTP PROTOCOL

IEC 60870-5-104

PROTOCOL

SNTP PROTOCOL

ETHERNET SWITCH

See below.

See page 5–16.

See page 5–16.

See page 5–17.

See page 5–20.

See page 5–21.

See page 5–34.

See page 5–35.

See page 5–35.

See page 5–36.

See page 5–36.

b) SERIAL PORTS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

Ö

SERIAL PORTS

SERIAL PORTS

MESSAGE

RS485 COM1 BAUD

RATE: 19200

RS485 COM1 PARITY:

None

Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,

28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU Type E is ordered.

Range: None, Odd, Even

Only active if CPU Type E is ordered

MESSAGE

RS485 COM1 RESPONSE

MIN TIME: 0 ms

Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

Only active if CPU Type E is ordered

MESSAGE

RS485 COM2 BAUD

RATE: 19200

Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,

28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200

Range: None, Odd, Even

MESSAGE

RS485 COM2 PARITY:

None


MESSAGE

RS485 COM2 RESPONSE

MIN TIME: 0 ms

The L30 is equipped with up to three independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of

5

GE Multilin



5

these ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.

NOTE

For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.

c) NETWORK

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

NETWORK

NETWORK

IP ADDRESS:

0.0.0.0

Range: Standard IP address format

Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.

MESSAGE

SUBNET IP MASK:

0.0.0.0



MESSAGE



MESSAGE

GATEWAY IP ADDRESS:

0.0.0.0

OSI NETWORK

ADDRESS (NSAP)

Range: Select to enter the

OSI NETWORK ADDRESS

.


MESSAGE

ETHERNET OPERATION

MODE: Full-Duplex

Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex

Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.

These messages appear only if the L30 is ordered with an Ethernet card.

The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The

NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP port number. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays behind a router). By setting a different

TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER

for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used.

When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP port number, or any user map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-on).

NOTE

WARNING

Do not set more than one protocol to the same

TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER

, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.

d) MODBUS PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

MODBUS PROTOCOL

MODBUS PROTOCOL

MODBUS SLAVE

ADDRESS: 254



MESSAGE

MODBUS TCP PORT

NUMBER: 502

The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the L30 will respond regardless of the

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS

programmed. For the RS485 ports each L30 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.

Changes to the

MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER

setting will not take effect until the L30 is restarted.

NOTE


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP e) DNP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

DNP PROTOCOL

DNP PROTOCOL

DNP CHANNELS

Range: see sub-menu below


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DNP ADDRESS:

65519

DNP NETWORK

CLIENT ADDRESSES



MESSAGE

DNP TCP/UDP PORT

NUMBER: 20000

Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE



MESSAGE


TIMEOUT: 5 s


MESSAGE


MAX RETRIES: 10


MESSAGE


DEST ADDRESS: 1

MESSAGE

DNP CURRENT SCALE

FACTOR: 1

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000

MESSAGE

DNP VOLTAGE SCALE

FACTOR: 1

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000

MESSAGE

DNP POWER SCALE

FACTOR: 1

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000

MESSAGE

DNP ENERGY SCALE

FACTOR: 1

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000

MESSAGE

DNP PF SCALE

FACTOR: 1

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000

MESSAGE

DNP OTHER SCALE

FACTOR: 1

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,

100000


MESSAGE

DNP CURRENT DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000


MESSAGE

DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000


MESSAGE

DNP POWER DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000


MESSAGE

DNP ENERGY DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000


MESSAGE

DNP PF DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000


MESSAGE

DNP OTHER DEFAULT

DEADBAND: 30000


MESSAGE

DNP TIME SYNC IIN

PERIOD: 1440 min

5

GE Multilin



5

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT

SIZE: 240

DNP OBJECT 1

DEFAULT VARIATION: 2

DNP OBJECT 2


DNP OBJECT 20


DNP OBJECT 21


DNP OBJECT 22


DNP OBJECT 23


DNP OBJECT 30


DNP OBJECT 32


DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED

CONTROL POINTS: 0

DNP TCP CONNECTION

TIMEOUT: 120 s


Range: 1, 2

Range: 1, 2

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

Range: 1, 2, 9, 10

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7



The L30 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The L30 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the L30 maintains two sets of DNP data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the L30 at one time.

NOTE

The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be simultaneously. When the

IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION

setting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).

The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

DNP PROTOCOL

Ö

DNP CHANNELS

DNP CHANNELS

MESSAGE

DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT:

NETWORK

DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT:

COM2 - RS485

Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,

FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,

NETWORK - UDP

Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,

FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,

NETWORK - UDP

The

DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT

and


settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in non-Ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to “Network - TCP”, the DNP protocol can be used over

TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to “Network - UDP”, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol.

Changes to the


and


settings will take effect only after power has been cycled to the relay.

NOTE

The

DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS

settings can force the L30 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The settings in this sub-menu are shown below.


GE Multilin


PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

DNP PROTOCOL

Ö

DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES

DNP NETWORK


CLIENT ADDRESS 1:

0.0.0.0

Range: standard IP address


MESSAGE


0.0.0.0


MESSAGE


0.0.0.0


MESSAGE


0.0.0.0


MESSAGE


0.0.0.0

The

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION

should be “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism. The

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT

sets the time the L30 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response. The

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES

setting determines the number of times the L30 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The

DNP UNSOL

RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS

is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the L30 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.

The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the L30 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the

DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR

setting is set to “1000”, all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000

V on the L30 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value will be 10 times larger).

The

DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND

settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These settings group the L30 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.

Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the L30 when any current values change by 15 A, the

DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND

setting should be set to “15”. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the L30, the default deadbands will be in effect.

The L30 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the

DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR

and

DNP ENERGY

DEFAULT DEADBAND

settings are not applicable.

NOTE

The

DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD

setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the L30.

Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.

The

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE

setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.

NOTE

When the DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) are configured for Ethernet-enabled relays, check the “DNP Points Lists” L30 web page to view the points lists. This page can be viewed with a web browser by entering the L30 IP address to access the L30 “Main Menu”, then by selecting the “Device Information Menu” > “DNP Points Lists” menu item.

The

DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION

to

DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION

settings allow the user to select the DNP default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP implementation section in appendix E for additional details.

The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the L30 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP

5

GE Multilin



5

master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The L30 can be configured to support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The

DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL

POINTS

setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on a one-to-one basis.

The

DNP ADDRESS

setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the L30 on a DNP communications link. Each

DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.

The

DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT

setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be aborted by the L30. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.

Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the

DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT

setting for the changes to take effect.

NOTE f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS

DNP / IEC104

POINT LISTS

BINARY INPUT / MSP

POINTS


MESSAGE

ANALOG INPUT / MME

POINTS


The binary and analog inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, can configured to a maximum of 256 points. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning

FlexLogic™ operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.

The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö

BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS

BINARY INPUT / MSP

POINTS

Point:

Off

0



MESSAGE

Point: 1

Off

↓


MESSAGE

Point: 255

Off

Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by assigning an appropriate FlexLogic™ operand. Refer to the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section in this chapter for the full range of assignable operands.

The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS

ANALOG INPUT / MME

POINTS

Point:

Off

0

Range: any FlexAnalog parameter


MESSAGE

Point: 1

Off

↓


MESSAGE

Point: 255

Off

Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the full range of assignable parameters.


GE Multilin


NOTE

The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first “Off” value. Since DNP /

IEC 60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first “Off” point are ignored.

Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the L30 is restarted.

NOTE g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ



GSSE / GOOSE

CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SERVER

CONFIGURATION

IEC 61850 LOGICAL

NODE NAME PREFIXES

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MMXU DEADBANDS

GGIO1 STATUS

CONFIGURATION

GGIO2 CONTROL

CONFIGURATION

GGIO4 ANALOG

CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GGIO5 UINTEGER

CONFIGURATION

REPORT CONTROL

CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

XCBR

CONFIGURATION

XSWI

CONFIGURATION

The L30 Line Current Differential System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability.

This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol features are not available if CPU type E is ordered.

5

The L30 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The L30 operates as an IEC 61850 server. The Remote inputs and outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme.

The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö

GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION

GSSE / GOOSE

CONFIGURATION

TRANSMISSION

MESSAGE

RECEPTION

The main transmission menu is shown below:

GE Multilin



5

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

TRANSMISSION

GENERAL

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GSSE

FIXED GOOSE

CONFIGURABLE

GOOSE

The general transmission settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

Ö

GENERAL

GENERAL

DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE

UPDATE TIME: 60 s


The

DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME

sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote output state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval.

The

DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME

setting is applicable to GSSE, fixed L30 GOOSE, and configurable GOOSE.

The GSSE settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ

GSEE

GSSE

GSSE FUNCTION:

Enabled


Range: 65-character ASCII string

MESSAGE

GSSE ID:

GSSEOut

Range: standard MAC address

MESSAGE

DESTINATION MAC:

000000000000

These settings are applicable to GSSE only. If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled, GSSE messages are not transmitted.

The

GSSE ID

setting represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This string identifies the GSSE message to the receiving device. In L30 releases previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the

RELAY NAME

setting.


GE Multilin


The fixed GOOSE settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ

FIXED GOOSE

FIXED GOOSE

GOOSE FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

GOOSE ID:

GOOSEOut


MESSAGE

DESTINATION MAC:

000000000000


MESSAGE

GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY:

4


MESSAGE

GOOSE VLAN ID:

0


MESSAGE

GOOSE ETYPE APPID:

0

These settings are applicable to fixed (DNA/UserSt) GOOSE only.

The

GOOSE ID

setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE message. This string identifies the GOOSE message to the receiving device. In revisions previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the

RELAY NAME

setting.

The

DESTINATION MAC

setting allows the destination Ethernet MAC address to be set. This address must be a multicast address; the least significant bit of the first byte must be set. In L30 releases previous to 5.0x, the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address (that is, the unique, local MAC address of the

L30) and setting the multicast bit.

The

GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY

setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The

GOOSE ETYPE APPID

setting allows the selection of a specific application

ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the

GOOSE VLAN

PRIORITY

and

GOOSE ETYPE APPID

settings are required by IEC 61850.

5

GE Multilin



5

The configurable GOOSE settings are shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ

CONFIGURABLE GOOSE

Ö

CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)

CONFIGURABLE

GOOSE 1

CONFIG GSE 1

FUNCTION: Enabled



MESSAGE

CONFIG GSE 1 ID:

GOOSEOut_1


MESSAGE

CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC:

010CDC010000


MESSAGE

CONFIG GSE 1

VLAN PRIORITY: 4


MESSAGE

CONFIG GSE 1

VLAN ID: 0


MESSAGE

CONFIG GSE 1

ETYPE APPID: 0


MESSAGE

CONFIG GSE 1

CONFREV: 1

Range: Aggressive, Medium, Relaxed, Heartbeat

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CONFIG GSE 1 RESTRANS

CURVE: Relaxed

CONFIG GSE 1

DATASET ITEMS

Range: 64 data items; each can be set to all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data

The configurable GOOSE settings allow the L30 to be configured to transmit a number of different datasets within IEC

61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured and transmitted. This is useful for intercommunication between L30 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.

The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the L30.

The L30 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data transfer between devices.

Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.

Datasets 1 and 2 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in the required dataset to enable transmission of configured data. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 or 2 will not activate transmission.

Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every

100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a

GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.

For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected.

The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.

The L30 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the L30 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the L30 will continue to block transmission of the dataset. The L30 will assert the

MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill

self-test error message on the front panel display, where

XXX

denotes the data item detected as oscillating.

For versions 5.70 and higher, the L30 supports four retransmission schemes: aggressive, medium, relaxed, and heartbeat.

The aggressive scheme is only supported in fast type 1A GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 1 and GOOSEOut 2). For slow

GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 3 to GOOSEOut 8) the aggressive scheme is the same as the medium scheme.


GE Multilin


The details about each scheme are shown in the following table.

1

2

5

0

3

4

1

2

5

0

3

4

0

1

2

2

3

4

5

5

0

3

4

1

Table 5–1: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES

SCHEME

Aggressive

Medium

Relaxed

Heartbeat

SQ NUM

100 ms

200 ms

700 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

0 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

TIME FROM THE

EVENT

0 ms

4 ms

8 ms

16 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

0 ms

16 ms

32 ms

64 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

0 ms

100 ms

100 ms

500 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

0 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

TIME BETWEEN

MESSAGES

0 ms

4 ms

4 ms

8 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

0 ms

16 ms

16 ms

32 ms

Heartbeat

Heartbeat

0 ms

T1

T2

T0

T0

T1

T1

T2

T0

T0

Event

T1

T0

Event

T1

T1

T2

T0

T0

Event

COMMENT TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE

IN MESSAGE

Event 2000 ms

T1

T1

T2

T0

2000 ms

2000 ms

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

2000 ms

2000 ms

2000 ms

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

2000 ms

2000 ms

2000 ms

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

2000 ms

2000 ms

2000 ms

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

Heartbeat * 4, 5

The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series

IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs.

IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).

The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The general steps required for transmission configuration are:

1.

Configure the transmission dataset.

2.

Configure the GOOSE service settings.

3.

Configure the data.

The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1.

Configure the reception dataset.

2.


3.

Configure the data.

5

GE Multilin



5

This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.

The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.

1.

Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ


Ö

CONFIGURABLE

GOOSE 1

ÖØ

CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS

settings menu:

– Set

ITEM 1

to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q” to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1.

– Set

ITEM 2

to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.

– Set

ITEM 3

to “MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f” to indicate the analog frequency magnitude for MMXU1 (the metered frequency for SRC1).

The transmission dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.

2.

Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ


Ö

CONFIGU-

RABLE GOOSE 1

settings menu:

– Set

CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION

to “Enabled”.

– Set

CONFIG GSE 1 ID

to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is “GOOSEOut_1”).

– Set

CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC

to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY

; the default value of “4” is OK for this example.

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID

value; the default value is “0”, but some switches may require this value to be “1”.

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID

value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match the configuration on the receiver (the default value is “0”).

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV

value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For this example it can be left at its default value.

3.

Configure the data by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ

IEC 61850 PROTO-

COL

Ö

GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION

settings menu:

– Set

GGIO1 INDICATION 1

to a FlexLogic™ operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).

4.

Configure the MMXU1 Hz Deadband by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ


ÖØ

MMXU DEADBANDS

ÖØ

MMXU1 DEADBANDS

settings menu:

– Set

MMXU1 HZ DEADBAND

to “0.050%”. This will result in an update to the MMXU1.MX.mag.f analog value with a change greater than 45 mHz, from the previous MMXU1.MX.mag.f value, in the source frequency.

The L30 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.

The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.

1.

Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ

IEC

61850 PROTOCOL

Ö


ÖØ

RECEPTION

ÖØ


Ö


1

ÖØ


settings menu:

– Set

ITEM 1


– Set

ITEM 2


– Set

ITEM 3

to “GGIO3.MX.AnIn1.mag.f” to indicate the analog magnitude for GGIO3 analog input 1.

The reception dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.

2.


INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE DEVICES

ÖØ

REMOTE DEVICE 1

settings menu:

– Set

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID

to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter “GOOSEOut_1”.


GE Multilin


– Set

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID

to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is

“0” in the example above.

– Set the

REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET

value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as “GOOSEIn 1”.

3.

Configure the Boolean data by making the following changes in the

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE INPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE

INPUT 1

settings menu:

– Set

REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE

to “GOOSEOut_1”.

– Set

REMOTE IN 1 ITEM

to “Dataset Item 2”. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status item to remote input 1.

4.

Configure the analog data by making the following changes in the

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOG

INPUTS

settings menu:

– Set the

IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 DEFAULT VALUE

to “60.000”.

– Enter “Hz” for the

IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS

setting.

The GOOSE analog input 1 can now be used as a FlexAnalog™ value in a FlexElement™ or in other settings. The L30 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.

The value of GOOSE analog input 1 in the receiving device will be determined by the MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f value in the sending device. This MMXU value is determined by the source 1 frequency value and the MMXU Hz deadband setting of the sending device.

Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic™ equations or other settings. The L30 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.

The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.

For intercommunication between L30 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the L30

(DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN support).

Set the


function to “Disabled” when configuration changes are required. Once changes are entered, return the


to “Enabled” and restart the unit for changes to take effect.

NOTE

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

CONFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS

CONFIG GSE 1

DATASET ITEMS

ITEM 1:

GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal

Range: all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data

MESSAGE

ITEM 2:

GGIO1.ST.IndPos1.stV


MESSAGE

ITEM 3:

None


↓

MESSAGE

ITEM 64:

None


To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated quality flags, the following dataset items can be selected: “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” and “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q”. The L30 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic™ operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages containing the defined dataset.

5

GE Multilin



5

The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items for reception:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

RECEPTION

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

CONFIG GSE 1(32) DATA ITEMS

CONFIG GSE 1

DATASET ITEMS

ITEM 1:

GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal


MESSAGE

ITEM 2:

GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV


MESSAGE

ITEM 3:

None


↓

MESSAGE

ITEM 32:

None


The configurable GOOSE settings allow the L30 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC

61850 GOOSE messages. Up to sixteen different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for intercommunication between L30 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.

For intercommunication between L30 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages.

To set up a L30 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): “GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal” and

“GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal”. The L30 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic™ operands. First, the

REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET

setting must be set to contain dataset “GOOSEIn 1” (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then

REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM

settings must be set to “Dataset Item 1” and “Dataset Item 2”. These remote input FlexLogic™ operands will then change state in accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset.

Double-point status values may be included in the GOOSE dataset. Received values are populated in the

GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal and higher items.

Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (noninstantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 and higher items.

Received values are also available as FlexAnalog™ parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up).

GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 to GGIO3.MX.AnIn32 can only be used once for all sixteen reception datasets.

NOTE

The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

SERVER CONFIGURATION

SERVER

CONFIGURATION

IED NAME: IECDevice

Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters

LD INST: LDInst


MESSAGE

LOCATION: Location


MESSAGE


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

IEC/MMS TCP PORT

NUMBER: 102

INCLUDE NON-IEC

DATA: Enabled

SERVER SCANNING:

Disabled




GE Multilin


The

IED NAME

and

LD INST

settings represent the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The

LOCATION

is a variable string and can be composed of ASCII characters. This string appears within the PhyName of the LPHD node.

The

IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER

setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The

INCLUDE

NON-IEC DATA

setting determines whether or not the “UR” MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large number of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC

61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be

“Disabled”.

The

SERVER SCANNING

feature should be set to “Disabled” when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC

61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the

GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node status values in the L30. Clients will still be able to connect to the server (L30 relay), but most data values will not be updated.

This setting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation.

Changes to the

IED NAME

setting,

LD INST

setting, and GOOSE dataset will not take effect until the L30 is restarted.

NOTE

The main menu for the IEC 61850 logical node name prefixes is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES

IEC 61850 LOGICAL

NODE NAME PREFIXES

PIOC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PTOC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES

↓

PTRC LOGICAL NODE

NAME PREFIXES

The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node.

For example, the logical node “PTOC1” may have the name prefix “abc”. The full logical node name will then be

“abcMMXU1”. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard.

Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the L30 is restarted.

The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

MMXU DEADBANDS

MMXU DEADBANDS

MMXU1 DEADBANDS

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MMXU2 DEADBANDS

MMXU3 DEADBANDS

MMXU4 DEADBANDS

The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU “mag” and

“cVal” values from the associated “instmag” and “instcVal” values. The “mag” and “cVal” values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated “db” data items in the CF functional con-

5

GE Multilin



5

straint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value “shall represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%”. Thus, it is important to know the maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband.

The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows:

• phase current: 46

× phase CT primary setting

• neutral current: 46

× ground CT primary setting

• voltage: 275

× VT ratio setting

• power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46

× phase CT primary setting × 275 × VT ratio setting

• frequency: 90 Hz

• power factor: 2

The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ


GGIO1 STATUS

CONFIGURATION

NUMBER OF STATUS

POINTS IN GGIO1: 8


1


MESSAGE

GGIO1 INDICATION

Off

2


MESSAGE


Off

3


MESSAGE


Off

↓


MESSAGE


Off

The

NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1

setting specifies the number of “Ind” (single point status indications) that are instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. Changes to the

NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1

setting will not take effect until the L30 is restarted.

The GGIO2 control configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

GGIO2 CONTROL CONFIGURATION

Ö

GGIO2 CF SPSCO 1(64)

GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1

GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1

CTLMODEL: 1

Range: 0, 1, or 2

The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are “0”

(status only), “1” (direct control), and “2” (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the L30 virtual inputs.


GE Multilin


The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION

GGIO4 ANALOG

CONFIGURATION

NUMBER OF ANALOG

POINTS IN GGIO4: 8


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GGIO4 ANALOG 1

MEASURED VALUE

GGIO4 ANALOG 2

MEASURED VALUE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GGIO4 ANALOG 3

MEASURED VALUE

↓

GGIO4 ANALOG 32

MEASURED VALUE

The

NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS

setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4. When this value is changed, the L30 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re-instantiated and contain the newly configured number of analog points.

The measured value settings for each of the 32 analog values are shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT...

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE

GGIO4 ANALOG 1

MEASURED VALUE

ANALOG IN 1 VALUE:

Off

Range: any FlexAnalog value

Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

ANALOG IN 1 DB:

0.000

MESSAGE

ANALOG IN 1 MIN:

0.000

Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

ANALOG IN 1 MAX:

0.000


These settings are configured as follows.

• ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 analog status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f).

• ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values.

• ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and

61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.

• ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and

61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.

NOTE

Note that the

ANALOG IN 1 MIN

and

ANALOG IN 1 MAX

settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.

5

GE Multilin



5

The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ


GGIO5 UINTEGER

CONFIGURATION

GGIO5 UINT In 1:

Off

Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter


MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE


Off

↓


MESSAGE

GGIO5 UINT 1n 16:

Off

The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values. This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points, associated timestamps, and quality flags. The method of configuration is similar to that of

GGIO1 (binary status values). The settings allow the selection of FlexInteger™ values for each GGIO5 integer value point.

It is intended that clients use GGIO5 to access generic integer values from the L30. Additional settings are provided to allow the selection of the number of integer values available in GGIO5 (1 to 16), and to assign FlexInteger™ values to the

GGIO5 integer inputs. The following setting is available for all GGIO5 configuration points.

• GGIO5 UINT IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexInteger™ value to drive each GGIO5 integer status value

(GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1). This setting is stored as an 32-bit unsigned integer value.

The report control configuration settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

REPORT CONTROL CONFIGURATION

Ö

CONFIGURABLE REPORT 1

Ö

REPORT 1 DATASET ITEMS

REPORT 1

DATASET ITEMS

ITEM 1:

Range: all valid MMS data item references

ITEM 2:

Range: as shown above

MESSAGE

ITEM 3:


MESSAGE

↓

ITEM 64:


MESSAGE

To create the dataset for logical node LN, program the

ITEM 1

to

ITEM 64

settings to a value from the list of IEC 61850 data attributes supported by the L30. Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the L30 is restarted. It is recommended to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some (but not all) data from already existing GGIO1,

GGIO4, and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset.


GE Multilin


The breaker configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

XCBR CONFIGURATION

XCBR

CONFIGURATION

XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND

Off



MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE


Off

↓


MESSAGE


Off

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt:

No

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE


No

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE


No

↓

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE


No

The

CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt

setting represents the breaker operating counter. As breakers operate by opening and closing, the

XCBR operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent breaker operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XCBR1.

5

GE Multilin



5

The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


ÖØ

XSWI CONFIGURATION

XSWI

CONFIGURATION

XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND

Off



MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE


Off

↓


MESSAGE


Off

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt:

No

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE


No

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE


No

↓

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE


No

The

CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt

setting represents the disconnect switch operating counter. As disconnect switches operate by opening and closing, the XSWI operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent switch operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XSWI1.

NOTE

Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast Ethernet by specification, they will not usually be forwarded by network routers. However, GOOSE messages may be fowarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN functionality.

h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

WEB SERVER

HTTP PROTOCOL

HTTP TCP PORT

NUMBER: 80


The L30 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft

Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. This feature is available only if the L30 has the ethernet option installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the L30 “Main Menu”. Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, etc. The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The main menu will be displayed in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the L30 into the “Address” box on the web browser.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP i) TFTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

TFTP PROTOCOL

TFTP PROTOCOL

TFTP MAIN UDP PORT

NUMBER: 69



MESSAGE

TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1

NUMBER: 0


MESSAGE

TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2

NUMBER: 0

The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the L30 over a network. The L30 operates as a

TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained from the L30 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).

j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

IEC 60870-5-104

PROTOCOL

IEC 60870-5-104




MESSAGE

MESSAGE

IEC TCP PORT

NUMBER: 2404

IEC NETWORK



MESSAGE

IEC COMMON ADDRESS

OF ASDU: 0


MESSAGE

IEC CYCLIC DATA

PERIOD: 60 s


MESSAGE

IEC CURRENT DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000


MESSAGE

IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT



MESSAGE

IEC POWER DEFAULT



MESSAGE

IEC ENERGY DEFAULT



MESSAGE

IEC OTHER DEFAULT


The L30 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The L30 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the L30 maintains two sets of IEC

60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the L30 at one time.

The

IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD

settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing

M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the L30 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.

Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger spontaneous responses from the L30 when any current values change by 15 A, the

IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD

setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual

M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the L30, the default thresholds will be in effect.

The L30 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the

IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD

setting is not applicable.

NOTE

5

GE Multilin



5

NOTE

The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be used simultaneously. When the

IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).

k) SNTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

SNTP PROTOCOL

SNTP PROTOCOL

SNTP FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

SNTP SERVER IP ADDR:

0.0.0.0


MESSAGE

SNTP UDP PORT

NUMBER: 123

The L30 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the L30 can obtain clock time over an Ethernet network. The L30 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.

If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the L30 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the L30 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.

To use SNTP in unicast mode,

SNTP SERVER IP ADDR

must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set and

SNTP FUNCTION

is “Enabled”, the L30 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the L30 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the L30 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.

To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the

SNTP SERVER IP ADDR

setting to “0.0.0.0” and

SNTP FUNCTION

to “Enabled”. The

L30 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The L30 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.

The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.

l) ETHERNET SWITCH

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

ETHERNET SWITCH

ETHERNET SWITCH

SWITCH IP ADDRESS:

127.0.0.1

Range: standard IP address format


MESSAGE

SWITCH MODBUS TCP

PORT NUMBER: 502


MESSAGE

PORT 1 EVENTS:

Disabled


MESSAGE

PORT 2 EVENTS:

Disabled

↓


MESSAGE

PORT 6 EVENTS:

Disabled

These settings appear only if the L30 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T).

The IP address and Modbus TCP port number for the Ethernet switch module are specified in this menu. These settings are used in advanced network configurations. Please consult the network administrator before making changes to these settings. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) is the preferred interface to configure these settings.

The

PORT 1 EVENTS

through

PORT 6 EVENTS

settings allow Ethernet switch module events to be logged in the event recorder.


GE Multilin


PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

REAL TIME CLOCK

REAL TIME

CLOCK

IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:

None

MESSAGE

REAL TIME CLOCK


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

LOCAL TIME OFFSET

FROM UTC: 0.0 hrs

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

TIME: Disabled

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DST START MONTH:

April

DST START DAY:

Sunday

DST START DAY

INSTANCE: First

DST START HOUR:

2:00

DST STOP MONTH:

April

DST STOP DAY:

Sunday

DST STOP DAY

INSTANCE: First

DST STOP HOUR:

2:00

Range: 0:00 to 23:00

Range: 0:00 to 23:00

5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

MODBUS USER MAP

MODBUS USER MAP

ADDRESS

VALUE:

1:

0

MESSAGE

ADDRESS 2:

VALUE: 0

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

ADDRESS 3:

VALUE: 0

↓

ADDRESS 256:

VALUE: 0

0

0

0

0





The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired address in the

ADDRESS

line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the

VALUE

line. A value of “0” in subsequent register

ADDRESS

lines automatically returns values for the previous

ADDRESS

lines incremented by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” will be displayed for all registers. Different

ADDRESS

values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.

5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK

Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated


Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5


Range: January to December (all months)

Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)

Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last

Range: January to December (all months)

Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)

Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last

5

GE Multilin



If the L30 channel asymmetry function is enabled, the IRIG-B input must be connected to the GPS receiver and the proper receiver signal type assigned.

NOTE

The date and time can be synchronized a known time base and to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month. If an IRIG-B signal is connected to the relay, only the current year needs to be entered. See the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

SET DATE AND TIME

menu to manually set the relay clock.

The

REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS

setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record.

The

LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC

setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time

(Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. This setting has two uses. When the L30 is time synchronized with IRIG-B, or has no permanent time synchronization, the offset is used to calculate UTC time for IEC 61850 features. When the L30 is time synchronized with SNTP, the offset is used to determine the local time for the L30 clock, since SNTP provides UTC time.

The daylight savings time (DST) settings can be used to allow the L30 clock can follow the DST rules of the local time zone.

Note that when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the DST settings are ignored. The DST settings are used when the

L30 is synchronized with SNTP, or when neither SNTP nor IRIG-B is used.

Only timestamps in the event recorder and communications protocols are affected by the daylight savings time settings. The reported real-time clock value does not change.

NOTE

5

5.2.7 FAULT REPORTS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

FAULT REPORTS

Ö

FAULT REPORT 1

FAULT REPORT 1

FAULT REPORT 1

SOURCE: SRC 1

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2


MESSAGE

FAULT REPORT 1 TRIG:

Off

Range: 0.01 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

FAULT REPORT 1 Z1

MAG: 3.00

Ω

Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1

MESSAGE


ANGLE: 75°


MESSAGE


MAG: 9.00

Ω


MESSAGE


ANGLE: 75°

Range: km, miles

MESSAGE

FAULT REPORT 1 LINE

LENGTH UNITS: km


MESSAGE

FAULT REP 1 LENGTH

(km ): 100.0

Range: None, I0, V0

MESSAGE

FAULT REPORT 1 VT

SUBSTITUTION: None


MESSAGE

FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM

Z0 MAG: 2.00

Ω


MESSAGE

FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM

Z0 ANGLE: 75°

The L30 relay supports one fault report and an associated fault locator. The signal source and trigger condition, as well as the characteristics of the line or feeder, are entered in this menu.

The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data contained in the FaultReport.txt file includes:

• Fault report number.


GE Multilin


• Name of the relay, programmed by the user.

• Firmware revision of the relay.

• Date and time of trigger.

• Name of trigger (specific operand).

• Line or feeder ID via the name of a configured signal source.

• Active setting group at the time of trigger.

• Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (two cycles before either a 50DD disturbance associated with fault report source or the trigger operate). Once a disturbance is detected, pre-fault phasors hold for 3 seconds waiting for the fault report trigger. If trigger does not occur within this time, the values are cleared to prepare for the next disturbance.

• Fault current and voltage phasors (one cycle after the trigger).

• Elements operated at the time of triggering.

• Events: 9 before trigger and 7 after trigger (only available via the relay webpage).

• Fault duration times for each breaker (created by the breaker arcing current feature).

The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number

(when applicable) To include fault duration times in the fault report, the user must enable and configure breaker arcing current feature for each of the breakers. Fault duration is reported on a per-phase basis.

The relay allows locating faults, including ground faults, from delta-connected VTs. In this case, the missing zero-sequence voltage is substituted either by the externally provided neutral voltage (broken delta VT) connected to the auxiliary voltage channel of a VT bank, or by the zero-sequence voltage approximated as a voltage drop developed by the zero-sequence current, and user-provided zero-sequence equivalent impedance of the system behind the relay.

The trigger can be any FlexLogic™ operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a virtual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, the disturbance detector should not be used to trigger a fault report. A

FAULT RPT TRIG

event is automatically created when the report is triggered.

If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the

OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms.

Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is fifteen (15) files. An sixteenth (16th) trigger overwrites the oldest file.

The EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the date and time of trigger, the fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number.

The

FAULT REPORT 1 SOURCE

setting selects the source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection.

The

FAULT 1 REPORT TRIG

setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection element/elements requiring operational fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal. The


MAG

and

FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG

impedances are entered in secondary ohms.

The

FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION

setting shall be set to “None” if the relay is fed from wye-connected VTs. If delta-connected VTs are used, and the relay is supplied with the neutral (3V0) voltage, this setting shall be set to “V0”. The method is still exact, as the fault locator would combine the line-to-line voltage measurements with the neutral voltage measurement to re-create the line-to-ground voltages. See the

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

RECORDS

Ö

FAULT REPORTS

menu for additional details. It required to configure the delta and neutral voltages under the source indicated as input for the fault report. Also, the relay will check if the auxiliary signal configured is marked as “Vn” by the user (under VT setup), and inhibit the fault location if the auxiliary signal is labeled differently.

If the broken-delta neutral voltage is not available to the relay, an approximation is possible by assuming the missing zerosequence voltage to be an inverted voltage drop produced by the zero-sequence current and the user-specified equivalent zero-sequence system impedance behind the relay: V0 = –Z0

× I0. In order to enable this mode of operation, the

FAULT

REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION

setting shall be set to “I0”.

5

GE Multilin



5

The

FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 MAG

and

FAULT REP 1 SYSTEM Z0 ANGLE

settings are used only when the

VT SUBSTITUTION

setting value is “I0”. The magnitude is to be entered in secondary ohms. This impedance is an average system equivalent behind the relay. It can be calculated as zero-sequence Thevenin impedance at the local bus with the protected line/feeder disconnected. The method is accurate only if this setting matches perfectly the actual system impedance during the fault. If the system exhibits too much variability, this approach is questionable and the fault location results for single-line-to-ground faults shall be trusted with accordingly. It should be kept in mind that grounding points in vicinity of the installation impact the system zero-sequence impedance (grounded loads, reactors, zig-zag transformers, shunt capacitor banks, etc.).

5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

OSCILLOGRAPHY

OSCILLOGRAPHY

NUMBER OF RECORDS:

15

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

TRIGGER MODE:

Automatic Overwrite

TRIGGER POSITION:

50%

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

TRIGGER SOURCE:

Off

AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:

16 samples/cycle

DIGITAL CHANNELS

ANALOG CHANNELS


Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1


Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.

Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously.

The

NUMBER OF RECORDS

is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

RECORDS

ÖØ

OSCILLOGRAPHY

menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record.

Table 5–2: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE

RECORDS

8

8

8

8

32

8

8

1

1

CT/VTS

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

32

64

64

16

16

16

16

SAMPLE

RATE

8

16

DIGITALS

16

63

63

63

63

0

16

16

16

ANALOGS

4

16

16

16

16

0

4

0

0

CYCLES/

RECORD

1872.0

1685.0

276.0

219.5

93.5

93.5

57.6

32.3

9.5

A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if

TRIGGER MODE

is set to “Automatic Overwrite”.


GE Multilin


Set the

TRIGGER POSITION

to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of

25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The

TRIGGER SOURCE

is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.

The

AC INPUT WAVEFORMS

setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.

When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.

WARNING b) DIGITAL CHANNELS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

OSCILLOGRAPHY

ÖØ



DIGITAL CHANNEL 1:

Off



MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE


Off

↓


MESSAGE


Off

A

DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL

setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored.

Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.

c) ANALOG CHANNELS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

OSCILLOGRAPHY

ÖØ

ANALOG CHANNELS

ANALOG CHANNELS

ANALOG CHANNEL 1:

Off

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

See Appendix A for complete list.

MESSAGE


Off



MESSAGE


Off

↓



MESSAGE


Off



These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on:

• The type of relay,

• The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and

• The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.

Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.

5

GE Multilin



5

All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:

<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>

The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.

If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.

5.2.9 DATA LOGGER

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER MODE:

Continuous

MESSAGE

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DATA LOGGER RATE:

60000 ms

DATA LOGGER CHNL 1:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


Off


Off

↓


Off

DATA LOGGER CONFIG:

0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS

Range: Continuous, Trigger



Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:

FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.







Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only

The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.

All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.

For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Example storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table.


GE Multilin


Table 5–3: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE

SAMPLING RATE

15 ms

1000 ms

60000 ms

3600000 ms

8

9

16

1

8

9

16

1

8

9

16

1

8

9

CHANNELS

1

0.1

45.4

5.6

5

2.8

2727.5

340.9

303

0.1

0.7

0.1

0.1

DAYS

0.1

0.1

0.1

STORAGE CAPACITY

954 s

120 s

107 s

60 s

65457 s

8182 s

7273 s

4091 s

3927420 s

490920 s

436380 s

254460 s

235645200 s

29455200 s

26182800 s

Changing any setting affecting data logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.

NOTE

• DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to “Continuous”, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the

DATA LOGGER RATE

. The data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to “Trigger”, the data logger will begin to record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER

source FlexLogic™ operand. The data logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full a

CLEAR DATA LOGGER

command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the

CLEAR DATA LOGGER

command will also stop the current record and reset the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.

• DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any

FlexLogic™ operand can be used as the trigger source. The

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER

setting only applies when the mode is set to “Trigger”.

• DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.

• DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/

VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display – entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.

• DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to “Off” without over-writing old data.

5

GE Multilin



5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS


LEDS

LED TEST

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

TRIP & ALARM LEDS


LED1


LED2

↓


LED48

See below

See page 5–46.

See page 5–46.

5 b) LED TEST

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


Ö

LED TEST

LED TEST

LED TEST FUNCTION:

Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled.


MESSAGE

LED TEST CONTROL:

Off

When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the

LED TEST CONTROL

setting. The test covers all LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.

The test consists of three stages.

1.

All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned”. This stage lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.

2.

All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.

3.

All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.

When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.

A dedicated FlexLogic™ operand,

LED TEST IN PROGRESS

, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the

LED TEST INITIATED

event is stored in the event recorder.

The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the

LED TEST CONTROL

setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.


GE Multilin


READY TO TEST rising edge of the control input

Start the software image of the LEDs

Reset the

LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand

Restore the LED states from the software image control input is on

Set the

LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand

STAGE 1

(all LEDs on) dropping edge of the control input

Wait 1 second time-out

(1 minute) rising edge of the control input

STAGE 2

(one LED on at a time) rising edge of the control input

Wait 1 second rising edge of the control input

STAGE 3

(one LED off at a time) rising edge of the control input

842011A1.CDR

Figure 5–3: LED TEST SEQUENCE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:

Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


Ö


menu:


“Self-reset”


“0.10 s”

Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


Ö

LED TEST

menu:

LED TEST FUNCTION:

“Enabled”

LED TEST CONTROL:

“

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

”

The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:

Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.

After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next, release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.

5

GE Multilin



5 c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ



TRIP LED INPUT:

Off



MESSAGE

ALARM LED INPUT:

Off

The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state.

d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)


LED 1

LED 1 OPERAND:

Off


Range: Self-Reset, Latched

MESSAGE

LED 1 TYPE:

Self-Reset

There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state.

For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.

• LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24

• LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48

For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.

• LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12




Refer to the LED indicators section in chapter 4 for additional information on the location of these indexed LEDs.

The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic™ operands that control the LEDs. If the

LED 1 TYPE

setting is

“Self-Reset” (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the

LED 1 TYPE

setting is “Latched”, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.

Table 5–4: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

SETTING

LED 1 operand

LED 2 operand

LED 3 operand

LED 4 operand

LED 5 operand

LED 6 operand

LED 7 operand

LED 8 operand

LED 9 operand

LED 10 operand

LED 11 operand

LED 12 operand

PARAMETER

SETTING GROUP ACT 1

SETTING GROUP ACT 2

SETTING GROUP ACT 3

SETTING GROUP ACT 4

SETTING GROUP ACT 5

SETTING GROUP ACT 6

Off

Off

BREAKER 1 OPEN

BREAKER 1 CLOSED

BREAKER 1 TROUBLE

Off

SETTING

LED 13 operand

LED 14 operand

LED 15 operand

LED 16 operand

LED 17 operand

LED 18 operand

LED 19 operand

LED 20 operand

LED 21 operand

LED 22 operand

LED 23 operand

LED 24 operand

PARAMETER

Off

BREAKER 2 OPEN

BREAKER 2 CLOSED

BREAKER 2 TROUBLE

SYNC 1 SYNC OP

SYNC 2 SYNC OP

Off

Off

AR ENABLED

AR DISABLED

AR RIP

AR LO


GE Multilin


5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS


SELF TESTS

REMOTE DEVICE OFF


Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a

CPU with Ethernet capability.

MESSAGE

PRI. ETHERNET FAIL



CPU with a primary fiber port.

MESSAGE

SEC. ETHERNET FAIL



CPU with a redundant fiber port.


MESSAGE

BATTERY FAIL


MESSAGE

SNTP FAIL



CPU with Ethernet capability.


MESSAGE

IRIG-B FAIL



MESSAGE

ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL


All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic™ operands, events, and targets.

Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired.

When in the “Disabled” mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic™ operand, write to the event recorder, or display target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the

ANY MINOR ALARM

or

ANY SELF-TEST

messages. When in the “Enabled” mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay self-tests section in chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.

To enable the Ethernet switch failure function, ensure that the

ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION

is “Enabled” in this menu.

NOTE

5

5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

Ö

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)

CONTROL

PUSHBUTTON 1

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1




MESSAGE

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1


There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.

GE Multilin



The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.

Control pushbuttons

842813A1.CDR

Figure 5–4: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the L30 is ordered with the twelve userprogrammable pushbutton option.

STATUS

IN SERVICE

TROUBLE

TEST MODE

TRIP

ALARM

PICKUP

EVENT CAUSE

VOLTAGE

CURRENT

FREQUENCY

OTHER

PHASE A

PHASE B

PHASE C

NEUTRAL/GROUND

RESET

USER 1

USER 2

USER 3

THREE

STANDARD

CONTROL

PUSHBUTTONS

5

USER 4

USER 5

USER 6

USER 7

FOUR EXTRA

OPTIONAL

CONTROL

PUSHBUTTONS

842733A2.CDR

Figure 5–5: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.

Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic™ operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.

An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously – a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed.

The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual control via the USER 1 through 3 pushbuttons as shown below. If configured for manual control, breaker control typically uses the larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other user applications.

{

Enabled=1

SETTING

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON

1 FUNCTION:

Enabled=1

SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETUP/

BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/

BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON

CONTROL :

Enabled=1

SYSTEM SETUP/

BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/


CONTROL :

AND RUN

OFF

ON

TIMER

0

100 msec

Figure 5–6: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON

842010A2.CDR


GE Multilin


5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


Ö

USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)


PUSHBUTTON 1


Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:

Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:


MESSAGE

PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PUSHBTN 1 HOLD:

0.0 s

PUSHBTN 1 SET:

Off

PUSHBTN 1 RESET:

Off

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST:

Disabled

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST

DELAY: 1.0 s

PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE:

Off

PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL:

Off

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT

TIME: 0.00 s

PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL:

Off

PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE:

Disabled

PUSHBUTTON 1









Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05


Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority


The optional user-programmable pushbuttons (specified in the order code) provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The number of available pushbuttons is dependent on the faceplate module ordered with the relay.

• Type P faceplate: standard horizontal faceplate with 12 user-programmable pushbuttons.

• Type Q faceplate: enhanced horizontal faceplate with 16 user-programmable pushbuttons.

The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic™ operands) into FlexLogic™ equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection.

The user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below.

5

GE Multilin



USER

LABEL 1

USER

LABEL 2

USER

LABEL 3

USER

LABEL 4

USER

LABEL 5

USER

LABEL 6

USER

LABEL 7

USER

LABEL 8

USER

LABEL 9

USER

LABEL 10

USER

LABEL 11

USER

LABEL 12

USER

LABEL 13

USER

LABEL 14

USER

LABEL 15

USER

LABEL 16

842814A1.CDR

Figure 5–7: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

The user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard faceplate are shown below.

1

USER LABEL

3

USER LABEL

5

USER LABEL

7

USER LABEL

9

USER LABEL

11

USER LABEL

5

2

USER LABEL

4

USER LABEL

6

USER LABEL

8

USER LABEL

10

USER LABEL

12

USER LABEL

842779A1.CDR

Figure 5–8: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Both the standard and enhanced faceplate pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at http://www.GEmultilin.com

. The EnerVista UR Setup software can also be used to create labels for the enhanced faceplate.

Each pushbutton asserts its own “On” and “Off” FlexLogic™ operands (for example,

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

and

PUSHBUTTON

1 OFF

). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is active, the

ANY PB ON

operand will be asserted.

Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic™ operand through the

PUSHBTN

1 LED CTL

setting.

The pushbuttons can be automatically controlled by activating the operands assigned to the

PUSHBTN 1 SET

(for latched and self-reset mode) and

PUSHBTN 1 RESET

(for latched mode only) settings. The pushbutton reset status is declared when the

PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF

operand is asserted. The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset mode is programmed.

• Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the

PUSH-

BTN 1 SET

setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by the reset command or after a user-specified time delay. The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power.

The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the

PUSHBTN 1 RESET

setting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.

It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST

and

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY

settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period.

• Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a pushbutton will remain active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus the dropout time specified in the

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME

setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic™, the pulse duration is specified by the


only. The time the operand remains assigned to the

PUSH-

BTN 1 SET

setting has no effect on the pulse duration.

NOTE

The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in self-reset mode when the dropout delay specified in the

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT

TIME

setting expires.

The pulse duration of the remote set, remote reset, or local pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion of the operating signals.


GE Multilin


The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the

PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL

and

PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE

settings, respectively. If local locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through FlexLogic™ operands.

The locking functions are not applied to the autorestart feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.

The locking functions can also be used to prevent the accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control supervision.

Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder and displayed as target messages. In latched mode, user-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is on or changing to off.

• PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to “Disabled”, the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If set to “Self-

Reset”, the control logic is activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed or virtually pressed via a FlexLogic™ operand assigned to the

PUSHBTN 1 SET

setting.

When in “Self-Reset” mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the “On” corresponding Flex-

Logic™ operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the deactivation of the operand is delayed by the drop out timer. The “Off” operand is asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated. If the pushbutton is activated remotely, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the corresponding “On” Flex-

Logic™ operand only for the time period specified by the


setting.

If set to “Latched”, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic™ operand between “On” and

“Off” on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning set and reset operands). When in the

“Latched” mode, the states of the FlexLogic™ operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.

• PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.

• PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.

• PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the on to the off position and the

PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION

is

“Latched”. This message is not displayed when the


is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be “Off” upon its release. The length of the “Off” message is configured with the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


Ö

FLASH MESSAGE TIME

setting.

• PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active.

This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton hold timer.

• PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to operate the pushbutton element and to assert

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

operand. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 100 ms.

• PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to reset pushbutton element and to assert

PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF

operand. This setting is applicable only if pushbutton is in latched mode. The duration of the incoming reset signal must be at least 50 ms.

• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable only if the pushbutton is in the “Latched” mode.

• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in the latched mode.

• PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the operand assigned to the

PUSHBTN 1 SET

or

PUSHBTN 1 RESET

settings.

• PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.

5

GE Multilin


5


• PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to “Self-Reset” mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton active status after the pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton status; the length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.

This setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse.

• PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand serving to drive pushbutton LED. If this setting is

“Off”, then LED operation is directly linked to

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

operand.

• PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: If pushbutton message is set to “High Priority”, the message programmed in the

PUSHBTN 1

ID

and

PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT

settings will be displayed undisturbed as long as

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

operand is asserted.

The high priority option is not applicable to the

PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT

setting.

This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed. However, ten seconds of keypad inactivity will restore the message if the

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

operand is still active.

If the

PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE

is set to “Normal”, the message programmed in the

PUSHBTN 1 ID

and

PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT

settings will be displayed as long as

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

operand is asserted, but not longer than time period specified by


setting. After the flash time is expired, the default message or other active target message is displayed. The instantaneous reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active.

The


setting is linked to

PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF

operand and will be displayed in conjunction with

PUSHBTN 1 ID

only if pushbutton element is in the “Latched” mode. The


message will be displayed as “Normal” if the

PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE

setting is “High Priority” or “Normal”.

• PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each pushbutton state change will be logged as an event into event recorder.


GE Multilin


The user-programmable pushbutton logic is shown below.

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF

TIMER

200 ms

0

SETTING

Function

= Enabled

= Latched

= Self-Reset

OR

LATCHED

LATCHED/SELF-RESET

SETTING

Local Lock

Off = 0

SETTING

Remote Lock

SETTING

Hold

T

PKP

Off = 0

AND

TIMER

50 ms

TIMER

50 ms

0

OR

AND

Non-volatile latch

S

R

Latch

0

0

OR

SETTING

Set AND

Off = 0

SETTING

Reset

SETTING

Autoreset Function

= Enabled

= Disabled


PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

Off = 0

OR PUSHBUTTON ON

OR

AND

AND

SETTING

Autoreset Delay

T

PKP

AND

0

AND

SETTING

Drop-Out Timer

0

TIMER

200 ms

OR

T

RST

0

AND

Figure 5–9: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A2

To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A2

842021A3.CDR

5

GE Multilin



5

LATCHED

OR

AND

SETTING

Flash Message Time

0

T

RST

Instantaneous reset *

LCD MESSAGE

ENGAGE MESSAGE

SETTINGS

Top Text

= XXXXXXXXXX

On Text

= XXXXXXXXXX

From user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1, 842021A3

LATCHED/SELF-RESET

AND


PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF


PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

PUSHBUTTON ON

NOTE

SETTING

Message Priority

= Disabled

= High Priority

= Normal

AND

The message is temporarily removed if any keypad button is pressed. Ten (10) seconds of keypad inactivity restores the message.

LCD MESSAGE

ENGAGE MESSAGE

SETTINGS

Top Text

= XXXXXXXXXX

OR

On Text

AND

SETTING

Flash Message Time

0

T

RST

Instantaneous reset *

= XXXXXXXXXX

Instantaneous reset will be executed if any front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active.


PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

PUSHBUTTON 2 ON

PUSHBUTTON 3 ON

OR


ANY PB ON

PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC

1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.


PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

Pushbutton 1

LED

2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.

SETTING

PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL

= any FlexLogic operand

Pushbutton 1

LED

PUSHBUTTON 16 ON

The enhanced front panel has 16 operands; the standard front panel has 12

842024A2.CDR

Figure 5–10: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)

User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP or HQ faceplate. If an HP or HQ type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the correct faceplate option. This can be done via

EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.

5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

FLEX STATE

PARAMETERS

PARAMETER 1:

Off

MESSAGE

PARAMETER 2:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PARAMETER 3:

Off

↓

PARAMETER 256:

Off






GE Multilin


This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.

The state bits may be read out in the “Flex States” register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are sixteen registers to accommodate the 256 state bits.

5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


USER-DEFINABLE

DISPLAYS

INVOKE AND SCROLL:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

USER DISPLAY 1

USER DISPLAY 3

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

USER DISPLAY 2

↓

USER DISPLAY 16






This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing sequence in the

USER DISPLAYS

menu (between the

TARGETS

and

ACTUAL VALUES

top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.

Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.

• KEYPAD: Use the MENU key to select the

USER DISPLAYS

menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys. The display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

DISPLAY PROPER-

TIES

ÖØ


setting.

• USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the

INVOKE AND SCROLL

setting. Any FlexLogic™ operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays.

On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first one. The


input and the DOWN key operate concurrently.

When the default timer expires (set by the


setting), the relay will start to cycle through the user displays. The next activity of the


input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The


pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.

5

GE Multilin



5 b) USER DISPLAY 1 THROUGH 16

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


Ö

USER DISPLAY 1(16)

USER DISPLAY 1

DISP 1 TOP LINE:


DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DISP 1 ITEM 1

0

DISP 1 ITEM 2

0

DISP 1 ITEM 3

0

DISP 1 ITEM 4

0

DISP 1 ITEM 5:

0






Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and pressing the ENTER key. The display will then prompt

ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?

. After selecting “Yes”, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content – this content may subsequently be edited.

This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start of a data field – the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a user display – the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.

A user display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).

The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:

1.

Select the line to be edited.

2.

Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.

3.

Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.

4.

Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.

5.

Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.

6.

The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.

7.

Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.

To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of “0” for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this conversion).

Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in sequence, changing every four seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the ‘Yes” option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

An example user display setup and result is shown below:

USER DISPLAY 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DISP 1 TOP LINE:

Current X ~ A

DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:

Current Y ~ A

DISP 1 ITEM 1:

6016

DISP 1 ITEM 2:

6357

DISP 1 ITEM 3:

0

DISP 1 ITEM 4:

0

DISP 1 ITEM 5:

0

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Shows user-defined text with first tilde marker.

Shows user-defined text with second tilde marker.

Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register address, corresponding to first tilde marker.

Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register address, corresponding to second tilde marker.

This item is not being used. There is no corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines.



→

Current X 0.850

Current Y 0.327 A

Shows the resultant display content.

NOTE

If the parameters for the top line and the bottom line items have the same units, then the unit is displayed on the bottom line only. The units are only displayed on both lines if the units specified both the top and bottom line items are different.

5.2.16 INSTALLATION

5

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

RELAY SETTINGS:

Not Programmed

MESSAGE

RELAY NAME:

Relay-1

Range: Not Programmed, Programmed


To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output relay until

RELAY SETTINGS

is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The


self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.

The

RELAY NAME

setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.

GE Multilin


5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES 5 SETTINGS

5.3REMOTE RESOURCES 5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION

When L30 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, then an additional Remote Resources menu tree is available in EnerVista UR Setup software to allow configuring HardFiber system.

5

Figure 5–11: REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION MENU

The remote resources settings configure a L30 with a process bus module to work with devices called Bricks. Remote resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista UR Setup software, and is not available through the L30 front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The L30 with a process bus module has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection between specific fiber optic ports on the L30 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.

The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.

• Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay.

• Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages.

AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful reliability improvement possible with process bus.

• Configure signal sources. This functionality of the L30 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents and voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.

•

Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's functional-

ity. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other equipment. They replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper wiring.

• Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.

For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, please refer to GE publication number

GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4SYSTEM SETUP a) CURRENT BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

Ö

AC INPUTS

Ö

CURRENT BANK F1(L5)

CURRENT BANK F1

PHASE CT F1

Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

Range: 1 A, 5 A

MESSAGE

PHASE CT F1

SECONDARY: 1 A

GROUND CT F1

Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

MESSAGE

5.4.1 AC INPUTS

MESSAGE

GROUND CT F1

SECONDARY: 1 A

Range: 1 A, 5 A

Four banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter):

Xa, where X = {F, L} and a = {1, 5}.

See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.

These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground

CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.

Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).

The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the following current banks:

• F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio.

• F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio.

• L1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio.

The following rule applies:

SRC 1

=

F1

+

F5

+

L1

(EQ 5.6)

1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.

The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

5

GE Multilin


5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS

5 b) VOLTAGE BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

Ö

AC INPUTS

ÖØ

VOLTAGE BANK F5(L5)

VOLTAGE BANK F5

PHASE VT F5

CONNECTION: Wye

Range: Wye, Delta

Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

PHASE VT F5

SECONDARY: 66.4 V


MESSAGE

PHASE VT F5

RATIO: 1.00 :1

Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca

MESSAGE

AUXILIARY VT F5

CONNECTION: Vag

Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

AUXILIARY VT F5

SECONDARY: 66.4 V


MESSAGE

AUXILIARY VT F5

RATIO: 1.00 :1

bank of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter):

Xa, where X = {F, L} and a = {5}.

See the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.

With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the

PHASE VT F5 CON-

NECTION

made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta”. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as “Delta”.

The nominal

PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY

voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary.

NOTE

For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115

/

3 = 66.4.

On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120.

5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

POWER SYSTEM

POWER SYSTEM

NOMINAL FREQUENCY:

60 Hz

MESSAGE

PHASE ROTATION:

ABC

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FREQUENCY AND PHASE

REFERENCE: SRC 1

FREQUENCY TRACKING:

Enabled

Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

Range: ABC, ACB



The power system

NOMINAL FREQUENCY

value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.

The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.

The

PHASE ROTATION

setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.


GE Multilin


The

FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE

setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source: phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.

For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking (

V

V

ANGLE REF

FREQUENCY

=

(

2V

A

ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.

=

–

V

A

V

B

), while Clarke transformation of the

–

V

C

) for better performance dur-

The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.

Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.

The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.

FREQUENCY TRACKING

should only be set to “Disabled” in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.

NOTE

The frequency tracking feature will function only when the L30 is in the “Programmed” mode. If the L30 is “Not Programmed”, then metering values will be available but may exhibit significant errors.

NOTE

NOTE

The nominal system frequency should be selected as 50 Hz or 60 Hz only. The


setting, used as a reference for calculating all angles, must be identical for all terminals. Whenever the 87L function is “Enabled”, the frequency tracking function is disabled, and frequency tracking is driven by the L30 algorithm (see the Theory of operation chapter). Whenever the 87L function is “Disabled”, the frequency tracking mechanism reverts to the UR-series mechanism which uses the

FREQUENCY TRACKING

setting to provide frequency tracking for all other elements and functions.

5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES

5

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

Ö

SOURCE 1(4)

SOURCE 1

SOURCE 1 NAME:

SRC 1

Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

SOURCE 1 PHASE CT:

None

Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.

MESSAGE

SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:

None

Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.

MESSAGE

SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:

None

Range: None, F5, L5

Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.

MESSAGE

SOURCE 1 AUX VT:

None

Range: None, F5, L5

Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.

Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for the associated source.

The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called “5” in a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept.

It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred. For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.

GE Multilin


5


The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each

CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered, including specifying which CTs will be summed together.

User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements:

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.

AC input actual values:

The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.

DISTURBANCE DETECTORS (INTERNAL):

The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. The 50DD function is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each source.

The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme logic is as follows:

ACTUAL

SOURCE 1

CURRENT PHASOR

I_1

I_2

I_0

ACTUAL

SOURCE 2

CURRENT PHASOR

I_1

I_2

I_0

SETTING

PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY

PROPERTIES/CURRENT

CUT-OFF LEVEL

I

_1 -

I

_2 -

I

_0 -

I

I

I

_1’ >2*CUT-OFF

_2’ >2*CUT-OFF

_0’ >2*CUT-OFF

OR


SRC 1 50DD OP

SETTING


PROPERTIES/CURRENT

CUT-OFF LEVEL

I

_1 -

I

_2 -

I

_0 -

I

I

I

_1’ >2*CUT-OFF

_2’ >2*CUT-OFF

_0’ >2*CUT-OFF

OR


SRC 2 50DD OP

ACTUAL

SOURCE 6

CURRENT PHASOR

I_1

I_2

I_0

SETTING


PROPERTIES/CURRENT

CUT-OFF LEVEL

I

_1 -

I

_2 -

I

_0 -

I

I

I

_1’ >2*CUT-OFF

_2’ >2*CUT-OFF

_0’ >2*CUT-OFF

OR


SRC 6 50DD OP

827092A3.CDR

Figure 5–12: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM

The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (

PROD-

UCT SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector accordingly.

EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:

An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:

INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->

CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2

CTs VTs

CT/VT MODULE 3

not applicable


GE Multilin


This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.

F 1

DSP Bank

M 1

F 5

U 1

Source 3

Volts Amps

A W

Source 1

Amps

Source 2

Amps

51BF-1

Var

51BF-2

87T

V

V

A W Var

51P

Volts

Amps

M 1

Source 4

UR Relay

M 5

Figure 5–13: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES

5

GE Multilin



5

5.4.4 87L POWER SYSTEM a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ



NUMBER OF TERMINALS:

2

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

NUMBER OF CHANNELS:

1

CHARGING CURRENT

COMPENSATN: Disabled

POS SEQ CAPACITIVE

REACTANCE: 0.100

Ω

ZERO SEQ CAPACITIVE

REACTANCE: 0.100

Ω

ZERO SEQ CURRENT

REMOVAL: Disabled

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

LOCAL RELAY ID

NUMBER: 0

TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID

NUMBER: 0

TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID

NUMBER: 0

CHNL ASYM COMP:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BLOCK GPS TIME REF:

Off

MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY:

1.5 ms

ROUND TRIP TIME

CHANGE: 1.5 ms

IN-ZONE

TRANSFORMER

Range: 2, 3

Range: 1, 2


Range: 0.100 to 65.535 k

Ω in steps of 0.001

Range: 0.100 to 65.535 k








Range: 0.0 to 10.0 ms in steps of 0.1


See page 5-69.

NOTE

Any changes to the L30 power system settings will change the protection system configuration. As such, the 87L protection at all L30 protection system terminals must be temporarily disabled to allow the relays to acknowledge the new settings.

• NUMBER OF TERMINALS: This setting is the number of the terminals of the associated protected line.

• NUMBER OF CHANNELS: This setting should correspond to the type of communications module installed. If the relay is applied on two terminal lines with a single communications channel, this setting should be selected as "1". For a two terminal line with a second redundant channel for increased dependability, or for three terminal line applications, this setting should be selected as "2".

• CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION: This setting enables and disables the charging current calculations and corrections of current phasors. The voltage signals used for charging current compensation are taken from the source assigned with the

CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1

setting. As such, it's critical to ensure that three-phase line voltage is assigned to this source. The following diagram shows possible configurations.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

A B C

Possible 3-Reactor arrangement Line Capacitive Reactance

Possible 4-Reactor arrangement


A B C

Xreact Xreact

Xreact_n

X1line_capac

X0line_capac

831731A3.CDR

Figure 5–14: CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION CONFIGURATIONS

• POSITIVE and ZERO SEQUENCE CAPACITIVE REACTANCE: The values of positive and zero-sequence capacitive reactance of the protected line are required for charging current compensation calculations. The line capacitive reactance values should be entered in primary kohms for the total line length. Details of the charging current compensation algorithm can be found in Chapter 8: Theory of operation.

If shunt reactors are also installed on the line, the resulting value entered in the

POS SEQ CAPACITIVE REACTANCE

and

ZERO SEQ CAPACITIVE REACTANCE

settings should be calculated as follows:

1.

Three-reactor arrangement: three identical line reactors (X react

) solidly connected phase to ground:

X

C1

=

X

------------------------------------------------

X

react

–

X

⋅

X

1line_capac

, X

C0

=

X

⋅

X

------------------------------------------------

X

react

–

X

0line_capac

(EQ 5.7)

2.

Four-reactor arrangement: three identical line reactors (X react

) wye-connected with the fourth reactor (X connected between reactor-bank neutral and the ground.

react_n

)

X

C1

=

X

X

react

⋅

X

------------------------------------------------

–

X

1line_capac

, X

C0

=

X

X

react

⋅ (

X

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------react_n

–

X

0line_capac

)

(EQ 5.8)

NOTE

X

1line_capac

= the total line positive-sequence capacitive reactance

X

0line_capac

= the total line zero-sequence capacitive reactance

X

react

= the total reactor inductive reactance per phase. If identical reactors are installed at both line ends, the value of the inductive reactance is divided by 2 (or 3 for a three-terminal line) before using in the above equations. If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different, the following equations apply:

1.

For 2 terminal line:

X

react

= 1

⁄

⎛

⎝

X

react_terminal1

+ -----------------------------------

X

react_terminal2

⎞

⎠

2.


X

react

=

1

⁄

⎛

⎝

1

-----------------------------------

X

react_terminal1

+

1

-----------------------------------

X

react_terminal2

+

X

1

----------------------------------react_terminal3

⎠

⎞

X

react_n

= the total neutral reactor inductive reactance. If identical reactors are installed at both line ends, the value of the inductive reactance is divided by 2 (or 3 for a three-terminal line) before using in the above

1.

equations. If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different, the following equations apply:


X

react_n

= 1

⁄

⎛

⎝

X

react_n_terminal1

+ ----------------------------------------

X

react_n_terminal2

⎠

⎞

2.


X

react_n

=

1

⁄

⎛

⎝

X

1

---------------------------------------react_n_terminal1

+

X

1

-----------------------------------------react__n_terminal2

+

X

1

---------------------------------------react_n_terminal3

⎠

⎞

Charging current compensation calculations should be performed for an arrangement where the VTs are connected to the line side of the circuit; otherwise, opening the breaker at one end of the line will cause a calculation error.

NOTE

Differential current is significantly decreased when

CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION

is “Enabled” and the proper reactance values are entered. The effect of charging current compensation is viewed in the

METERING

ÖØ

87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT

actual values menu. This effect is very dependent on CT and VT accuracy.

5

GE Multilin



5

• ZERO-SEQUENCE CURRENT REMOVAL: This setting facilitates application of the L30 to transmission lines with one or more tapped transformers without current measurement at the taps. If the tapped transformer is connected in a grounded wye on the line side, it becomes a source of the zero-sequence current for external ground faults. As the transformer current is not measured by the L30 protection system, the zero-sequence current would create a spurious differential signal and may cause a false trip.

If enabled, this setting forces the L30 to remove zero-sequence current from the phase currents prior to forming their differential signals, ensuring protection stability on external ground faults. However, zero-sequence current removal may cause all three phases to trip for internal ground faults. Consequently, a phase selective operation of the L30 is not retained if the setting is enabled. This does not impose any limitation, as single-pole tripping is not recommended for lines with tapped transformers. Refer to chapter 9 for guidelines.

• LOCAL (TERMINAL 1 and TERMINAL 2) ID NUMBER: In installations using multiplexers or modems for communication, it is desirable to ensure the data used by the relays protecting a given line comes from the correct relays. The L30 performs this check by reading the ID number contained in the messages sent by transmitting relays and comparing this ID to the programmed correct ID numbers by the receiving relays. This check is used to block the differential element of a relay, if the channel is inadvertently set to loopback mode, by recognizing its own ID on a received channel.

If an incorrect ID is found on a either channel during normal operation, the FlexLogic™ operand

87 CH1(2) ID FAIL

is set, driving the event with the same name. The result of channel identification is also available in

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

for commissioning purposes. The default value

“0” at local relay ID setting indicates that the channel ID number is not to be checked. Refer to the Current differential section in this chapter for additional information.

For two-terminal applications, only the

LOCAL ID NUMBER

and

TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER

should be used. The

TERMINAL 2

ID NUMBER

is used for three-terminal applications.

• CHNL ASYM COMP: This setting enables/disables channel asymmetry compensation. The compensation is based on absolute time referencing provided by GPS-based clocks via the L30 IRIG-B inputs. This feature should be used on multiplexed channels where channel asymmetry can be expected and would otherwise cause errors in current differential calculations. The feature takes effect if all terminals are provided with reliable IRIG-B signals. If the IRIG-B signal is lost at any terminal of the L30 protection system, or the real time clock not configured, then the compensation is not calculated. If the compensation is in place prior to losing the GPS time reference, the last (memorized) correction is applied as long as the value of

CHNL ASYM COMP

is “On”. See chapter 9 for additional information.

The GPS-based compensation for channel asymmetry can take three different effects:

• If

CHNL ASYM COMP

(GPS) is “Off”, compensation is not applied and the L30 uses only the ping-pong technique.

• If

CHNL ASYM COMP

(GPS) is “On” and all L30 terminals have a valid time reference (

BLOCK GPS TIME REF

not set), then compensation is applied and the L30 effectively uses GPS time referencing tracking channel asymmetry if the latter fluctuates.

• If

CHNL ASYM COMP

(GPS) is “On” and not all L30 terminals have a valid time reference (


not set or

IRIG-B FAILURE

operand is not asserted), then compensation is not applied (if the system was not compensated prior to the problem), or the memorized (last valid) compensation is used if compensation was in effect prior to the problem.

The

CHNL ASYM COMP

setting dynamically turns the GPS compensation on and off. A FlexLogic™ operand that combines several factors is typically used. The L30 protection system does not incorporate any pre-defined way of treating certain conditions, such as failure of the GPS receiver, loss of satellite signal, channel asymmetry prior to the loss of reference time, or change of the round trip time prior to loss of the time reference. Virtually any philosophy can be programmed by selecting the

CHNL ASYM COMP

setting. Factors to consider are:

• Fail-safe output of the GPS receiver. Some receivers may be equipped with the fail-safe output relay. The L30 system requires a maximum error of 250

μs. The fail-safe output of the GPS receiver may be connected to the local

L30 via an input contact. In the case of GPS receiver fail, the channel compensation function can be effectively disabled by using the input contact in conjunction with the


(GPS) setting.

• Channel asymmetry prior to losing the GPS time reference. This value is measured by the L30 and a user-programmable threshold is applied to it. The corresponding FlexLogic™ operands are produced if the asymmetry is above the threshold (

87L DIFF MAX 1 ASYM

and

87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM

). These operands can be latched in Flex-

Logic™ and combined with other factors to decide, upon GPS loss, if the relays continue to compensate using the memorized correction. Typically, one may decide to keep compensating if the pre-existing asymmetry was low.


GE Multilin


• Change in the round trip travel time. This value is measured by the L30 and a user-programmable threshold applied to it. The corresponding FlexLogic™ operands are produced if the delta change is above the threshold

(

87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG

and


). These operands can be latched in FlexLogic™ and combined with other factors to decide, upon GPS loss, if the relays continue to compensate using the memorized correction.

Typically, one may decide to disable compensation if the round trip time changes.

• BLOCK GPS TIME REF: This setting signals to the L30 that the time reference is not valid. The time reference may be not accurate due to problems with the GPS receiver. The user must to be aware of the case when a GPS satellite receiver loses its satellite signal and reverts to its own calibrated crystal oscillator. In this case, accuracy degrades in time and may eventually cause relay misoperation. Verification from the manufacturer of receiver accuracy not worse than 250

μs and the presence of an alarm contact indicating loss of the satellite signal is strongly recommended. If the time reference accuracy cannot be guaranteed, it should be relayed to the L30 via contact inputs and GPS compensation effectively blocked using the contact position in conjunction with the


setting. This setting is typically a signal from the GPS receiver signaling problems or time inaccuracy.

Some GPS receivers can supply erroneous IRIG-B signals during power-up and before locking to satellites. If the receiver’s failsafe contact opens during power-up (allowing for an erroneous IRIG-B signal), then set a dropout delay up to 15 minutes (depending on GPS receiver specifications) to the failsafe contact via FlexLogic™ to prevent incorrect relay response.

• MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY: This setting detects excessive channel asymmetry. The same threshold is applied to both the channels, while the following per-channel FlexLogic™ operands are generated:

87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM

and

87L DIFF

2 MAX ASYM

. These operands can be used to alarm on problems with communication equipment and/or to decide whether channel asymmetry compensation remains in operation should the GPS-based time reference be lost. Channel asymmetry is measured if both terminals of a given channel have valid time reference.

If the memorized asymmetry value is much greater than expected (indicating a significant problem with IRIG-B timing), then this operand can be also used to block GPS compensation, forcing the relay to use the memorized asymmetry value.

• ROUND TRIP TIME CHANGE: This setting detects changes in round trip time. This threshold is applied to both channels, while the


and

87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG ASYM

per-channel FlexLogic™ operands are generated. These operands can be used to alarm on problems with communication equipment and/or to decide whether channel asymmetry compensation remains in operation should the GPS-based time reference be lost.

5

GE Multilin



5

IRIG-B FAILURE

DETECTED

SETTINGS

BLOCK GPS TIME REF:

Off = 0

IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:

None = 0

CHNL ASYM COMP:

Off = 0

DATA FROM REMOTE

TERMINAL 1

87L Ch 1 Status (OK=1)

87L GPS 1 Status (OK=1)

DATA FROM REMOTE

TERMINAL 2

87L Ch 2 Status (OK=1)

87L GPS 2 Status (OK=1)

OR

To Remote Relays

Channel 1 and 2

87L GPS Status Fail


87L DIFF GPS FAIL

GPS COMPENSATION

RUN

AND

AND

OR

OR

OR


87L DIFF PFLL FAIL

5 sec

0

AND

S

R


87L DIFF GPS 1 FAIL

ACTUAL VALUE

Ch1 Asymmetry

ACTUAL VALUE

Ch1 Round Trip Time


87L DIFF GPS 2 FAIL

ACTUAL VALUE

Ch2 Asymmetry

ACTUAL VALUE

Ch2 Round Trip Time

AND

SETTINGS

MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY:

ROUND TRIP TIME

CHANGE:

RUN

Ch1 Asymmetry > MAX

RUN

Ch1 T-Time New -

Ch1 T-Time Old >

CHANGE

AND

RUN

Ch2 Asymmetry > MAX

RUN

Ch2 T-Time New -

Ch2 T-Time Old >

CHANGE

Figure 5–15: CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION LOGIC

AND

AND

AND

Use Calculated GPS

Correction

Update GPS Correction

Memory

Use Memorized GPS

Correction

Use GPS Correction of Zero


87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM




87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM



831025A4.CDR


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP b) IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ

IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER

IN-ZONE

TRANSFORMER

IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER

CONNECTION: None

Range: None, 0 to 330° lag in steps of 30°

Range: LOCAL-TAP, REM1-TAP, REM2-TAP

MESSAGE

TRANSFORMER LOCATION:

LOCAL-TAP

The in-zone transformer settings described below ensure that the 87L element will correctly apply magnitude and phase compensation for the in-zone transformer. To accommodate for the difference in CT ratios at line terminals, the

SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

Ö

LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS

Ö


ÖØ

CURRENT

DIFF CT TAP

setting should be used. It is important to properly program the in-zone transformer setting for all terminals to ensure correct 87L performance.

• IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION: This setting is used to indicate the presence and group connection of the in-zone transformer. The winding angle selection specifies the phase shift of the remote terminal side winding with respect to the local terminal side winding. For example, for the Dy1 group (delta winding connected to local terminal side, and wye winding connected to remote terminal side), select the “300° lag” value for the local terminal side. If there is no in-zone transformer connected, then program this setting as “None” (note that the “0° lag” value does not correspond to “None”) if there is no in-zone transformer connected. Only one in-zone transformer is allowed for both two-terminal and three-terminal applications. Enabling in-zone transformer functionality forces the L30 to automatically remove the zero-sequence component from all terminals currents. It also disables ground differential 87LG functionality and zero-sequence current removal functionality defined by the

ZERO SEQ CURRENT REMOVAL

setting.

• TRANSFORMER LOCATION: This setting selects the transformer location and is applicable only if the

TRANSFORMER

CONNECTION

setting is not programmed as “None”.

– Select the “LOCAL-TAP” value if the transformer is present between the local terminal and the tap point or for twoterminal applications.

– Select the “REM1-TAP” if the transformer is present between remote terminal 1 and the tap point.

– Select the “REM2-TAP” if the transformer is present between remote terminal 2 and the tap point.

5

1 2

1 2

3

831820A1.CDR

Figure 5–16: ILLUSTRATION OF IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER FOR TWO-TERMINAL AND THREE-TERMINAL LINES

GE Multilin



5

5.4.5 BREAKERS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

BREAKERS

Ö

BREAKER 1(2)

BREAKER 1

BREAKER 1


MESSAGE

BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON

CONTROL: Disabled

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BREAKER 1 NAME:

Bkr 1

BREAKER 1 MODE:

3-Pole

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BREAKER 1 OPEN:

Off

BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN:

Off

BREAKER 1 CLOSE:

Off

BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE:

Off

BREAKER 1

ΦA/3P CLSD:

Off

BREAKER 1

ΦA/3P OPND:

Off

BREAKER 1

ΦB CLOSED:

Off

BREAKER 1

ΦB OPENED:

Off

BREAKER 1

ΦC CLOSED:

Off

BREAKER 1

ΦC OPENED:

Off

BREAKER 1 Toperate:

0.070 s

BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:

Off

BREAKER 1 ALARM

MESSAGE




Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole














MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1


MESSAGE


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:

Off

BREAKER 1 EVENTS:

Disabled



GE Multilin


A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Only information concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.

The number of breaker control elements is dependent on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the L30. The following settings are available for each breaker control element.

• BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature.

• BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to “Enable” to allow faceplate push button operations.

• BREAKER 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash messages related to breaker 1.

• BREAKER 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or “1-

Pole” mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.

• BREAKER 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open breaker 1.

• BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.

• BREAKER 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close breaker 1.

• BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.

•

BREAKER 1

ΦA/3P CLOSED: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is closed. If the

BREAKER 1 MODE

setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”, the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the

BREAKER 1

Φ

B

and

BREAKER 1

Φ

C

settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.

•

BREAKER 1

ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed

52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted

BREAKER 1 CLOSED

status signal can be used.

•

BREAKER 1

ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as above for phase A.

•

BREAKER 1

ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as above for phase A.

•

BREAKER 1

ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as above for phase A.

•

BREAKER 1

ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as above for phase A.

• BREAKER 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the

52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the

BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS

FlexLogic™ operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.

• BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm reporting contact.

• BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.

• MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.

• BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.

5

GE Multilin



5

SETTING

BREAKER 1 FUNCTION

= Enabled

= Disabled

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

BREAKER 1 OFF CMD

BREAKER 1 TRIP A

BREAKER 1 TRIP B

BREAKER 1 TRIP C

NOTE

SETTING

BREAKER 1 BLOCK OPEN

Off = 0

D60, L60, and L90 devices only from trip output


TRIP PHASE A

TRIP PHASE B

TRIP PHASE C

TRIP 3-POLE

AND

AND

AND

SETTING

BREAKER 1 OPEN

Off = 0

OR

61850 Select & Open

USER 3 OFF/ON

To open BRK1-(Name)

BKR ENABLED

To breaker control logic sheet 2,

842025A1

AND

SETTING


CONTROL

= Enabled

AND

USER 2 OFF/ON

To open BRK1-(Name)

OR

SETTING

BREAKER 1 CLOSE

Off = 0

AND

OR

61850 Select & Close

AND


BREAKER 1 MNL CLS

SETTING

MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME

AND

C60, D60, L60, and L90 relays from recloser


AR CLOSE BKR 1

0

SETTING

BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE

Off = 0

OR AND


BREAKER 1 ON CMD

827061AS.CDR

Figure 5–17: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the L30 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.


GE Multilin


from breaker control logic sheet 1,

827061AS

BKR ENABLED

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR

OR

AND

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY

0

AND

AND

AND


BREAKER 1 CLOSED


BREAKER 1 OPEN

BREAKER 1 DISCREP

BREAKER 1

CLOSED

(DEFAULT)

BREAKER 1

OPEN

(DEFAULT)

SETTING

BREAKER 1 MODE

= 3-Pole

= 1-Pole

SETTING

BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM

= Off

SETTING

SETTING

= Off

= Off

AND

AND

SETTING

BREAKER 1 Toperate

0

OR

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND


BREAKER 1 TROUBLE

Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED can be latched using FlexLogic™

BREAKER 1

TROUBLE

(DEFAULT)

OR




BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST

BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD

BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN

BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM

SETTING

AND

AND

AND

AND

SETTING

BREAKER 1 Toperate

SETTING

= Off

= Off

0

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND


BREAKER 1 ΦB BAD ST

BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD

BREAKER 1 ΦB OPEN

BREAKER 1 ΦB INTERM

SETTING

SETTING

= Off

= Off

AND

AND

AND

AND

SETTING

BREAKER 1 Toperate

0

OR

AND

AND

AND


BREAKER 1 ΦC BAD ST

BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD

BREAKER 1 ΦC OPEN

BREAKER 1 ΦC INTERM

AND

AND

AND

SETTING

BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV

= Off

XOR AND

AND

Figure 5–18: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)


BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN

BREAKER 1 1P OPEN

BREAKER 1 OOS

842025A2.CDR

5

GE Multilin



5

5.4.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SWITCHES

Ö

SWITCH 1(8)

SWITCH 1

SWITCH 1


MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 NAME:

SW 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 MODE:

3-Pole

SWITCH 1 OPEN:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:

Off

SWITCH 1 CLOSE:

Off

SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:

Off

SWTCH 1

ΦA/3P CLSD:

Off

SWTCH 1

ΦA/3P OPND:

Off

SWITCH 1

ΦB CLOSED:

Off

SWITCH 1

ΦB OPENED:

Off

SWITCH 1

ΦC CLOSED:

Off

SWITCH 1

ΦC OPENED:

Off

SWITCH 1 Toperate:

0.070 s

SWITCH 1 ALARM

MESSAGE
















MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 EVENTS:

Disabled


The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to create an interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches depends on the number of the CT/VT modules ordered with the L30.

• SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.

• SWITCH 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1.

• SWITCH 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where all disconnect switch poles are operated simultaneously, or “1-Pole” mode where all disconnect switch poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.


GE Multilin


• SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open disconnect switch 1.

• SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.

• SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close disconnect switch 1.

• SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.

•

SWTCH 1

ΦA/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is closed. If the

SWITCH 1 MODE

setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”, the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the

SWITCH 1

Φ

B

and

SWITCH 1

Φ

C

settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.

•

SWITCH 1

ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed

52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted

SWITCH 1 CLOSED

status signal can be used.

•

SWITCH 1

ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A.

•

SWITCH 1

ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A.

•

SWITCH 1

ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A.

•

SWITCH 1

ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A.

• SWITCH 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the

SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS

FlexLogic™ operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.

• SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.

IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the L30 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.

NOTE

5

GE Multilin



SETTINGS

SWITCH 1 FUNCTION

= Disabled

= Enabled

SWITCH 1 OPEN

= Off

SETTING

SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN

= Off

SETTING

SWITCH 1 CLOSE

= Off

SETTING

SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE

= Off

SETTING

SWITCH 1 MODE

= 3-Pole

= 1-Pole

SETTING

5

SETTING

= Off

= Off

61850 Select & Open

OR

AND


SWITCH 1 OFF CMD

SETTING

SETTING

= Off

= Off

SETTING

SETTING

= Off

= Off

AND

OR

61850 Select & Close

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR

OR

AND

SETTING

SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY

0

AND

AND

AND

OR

AND

AND

SETTING

SWITCH 1 Toperate

0 OR

SETTING

SWITCH 1 Toperate

0

OR

SETTING

SWITCH 1 Toperate

0

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

Figure 5–19: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR


SWITCH 1 ON CMD


SWITCH 1 CLOSED


SWITCH 1 OPEN

SWITCH 1 DISCREP


SWITCH 1 TROUBLE


SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS




842026A4.CDR


GE Multilin


5.4.7 FLEXCURVES™ a) SETTINGS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

FLEXCURVES

Ö

FLEXCURVE A(D)

FLEXCURVE A

FLEXCURVE A TIME AT

0.00 xPKP: 0 ms


FlexCurves™ A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98

and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve™, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the

MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).

Table 5–5: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE

RESET TIME

MS

RESET TIME

MS

0.00

0.68

0.54

0.56

0.58

0.60

0.45

0.48

0.50

0.52

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.62

0.64

0.66

0.92

0.93

0.94

0.95

0.86

0.88

0.90

0.91

0.78

0.80

0.82

0.84

0.70

0.72

0.74

0.76

0.96

0.97

0.98

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

1.8

1.9

2.0

2.1

2.6

2.7

2.8

OPERATE TIME

MS

1.03

OPERATE TIME

MS

2.9

OPERATE TIME

MS

4.9

OPERATE TIME

MS

10.5

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.05

1.1

1.2

1.3

3.0

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

5.0

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

11.0

11.5

12.0

12.5

13.0

13.5

14.0

14.5

3.8

3.9

4.0

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

4.8

5.8

5.9

6.0

6.5

7.0

7.5

8.0

8.5

9.0

9.5

10.0

17.0

17.5

18.0

18.5

15.0

15.5

16.0

16.5

19.0

19.5

20.0

5

NOTE

The relay using a given FlexCurve™ applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of

1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.

GE Multilin


5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS b) FLEXCURVE™ CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves™ and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file

(.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting.

Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves™ are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.

c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING

Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.

5

Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times

Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each

curve

operating time value.

Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time; otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum curve time.

NOTE

High Current Time:

Allows the user to set a pickup multiple from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is normally only required at higher current levels. The defines the high current pickup multiple; the

HCT

HCT Ratio

defines the operating time.

842721A1.CDR

Figure 5–20: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION

The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP d) EXAMPLE

A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).

842719A1.CDR

Figure 5–21: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.

5

NOTE

842720A1.CDR

Figure 5–22: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED

Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.

e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The standard recloser curves available for the L30 are displayed in the following graphs.

GE Multilin


5


2

1

GE106

0.5

0.2

GE103

0.1

0.05

GE101

0.02

GE104

GE102

GE105

0.01

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15

CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

842723A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–23: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106

50

20

10

5

GE142

GE138

2

1

0.5

GE113

GE120

0.2

0.1

0.05

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15


842725A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–24: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142

5 SETTINGS


GE Multilin


50

20

10

GE201

5

GE151

2

1

GE134

GE137

GE140

0.5

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15


842730A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–25: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201

50

GE152

20

GE141

10

GE131

5

GE200

2

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15


842728A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–26: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200

5

GE Multilin


5


50

20

10

5

GE164

2

1

0.5

GE162

GE133

0.2

0.1

GE165

0.05

GE161

0.02

GE163

0.01

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15


842729A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–27: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165

20

GE132

10

5

2

1

0.5

GE139

0.2

GE136

0.1

0.05

GE116

GE118

GE117

0.02

0.01

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15


842726A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–28: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139

5 SETTINGS


GE Multilin


20

10

5

GE122

2

1

0.5

GE114

0.2

GE111

GE121

0.1

0.05

GE107

GE115

GE112

0.02

0.01

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15


842724A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–29: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122

50

5

20

10

5

2

1

0.5

GE119

GE202

GE135

0.2

1 1.2

1.5

2 2.5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15


842727A1.CDR

20

Figure 5–30: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202

GE Multilin



5

5.4.8 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ



UNIT


UNIT 1

MESSAGE

REPORTING OVER

NETWORK

See below.

See page 5-98.

The


menu allows specifying basic parameters of the measurements process such as signal source, ID and station name, calibration data, triggering, recording, and content for transmission on each of the supported ports. The reporting ports menus allow specifying the content and rate of reporting on each of the supported ports.

Precise IRIG-B input is vital for correct synchrophasor measurement and reporting. A DC level shift IRIG-B receiver

must be used for the phasor measurement unit to output proper synchrophasor values.

NOTE

The PMU settings are organized in five logical groups as follows.

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1


UNIT 1

PMU 1 BASIC

CONFIGURATION

See page 5-85.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PMU 1

CALIBRATION

PMU 1

COMMUNICATION

PMU 1

TRIGGERING

See page 5-86.

See page 5-87.

See page 5-89.

MESSAGE

PMU 1

RECORDING

See page 5-96.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP b) BASIC CONFIGURATION

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

PHASOR...

ÖØ


Ö

PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION 1

PMU 1 BASIC

CONFIGURATION

PMU 1



PMU 1 IDCODE: 1


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PMU 1 STN:

GE-UR-PMU

PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:

SRC 1

PMU 1 POST-FILTER:

Symm-3-point

Range: 16 alphanumeric characters


Range: None, Symm-3-point, Symm-5-point,

Symm-7-point, Class M, Class P

This section contains basic phasor measurement unit (PMU) data, such as functions, source settings, and names.

• PMU 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables the PMU 1 functionality. Any associated functions (such as the recorder or triggering comparators) will not function if this setting is “Disabled”. Use the command frame to force the communication portion of the feature to start/stop transmission of data. When the transmission is turned off, the PMU is fully operational in terms of calculating and recording the phasors.

• PMU 1 IDCODE: This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data, configuration, header, and command frames of the C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data, configuration, and header frames and responds to this value when receiving the command frame.

• PMU 1 STN: This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the configuration frame of the C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the C37.118 standard.

• PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting specifies one of the available L30 signal sources for processing in the PMU.

Note that any combination of voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels could be configured as sums of physically connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and similar arrangements. The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and ground) channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages and currents. When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU, the user could select – from the above superset – the content to be sent out or recorded.

• PMU 1 POST-FILTER: This setting specifies amount of post-filtering applied to raw synchrophasor measurements.

The raw measurements are produced at the rate of nominal system frequency using one-cycle data windows. This setting is provided to deal with interfering frequencies and to balance speed and accuracy of synchrophasor measurements for different applications. The following filtering choices are available:

Table 5–6: POST-FILTER CHOICES

SELECTION

None

Symm-3-point

Symm-5-point

Symm-7-point

Class M

Class P

CHARACTERISTIC OF THE FILTER

No post-filtering

Symmetrical 3-point filter (1 historical point, 1 present point, 1 future point)

Symmetrical 5-point filter (2 historical points, 1 present point, 2 future points)

Symmetrical 7-point filter (3 historical points, 1 present point, 3 future points)

Symmetrical FIR filter on samples

21-tap symmetrical FIR filter on current input channels

This setting applies to all channels of the PMU. It is effectively for recording and transmission on all ports configured to use data of this PMU.

Class M filtering functionality is derived from the draft C37.118 specification and may be subject to change when the standard is published.

NOTE

5

GE Multilin



5 c) CALIBRATION

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

PHASOR...

ÖØ

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4)

ÖØ

PMU 1 CALIBRATION

PMU 1

CALIBRATION

PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°

Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION

ANGLE: 0.00°

Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30

MESSAGE

PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT

ANGLE: 0°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT

ANGLE: 0°

This menu contains user angle calibration data for the phasor measurement unit (PMU). This data is combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy.

• PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE: These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and allow the user to calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs, and cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a positive correction of the secondary signal lags the true signal; and negative value if the secondary signal leads the true signal.

• PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU voltage point, and the reference node. This angle is effectively added to the positive-sequence voltage angle, and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that:

1.

When this setting is not “0°”, the phase and sequence voltages will not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the phase voltages cannot be corrected in a general case, and therefore are reported as measured.

2.

When receiving synchrophasor date at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it may be more beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages.

3.

This setting applies to PMU data only. The L30 calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection and control purposes without applying this correction.

4.

When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage, and not to the physically connected AB voltage (see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6).

• PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive and negative-sequence currents for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the same meaning for currents as the

PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE

setting has for voltages. Normally, the two correcting angles are set identically, except rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different windings of a power transformer.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP d) PMU COMMUNICATION

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

PHASOR MEASUREMENT...

ÖØ

PMU 1 COMMUNICATION

ÖØ

PMU 1 COMM PORT

PMU 1

COMM PORT 1

PMU1 COMM PORT:

None

Range: None, Network, GOOSE

Range: available synchrophasor values

MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT PHS-1

PMU 1 V1


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT PHS-1

NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1

↓


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT PHS-14

PMU 1 V1


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT PHS-14

NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1

Range: available FlexAnalog values

MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT A-CH-1:

Off


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT A-CH-1

NM: AnalogChannel1

↓


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT A-CH-8:

Off


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT A-CH-8


Range: FlexLogic™ operands

MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT D-CH-1:

Off


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT D-CH-1

NM: DigitalChannel1

Range: On, Off

MESSAGE


NORMAL STATE: Off

↓


MESSAGE

PMU1 PORT D-CH-16:

Off


MESSAGE



Range: On, Off

MESSAGE


NORMAL STATE: Off

This section configures the phasor measurement unit (PMU) communication functions.

• PMU1 COMM PORT: This setting specifies the communication port for transmission of the PMU data.

5

GE Multilin



5

• PMU1 PORT PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be transmitted from the superset of all synchronized measurements. The available synchrophasor values are tabulated below.

V0

I1

I2

I0

Ic

Ig

V1

V2

Vc

Vx

Ia

Ib

SELECTION MEANING

Va

Vb

First voltage channel, either Va or Vab

Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc

Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca

Fourth voltage channel

Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings

Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va

Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va

Zero-sequence voltage

Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia

Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia

Zero-sequence current

These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a given application. Select “Off” to suppress transmission of a given value.

• PMU1 PORT PHS-1 NM to PMU1 PORT PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names are typically based on station, bus, or breaker names.

• PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8: These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel of the data frame. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to send any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating point values.

• PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

• PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel of the data frame. Up to sixteen digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic™ operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. The values are mapped into a two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16.

• PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

• PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE: These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each digital channel. These states are transmitted in configuration frames to the data concentrator.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP e) PMU TRIGGERING OVERVIEW

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

PHASOR...

ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 TRIGGERING

PMU 1

TRIGGERING

PMU 1 USER

TRIGGER

See page 5-89.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PMU 1 FREQUENCY

TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLTAGE

TRIGGER

See page 5-90.

See page 5-91.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PMU 1 CURRENT

TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER

TRIGGER

PMU 1 df/dt

TRIGGER

See page 5-92.

See page 5-93.

See page 5-95.

Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated

PMU recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs of the system. They are:

• Overfrequency and underfrequency.

• Overvoltage and undervoltage.

• Overcurrent.

• Overpower.

• High rate of change of frequency.

The pre-configured triggers could be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic of the relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles.

All five triggering functions and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder.

Each trigger can be programmed to log its operation into the event recorder, and to signal its operation via targets. The five triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger. The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.

5

SETTING

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Off = 0


PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER bit 0 bit 1 bit 3, bit 11 bit 2

Figure 5–31: STAT BITS LOGIC


PMU 1 TRIGGERED

PMU 1 recorder

847004A1.CDR

f) USER TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER

PMU 1 USER

TRIGGER

PMU1 USER TRIGGER:

Off


The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic™. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles.

GE Multilin



5 g) FREQUENCY TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER

PMU 1 FREQUENCY

TRIGGER

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER



Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE


LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz


MESSAGE


HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz


MESSAGE


PKP TIME: 0.10 s


MESSAGE


DPO TIME: 1.00 s


MESSAGE

PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:

Off


MESSAGE


TARGET: Self-Reset


MESSAGE



The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. The frequency is calculated from either phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents and ground current, in this hierarchy, depending on the source configuration as per L30 standards. This element requires the frequency is above the minimum measurable value. If the frequency is below this value, such as when the circuit is de-energized, the trigger will drop out.

• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis.

• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis.

• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

• PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

SETTINGS

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:

Off = 0

SETTING

PMU 1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:

FREQUENCY, f


PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

SETTING

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ:

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ:

RUN

0< f < LOW-FREQ

OR f > HIGH-FREQ

SETTINGS

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME:

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: t

PKP t

DPO

Figure 5–32: FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC


PMU 1 TRIGGERED to STAT bits of the data frame


PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

847002A2.CDR


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP h) VOLTAGE TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLTAGE

TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER




MESSAGE


LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu


MESSAGE


HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu


MESSAGE




MESSAGE




MESSAGE

PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:

Off


MESSAGE




MESSAGE



This element responds to abnormal voltage. Separate thresholds are provided for low and high voltage. In terms of signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate between the undervoltage and overvoltage events. The trigger responds to the phase voltage signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. All voltage channels (A, B, and C or

AB, BC, and CA) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder. A minimum voltage supervision of 0.1 pu is implemented to prevent pickup on a de-energized circuit, similarly to the undervoltage protection element.

• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

• PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

5

GE Multilin



5

SETTINGS

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

PMU 1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:

VT CONNECTION:

WYE

VA

DELTA

VAB

VB

VC

VBC

VCA


PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

SETTING

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT:

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT:

RUN

(0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR

(V > HIGH-VOLT)


(V > HIGH-VOLT)


(V > HIGH-VOLT)

SETTINGS

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME:

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: t

PKP t

DPO

Figure 5–33: VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC




PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

847005A1.CDR

i) CURRENT TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURRENT

TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER




MESSAGE


PICKUP: 1.800 pu


MESSAGE




MESSAGE




MESSAGE

PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:

Off


MESSAGE




MESSAGE



This element responds to elevated current. The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. All current channel (A, B, and C) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder.

• PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the overcurrent trigger, in per unit of the PMU source. A value of 1 pu is a nominal primary current. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

• PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

• PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).


GE Multilin


SETTINGS

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

PMU 1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:

IA

IB

IC


PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

SETTING

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP:

RUN

I > PICKUP

I > PICKUP

I > PICKUP

SETTINGS

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME:

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: t

PKP t

DPO

Figure 5–34: CURRENT TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC




PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

847000A1.CDR

j) POWER TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER

TRIGGER





MESSAGE


ACTIVE: 1.250 pu


MESSAGE


REACTIVE: 1.250 pu


MESSAGE


APPARENT: 1.250 pu


MESSAGE




MESSAGE




MESSAGE

PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:

Off


MESSAGE




MESSAGE



This element responds to abnormal power. Separate thresholds are provided for active, reactive, and apparent powers. In terms of signaling its operation the element does not differentiate between the three types of power. The trigger responds to the single-phase and three-phase power signals of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source.

• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the active power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the reactive power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

5

GE Multilin


5


• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the apparent power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

• PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

SETTINGS

PMU 1 POWER

TRIGGER FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:

ACTIVE POWER, PA

ACTIVE POWER, PB

ACTIVE POWER, PC

3P ACTIVE POWER, P

REACTIVE POWER, QA

REACTIVE POWER, QB

REACTIVE POWER, QC

3P REACTIVE POWER, Q

APPARENT POWER, SA

APPARENT POWER, SB

APPARENT POWER, SC

3P APPARENT POWER, S

SETTINGS

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE:

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE:

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT:

RUN


PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

SETTING

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Off = 0 abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > 3*(ACTIVE PICKUP) abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > 3*(REACTIVE PICKUP)

S > APPARENT PICKUP

S > APPARENT PICKUP

S > APPARENT PICKUP

S > 3*(APPARENT PICKUP)

SETTINGS

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME:

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: t

PKP t

DPO

Figure 5–35: POWER TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC




PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

847003A1.CDR


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP k) DF/DT TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

PMU 1 df/dt

TRIGGER




Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE


RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s

Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE


FALL: 0.25 Hz/s


MESSAGE




MESSAGE




MESSAGE

PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:

Off


MESSAGE




MESSAGE



This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping frequency.

The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source.

• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the raising direction (positive df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction (negative df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

• PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

5

SETTING

PMU 1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:

ROCOF, df/dt


PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

SETTINGS

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:

Off = 0

SETTING

PMU 1 USER TRIGGER:

Off = 0


PMU 1 TRIGGERED

SETTINGS

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE:

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL:

RUN df/dt > RAISE

OR

–df/dt > FALL

SETTINGS

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME:

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: t

PKP t

DPO to STAT bits of the data frame

Figure 5–36: RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC


PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

847000A1.CDR

GE Multilin



5 l) PMU RECORDING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

PHASOR...

ÖØ


ÖØ

PMU 1 RECORDING

PMU 1

RECORDING

PMU 1 RECORDING

RATE: 10/sec

Range: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second


MESSAGE

PMU 1 NO OF TIMED

RECORDS: 10

Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

MESSAGE

PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE:

Automatic Overwrite


MESSAGE

PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER

POSITION: 10%


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC PHS-1:

PMU 1 V1

Range: 16 character ASCII string

MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC PHS-1

NM: GE-UR-PMU-V1

↓


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC PHS-14:

Off


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC PHS-14

NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS-14


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC A-CH-1:

Off


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC A-CH-1


↓


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC D-CH-1:

Off


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC D-CH-1


↓


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC D-CH-16:

Off


MESSAGE

PMU 1 REC D-CH-16


Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) is associated with a recorder. The triggering condition is programmed via the


menu. The recorder works with polar values using resolution as in the PMU actual values.

TRIGGER

REC

847709A2.CDR

Figure 5–37: PMU RECORDING

• PMU 1 RECORDING RATE: This setting specifies the recording rate for the record content. Not all recording rates are applicable to either 50 or 60 Hz systems (for example, recording at 25 phasors a second in a 60 Hz system). The relay


GE Multilin


supports decimation by integer number of phasors from the nominal system frequency. If the rate of 25 is selected for the 60 Hz system, the relay would decimate the rate of 60 phasors a second by round (60 / 25) = 2; that is, it would record at 60 / 2 = 30 phasors a second.

• PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS: This setting specifies how many timed records are available for a given logical

PMU. The length of each record equals available memory divided by the content size and number of records. The higher the number of records, the shorter each record. The relay supports a maximum of 128 records.

• PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE: This setting specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory storage. If set to “Automatic Overwrite”, the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered.

If set to “Protected”, the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old un-cleared records. Refer to chapter 7 for more information on clearing PMU records.

The following set of figures illustrate the concept of memory management via the

PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE

setting.

Total memory for all logical PMUs

Memory available for the logical PMU

Record

1

Record

2

Record

3

Free memory

Free memory

Other logical PMUs

Record

1

Record

2

Record

3

Record

4

Free memory

Record

1

Record

2

Record

3

Record

4

Record

5

Other logical PMUs

Other logical PMUs

Record

6

Record

2

Record

3

Record

4

Record

5

Other logical PMUs

847705A1.CDR

Figure 5–38: “AUTOMATIC OVERWRITE” MODE

5

Total memory for all logical PMUs

Memory available for the logical PMU

Record

1

Record

2

Record

3

Free memory

Free memory

Other logical PMUs

Record

1

Record

2

Record

3

Record

4

Free memory

Other logical PMUs

Record

1

Record

2

Record

3

Record

4

Record

5

Other logical PMUs

No further recording after all allocated memory is used

Figure 5–39: “PROTECTED” MODE

847706A1.CDR

• PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION: This setting specifies the amount of pre-trigger data in percent of the entire record.

• PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be recorded from the superset of all synchronized measurements as indicated in the following table. These settings allow for optimizing the record size and content depending on a given application. Select “Off” to suppress recording of a given value.

Vc

Vx

Ia

VALUE DESCRIPTION

Va

Vb

First voltage channel, either Va or Vab

Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc

Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca

Fourth voltage channel

Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

GE Multilin



5

V0

I1

I2

I0

VALUE DESCRIPTION

Ib Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

Ic

Ig

V1

V2

Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings

Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va

Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va

Zero-sequence voltage

Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia

Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia

Zero-sequence current

• PMU 1 REC PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 REC PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. Typically these names would be based on station, bus, or breaker names.

• PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel in the record. Up to digital analog channels can be configured to record any FlexLogic™ operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant.

• PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16 NM: This setting allows custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

m) NETWORK CONNECTION

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

PHASOR...

ÖØ

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4)

ÖØ

REPORTING OVER NETWORK

REPORTING OVER

NETWORK

NETWORK REPORTING




MESSAGE


IDCODE: 1

MESSAGE


RATE: 10 per sec

Range: 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second

Range: Polar, Rectangular

MESSAGE


STYLE: Polar

Range: Integer, Floating

MESSAGE


FORMAT: Integer


MESSAGE

NETWORK PDC CONTROL:

Disabled


MESSAGE

NETWORK TCP PORT:

4712


MESSAGE

NETWORK UDP PORT 1:

4713


MESSAGE

NETWORK UDP PORT 2:

4714

The Ethernet connection works simultaneously with other communication means working over the Ethernet and is configured as follows. Up to three clients can be simultaneously supported.

• NETWORK REPORTING IDCODE: This setting specifies an IDCODE for the entire port. Individual PMU streams transmitted over this port are identified via their own IDCODES as per the device settings. This IDCODE is to be used by the command frame to start or stop transmission, and request configuration or header frames.

• NETWORK REPORTING RATE: This setting specifies the reporting rate for the network (Ethernet) port. This value applies to all PMU streams of the device that are assigned to transmit over this port.


GE Multilin


• NETWORK REPORTING STYLE: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors in rectangular (real and imaginary) or in polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the format field of the

C37.118 configuration frame.

• NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16-bit integer or 32-bit

IEEE floating point numbers. This setting complies with bit 1 of the format field of the C37.118 configuration frame.

Note that this setting applies to synchrophasors only – the user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 32-bit floating point numbers.

• NETWORK PDC CONTROL: The synchrophasor standard allows for user-defined controls originating at the PDC, to be executed on the PMU. The control is accomplished via an extended command frame. The relay decodes the first word of the extended field, EXTFRAME, to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands:

PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1

(from the least significant bit) to

PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16

(from the most significant bit). Other words, if any, in the EXTFRAME are ignored. The operands are asserted for 5 seconds following reception of the command frame. If the new command frame arrives within the 5 second period, the FlexLogic™ operands are updated, and the 5 second timer is re-started.

This setting enables or disables the control. When enabled, all 16 operands are active; when disabled all 16 operands remain reset.

• NETWORK TCP PORT: This setting selects the TCP port number that will be used for network reporting.

• NETWORK UDP PORT 1: This setting selects the first UDP port that will be used for network reporting.

• NETWORK UDP PORT 2: This setting selects the second UDP port that will be used for network reporting.

5

GE Multilin


5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS

5.5FLEXLOGIC™ 5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™

To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic™. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.

5

Figure 5–40: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the L30 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, which are described later in this section). A digital “1” is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators.

If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. For example, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation

ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.

Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™

The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic™).

FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-

put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.

A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.

Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.

flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.

Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table below.

Table 5–7: L30 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES

OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT

Contact Input On Cont Ip On

Contact Output

(type Form-A contact only)

Direct Input

Element

(Analog)

Off

Current On

Voltage On

Voltage Off

On

Pickup

Cont Ip Off

Cont Op 1 Ion

Cont Op 1 VOn

Cont Op 1 VOff

DIRECT INPUT 1 On

PHASE TOC1 PKP

Element

(Digital)

Element

(Digital Counter)

Fixed

Remote Input

Virtual Input

Virtual Output

Dropout

Operate

Block

Pickup

Dropout

Operate

Higher than

Equal to

Lower than

On

Off

On

On

On

PHASE TOC1 DPO

PHASE TOC1 OP

PHASE TOC1 BLK

Dig Element 1 PKP

Dig Element 1 DPO

Dig Element 1 OP

Counter 1 HI

Counter 1 EQL

Counter 1 LO

On

Off

REMOTE INPUT 1 On

Virt Ip 1 On

Virt Op 1 On

CHARACTERISTICS

[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]

Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact closed).

Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external contact open).

Current is flowing through the contact.

Voltage exists across the contact.

Voltage does not exists across the contact.

The direct input is presently in the ON state.

The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an element which responds to rising values or below the pickup setting of an element which responds to falling values.

This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand.

The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.

The output of the comparator is set to the block function.

The input operand is at logic 1.

This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand.

The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.

The number of pulses counted is above the set number.

The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.

The number of pulses counted is below the set number.

Logic 1

Logic 0

The remote input is presently in the ON state.

The virtual input is presently in the ON state.

The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e. evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual output results in a "1").

5

GE Multilin



5

The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.

Table 5–8: L30 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 7)

OPERAND TYPE

CONTROL

PUSHBUTTONS

ELEMENT:

87L current differential

ELEMENT:

87L in-zone transformer compensation

ELEMENT:

Autoreclose

(per CT bank)

ELEMENT:

Auxiliary overvoltage

ELEMENT:

Auxiliary undervoltage

ELEMENT:

Breaker arcing

ELEMENT

Breaker failure

OPERAND SYNTAX








87L DIFF OP

87L DIFF RECVD DTT

87L DIFF KEY DTT

87L DIFF PFLL FAIL

87L DIFF CH ASYM DET

87L DIFF CH1 FAIL

87L DIFF CH2 FAIL

87L DIFF CH1 LOSTPKT

87L DIFF CH2 LOSTPKT

87L DIFF CH1 CRCFAIL

87L DIFF CH2 CRCFAIL

87L DIFF CH1 ID FAIL

87L DIFF CH2 ID FAIL

87L DIFF GPS FAIL

87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM

87L DIFF 2 MAX ASYM



87L DIFF GPS 1 FAIL

87L DIFF GPS 2 FAIL

87L DIFF BLOCKED

87L DIFF PKP G

87L DIFF OP G

87L HARM2 A OP

87L HARM2 B OP

87L HARM2 C OP

AR1 ENABLED

AR1 RIP

AR1 LO

AR1 BLK FROM MAN CLS

AR1 CLOSE

AR1 SHOT CNT=0

AR1 SHOT CNT=1

AR1 SHOT CNT=2

AR1 SHOT CNT=3

AR1 SHOT CNT=4

AR1 DISABLED

AR 2 to AR3

AUX OV1 PKP

AUX OV1 DPO

AUX OV1 OP

AUX OV2 to AUX OV3

AUX UV1 PKP

AUX UV1 DPO

AUX UV1 OP

AUX UV2 to AUX UV3

BKR ARC 1 OP

BKR ARC 2 OP

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP

BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP

BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP

BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP

BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP

BKR FAIL 2...

OPERAND DESCRIPTION

Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed







At least one phase of current differential is operated

Direct transfer trip has been received

Direct transfer trip is keyed

Phase and frequency lock loop (PFLL) has failed

Channel asymmetry greater than 1.5 ms detected

Channel 1 has failed

Channel 2 has failed

Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 1

Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 2

Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 1

Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 2

The ID check for a peer L30 on channel 1 has failed

The ID check for a peer L30 on channel 2 has failed

The GPS signal failed or is not configured properly at any terminal

Asymmetry on channel 1 exceeded preset value

Asymmetry on channel 2 exceeded preset value

Change in round trip delay on channel 1 exceeded preset value

Change in round trip delay on channel 2 exceeded preset value

GPS failed at remote terminal 1 (channel 1)

GPS failed at remote terminal 1 (channel 2)

The 87L function is blocked due to communication problems

The ground differential element has picked up

The ground differential element has operated

Asserted when phase A of second harmonic of the transformer magnetizing inrush current inhibits the current differential element from operating.

Asserted when phase B of second harmonic of the transformer magnetizing inrush current inhibits the current differential element from operating.

Asserted when phase C of second harmonic of the transformer magnetizing inrush current inhibits the current differential element from operating.

Autoreclose 1 is enabled

Autoreclose 1 is in progress

Autoreclose 1 is locked out

Autoreclose 1 is temporarily disabled

Autoreclose 1 close command is issued

Autoreclose 1 shot count is 0





Autoreclose 1 is disabled

Same set of operands as shown for AR 1

Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up

Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out

Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated

Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1

Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up

Auxiliary undervoltage element has dropped out

Auxiliary undervoltage element has operated

Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1

Breaker arcing current 1 has operated

Breaker arcing current 2 has operated

Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)

Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)

Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)

Breaker failure 1 re-trip 3-phase

Breaker failure 1 timer 1 is operated



Breaker failure 1 trip is operated

Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1


GE Multilin



OPERAND TYPE

ELEMENT:

Breaker control

ELEMENT:

Broken conductor

ELEMENT:

Digital counters

ELEMENT:

Digital elements

ELEMENT:

FlexElements™

ELEMENT:

Ground instantaneous overcurrent

ELEMENT:

Ground time overcurrent

ELEMENT

Non-volatile latches

ELEMENT:

Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent

OPERAND SYNTAX

BREAKER 1 OFF CMD

BREAKER 1 ON CMD

BREAKER 1

ΦA BAD ST

BREAKER 1

ΦA INTERM

BREAKER 1

ΦA CLSD

BREAKER 1

ΦA OPEN

BREAKER 1

ΦB BAD ST

BREAKER 1

ΦA INTERM

BREAKER 1

ΦB CLSD

BREAKER 1

ΦB OPEN

BREAKER 1

ΦC BAD ST

BREAKER 1

ΦA INTERM

BREAKER 1

ΦC CLSD

BREAKER 1

ΦC OPEN


BREAKER 1 CLOSED

BREAKER 1 OPEN

BREAKER 1 DISCREP

BREAKER 1 TROUBLE

BREAKER 1 MNL CLS

BREAKER 1 TRIP A

BREAKER 1 TRIP B

BREAKER 1 TRIP C

BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN

BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN

BREAKER 1 OOS

BREAKER 2...

BROKEN CONDUCT 1 OP

BROKEN CONDUCT 1 PKP

BROKEN CONDUCT 2...

Counter 1 HI

Counter 1 EQL

Counter 1 LO


Breaker 1 open command initiated

Breaker 1 close command initiated

Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and

52/b contacts)

Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)

Breaker 1 phase A is closed

Breaker 1 phase A is open

Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and

52/b contacts)


Breaker 1 phase B is closed

Breaker 1 phase B is open

Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and

52/b contacts)


Breaker 1 phase C is closed

Breaker 1 phase C is open

Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole

Breaker 1 is closed

Breaker 1 is open

Breaker 1 has discrepancy

Breaker 1 trouble alarm

Breaker 1 manual close

Breaker 1 trip phase A command

Breaker 1 trip phase B command

Breaker 1 trip phase C command

At least one pole of breaker 1 is open

Only one pole of breaker 1 is open

Breaker 1 is out of service

Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1

Asserted when the broken conductor 1 element operates

Asserted when the broken conductor 1 element picks up

Same set of operands as shown for BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1

Digital counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value

Digital counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value

Digital counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value

Counter 2 to Counter 8

Dig Element 1 PKP

Dig Element 1 OP

Dig Element 1 DPO

Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1

Digital Element 1 is picked up

Digital Element 1 is operated

Digital Element 1 is dropped out

Dig Element 2 to Dig Element 48 Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1

FxE 1 PKP

FxE 1 OP

FxE 1 DPO

FxE 2 to FxE

FlexElement™ 1 has picked up

FlexElement™ 1 has operated

FlexElement™ 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1

GROUND IOC1 PKP

GROUND IOC1 OP

GROUND IOC1 DPO

GROUND IOC2

GROUND TOC1 PKP

GROUND TOC1 OP

GROUND TOC1 DPO

GROUND TOC2

LATCH 1 ON

LATCH 1 OFF

LATCH 2 to LATCH 16

NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP

NEG SEQ IOC1 OP

NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO

NEG SEQ IOC2

Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated

Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1

Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated

Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1

Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)

Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)

Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1

Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated

Negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ IOC1

5

GE Multilin



5


OPERAND TYPE

ELEMENT:

Negative-sequence overvoltage

ELEMENT:

Negative-sequence time overcurrent

ELEMENT:

Neutral instantaneous overcurrent

ELEMENT:

Neutral time overcurrent

ELEMENT:

Neutral directional overcurrent

ELEMENT:

Synchrophasor phasor data concentrator

ELEMENT:

Phase directional overcurrent

ELEMENT:


ELEMENT:

Phase overvoltage

ELEMENT:

Phase time overcurrent

OPERAND SYNTAX

NEG SEQ OV1 PKP

NEG SEQ OV1 DPO

NEG SEQ OV1 OP

NEG SEQ OV2...

NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP

NEG SEQ TOC1 OP

NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO

NEG SEQ TOC2

NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP

NEUTRAL IOC1 OP

NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO

NEUTRAL IOC2

NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP

NEUTRAL TOC1 OP

NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO

NEUTRAL TOC2

NTRL DIR OC1 FWD

NTRL DIR OC1 REV

NTRL DIR OC2

PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1

PDC NETWORK CNTRL 2

↓

PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16

PH DIR1 BLK A

PH DIR1 BLK B

PH DIR1 BLK C

PH DIR1 BLK

PH DIR2

PHASE IOC1 PKP

PHASE IOC1 OP

PHASE IOC1 DPO

PHASE IOC1 PKP A

PHASE IOC1 PKP B

PHASE IOC1 PKP C

PHASE IOC1 OP A

PHASE IOC1 OP B

PHASE IOC1 OP C

PHASE IOC1 DPO A

PHASE IOC1 DPO B

PHASE IOC1 DPO C

PHASE IOC2 and higher

PHASE OV1 PKP

PHASE OV1 OP

PHASE OV1 DPO

PHASE OV1 PKP A

PHASE OV1 PKP B

PHASE OV1 PKP C

PHASE OV1 OP A

PHASE OV1 OP B

PHASE OV1 OP C

PHASE OV1 DPO A

PHASE OV1 DPO B

PHASE OV1 DPO C

PHASE TOC1 PKP

PHASE TOC1 OP

PHASE TOC1 DPO

PHASE TOC1 PKP A

PHASE TOC1 PKP B

PHASE TOC1 PKP C

PHASE TOC1 OP A

PHASE TOC1 OP B

PHASE TOC1 OP C

PHASE TOC1 DPO A

PHASE TOC1 DPO B

PHASE TOC1 DPO C

PHASE TOC2


Negative-sequence overvoltage element has picked up

Negative-sequence overvoltage element has dropped out

Negative-sequence overvoltage element has operated

Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ OV1

Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has operated

Negative-sequence time overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ TOC1

Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated

Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1

Neutral time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Neutral time overcurrent 1 has operated

Neutral time overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

Neutral directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated

Neutral directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated

Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1

Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1 as received via the network


↓


Phase A directional 1 block

Phase B directional 1 block

Phase C directional 1 block

Phase directional 1 block

Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1

At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated

All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out

Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up

Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated

Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated

Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated

Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1

At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has picked up

At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has operated

All phases of overvoltage 1 have dropped out

Phase A of overvoltage 1 has picked up

Phase B of overvoltage 1 has picked up

Phase C of overvoltage 1 has picked up

Phase A of overvoltage 1 has operated

Phase B of overvoltage 1 has operated

Phase C of overvoltage 1 has operated

Phase A of overvoltage 1 has dropped out

Phase B of overvoltage 1 has dropped out

Phase C of overvoltage 1 has dropped out

At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up

At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated

All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out

Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up

Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated

Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated

Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated

Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1


GE Multilin



OPERAND TYPE

ELEMENT:

Phase undervoltage

ELEMENT:

Synchrophasor phasor measurement unit

(PMU)

OPERAND SYNTAX

PHASE UV1 PKP

PHASE UV1 OP

PHASE UV1 DPO

PHASE UV1 PKP A

PHASE UV1 PKP B

PHASE UV1 PKP C

PHASE UV1 OP A

PHASE UV1 OP B

PHASE UV1 OP C

PHASE UV1 DPO A

PHASE UV1 DPO B

PHASE UV1 DPO C

PHASE UV2

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

ELEMENT:

Synchrophasor oneshot

ELEMENT:

Selector switch

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

PMU 1 TRIGGERED

PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED

PMU ONE-SHOT OP

PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING

SELECTOR 1 POS Y

SELECTOR 1 BIT 0

SELECTOR 1 BIT 1

SELECTOR 1 BIT 2

SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM

SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM

SELECTOR 1 ALARM

SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM

ELEMENT:

Setting group

ELEMENT:

Sub-harmonic stator ground fault detector

ELEMENT:

Disturbance detector

ELEMENT:

Stub bus

SELECTOR 2

SETTING GROUP ACT 1

SETTING GROUP ACT 2

SETTING GROUP ACT 3

SETTING GROUP ACT 4

SETTING GROUP ACT 5

SETTING GROUP ACT 6

SH STAT GND STG1 PKP

SH STAT GND STG1 DPO

SH STAT GND STG1 OP

SH STAT GND STG2 PKP

SH STAT GND STG2 DPO

SH STAT GND STG2 OP

SH STAT GND OC PKP

SH STAT GND OC DPO

SH STAT GND OC OP

SH STAT GND TRB PKP

SH STAT GND TRB DPO

SH STAT GND TRB OP

SRC1 50DD OP

SRC2 50DD OP

STUB BUS OP


At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up

At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has operated

All phases of phase undervoltage 1 have dropped out

Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up

Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up

Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up

Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has operated

Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated

Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated

Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out

Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out

Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1

Overcurrent trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated

Abnormal frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated

Overpower trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated

Rate of change of frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated

Abnormal voltage trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated

Phasor measurement unit 1 triggered; no events or targets are generated by this operand

Indicates the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time is at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time

Indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards

Indicates the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is before the scheduled one-shot time

Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)

First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1

Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1

Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1

Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control input but not acknowledged

Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but not acknowledged

Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged

Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1

Setting group 1 is active






Source 1 disturbance detector has operated

Source 2 disturbance detector has operated

Stub bus is operated

5

GE Multilin



5


OPERAND TYPE

ELEMENT:

Disconnect switch

ELEMENT:

Synchrocheck

OPERAND SYNTAX

SWITCH 1 OFF CMD

SWITCH 1 ON CMD

SWITCH 1

ΦA BAD ST

SWITCH 1

ΦA INTERM

SWITCH 1

ΦA CLSD

SWITCH 1

ΦA OPEN

SWITCH 1

ΦB BAD ST

SWITCH 1

ΦA INTERM

SWITCH 1

ΦB CLSD

SWITCH 1

ΦB OPEN

SWITCH 1

ΦC BAD ST

SWITCH 1

ΦA INTERM

SWITCH 1

ΦC CLSD

SWITCH 1

ΦC OPEN

SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS

SWITCH 1 CLOSED

SWITCH 1 OPEN

SWITCH 1 DISCREP

SWITCH 1 TROUBLE

SWITCH 2...

SYNC 1 DEAD S OP

SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO

SYNC 1 SYNC OP

SYNC 1 SYNC DPO

SYNC 1 CLS OP

SYNC 1 CLS DPO

SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN

SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX

SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN

SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX

ELEMENT

Trip bus

ELEMENT:

Underfrequency

SYNC 2

TRIP BUS 1 PKP

TRIP BUS 1 OP

TRIP BUS 2...

UNDERFREQ 1 PKP

UNDERFREQ 1 OP

UNDERFREQ 1 DPO

UNDERFREQ 2 to 6

FIXED OPERANDS Off

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Contact inputs

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Contact outputs, current

(from detector on form-A output only)

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Contact outputs, voltage

(from detector on form-A output only)

On

Cont Ip 1 On

Cont Ip 2 On

↓

Cont Ip 1 Off

Cont Ip 2 Off

↓

Cont Op 1 IOn

Cont Op 2 IOn

↓

Cont Op 1 VOn

Cont Op 2 VOn

↓

Cont Op 1 VOff

Cont Op 2 VOff

↓


Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated

Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated

Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts)

Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another)

Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed

Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open

Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts)


Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed

Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open

Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts)


Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed

Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open

Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole

Disconnect switch 1 is closed

Disconnect switch 1 is open

Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy

Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm

Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1

Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated

Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out

Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated

Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out

Synchrocheck 1 close has operated

Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out

Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage

Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage

Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage

Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage

Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1

Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up.

Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates.

Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1

Underfrequency 1 has picked up

Underfrequency 1 has operated

Underfrequency 1 has dropped out

Same set of operands as shown for UNDERFREQ 1 above

Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list; used as ‘Disable’ by other features.

Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.

(will not appear unless ordered)


↓



↓



↓



↓



↓


GE Multilin



OPERAND TYPE

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Direct input

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Remote doublepoint status inputs

OPERAND SYNTAX

Direct I/P 1-1 On

↓

Direct I/P 1-8 On

Direct I/P 2-1 On

↓

Direct I/P 2-8 On

RemDPS Ip 1 BAD

RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Remote inputs

RemDPS Ip 1 OFF

RemDPS Ip 1 ON

REMDPS Ip 2...

REMOTE INPUT 1 On

REMOTE INPUT 2 On

REMOTE INPUT 2 On

↓

REMOTE INPUT 32 On


(appears only when an inter-relay communications card is used)

↓

(appears only when inter-relay communications card is used)


↓


Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the bad state.

Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the intermediate state.

Asserted while the remote double-point status input is off.

Asserted while the remote double-point status input is on.

Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1 above

Flag is set, logic=1



↓


INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Virtual inputs

INPUTS/OUTPUTS:

Virtual outputs

LED INDICATORS:

Fixed front panel

LEDs

Virt Ip 1 On

Virt Ip 2 On

Virt Ip 3 On

↓

Virt Ip 64 On

Virt Op 1 On

Virt Op 2 On

Virt Op 3 On

↓

Virt Op 96 On

LED IN SERVICE

LED TROUBLE

LED TEST MODE

LED TRIP

LED ALARM

LED PICKUP

LED VOLTAGE

LED CURRENT

LED FREQUENCY

LED OTHER

LED PHASE A

LED PHASE B

LED PHASE C

LED NEUTRAL/GROUND

LED TEST IN PROGRESS LED INDICATORS:

LED test

LED INDICATORS:

User-programmable

LEDs

PASSWORD

SECURITY

LED USER 1

LED USER 2 to 48

ACCESS LOC SETG OFF

ACCESS LOC SETG ON

ACCESS LOC CMND OFF

ACCESS LOC CMND ON

ACCESS REM SETG OFF

ACCESS REM SETG ON

ACCESS REM CMND OFF

ACCESS REM CMND ON

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On

REMOTE DEVICE 2 On

REMOTE DEVICE 2 On

↓

REMOTE DEVICE 16 On




↓





↓


Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on.

Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on.

An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.

Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on.

The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48.

Asserted when local setting access is disabled.

Asserted when local setting access is enabled.

Asserted when local command access is disabled.

Asserted when local command access is enabled.

Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.

Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.

Asserted when remote command access is disabled.

Asserted when remote command access is enabled.

Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected level of the L30.




↓


REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off

REMOTE DEVICE 2 Off

REMOTE DEVICE 3 Off

↓

REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off




↓


5

GE Multilin



5


OPERAND TYPE

RESETTING

SELF-

DIAGNOSTICS

TEMPERATURE

MONITOR

USER-

PROGRAMMABLE

PUSHBUTTONS

OPERAND SYNTAX

RESET OP

RESET OP (COMMS)

RESET OP (OPERAND)

RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)

ANY MAJOR ERROR

ANY MINOR ERROR

ANY SELF-TESTS

BATTERY FAIL

DIRECT DEVICE OFF

DIRECT RING BREAK

EQUIPMENT MISMATCH

ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL

FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN

IRIG-B FAILURE

LATCHING OUT ERROR

MAINTENANCE ALERT

PORT 1 OFFLINE

PORT 2 OFFLINE

PORT 3 OFFLINE

PORT 4 OFFLINE

PORT 5 OFFLINE

PORT 6 OFFLINE

PRI ETHERNET FAIL

PROCESS BUS FAILURE

REMOTE DEVICE OFF

RRTD COMM FAIL

SEC ETHERNET FAIL

SNTP FAILURE

SYSTEM EXCEPTION

TEMP MONITOR

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED

TEMP MONITOR

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF

ANY PB ON

PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12


Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below).

Communications source of the reset command.

Operand (assigned in the

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ RESETTING

menu) source of the reset command.

Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command.

Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)

Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)

Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)

See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
























Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (80°C)

Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position

Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position

Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the “On” position

Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1

Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID

(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FlexLogic™ operands table above.

The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in the Flex-

Logic™ operators table.

Table 5–9: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES

NOT

OR

AND

NOR

NAND

XOR

NUMBER OF INPUTS

1

2 to 16

2 to 16

2 to 16

2 to 16

2

OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...

input is ‘0’ any input is ‘1’ all inputs are ‘1’ all inputs are ‘0’ any input is ‘0’ only one input is ‘1’


GE Multilin


Table 5–10: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS

TYPE

Editor

End

One-shot

Logic gate

Timer

Assign virtual output

SYNTAX

INSERT

DELETE

END

DESCRIPTION

Insert a parameter in an equation list.

Delete a parameter from an equation list.

The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic™ parameters.

POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge.

NEGATIVE ONE

SHOT

One shot that responds to a negative going edge.

DUAL ONE SHOT

NOT

One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges.

Logical NOT

OR(2)

↓

OR(16)

AND(2)

↓

AND(16)

NOR(2)

↓

NOR(16)

NAND(2)

↓

NAND(16)

XOR(2)

LATCH (S,R)

2 input OR gate

↓

16 input OR gate

2 input AND gate

↓

16 input AND gate

2 input NOR gate

↓

16 input NOR gate

2 input NAND gate

↓

16 input NAND gate

2 input Exclusive OR gate

Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant

NOTES

TIMER 1

↓

TIMER 32

= Virt Op 1

↓

= Virt Op 96

Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer 1 settings.

↓

Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer 32 settings.

Assigns previous FlexLogic™ operand to virtual output 1.

↓

Assigns previous FlexLogic™ operand to virtual output 96.

A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input. The output from a ‘one shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic™ equation. There is a maximum of 64 ‘one shots’.

Operates on the previous parameter.

Operates on the 2 previous parameters.

↓



↓



↓



↓



The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the reset input. The parameter preceding the reset input is the set input.

The timer is started by the preceding parameter. The output of the timer is

TIMER #.

The virtual output is set by the preceding parameter

5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES

5

When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:

1.

Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.

2.

Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as an input to two or more operators.

3.

Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.

4.

A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.

5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION

Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.

NOTE

FlexLogic™ provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power.

When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic™ equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic™ during testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.

GE Multilin



5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE

5

This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.

In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used – a virtual output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1

State=ON


State=ON

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

State=ON

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

State=Pickup

XOR

OR #1

Set

LATCH

Reset

OR #2

Timer 2

Time Delay on Dropout

(200 ms)

Operate Output

Relay H1


State=Operated

AND

Timer 1

Time Delay on Pickup

(800 ms)

CONTACT INPUT H1c

State=Closed

827025A2.vsd

Figure 5–41: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

1.

Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic™ operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic™ limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to AND(2).

Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output.

For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1).

Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic™ equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and virtual output 4 as shown below.


State=ON


State=ON

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

State=ON


State=Pickup


State=Operated


State=Closed

XOR

AND

OR #1

Set

LATCH

Reset

Timer 1


(800 ms)


OR #2

Timer 2


(200 ms)


827026A2.VSD

Figure 5–42: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS


GE Multilin


2.

Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for virtual output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.


State=Operated

AND(2)



State=Closed

827027A2.VSD

Figure 5–43: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

3.

Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as virtual output 3, as shown below.


State=ON


State=ON

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

State=ON


State=Pickup

XOR

OR #1

Set

LATCH

Reset

OR #2

Timer 2


(200 ms)

VIRTUAL

OUTPUT 4


State=ON

Timer 1


(800 ms)


State=Closed

827028A2.VSD

Figure 5–44: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

4.

Program the FlexLogic™ equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic™ parameters.

The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.

5

01

02

03

04

05

97

98

99

827029A1.VSD

Figure 5–45: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET

5.

Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:

99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3."

GE Multilin



5

98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number of inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.

97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is

“NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.

96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.

The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.

95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.

This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".

Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3:

[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP

[96] Cont Ip H1c On

[97] NOT

[98] AND(2)

[99] = Virt Op 3

It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 diagram as a check.

95

96

97

98

99

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

DIG ELEM 2 OP

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Cont Ip H1c On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

NOT

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

AND (2)

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

=Virt Op 3

AND

VIRTUAL

OUTPUT 3

827030A2.VSD

Figure 5–46: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

6.

Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for Virtual Output 4.

99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".

98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the timer are established in the timer programming section.

97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.

96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.

95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".

94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".

93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.

92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which is parameter “OR(4)”.

91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".

90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.

89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.

88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".

87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".

86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".

85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".


GE Multilin


The equation for virtual output 4 is:

[85] Virt Op 4 On

[86] Virt Op 1 On

[87] Virt Op 2 On

[88] Virt Ip 1 On

[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP

[90] XOR(2)

[91] Virt Op 3 On

[92] OR(4)

[93] LATCH (S,R)

[94] Virt Op 3 On

[95] TIMER 1

[96] Cont Ip H1c On

[97] OR(3)

[98] TIMER 2

[99] = Virt Op 4

It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

85

86

87

95

96

97

98

99

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Virt Op 4 On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Virt Op 1 On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Virt Op 2 On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Virt Ip 1 On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

DIG ELEM 1 PKP

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

XOR

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Virt Op 3 On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

OR (4)

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

LATCH (S,R)

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Virt Op 3 On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

TIMER 1

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

Cont Ip H1c On

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

OR (3)

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

TIMER 2

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:

=Virt Op 4

XOR OR

T1

Set

LATCH

Reset

OR

T2

VIRTUAL

OUTPUT 4

827031A2.VSD

Figure 5–47: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

7.

Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic™ before it is placed in service.

In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the order shown below:

DIG ELEM 2 OP

Cont Ip H1c On

NOT

AND(2)

5

GE Multilin



5

= Virt Op 3

Virt Op 4 On

Virt Op 1 On

Virt Op 2 On

Virt Ip 1 On

DIG ELEM 1 PKP

XOR(2)

Virt Op 3 On

OR(4)

LATCH (S,R)

Virt Op 3 On

TIMER 1

Cont Ip H1c On

OR(3)

TIMER 2

= Virt Op 4

END

In the expression above, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.

8.

The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.

Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations. The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.

The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.

5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

FLEXLOGIC

Ö

FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC

EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY

END

1:

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 2:

END

↓

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:

END




There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.

5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

FLEXLOGIC

ÖØ

FLEXLOGIC TIMERS

Ö

FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)

FLEXLOGIC

TIMER 1

TIMER 1

TYPE: millisecond

Range: millisecond, second, minute


MESSAGE

DELAY: 0


MESSAGE

DELAY: 0

There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic™ equations.

• TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.

• TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".


GE Multilin


• TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".

5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS™

PATH: SETTING

ÖØ

FLEXLOGIC

ÖØ

FLEXELEMENTS

Ö

FLEXELEMENT 1(8)

FLEXELEMENT 1

FLEXELEMENT 1


MESSAGE

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:

FxE1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:

Off

FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT

MODE: Signed

FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP

MODE: Level

FLEXELEMENT 1

DIRECTION: Over

FLEXELEMENT 1


FLEXELEMENT 1

HYSTERESIS: 3.0%

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt

UNIT: milliseconds

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:

20

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

DELAY: 0.000 s

FLEXELEMENT 1 RST

DELAY: 0.000 s

FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:

Off

FLEXELEMENT 1

TARGET: Self-reset

FLEXELEMENT 1




Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter


Range: Signed, Absolute

Range: Level, Delta

Range: Over, Under

Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1

Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes





Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled


A FlexElement™ is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.

The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as per user's choice.

5

GE Multilin



SETTING

FLEXELEMENT 1

FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

Disabled = 0

SETTING

FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:

Actual Value

FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:

Actual Value

AND

SETTINGS

FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT

MODE:

FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP

MODE:

FLEXELEMENT 1

DIRECTION:

FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:

FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT

HYSTERESIS:

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT:

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:

RUN

+

-

SETTINGS

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

DELAY:

FLEXELEMENT 1 RST

DELAY: t

PKP t

RST

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

FxE 1 OP

FxE 1 DPO

FxE 1 PKP

5

ACTUAL VALUE

FlexElement 1 OpSig

842004A3.CDR

Figure 5–48: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC

The

FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN

setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands.

This

FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN

setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal.

The element responds directly to the differential signal if the

FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE

setting is set to “Signed”. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute”. Sample applications for the

“Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases.

The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the

FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN

,

FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN

and

FLEX-

ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE

settings – if the

FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE

setting is set to “Level”. The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if the


setting is set to “Delta”. In this case the

FLEXELE-

MENT 1 dt UNIT

and


settings specify how the rate of change is derived.

The

FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION

setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure explains the application of the

FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION

,

FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP

and

FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-

TERESIS

settings.


GE Multilin


FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT

DIRECTION = Over

HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP

FlexElement 1 OpSig

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT

DIRECTION = Under

HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP

FlexElement 1 OpSig

842705A1.CDR

Figure 5–49: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the

FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE

setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT

DIRECTION = Over;

FLEXELEMENT INPUT

MODE = Signed;

FlexElement 1 OpSig

5

GE Multilin

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT

DIRECTION = Over;

FLEXELEMENT INPUT

MODE = Absolute;

FlexElement 1 OpSig

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT

DIRECTION = Under;

FLEXELEMENT INPUT

MODE = Signed;

FlexElement 1 OpSig

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT

DIRECTION = Under;

FLEXELEMENT INPUT

MODE = Absolute;

FlexElement 1 OpSig

842706A2.CDR

Figure 5–50: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING



5

The


setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set to “Over”, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the


value. If set to “Under”, the element picks up when the operating signal falls below the


value.

The

FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS

setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement™ can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The


setting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:

Table 5–11: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

87L SIGNALS

(Local IA Mag, IB, and IC)

(Diff Curr IA Mag, IB, and IC)

(Terminal 1 IA Mag, IB, and IC)

(Terminal 2 IA Mag, IB and IC)

87L SIGNALS

(Op Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)

(Rest Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)

BREAKER ARCING AMPS

(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C) dcmA

I

BASE

= maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs

(CT primary for source currents, and 87L source primary current for line differential currents)

BASE = Squared CT secondary of the 87L source

BASE = 2000 kA

2

× cycle

FREQUENCY

PHASE ANGLE

POWER FACTOR

RTDs

SOURCE CURRENT

SOURCE POWER

SOURCE VOLTAGE

SYNCHROCHECK

(Max Delta Volts)

BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and –IN inputs.

f

BASE

= 1 Hz ϕ

BASE

= 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)

PF

BASE

= 1.00

BASE = 100°C

I

BASE

= maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs

P

BASE

= maximum value of V

BASE

× I

BASE for the +IN and –IN inputs

V

BASE


V

BASE

= maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs

The

FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS

setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement™ direction, pickup, and hysteresis diagram.

The

FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT

setting specifies the time unit for the setting


. This setting is applicable only if


is set to “Delta”. The

FLEXELEMENT 1 DT

setting specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if


is set to “Delta”.

This

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY

setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The

FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY

setting specifies the reset delay of the element.


GE Multilin


5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

FLEXLOGIC

ÖØ

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

Ö

LATCH 1(16)

LATCH 1

LATCH 1



Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant

MESSAGE

LATCH 1 TYPE:

Reset Dominant


MESSAGE

LATCH 1 SET:

Off


MESSAGE

LATCH 1 RESET:

Off


MESSAGE

LATCH 1



MESSAGE

LATCH 1


The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as

Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch. The settings element operation is described below:

• LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.

• LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operands 'sets' Latch 1.

• LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operand 'resets' Latch 1.

5

LATCH N

TYPE

Reset

Dominant

Set

Dominant

LATCH N

SET

ON

OFF

LATCH N

RESET

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

LATCH N

ON

ON

Previous

State

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Previous

State

OFF

LATCH N

OFF

OFF

Previous

State

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Previous

State

ON

SETTING

LATCH 1 FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

LATCH 1 SET:

Off=0

SETTING

LATCH 1 SET:

Off=0

SETTING

LATCH 1 TYPE:

RUN

SET

RESET

Figure 5–51: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N = 1 to 16) AND LOGIC


LATCH 1 ON

LATCH 1 OFF

842005A1.CDR

GE Multilin


5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS

5.6GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW

5

Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to setting group designations 1 to 6.

The performance of these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system configuration, season of the year, etc.). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the

SETTING GROUPS

menu (see the

Control elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to elements section at the beginning of this chapter.

5.6.2 SETTING GROUP

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


SETTING GROUP 1


ELEMENTS

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE CURRENT

NEUTRAL CURRENT

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GROUND CURRENT

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE

CURRENT

BREAKER FAILURE

VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

SUPERVISING

ELEMENTS

See page 5-120.

See page 5-126.

See page 5-138.

See page 5-145.

See page 5-148.

See page 5-150.

See page 5-158.

See page 5-165.

Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if no other group is active (see the Control elements section for additional details).

5.6.3 LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ø


Ö


Ö



ELEMENTS

CURRENT

DIFFERENTIAL

See page 5-121.

MESSAGE

STUB BUS

See page 5-125.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

LINE DIFFERENTIAL...

Ö


CURRENT

DIFFERENTIAL

CURRENT DIFF




MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL

SOURCE 1: SRC 1


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF

PICKUP: 0.20 pu


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF

CT TAP 1: 1.00


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF

CT TAP 2: 1.00


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF

RESTRAINT 1: 30%


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF

RESTRAINT 2: 50%


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF

BREAK PT: 1.0 pu

Range: Disabled, Per phase, 2-out-of-3, Average

MESSAGE

INRUSH INHIBIT MODE:

Disabled

Range: 1.0 to 40.0% f

0

in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

INRUSH INHIBIT

LEVEL: 20% fo


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF GND



MESSAGE


PICKUP: 0.10 pu


MESSAGE


RESTRAINT: 25%


MESSAGE


DELAY: 0.10 s


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF DTT:

Enabled


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT:

Off


MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF



MESSAGE

CURRENT DIFF


The following settings are available for current differential protection.

• CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1: This setting selects the first source for the current differential element local operating current. If more than one source is configured, the other source currents are scaled to the CT with the maximum primary current assigned by the


to


settings. This source is mandatory and is assigned with the

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

Ö

SOURCE 1

menu.

5

GE Multilin



5

• CURRENT DIFF BLOCK: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand to block the operation of the current differential element.

• CURRENT DIFF PICKUP: This setting is used to select current differential pickup value.

• CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 1 and CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 2: These settings adapt the remote terminal 1 or 2 (communication channel) CT ratio to the local ratio if the CT ratios for the local and remote terminals are different. The setting value is determined by CT prim_rem

/ CT prim_loc

for local and remote terminal CTs (where CT prim_rem

/ CT prim_loc

is referred to as the CT primary rated current). Ratio matching must always be performed against the remote CT with the maximum CT primary defined by the


through


settings.

See the Current differential settings example in the Application of settings chapter for additional details.

When in-zone power transformer is present, this setting should be calculated and used by taking into account the inzone power transformer as follows.

CT Tap

=

CT prim_rem

×

×

V

-------------------------------------------------------- for remote terminals 1 and 2, respecitvely

CT prim_loc

V

prim_loc

(EQ 5.9)

In this equation, V prim_rem

is primary nominal voltage of the transformer winding at the remote terminal and V prim_loc

is primary nominal voltage of the transformer winding at the local terminal.

• CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 and CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2: These settings select the bias characteristic for the first and second slope, respectively.

• CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT: This setting is used to select an intersection point between the two slopes.

• INRUSH INHIBIT MODE: This setting selects the mode for blocking differential protection during magnetizing inrush conditions. Modern transformers may produce small second harmonic ratios during inrush conditions. This may result undesired tripping of the protected line. Reducing the second harmonic inhibit threshold may jeopardize dependability and speed of differential protection. When low, the second harmonic ratio causes problems in one phase only. This may be utilized as a mean to ensure security by applying cross-phase blocking rather than lowering the inrush inhibit threshold.

– If set to “Disabled”, no inrush inhibit action is taken.

– If set to “Per phase”, the L30 performs inrush inhibit individually in each phase.

– If set to “2-out-of-3”, the L30 checks second harmonic level in all three phases individually. If any two phases establish an inhibiting condition, then the remaining phase is restrained automatically.

– If set to “Average”, the L30 first calculates the average second harmonic ratio, then applies the inrush threshold to the calculated average.

• INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL: This setting specifies the level of second harmonic component in the transformer magnetizing inrush current, above which the current differential element will be inhibited from operating. The value of the

INRUSH INHIBIT MODE

setting must be taken into account when programming this value. This setting is typically programmed as “20% f

0

“.

• CURRENT DIFF GND FUNCTION: This setting enables and disabled the 87LG neutral differential element, which may be used to detect high-resistive faults. This element uses restrained characteristics to cope with spurious zerosequence current during system unbalance and signal distortions. The differential neutral current is calculated as the vector sum of all in-zone CT input neutral currents. The restraint current is derived as the maximum of phase currents from all terminals flowing through any individual CT, including breaker-and-a-half configurations. The 87LG neutral differential element is blocked when the phase current at any terminal is greater than 3 pu, since the phase differential element should operate for internal faults. To correctly derive the restraint quantity from the maximum through current at any terminal, it is important that the 87L phase-segregated differential pickup and slope settings are equal at all terminals. Refer to the Applications of settings chapter for additional details.

• CURRENT DIFF GND PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for neutral current differential element.

• CURRENT DIFF GND RESTRAINT: This setting specifies the bias characteristic for the neutral current differential element.

• CURRENT DIFF GND DELAY: This setting specifies the operation delay for the neutral current differential element.

Since this element is used to detect high-resistive faults where fault currents are relatively low, high-speed operation is usually not critical. This delay will provide security against spurious neutral current during switch-off transients and external fault clearing.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS

• CURRENT DIFF DTT: This setting enables and disables the sending of a DTT by the current differential element on per single-phase basis to remote devices. To allow the L30 to restart from master-master to master-slave mode (very important on three-terminal applications),

CURR DIFF DTT

must be set to “Enabled”.

• CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT: This setting selects an additional protection element (besides the current differential element; for example, distance element or breaker failure) which keys the DTT on a per three-phase basis.

NOTE

For the current differential element to function properly, it is imperative that all L30 devices on the protected line have exactly identical firmware revisions. For example, revision 5.62 in only compatible with

5.62, not 5.61 or 5.63.

5

GE Multilin


5


5-124

Figure 5–52: CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) STUB BUS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö


Ö


Ö


ÖØ

STUB BUS

STUB BUS

STUB BUS FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

STUB BUS DISCONNECT:

Off


MESSAGE

STUB BUS TRIGGER:

Off


MESSAGE

STUB BUS TARGET:

Self-reset


MESSAGE

STUB BUS EVENTS:

Disabled

The stub bus element protects for faults between two breakers in a breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configuration when the line disconnect switch is open. At the same time, if the line is still energized through the remote terminal(s), differential protection is still required (the line may still need to be energized because there is a tapped load on a two terminal line or because the line is a three terminal line with two of the terminals still connected). Correct operation for this condition is achieved by the local relay sending zero current values to the remote end(s) so that a local bus fault does not result in tripping the line. At the local end, the differential element is disabled and stub bus protection is provided by a user-selected overcurrent element. If there is a line fault, the remote end(s) will trip on differential but local differential function and DTT signal (if enabled) to the local end, will be blocked by the stub bus logic allowing the local breakers to remain closed.

• STUB BUS FUNCTION: There are three requirements for stub bus operation: the element must be enabled, an indication that the line disconnect is open, and the

STUB BUS TRIGGER

setting is set as indicated below. There are two methods of setting the stub bus trigger and thus setting up stub bus operation:

1.

If


is “On”, the

STUB BUS OPERATE

operand picks up as soon as the disconnect switch opens, causing zero currents to be transmitted to remote end(s) and DTT receipt from remote end(s) to be permanently blocked. An overcurrent element, blocked by disconnect switch closed, provides protection for the local bus.

2.

An alternate method is to set


to be the pickup of an assigned instantaneous overcurrent element. The instantaneous overcurrent element must operate quickly enough to pick up the

STUB BUS OPERATE operand, disable the local differential, and send zero currents to the other terminal(s). If the bus minimum fault current is above five times the instantaneous overcurrent pickup, tests have confirmed that the

STUB BUS OPERATE operand always pick up correctly for a stub bus fault and prevents tripping of the remote terminal. If minimum stub bus fault current is below this value, then method 1 should be used. Note also that correct testing of stub bus operation, when this method is used, requires sudden injection of a fault currents above five times instantaneous overcurrent pickup. The assigned current element should be mapped to appropriate output contact(s) to trip the stub bus breakers. It should be blocked unless disconnect is open. To prevent 87L tripping from remote L30 relays still protecting the line, the auxiliary contact of line disconnect switch (logic “1” when line switch is open) should be assigned to block the local 87L function by using the

CURRENT DIFF BLOCK

setting.

• STUB BUS DISCONNECT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to represent the open state of auxiliary contact of line disconnect switch (logic “1” when line disconnect switch is open). If necessary, simple logic representing not only line disconnect switch but also the closed state of the breakers can be created with FlexLogic™ and assigned to this setting.

• STUB BUS TRIGGER: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand that causes the

STUB BUS OPERATE

operand to pick up if the line disconnect is open. It can be set either to “On” or to an instantaneous overcurrent element (see above). If the instantaneous overcurrent used for the stub bus protection is set with a time delay, then


should use the associated instantaneous overcurrent

pickup

operand. The source assigned for the current of this element must cover the stub between CTs of the associated breakers and disconnect switch.

5

GE Multilin



SETTING

STUB BUS

FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

STUB BUS

DISCONNECT:

Off=0

AND


STUB BUS OP

SETTING

STUB BUS

TRIGGER:

Off=0

831012A3.CDR

Figure 5–53: STUB BUS SCHEME LOGIC

5 a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

PHASE CURRENT

PHASE CURRENT

PHASE TOC1

See page 5-132.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE TOC2

PHASE IOC1

See page 5-132.

See page 5-134.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE IOC2

PHASE

DIRECTIONAL 1

PHASE

DIRECTIONAL 2

See page 5-134.

See page 5–136.

See page 5–136.

5.6.4 PHASE CURRENT


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I

2 t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.

If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves™ may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics.

The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.

Table 5–12: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

IEEE

IEEE Extremely Inverse

IEEE Very Inverse

IEEE Moderately Inverse

IEC

IEC Curve A (BS142)

IEC Curve B (BS142)

IEC Curve C (BS142)

IEC Short Inverse

GE TYPE IAC

IAC Extremely Inverse

IAC Very Inverse

IAC Inverse

IAC Short Inverse

OTHER

I

2 t

FlexCurves™ A, B, C, and D

Recloser Curves

Definite Time

A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with the curve shape (

CURVE

) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional to the time multiplier (

TD MULTIPLIER

) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.

Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The “Instantaneous” selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.

5

GE Multilin



IEEE CURVES:

The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:

T

=

TDM

× ⎛

⎝

I

A

B pickup

⎠

⎞

p

– 1

+

,

T

RESET

=

TDM

×

------------------------------------

1

–

⎝

⎛

I t

I

----------------

pickup

⎠

⎞ 2

(EQ 5.10)

where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, I

pickup

= Pickup Current setting

A, B, p = constants, T

RESET

= reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and

RESET

is “Timed”),

t r

= characteristic constant

Table 5–13: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE

IEEE Extremely Inverse

IEEE Very Inverse

IEEE Moderately Inverse

A

28.2

19.61

0.0515

B

0.1217

0.491

0.1140

P

2.0000

2.0000

0.02000

T

R

29.1

21.6

4.85

5

Table 5–14: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER

(TDM)

1.5

IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE

2.0

0.5

1.0

11.341

22.682

4.761

9.522

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

45.363

90.727

136.090

181.454

32.358

64.716

97.074

129.432

19.043

38.087

57.130

76.174

95.217

10.0

226.817

IEEE VERY INVERSE

0.5

1.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

8.090

16.179

3.514

7.028

14.055

28.111

42.166

56.221

10.0

161.790

70.277

IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE

0.5

1.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

3.220

6.439

12.878

25.756

38.634

51.512

64.390

1.902

3.803

7.606

15.213

22.819

30.426

38.032

3.0

1.823

3.647

7.293

14.587

21.880

29.174

36.467

1.471

2.942

5.885

11.769

17.654

23.538

29.423

1.216

2.432

4.864

9.729

14.593

19.458

24.322

4.0

1.001

2.002

4.003

8.007

12.010

16.014

20.017

0.899

1.798

3.597

7.193

10.790

14.387

17.983

0.973

1.946

3.892

7.783

11.675

15.567

19.458

CURRENT ( I / I

pickup

)

5.0

6.0

0.648

1.297

2.593

5.187

7.780

10.374

12.967

0.654

1.308

2.616

5.232

7.849

10.465

13.081

0.844

1.688

3.377

6.753

10.130

13.507

16.883

0.526

1.051

2.103

4.205

6.308

8.410

10.513

0.763

1.526

3.051

6.102

9.153

12.204

15.255

0.464

0.927

1.855

3.710

5.564

7.419

9.274

7.0

0.706

1.412

2.823

5.647

8.470

11.294

14.117

0.355

0.709

1.418

2.837

4.255

5.674

7.092

0.450

0.900

1.799

3.598

5.397

7.196

8.995

0.630

1.260

2.521

5.041

7.562

10.083

12.604

0.368

0.736

1.472

2.945

4.417

5.889

7.361

9.0

0.237

0.474

0.948

1.897

2.845

3.794

4.742

0.663

1.327

2.653

5.307

7.960

10.614

13.267

0.401

0.802

1.605

3.209

4.814

6.418

8.023

8.0

0.285

0.569

1.139

2.277

3.416

4.555

5.693

0.603

1.207

2.414

4.827

7.241

9.654

12.068

0.345

0.689

1.378

2.756

4.134

5.513

6.891

10.0

0.203

0.407

0.813

1.626

2.439

3.252

4.065


GE Multilin


IEC CURVES

For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:

T

=

TDM

×

( ⁄

pickup

)

E

– 1

,

T

RESET

=

TDM

×

t

---------------------------------------

1 –

(

I I pickup

)

2

(EQ 5.11)

where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, I

pickup

= Pickup Current setting, K, E = constants, t

r

= characteristic constant, and T

RESET


RESET

is “Timed”)

Table 5–15: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE

IEC Curve A (BS142)

IEC Curve B (BS142)

IEC Curve C (BS142)

IEC Short Inverse

K

0.140

13.500

80.000

0.050

E

0.020

1.000

2.000

0.040

T

R

9.7

43.2

58.2

0.500

Table 5–16: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER

(TDM)

1.5

IEC CURVE A

0.05

0.10

0.20

0.40

0.60

0.80

1.00

0.860

1.719

3.439

6.878

10.317

13.755

17.194

IEC CURVE B

0.05

0.10

0.20

0.40

0.60

0.80

1.00

1.350

2.700

5.400

10.800

16.200

21.600

27.000

IEC CURVE C

0.05

0.10

0.20

0.40

0.60

0.80

1.00

3.200

6.400

12.800

25.600

38.400

51.200

64.000

IEC SHORT TIME

0.05

0.10

0.153

0.306

0.20

0.40

0.60

0.80

1.00

0.612

1.223

1.835

2.446

3.058

2.0

0.089

0.178

0.356

0.711

1.067

1.423

1.778

0.501

1.003

2.006

4.012

6.017

8.023

10.029

0.675

1.350

2.700

5.400

8.100

10.800

13.500

1.333

2.667

5.333

10.667

16.000

21.333

26.667

3.0

0.056

0.111

0.223

0.445

0.668

0.890

1.113

0.500

1.000

2.000

4.000

6.000

8.000

10.000

0.338

0.675

1.350

2.700

4.050

5.400

6.750

0.315

0.630

1.260

2.521

3.781

5.042

6.302

4.0

0.044

0.088

0.175

0.351

0.526

0.702

0.877

0.267

0.533

1.067

2.133

3.200

4.267

5.333

0.225

0.450

0.900

1.800

2.700

3.600

4.500

0.249

0.498

0.996

1.992

2.988

3.984

4.980

CURRENT ( I / I

pickup

)

5.0

6.0

0.038

0.075

0.150

0.301

0.451

0.602

0.752

0.167

0.333

0.667

1.333

2.000

2.667

3.333

0.169

0.338

0.675

1.350

2.025

2.700

3.375

0.214

0.428

0.856

1.712

2.568

3.424

4.280

0.034

0.067

0.135

0.269

0.404

0.538

0.673

0.114

0.229

0.457

0.914

1.371

1.829

2.286

0.135

0.270

0.540

1.080

1.620

2.160

2.700

0.192

0.384

0.767

1.535

2.302

3.070

3.837

7.0

0.176

0.353

0.706

1.411

2.117

2.822

3.528

0.113

0.225

0.450

0.900

1.350

1.800

2.250

0.083

0.167

0.333

0.667

1.000

1.333

1.667

0.031

0.062

0.124

0.247

0.371

0.494

0.618

0.063

0.127

0.254

0.508

0.762

1.016

1.270

0.096

0.193

0.386

0.771

1.157

1.543

1.929

0.029

0.058

0.115

0.231

0.346

0.461

0.576

8.0

0.165

0.330

0.659

1.319

1.978

2.637

3.297

0.050

0.100

0.200

0.400

0.600

0.800

1.000

0.084

0.169

0.338

0.675

1.013

1.350

1.688

0.027

0.054

0.109

0.218

0.327

0.435

0.544

9.0

0.156

0.312

0.623

1.247

1.870

2.493

3.116

0.040

0.081

0.162

0.323

0.485

0.646

0.808

0.075

0.150

0.300

0.600

0.900

1.200

1.500

0.026

0.052

0.104

0.207

0.311

0.415

0.518

10.0

0.149

0.297

0.594

1.188

1.782

2.376

2.971

5

GE Multilin



IAC CURVES:

The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:

T

=

TDM

×

⎜

⎝

⎛

A

+

( ⁄

B

------------------------------

pkp

) C

+

(

--------------------------------------

(

I I

D pkp

) C )

2

+

(

--------------------------------------

(

I I

E pkp

) C )

3

⎞

⎟

⎠

,

T

RESET

=

TDM

×

--------------------------------

1 –

(

t

I I pkp

)

2

(EQ 5.12)

where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, I

pkp

= Pickup Current setting, A to E = constants, t

r

= characteristic constant, and T

RESET


RESET

is “Timed”)

Table 5–17: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C

IAC Extreme Inverse

IAC Very Inverse

IAC Inverse

IAC Short Inverse

0.0040

0.0900

0.2078

0.0428

0.6379

0.7955

0.8630

0.0609

0.6200

0.1000

0.8000

0.6200

D

1.7872

–1.2885

–0.4180

–0.0010

E

0.2461

7.9586

0.1947

0.0221

T

R

6.008

4.678

0.990

0.222

5

Table 5–18: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER

(TDM)

1.5

IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE

2.0

0.5

1.0

1.699

3.398

0.749

1.498

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

6.796

13.591

20.387

27.183

2.997

5.993

8.990

11.987

14.983

10.0

33.979

IAC VERY INVERSE

0.5

1.0

1.451

2.901

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

5.802

11.605

17.407

23.209

0.656

1.312

2.624

5.248

7.872

10.497

13.121

10.0

IAC INVERSE

29.012

0.5

1.0

0.578

1.155

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

2.310

4.621

6.931

9.242

0.375

0.749

1.499

2.997

4.496

5.995

7.494

10.0

11.552

IAC SHORT INVERSE

0.5

1.0

0.072

0.143

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

0.286

0.573

0.859

1.145

1.431

0.047

0.095

0.190

0.379

0.569

0.759

0.948

3.0

0.303

0.606

1.212

2.423

3.635

4.846

6.058

0.269

0.537

1.075

2.150

3.225

4.299

5.374

0.266

0.532

1.064

2.128

3.192

4.256

5.320

0.035

0.070

0.140

0.279

0.419

0.559

0.699

0.031

0.061

0.123

0.245

0.368

0.490

0.613

0.221

0.443

0.885

1.770

2.656

3.541

4.426

4.0

CURRENT ( I / I

pickup

)

5.0

6.0

7.0

0.172

0.343

0.687

1.374

2.061

2.747

3.434

0.178

0.356

0.711

1.422

2.133

2.844

3.555

0.123

0.246

0.491

0.983

1.474

1.966

2.457

0.133

0.266

0.533

1.065

1.598

2.131

2.663

0.093

0.186

0.372

0.744

1.115

1.487

1.859

0.113

0.227

0.453

0.906

1.359

1.813

2.266

0.101

0.202

0.405

0.810

1.215

1.620

2.025

0.074

0.149

0.298

0.595

0.893

1.191

1.488

0.028

0.057

0.114

0.228

0.341

0.455

0.569

0.196

0.392

0.784

1.569

2.353

3.138

3.922

0.027

0.054

0.108

0.217

0.325

0.434

0.542

0.180

0.360

0.719

1.439

2.158

2.878

3.597

0.026

0.052

0.105

0.210

0.314

0.419

0.524

0.168

0.337

0.674

1.348

2.022

2.695

3.369

0.154

0.307

0.614

1.229

1.843

2.457

3.072

0.087

0.174

0.349

0.698

1.046

1.395

1.744

0.025

0.050

0.100

0.200

0.301

0.401

0.501

9.0

0.053

0.106

0.212

0.424

0.636

0.848

1.060

0.160

0.320

0.640

1.280

1.921

2.561

3.201

0.093

0.186

0.372

0.745

1.117

1.490

1.862

0.026

0.051

0.102

0.204

0.307

0.409

0.511

8.0

0.062

0.124

0.248

0.495

0.743

0.991

1.239

0.148

0.297

0.594

1.188

1.781

2.375

2.969

0.083

0.165

0.331

0.662

0.992

1.323

1.654

0.025

0.049

0.099

0.197

0.296

0.394

0.493

10.0

0.046

0.093

0.185

0.370

0.556

0.741

0.926


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

I2t CURVES:

The curves for the I

2 t are derived from the formulae:

5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS

T

= TDM

×

⎛

⎝

I

----------------

I pickup

⎞

⎠

2

,

T

RESET

= TDM

×

⎛

⎝

I

----------------

I pickup

⎞

⎠

–

2

(EQ 5.13)

where: T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; I

pickup

= Pickup Current Setting;

T

RESET

= Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

Table 5–19: I

2

T CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER

(TDM)

0.01

0.10

1.00

10.00

100.00

600.00

1.5

0.44

4.44

44.44

2.0

0.25

2.50

25.00

3.0

0.11

1.11

11.11

444.44

4444.4

250.00

2500.0

111.11

1111.1

26666.7

15000.0

6666.7

4.0

0.06

0.63

6.25

62.50

625.00

3750.0

CURRENT ( I / I

pickup

)

5.0

6.0

0.04

0.40

0.03

0.28

4.00

40.00

400.00

2400.0

2.78

27.78

277.78

1666.7

7.0

0.02

0.20

2.04

20.41

204.08

1224.5

8.0

0.02

0.16

1.56

15.63

156.25

937.50

9.0

0.01

0.12

1.23

12.35

123.46

740.74

10.0

0.01

0.10

1.00

10.00

100.00

600.00

FLEXCURVES™:

The custom FlexCurves™ are described in detail in the FlexCurves™ section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the

FlexCurves™ are derived from the formulae:

T

= TDM

×

FlexCurve Time at

⎛

⎝

I pickup

⎞

⎠

when

⎝

⎛

I pickup

⎞

⎠

≥

1.00

(EQ 5.14)

T

RESET

=

TDM

×

FlexCurve Time at

⎛

⎝

I pickup

⎞

⎠

when

⎛

⎝

I

----------------

I pickup

⎞

⎠

≤

0.98

(EQ 5.15)

where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, I

pickup


T

RESET

= Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

DEFINITE TIME CURVE:

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.

T

= TDM in seconds, when I

>

I pickup

(EQ 5.16)

T

RESET

= TDM in seconds

(EQ 5.17)

where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, I

pickup


T

RESET

= Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

RECLOSER CURVES:

The L30 uses the FlexCurve™ feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve™ section in this chapter for additional details.

5

GE Multilin



5

c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

PHASE CURRENT

Ö

PHASE TOC1(2)

PHASE TOC1

PHASE TOC1




MESSAGE

PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1

Range: Phasor, RMS

MESSAGE

PHASE TOC1

INPUT: Phasor

PHASE TOC1


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE TOC1

CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv

PHASE TOC1

TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00

PHASE TOC1

RESET: Instantaneous

PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE

RESTRAINT: Disabled

PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:

Off

PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:

Off

PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:

Off

PHASE TOC1


PHASE TOC1


Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table


Range: Instantaneous, Timed







The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.

Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse Time overcurrent

curves characteristic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.

The

PHASE TOC1 PICKUP

setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’ times the

PHASE TOC1 PICKUP

setting. If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.


GE Multilin


SETTING

PHASE TOC1

FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

PHASE TOC1

BLOCK-A :

Off=0

SETTING

PHASE TOC1

BLOCK-B:

Off=0

SETTING

PHASE TOC1

BLOCK-C:

Off=0

SETTING

PHASE TOC1

SOURCE:

IA

IB

IC

Seq=ABC Seq=ACB

VAB VAC

VBC

VCA

VBA

VCB

SETTING

PHASE TOC1 VOLT

RESTRAINT:

Enabled

RUN

Calculate

RUN

Calculate

RUN

Calculate

Set

Multiplier

Set

Multiplier

Set

Multiplier

1.0

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage

818784A4.CDR

Figure 5–54: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC

MULTIPLY INPUTS

Set Pickup

Multiplier-Phase A

Set Pickup

Multiplier-Phase B

Set Pickup

Multiplier-Phase C

AND

AND

AND

SETTING

PHASE TOC1

INPUT:

PHASE TOC1

PICKUP:

PHASE TOC1

CURVE:

PHASE TOC1

TD MULTIPLIER:

PHASE TOC1

RESET:

RUN

IA PICKUP t

RUN

IB PICKUP t

RUN

IC PICKUP t

OR

OR

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

PHASE TOC1 A PKP

PHASE TOC1 A DPO

PHASE TOC1 A OP

PHASE TOC1 B PKP

PHASE TOC1 B DPO

PHASE TOC1 B OP

PHASE TOC1 C PKP

PHASE TOC1 C DPO

PHASE TOC1 C OP

PHASE TOC1 PKP

PHASE TOC1 OP

PHASE TOC1 DPO

827072A4.CDR

Figure 5–55: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC

5

GE Multilin



5

d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

PHASE CURRENT

Ö

PHASE IOC 1(2)

PHASE IOC1

PHASE IOC1




MESSAGE

PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1

PHASE IOC1


MESSAGE

PHASE IOC1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

PHASE IOC1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A:

Off

PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B:

Off

PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C:

Off

PHASE IOC1


PHASE IOC1







The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude. The phase instantaneous overcurrent timing curves are shown below for form-A contacts in a 60 Hz system.


GE Multilin


35

30

25

20

15

10

5

Maximum

Minimum

0

1.05

1.1

1.2

1.5

2

Multiple of pickup

5 10 15 20

Figure 5–56: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT TIMING CURVES

843807A1.CDR

SETTING

PHASE IOC1

FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

Disabled = 0

SETTING

PHASE IOC1

SOURCE:

IA

IB

IC

SETTING

PHASE IOC1

BLOCK-A:

Off = 0

SETTING

PHASE IOC1

BLOCK-B:

Off = 0

SETTING

PHASE IOC1

BLOCK-C:

Off = 0

AND

SETTING

PHASE IOC1

PICKUP:

RUN

AND

IA PICKUP

RUN

AND

IB PICKUP

RUN

IC PICKUP

SETTINGS

PHASE IOC1

PICKUPDELAY:

PHASE IOC1 RESET

DELAY: t

PKP

t

RST

t

PKP

t

RST

t

PKP

t

RST

OR

OR

AND

FLEXLOGIC

OPERANDS

PHASE IOC1 A PKP

PHASE IOC1 A DPO

PHASE IOC1 B PKP

PHASE IOC1 B DPO

PHASE IOC1 C PKP

PHASE IOC1 C DPO

PHASE IOC1 A OP

PHASE IOC1 B OP

PHASE IOC1 C OP

PHASE IOC1 PKP

PHASE IOC1 OP

PHASE IOC1 DPO

827033A6.VSD

Figure 5–57: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC

5

GE Multilin



5

e) PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67P)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

PHASE CURRENT

Ö

PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1(2)

PHASE

DIRECTIONAL 1

PHASE DIR 1




MESSAGE

PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

PHASE DIR 1

ECA: 30


MESSAGE

PHASE DIR POL V1

THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK

WHEN V MEM EXP: No


MESSAGE

PHASE DIR 1



MESSAGE

PHASE DIR 1


The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the

BLOCK

inputs of these elements.

OUTPUT

S

0

–90°

1

VCG

VAG (Unfaulted)

Fault angle set at 60° Lag

VAG(Faulted)

VPol

IA

ECA set at 30°

VBC

VBC

VBG

+90°

Phasors for Phase A Polarization:

VPol = VBC

×

(1/_ECA) = polarizing voltage

IA = operating current

ECA = Element Characteristic Angle at 30° 827800A2.CDR

Figure 5–58: PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION

This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is flowing in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90° or quadrature connection. If there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen through a bus-tie breaker, two phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite element characteristic angle (ECA) settings.


GE Multilin


To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed.

The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating signal

(phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic angle, ECA).

The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:

PHASE

A

B

C

OPERATING

SIGNAL

angle of IA angle of IB angle of IC

POLARIZING SIGNAL V pol

ABC PHASE SEQUENCE

angle of VBC

× (1∠ECA) angle of VCA

× (1∠ECA) angle of VAB

× (1∠ECA)

ACB PHASE SEQUENCE

angle of VCB

× (1∠ECA) angle of VAC

× 1∠ECA) angle of VBA

× (1∠ECA)

MODE OF OPERATION:

• When the function is “Disabled”, or the operating current is below 5%

× CT nominal, the element output is “0”.

• When the function is “Enabled”, the operating current is above 5%

× CT nominal, and the polarizing voltage is above the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


value, the element output is dependent on the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals:

– The element output is logic “0” when the operating current is within polarizing voltage ±90°.

– For all other angles, the element output is logic “1”.

• Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set to block or trip on overcurrent as follows:

– When

BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP

is set to “Yes”, the directional element will block the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires.

– When

BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP

is set to “No”, the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control when voltage memory expires.

In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the ‘polarizing voltage threshold’.

SETTINGS:

• PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals.

The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polarizing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90° or ‘quadrature’ connection and shifted in the leading direction by the element characteristic angle (ECA).

• PHASE DIR 1 ECA: This setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage is shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of the UR-series elements, a block is applied to an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. This element should be programmed via the

ECA setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction.

• PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is “0.700 pu”.

• PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to "Yes", the directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control, when voltage memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control.

NOTE

The phase directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the element needs some time – in the order of 8 ms – to establish a blocking signal. Some protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is established. Therefore, a coordination time of at least 10 ms must be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the phase directional element. If current reversal is of a concern, a longer delay – in the order of 20 ms – may be needed.

5

GE Multilin



5

SETTING

PHASE DIR 1

FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

PHASE DIR 1

BLOCK:

Off=0

SETTING

PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE:

IA

Seq=ABC

VBC

Seq=ACB

VCB

AND

I 0.05 pu

SETTING

PHASE DIR 1 POL V

THRESHOLD:

-Use V when V Min

-Use V memory when

V < Min

V MINIMUM

SETTING

PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC

WHEN V MEM EXP:

No

Yes

MEMORY TIMER

1 cycle

1 sec

USE ACTUAL VOLTAGE

USE MEMORIZED VOLTAGE

PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A

AND

SETTING

PHASE DIR 1 ECA:

RUN

0

1

I

Vpol

AND

OR

OR


PH DIR1 BLK


PH DIR1 BLK A


PH DIR1 BLK B

PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A


PH DIR1 BLK C

827078A6.CDR

Figure 5–59: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.5 NEUTRAL CURRENT a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

NEUTRAL CURRENT

NEUTRAL CURRENT

NEUTRAL TOC1

See page 5-139.

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL TOC2

See page 5-139.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL IOC1

NEUTRAL IOC2

NEUTRAL

DIRECTIONAL 1

NEUTRAL

DIRECTIONAL 2

See page 5-140.

See page 5-140.

See page 5–141.

See page 5–141.


GE Multilin


b) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

NEUTRAL CURRENT

Ö

NEUTRAL TOC1(2)

NEUTRAL TOC1

NEUTRAL TOC1




MESSAGE

NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL TOC1

INPUT: Phasor

NEUTRAL TOC1


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL TOC1


NEUTRAL TOC1


NEUTRAL TOC1


NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK:

Off

NEUTRAL TOC1


NEUTRAL TOC1


Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table






The neutral time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple definite time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.

Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse time overcurrent curve

characteristics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.

SETTING

NEUTRAL TOC1

FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

NEUTRAL TOC1

SOURCE:

IN

AND

SETTINGS

NEUTRAL TOC1

INPUT:

NEUTRAL TOC1

PICKUP:

NEUTRAL TOC1

CURVE:

NEUTRAL TOC1

TD MULTIPLIER:

NEUTRAL TOC 1

RESET:

RUN IN ≥ PICKUP t

I


NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP

NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO

NEUTRAL TOC1 OP

SETTING

NEUTRAL TOC1

BLOCK:

Off = 0

Figure 5–60: NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC

827034A3.VSD

5

GE Multilin



5

c) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

NEUTRAL CURRENT

ÖØ

NEUTRAL IOC1(2)

NEUTRAL IOC1

NEUTRAL IOC1




MESSAGE

NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1

NEUTRAL IOC1


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:

Off

NEUTRAL IOC1


NEUTRAL IOC1





The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a definite time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion

(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity of the element as follows:

I op

= 3

× (

I_0 –

K

⋅

I_1

)

where K = 1 16

(EQ 5.18)

The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from:

• System unbalances under heavy load conditions

• Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults.

• Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:

I op

=

injected

; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection:

I op

=

3

×

I injected

).

SETTING

NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:

Off=0

SETTING

NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:

I_0

AND

SETTING

NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:

RUN

3( _0 - K

I

_1 ) PICKUP

SETTINGS

NEUTRAL IOC1

PICKUP DELAY :

NEUTRAL IOC1

RESET DELAY : t

PKP t

RST


NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP

NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO

NEUTRAL IOC1 OP

827035A4.CDR

Figure 5–61: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC


GE Multilin


d) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67N)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

NEUTRAL CURRENT

ÖØ

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1

NEUTRAL

DIRECTIONAL OC1

NEUTRAL DIR OC1




MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1

SOURCE: SRC 1

Range: Voltage, Current, Dual

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1

POLARIZING: Voltage

Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL

VOLT: Calculated V0

Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP

CURR: Calculated 3I0


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-

SEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063

Range: 0.00 to 250.00


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1

OFFSET: 0.00

Ω


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

ECA: 75° Lag


MESSAGE


LIMIT ANGLE: 90°


MESSAGE




MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

LIMIT ANGLE: 90°


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV



MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK:

Off


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1



MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1


The neutral directional overcurrent element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications the

NEUTRAL DIR

OC1 FWD

and

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

operands, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively

(directional unit).

The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the either the neutral current calculated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are separate pickup settings for the forward-looking and reverse-looking functions. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zerosequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity.

I op

= 3

× (

I_0 –

K

×

I_1

)

(EQ 5.19)

The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from:

• System unbalances under heavy load conditions.

5

GE Multilin



• Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults.

• Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of

I

pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:

op

= (1 – K)

× I

injected

; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I

op

= 3

× I

injected

).

The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low.

The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and may be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage (“Calculated V0” or “Measured VX”), ground current (IG), or both for polarizing. The following tables define the neutral directional overcurrent element.

5

Table 5–20: QUANTITIES FOR "CALCULATED 3I0" CONFIGURATION

POLARIZING MODE

Voltage

Current

Dual

DIRECTIONAL UNIT

DIRECTION

Forward

Reverse

COMPARED PHASORS

–V_0 + Z_offset

× I_0

–V_0 + Z_offset

× I_0

I_0

× 1∠ECA

–I_0

× 1∠ECA

Forward

Reverse

IG

IG

–V_0 + Z_offset

× I_0

I_0

–I_0

I_0

× 1∠ECA

Forward

or

IG

–V_0 + Z_offset

× I_0

I_0

–I_0

× 1∠ECA

Reverse

or

IG –I_0

OVERCURRENT UNIT

I op

= 3

I

× (|I_0| – K × |I_1|) if |I op

= 3

× (|I_0|) if |I

1

1

| > 0.8 pu

|

≤ 0.8 pu

Table 5–21: QUANTITIES FOR "MEASURED IG" CONFIGURATION

POLARIZING MODE

Voltage

DIRECTIONAL UNIT

DIRECTION

Forward

Reverse

COMPARED PHASORS

–V_0 + Z_offset

× IG/3

–V_0 + Z_offset

× IG/3

IG

–IG

× 1∠ECA

× 1∠ECA

OVERCURRENT UNIT

I op

= |IG| where: V_0 =

1

+ VBG + VCG

3

( )

= zero sequence voltage ,

I_0

=

1

---IN

3

=

1

3

(

+

IB

+

IC

)

= zero sequence current ,

ECA = element characteristic angle and IG = ground current

When

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT

is set to “Measured VX”, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element.

The figure below shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:

• ECA = 90° (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)

• FWD LA = 80° (forward limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)

• REV LA = 80° (reverse limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)

The above bias should be taken into account when using the neutral directional overcurrent element to directionalize other protection elements.


GE Multilin


REV LA line

–3V_0 line

VAG

(reference)

FWD LA line

REV Operating

Region

FWD Operating

Region

LA

LA

ECA

3I_0 line

ECA line

–ECA line

–3I_0 line

VCG

LA

LA

VBG

REV LA line

3V_0 line

FWD LA line

827805A1.CDR

Figure 5–62: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE-POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.

– If “Voltage” polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X, both from the

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE

.

The calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided

SYSTEM SETUP

Ö

AC INPUTS

ÖØ

VOLTAGE BANK

ÖØ

AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION

is set to “Vn” and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage source (such as open delta connected secondary of VTs).

The zero-sequence (V_0) or auxiliary voltage (V_X), accordingly, must be greater than 0.02 pu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.

– If “Current” polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under

NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE

for polarization. The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be greater than 0.05 pu to be validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. In addition, the zero-sequence current (I_0) must be greater than the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


ÖØ


setting value.

For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this condition. A similar situation arises for a wye/delta/wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral may reverse when faults on both sides of the transformer are considered.

– If “Dual” polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A given direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual" polarizing mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX").

5

GE Multilin



5

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or the ground current shall be used by this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground modes of operation (67N and 67G). If set to “Calculated 3I0” the element uses the phase currents and applies the positive-sequence restraint; if set to “Measured IG” the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT bank configured as

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE

. If this setting is “Measured IG”, then the

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING

setting must be “Voltage”, as it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating and polarizing signal simultaneously.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set to 0.063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the

"Voltage" polarizing mode. The "Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0°. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180°.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence restraint’ technique for the “Calculated 3I0” mode of operation.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique for the “Calculated 3I0” mode of operation.


GE Multilin


SETTING

NEUTRAL DIR OC1

FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK:

Off=0

SETTING

NEUTRAL DIR OC1

SOURCE:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL

VOLT:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP

CURR:

Measured VX

Calculated V_0

Zero Seq Crt (I_0)

Ground Crt (IG)

}

}

SETTING

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

PICKUP:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP

CURR:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-

SEQ RESTRAINT:

RUN

OR

IG PICKUP

AND

AND

AND

SETTINGS

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

ECA:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

LIMIT ANGLE:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

LIMIT ANGLE:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1

OFFSET:

RUN

FWD

FWD

-3V_0

REV

3I_0

Voltage Polarization

REV

OR

AND

1.25 cy

SETTING

IG 0.05 pu

NEUTRAL DIR OC1

POLARIZING:

Voltage

Current

Dual

OR

OR

NOTE:

1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH

THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO

AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE

2) GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION

AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY

3) POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT APPLIED WHEN

I _1 IS BELOW 0.8pu

AND

RUN

Current Polarization

FWD

REV

OR

SETTING

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

PICKUP:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP

CURR:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-

SEQ RESTRAINT:

RUN

AND

OR

IG PICKUP

Figure 5–63: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC

1.5 cy

AND


NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD


NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

827077AB.CDR

5.6.6 GROUND CURRENT a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

GROUND CURRENT

GROUND CURRENT

GROUND TOC1

See page 5-146.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GROUND TOC2

GROUND IOC1

GROUND IOC2

See page 5-146.

See page 5-147.

See page 5-147.

5

GE Multilin



5

b) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

GROUND CURRENT

Ö

GROUND TOC1(2)

GROUND TOC1

GROUND TOC1




MESSAGE

GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

GROUND TOC1

INPUT: Phasor

GROUND TOC1


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GROUND TOC1


GROUND TOC1


GROUND TOC1


GROUND TOC1 BLOCK:

Off

GROUND TOC1


GROUND TOC1


Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table






This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse time overcurrent curve characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.

These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.

NOTE

SETTING

GROUND TOC1

FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

GROUND TOC1

SOURCE:

IG

SETTING

GROUND TOC1

BLOCK:

Off = 0

AND

SETTINGS

GROUND TOC1

INPUT:

GROUND TOC1

PICKUP:

GROUND TOC1

CURVE:

GROUND TOC1

TD MULTIPLIER:

GROUND TOC 1

RESET:

RUN

IG

≥ PICKUP t

I


GROUND TOC1 PKP

GROUND TOC1 DPO

GROUND TOC1 OP

827036A3.VSD

Figure 5–64: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC


GE Multilin


c) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

GROUND CURRENT

ÖØ

GROUND IOC1(2)

GROUND IOC1

GROUND IOC1




MESSAGE

GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1

GROUND IOC1


MESSAGE

GROUND IOC1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

GROUND IOC1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GROUND IOC1 BLOCK:

Off

GROUND IOC1


GROUND IOC1



Range: Self-reset, Latched


,

Disabled

The ground instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor magnitude.

These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.

NOTE


GROUND IOC1 PKP

GROUND IOIC DPO

GROUND IOC1 OP

SETTING

GROUND IOC1

FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

GROUND IOC1

SOURCE:

IG

SETTING

GROUND IOC1

BLOCK:

Off = 0

AND

SETTING

GROUND IOC1

PICKUP:

RUN

IG

≥ PICKUP

SETTINGS

GROUND IOC1 PICKUP

DELAY:

GROUND IOC1 RESET

DELAY: t

PKP

t

RST

827037A4.VSD

Figure 5–65: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5

GE Multilin



5

5.6.7 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

a) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51_2)

PATH: SETTINGS

Ø


ÖØ


ÖØ

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

Ö

NEG SEQ TOC1(2)

NEG SEQ TOC1

NEG SEQ TOC1




MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1


Range: see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table

MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1



MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1



MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1



MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1



MESSAGE

NEG SEQ TOC1


The negative-sequence time overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the system. The input for calculating negative-sequence current is the fundamental phasor value.

Two methods of resetting operation are available; “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse Time Overcurrent Char-

acteristics sub-section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.

SETTING

NEG SEQ TOC1 INPUT:

NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP:

SETTING

NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK:

Off=0

AND

NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE:

NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER:

NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET:

RUN t


NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP

NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO

NEG SEQ TOC1 OP

SETTING

NEG SEQ TOC1 SOURCE:

Neg Seq

Figure 5–66: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

827057A4.CDR


GE Multilin


b) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50_2)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

ÖØ

NEG SEQ OC1(2)

NEG SEQ IOC1

NEG SEQ IOC1




MESSAGE

NEG SEQ IOC1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

NEG SEQ IOC1


NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

NEG SEQ IOC1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK:

Off

NEG SEQ IOC1


NEG SEQ IOC1





The negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a definite time function. The element responds to the negative-sequence current fundamental frequency phasor magnitude (calculated from the phase currents) and applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small portion (12.5%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity:

I op

= I_2 –

K

⋅

I_1 where K =

(EQ 5.20)

The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence currents resulting from:

• system unbalances under heavy load conditions

• transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during three-phase faults

• fault inception and switch-off transients during three-phase faults

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:

I op

=

injected

; three-phase injection, opposite rotation:

I op

=

I injected

).

SETTING

NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK:

Off=0

SETTING

NEG SEQ IOC1 SOURCE:

I_2

AND

SETTING

NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP:

RUN

I

_2 - K

I

_1 PICKUP

SETTING

NEG SEQ IOC1

PICKUP DELAY:

NEG SEQ IOC1

RESET DELAY: t

PKP t

RST


NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP

NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO

NEG SEQ IOC1 OP

827058A5.CDR

Figure 5–67: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5

GE Multilin



5

5.6.8 BREAKER FAILURE

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ

BREAKER FAILURE

Ö

BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)

BREAKER FAILURE 1

BF1 FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

BF1 MODE:

3-Pole


MESSAGE

BF1 SOURCE:

SRC 1

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE

BF1 USE AMP SUPV:

Yes

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE

BF1 USE SEAL-IN:

Yes


MESSAGE

BF1 3-POLE INITIATE:

Off


MESSAGE

BF1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

BF1 PH AMP SUPV



MESSAGE

BF1 N AMP SUPV


Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE

BF1 USE TIMER 1:

Yes


MESSAGE

BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP

DELAY: 0.000 s

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE


Yes


MESSAGE


DELAY: 0.000 s

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE


Yes


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


DELAY: 0.000 s

BF1 BKR POS1

φA/3P:

Off

BF1 BKR POS2

φA/3P:

Off




MESSAGE

BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:

Off


MESSAGE

BF1 PH AMP HISET



MESSAGE

BF1 N AMP HISET



MESSAGE

BF1 PH AMP LOSET



GE Multilin


MESSAGE

BF1 N AMP LOSET


BF1 LOSET TIME



MESSAGE

BF1 TRIP DROPOUT


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BF1 TARGET

Self-Reset

BF1 EVENTS

Disabled

BF1 PH A INITIATE:

Off

BF1 PH B INITIATE:

Off

BF1 PH C INITIATE:

Off

BF1 BKR POS1

φB

Off

BF1 BKR POS1

φC

Off

BF1 BKR POS2

φB

Off

BF1 BKR POS2

φC

Off




Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.













In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time, so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.

Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name “3BF”) and one for three pole plus single-pole operation (identified by the name “1BF”). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.

INITIATION STAGE:

A FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic™ timer, set longer than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.

Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure element not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for transformer faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the

BF1 PH

AMP SUPV PICKUP

or the

BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP

setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used.

Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.

5

GE Multilin



5

When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually described as re-trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.

DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:

The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three paths. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay, after which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed paths are associated with breaker failure timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing timer numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.

Timer 1 logic (early path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indicated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.

Timer 2 logic (main path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.

The timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, high-set and low-set, that allow the supervision level to change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion. The high-set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the lowset detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between high-set and low-set is the expected breaker opening time.

Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent detectors are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detectors.

Timer 3 logic (slow path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the breaker is in or out-of-service, disabling this path when the breaker is out-of-service for maintenance. There is no current level check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate.

OUTPUT:

The outputs from the schemes are:

• FlexLogic™ operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme

• FlexLogic™ operand used to re-trip the protected breaker

• FlexLogic™ operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an adjustable period.

• Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared

• Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)

MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:

AMP

0

0

PROTECTION OPERATION

(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles)

INITIATE (1/8 cycle)

ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE

FAILED INTERRUPTION

CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE

Rampdown

BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME

(ASSUMED 3 cycles)

CORRECT INTERRUPTION

MARGIN

(Assumed 2 Cycles)

BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (±1/8 cycle)

BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)

BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)

BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME

(Assumed 3 Cycles)

FAULT

OCCURS

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 cycles

11

827083A6.CDR

Figure 5–68: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE


GE Multilin


The current supervision elements reset in less than 0.7 of a power cycle for any multiple of pickup current as shown below.

0.8

Margin

Maximum

Average

0.6

0.4

0.2

0

0 20 40 60

Mulitple of pickup

80 100 fault current threshold setting

120 140

836769A4.CDR

Figure 5–69: BREAKER FAILURE OVERCURRENT SUPERVISION RESET TIME

SETTINGS:

• BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.

• BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision pickup level.

• BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision pickup level.

• BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate three-pole tripping of the breaker.

• BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level.

Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) – high-set and low-set current supervision will guarantee correct operation.

• BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping schemes.

• BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the early path is operational.

• BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.

• BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the main path is operational.

• BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equipment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In L30 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker failure main path

sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most applications.

Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.

• BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational.

• BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as timer 2, plus an increased safety margin.

Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.

5

GE Multilin


5


•

BF1 BKR POS1

φ

A/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied form-A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.

•

BF1 BKR POS2

φ

A/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.

• BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker in-service/out-of-service switch set to the out-of-service position.

• BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.

• BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.

Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid

only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.

• BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted

(approximately 90% of the resistor current).

• BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted

(approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.

• BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.

• BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure element sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a transfer trip signal on longer than the reclaim time.

• BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to initiate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly.

This setting is only valid for single-pole breaker failure schemes.

•

BF1 BKR POS1

φ

B / BF1 BKR POS 1

φ

C: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-

A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for

single-pole breaker failure schemes.

•

BF1 BKR POS2

φ

B: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for single-pole breaker fail-

ure schemes.

•

BF1 BKR POS2

φ

C: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This

setting is valid only for single-pole breaker failure schemes.

Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a three-pole trip command should be given via output operand

BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP

.


GE Multilin


5

GE Multilin

Figure 5–70: SINGLE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS (Sheet 2 of 2)


5

,


5-156

Figure 5–71: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, INITIATE (Sheet 1 of 2)


GE Multilin


5

GE Multilin

Figure 5–72: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS (Sheet 2 of 2)



5

5.6.9 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ



PHASE

UNDERVOLTAGE1

See page 5–159.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE

UNDERVOLTAGE2

PHASE

UNDERVOLTAGE3

See page 5–159.

See page 5–159.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE

OVERVOLTAGE1

NEG SEQ OV 1

NEG SEQ OV 2

NEG SEQ OV 3

AUXILIARY UV1

AUXILIARY OV1

See page 5–160.

See page 5–161.

See page 5–161.

See page 5–161.

See page 5–162.

See page 5–163.

These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:

• Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay.

• Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.

• Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.

The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic. The definite time curve operates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to

600.00 seconds in steps of 0.01. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic.

The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.

T

=

⎛

⎝

1 – ------------------

V pickup

⎞

⎠ where: T = operating time

D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)

V = secondary voltage applied to the relay

V pickup

= pickup level

(EQ 5.21)


GE Multilin


% of voltage pickup

842788A1.CDR

Figure 5–73: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the

UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY

setting.

NOTE

b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ


Ö

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(3)

PHASE

UNDERVOLTAGE1

PHASE UV1




MESSAGE

PHASE UV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1

Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase

MESSAGE

PHASE UV1 MODE:

Phase to Ground


MESSAGE

PHASE UV1


Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time

MESSAGE

PHASE UV1

CURVE: Definite Time

PHASE UV1


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE UV1 MINIMUM

VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu

PHASE UV1 BLOCK:

Off

PHASE UV1


PHASE UV1






This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage

(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of “0” will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).

5

GE Multilin



5

SETTING

PHASE UV1

FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

PHASE UV1

BLOCK:

Off = 0

SETTING

PHASE UV1 SOURCE:

Source VT = Delta

VAB

VBC

VCA

Source VT = Wye

SETTING

PHASE UV1 MODE:

Phase to Ground Phase to Phase

VAG

VBG

VCG

VAB

VBC

VCA

}

AND

SETTING

PHASE UV1

MINIMUM VOLTAGE:

VBG or VBC Minimum

VCG or VCA Minimum

AND

SETTING

PHASE UV1

PICKUP:

PHASE UV1

CURVE:

PHASE UV1

DELAY:

RUN t

AND RUN t

AND RUN t

V

V

V

Figure 5–74: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ


ÖØ

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1

PHASE

OVERVOLTAGE1

PHASE OV1




MESSAGE

PHASE OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

PHASE OV1


PHASE OV1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

OR


PHASE UV1 A PKP

PHASE UV1 A DPO

PHASE UV1 A OP

PHASE UV1 B PKP

PHASE UV1 B DPO

PHASE UV1 B OP

PHASE UV1 C PKP

PHASE UV1 C DPO

PHASE UV1 C OP


PHASE UV1 PKP

OR


PHASE UV1 OP

AND


PHASE UV1 DPO

827039AB.CDR

PHASE OV1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PHASE OV1 BLOCK:

Off

PHASE OV1


PHASE OV1


Range: FlexLogic™ Operand



The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a definite time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from delta-connected VTs or as calculated from phase-to-ground (wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below.


GE Multilin


SETTING

PHASE OV1

FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

PHASE OV1

BLOCK:

Off = 0

AND

SETTING

PHASE OV1

PICKUP:

RUN

VAB

≥

PICKUP

RUN

VBC

≥

PICKUP

RUN

VCA

≥

PICKUP

SETTINGS

PHASE OV1 PICKUP

DELAY:

PHASE OV1 RESET

DELAY: tPKP tRST tPKP tRST tPKP tRST


PHASE OV1 A PKP

PHASE OV1 A DPO

PHASE OV1 A OP

PHASE OV1 B PKP

PHASE OV1 B DPO

PHASE OV1 B OP

PHASE OV1 C PKP

PHASE OV1 C DPO

PHASE OV1 C OP

SETTING

PHASE OV1

SOURCE:

Source VT = Delta

VAB

VBC

VCA

Source VT = Wye

OR

AND


PHASE OV1 OP


PHASE OV1 DPO

OR


PHASE OV1 PKP

827066A7.CDR

Figure 5–75: PHASE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

If the source VT is wye-connected, then the phase overvoltage pickup condition is

V

>

3

×

Pickup and V

CA

.

for V

AB

, V

BC

,

NOTE

d) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59_2)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ


ÖØ

NEG SEQ OV1(3)

NEG SEQ OV1

NEG SEQ OV1




MESSAGE

NEG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP:

0.300 pu

NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

NEG SEQ OV1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK:

Off

NEG SEQ OV1 TARGET:

Self-reset

NEG SEQ OV1 EVENTS:

Disabled




There are three negative-sequence overvoltage elements available.

The negative-sequence overvoltage element may be used to detect loss of one or two phases of the source, a reversed phase sequence of voltage, or a non-symmetrical system voltage condition.

5

GE Multilin



5

SETTING

NEG SEQ OV1

FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK:

Off = 0

AND

SETTING

NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP:

RUN

SETTINGS

NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP

DELAY:

NEG SEQ OV1 RESET

DELAY: t

PKP t

RST


NEG SEQ OV1 PKP

NEG SEQ OV1 DPO

NEG SEQ OV1 OP

SETTING

NEG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:

Wye VT

V_2

Delta VT

3 × V_2

V_2 or 3 × V_2

≥

PKP

Figure 5–76: NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

827839A3.CDR

e) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ


ÖØ

AUXILIARY UV1

AUXILIARY UV1

AUX UV1




MESSAGE

AUX UV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

AUX UV1 PICKUP:

0.700 pu

Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time

MESSAGE

AUX UV1 CURVE:

Definite Time


MESSAGE

AUX UV1 DELAY:

1.00 s


MESSAGE

AUX UV1 MINIMUM:

VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu


MESSAGE

AUX UV1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

AUX UV1 TARGET:

Self-reset


MESSAGE

AUX UV1 EVENTS:

Disabled

The L30 contains one auxiliary undervoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The

AUX UV1 PICKUP

selects the voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM

SETUP

Ö

AC INPUTS

ÖØ

VOLTAGE BANK X5

ÖØ

AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY

is the per-unit base used when setting the pickup level.

The

AUX UV1 DELAY

setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both

AUX UV1 PICKUP

and

AUX UV1 DELAY

settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element can be programmed to use either definite time delay or inverse time delay characteristics. The operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element.


GE Multilin


The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked.

SETTING

AUX UV1

FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

AUX UV1 PICKUP:

AUX UV1 CURVE:

SETTING

AUX UV1 BLOCK:

Off=0

SETTING

AUX UV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:

AUX VOLT Vx

SETTING

AUX UV1 MINIMUM

VOLTAGE:

AND

AUX UV1 DELAY:

RUN t


AUX UV1 PKP

AUX UV1 DPO

AUX UV1 OP

V

827849A2.CDR

Figure 5–77: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

f) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)X

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö


ÖØ


ÖØ

AUXILIARY OV1

AUXILIARY OV1

AUX OV1




MESSAGE

AUX OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

AUX OV1 PICKUP:

0.300 pu


MESSAGE

AUX OV1 PICKUP

DELAY: 1.00 s


MESSAGE

AUX OV1 RESET

DELAY: 1.00 s


MESSAGE

AUX OV1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

AUX OV1 TARGET:

Self-reset


MESSAGE

AUX OV1 EVENTS:

Disabled

The L30 contains one auxiliary overvoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under

SYSTEM

SETUP

Ö

AC INPUTS

ØÖ

VOLTAGE BANK X5

ØÖ

AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY

is the per-unit (pu) base used when setting the pickup level.

A typical application for this element is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta

VT connection.

5

GE Multilin


5


SETTING

AUX OV1

FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

AUX OV1 BLOCK:

Off=0

SETTING

AUX OV1 SIGNAL

SOURCE:

AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)

AND

SETTING

AUX OV1 PICKUP:

RUN

SETTING

AUX OV1 PICKUP

DELAY :

AUX OV1 RESET

DELAY : t

PKP t

RST

Figure 5–78: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC


AUX OV1 OP

AUX OV1 DPO

AUX OV1 PKP

827836A2.CDR


GE Multilin


5.6.10 SUPERVISING ELEMENTS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ø


ÖØ


ÖØ

SUPERVISING ELEMENTS

SUPERVISING

ELEMENTS

DISTURBANCE

DETECTOR

See page 5-165.

b) DISTURBANCE DETECTOR

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

SUPERVISING ELEMENTS

Ö

DISTURBANCE DETECTOR

DISTURBANCE

DETECTOR

DD




MESSAGE

DD NON-CURRENT SUPV:

Off


MESSAGE

DD CONTROL LOGIC:

Off


MESSAGE

DD LOGIC SEAL-IN:

Off


MESSAGE

DD


The disturbance detector (50DD) element is an 87L-dedicated sensitive current disturbance detector that is used to detect any disturbance on the protected system. This detector is intended for such functions as trip output supervision and starting oscillography The disturbance detector also signals the 87L function that a disturbance (possible fault) occurred and to resize the operating window to remove the pre-fault current. It is essential to have the disturbance detector enabled for applications where the 87L operating time is critical.

If the disturbance detector is used to supervise the operation of the 87L function, it is recommended that the 87L trip element be used. The

50DD SV

disturbance detector FlexLogic™ operand must then be assigned to an

87L TRIP SUPV

setting.

The disturbance detector function measures the magnitude of the negative-sequence current (I_2), the magnitude of the zero-sequence current (I_0), the change in negative-sequence current (

ΔI_2), the change in zero-sequence current (ΔI_0), and the change in positive-sequence current (

ΔI_1). The disturbance detector element uses net local current, computed as a sum of all sources configured in the current differential element, to detect system disturbances.

The adaptive level detector operates as follows:

• When the absolute level increases above 0.12 pu for I_0 or I_2, the adaptive level detector output is active and the next highest threshold level is increased 8 cycles later from 0.12 to 0.24 pu in steps of 0.02 pu. If the level exceeds

0.24 pu, the current adaptive level detector setting remains at 0.24 pu and the output remains active (as well as the disturbance detector output) when the measured value remains above the current setting.

• When the absolute level is decreasing from in range from 0.24 to 0.12 pu, the lower level is set every 8 cycles without the adaptive level detector active. Note that the 50DD output remains inactive during this change as long as the delta change is less than 0.04 pu.

The delta level detectors (

ΔI) detectors are designed to pickup for the 0.04 pu change in I_1, I_2, and I_0 currents. The ΔI value is measured by comparing the present value to the value calculated 4 cycles earlier.

• DD FUNCTION: This setting is used to enable/disable the operation of the disturbance detector.

• DD NON-CURRENT SUPV: This setting is used to select a FlexLogic™ operand which will activate the output of the disturbance detector upon events (such as frequency or voltage change) not accompanied by a current change.

• DD CONTROL LOGIC: This setting is used to prevent operation of I_0 and I_2 logic of disturbance detector during conditions such as single breaker pole being open which leads to unbalanced load current in single-pole tripping schemes. Breaker auxiliary contact can be used for such scheme.

5

GE Multilin


5


• DD LOGIC SEAL-IN: This setting is used to maintain disturbance detector output for such conditions as balanced three-phase fault, low level time overcurrent fault, etc. whenever the disturbance detector might reset. Output of the disturbance detector will be maintained until the chosen FlexLogic™ operand resets.

The user may disable the

DD EVENTS

setting as the disturbance detector element will respond to any current disturbance on the system which may result in filling the events buffer and possible loss of valuable data.

NOTE

SETTING

DD FUNCTION:

Enabled=1

Disabled=0

ACTUAL

COMPUTE SEQ.

CURRENTS

I_1

I_2

I_0

SETTING

DD CONTROL

LOGIC:

Off=0

SETTING

DD LOGIC

SEAL-IN:

Off=0

AND

AND

LOGIC

DELTA LEVEL

DETECTOR

RUN

ABS (I_1-I_1')>0.04 pu

(I_1' is 4 cycles old)

ABS (I_2-I_2')>0.04 pu


ABS (I_0-I_0')>0.04 pu


LOGIC

ADAPTIVE LEVEL

DETECTOR

RUN

I_0 > 0.12 to 0.24 pu

I_2 > 0.12 to 0.24 pu

NOTE:

ADJUSTMENTS ARE

MADE ONCE EVERY

8 CYCLES TO THE

NEXT LEVEL (HIGHER

OR LOWER) IN 0.02 pu

STEPS USING THE

HIGHEST VALUE OF

I_0 AND I_2.

OR

OR

OR

OR


50DD SV

SETTING

DD NON-CURRENT

SUPV:

Off=0

AND

Figure 5–79: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR SCHEME LOGIC

827044A6.CDR


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.7CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.7.1 OVERVIEW

Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter for further information.

5.7.2 TRIP BUS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

TRIP BUS

ÖØ

TRIP BUS 1(6)

TRIP BUS 1

TRIP BUS 1




MESSAGE

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK:

Off

TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

TRIP BUS 1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1:

Off


Off

↓


Off

TRIP BUS 1

LATCHING: Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 RESET:

Off

TRIP BUS 1 TARGET:

Self-reset

TRIP BUS 1









The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic™ and assigning them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.

The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista UR Setup software A protection summary is displayed by navigating to a specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box. Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is required, it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.

5

GE Multilin


5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS

5

Figure 5–80: TRIP BUS FIELDS IN THE PROTECTION SUMMARY

The following settings are available.

• TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.

• TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is used.

• TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. The time delay should be set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action.

• TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: These settings select a FlexLogic™ operand to be assigned as an input to the trip bus.

• TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING: This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.

• TRIP BUS 1 RESET: The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the

RESET OP

operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command the front panel interface or via communications will reset the trip bus output.

SETTINGS

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2

= Off

= Off

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16

= Off

SETTINGS

TRIP BUS 1

FUNCTION

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK

= Enabled

= Off

SETTINGS

TRIP BUS 1

LATCHING

TRIP BUS 1 RESET

= Enabled

= Off


RESET OP

OR

AND

OR

AND

Non-volatile, set-dominant

S

Latch

R

SETTINGS

TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP

DELAY

TRIP BUS 1 RESET

DELAY

T

PKP

T

RST


TRIP BUS 1 OP


TRIP BUS 1 PKP

842023A1.CDR

Figure 5–81: TRIP BUS LOGIC


GE Multilin


5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö

SETTINGS GROUPS

SETTING GROUPS

SETTING GROUPS


MESSAGE

SETTING GROUPS BLK:

Off

MESSAGE

GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


Off

↓


Off

GROUP 1 NAME:

MESSAGE







GROUP 2 NAME:


MESSAGE

↓

GROUP 6 NAME:


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SETTING GROUP



The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the

GROUPED

ELEMENTS

settings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized

LED) is in service.

The

SETTING GROUPS BLK

setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic™ parameter is set to

"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the breaker being open.

The

GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON

to

GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON

settings select a FlexLogic™ operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time – the highest-numbered group which is activated by its

ACTIVATE ON

parameter takes priority over the lowernumbered groups. There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically becomes active if no other group is active.

The

SETTING GROUP 1 NAME

to

SETTING GROUP 6 NAME

settings allows to user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups. Once programmed, this name will appear on the second line of the


Ö


menu display.

The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic™ equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default settings group. The following FlexLogic™ equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications

(for example,

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON

) or from a local contact input (for example,

CONTACT IP 1 ON

) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1

operand is used to control the “On” state of a particular settings group.

5

GE Multilin



7

8

5

6

9

1

2

3

4

VIRT IP 1 ON (VI1)

CONT IP 1 ON (H5A)

OR (2)

PHASE TOC1 PKP

NOT

PHASE TOC2 PKP

NOT

AND (3)

= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)

OR (2)

AND (3) = VIRT OP 1 (VO1)

5

10

END

842789A1.CDR

Figure 5–82: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP

5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

SELECTOR SWITCH

Ö

SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)

SELECTOR SWITCH 1

SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 FULL

RANGE: 7


MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:

5.0 s


MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:

Off

Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP

MODE: Time-out


MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 ACK:

Off


MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:

Off


MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE


Off

Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 3BIT

MODE: Time-out


MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:

Off

Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore

MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP

MODE: Restore


MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:

Self-reset


MESSAGE

SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:

Disabled


GE Multilin


The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.

The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.

The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after timeout or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.

Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word (user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input being out of range.

• SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct threebit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the range of 1 to the

SELECTOR FULL RANGE

. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by setting the

SELECTOR ALARM

FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.

• SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the following two ways. When the

SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE

is “Time-out”, the setting specifies the required period of inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the

SELECTOR STEP-

UP MODE

is “Acknowledge”, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT

timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.

• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (

SELECTOR 1

FULL RANGE

) to the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every

50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the

SELECTOR SWITCH 1:

POS Z CHNG INITIATED

target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time specified by the


setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out

(“Time-out” mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode).

When the new position is applied, the relay displays the

SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE

message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.

• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge”, the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is established by setting the

SELECTOR STP ALARM

output FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.

• SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the


setting after the last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.

• SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:

1

1

0

0

A2

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

A1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

A0

0

1

0

1

POSITION

rest

1

4

5

2

3

6

7

5

GE Multilin



5

The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the three-bit control word is having a problem. When

SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE

is “Time-out”, the pre-selected position is applied in


seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When

SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE

is

“Acknowledge”, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK

acknowledging input.

The stepping up control input (

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP

) and the three-bit control inputs (

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0

through

A2

) lock-out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.

• SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the selector changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge”, the selector changes its position only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the

SELECTOR BIT

ALARM

FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.

• SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The preselected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic™ operand. This setting is active only under the “Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the

SELEC-

TOR TIME-OUT

setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and three-bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (

SELECTOR 1 ACK

and

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK

, accordingly).

• SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.

When set to “Restore”, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and an alarm is set (


).

When set to “Synchronize” selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the switch and activates


. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (

SELECTOR 1 PWR

ALARM

).

The operation of “Synch/Restore” mode is similar to the “Synchronize” mode. The only difference is that after an unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The

“Synch/Restore” mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in redundant (two relay) protection schemes.

• SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:

EVENT NAME

SELECTOR 1 POS Z



DESCRIPTION

Selector 1 changed its position to Z.

The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before the time out.

The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed before the time out.


GE Multilin


The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.

pre-existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3-bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton changed to 7 with a 3-bit input

STEP-UP

T T

3BIT A0

3BIT A1

3BIT A2

T T

POS 5

POS 6

POS 7

BIT 0

BIT 1

BIT 2

POS 1

POS 2

POS 3

POS 4

STP ALARM

BIT ALARM

ALARM

842737A1.CDR

Figure 5–83: TIME-OUT MODE

5

GE Multilin



pre-existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3-bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton

5

POS 3

POS 4

POS 5

POS 6

POS 7

BIT 0

BIT 1

BIT 2

STP ALARM

STEP-UP

ACK

3BIT A0

3BIT A1

3BIT A2

3BIT ACK

POS 1

POS 2

BIT ALARM

ALARM

842736A1.CDR

Figure 5–84: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE

Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1 through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.

Make the following changes to setting group control in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ


Ö

SETTING GROUPS

menu:

SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION:

“Enabled”

SETTING GROUPS BLK:

“Off”


“SELECTOR 1 POS 2"






“Off”


“Off”

Make the following changes to selector switch element in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

SELECTOR SWITCH

Ö


menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:


GE Multilin


SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:

“Enabled”

SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE:

“4”

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:

“Time-out”

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:

“5.0 s”

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:

“PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”

SELECTOR 1 ACK:

“Off”


“CONT IP 1 ON”


“CONT IP 2 ON”


“CONT IP 3 ON”

SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:

“Time-out”

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:

“Off”

SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:

“Synchronize”

Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following changes in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

menu:

OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:

“SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"





Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT

SETUP

ÖØ


Ö


menu:


“Self-reset”

PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME:

“0.10 s”

The logic for the selector switch is shown below:

SETTINGS

SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:

Off = 0

SELECTOR 1 ACK:

Off = 0

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:

Off = 0

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:

Off = 0

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:

Off = 0

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:

SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:

SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:

RUN

ACTUAL VALUE

SELECTOR 1 POSITION step up acknowledge

7

1

ON

6

2

3

4

5

FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS

SELECTOR 1 POS 1

SELECTOR 1 POS 2

SELECTOR 1 POS 3

SELECTOR 1 POS 4

SELECTOR 1 POS 5

SELECTOR 1 POS 6

SELECTOR 1 POS 7

3-bit acknowledge

3-bit position out

FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS



SELECTOR 1 ALARM


SELECTOR 1 BIT 0

SELECTOR 1 BIT 1

SELECTOR 1 BIT 2

842012A2.CDR

Figure 5–85: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC

5

GE Multilin



5

5.7.5 UNDERFREQUENCY

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

UNDERFREQUENCY

Ö

UNDERFREQUENCY 1(6)

UNDERFREQUENCY 1

UNDFREQ 1 FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE:

SRC 1


MESSAGE

UNDERFREQ 1 MIN

VOLT/AMP: 0.10 pu


MESSAGE

UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP:

59.50 Hz

UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

UNDERFREQ 1 RESET

DELAY : 2.000 s

UNDERFREQ 1 TARGET:

Self-reset

UNDERFREQ 1 EVENTS:

Disabled




There are six identical underfrequency elements, numbered from 1 through 6.

The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the generated power and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unit or the isolation of part of the system from the rest of the system, the effect will be a reduction in frequency. If the control systems of the system generators do not respond fast enough, the system may collapse. A reliable method to quickly restore the balance between load and generation is to automatically disconnect selected loads, based on the actual system frequency. This technique, called “load-shedding”, maintains system integrity and minimize widespread outages. After the frequency returns to normal, the load may be automatically or manually restored.

The

UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE

setting is used to select the source for the signal to be measured. The element first checks for a live phase voltage available from the selected source. If voltage is not available, the element attempts to use a phase current. If neither voltage nor current is available, the element will not operate, as it will not measure a parameter below the minimum voltage/current setting.

The

UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP

setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfrequency element to operate. This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure.

This

UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP

setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system frequency is 60 Hz and the load shedding is required at 59.5 Hz, the setting will be 59.50 Hz.

SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK:

Off = 0

SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE:

VOLT / AMP

ACTUAL VALUES

Level

Frequency

SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1

MIN VOLT / AMP:

≥

Minimum

AND

SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1

PICKUP :

RUN

0 < f

≤

PICKUP

SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1

PICKUP DELAY :

UNDERFREQ 1

RESET DELAY : t

PKP t

RST


UNDERFREQ 1 PKP

UNDERFREQ 1 DPO

UNDERFREQ 1 OP

827079A8.CDR

Figure 5–86: UNDERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC


GE Multilin


5.7.6 SYNCHROCHECK

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

SYNCHROCHECK

Ö

SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)

SYNCHROCHECK 1

SYNCHK1 FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE:

SRC 1


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE:

SRC 2

Range: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1

MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT

DIFF: 10000 V


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE

DIFF: 30°


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ

DIFF: 1.00 Hz


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ

HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz

MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE

SELECT: LV1 and DV2

Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2,

DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 DEAD V1

MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 DEAD V2

MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 LIVE V1

MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 LIVE V2

MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 TARGET:

Self-reset


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 EVENTS:

Disabled

The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2.

The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system.

Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference

ΔΦ and the frequency difference ΔF (slip frequency). It can be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2

× ΔΦ at a frequency equal to the frequency difference

ΔF. This time can be calculated by:

T

= --------------------------------

2

360

×

°

1

ΔΦ

× ΔF where:

ΔΦ = phase angle difference in degrees; ΔF = frequency difference in Hz.

(EQ 5.22)

5

GE Multilin



5

If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (dead source function).

• SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below).

• SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the

V1 (see NOTES below).

• SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in volts between the two sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

• SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

• SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in ‘Hz’ between the two sources.

A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

• SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency difference condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than

SYNCHK1 MAX

FREQ DIFF

. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the

SYNCHK1

MAX FREQ DIFF

+

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS

sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and angle, remain satisfied).

• SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2) are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six options are available:

None:

LV1 and DV2:

DV1 and LV2:

DV1 or DV2:

Dead Source function is disabled

Live V1 and Dead V2

Dead V1 and Live V2

Dead V1 or Dead V2

DV1 Xor DV2: Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)

DV1 and DV2: Dead V1 and Dead V2

• SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 ‘pu’. Below this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.

• SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Below this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.

• SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.

• SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.

NOTES ON THE SYNCHROCHECK FUNCTION:

1.

The selected sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same source) may include both a three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synchrocheck element in accordance with the following table.

AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE

1

2

3

NO.

V1 OR V2

(SOURCE Y)

V2 OR V1

(SOURCE Z)

Phase VTs and

Auxiliary VT

Phase VTs and

Auxiliary VT

Phase VT

Phase VTs and

Auxiliary VT

Phase VT

Phase VT

AUTO-SELECTED

COMBINATION

SOURCE Y

Phase

SOURCE Z

Phase

Phase

Phase

Phase

Phase

VAB

VAB

VAB


GE Multilin


NO.

V1 OR V2

(SOURCE Y)

V2 OR V1

(SOURCE Z)

AUTO-SELECTED

COMBINATION

SOURCE Y SOURCE Z

Phase Auxiliary

AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE

4

5

Phase VT and

Auxiliary VT

Auxiliary VT

Auxiliary VT

Auxiliary VT Auxiliary Auxiliary

V auxiliary

(as set for Source z)

V auxiliary

(as set for selected sources)

The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two sources will be used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the

Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to

VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other source. If the comparison is required on a specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this

"Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions.

If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck.

Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye con-

nected auxiliary voltage.

NOTE

2.

The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the configuration of input channels to the source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if programmed as part of that source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.

5

GE Multilin


5


SETTINGS

Function

Block

Enabled = 1

Disabled = 0

Off = 0

AND

SETTING

Dead Source Select

None

LV1 and DV2

DV1 and LV2

DV1 or DV2

DV1 xor DV2

DV1 and DV2

SETTING

V1 Source

= SRC 1

CALCULATE

Magnitude V1

Angle Φ1

Frequency F1

SETTING

V2 Source

= SRC 2

CALCULATE

Magnitude V2

Angle Φ2

Frequency F2

SETTING

Dead V1 Max Volt

V1 ≤ Maximum

SETTING

Dead V2 Max Volt

V2 ≤ Maximum

SETTING

Live V1 Min Volt

V1 ≥ Minimum

SETTING

Live V2 Min Volt

V2 ≥ Minimum

Calculate

Calculate

I 1 – 2 I = Δ Φ

Calculate

XOR

OR

AND

AND

SETTING

Max Volt Diff

ΔV ≤ Maximum

SETTING

Max Angle Diff

ΔΦ ≤ Maximum

SETTINGS

Max Freq Diff

Freq Hysteresis

ΔF ≤ Maximum

5 SETTINGS

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

OR


SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN


SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN


SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX


SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX


SYNC1 DEAD S OP

SYNC1 DEAD S DPO


SYNC1 CLS OP

SYNC1 CLS DPO

AND


SYNC1 SYNC OP

SYNC1 SYNC DPO

SYNCHROCHECK 1

ACTUAL VALUE

Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ

827076AB.CDR

Figure 5–87: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC


GE Multilin


5.7.7 AUTORECLOSE

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

AUTORECLOSE

Ö

AUTORECLOSE 1

AUTORECLOSE 1

AR1 FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

AR1 INITIATE:

Off


MESSAGE

AR1 BLOCK:

Off

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4

MESSAGE

AR1 MAX NUMBER OF

SHOTS: 1


MESSAGE

AR1 REDUCE MAX TO 1:

Off


MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE

AR1 MANUAL CLOSE:

Off


MESSAGE

AR1 MNL RST FRM LO:

Off

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

AR1 RESET LOCKOUT IF

BREAKER CLOSED: Off

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

AR1 RESET LOCKOUT ON

MANUAL CLOSE: Off


MESSAGE

AR1 BKR CLOSED:

Off


MESSAGE

AR1 BKR OPEN:

Off


MESSAGE

AR1 BLK TIME UPON

MNL CLS: 10.000 s


MESSAGE

AR1 DEAD TIME 1:

1.000 s


MESSAGE


2.000 s


MESSAGE


3.000 s


MESSAGE


4.000 s


MESSAGE

AR1 ADD DELAY 1:

Off


MESSAGE

AR1 DELAY 1:

0.000 s


MESSAGE

AR1 ADD DELAY 2:

Off

5

GE Multilin



5

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

AR1 DELAY 2:

0.000 s

AR1 RESET LOCKOUT

DELAY: 60.000

AR1 RESET TIME:

60.000 s

AR1 INCOMPLETE SEQ





MESSAGE

MESSAGE

AR1 EVENTS:

Disabled


The maximum number of autoreclosure elements available is equal to the number of installed CT banks.

The autoreclosure feature is intended for use with transmission and distribution lines, in three-pole tripping schemes for single breaker applications. Up to four selectable reclosures ‘shots’ are possible prior to locking out. Each shot has an independently settable dead time. The protection settings can be changed between shots if so desired, using FlexLogic™.

Logic inputs are available for disabling or blocking the scheme.

Faceplate panel LEDs indicate the state of the autoreclose scheme as follows:

• Reclose Enabled: The scheme is enabled and may reclose if initiated.

• Reclose Disabled: The scheme is disabled.

• Reclose In Progress: An autoreclosure has been initiated but the breaker has not yet been signaled to close.

• Reclose Locked Out: The scheme has generated the maximum number of breaker closures allowed and, as the fault persists, will not close the breaker again; known as ‘Lockout’. The scheme may also be sent in ‘Lockout’ when the incomplete sequence timer times out or when a block signal occurs while in ‘reclose in progress’. The scheme must be reset from Lockout in order to perform reclose for further faults.

The reclosure scheme is considered enabled when all of the following conditions are true:

• The

AR1 FUNCTION

is set to “Enabled”.

• The scheme is not in the ‘Lockout’ state.

• The ‘Block’ input is not asserted.

• The

AR1 BLK TIME UPON MNL CLS

timer is not active.

The autoreclose scheme is initiated by a trip signal from any selected protection feature operand. The scheme is initiated provided the circuit breaker is in the closed state before protection operation.

The reclose-in-progress (RIP) is set when a reclosing cycle begins following a reclose initiate signal. Once the cycle is successfully initiated, the RIP signal will seal-in and the scheme will continue through its sequence until one of the following conditions is satisfied:

• The close signal is issued when the dead timer times out, or

• The scheme goes to lockout.

While RIP is active, the scheme checks that the breaker is open and the shot number is below the limit, and then begins measuring the dead time.

Each of the four possible shots has an independently settable dead time. Two additional timers can be used to increase the initial set dead times 1 to 4 by a delay equal to

AR1 DELAY 1

or

AR1 DELAY 2

or the sum of these two delays depending on the selected settings. This offers enhanced setting flexibility using FlexLogic™ operands to turn the two additional timers “on” and “off”. These operands may possibly include

AR1 SHOT CNT =n

,

SETTING GROUP ACT 1

, etc. The autoreclose provides up to maximum 4 selectable shots. Maximum number of shots can be dynamically modified through the settings

AR1

REDUCE MAX TO 1 (2, 3)

, using the appropriate FlexLogic™ operand.

Scheme lockout blocks all phases of the reclosing cycle, preventing automatic reclosure, if any of the following occurs:

• The maximum shot number was reached.

• A ‘Block’ input is in effect (for instance; Breaker Failure, bus differential protection operated, etc.).


GE Multilin


• The ‘Incomplete Sequence’ timer times out.

The recloser will be latched in the Lockout state until a ‘reset from lockout’ signal is asserted, either from a manual close of the breaker or from a manual reset command (local or remote). The reset from lockout can be accomplished by operator command, by manually closing the breaker, or whenever the breaker has been closed and stays closed for a preset time.

After the dead time elapses, the scheme issues the close signal. The close signal is latched until the breaker closes or the scheme goes to Lockout.

A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The reset time is based on the breaker

‘reclaim time’ which is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.

SETTINGS:

• AR1 INITIATE: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that initiates the scheme, typically the trip signal from protection.

• AR1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that blocks the autoreclosure initiate (it could be from the breaker failure, bus differential protection, etc.).

• AR1 MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS: Specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclosure goes to

“Lockout” because the fault is permanent.

• AR1 REDUCE MAX TO 1(3): Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that changes the maximum number of shots from the initial setting to 1, 2, or 3, respectively.

• AR1 MANUAL CLOSE: Selects the logic input set when the breaker is manually closed.

• AR1 MNL RST FRM LO: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that resets the autoreclosure from Lockout condition. Typically this is a manual reset from lockout, local or remote.

• AR1 RESET LOCKOUT IF BREAKER CLOSED: This setting allows the autoreclose scheme to reset from Lockout if the breaker has been manually closed and stays closed for a preset time. In order for this setting to be effective, the next setting (

AR1 RESET LOCKOUT ON MANUAL CLOSE

) should be disabled.

• AR1 RESET LOCKOUT ON MANUAL CLOSE: This setting allows the autoreclose scheme to reset from Lockout when the breaker is manually closed regardless if the breaker remains closed or not. This setting overrides the previous setting (

AR1 RESET LOCKOUT IF BREAKER CLOSED

).

• AR1 BLK TIME UPON MNL CLS: The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after the associated circuit breaker is manually closed. This prevents reclosing onto a fault after a manual close. This delay must be longer than the slowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after manual closing. If no overcurrent trips occur after a manual close and this time expires, the autoreclose scheme is enabled.

• AR1 DEAD TIME 1 to AR1 DEAD TIME 4: These are the intentional delays before first, second, third, and fourth breaker automatic reclosures (1st, 2nd, and 3rd shots), respectively, and should be set longer than the estimated deionizing time following a three pole trip.

• AR1 ADD DELAY 1: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that introduces an additional delay (Delay 1) to the initial set Dead Time (1 to 4). When this setting is “Off”, Delay 1 is by-passed.

• AR1 DELAY 1: This setting establishes the extent of the additional dead time Delay 1.

• AR1 ADD DELAY 2: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that introduces an additional delay (Delay 2) to the initial set Dead Time (1 to 4). When this setting is “Off”, Delay 2 is by-passed.

• AR1 DELAY 2: This setting establishes the extent of the additional dead time Delay 2.

• AR1 RESET LOCKOUT DELAY: This setting establishes how long the breaker should stay closed after a manual close command, in order for the autorecloser to reset from Lockout.

• AR1 RESET TIME: A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The setting is based on the breaker ‘reclaim time’ which is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.

• AR1 INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME: This timer defines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It is started whenever a reclosure is initiated and is active when the scheme is in the ‘reclose-in-progress’ state. If all conditions allowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to “Lockout”.

This timer must be set to a delay less than the reset timer.

NOTE

5

GE Multilin



To sheet 2

5 SETTINGS

5

Enabled (Default) Disabled (Default)

From Sheet 2

Locked out (Default)

AR1 INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME:

5-184

AR1 BLK TIME UPON MNL CLOSE : AR1 RESET LOCKOUT DELA

AR1 RESET LOCKOUT IF BREAKER CLOSED:

Figure 5–88: AUTORECLOSURE SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

AR1 RESET LOCKOUT ON MANUAL CLOSE:


GE Multilin


5

GE Multilin

Figure 5–89: AUTORECLOSURE SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)


5


5-186

Figure 5–90: SINGLE SHOT AUTORECLOSING SEQUENCE - PERMANENT FAULT


GE Multilin


5.7.8 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(48)






MESSAGE

DIG ELEM 1 NAME:

Dig Element 1


MESSAGE

DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:

Off

DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP


MESSAGE

DIG ELEM 1 RESET


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DIG ELEMENT 1

PICKUP LED: Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:

Off









There are 48 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 48. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic™ operand and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic™ operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.

• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to be monitored by the digital element.

• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".

• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0”.

• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to

“Disabled”, the operation of the pickup LED is blocked.

5

SETTING

DIGITAL ELEMENT 01

FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

DIGITAL ELEMENT 01

INPUT:

Off = 0

SETTING

DIGITAL ELEMENT 01

BLOCK:

Off = 0

AND

SETTING

DIGITAL ELEMENT 01

NAME:

RUN

INPUT = 1

SETTINGS

DIGITAL ELEMENT 01

PICKUP DELAY:

DIGITAL ELEMENT 01

RESET DELAY: t

PKP

t

RST


DIG ELEM 01 DPO

DIG ELEM 01 PKP

DIG ELEM 01 OP

827042A1.VSD

Figure 5–91: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:

Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts. The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).

GE Multilin



As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the “Cont

Op 1 VOn” FlexLogic™ operand will be set (for contact input 1 – corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the “Cont Op 1 VOff” FlexLogic™ operand will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.

EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.

In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the breaker position.

UR-series device with form-A contacts

5

H1a

I

V

H1b

H1c

DC–

DC+

52a

Trip coil

I = current monitor

V = voltage monitor

827073A2.CDR

Figure 5–92: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1

Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name; for example, “Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status.

Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, for example, “Cont Ip 1", and will be set “On” when the breaker is closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated below (EnerVista UR

Setup example shown):

NOTE

The

PICKUP DELAY

setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance alarms.


GE Multilin


EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the figure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the

BLOCK

setting is selected to “Off”. In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista UR Setup example shown).

UR-series device with form-A contacts

NOTE

V

I

H1a

H1b

H1c 52a

R

Bypass resistor

Trip coil

DC–

DC+

Values for resistor “R”

Power supply Resistance Power

24 V DC

30 V DC

48 V DC

110 V DC

125 V DC

250 V DC

1000 Ω

5000 Ω

10000 Ω

25000 Ω

25000 Ω

50000 Ω

2 W

2 W

2 W

5 W

5 W

5 W

I = current monitor

V = voltage monitor

827074A3.CDR

Figure 5–93: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.

5

GE Multilin



5

5.7.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

COUNTER 1(8)

COUNTER 1

COUNTER 1




MESSAGE

COUNTER 1 NAME:

Counter 1

COUNTER 1 UNITS:


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

COUNTER 1 PRESET:

0

COUNTER 1 COMPARE:

0

COUNTER 1 UP:

Off

COUNTER 1 DOWN:

Off

COUNTER 1 BLOCK:

Off

CNT1 SET TO PRESET:

Off

COUNTER 1 RESET:

Off

COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:

Off

COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:

Off

Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647








There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from

Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.

• COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.

The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status.

• COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.

• COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic™ output operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set value.

• COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to –2,147,483,648.

• COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to

+2,147,483,647.

• COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.


GE Multilin


• CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will be set to the preset value in the following situations:

1.

When the counter is enabled and the

CNT1 SET TO PRESET

operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled and


operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).

2.

When the counter is running and the


operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (

CNT1 SET TO

PRESET

changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).

3.

When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the


operand has the value

1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the


operand has the value 0, the counter will be set to 0).

• COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending on the state of the


operand.

• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0”.

• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.

SETTING

COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SETTING

COUNTER 1 UP:

Off = 0

SETTING

COUNTER 1 DOWN:

Off = 0

SETTING

COUNTER 1 BLOCK:

Off = 0

SETTING

CNT 1 SET TO PRESET:

Off = 0

SETTING

COUNTER 1 RESET:

Off = 0

SETTING

COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:

Off = 0

SETTING

COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:

Off = 0

AND

OR

OR

AND

AND

SETTINGS

COUNTER 1 NAME:

COUNTER 1 UNITS:

COUNTER 1 PRESET:

RUN

CALCULATE

VALUE

SET TO PRESET VALUE

SET TO ZERO

STORE DATE & TIME

SETTING

COUNTER 1 COMPARE:

Count more than Comp.

Count equal to Comp.

Count less than Comp.

ACTUAL VALUE

COUNTER 1 ACCUM:

ACTUAL VALUES

COUNTER 1 FROZEN:

Date & Time

827065A1.VSD

FLEXLOGIC

OPERANDS

COUNTER 1 HI

COUNTER 1 EQL

COUNTER 1 LO

Figure 5–94: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC

5

GE Multilin



5.7.10 MONITORING ELEMENTS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

MONITORING ELEMENTS

MONITORING

ELEMENTS

BREAKER 1

ARCING CURRENT

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BREAKER 2

ARCING CURRENT

CT FAILURE

DETECTOR

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

VT FUSE FAILURE 1


BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1


THERMAL OVERLOAD

PROTECTION

See page 5–192.

See page 5–192.

See page 5–195.

See page 5–196.

See page 5–196.

See page 5–197.

See page 5–197.

See page 5–199.

5 b) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

BREAKER 1(2) ARCING CURRENT

BREAKER 1

ARCING CURRENT

BKR 1 ARC AMP




MESSAGE

BKR 1 ARC AMP

SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A:

Off


MESSAGE

BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-B:

Off


MESSAGE

BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-C:

Off

BKR 1 ARC AMP


MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 50000 kA

2

-cycle in steps of 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT:

1000 kA2-cyc

BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK:

Off

BKR 1 ARC AMP


BKR 1 ARC AMP






GE Multilin


There is one breaker arcing current element available per CT bank, with a minimum of two elements. This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing through the breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand to “1”. The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.

The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary relays and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured current continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.

The feature is programmed to perform fault duration calculations. Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature, and reset of an internal low-set overcurrent function. Correction is implemented to account for a non-zero reset time of the overcurrent function.

Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

RECORDS

ÖØ

MAINTENANCE

Ö

BREAKER 1(4)

menus.

• BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A(C): Select the same output operands that are configured to operate the output relays used to trip the breaker. In three-pole tripping applications, the same operand should be configured to initiate arcing current calculations for poles A, B and C of the breaker. In single-pole tripping applications, per-pole tripping operands should be configured to initiate the calculations for the poles that are actually tripped.

• BKR 1 ARC AMP DELAY: This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.

• BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT: Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.

5

Initiate

Breaker

Contacts

Part

Arc

Extinguished

Total Area =

Breaker

Arcing

Current

(kA·cycle)

Programmable

Start Delay

Start

Integration

100 ms

Stop

Integration

Figure 5–95: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT

GE Multilin



5

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP BLOCK:

Off=0

SETTINGS

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP INIT-A:

Off=0

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP INIT-B:

Off=0

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP INIT-C:

Off=0

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP SOURCE:

IA

IB

IC

COMMAND

CLEAR BREAKER 1

ARCING AMPS:

NO=0

YES=1

OR

AND

OR

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP DELAY:

0

AND

100 ms

0

AND RUN

Integrate

AND RUN

Integrate

Add to

Accumulator

Select

Highest

Value

AND RUN

Integrate

Set All To Zero

ACTUAL VALUE

BKR 1 ARCING AMP A

BKR 1 ARCING AMP B

BKR 1 ARCING AMP C

BKR 1 OPERATING TIME A

BKR 1 OPERATING TIME B

BKR 1 OPERATING TIME C

BKR 1 OPERATING TIME

Figure 5–96: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ARCING

AMP LIMIT:

*


BKR1 ARC OP

BKR1 ARC DPO

827071A3.CDR


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS c) CT FAILURE DETECTOR

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

CT FAILURE DETECTOR

CT FAILURE

DETECTOR

CT FAIL FUNCTION:

Disabled



MESSAGE

CT FAIL BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE

CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1:

SRC 1


MESSAGE

CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1

PKP: 0.20 pu


MESSAGE

CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2:

SRC 2


MESSAGE

CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2

PKP: 0.20 pu


MESSAGE

CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT:

SRC 1


MESSAGE

CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT

PKP: 0.20 pu


MESSAGE

CT FAIL PICKUP

DELAY: 1.000 s


MESSAGE

CT FAIL TARGET:

Self-reset


MESSAGE

CT FAIL EVENTS:

Disabled

The CT failure function is designed to detect problems with system current transformers used to supply current to the relay.

This logic detects the presence of a zero-sequence current at the supervised source of current without a simultaneous zero-sequence current at another source, zero-sequence voltage, or some protection element condition.

The CT failure logic (see below) is based on the presence of the zero-sequence current in the supervised CT source and the absence of one of three or all of the three following conditions.

1.

Zero-sequence current at different source current (may be different set of CTs or different CT core of the same CT).

2.

Zero-sequence voltage at the assigned source.

3.

Appropriate protection element or remote signal.

The CT failure settings are described below.

• CT FAIL FUNCTION: This setting enables or disables operation of the CT failure element.

• CT FAIL BLOCK: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand to block operation of the element during some condition

(for example, an open pole in process of the single pole tripping-reclosing) when CT fail should be blocked. Local signals or remote signals representing operation of some remote current protection elements via communication channels can also be chosen.

• CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1: This setting selects the current source for input 1. The most critical protection element should also be assigned to the same source.

• CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1 PICKUP: This setting selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 1 (the main supervised CT source).

• CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2: This setting selects the current source for input 2. Input 2 should use a different set of CTs or a different CT core of the same CT. If 3I_0 does not exist at source 2, then a CT failure is declared.

• CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2 PICKUP: This setting selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 2 (different CT input) of the relay.

• CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT: This setting selects the voltage source.

5

GE Multilin



• CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup value for the 3V_0 source.

• CT FAIL PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies the pickup delay of the CT failure element.

5 SETTINGS

5

SETTING

CT FAIL FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

SETTING

CT FAIL BLOCK:

Off=0

SETTING

CT FAIL 3IO INPUT1:

SRC1

SETTING

CT FAIL 3IO INPUT2:

SRC2

SETTING

CT FAIL 3VO INPUT:

SRC1

SETTING

CT FAIL PICKUP DELAY:

SETTING

CT FAIL 3IO INPUT1 PKP:

RUN 3IO > PICKUP

AND

0


CT FAIL OP

SETTING

CT FAIL 3IO INPUT2 PKP:

RUN 3IO > PICKUP

SETTING

CT FAIL 3VO INPUT:

RUN 3VO > PICKUP

OR

Figure 5–97: CT FAILURE DETECTOR SCHEME LOGIC

CT FAIL PKP

827048A6.CDR

d) VT FUSE FAILURE

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

VT FUSE FAILURE 1(2)





Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme.

The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the

BLOCK

input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.

There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:

• Class A: loss of one or two phases.

• Class B: loss of all three phases.

Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of class A failures is a significant level of negativesequence voltage, whereas an indication of class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is provided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.

An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positivesequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.

The function setting enables and disables the fuse failure feature for each source.


GE Multilin


AND

AND

OR

Reset-dominant

SET

FAULT

Latch

RESET

SETTING

Function

Disabled = 0

Enabled = 1

SOURCE 1

V_2

V_1

I_1

COMPARATORS

Run

V_2 > 0.1 pu

Run

V_1 < 0.05 pu

Run

I_1 > 0.075 pu

Run

V_1 < 0.80 pu

Run

I_1 < 0.05 pu

AND

OR

TIMER

2 cycles

AND

AND

OR

FUSE

FAIL

SET

AND

20 cycles

Latch


SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP

SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO


SRC1 50DD OP

OPEN POLE OP

The OPEN POLE OP operand is applicable to the D60, L60, and L90 only.

AND

OR

RESET

Reset-dominant

AND

AND


SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS

827093AM.CDR

Figure 5–98: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC e) BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1(2)






MESSAGE


SOURCE: SRC 1

Range: 20.0% to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%

MESSAGE


I2/I1 RATIO: 20%


MESSAGE


I1 MIN: 0.10 pu


MESSAGE


I1 MAX: 1.50 pu


MESSAGE


PKP DELAY: 20.000 s


MESSAGE

BROKEN CONDCT 1 BLK:

Off


MESSAGE

BROKEN CONDUCT 1



MESSAGE

BROKEN CONDUCT 1


Two broken conductor detection elements are provided.

5

GE Multilin



5

The broken conductor function will detect a transmission line broken conductor condition or a single-pole breaker malfunction condition through checking the phase current input signals and the I_2 / I_1 ratio. The intention of this function is to detect a single-phase broken conductor only. As such two-phase or three-phase broken conductors cannot be detected.

To distinguish between single-phase disappearance and system disturbance in all three phases (such as load change, switching, etc.), the broken conductor element monitors the change in all three phase currents at the present instance and at four cycles previous. It also monitors changes in the I_2 / I_1 ratio, I_1 minimum, and I_1 maximum.

The broken conductor function should not be used to respond to fault transients and single-pole tripping/reclosing conditions. Therefore, the time delay should be programmed to a sufficient length to ensure coordination with the breaker dead time of the recloser function.

• BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the broken conductor function.

• BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 SOURCE: This setting selects a signal source used to provide three-phase current inputs to this function.

• BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I2/I1 RATIO: This setting specifies the ratio of negative-sequence current to positivesequence current. When one phase conductor is broken, the I_2 / I_1 ratio with a balanced remaining two phases is

50%. So normally this setting should be set below 50% (for example, to 30%).

• BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum positive-sequence current supervision level.

Ensure this setting is programmed to a sufficient level to prevent I_2 / I_1 from erratic pickup due to a low I_1 signal.

However, this setting should not be set too high, since the broken conductor condition cannot be detected under light load conditions when I_1 is less than the value specified by this setting.

• BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MAX: This setting specifies the maximum I_1 level allowed for the broken conductor function to operate. When I_1 exceeds this setting, this it is considered a fault. This broken conductor function should not respond to any fault conditions, so normally this setting is programmed to less than the maximum load current.

• BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 PKP DELAY: This setting specifies the pickup time delay for this function to operate after assertion of the broken conductor pickup FlexLogic™ operand.

SETTINGS

BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1

FUNCTION:

Enabled = 1

BROKEN CONDCT 1 BLK:

Off = 0

SETTINGS

BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1

SOURCE:

Ia

Ib

Ic

I2

I1

SETTING

BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1

I1 MIN :

RUN

| I1 | > I1 MIN

| Ia | < I1 MIN

| Ib | < I1 MIN

| Ic | < I1 MIN

| Ia’ | - | Ia | > 0.05pu

| Ib’ | - | Ib | > 0.05pu

| Ic’ | - | Ic | > 0.05pu

Where I’ is 4 cycles old

SETTING

BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1

I1 MAX :

BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1

I2/I1 RATIO :

RUN

| I1 | < I1 MAX

| I2 | / | I1 |> RATIO

2 cyc

0

SETTING

BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1

I1 MAX : t

PKP

0


BROKEN CONDUCT 1

OP


BROKEN CONDUCT 1 PKP

One phase current loss detection

Figure 5–99: BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION LOGIC


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS f) THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

ÖØ

THERMAL

PROTECTION 1(2)

THERMAL

PROTECTION 1

THERMAL PROTECTION 1




MESSAGE


SOURCE: SRC1


MESSAGE


BASE CURR: 0.80 pu


MESSAGE

THERMAL PROTECTION 1 k FACTOR: 1.10


MESSAGE

THERM PROT 1 TRIP

TIME CONST: 45 min.


MESSAGE

THERM PROT 1 RESET

TIME CONST: 45 min.


MESSAGE

THERM PROT 1 MINIM

RESET TIME: 20 min.


MESSAGE

THERM PROT 1 RESET:

Off


MESSAGE

THERM PROT 1 BLOCK:

Off


MESSAGE




MESSAGE



The thermal overload protection element corresponds to the IEC 255-8 standard and is used to detect thermal overload conditions in protected power system elements. Choosing an appropriate time constant element can be used to protect different elements of the power system. The cold curve characteristic is applied when the previous averaged load current over the last 5 cycles is less than 10% of the base current. If this current is greater or equal than 10% than the base current, then the hot curve characteristic is applied.

The IEC255-8 cold curve is defined as follows:

t op

=

τ

op

× ln

⎜

⎝

⎛

--------------------------

I

2

–

(

I

2

kI

B

)

2

⎟

⎠

⎞

(EQ 5.23)

The IEC255-8 hot curve is defined as follows:

t op

=

τ

op

× ln

⎜

⎝

⎛

I

2

–

I

2

--------------------------

I

2

–

(

kI p

B

)

2

⎟

⎠

⎞

In the above equations,

•

t op

= time to operate.

•

τ op

= thermal protection trip time constant.

• I = measured overload RMS current.

•

I p

= measured load RMS current before overload occurs.

• k= IEC 255-8 k-factor applied to I

B

, defining maximum permissible current above nominal current.

•

I

B

= protected element base (nominal) current.

(EQ 5.24)

5

GE Multilin


5


The reset time of the thermal overload protection element is also time delayed using following formula:

t rst

=

τ

rst

× ln

⎜

⎝

⎛

2

-----------------------------

I

2

(

kI

)

–

(

kI

B

)

2

⎞

⎟

⎠

+

T min

In the above equation,

•

τ rst

= thermal protection trip time constant.

•

T min

is a minimum reset time setting

100

5 SETTINGS

(EQ 5.25)

10

Tmin = 10

τrst = 30

1

τop = 30

0.1

0.01

0.1

1 10

I / Ipkp

Figure 5–100: IEC 255-8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES

100

827724A1.CDR

The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated each power cycle. When current is greater than the pickup level, I

n

> k × I

B

, element starts increasing the thermal energy:

E n

=

E n

– 1

+

t

Δ

t

(EQ 5.26)

When current is less than the dropout level, I

n

> 0.97 × k × I

B

, the element starts decreasing the thermal energy:


GE Multilin


E n

=

E n

–

1

–

t

Δ

t

(EQ 5.27)

In the above equations,

•

Δt is the power cycle duration.

• n is the power cycle index.

•

t

op(In)

is the trip time calculated at index n as per the IEC255-8 cold curve or hot curve equations.

•

t

rst(In)

is the reset time calculated at index n as per the reset time equation.

•

I n

is the measured overload RMS current at index n.

•

E n

is the accumulated energy at index n.

•

E

n – 1

is the accumulated energy at index n – 1.

The thermal overload protection element removes the

THERMAL PROT 1 OP

output operand when E < 0.05. In case of emergency, the thermal memory and

THERMAL PROT 1 OP

output operand can be reset using

THERM PROT 1 RESET

setting.

All calculations are performed per phase. If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase, the thermal overload protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0.05 in all three phases.

Table 5–22: TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS

PROTECTED EQUIPMENT

Capacitor bank

Overhead line

Air-core reactor

Busbar

Underground cable

TIME CONSTANT

10 minutes

10 minutes

40 minutes

60 minutes

20 to 60 minutes

MINIMUM RESET TIME

30 minutes

20 minutes

30 minutes

20 minutes

60 minutes

The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below.

5

SETTINGS

Function

Block

Enabled = 1

Off = 0

AND

SETTING

Source

IA RMS

IB RMS

IC RMS

SETTINGS

Base Current

K Factor

IA > k × Ib

IB > k × Ib

IC > k × Ic

OR

AND

SETTING

Trip Time Constant

RUN


THERMAL PROT 1 PKP

E > 0.1

S

Latch

R

Reset-dominant


THERMAL PROT 1 OP

SETTINGS

Reset Time Constant

Minimum Reset Time

RUN

E < 0.1

SETTING

Reset

Off = 0 Reset E to 0

Figure 5–101: THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC

827013A1.CDR

GE Multilin


5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS

5

5.8INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Ö

CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUT H5a

MESSAGE

CONTACT INPUT H5a ID:

Cont Ip 1

MESSAGE


DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms

MESSAGE



↓

CONTACT INPUT xxx

CONTACT INPUT

THRESHOLDS

MESSAGE

Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c

THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c


↓

Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx





Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.

An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The

CON-

TACT IP X On

” (Logic 1) FlexLogic™ operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while

CONTACT IP X Off

corresponds to contact input “X” being open. The

CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME

defines the time required for the contact to overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If

CONTACT

INPUT EVENTS

is set to “Enabled”, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.

A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.

The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the L30 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic™ operand and logs an event as per user setting.

A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).

Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic™ equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic™ operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well as FlexLogic™ equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

The FlexLogic™ operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is below 1msec.

For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1

ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.

Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1

μs accuracy using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the

DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic™ operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.

The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.

2

Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record

1

At this time, the new (HIGH) contact state is validated

SCAN TIME

(0.5 msec)

DEBOUNCE TIME

(user setting)

4

The FlexLogic

TM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state

USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD

3

The FlexLogic

TM operand is going to be asserted at this protection pass

6

Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record

DEBOUNCE TIME

(user setting)

5

At this time, the new

(LOW) contact state is validated

7

The FlexLogic TM operand is going to be de-asserted at this protection pass

5

The FlexLogic

TM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state

8

PROTECTION PASS

(8 times a cycle controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism)

842709A1.cdr

Figure 5–102: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING

Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group. The

CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 for 250 V sources.

For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:

CONTACT INPUT H5A ID:

"Breaker Closed (52b)"

CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS:

"Enabled"

Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

GE Multilin



5

5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

VIRTUAL INPUTS

Ö

VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64)

VIRTUAL INPUT

1

VIRTUAL INPUT 1




MESSAGE

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:

Virt Ip 1

Range: Self-Reset, Latched

MESSAGE

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

TYPE: Latched


MESSAGE

VIRTUAL INPUT 1


There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the

COM-

MANDS

menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to “Off” (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal is received.

If the

VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION

is to “Disabled”, the input will be forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If set to “Enabled”, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic™ operands in response to received input signals and the applied settings.

There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If

VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE

is “Self-Reset”, when the input signal transits from off to on, the output operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations and then return to off. If set to “Latched”, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input.

NOTE

The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic™ equation, it will likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic™ timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.

SETTING

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

FUNCTION:

Disabled=0

Enabled=1

“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”

“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0”

SETTING

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

TYPE:

Latched

Self - Reset

AND

AND

S

Latch

R

AND

Figure 5–103: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

OR

SETTING

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:

(Flexlogic Operand)

Virt Ip 1

827080A2.CDR


GE Multilin


5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

Ö

CONTACT OUTPUT H1


CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID

Cont Op 1



MESSAGE


Off


MESSAGE

OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:

Off


MESSAGE


EVENTS: Enabled

Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.

An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can

OPERATE

a contact output may be any FlexLogic™ operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic™ operand may be used to

SEAL-IN

the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.

For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the specifications for

Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic™ operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the flag; for example,

CONT OP 1 ION

.

In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.

This can be realized in the L30 using the

CONT OP 1 ION

FlexLogic™ operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:

CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID:

“Cont Op 1"


any suitable FlexLogic™ operand

OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:

“Cont Op 1 IOn”

CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS:

“Enabled”

b) LATCHING OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

Ö

CONTACT OUTPUT H1a


OUTPUT H1a ID

L-Cont Op 1



MESSAGE

OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:

Off


MESSAGE

OUTPUT H1a RESET:

Off

Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant

MESSAGE

OUTPUT H1a TYPE:

Operate-dominant


MESSAGE

OUTPUT H1a EVENTS:

Disabled

5

GE Multilin



5

The L30 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic™).

The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts when replacing a module.

Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the

LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR

self-test error is declared. The error is signaled by the

LATCHING OUT ERROR

FlexLogic™ operand, event, and target message.

• OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the

RESET

input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the

OPERATE

input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the

OPERATE

and

RESET

inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the

OUTPUT H1A TYPE

setting.

• OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the

OPERATE

input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the

RESET

input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the

OPERATE

and

RESET

inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the

OUTPUT H1A TYPE

setting.

• OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the

OPERATE

and

RESET

signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to

“Operate-dominant” and will open if set to “Reset-dominant”.

Application Example 1:

A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The following settings should be applied.

Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUT-

PUTS

Ö


menu (assuming an H4L module):


“

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

”


“

PUSHBUTTON 2 ON

”

Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-

TONS

ÖØ


and


menus:


“Self-reset”


“0.00 s”


“Self-reset”


“0.00 s”


A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.


SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUT-

PUTS

Ö


and

CONTACT OUTPUT H1c

menus (assuming an H4L module):


“VO1”


“VO2”

OUTPUT H1c OPERATE:

“VO2”

OUTPUT H1c RESET:

“VO1”

Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example.


A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement this functionality as described below:


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):


Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.


SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUT-

PUTS

Ö


and

CONTACT OUTPUT H1c

menus (assuming an H4L module):


“

VO1

”


“

VO4

”

OUTPUT H1c OPERATE:

“

VO2

”

OUTPUT H1c RESET:

“

VO3

”


A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1 is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.

Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):

5


SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUT-

PUTS

Ö


menu (assuming an H4L module):


“

VO1

”


“

VO2

”

5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

Ö

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)


VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID

Virt Op 1



MESSAGE



There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic™. If not assigned, the output will be forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic

0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the

FlexLogic™ equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.

For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic™ and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings would be programmed as follows:

GE Multilin



5

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID:

"Trip"

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS:

"Disabled"

5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES a) REMOTE INPUTS AND OUTPUTS OVERVIEW

Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices.

The IEC 61850 GSSE (Generic Substation State Event) and GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) standards are used.

The IEC 61850 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet.

For UR-series relays, Ethernet communications is provided on all CPU modules except type 9E.

NOTE

The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE/GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to Flex-

Logic™, allowing distributed FlexLogic™ by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only from messages that have originated in selected devices.

IEC 61850 GSSE messages are compatible with UCA GOOSE messages and contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC

61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable data items. When used by the remote input/output feature, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE messages.

Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high priority. GOOSE messages have additional advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN (virtual LAN) and Ethernet priority tagging functionality.

The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850 specification provides 32 “DNA” bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 30 user-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The L30 implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.

The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not occurred. The transmitting device also sends a ‘hold time’ which is set greater than three times the programmed default time required by the receiving device.

Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message time allowed to live. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to this time interval, and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. If a message is received from a remote device before the time allowed to live expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where “Offline” indicates non-communicating, can be displayed.

The remote input/output facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.

The L90 provides an additional method of sharing digital point state information among different relays: direct messages.

Direct messages are only used between UR-series relays inter-connected via dedicated type 7X communications modules, usually between substations. The digital state data conveyed by direct messages are direct inputs and direct outputs.

b) DIRECT MESSAGES

Direct messages are only used between UR-series relays containing the type 7X UR communications module. These messages are transmitted every one-half of the power frequency cycle (10 ms for 50 Hz and 8.33 ms for 60 Hz) This facility is of particular value for pilot schemes and transfer tripping. Direct messaging is available on both single channel and dual channel communications modules. The inputs and outputs on communications channel 1 are numbered 1-1 through 1-8, and the inputs and outputs on communications channel 2 are numbered 2-1 through 2-8.

Settings associated with direct messages are automatically presented in accordance with the number of channels provided in the communications module in a specific relay.

NOTE


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS c) LOCAL DEVICES: DEVICE ID FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE MESSAGES

In a L30 relay, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each

GOOSE message is programmed in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ

FIXED GOOSE

ÖØ

GOOSE ID

setting.

Likewise, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message is programmed in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


Ö

GSSE/GOOSE

CONFIGURATION

Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ

GSSE

ÖØ

GSSE ID

setting.

In L30 releases previous to 5.0x, these name strings were represented by the

RELAY NAME

setting.

d) REMOTE DEVICES: DEVICE ID FOR RECEIVING GSSE MESSAGES

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE DEVICES

Ö

REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)

REMOTE DEVICE 1

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID:

Remote Device 1



MESSAGE

REMOTE DEVICE 1

ETYPE APPID: 0

Range: Fixed, GOOSE 1 through GOOSE 16

MESSAGE

REMOTE DEVICE 1

DATASET: Fixed

Remote devices are available for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.

The


setting is only used with GOOSE messages; they are not applicable to GSSE messages. This setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. It should match the corresponding settings on the sending device.

The


setting provides for the choice of the L30 fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset (that is, containing

DNA and UserSt bit pairs), or one of the configurable datasets.

Note that the dataset for the received data items must be made up of existing items in an existing logical node. For this reason, logical node GGIO3 is instantiated to hold the incoming data items. GGIO3 is not necessary to make use of the received data. The remote input data item mapping takes care of the mapping of the inputs to remote input FlexLogic™ operands. However, GGIO3 data can be read by IEC 61850 clients.

5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS

5

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE INPUTS

Ö

REMOTE INPUT 1(32)

REMOTE INPUT 1

REMOTE INPUT 1 ID:

Remote Ip 1


Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote device 16

MESSAGE

REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE:

Remote Device 1

MESSAGE

REMOTE IN 1 ITEM:

None

Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32,

Config Item 1 to Config Item 32

Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off

MESSAGE

REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT

STATE: Off


MESSAGE

REMOTE IN 1


Remote Inputs that create FlexLogic™ operands at the receiving relay are extracted from GSSE/GOOSE messages originating in remote devices. Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of: DNA-1 through DNA-32, UserSt-1 through UserSt-32, and Dataset Item 1 through Dataset Item 32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850

GE Multilin



specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote outputs section. The function of

UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic™ operand whose state is represented in the GSSE/GOOSE message. A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic™ operand.

Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.

The

REMOTE INPUT 1 ID

setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input. The


setting selects the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting

REMOTE DEVICE (16) ID

(see the Remote devices section). The


setting selects the specific bits of the

GSSE/GOOSE message required.

The

REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE

setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:

• Setting


to “On” value defaults the input to logic 1.

• Setting


to “Off” value defaults the input to logic 0.

• Setting


to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 1.

When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.

• Setting


to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 0.

When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.

For additional information on GSSE/GOOOSE messaging, refer to the Remote devices section in this chapter.

NOTE

5

5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ


Ö

REMOTE DPS INPUT 1(5)

REMOTE DPS INPUT 1

REM DPS IN 1 ID:

RemDPS Ip 1


Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote device 16

MESSAGE

REM DPS IN 1 DEV:

Remote Device 1

Range: None, Dataset Item 1 to Dataset Item 32

MESSAGE

REM DPS IN 1 ITEM:

None


MESSAGE

REM DPS IN 1


Remote double-point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device. Each remote double point status input must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use. This functionality is accomplished with the five remote double-point status input settings.

• REM DPS IN 1 ID: This setting assigns descriptive text to the remote double-point status input.

• REM DPS IN 1 DEV: This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message. The range is selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote devices section.

• REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message.

The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double-point status item from a GOOSE dataset

(changes are made in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ


ÖØ


ÖØ

RECEPTION

ÖØ


Ö

CONFIGIGURABLE GOOSE 1(16)

Ö


menus). Dataset items configured to receive any of “GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV” to “GGIO3.ST.IndPos5.stV” will accept double-point status information that will be decoded by the remote double-point status inputs configured to this dataset item.

The remote double point status is recovered from the received IEC 61850 dataset and is available as through the

RemDPS

Ip 1 BAD

,

RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM

,

RemDPS Ip 1 OFF

, and

RemDPS Ip 1 ON

FlexLogic™ operands. These operands can then be used in breaker or disconnect control schemes.


GE Multilin


5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS a) DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS

Ö

REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR

REMOTE OUTPUTS

DNA- 1 BIT PAIR

DNA- 1 OPERAND:

Off



MESSAGE

DNA- 1 EVENTS:

Disabled

Remote outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into GSSE/GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.

Table 5–23: IEC 61850 DNA ASSIGNMENTS

DNA

1

2

IEC 61850 DEFINITION FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND

Test IEC 61850 TEST MODE

ConfRev IEC 61850 CONF REV

b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS

Ö

REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR

REMOTE OUTPUTS

UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR

UserSt- 1 OPERAND:

Off



MESSAGE

UserSt- 1 EVENTS:

Disabled

Remote outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE/GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.

The following setting represents the time between sending GSSE/GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of any selected digital point. This setting is located in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ


COL

ÖØ


settings menu.


DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE

UPDATE TIME: 60 s

NOTE

For more information on GSSE/GOOSE messaging, refer to Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the

Remote Devices section.

5.8.9 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS a) DESCRIPTION

The relay provides eight direct inputs conveyed on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-8) and eight direct inputs conveyed on communications channel 2 (on three-terminal systems only, numbered 2-1 through 2-8). The user must program the remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay by assigning the desired FlexLogic™ operand to be sent via the selected communications channel.

This relay allows the user to create distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels.

Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and transfer tripping. It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect direct input/output functionality. The 87L function must be enabled to utilize the direct inputs.

Direct input and output FlexLogic™ operands to be used at the local relay are assigned as follows:

• Direct input/output 1-1 through direct input/output 1-8 for communications channel 1.

• Direct input/output 2-1 through direct input/output 2-8 for communications channel 2 (three-terminal systems only).

5

GE Multilin



5

NOTE

On the two-terminal, two channel system (redundant channel), direct outputs 1-1 to 1-8 are send over both channels simultaneously and are received separately as direct inputs 1-1 to 1-8 at channel 1 and direct inputs 2-1 to 2-8 at channel 2. Therefore, to take advantage of redundancy, the respective operands from channel 1 and 2 can be

ORed with FlexLogic™ or mapped separately.

b) DIRECT INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

DIRECT

Ö

DIRECT INPUTS

DIRECT INPUTS

DIRECT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT: Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


DEFAULT: Off

↓


DEFAULT: Off


DEFAULT: Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


DEFAULT: Off

↓


DEFAULT: Off

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

The

DIRECT INPUT 1-1(8) DEFAULT

setting selects the logic state of this particular bit used for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the local communications channel is declared to have failed. Setting

DIRECT INPUT 1-1(8) DEFAULT

to “On” means that the corresponding local FlexLogic™ operand (

DIRECT I/P 1-1(8)

) will have logic state “1” on relay startup or during communications channel failure. When the channel is restored, the operand logic state reflects the actual state of the corresponding remote direct output.

c) DIRECT OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ø

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

DIRECT

ÖØ

DIRECT OUTPUTS

DIRECT OUTPUTS

DIRECT OUTPUT 1-1:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


Off

↓


Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


Off


Off

↓


Off







The relay provides eight direct outputs that are conveyed on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-8) and eight direct outputs that are conveyed on communications channel 2 (numbered 2-1 through 2-8). Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

Direct outputs 2-1 to 2-8 are only functional on three-terminal systems.

NOTE

L90-1


ACTUAL VALUES

CHANNEL 1 STATUS:

L90-2

SETTING

DIRECT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT:

(same for 1-2...1-8)

SETTING

DIRECT OUTPUT 1-1:

(same for 1-2...1-8)

Off (Flexlogic Operand)

Fail

OK

On

Off

OR


DIRECT I/P 1-1

(same for 1-2...1-8)

SETTING

DIRECT INPUT 1-1

DEFAULT:

(same for 1-2...1-8)

ACTUAL VALUES

CHANNEL 1 STATUS:

L90 communication channel

(87L is Enabled)


DIRECT I/P 1-1

(same for 1-2...1-8)

OR

On

Off

Fail

OK

SETTING

DIRECT OUTPUT 1-1:

(same for 1-2...1-8)

Off (Flexlogic Operand)

831024A1.CDR

Figure 5–104: DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS LOGIC

5

GE Multilin



5

5.8.10 RESETTING

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

RESETTING

RESETTING

RESET OPERAND:

Off


Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic™ latches) to the reset state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any programmed operand.

When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic™ operands are created. These operands, which are stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the

RESET OP

FlexLogic™ operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand

RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)

,

RESET OP (COMMS)

or

RESET OP (OPERAND)

to identify the source of the command. The setting shown above selects the operand that will create the

RESET OP (OPERAND)

operand.

5.8.11 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS

ÖØ

GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1(32)

GOOSE ANALOG

INPUT 1

1000.000


Range: Default Value, Last Known

MESSAGE

MODE: Default Value


MESSAGE

GOOSE ANALOG 1

UNITS:


MESSAGE

GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU:

1.000

The IEC 61850 GOOSE analog inputs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE analog input.

• ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the sending device is offline and the

ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE

is set to “Default Value”.This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.

• ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is “Last Known”, the value of the

GOOSE analog input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is

“Default Value”, then the value of the GOOSE analog input is defined by the

ANALOG 1 DEFAULT

setting.

• GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS: This setting specifies a four-character alphanumeric string that can is used in the actual values display of the corresponding GOOSE analog input value.

• GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: This setting specifies the per-unit base factor when using the GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog™ values in other L30 features, such as FlexElements™. The base factor is applied to the GOOSE analog input

FlexAnalog quantity to normalize it to a per-unit quantity. The base units are described in the following table.


GE Multilin


Table 5–24: GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS

ELEMENT

87L SIGNALS





87L SIGNALS



BREAKER ARCING AMPS


BASE UNITS

I

BASE




BASE = 2000 kA

2

× cycle

FREQUENCY

PHASE ANGLE

POWER FACTOR

RTDs

SOURCE CURRENT

SOURCE POWER

SOURCE VOLTAGE

SYNCHROCHECK

(Max Delta Volts)


f

BASE

= 1 Hz ϕ

BASE


PF

BASE

= 1.00

BASE = 100°C

I

BASE


P

BASE


BASE

× I


V

BASE


V

BASE


The GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog™ values are available for use in other L30 functions that use FlexAnalog™ values.

5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS

5

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS

ÖØ

GOOSE UINTEGER INPUT 1(16)

GOOSE UINTEGER

INPUT 1

1000


Range: Default Value, Last Known

MESSAGE

MODE: Default Value

The IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger inputs feature allows the transmission of FlexInteger™ values between any two URseries devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input.

• UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is offline and the

UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE

is set to “Default Value”.This setting is stored as a 32-bit unsigned integer number.

• UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is “Last Known”, the value of the

GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is

“Default Value”, then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the

UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT

setting.

The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger™ values are available for use in other L30 functions that use FlexInteger™ values.

GE Multilin


5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS

5

5.9TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TRANSDUCER I/O

ÖØ

DCMA INPUTS

Ö

DCMA INPUT H1(U8)

DCMA INPUT H1

DCMA INPUT H1




MESSAGE

DCMA INPUT H1 ID:

DCMA Ip 1


MESSAGE

DCMA INPUT H1

UNITS:

μA

MESSAGE

DCMA INPUT H1

RANGE: 0 to -1 mA

Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,

0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

DCMA INPUT H1 MIN

VALUE: 0.000

Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

DCMA INPUT H1 MAX

VALUE: 0.000

Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.

Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter. dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here.

The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.

Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H.

The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If “Disabled”, no actual values are created for the channel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, etc. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The

DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE

setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.

The

DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE

and

DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE

settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250°C; in this case the

DCMA INPUT H1

MIN VALUE

value is “0” and the

DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE

value is “250”. Another example would be a watts transducer with a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the

DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE

value would be “–20” and the

DCMA INPUT H1 MAX

VALUE

value “180”. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5.9.2 RTD INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TRANSDUCER I/O

ÖØ

RTD INPUTS

Ö

RTD INPUT H1(U8)

RTD INPUT H1

RTD INPUT H1




MESSAGE

RTD INPUT H1 ID:

RTD Ip 1

MESSAGE

RTD INPUT H1 TYPE:

100

Ω Nickel

Range: 100

Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,

120

Ω Nickel

Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.

RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here.

The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.

Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.

The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If “Disabled”, there will not be an actual value created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.

Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements™ feature.

In FlexElements™, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement™ operands are available to FlexLogic™ for further interlocking or to operate an output contact directly.

Refer to the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.

5

GE Multilin


5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5

70

80

90

100

110

30

40

50

60

120

130

140

–10

0

10

20

–50

–40

–30

–20

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

158

176

194

212

230

86

104

122

140

248

266

284

14

32

50

68

–58

–40

–22

–4

302

320

338

356

374

392

410

428

446

464

482

Table 5–25: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE

TEMPERATURE

°C °F

134.70

138.50

142.29

146.06

149.82

153.58

157.32

161.04

164.76

168.47

172.46

175.84

179.51

183.17

186.82

190.45

194.08

103.90

107.79

111.67

115.54

119.39

123.24

127.07

130.89

RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)

100

Ω PT

(DIN 43760)

120

Ω NI

80.31

84.27

86.17

92.76

88.22

92.16

96.09

100.00

99.41

106.15

113.00

120.00

127.17

134.52

142.06

149.79

157.74

165.90

174.25

182.84

191.64

200.64

209.85

219.29

228.96

238.85

248.95

259.30

269.91

280.77

291.96

303.46

315.31

327.54

340.14

353.14

366.53

100

Ω NI

118.38

124.82

131.45

138.25

145.20

152.37

159.70

167.20

174.87

182.75

190.80

199.04

71.81

77.30

82.84

88.45

94.17

100.00

105.97

112.10

207.45

216.08

224.92

233.97

243.30

252.88

262.76

272.94

283.45

294.28

305.44

10

Ω CU

10.19

10.58

10.97

11.35

11.74

12.12

12.51

12.90

13.28

13.67

14.06

14.44

7.10

7.49

7.88

8.26

8.65

9.04

9.42

9.81

14.83

15.22

15.61

16.00

16.39

16.78

17.17

17.56

17.95

18.34

18.73

5 SETTINGS


GE Multilin


5.9.3 DCMA OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TRANSDUCER I/O

ÖØ

DCMA OUTPUTS

Ö

DCMA OUTPUT H1(U8)

DCMA OUTPUT H1

DCMA OUTPUT H1

SOURCE: Off


Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA

MESSAGE

DCMA OUTPUT H1

RANGE: –1 to 1 mA


MESSAGE

DCMA OUTPUT H1

MIN VAL: 0.000 pu


MESSAGE

DCMA OUTPUT H1

MAX VAL: 1.000 pu

Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or

CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below.

The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number.

Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an example for channel M5 is shown).

The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently rescales so the limits defined as

MIN VAL

and

MAX VAL

match the output range of the hardware defined as

RANGE

. The following equation is applied:

I out

=

⎧

⎪

⎨

⎪

⎩

I

I min

if x

<

MIN VAL

max

(

–

if x

>

MAX VAL

MIN VAL

min

otherwise

(EQ 5.28)

where: x is a driving signal specified by the

SOURCE

setting

I min

and I

max

are defined by the

RANGE

setting

k is a scaling constant calculated as:

k

=

I

–

I

-------------------------------------------------

MAX VAL

–

MIN VAL

(EQ 5.29)

The feature is intentionally inhibited if the

MAX VAL

and

MIN VAL

settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when

MAX VAL

–

MIN

VAL

< 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.

5

I max

GE Multilin

I min

DRIVING SIGNAL

MIN VAL MAX VAL

842739A1.CDR

Figure 5–105: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC


5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS

5

The dcmA output settings are described below.

• DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values

(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters.

• DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set independently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.

• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement™ base units.

• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement™ base units.

The

DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL

and

DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL

settings are ignored for power factor base units (i.e. if the

DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE

is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).

NOTE

Three application examples are described below.

EXAMPLE: POWER MONITORING

A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1 output of the range of –1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.

The nominal three-phase power is:

P

=

3

×

13.8 kV

×

0.8 kA

×

0.9

=

17.21 MW

The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:

P max

= 1.2

×

17.21 MW = 20.65 MW

The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:

P

BASE

=

115 V

×

120

×

1.2 kA

=

16.56 MW

(EQ 5.30)

(EQ 5.31)

(EQ 5.32)

The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are: minimum power =

–

20.65 MW

16.56 MW

= – 1.247 pu, maximum power =

20.65 MW

1.247 pu

16.56 MW

=

(EQ 5.33)

The following settings should be entered:


: “SRC 1 P”

DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE

: “–1 to 1 mA”


: “–1.247 pu”


: “1.247 pu”

With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:

• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or

±

0.005

× (

1 –

(

– 1

)

=

±

0.207 MW

• ±1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9

For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01

× 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.

EXAMPLE: CURRENT MONITORING

The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.

The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allowing for 50% overload.

The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:


GE Multilin


I max

= 1.5

×

4.2 kA = 6.3 kA

The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:

(EQ 5.34)

I

BASE

= 5 kA

The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:

(EQ 5.35)

minimum current

=

0 kA

------------

0 pu, maximum current

5 kA

= =

6.3 kA

-----------------

1.26 pu

5 kA

=

(EQ 5.36)



: “SRC 1 Ia RMS”


: “4 to 20 mA”


: “0.000 pu”


: “1.260 pu”

The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:


±

0.005

× (

20

–

4

=

±

0.504 kA

• ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal

For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025

× 4.2 kA, 0.001 × 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.

EXAMPLE: VOLTAGE MONITORING

A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is

“Delta”. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.

The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:

V min

= 0.7

×

= 161.66 kV, V

max

= 1.1

×

= 254.03 kV

3 3

The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:

V

BASE

=

0.0664 kV

×

6024

=

400 kV

The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:

(EQ 5.37)

(EQ 5.38)

minimum voltage =

161.66 kV

0.404 pu, maximum voltage

400 kV

= =

254.03 kV

0.635 pu

400 kV

=

(EQ 5.39)



: “SRC 2 V_1 mag”


: “0 to 1 mA”


: “0.404 pu”


: “0.635 pu”

The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in “Delta” (refer to the Metering conventions section in chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 .

The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:


±

0.005

× (

1

–

0

) ×

254.03 kV

=

±

1.27 kV

• ±0.5% of reading

For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is

0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.

5

GE Multilin


5.10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS

5

5.10TESTING

5.10.1 TEST MODE

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

Ö

TEST MODE

SETTINGS

TESTING

TEST MODE


MESSAGE

TEST MODE FORCING:

On

Range: Disabled, Isolated, Forcible


The L30 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication channels and the phasor measurement unit (where applicable), using simulated conditions. The test mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a Test Mode LED indicator.

The test mode may be in any of three states: disabled, isolated, or forcible.

In the “Disabled” mode, L30 operation is normal and all test features are disabled.

In the “Isolated” mode, the L30 is prevented from performing certain control actions, including tripping via contact outputs.

All relay contact outputs, including latching outputs, are disabled. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain usable on applicable UR-series models.

In the “Forcible” mode, the operand selected by the

TEST MODE FORCING

setting controls the relay inputs and outputs. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the


setting is “Off”, the L30 inputs and outputs operate normally. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the


setting is “On”, the L30 contact inputs and outputs are forced to the values specified in the following sections. Forcing may be controlled by manually changing the operand selected by the


setting between on and off, or by selecting a user-programmable pushbutton, contact input, or communication-based input operand. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain usable on applicable UR-series models.

Communications based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode. If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs, then the test procedure must take this into account.

NOTE

When in “Forcible” mode, the operand selected by the


setting dictates further response of the L30 to testing conditions. To force contact inputs and outputs through relay settings, set


to “On”. To force contact inputs and outputs through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic™ operand (pushbutton, digital input, communication-based input, or a combination of these), set


to the desired operand. The contact input or output is forced when the selected operand assumes a logic 1 state.

The L30 remains fully operational in test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and control elements, FlexLogic™, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.

The only difference between the normal operation and the test mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The contact inputs can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational, whereas the contact outputs can be forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the test mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the force contact inputs and force contact outputs test functions described in the following sections.

The test mode state is indicated on the relay faceplate by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service LED indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the following table.


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.10 TESTING

Table 5–26: TEST MODE OPERATION

TEST MODE

FUNCTION

Disabled

TEST MODE

FORCING

OPERAND

No effect

IN-SERVICE

LED

TEST MODE

LED

Unaffected Off

CRITICAL

FAIL

RELAY

Unaffected

Isolated

Forcible

No effect

On (logic 1)

Off (logic 0)

Off

Off

Off

On

Flashing

Flashing

Deenergized

Deenergized

Deenergized

INPUT AND OUTPUT BEHAVIOR

Contact outputs and inputs are under normal operation. Channel tests and PMU tests not operational (where applicable).

Contact outputs are disabled and contact inputs are operational. Channel tests and PMU tests are also operational (where applicable).

Contact inputs and outputs are controlled by the force contact input and force contact output functions. Channel tests and PMU tests are operational (where applicable).

Contact outputs and inputs are under normal operation. Channel tests and PMU tests are also operational (where applicable).

The

TEST MODE FUNCTION

setting can only be changed by a direct user command. Following a restart, power up, settings upload, or firmware upgrade, the test mode will remain at the last programmed value. This allows a L30 that has been placed in isolated mode to remain isolated during testing and maintenance activities. On restart, the


setting and the force contact input and force contact output settings all revert to their default states.

5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

ÖØ

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

FORCE CONTACT

INPUTS

FORCE Cont Ip 1

:Disabled

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FORCE Cont Ip 2

:Disabled

↓

FORCE Cont Ip xx

:Disabled

Range: Disabled, Open, Closed



The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode in the following ways:

• If set to “Disabled”, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.

• If set to “Open”, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals.

• If set to “Closed”, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals.

The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once enabled, the relay is placed into test mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test

Mode LED will be on, indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as “Disabled”, “Open”, or “Closed”. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.

5

GE Multilin



5

5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

ÖØ

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

FORCE CONTACT

OUTPUTS

FORCE Cont Op 1

:Disabled

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FORCE Cont Op 2

:Disabled

↓

FORCE Cont Op xx

:Disabled

Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze



The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode.

If set to “Disabled”, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is logic 1 and will resets when its control operand is logic 0. If set to “Energized”, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration of the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “De-energized”, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “Freeze”, the output retains its position from before entering the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.

These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Second, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.

Example 1: Initiating test mode through user-programmable pushbutton 1

For example, the test mode can be initiated from user-programmable pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as

“Latched” (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, digital input 1 should remain operational, digital inputs 2 and 3 should open, and digital input 4 should close. Also, contact output 1 should freeze, contact output 2 should open, contact output 3 should close, and contact output 4 should remain fully operational.

The required settings are shown below.

To enable user-programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode, make the following changes in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

Ö

TEST MODE

menu:

TEST MODE FUNCTION:

“Enabled” and

TEST MODE INITIATE:

“

PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

”

Make the following changes to configure the contact inputs and outputs. In the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

ÖØ

FORCE CONTACT

INPUTS

and

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

menus, set:

FORCE Cont Ip 1:

“Disabled”,


“Open”,


“Open”, and


“Closed”

FORCE Cont Op 1:

“Freeze”,


“De-energized”,


“Energized”, and


“Disabled”

Example 2: Initiating a test from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or through remote input 1

In this example, the test can be initiated locally from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or remotely through remote input 1.

Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as “Latched”. Write the following FlexLogic™ equation:

Set the user-programmable pushbutton as latching by changing

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ


PUSHBUTTONS

Ö


Ö


to “Latched”. To enable either pushbutton 1 or remote input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

Ö

TEST MODE

menu:

TEST MODE FUNCTION:

“Enabled” and

TEST MODE INITIATE:

“

VO1

”


GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.10 TESTING

5.10.4 CHANNEL TESTS

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

CHANNEL TESTS

LOCAL LOOPBACK

MESSAGE

REMOTE LOOPBACK

This function performs checking of the communications established by both relays.

LOCAL LOOPBACK

MESSAGE

LOCAL LOOPBACK

FUNCTION: No

LOCAL LOOPBACK

CHANNEL NUMBER: 1

Range: Yes, No

Range: 1, 2

REMOTE LOOPBACK

MESSAGE

REMOTE LOOPBACK

FUNCTION: No

REMOTE LOOPBACK

CHANNEL NUMBER: 1

Range: Yes, No

Range: 1, 2

Refer to the Commissioning chapter for a detailed description of using the channel tests.

5.10.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES

5

PATH: SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

ÖØ

PMU TEST VALUES

Ö

PMU 1 TEST VALUES

PMU 1

TEST VALUES

PMU 1 TEST



Range: 0.00 to 700.00 kV in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

PMU 1 VA TEST

MAGNITUDE: 500.00 kV


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VA TEST

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VB TEST



MESSAGE

PMU 1 VB TEST

ANGLE: –120.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VC TEST



MESSAGE

PMU 1 VC TEST

ANGLE: 120.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VX TEST



MESSAGE

PMU 1 VX TEST

ANGLE: 0.00°

Range: 0.000 to 9.999 kA in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

PMU 1 IA TEST

MAGNITUDE: 1.000 kA


MESSAGE

PMU 1 IA TEST

ANGLE: –10.00°

GE Multilin



5

MESSAGE

PMU 1 IB TEST



MESSAGE

PMU 1 IB TEST

ANGLE: –130.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 IC TEST



MESSAGE

PMU 1 IC TEST

ANGLE: 110.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 IG TEST



MESSAGE

PMU 1 IG TEST

ANGLE: 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 TEST

FREQUENCY: 60.000 Hz


MESSAGE

PMU 1 TEST df/dt: 0.000 Hz/s

Range: –10.000 to 10.000 Hz/s in steps of 0.001

The relay must be in test mode to use the PMU test mode. That is, the

TESTING

Ö

TEST MODE FUNCTION

setting must be

“Enabled” and the

TESTING

ÖØ

TEST MODE INITIATE

initiating signal must be “On”.

During the PMU test mode, the physical channels (VA, VB, VC, VX, IA, IB, IC, and IG), frequency, and rate of change of frequency are substituted with user values, while the symmetrical components are calculated from the physical channels. The test values are not explicitly marked in the outgoing data frames. When required, it is recommended to use the user-programmable digital channels to signal the C37.118 client that test values are being sent in place of the real measurements.


GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW

ACTUAL VALUES

STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES

METERING

CONTACT INPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUTS

REMOTE INPUTS


DIRECT INPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUTS

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

AUTORECLOSE

REMOTE DEVICES

STATUS

REMOTE DEVICES

STATISTICS

CHANNEL TESTS


SELECTOR SWITCHES

FLEX STATES

IEC 61850

GOOSE UINTEGERS

ETHERNET

ETHERNET SWITCH

87L DIFFERENTIAL

CURRENT

SOURCE SRC 1

SOURCE SRC 2

SYNCHROCHECK

GE Multilin

See page 6-3.

See page 6-3.

See page 6-3.

See page 6-4.

See page 6-4.

See page 6-4.

See page 6-5.

See page 6-5.

See page 6-5.

See page 6-6.

See page 6-6.

See page 6-7.

See page 6-7.

See page 6-8.

See page 6-8.

See page 6-8.

See page 6-8.

See page 6-13.

See page 6-14.

See page 6-17.


6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU

6-1

6

6

6.1 OVERVIEW

ACTUAL VALUES

RECORDS

ACTUAL VALUES

PRODUCT INFO

TRACKING FREQUENCY

FLEXELEMENTS

IEC 61850

GOOSE ANALOGS


UNIT

TRANSDUCER I/O

DCMA INPUTS

TRANSDUCER I/O

RTD INPUTS

FAULT REPORTS

EVENT RECORDS

OSCILLOGRAPHY

DATA LOGGER

PMU RECORDS

MAINTENANCE


FIRMWARE REVISIONS

See page 6-17.

See page 6-18.

See page 6-18.

See page 6-19.

See page 6-20.

See page 6-20.

See page 6-21.

See page 6-21.

See page 6-22.

See page 6-22.

See page 6-22.

See page 6-23.

See page 6-24.

See page 6-24.

6 ACTUAL VALUES


GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS

6.2STATUS

For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.

NOTE

6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

Ö

CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS

Cont Ip 1

Off

MESSAGE

Cont Ip 2

Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

↓

MESSAGE

Cont Ip xx

Off

Range: On, Off

The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact input.



Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

VIRTUAL INPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUTS

Virt Ip 1

Off

MESSAGE

Virt Ip 2

Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

↓

MESSAGE

Virt Ip 64

Off

Range: On, Off

The present status of the 64 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input.

6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS

6


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTE INPUT 1

STATUS: Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

REMOTE INPUT 2

STATUS: Off

↓

REMOTE INPUT 32

STATUS: Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be “Offline” in which case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.

GE Multilin


6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.2.4 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ




STATUS: Bad

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


STATUS: Bad

↓


STATUS: Bad

Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad



The present state of the remote double-point status inputs is shown here. The actual values indicate if the remote doublepoint status inputs are in the on (close), off (open), intermediate, or bad state.

6.2.5 DIRECT INPUTS


Ø

STATUS

ÖØ

DIRECT INPUTS

DIRECT INPUTS

DIRECT INPUT 1-1:

Off

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


Off

↓


Off


Off


Off

↓


Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

The present state of the direct inputs from communications channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless channel 1 or 2 has been declared to have “failed”, in which case the value shown is the programmed default state defined in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

DIRECT

Ö

DIRECT INPUTS

menu.

6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUTS

Cont Op 1

Off

MESSAGE

Cont Op 2

Off

↓

MESSAGE

Cont Op xx

Off

Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff




GE Multilin


The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.

For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff,

On, IOn, and VOn. For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.

NOTE

6.2.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

Virt Op 1

Off

MESSAGE

Virt Op 2

Off

↓

MESSAGE

Virt Op 96

Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

Range: On, Off

The present state of up to 96 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic™ equation for that output.

6.2.8 AUTORECLOSE


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

AUTORECLOSE

Ö

AUTORECLOSE 1

AUTORECLOSE 1

AUTORECLOSE 1

SHOT COUNT: 0

Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4

The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here.

6.2.9 REMOTE DEVICES a) STATUS


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

REMOTE DEVICES STATUS

REMOTE DEVICES

STATUS

All REMOTE DEVICES

ONLINE: No

MESSAGE

REMOTE DEVICE 1

STATUS: Offline

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

REMOTE DEVICE 2

STATUS: Offline

↓

REMOTE DEVICE 16

STATUS: Offline

Range: Yes, No

Range: Online, Offline



The present state of the programmed remote devices is shown here. The

ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE

message indicates whether or not all programmed remote devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one required remote device is not online.

6

GE Multilin



6 b) STATISTICS


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS

Ö

REMOTE DEVICE 1 (16)

REMOTE DEVICE 1

REMOTE DEVICE 1

StNum: 0

MESSAGE

REMOTE DEVICE 1

SqNum: 0

Statistical data (two types) for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here.

The StNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a GSSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4 294 967 295 is incremented.

6.2.10 CHANNEL TESTS


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

CHANNEL TESTS

CHANNEL 1

STATUS: n/a

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CHANNEL 1 LOST

PACKETS: 0

CHANNEL 1 LOCAL

LOOPBCK STATUS: n/a

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CHANNEL 1 REMOTE


CHANNEL 1

LOOP DELAY: 0.0 ms

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CHANNEL 1 ASYMMETRY:

+0.0 ms

CHANNEL 2

STATUS: n/a

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CHANNEL 2 LOST

PACKETS: 0

CHANNEL 2 LOCAL


CHANNEL 2 REMOTE


CHANNEL 2

LOOP DELAY: 0.0 ms

CHANNEL 2 ASYMMETRY:

+0.0 ms

VALIDITY OF CHANNEL

CONFIGURATION: n/a

PFLL

STATUS: n/a

Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1. Reset count to 0 through the

COMMANDS

ÖØ CLEAR RECORDS

menu.



Range: –10 to 10 ms in steps of 0.1


Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1. Reset count to 0 through the

COMMANDS

ÖØ CLEAR RECORDS

menu.



Range: –10 to 10 ms in steps of 0.1



The status information for two channels is shown here. A brief description of each actual value is below:


GE Multilin


• CHANNEL 1(2) STATUS: This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is “OK”, the 87L current differential element is enabled and data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is “FAIL”, the 87L element is enabled and data is not being received from the remote terminal. If “n/a”, the 87L element is disabled.

• CHANNEL 1(2) LOST PACKETS: Current, timing, and control data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per cycle. The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset through the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

menu.

• CHANNEL 1(2) LOCAL LOOPBACK STATUS: The result of the local loopback test is displayed here.

• CHANNEL 1(2) REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS: The result of the remote loopback test is displayed here.

• CHANNEL 1(2) LOOP DELAY: Displays the round trip channel delay (including loopback processing time of the remote relay) computed during a remote loopback test under normal relay operation, in milliseconds (ms).

• CHANNEL 1(2) ASYMMETRY: The result of channel asymmetry calculations derived from GPS signal is being displayed here for both channels if

CHANNEL ASYMMETRY

is “Enabled”. A positive “+” sign indicates the transit delay in the transmitting direction is less than the delay in the receiving direction; a negative “–” sign indicates the transit delay in the transmitting direction is more than the delay in the receiving direction. A displayed value of “0.0” indicates that either asymmetry is not present or can not be estimated due to failure with local/remote GPS clock source.

• VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: The current state of the communications channel identification check, and hence validity, is displayed here. If a remote relay ID number does not match the programmed number at the local relay, the “FAIL” value is displayed. The “n/a” value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of “0” or if the

87L element is disabled. Refer to

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

L90 POWER SYSTEM

section for more information

• PFLL STATUS: This value represents the status of the phase and frequency locked loop (PFLL) filter which uses timing information from local and remote terminals to synchronize the clocks of all terminals. If

PFLL STATUS

is “OK”, the clocks of all terminals are synchronized and 87L protection is enabled. If it is “FAIL”, the clocks of all terminals are not synchronized and 87L protection is disabled. If “n/a”, then PFLL is disabled.

At startup, the clocks of all terminals are not synchronized and the PFLL status displayed is “FAIL”. It takes up to 8 seconds after startup for the value displayed to change from “FAIL” to “OK”.

NOTE

6.2.11 DIGITAL COUNTERS


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ


Ö

DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)


Counter 1

Counter 1

0

ACCUM:

MESSAGE

Counter 1 FROZEN:

0

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Counter 1 FROZEN:

YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

Counter 1 MICROS:

0

The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date and time stamp for the frozen count. The

COUNTER 1 MICROS

value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.

6.2.12 SELECTOR SWITCHES

6


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ




POSITION: 0/7

MESSAGE


POSITION: 0/7

Range: Current Position / 7

Range: Current Position / 7

GE Multilin



6

The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the actual value.

6.2.13 FLEX STATES


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

FLEX STATES

FLEX STATES

Off

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Off

↓

PARAM 256: Off

Off

Range: Off, On

There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.

6.2.14 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS


ÖØ

STATUS

ÖØ

IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS

IEC 61850

GOOSE UINTEGERS

UINT INPUT

0

1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

UINT INPUT 2

0

↓

UINT INPUT 16

0



The IEC 61850 GGIO5 integer input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO5 integer data values are received via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.

6.2.15 ETHERNET


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

ETHERNET

ETHERNET

ETHERNET PRI LINK

STATUS: OK

MESSAGE

ETHERNET SEC LINK

STATUS: OK

Range: Fail, OK

Range: Fail, OK

These values indicate the status of the primary and secondary Ethernet links.


GE Multilin


6.2.16 ETHERNET SWITCH


Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

ETHERNET SWITCH

ETHERNET SWITCH

SWITCH 1 PORT

STATUS: OK

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SWITCH 2 PORT

STATUS: OK

↓

SWITCH 6 PORT

STATUS: OK

MESSAGE

SWITCH MAC ADDRESS:

00A0F40138FA

Range: FAIL, OK

Range: FAIL, OK

Range: FAIL, OK

Range: standard MAC address format

These actual values appear only if the L30 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T). The status information for the Ethernet switch is shown in this menu.

• SWITCH 1 PORT STATUS to SWITCH 6 PORT STATUS: These values represents the receiver status of each port on the Ethernet switch. If the value is “OK”, then data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is “FAIL”, then data is not being received from the remote terminal or the port is not connected.

• SWITCH MAC ADDRESS: This value displays the MAC address assigned to the Ethernet switch module.

6

GE Multilin


6

6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6.3METERING

a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.

6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS

Generator

G

PER IEEE CONVENTIONS

PARAMETERS AS SEEN

BY THE UR RELAY

Voltage

WATTS = Positive

VARS = Positive

PF = Lag

Current

UR RELAY

VCG

IB

IC

IA

VAG

+Q

-P

PF = Lead PF = Lag

IA

+P

M

Inductive

Generator

G

LOAD

Resistive

VBG

-

1

PF = Lag PF = Lead

-Q

S=VI

Voltage

WATTS = Positive

VARS = Negative

PF = Lead

Current

UR RELAY

VCG

IC

VBG

IB

IA

VAG

+Q

PF = Lead PF = Lag

-P

PF = Lag

-Q

S=VI

IA

PF = Lead

+P

Inductive

M

LOAD

Resistive

Resistive

LOAD

-

2

Voltage

WATTS = Negative

VARS = Negative

PF = Lag

Current

UR RELAY

VCG

IA

VBG

IC

IB

VAG

+Q

PF = Lead PF = Lag

-P

IA

PF = Lag PF = Lead

-Q

S=VI

+P

G

Generator

-

3

Resistive

LOAD

VCG

+Q

Voltage

IB

WATTS = Negative

VARS = Positive

PF = Lead

VAG

-P

PF = Lead

IA

PF = Lag

+P

IC

IA

PF = Lag PF = Lead

G

Generator

Current

UR RELAY

827239AC.CDR

VBG

-Q

S=VI

-

4

Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS


GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.

For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected by the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

POWER SYSTEM

ÖØ


setting. This setting defines a particular AC signal source to be used as the reference.

The relay will first determine if any “Phase VT” bank is indicated in the source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any “Aux VT” bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include “Phase CT” bank and “Ground CT” bank.

If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.

-270 o

-180 o

-225 o

-315 o positive angle direction

UR phase angle reference

0 o

-135 o

-45 o

-90 o

827845A1.CDR

Figure 6–2: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.

For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common reference as described in the previous sub-section.

WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

• ABC phase rotation:

V_0

V_1

V_2

=

=

=

--- V

3

AG

--- V

3

AG

+

V

BG

+

--- V

3

AG

+

aV

BG

+

a

2

V

BG

V

CG

)

+

a

2

V

CG

)

+

aV

CG

)

• ACB phase rotation:

V_0 =

1

--- V

3

(

AG

+

V

BG

+

V

CG

)

V_1 =

3

(

AG

+

a

2

V

BG

+

aV

CG

)

V_2 =

3

(

AG

+

aV

BG

+

a

2

V

CG

)

6

The above equations apply to currents as well.

GE Multilin


6


DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

• ABC phase rotation:

V_0 = N/A

V_1

V_2

=

=

1 – 30

3 3

°

(

AB

+

aV

BC

+

a

2

V

CA

)

1 30

3 3

°

(

AB

+

a

2

V

BC

+

aV

CA

)

• ACB phase rotation:

V_0

=

N/A

V_1

=

1 30

3 3

°

(

V_2

=

AB

+

a

2

V

BC

+

aV

CA

)

1 – 30

3 3

°

(

AB

+

aV

BC

+

a

2

V

CA

)

The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.

Table 6–1: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE

SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V *

V

AG

13.9

∠0°

V

BG

76.2

∠–125°

V

CG

79.7

∠–250°

UNKNOWN (only

V

1 and

V

2 can be determined)

V

AB

84.9

∠–313°

84.9

∠0°

V

BC

138.3

∠–97°

138.3

∠–144°

V

CA

85.4

∠–241°

85.4

∠–288°

VT

CONN.

RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V

F5AC F6AC F7AC

WYE 13.9

∠0°

DELTA 84.9

∠0°

76.2

∠–125°

138.3

∠–144°

79.7

∠–250°

85.4

∠–288°

SYMM. COMP, SEC. V

V

0

19.5

∠–192°

N/A

V

1

56.5

∠–7°

56.5

∠–54°

V

2

23.3

∠–187°

23.3

∠–234°

* The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a relative matter. It is important to remember that the L30 displays are always referenced as specified under

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

POWER SYSTEM

ÖØ


.

The example above is illustrated in the following figure.

SYSTEM VOLTAGES SYMMETRICAL

COMPONENTS

A

1

WYE VTs

C

B

2

0

UR phase angle reference

A UR phase angle reference

1

DELTA VTs

C

B

2

827844A1.CDR

Figure 6–3: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS


GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING

6.3.2 DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT


ÖØ

METERING

Ö


87L DIFFERENTIAL

CURRENT

LOCAL IA:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGE

LOCAL IB:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

LOCAL IC:

0.000 A 0.0°

TERMINAL 1 IA:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

TERMINAL 1 IB:

0.000 A 0.0°

TERMINAL 1 IC:

0.000 A 0.0°

TERMINAL 2 IA:

0.000 A 0.0°

TERMINAL 2 IB:

0.000 A 0.0°

TERMINAL 2 IC:

0.000 A 0.0°

IA DIFF. CURRENT:

0.000 A 0.0°

IA RESTR. CURRENT:

0.000 A

IB DIFF. CURRENT:

0.000 A 0.0°

IB RESTR. CURRENT:

0.000 A

IC DIFF. CURRENT:

0.000 A 0.0°

IC RESTR. CURRENT:

0.000 A

IG DIFF. CURRENT:

0.000 A 0.0°

IG RESTR. CURRENT:

0.000 A

The metered current values are displayed for all line terminals in fundamental phasor form. All angles are shown with respect to the reference common for all L30 devices; that is, frequency, source currents, and voltages. The metered primary differential and restraint currents are displayed for the local relay.

Terminal 1 refers to the communication channel 1 interface to a remote L30 at terminal 1. Terminal 2 refers to the communication channel 2 interface to a remote L30 at terminal 2.

NOTE

6

GE Multilin



6

6.3.3 SOURCES a) MAIN MENU


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ

SOURCE SRC1

SOURCE SRC 1

PHASE CURRENT

SRC 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GROUND CURRENT

SRC 1

PHASE VOLTAGE

SRC 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

AUXILIARY VOLTAGE

SRC 1

POWER

SRC 1

FREQUENCY

SRC 1

See page 6–14.

See page 6–15.

See page 6–15.

See page 6–16.

See page 6–16.

See page 6–17.

This menu displays the metered values available for each source.

Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs assignments for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage, energy, and power values will be unavailable.

b) PHASE CURRENT METERING


ÖØ

METERING

Ö

SOURCE SRC 1

Ö

PHASE CURRENT

PHASE CURRENT

SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SRC 1 RMS Ia:

0.000 A

SRC 1 RMS Ib:

0.000 A

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SRC 1 RMS Ic:

0.000 A

SRC 1 RMS In:

0.000 A

SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:

0.000 A 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:

0.000 A 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:

0.000 A 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR In:

0.000 A 0.0°

SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGE

SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:

0.000 A 0.0°


GE Multilin


MESSAGE

SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:

0.000 A 0.0°

The metered phase current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

).

c) GROUND CURRENT METERING


ÖØ

METERING

Ö

SOURCE SRC 1

ÖØ

GROUND CURRENT

GROUND CURRENT

SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Ig:

0.000 A

MESSAGE

SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGE

SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:

0.000 A 0.0°

The metered ground current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

).

d) PHASE VOLTAGE METERING


ÖØ

METERING

Ö

SOURCE SRC 1

Ö

PHASE VOLTAGE

PHASE VOLTAGE

SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Vag:

0.00 V

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SRC 1 RMS Vbg:

0.00 V

SRC 1 RMS Vcg:

0.00 V

SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:

0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:

0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 RMS Vab:

0.00 V

SRC 1 RMS Vbc:

0.00 V

SRC 1 RMS Vca:

0.00 V

SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:

0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:

0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:

0.000 V 0.0°

6

GE Multilin



6

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:

0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:

0.000 V 0.0°

The metered phase voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

).

e) AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING


ÖØ

METERING

Ö

SOURCE SRC 1

ÖØ



SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Vx:

0.00 V

MESSAGE

SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:

0.000 V 0.0°

The metered auxiliary voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

).

f) POWER METERING


ÖØ

METERING

Ö

SOURCE SRC 1

ÖØ

POWER

POWER

SRC 1

SRC 1 REAL POWER

3

φ: 0.000 W

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


φa: 0.000 W


φb: 0.000 W


φc: 0.000 W

SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

3

φ: 0.000 var


φa: 0.000 var


φb: 0.000 var


φc: 0.000 var

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

3

φ: 0.000 VA


φa: 0.000 VA

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


φb: 0.000 VA


φc: 0.000 VA

SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

3

φ: 1.000


GE Multilin


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


φa: 1.000


φb: 1.000


φc: 1.000

The metered values for real, reactive, and apparent power, as well as power factor, are displayed in this menu. The "SRC

1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYS-

TEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

).

g) FREQUENCY METERING


ÖØ

METERING

Ö

SOURCE SRC 1

ÖØ

FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY

SRC 1

SRC 1 FREQUENCY:

0.00 Hz

The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

).

SOURCE FREQUENCY

is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a

Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration

(see the

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

POWER SYSTEM

settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients.

If the 87L function is enabled, then dedicated 87L frequency tracking is engaged. In this case, the relay uses the

METERING

ÖØ


Ö


value for all computations, overriding the

SOURCE FREQUENCY

value.

6.3.4 SYNCHROCHECK


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ

SYNCHROCHECK

Ö

SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)

SYNCHROCHECK 1

SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA

MESSAGE


PHASE: 0.0°


MESSAGE

6

The actual values menu for synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of synchrocheck 1. If a synchrocheck function setting is "Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed.

6.3.5 TRACKING FREQUENCY


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ



TRACKING FREQUENCY:

60.00 Hz

The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The


is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the

NOMINAL FREQUENCY

is used.

GE Multilin



6

6.3.6 FLEXELEMENTS™


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ

FLEXELEMENTS

Ö

FLEXELEMENT 1(8)

FLEXELEMENT 1

FLEXELEMENT 1

OpSig: 0.000 pu

The operating signals for the FlexElements™ are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.

Table 6–2: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

87L SIGNALS





87L SIGNALS



BREAKER ARCING AMPS


I

BASE




BASE = 2000 kA

2 × cycle

FREQUENCY

PHASE ANGLE

POWER FACTOR

RTDs

SOURCE CURRENT

SOURCE POWER

SOURCE VOLTAGE

SYNCHROCHECK

(Max Delta Volts)


f

BASE

= 1 Hz ϕ

BASE


PF

BASE

= 1.00

BASE = 100°C

I

BASE


P

BASE


BASE

× I


V

BASE


V

BASE


6.3.7 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ

IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS

IEC 61850

GOOSE ANALOGS

ANALOG INPUT

0.000

1

MESSAGE

ANALOG INPUT 2

0.000

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

ANALOG INPUT 3

0.000

↓

ANALOG INPUT 32

0.000



The IEC 61850 GGIO3 analog input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO3 analog data values are received via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.


GE Multilin


6.3.8 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ


Ö

PMU 1(4)

PMU 1

PMU 1 VA:

0.0000 kV, 0.00°

Range: Va or Vab per VT bank connection


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VB:

0.0000 kV, 0.00°


MESSAGE

PMU 1 VC:

0.0000 kV, 0.00°

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PMU 1 VX:

0.0000 kV, 0.00°

PMU 1 V1:

0.0000 kV, 0.00°

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

PMU 1 V2:

0.0000 kV, 0.00°

PMU 1 V0:

0.0000 kV, 0.00°

PMU 1 IA:

0.0000 kA, 0.00°

PMU 1 IB:

0.0000 kA, 0.00°

PMU 1 IC:

0.0000 kA, 0.00°

PMU 1 IG:

0.0000 kA, 0.00°

PMU 1 I1:

0.0000 kA, 0.00°

PMU 1 I2:

0.0000 kA, 0.00°

PMU 1 I0:

0.0000 kA, 0.00°

PMU 1 FREQUENCY:

0.0000 Hz

PMU 1 df/dt:

0.0000 Hz/s

PMU 1 CONFIG CHANGE

COUNTER: 0

Range: Substituted with zero if delta-connected VTs.

Range: 0 to 65535

The above actual values are displayed without the corresponding time stamp as they become available per the recording rate setting. Also, the recording post-filtering setting is applied to these values.

6

GE Multilin


6


6.3.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ

TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS

Ö

DCMA INPUT xx

DCMA INPUT xx

DCMA INPUT xx

0.000 mA

Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.


ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ

TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS

Ö

RTD INPUT xx

RTD INPUT xx

RTD INPUT xx

-50 °C

Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value.


GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS

6.4RECORDS


ÖØ

RECORDS

Ö

FAULT REPORTS

Ö

FAULT REPORT 1(15)

NO FAULTS TO REPORT

6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS

or

FAULT REPORT 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FAULT 1

LINE ID: SRC 1

FAULT 1

2000/08/11

DATE:

FAULT 1 TIME:

00:00:00.000000

FAULT 1

ABG

TYPE:

FAULT 1

00.0 km

LOCATION

FAULT 1

SHOT: 0

RECLOSE


Range: YYYY/MM/DD

Range: HH:MM:SS.ssssss

Range: not available if the source VTs are in the “Delta” configuration

Range: not available if the source VTs are in the “Delta” configuration

Range: where applicable

The latest 15 fault reports can be stored. The most recent fault location calculation (when applicable) is displayed in this menu, along with the date and time stamp of the event which triggered the calculation. See the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT

SETUP

ÖØ

FAULT REPORTS

menu for assigning the source and trigger for fault calculations. Refer to the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

menu for manual clearing of the fault reports and to the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

CLEAR RELAY

RECORDS

menu for automated clearing of the fault reports.

6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS


ÖØ

RECORDS

Ö

EVENT RECORDS

EVENT RECORDS

EVENT: XXXX

RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)

↓

MESSAGE

EVENT: 3

POWER ON

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

EVENT: 2

POWER OFF

EVENT: 1

EVENTS CLEARED

EVENT 3

DATE: 2000/07/14

EVENT 3

TIME: 14:53:00.03405

Date and Time Stamps

The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the event trigger. Refer to the

COMMANDS

Ø

CLEAR RECORDS

menu for clearing event records.

6

GE Multilin


6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY


ÖØ

RECORDS

ÖØ

OSCILLOGRAPHY

OSCILLOGRAPHY

FORCE TRIGGER?

No

MESSAGE

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:

0

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

AVAILABLE RECORDS:

0

CYCLES PER RECORD:

0.0

LAST CLEARED DATE:

2000/07/14 15:40:16

Range: No, Yes

This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The

CYCLES PER RECORD

value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillog-

raphy section of chapter 5 for additional details.

A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting “Yes” to the

FORCE TRIGGER?

command. Refer to the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.

6.4.4 DATA LOGGER


ÖØ

RECORDS

ÖØ

DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:

2000/01/14 13:45:51

MESSAGE

NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:

2000/01/14 15:21:19

The

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME

represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log gets full, at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The

NEWEST SAMPLE TIME

represents the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then both values are static.

Refer to the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

menu for clearing data logger records.

6.4.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS


Ö

RECORDS

ÖØ

PMU RECORDS

PMU

RECORDS

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:

0

MESSAGE

PMU 1

RECORDING


See below.

The number of triggers applicable to the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated by the

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS

value.

The status of the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated as follows:


GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS


Ö

RECORDS

ÖØ

PMU RECORDS

Ö

PMU 1 RECORDING

PMU 1

RECORDING

PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER:

Yes

Range: No, Yes


MESSAGE

PUM 1 AVAILABLE

RECORDS: 0

Range: 0 to 6553.5 in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

PUM 1 SECONDS

PER RECORD: 0.0

Range: date and time in format shown

MESSAGE

PUM 1 LAST CLEARED:

2005/07/14 015:40:16

6.4.6 BREAKER MAINTENANCE


ÖØ

RECORDS

ÖØ

MAINTENANCE

Ö

BREAKER 1(2)

BREAKER 1

BKR 1 ARCING AMP

φA:

0.00 kA2-cyc

MESSAGE

MESSAGE


φB:

0.00 kA2-cyc


φC:

0.00 kA2-cyc

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

BKR 1 OPERATING TIME ms


MESSAGE

MESSAGE


BKR 1 OPERATING

TIME: 0 ms

There is an identical menu for each of the breakers. The


values are in units of kA

2

-cycles. Refer to the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

menu for clearing breaker arcing current records. The

BREAKER OPERATING TIME

is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open.

6

GE Multilin


6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION


ÖØ

PRODUCT INFO

Ö



ORDER CODE LINE 1:

L30-E00-HCH-F8F-H6A


MESSAGE

Range: standard GE multilin order code format; example order code shown

Range: standard GE multilin order code format



MESSAGE



MESSAGE

SERIAL NUMBER:

Range: standard GE multilin serial number format

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

000000000000

MANUFACTURING DATE:

0

PMU FEATURE ACTIVE:

No

CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG

ACTIVE: No

OPERATING TIME:

0:00:00

LAST SETTING CHANGE:

1970/01/01 23:11:19

Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format

Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

Range: Yes, No

Range: Yes, No

Range: opearting time in HH:MM:SS

Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here.

6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS


ÖØ

PRODUCT INFO

ÖØ



L30 Relay

REVISION: 5.9x

MESSAGE

MODIFICATION FILE

NUMBER: 0

MESSAGE

BOOT PROGRAM

REVISION: 3.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FRONT PANEL PROGRAM

REVISION: 0.08

COMPILE DATE:

2004/09/15 04:55:16

BOOT DATE:

2004/09/15 16:41:32

Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the application firmware.

Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)

Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.

Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the boot program firmware.

Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of faceplate program firmware.

Range: Any valid date and time.

Date and time when product firmware was built.

Range: Any valid date and time.

Date and time when the boot program was built.

The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been installed.


GE Multilin

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS

7.1 COMMANDS

7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU

COMMANDS

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Ø

COMMANDS

VIRTUAL INPUTS

COMMANDS

CLEAR RECORDS

COMMANDS


COMMANDS

RELAY MAINTENANCE

COMMANDS

PMU ONE-SHOT

The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry:

COMMAND

EXECUTED


PATH: COMMANDS

Ö

VIRTUAL INPUTS

COMMANDS

VIRTUAL INPUTS

MESSAGE

Virt Ip 1

Off

Virt Ip 2

Off

↓

Virt Ip 64

Off

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).

7

GE Multilin


7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7

7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS

PATH: COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

COMMANDS

CLEAR RECORDS

CLEAR FAULT REPORTS?

No

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS?

No

CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?

No

CLEAR DATA LOGGER?

No

CLEAR BREAKER 1

ARCING AMPS? No

CLEAR BREAKER 2

ARCING AMPS? No

CLEAR CHANNEL TEST

RECORDS? No

CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED

ACCESS? No

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR PMU 1 RECORDS?

No

CLEAR PMU 1 CONFIG

CHANGE COUNTER? No

CLEAR ALL RELAY

RECORDS? No

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to “No”.

7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME

PATH: COMMANDS

ÖØ


COMMANDS


SET DATE AND TIME:

2000/01/14 13:47:03

(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the ENTER key is clicked.


GE Multilin

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS

7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE

PATH: COMMANDS

ÖØ


COMMANDS


PERFORM LAMPTEST?

No

UPDATE ORDER CODE?

No

SERVICE COMMAND:

0

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: 0, 101

This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are activated by changing a command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting will then automatically revert to “No”. The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key.

The

PERFORM LAMPTEST

command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The

UPDATE

ORDER CODE

command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.

UPDATING...

PLEASE WAIT

There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the

ORDER

CODE NOT UPDATED

message will be shown.

The

SERVICE COMMAND

is used to perform specific L30 service actions. Presently, there is only one service action available.

Code “101” is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code other than “101” is entered, the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken. Various self-checking diagnostics are performed in the background while the L30 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile memory from time to time based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the L30 is shipped from the factory, the user may want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain circumstances. For example, it may be desirable to clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic information is cleared, all selfchecking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch.

7.1.6 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT

PATH: COMMANDS

ÖØ

PMU ONE-SHOT

COMMANDS

PMU ONE-SHOT

PMU ONE-SHOT


PMU ONE-SHOT

SEQUENCE NUMBER: 0

PMU ONE-SHOT TIME:

2005/06/14 7:58:35


Range: 0 to nominal frequency – 1 in steps of 1

Range: 24h time format

This feature allows pre-scheduling a PMU measurement at a specific point in time. This functionality can be used to test for accuracy of the PMU, and for manual collection of synchronized measurements through the system, as explained below.

When enabled, the function continuously compares the present time with the pre-set

PMU ONE-SHOT TIME

. When the two times match, the function compares the present sequence number of the measured synchrophasors with the pre-set

PMU

ONE-SHOT SEQUENCE NUMBER

. When the two numbers match, the function freezes the synchrophasor actual values and the corresponding protocol data items for 30 seconds. This allows manual read-out of the synchrophasor values for the preset time and pre-set sequence number (via the faceplate display, supported communication protocols such as Modbus or

DNP, and the EnerVista UR Setup software).

When freezing the actual values the function also asserts a

PMU ONE-SHOT OP

FlexLogic™ operand. This operand may be configured to drive an output contact and trigger an external measuring device such as a digital scope with the intent to verify the accuracy of the PMU under test.

With reference to the figure below, the PMU one-shot function (when enabled) controls three FlexLogic™ operands:

7

GE Multilin


7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

• The

PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED

operand indicates that the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time is at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time.

• The

PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING

operand indicates that the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is before the scheduled one-shot time.

• The

PMU ONE-SHOT OP

operand indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards.

When the function is disabled, all three operands are de-asserted. The one-shot function applies to all logical PMUs of a given L30 relay.

7

Figure 7–1: PMU ONE-SHOT FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS

TESTING ACCURACY OF THE PMU:

The one-shot feature can be used to test accuracy of the synchrophasor measurement. GPS-synchronized tests sets perform a similar function to PMUs: instead of measuring the phasor from physical signals with respect to the externally provided time reference, they produce the physical signals with respect to the externally provided time reference, given the desired phasor values. Therefore the GPS-synchronized test sets cannot be automatically assumed more accurate then the PMUs under test. This calls for a method to verify both the measuring device (PMU) and the source of signal (test set).

With reference to the figure below, the one-shot feature could be configured to trigger a high-accuracy scope to capture both the time reference signal (rising edge of the 1 pps signal of the IRIG-B time reference), and the measured waveform.

The high-accuracy high-sampling rate record of the two signals captured by the scope can be processed using digital tools to verify the magnitude and phase angle with respect to the time reference signal. As both the time reference and the measured signals are raw inputs to the PMU under test, their independently captured record, processed using third-party software, is a good reference point for accuracy calculations. Such a record proves useful when discussing the test results, and should be retained as a part of the testing documentation.

Note that the PMU under such test does not have to be connected to a real GPS receiver as the accuracy is measured with respect to the timing reference provided to the PMU and not to the absolute UTC time. Therefore a simple IRIG-B generator could be used instead. Also, the test set does not have to support GPS synchronization. Any stable signal source can


GE Multilin

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS

be used. If both the PMU under test and the test set use the timing reference, they should be driven from the same IRIG-B signal: either the same GPS receiver or IRIG-B generator. Otherwise, the setpoints of the test set and the PMU measurements should not be compared as they are referenced to different time scales.

Figure 7–2: USING THE PMU ONE-SHOT FEATURE TO TEST SYNCHROPHASOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY

COLLECTING SYNCHRONIZED MEASUREMENTS AD HOC:

The one-shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network. Two or more PMU can be pre-scheduled to freeze their measurements at the same time. When frozen the measurements could be collected using EnerVista UR Setup or a protocol client.

7

GE Multilin


7.2 TARGETS

7.2TARGETS


7.2.1 TARGETS MENU

TARGETS

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Ø

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1:

LATCHED

DIGITAL ELEMENT 48:

LATCHED

↓

↓

Displayed only if targets for this element are active.

Example shown.

Displayed only if targets for this element are active.

Example shown.

The status of any active targets will be displayed in the targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read

NO

ACTIVE TARGETS

:

7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES

7

When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message.

The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.

Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

PRIORITY ACTIVE STATUS

1

2

3

OP

PKP

LATCHED

DESCRIPTION

element operated and still picked up element picked up and timed out element had operated but has dropped out

If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example


indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.

7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS a) DESCRIPTION

The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the

RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.

Major self-test errors also result in the following:

• The critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized.

• All other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation.

• The faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off.

• A

RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

event is recorded.


GE Multilin

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS b) MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

The major self-test errors are listed and described below.

7.2 TARGETS

MODULE FAILURE___:

Contact Factory (xxx)

• Latched target message: Yes.

• Description of problem: Module hardware failure detected.

• How often the test is performed: Module dependent.

• What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The “xxx” text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L).

INCOMPATIBLE H/W:

Contact Factory (xxx)


• Description of problem: One or more installed hardware modules is not compatible with the L30 order code.

• How often the test is performed: Module dependent.

• What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The “xxx” text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L).

EQUIPMENT MISMATCH:

with 2nd line detail

• Latched target message: No.

• Description of problem: The configuration of modules does not match the order code stored in the L30.

• How often the test is performed: On power up. Afterwards, the backplane is checked for missing cards every five seconds.

• What to do: Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power. If the problem persists, contact the factory.

FLEXLOGIC ERROR:

with 2nd line detail


• Description of problem: A FlexLogic™ equation is incorrect.

• How often the test is performed: The test is event driven, performed whenever FlexLogic™ equations are modified

.

• What to do: Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors.

7

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED:

Check Settings


• Description of problem: The

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

INSTALLATION

Ö

RELAY SETTINGS

setting indicates the L30 is not programmed.

• How often the test is performed: On power up and whenever the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

INSTALLATION

Ö

RELAY SETTINGS

setting is altered

.

• What to do: Program all settings and then set

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

INSTALLATION

Ö

RELAY SETTINGS

to “Programmed”.

GE Multilin


7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS c) MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-programmable self-tests section in the

Settings chapter for additional details.

IEC 61850 DATA SET:

LLN0 GOOSE# Error


• Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is not supported by the L30 order code.

• How often the test is performed: On power up

.

• What to do: Verify that all the items in the GOOSE data set are supported by the L30. The EnerVista UR Setup software will list the valid items. An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the L30.

IEC 61850 DATA SET:

LLN0 BR# Error


• Description of problem: A data item in a configurable report data set is not supported by the L30 order code.

• How often the test is performed: On power up

.

• What to do: Verify that all the items in the configurable report data set are supported by the L30. The EnerVista UR

Setup software will list the valid items. An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the L30.

MAINTENANCE ALERT:

Replace Battery


• Description of problem: The battery is not functioning.

• How often the test is performed: The battery is monitored every five seconds. The error message is displayed after 60 seconds if the problem persists

.

• What to do: Replace the battery located in the power supply module (1H or 1L).

7


Direct I/O Ring Break


• Description of problem: Direct input and output settings are configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring.

• How often the test is performed: Every second

.

• What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.


ENET MODULE OFFLINE


• Description of problem: The L30 has failed to detect the Ethernet switch.

• How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds. An error is issued after five consecutive failures

.

• What to do: Check the L30 device and switch IP configuration settings. Check for incorrect UR port (port 7) settings on the Ethernet switch. Check the power to the switch.


ENET PORT # OFFLINE


GE Multilin



• Description of problem: The Ethernet connection has failed for the specified port.

• How often the test is performed: Every five seconds.

• What to do: Check the Ethernet port connection on the switch.


**Bad IRIG-B Signal**


• Description of problem: A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected.

• How often the test is performed: Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal is received.

• What to do: Ensure the following:

– The IRIG-B cable is properly connected.

– Proper cable functionality (that is, check for physical damage or perform a continuity test).

– The IRIG-B receiver is functioning.

– Check the input signal level (it may be less than specification).

If none of these apply, then contact the factory.

7.2 TARGETS


Port ## Failure


• Description of problem: An Ethernet connection has failed.

• How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds.

• What to do: Check Ethernet connections. Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port.


SNTP Failure


• Description of problem: The SNTP server is not responding.

• How often the test is performed: Every 10 to 60 seconds.

• What to do: Check SNTP configuration and network connections.


4L Discrepancy


• Description of problem: A discrepancy has been detected between the actual and desired state of a latching contact output of an installed type “4L” module.

• How often the test is performed: Upon initiation of a contact output state change.

• What to do: Verify the state of the output contact and contact the factory if the problem persists.


GGIO Ind xxx oscill


• Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is oscillating.

7

GE Multilin


7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

• How often the test is performed: Upon scanning of each configurable GOOSE data set.

• What to do: The “xxx” text denotes the data item that has been detected as oscillating. Evaluate all logic pertaining to this item.

DIRECT I/O FAILURE:

COMM Path Incomplete


• Description of problem: A direct device is configured but not connected.

• How often the test is performed: Every second.

• What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.

REMOTE DEVICE FAIL:

COMM Path Incomplete


• Description of problem: One or more GOOSE devices are not responding.

• How often the test is performed: Event driven. The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving. This can be from 1 to 60 seconds, depending on GOOSE packets.

• What to do: Check GOOSE setup.

TEMP MONITOR:

OVER TEMPERATURE


• Description of problem: The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (+80°C).

• How often the test is performed: Every hour.

• What to do: Remove the L30 from service and install in a location that meets operating temperature standards.

7

UNEXPECTED RESTART:

Press “RESET” key


• Description of problem: Abnormal restart from modules being removed or inserted while the L30 is powered-up, when there is an abnormal DC supply, or as a result of internal relay failure.

• How often the test is performed: Event driven.

• What to do: Contact the factory.


GE Multilin

8 SECURITY 8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

8 SECURITY 8.1PASSWORD SECURITY 8.1.1 OVERVIEW

Two levels of password security are provided via the

ACCESS LEVEL

setting: command and setting. The factory service level is not available and intended for factory use only.

The following operations are under command password supervision:

• Operating the breakers via faceplate keypad.

• Changing the state of virtual inputs.

• Clearing the event records.

• Clearing the oscillography records.

• Clearing fault reports.

• Changing the date and time.

• Clearing the breaker arcing current.

• Clearing the data logger.

• Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.

The following operations are under setting password supervision:

• Changing any setting.

• Test mode operation.

The command and setting passwords are defaulted to “0” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to “0”, the password security feature is disabled.


Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.


The

PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS

settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.

The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.

The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic™ operands.

• ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.

• ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.

• ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.

• ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.

• ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.

• ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.

• ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.

• ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.

The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic™ operands and events are updated every five seconds.

A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands shown above.

NOTE

8

GE Multilin


8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY 8 SECURITY

8.1.2 PASSWORD SECURITY MENU

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL:

Restricted

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

CHANGE LOCAL

PASSWORDS

ACCESS

SUPERVISION

DUAL PERMISSION

SECURITY ACCESS

MESSAGE

PASSWORD ACCESS


Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

Factory Service (for factory use only)

See page 8–2.

See page 8–3.

See page 8–4.


8

8.1.3 LOCAL PASSWORDS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ


CHANGE LOCAL

PASSWORDS

CHANGE COMMAND

PASSWORD: No

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

CHANGE SETTING

PASSWORD: No

MESSAGE


PASSWORD: ----------

Range: 0 to 9999999999


MESSAGE


PASSWORD: ----------

Range: 0 to 9999999999


Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.

When a


or


setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is invoked:

1.

ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.

2.

VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.

3.

NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.

To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the

ACCESS LEVEL

setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according to the access level timeout setting values.

If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding


.

If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.

NOTE


GE Multilin


8.1.4 REMOTE PASSWORDS

The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the

Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.

Figure 8–1: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to “0”. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password.

1.

Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.

2.

Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.

3.

Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.

4.

If the original password is not “0”, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send

Password to Device button.

5.

The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the


item.

If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password value.

8.1.5 ACCESS SUPERVISION

8

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ


ACCESS

SUPERVISION

ACCESS LEVEL

TIMEOUTS


MESSAGE

INVALID ATTEMPTS

BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3


MESSAGE

PASSWORD LOCKOUT

DURATION: 5 min

GE Multilin


8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY 8 SECURITY

8

The following access supervision settings are available.

• INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the

LOCAL ACCESS DENIED

or


FlexLogic™ operands are set to “On”. These operands are returned to the “Off” state upon expiration of the lockout.

• PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the L30 will lockout password access after the number of invalid password entries specified by the

INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT

setting has occurred.

The L30 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

FlexLogic™ operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.

The

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

operand is reset with the

COMMANDS

ÖØ

CLEAR RECORDS

ÖØ

RESET UNAUTHORIZED

ALARMS

command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The operand does not generate events or targets.

The access level timeout settings are shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ


Ö

ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS

ACCESS LEVEL

TIMEOUTS

COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 5 min



MESSAGE

SETTING LEVEL ACCESS

TIMEOUT: 30 min

These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.

• COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level.

• SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level.

8.1.6 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

PATH: SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

SECURITY

ÖØ

DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

DUAL PERMISSION

SECURITY ACCESS

LOCAL SETTING AUTH:

On

Range: selected FlexLogic™ operands (see below)


MESSAGE

REMOTE SETTING AUTH:

On


MESSAGE

ACCESS AUTH

TIMEOUT: 30 min.

The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.

The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.

• LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.

Valid values for the FlexLogic™ operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.

If this setting is “On“, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this setting is any contact input on FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the local setting password to gain setting access.

If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain setting access, then the

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

message is displayed on the front panel.

• REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.


GE Multilin



• ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable when the

LOCAL SETTING AUTH

setting is programmed to any operand except “On”. The state of the FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the

ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT

setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.

The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product

Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.

The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.


The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off”. The state of the

FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.

8

GE Multilin


8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY 8 SECURITY

8.2SETTINGS SECURITY 8.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES

Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.

In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on the specific settings.

The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.

The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes.

The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the L30 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.

NOTE a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files.

1.

Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.

The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing mode.

Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.

1.

Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.

8

The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length.

3.


The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.

b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in

EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic™ equation editor settings are locked.

1.


2.

Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode.

3.

Enter the template password then click OK.

4.

Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.


GE Multilin

8 SECURITY 8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY

By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.

Figure 8–2: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

5.

Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.

The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.

Figure 8–3: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

6.

Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.

7.

Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.

c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.

The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template.

1.

Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.

8

GE Multilin


8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY 8 SECURITY

The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.

3.


The settings file template is now secured with password protection.

When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It does not need to be added after the template is created.

NOTE d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:

• Display only those settings available for editing.

• Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.

Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.

1.


2.

Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option.

3.


Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

8




command.

The template specifies that only the settings be available.

Pickup and Curve

842858A1.CDR

Figure 8–4: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND


GE Multilin


Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.

Typical settings tree view without template applied.

Typical settings tree view with template applied via the


command.

842860A1.CDR

Figure 8–5: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND

Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.

1.


2.

Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option.

3.


Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.



Template Mode > View All Settings

command.

The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.

842859A1.CDR

Figure 8–6: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new settings template.

1.

Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.

2.

Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option.

3.

Enter the template password and click OK to continue.

8

GE Multilin



4.

Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.

8 SECURITY

The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.

8.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS

The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic™ equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical FlexLogic™ applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within


Secured FlexLogic™ equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.

a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION ENTRIES

The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic™ equation.

1.

Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature.

2.

Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.

By default, all FlexLogic™ entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.

3.

Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them.

The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.

8

Figure 8–7: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE

4.

Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template.

5.

Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.

6.

Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic™ equation.


GE Multilin


Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic™ entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic™ entries in the above procedure is shown below.

Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied.

Typical the

FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via


command.

842861A1.CDR

Figure 8–8: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES

The FlexLogic™ entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.

Figure 8–9: SECURED FLEXLOGIC™ IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER

A settings file and associated FlexLogic™ equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired

FlexLogic™ entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number.

1.

Select the settings file in the offline window.

2.

Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.

8

GE Multilin



The following window is displayed.

8 SECURITY

8

Figure 8–10: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

3.

Enter the serial number of the L30 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.

The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic™ equations are now locked to the L30 device specified by the serial number.

8.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY

A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a L30 device have been changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a L30 device, the date, time, and serial number of the L30 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the L30 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.

The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the L30 device or obtained from the L30 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings file.

1

SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE

The serial number and last setting change date are stored in the UR-series device.

The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer date are added to the settings file when settings files are transferred to the device.

Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the

UR-series device to determine if security has been compromised.

2

SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE

SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND

ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.

Figure 8–11: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.


842864A1.CDR

GE Multilin


1.

The transfer date of a setting file written to a L30 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.

2.

Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.

a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an L30 device.

The L30 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in settings file device definition

842863A1.CDR

Figure 8–12: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in settings report

Figure 8–13: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

842862A1.CDR

8

GE Multilin


8

8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY 8 SECURITY b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The L30 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual

Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in online device actual values page

842865A1.CDR

Figure 8–14: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

PRODUCT INFO

Ö


ÖØ

SERIAL NUMBER

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

PRODUCT INFO

Ö


ÖØ

LAST SETTING CHANGE c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature

• If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is removed from the settings file.

• If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.

• If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed from the settings file.

• If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings file.


GE Multilin

8 SECURITY 8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

8.3ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8.3.1 OVERVIEW

The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows a security administrator to easily manage the security privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of URPlus-series devices by multiple personnel within a substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The

EnerVista security management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.

8.3.2 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The EnerVista security management system is disabled by default. This allows access to the device immediately after installation. When security is disabled, all users are granted administrator access.

1.

Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window.

2.

Check the Enable Security box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.

Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. It will now be necessary to enter a username and password upon starting the software.

8.3.3 ADDING A NEW USER

The following pre-requisites are required to add new users to the EnerVista security management system.

• The user adding the new user must have administrator rights.

• The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.

The following procedure describes how to add new users.

1.


2.

Enter a username in the User field. The username must be between 4 and 20 characters in length.

8

GE Multilin


8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3.

Select the user access rights by checking one or more of the fields shown.

8 SECURITY

The access rights are described in the following table

Table 8–1: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY

FIELD

Delete Entry

Actual Values

Settings

Commands

Event Recorder

FlexLogic

Update Info

Admin

DESCRIPTION

Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.

Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.

Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.

Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.

Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.

Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic™ values.

Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update

Info field is checked.

When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.

4.

Click OK to add the new user to the security management system.

8.3.4 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES

8

The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system.

• The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights.

• The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.

The following procedure describes how to modify user privileges.

1.


2.

Locate the username in the User field.


GE Multilin

8 SECURITY 8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3.

Modify the user access rights by checking or clearing one or more of the fields shown.

The access rights are described in the following table

Table 8–2: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY

FIELD

Delete Entry

Actual Values

Settings

Commands

Event Recorder

FlexLogic

Update Info

Admin

DESCRIPTION

Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.

Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.

Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.

Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.

Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.

Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic™ values.

Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update

Info field is checked.

When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.

4.

Click OK to save the changes to user to the security management system.

8

GE Multilin


8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8 SECURITY

8


GE Multilin

9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1 OVERVIEW

9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1OVERVIEW

9.1.1 L30 DESIGN

All differential techniques rely on the fact that under normal conditions, the sum of the currents entering each phase of a transmission line from all connected terminals is equal to the charging current for that phase. Beyond the fundamental differential principle, the three most important technical considerations are; data consolidation, restraint characteristic, and sampling synchronization. The L30 uses new and unique concepts in these areas.

Data consolidation refers to the extraction of appropriate parameters to be transmitted from raw samples of transmission line phase currents. By employing data consolidation, a balance is achieved between transient response and bandwidth requirements. Consolidation is possible along two dimensions: time and phases. Time consolidation consists of combining a time sequence of samples to reduce the required bandwidth. Phase consolidation consists of combining information from three phases and neutral. Although phase consolidation is possible, it is generally not employed in digital schemes, because it is desired to detect which phase is faulted. The L30 relay transmits data for all three phases.

Time consolidation reduces communications bandwidth requirements. Time consolidation also improves security by eliminating the possibility of falsely interpreting a single corrupted data sample as a fault.

The L30 relay system uses a new consolidation technique called “phaselets”. Phaselets are partial sums of the terms involved in a complete phasor computation. The use of phaselets in the L30 design improves the transient response performance without increasing the bandwidth requirements.

Phaselets themselves are not the same as phasors, but they can be combined into phasors over any time window that is aligned with an integral number of phaselets (see the Phaselet Computation section in this chapter for details). The number of phaselets that must be transmitted per cycle per phase is the number of samples per cycle divided by the number of samples per phaselet. The L30 design uses 64 samples per cycle and 32 samples per phaselet, leading to a phaselet communication bandwidth requirement of 2 phaselets per cycle. Two phaselets per cycle fits comfortably within a communications bandwidth of 64 Kbaud, and can be used to detect faults within a half cycle plus channel delay.

The second major technical consideration is the restraint characteristic, which is the decision boundary between situations that are declared to be a fault and those that are not. The L30 uses an innovative adaptive decision process based on an on-line computation of the sources of measurement error. In this adaptive approach, the restraint region is an ellipse with variable major axis, minor axis, and orientation. Parameters of the ellipse vary with time to make best use of the accuracy of current measurements.

The third major element of L30 design is sampling synchronization. In order for a differential scheme to work, the data being compared must be taken at the same time. This creates a challenge when data is taken at remote locations.

The GE approach to clock synchronization relies upon distributed synchronization. Distributed synchronization is accomplished by synchronizing the clocks to each other rather than to a master clock. Clocks are phase synchronized to each other and frequency synchronized to the power system frequency. Each relay compares the phase of its clock to the phase of the other clocks and compares the frequency of its clock to the power system frequency and makes appropriate adjustments. As long as there are enough channels operating to provide protection, the clocks will be synchronized.

9.1.2 L30 ARCHITECTURE

The L30 system uses a peer to peer architecture in which the relays at every terminal are identical. Each relay computes differential current and clocks are synchronized to each other in a distributed fashion. The peer to peer architecture is based on two main concepts that reduce the dependence of the system on the communication channels: replication of protection and distributed synchronization.

Replication of protection means that each relay is designed to be able to provide protection for the entire system, and does so whenever it has enough information. Thus a relay provides protection whenever it is able to communicate directly with all other relays. For a multi-terminal system, the degree of replication is determined by the extent of communication interconnection. If there is a channel between every pair of relays, every relay provides protection. If channels are not provided between every pair of relays, only those relays that are connected to all other relays provide protection.

Each L30 relay measures three phase currents 64 times per cycle. Synchronization in sampling is maintained throughout the system via the distributed synchronization technique.

The next step is the removal of any decaying offset from each phase current measurement. This is done using a digital simulation of the so-called “mimic circuit” (based on the differential equation of the inductive circuit that generates the offset).

Next, phaselets are computed by each L30 for each phase from the outputs of the mimic calculation, and transmitted to the

9

GE Multilin


9.1 OVERVIEW 9 THEORY OF OPERATION

other relay terminals. Also, the sum of the squares of the raw data samples is computed for each phase, and transmitted with the phaselets.

At the receiving relay, the received phaselets are combined into phasors. Also, ground current is reconstructed from phase information. An elliptical restraint region is computed by combining sources of measurement error. In addition to the restraint region, a separate disturbance detector is used to enhance security.

The possibility of a fault is indicated by the detection of a disturbance as well as the sum of the current phasors falling outside of the elliptical restraint region. The statistical distance from the phasor to the restraint region is an indication of the severity of the fault. To provide speed of response that is commensurate with fault severity, the distance is filtered. For mild faults, filtering improves measurement precision at the expense of a slight delay, on the order of one cycle. Severe faults are detected within a single phaselet. Whenever the sum of phasors falls within the elliptical restraint region, the system assumes there is no fault, and uses whatever information is available for fine adjustment of the clocks.

9.1.3 REMOVAL OF DECAYING OFFSET

The inductive behavior of power system transmission lines gives rise to decaying exponential offsets during transient conditions, which could lead to errors and interfere with the determination of how well measured current fits a sinewave.

The current signals are pre-filtered using an improved digital MIMIC filter. The filter removes effectively the DC component(s) guaranteeing transient overshoot below 2% regardless of the initial magnitude and time constant of the dc component(s). The filter has significantly better filtering properties for higher frequencies as compared with a classical MIMIC filter.

This was possible without introducing any significant phase delay thanks to the high sampling rate used by the relay. The output of the MIMIC calculation is the input for the phaselet computation. The MIMIC computation is applied to the data samples for each phase at each terminal. The equation shown is for one phase at one terminal.

9.1.4 PHASELET COMPUTATION

9

Phaselets are partial sums in the computation for fitting a sine function to measured samples. Each slave computes phaselets for each phase current and transmits phaselet information to the master for conversion into phasors. Phaselets enable the efficient computation of phasors over sample windows that are not restricted to an integer multiple of a half cycle at the power system frequency. Determining the fundamental power system frequency component of current data samples by minimizing the sum of the squares of the errors gives rise to the first frequency component of the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). In the case of a data window that is a multiple of a half cycle, the computation is simply sine and cosine weighted sums of the data samples. In the case of a window that is not a multiple of a half-cycle, there is an additional correction that results from the sine and cosine functions not being orthogonal over such a window. However, the computation can be expressed as a two by two matrix multiplication of the sine and cosine weighted sums.

Phaselets and sum of squares are computed for each phase at each terminal as follows. For the real part, we have:

I

=

N

∑

–

p

=

0

1

i

(

–

p

)

⋅ cos

⎛

⎝

2

(

N

)

⎞

⎠

(EQ 9.1)

For the imaginary part, we have:

I

= –

N

∑

–

p

= 0

1

i

(

–

p

)

⋅ sin

⎛

⎝

2

(

N

)

⎞

⎠

(EQ 9.2)

where: k is the present phaselet index,

N is the number of samples per cycle, and

p is the present sample index

The computation of phaselets and sum of squares is basically a consolidation process. The phaselet sums are converted into stationary phasors by multiplying by a precomputed matrix. Phaselets and partial sums of squares are computed and time stamped at each relay and communicated to the remote relay terminals, where they are added and the matrix multiplication is performed. Since the sampling clocks are synchronized, the time stamp is simply a sequence number.


GE Multilin


9.1.5 DISTURBANCE DETECTION

A disturbance detection algorithm is used to enhance security and to improve transient response. Conditions to detect a disturbance include the magnitude of zero-sequence current, the magnitude of negative-sequence current, and changes in positive, negative, or zero-sequence current. Normally, differential protection is performed using a full-cycle Fourier transform. Continuous use of a full-cycle Fourier means that some pre-fault data is also used for computation – this may lead to a slowdown in the operation of the differential function. To improve operating time, the window is resized to the half-cycle

Fourier once a disturbance is detected, thus removing pre-fault data.

9.1.6 FAULT DETECTION

Normally, the sum of the current phasors from all terminals is zero for each phase at every terminal. A fault is detected for a phase when the sum of the current phasors from each terminal for that phase falls outside of a dynamic elliptical restraint boundary for that phase. The severity of the fault is computed as follows for each phase.

The differential current is calculated as a sum of local and remote currents. The real part is expressed as:

I

DIFF_RE_A

=

I

LOC_PHASOR_RE_A

+

I

REM1_PHASOR_RE_A

+

I

REM2_PHASOR_RE_A

The imaginary part is expressed as:

(EQ 9.3)

I

DIFF_IM_A

=

I

LOC_PHASOR_IM_A

+

I

REM1_PHASOR_IM_A

+

I

REM2_PHASOR_IM_A

The differential current is squared for the severity equation:

(EQ 9.4)

(

I

DIFF_A

)

2

=

(

I

DIFF_RE_A

)

2

+

(

I

DIFF_IM_A

)

2

(EQ 9.5)

The restraint current is composed from two distinctive terms: traditional and adaptive. Each relay calculates local portion of the traditional and restraint current to be used locally and sent to remote peers for use with differential calculations. If more than one CT are connected to the relay (breaker-and-the half applications), then a maximum of all (up to 4) currents is chosen to be processed for traditional restraint:

The current chosen is expressed as:

(

I

LOC_TRAD_A

)

2

=

( (

1_MAG_A

)

2

, (

I

2_MAG_A

)

2

, (

I

3_MAG_A

)

2

, (

I

4_MAG_A

)

2

, (

I

q_MAG_A

)

2

)

(EQ 9.6)

This current is then processed with the slope (S

1

and S

2

) and breakpoint (BP) settings to form a traditional part of the restraint term for the local current as follows. For two-terminal systems, we have:

(

LOC_TRAD_A

)

2

<

BP

2

(

LOC_REST_TRAD_A

)

2

=

LOC_REST_TRAD_A

)

2

=

(

(

1

⋅

I

LOC_TRAD_A

)

2

2

⋅

I

LOC_TRAD_A

)

2

–

(

S

2

⋅

BP

)

2

For three-terminal systems we have

1

⋅

BP

)

2

(EQ 9.7)

LOC_TRAD_A

)

2

<

BP

2

LOC_REST_TRAD_A

)

2

=

--- S

3

1

⋅

I

LOC_TRAD_A

)

2

LOC_REST_TRAD_A

)

2

=

4

3

( (

2

⋅

I

LOC_TRAD_A

)

2

–

(

S

2

⋅

BP

)

2

+

3

1

⋅

BP

)

The final restraint current sent to peers and used locally in differential calculations is as follows:

2

(EQ 9.8)

I

LOC_RESTRAINT_A

=

(

I

LOC_REST_TRAD_A

)

2

+ MULT

A

⋅ (

I

LOC_ADA_A

)

2

(EQ 9.9)

where: MULT

A

is a multiplier that increases restraint if CT saturation is detected (see CT Saturation Detection for details);

I

LOC_ADA_A

is an adaptive restraint term (see Online Estimate Of Measurement Error for details)

The squared restraining current is calculated as a sum of squared local and all remote restraints:

9

GE Multilin



(

I

REST_A

)

2

=

(

I

LOC_PHASOR_RESTRAINT_A

)

2

+

(

I

REM1_PHASOR_RESTRAINT_A

)

2

+

(

I

REM2_PHASOR_RESTRAINT_A

)

2

The fault severity for each phase is determined by following equation:

(EQ 9.10)

S

A

=

(

I

DIFF_A

)

2

–

(

2P

2

+

(

I

REST_A

)

2

)

(EQ 9.11)

where P is the pickup setting.

This equation is based on the adaptive strategy and yields an elliptical restraint characteristic. The elliptical area is the restraint region. When the adaptive portion of the restraint current is small, the restraint region shrinks. When the adaptive portion of the restraint current increases, the restraint region grows to reflect the uncertainty of the measurement. The computed severity increases with the probability that the sum of the measured currents indicates a fault. With the exception of

“Restraint”, all quantities are defined in previous sections. “Adaptive Restraint” is a restraint multiplier, analogous to the slope setting of traditional differential approaches, for adjusting the sensitivity of the relay.

Raising the restraint multiplier corresponds to demanding a greater confidence interval, and has the effect of decreasing sensitivity while lowering it is equivalent to relaxing the confidence interval and increases sensitivity. Thus, the restraint multiplier is an application adjustment that is used to achieve the desired balance between sensitivity and security. The computed severity is zero when the operate phasor is on the elliptical boundary, is negative inside the boundary, and positive outside the boundary. Outside of the restraint boundary, the computed severity grows as the square of the fault current.

The restraint area grows as the square of the error in the measurements.

9.1.7 GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT

9

The line ground differential function allows sensitive ground protection for single-line to-ground faults, allowing the phase differential element to be set higher (above load) to provide protection for multi-phase faults. The L30 ground differential function calculates ground differential current from all terminal phase currents. The maximum phase current is used for the restraint. The L30 is applied in dual-breaker applications to cope with significant through current at remote terminals that may cause CT errors or saturation.

The line ground differential function uses the same CT matched and time-aligned phasors as the phase-segregated current differential function. The operate signal is calculated for both real and imaginary parts as follows:

I

OP_87G_RE

=

I

LOC_PHASOR_RE_A

+

I

+

I

LOC_PHASOR_RE_B

REM1_PHASOR_RE_C

+

I

+

I

LOC_PHASOR_RE_C

REM2_PHASOR_RE_A

+

I

+

I

REM1_PHASOR_RE_A

REM2_PHASOR_RE_B

+

+

I

REM1_PHASOR_RE_B

(EQ 9.12)

I

REM2_PHASOR_RE_C

I

OP_87G_IM

=

I

LOC_PHASOR_IM_A

+

I

+

I

LOC_PHASOR_IM_B

REM1_PHASOR_IM_C

+

I

+

I

LOC_PHASOR_IM_C

REM2_PHASOR_IM_A

+

I

+

I

REM1_PHASOR_IM_A

REM2_PHASOR_IM_B

+

+

I

REM1_PHASOR_IM_B

(EQ 9.13)

I

REM2_PHASOR_IM_C

The terms for the second remote terminal are omitted in two-terminal applications.

The maximum through current is available locally and re-constructed from the received remote restraint based on the maximum remote restraint current shown in the previous section and as indicated below.

For two-terminal applications:

(

REM_REST_A

)

2

<

BP

2

REM_REST_A

)

2

=

(

I

REM_RESTRAINT_A

2S

1

)

2

-----------------------------------------------------

2

REM_REST_A

)

2

=

(

I

BP

)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2S

)

2

2

2

–

×

2

+ BP

2

(EQ 9.14)

For three-terminal applications:


GE Multilin


REM_REST_A

)

2

<

BP

2

(

REM_REST_A

)

2

=

(

I

REM_RESTRAINT_A

)

2

-----------------------------------------------------

2

4

S

3

×

1

REM_REST_A

)

2

=

(

I

REM_RESTRAINT_A

4

3

×

)

S

2

2

4

--- S

3

(

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2

–

1

×

BP

)

2

+ BP

2

The 87G restraining signal is calculated as follows:

(

I

RES_87G

)

2

=

( (

LOC_REST_A

)

2

, (

I

LOC_REST_B

)

2

, (

I

LOC_REST_C

)

2

, (

I

REM1_REST_A

)

2

, (

I

REM1_REST_B

)

2

,

(

I

REM1_REST_C

)

2

, (

I

REM2_REST_A

)

2

, (

I

REM2_REST_B

)

2

, (

I

REM2_REST_C

)

2

)

The terms for the second remote terminal are omitted in two-terminal applications.

The operate signal for the ground differential function,

(

I

OP_87G

)

2

, is then calculated as:

(

I

OP_87G

)

2

=

(

I

OP_87G_RE

)

2

+

(

I

OP_87G_IM

)

2

The restraint signal,

(

I

87G

)

2

,

is calculated as follows for two-terminal applications:

(

I

87G

)

2

=

2S

87G

2

× (

I

RES_87G

)

2

The restraint signal,

(

I

87G

)

2

,

is calculated as follows for three-terminal applications:

(

I

87G

)

2

=

4

3

×

S

87G

2

× (

I

RES_87G

)

2 where

S

87G

is the slope setting for the ground differential function.

The ground differential element picks up if the following condition holds.

(EQ 9.15)

(EQ 9.16)

(EQ 9.17)

(EQ 9.18)

(EQ 9.19)

( (

I

OP_87G

)

2

–

(

2P

87G

2

+

(

I

87G

)

2

) >

0

( (

RES_87G

)

2

< (

3 pu

)

2

)

(EQ 9.20)

where

P

87G

is the pickup setting for the ground differential function.

In other words, when the squared magnitude of the operating signal is greater than the total restraining squared signal, the element operates. For additional security, the function is blocked if the restraining signal is high, indicating the 87LG function is not required to clear high-current faults, allowing for more sensitive settings to be used for the 87LG function.

9.1.8 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION

Synchronization of data sampling clocks is needed in a digital differential protection scheme, because measurements must be made at the same time. Synchronization errors show up as phase angle and transient errors in phasor measurements at the terminals. By phase angle errors, we mean that identical currents produce phasors with different phase angles. By transient errors, we mean that when currents change at the same time, the effect is seen at different times at different measurement points. For best results, samples should be taken simultaneously at all terminals.

In the case of peer to peer architecture, synchronization is accomplished by synchronizing the clocks to each other rather than to a master clock. Each relay compares the phase of its clock to the phase of the other clocks and compares the frequency of its clock to the power system frequency and makes appropriate adjustments. The frequency and phase tracking algorithm keeps the measurements at all relays within a plus or minus 25 microsecond error during normal conditions for a

2 or 3 terminal system. For 4 or more terminals the error may be somewhat higher, depending on the quality of the communications channels. The algorithm is unconditionally stable. In the case of 2 and 3 terminal systems, asymmetric communications channel delay is automatically compensated for. In all cases, an estimate of phase error is computed and used to automatically adapt the restraint region to compensate. Frequency tracking is provided that will accommodate any frequency shift normally encountered in power systems.

9

GE Multilin



9.1.9 FREQUENCY TRACKING AND PHASE LOCKING

Each relay has a digital clock that determines when to take data samples and which is phase synchronized to all other clocks in the system and frequency synchronized to the power system frequency. Phase synchronization drives the relative timing error between clocks to zero, and is needed to control the uncertainty in the phase angle of phasor measurements, which will be held to under 26 microseconds (0.6 degrees). Frequency synchronization to the power system eliminates a source of error in phasor measurements that arises when data samples do not exactly span one cycle.

The block diagram for clock control for a two terminal system is shown in Figure 8–4. Each relay makes a local estimate of the difference between the power system frequency and the clock frequency based on the rotation of phasors. Each relay also makes a local estimate of the time difference between its clock and the other clocks either by exchanging timing information over communications channels or from information that is in the current phasors, depending on whichever one is more accurate at any given time. A loop filter then uses the frequency and phase angle deviation information to make fine adjustments to the clock frequency. Frequency tracking starts if the current at one or more terminals is above 0.125 pu of nominal; otherwise, the nominal frequency is used.

f – f1

RELAY 1

+

f

Compute

Frequency

Deviation

_

f1

System

Frequency

RELAY 2

f

+

f2

_

Compute

Frequency

Deviation

f – f2

+

+

+

Phase Frequency

Loop Filter

ϕ1

Ping-Pong

Phase

Deviation

time stamps

Phase Frequency

Loop Filter

ϕ2

Ping-Pong

Phase

Deviation

+

+

+

9

GPS

Phase

Deviation

time stamps

GPS

Phase

Deviation

θ

GPS

Clock

θ

GPS

Clock

831026A1.CDR

Figure 9–1: BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION IN A TWO-TERMINAL SYSTEM

The L30 provides sensitive digital current differential protection by computing differential current from current phasors. To improve sensitivity, the clocks are controlling current sampling are closely synchronized via the ping-pong algorithm. However, this algorithm assumes the communication channel delay is identical in each direction. If the delays are not the same, the error between current phasors is equal to half of the transmit-receive time difference. If the error is high enough, the relay perceives the “apparent” differential current and misoperates.

For applications where the communication channel is not symmetric (for example, SONET ring), the L30 allows the use of

GPS (Global Positioning System) to compensate for the channel delay asymmetry. This feature requires a GPS receiver to provide a GPS clock signal to the L30 IRIG-B input. With this option there are two clocks as each terminal: a local sampling clock and a local GPS clock. The sampling clock controls data sampling while the GPS clock provides an accurate, absolute time reference used to measure channel asymmetry. The local sampling clocks are synchronized to each other in phase and to the power system in frequency. The local GPS clocks are synchronized to GPS time using the externally provided GPS time signal.

GPS time stamp is included in the transmitted packet along with the sampling clock time stamp. Both sampling clock deviation and channel asymmetry are computed from the four time-stamps. One half of the channel asymmetry is then subtracted from the computed sampling clock deviation. The compensated deviation drives the phase and frequency lock loop


GE Multilin


(PFLL) as shown on the diagram above. If GPS time reference is lost, the channel asymmetry compensation is not enabled, and the relay clock may start to drift and accumulate differential error. In this case, the 87L function has to be blocked. Refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings for samples of how to program the relay.

9.1.10 FREQUENCY DETECTION

Estimation of frequency deviation is done locally at each relay based on rotation of positive sequence current, or on rotation of positive sequence voltage, if it is available. The counter clockwise rotation rate is proportional to the difference between the desired clock frequency and the actual clock frequency. With the peer to peer architecture, there is redundant frequency tracking, so it is not necessary that all terminals perform frequency detection.

Normally each relay will detect frequency deviation, but if there is no current flowing nor voltage measurement available at a particular relay, it will not be able to detect frequency deviation. In that case, the frequency deviation input to the loop filter is set to zero and frequency tracking is still achieved because of phase locking to the other clocks. If frequency detection is lost at all terminals because there is no current flowing then the clocks continue to operate at the frequency present at the time of the loss of frequency detection. Tracking will resume as soon as there is current.

The rotational rate of phasors is equal to the difference between the power system frequency and the ratio of the sampling frequency divided by the number of samples per cycle. The correction is computed once per power system cycle at each relay. For conciseness, we use a phasor notation:

I

I

I

I n

=

(

n

+

⋅ (

n

)

n

=

( )

for phase a from the kth terminal at time step n

n

=

( )

for phase b from the kth terminal at time step n

n

=

( )

for phase c from the kth terminal at time step n

(EQ 9.21)

Each terminal computes positive sequence current:

I

=

3

j2

π 3

+

I

j2

π 3

)

(EQ 9.22)

Each relay computes a quantity derived from the positive sequence current that is indicative of the amount of rotation from one cycle to the next, by computing the product of the positive sequence current times the complex conjugate of the positive sequence current from the previous cycle:

Deviation

k n

=

I

× (

n

–

N

)∗

(EQ 9.23)

The angle of the deviation phasor for each relay is proportional to the frequency deviation at that terminal. Since the clock synchronization method maintains frequency synchronism, the frequency deviation is approximately the same for each relay. The clock deviation frequency is computed from the deviation phasor:

FrequencyDeviation

=

Δ

f f

=

– 1

(

Im Deviation

2

π

) Re Deviation ) )

(EQ 9.24)

Note that a four quadrant arctangent can be computed by taking the imaginary and the real part of the deviation separately for the two arguments of the four quadrant arctangent. Also note that the input to the loop filter is in radian frequency which is two pi times the frequency in cycles per second; that is,

Δ ω

=

2

π ⋅ Δ

f

.

So the radian frequency deviation can be calculated simply as:

Δ ω

=

Δ tan

– 1

( ) )

(EQ 9.25)

9.1.11 PHASE DETECTION

9

There are two separate sources of clock phase information; exchange of time stamps over the communications channels and the current measurements themselves (although voltage measurements can be used to provide frequency information, they cannot be used for phase detection). Current measurements can generally provide the most accurate information, but are not always available and may contain large errors during faults or switching transients. Time stamped messages are

GE Multilin



9

the most reliable source of phase information but suffer from a phase offset due to a difference in the channel delays in each direction between a pair of relays. In some cases, one or both directions may be switched to a different physical path, leading to gross phase error.

The primary source of phase information are CPU time-tagged messages. If GPS compensation is enabled, GPS time stamps are used to compensate for asymmetry. In all cases, frequency deviation information is also used when available.

The phase difference between a pair of clocks is computed by an exchange of time stamps. Each relay exchanges time stamps with all other relays that can be reached.

It is not necessary to exchange stamps with every relay, and the method works even with some of the channels failed. For each relay that a given relay can exchange time stamps with, the clock deviation is computed each time a complete set of time stamps arrives. The net deviation is the total deviation divided by the total number of relays involved in the exchange.

For example, in the case of two terminals, each relay computes a single time deviation from time stamps, and divides the result by two. In the case of three terminals, each relay computes two time deviations and divides the result by three. If a channel is lost, the single deviation that remains is divided by two.

Four time stamps are needed to compute round trip delay time and phase deviation. Three stamps are included in the message in each direction. The fourth time stamp is the time when the message is received. Each time a message is received the oldest two stamps of the four time stamps are saved to become the first two time stamps of the next outgoing message.

The third time stamp of an outgoing message is the time when the message is transmitted. A fixed time shift is allowed between the stamp values and the actual events, provided the shift for outgoing message time stamps is the same for all relays, and the shift incoming message time stamps is also identical.

To reduce bandwidth requirements, time stamps are spread over 3 messages. In the case of systems with 4 messages per cycle, time stamps are sent out on three of the four messages, so a complete set is sent once per cycle. In the case of systems with 1 message per cycle, three time stamps are sent out each cycle in a single message. The transmit and receive time stamps are based on the first message in the sequence.

One of the strengths of this approach is that it is not necessary to explicitly identify or match time stamp messages. Usually, two of the time stamps in an outgoing message are simply taken from the last incoming message. The third time stamp is the transmittal time. However, there are two circumstances when these time stamps are not available. One situation is when the first message is transmitted by a given relay. The second is when the exchange is broken long enough to invalidate the last received set of time stamps (if the exchange is broken for longer than 66 ms, the time stamps from a given clock could roll over twice, invalidating time difference computations). In either of these situations, the next outgoing set of time stamps is a special start-up set containing transmittal time only. When such a message is received, nothing is computed from it, except the message time stamp and the received time stamp are saved for the next outgoing message (it is neither necessary nor desirable to “reset” the local clock when such a message is received).

Error analysis shows that time stamp requirements are not very stringent because of the smoothing behavior of the phase locked loop. The time stamp can be basically a sample count with enough bits to cover the worst round trip, including channel delay and processing delay. An 8 bit time stamp with 1 bit corresponding to 1/64 of a cycle will accommodate a round trip delay of up to 4 cycles, which should be more than adequate.

The computation of round trip delay and phase offset from four time stamps is as follows:

a

=

T i

–

2

–

T i

–

3

b

=

T i

–

T i

– 1

δ

i

=

a

+

b

θ

i

=

a

–

2

b

(EQ 9.26)

The Ts are the time stamps, with T

i

the newest. Delta is the round trip delay. Theta is the clock offset, and is the correct sign for the feedback loop. Note that the time stamps are unsigned numbers that wrap around, while a and b can be positive or negative;

δ

i

must be positive and

θ

i

can be positive or negative. Some care must be taken in the arithmetic to take into account possible roll over of any of the time stamps. If T

i – 2

is greater than T

i – 1

, there was a roll over in the clock responsible for those two time stamps.

To correct for the roll over, subtract 256 from the round trip and subtract 128 from the phase angle. If T

i – 3

is greater than T

i

, add 256 to the round trip and add 128 to the phase angle. Also, if the above equations are computed using integer values of time stamps, a conversion to phase angle in radians is required by multiplying by

π / 32.


GE Multilin


Time stamp values are snapshots of the local 256 bit sample counter taken at the time of the transmission or receipt of the first message in a time stamp sequence. This could be done either in software or hardware, provided the jitter is limited to less than plus or minus 130

μs. A fixed bias in the time stamp is acceptable, provided it is the same for all terminals.

Relay 1

Send T1 i-3

Store T1 i-3

COMMUNICATION PATH

Relay 2

Clocks mismatch

Send T2 i-3

Store T2 i-3

8.3 ms

T2 i-2

Capture T2 i-2

Capture T1 i-2

T1 i-2

8.3 ms

Send T1 i-2

Send T2 i-2

8.3 ms

Store T1 i-2

Store T2 i-2

8.3 ms

Send T1 i-1

T1 i-1

T2 i-1

Send T2 i-1

8.3 ms

Capture T2 i-1,

T1 i

( T1 i -3,

T2 T2 i -1,

T1 )

Calculate 1, 1.

i

T1 i

T2 i

Capture T1 i-1,

T2 i

( T2 i -3,

T1 i -2,

T1 T2 )

Speed up

Slow down t 1

831729A2.CDR

t 2

Figure 9–2: ROUND TRIP DELAY AND CLOCK OFFSET COMPUTATION FROM TIME STAMPS

GE Multilin


9


9.1.12 PHASE LOCKING FILTER

Filters are used in the phase locked loop to assure stability, to reduce phase and frequency noise. This is well known technology. The primary feedback mechanism shown in the Loop Block Diagram is phase angle information through the well known proportional plus integral (PI) filter (the Z in the diagram refers to a unit delay, and 1 / (Z – 1) represents a simple digital first order integrator). This loop is used to provide stability and zero steady state error.

A PI filter has two time parameters that determine dynamic behavior: the gain for the proportional term and the gain for the integral. Depending on the gains, the transient behavior of the loop can be underdamped, critically damped, or over damped. For this application, critically damped is a good choice.

This sets a constraint relating the two parameters. A second constraint is derived from the desired time constants of the loop. By considering the effects of both phase and frequency noise in this application it can be shown that optimum behavior results with a certain proportion between phase and frequency constraints.

A secondary input is formed through the frequency deviation input of the filter. Whenever frequency deviation information is available, it is used for this input; otherwise, the input is zero. Because frequency is the derivative of phase information, the appropriate filter for frequency deviation is an integrator, which is combined with the integrator of the PI filter for the phase.

It is very important to combine these two integrators into a single function because it can be shown if two separate integrators are used, they can drift in opposite directions into saturation, because the loop would only drive their sum to zero.

In normal operation, frequency tracking at each terminal matches the tracking at all other terminals, because all terminals will measure approximately the same frequency deviation. However, if there is not enough current at a terminal to compute frequency deviation, frequency tracking at that terminal is accomplished indirectly via phase locking to other terminals. A small phase deviation must be present for the tracking to occur.

Also shown in the loop is the clock itself, because it behaves like an integrator. The clock is implemented in hardware and software with a crystal oscillator and a counter.

9

Delta frequency

KF

+

+

1/(Z–1)

+

+

KI

New frequency

+

+

Delta phi time

+

–

+

KP

1/(Z–1)

GPS channel asymmetry

Clock

(sample timer) phi

831028A1.CDR

Figure 9–3: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF LOOP FILTER

There are 4 gains in the filter that must be selected once and for all as part of the design of the system. The gains are determined by the time step of the integrators, and the desired time constants of the system as follows:

KI

=

T

------------------

2

, KP

T phase

=

T phase

, KF

=

T

--------------------------

T frequency

where:

T repeat

= the time between execution of the filter algorithm

T phase

= time constant for the primary phase locked loop

T frequency

= time constant for the frequency locked loop

(EQ 9.27)


GE Multilin


9.1.13 MATCHING PHASELETS

An algorithm is needed to match phaselets, detect lost messages, and detect communications channel failure. Channel failure is defined by a sequence of lost messages, where the length of the sequence is a design parameter. In any case, the sequence should be no longer than the maximum sequence number (4 cycles) in order to be able to match up messages when the channel is assumed to be operating normally.

A channel failure can be detected by a watchdog software timer that times the interval between consecutive incoming messages. If the interval exceeds a maximum limit, channel failure is declared and the channel recovery process is initiated.

While the channel is assumed to be operating normally, it is still possible for an occasional message to be lost, in which case fault protection is suspended for the time period that depends on that message, and is resumed on the next occasional message. A lost message is detected simply by looking at the sequence numbers of incoming messages. A lost message will show up as a gap in the sequence.

Sequence numbers are also used to match messages for the protection computation. Whenever a complete set of current measurements from all terminals with matching sequence numbers are available, the differential protection function is computed using that set of measurements.

9.1.14 START-UP

Initialization in our peer-to-peer architecture is done independently at each terminal. Relays can be turned on in any order with the power system either energized or de-energized. Synchronization and protection functions are accomplished automatically whenever enough information is available.

After a relay completes other initialization tasks such as resetting of buffer pointers and determining relay settings, initial values are computed for any state variables in the loop filters or the protection functions. The relay starts its clock at the nominal power system frequency. Phaselet information is computed and transmitted.

• Outgoing messages over a given channel are treated in the same way as during the channel recovery process. The special start-up message is sent each time containing only a single time step value.

• When incoming messages begin arriving over a channel, that channel is placed in service and the loop filters are started up for that channel.

• Whenever the total clock uncertainty is less than a fixed threshold, the phase locking filter is declared locked and differential protection is enabled.

9.1.15 HARDWARE AND COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS

The average total channel delay in each direction is not critical, provided the total round trip delay is less than 4 power system cycles. The jitter is important, and should be less than ±130

μs in each direction. The effect of a difference in the average delay between one direction and the other depends on the number of terminals. In the case of a 2 or 3 terminal system, the difference is not critical, and can even vary with time. In the case of a 4 or more terminal system, variation in the difference limits the sensitivity of the system.

• The allowable margin of 130

μs jitter includes jitter in servicing the interrupt generated by an incoming message. For both incoming and outgoing messages, the important parameter is the jitter between when the time stamp is read and when the message begins to go out or to come in.

• The quality of the crystal driving the clock and software sampling is not critical, because of the compensation provided by the phase and frequency tracking algorithm, unless it is desired to perform under or over frequency protection.

From the point of view of current differential protection only, the important parameter is the rate of drift of crystal frequency, which should be less than 100 parts per million per minute.

• A 6 Mhz clock with a 16-bit hardware counter is adequate, provided the method is used for achieving the 32-bit resolution that is described in this document.

• An 8-bit time stamp is adequate provided time stamp messages are exchanged once per cycle.

• A 4-bit message sequence number is adequate.

9

GE Multilin



Depending on the 87L settings, channel asymmetry (the difference in the transmitting and receiving paths channel delay) cannot be higher than 1 to 1.5 ms if channel asymmetry compensation is not used. However, if the relay detects asymmetry higher than 1.5 ms, the

87L DIFF CH ASYM DET

FlexLogic™ operand is set high and the event and target are raised (if they are enabled in the


menu) to provide an indication about potential danger.

9.1.16 ONLINE ESTIMATE OF MEASUREMENT ERRORS

9

GE's adaptive elliptical restraint characteristic is a good approximation to the cumulative effects of various sources of error in determining phasors. Sources of error include power system noise, transients, inaccuracy in line charging current computation, current sensor gain, phase and saturation error, clock error, and asynchronous sampling. Errors that can be controlled are driven to zero by the system. For errors that cannot be controlled, all relays compute and sum the error for each source of error for each phase. The relay computes the error caused by power system noise, CT saturation, harmonics, and transients. These errors arise because power system currents are not always exactly sinusoidal. The intensity of these errors varies with time; for example, growing during fault conditions, switching operations, or load variations. The system treats these errors as a Gaussian distribution in the real and in the imaginary part of each phasor, with a standard deviation that is estimated from the sum of the squares of the differences between the data samples and the sine function that is used to fit them. This error has a spectrum of frequencies. Current transformer saturation is included with noise and transient error. The error for noise, harmonics, transients, and current transformer saturation is computed as follows. First, the sum of the squares of the errors in the data samples is computed from the sum of squares information for the present phaselet:

SumSquares =

4

----

N

∑

–

p

= 0

1

(

i

(

–

p

)

)

2

(EQ 9.28)

Then fundamental magnitude is computed as follows for the same phaselet:

I

1_MAG_A

=

(

I

1_RE_A

)

2

+

(

I

1_IM_A

)

2

Finally, the local adaptive restraint term is computed as follows, for each local current:

(EQ 9.29)

(

I

1_ADA_A

)

2

=

N

(

–

(

I

1_MAG_A

)

2

)

(EQ 9.30)

Another source of the measurement errors is clock synchronization error, resulting in a clock uncertainty term. The L30 algorithm accounts for two terms of synchronization error corresponding to:

• Raw clock deviation computed from time stamps. There are several effects that cause it to not track exactly. First, the ping-pong algorithm inherently produces slightly different estimates of clock deviation at each terminal. Second, because the transmission of time stamps is spread out over several packets, the clock deviation estimate is not up to date with other information it is combined with. Channel asymmetry also contributes to this term. The clock deviation computation is indicated in equation 8.15 as

θ i

. If 2 channels are used, clock deviation is computed for both channels and then average of absolute values is computed. If GPS compensation is used, then GPS clock compensation is subtracted from the clock deviation.

• Startup error. This term is used to estimate the initial startup transient of PFLLs. During startup conditions, a decaying exponential is computed to simulate envelope of the error during startup

The clock uncertainty is expressed as: clock_unc = clock_dev + start_up_error

Eventually, the local clock error is computed as:

CLOCK

A

=

( clock_unc

9

)

2

⋅ ( (

I

LOC_RE_A

)

2

+

(

I

LOC_IM_A

)

2

)

(EQ 9.31)

(EQ 9.32)

The local squared adaptive restraint is computed from all local current sources (1 to 4) and is obtained as follows:

(

I

LOC_ADA_A

)

2

=

18

⋅ ( (

I

1_ADA_A

)

2

+

(

I

2_ADA_A

)

2

+

(

I

3_ADA_A

)

2

+

(

I

4_ADA_A

)

2

+

(

I

q_ADA_A

)

2

+

CLOCK

A

)

(EQ 9.33)


GE Multilin


9.1.17 CT SATURATION DETECTION

Current differential protection is inherently dependent on adequate CT performance at all terminals of the protected line, especially during external faults. CT saturation, particularly when it happens at only one terminal of the line, introduces a spurious differential current that may cause the differential protection to misoperate.

The L30 applies a dedicated mechanism to cope with CT saturation and ensure security of protection for external faults.

The relay dynamically increases the weight of the square of errors (the so-called ‘sigma’) portion in the total restraint quantity, but for external faults only. The following logic is applied:

• First, the terminal currents are compared against a threshold of 3 pu to detect overcurrent conditions that may be caused by a fault and may lead to CT saturation.

• For all the terminal currents that are above the 3 pu level, the relative angle difference is calculated. If all three terminals see significant current, then all three pairs (1, 2), (2, 3), and (1, 3) are considered and the maximum angle difference is used in further calculations.

• Depending on the angle difference between the terminal currents, the value of sigma used for the adaptive restraint current is increased by the multiple factor of 1, 5, or 2.5 to 5 as shown below. As seen from the figure, a factor of 1 is used for internal faults, and a factor of 2.5 to 5 is used for external faults. This allows the relay to be simultaneously sensitive for internal faults and robust for external faults with a possible CT saturation.

If more than one CT is connected to the relay (breaker-and-the half applications), the CT saturation mechanism is executed between the maximum local current against the sum of all others, then between the maximum local and remote currents to select the secure multiplier MULT. A Maximum of two (local and remote) is selected and then applied to adaptive restraint.

(external fault)

MULT=5

MULT = abs( arg(I /I

2

)) x 5/180

MULT=1

MULT=1

831744A2.CDR

(internall fault)

Figure 9–4: CT SATURATION ADAPTIVE RESTRAINT MULTIPLIER

9.1.18 CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION

The basic premise for the operation of differential protection schemes in general, and of the L30 line differential element in particular, is that the sum of the currents entering the protected zone is zero. In the case of a power system transmission line, this is not entirely true because of the capacitive charging current of the line. For short transmission lines the charging current is a small factor and can therefore be treated as an unknown error. In this application the L30 can be deployed without voltage sensors and the line charging current is included as a constant term in the total variance, increasing the differential restraint current. For long transmission lines the charging current is a significant factor, and should be computed to provide increased sensitivity to fault current.

Compensation for charging current requires the voltage at the terminals be supplied to the relays. The algorithm calculates

C

×

dv dt

for each phase, which is then subtracted from the measured currents at both ends of the line. This is a simple approach that provides adequate compensation of the capacitive current at the fundamental power system frequency. Travelling waves on the transmission line are not compensated for, and contribute to restraint by increasing the measurement of errors in the data set.

9

GE Multilin



The underlying single phase model for compensation for a two and three terminal system are shown below.

Is

Ir

Vs

Vr

R

L

C/2

C/2

831793A1.CDR

Figure 9–5: 2-TERMINAL TRANSMISSION LINE SINGLE PHASE MODEL FOR COMPENSATION

C/3

C/3

C/3

831019A1.CDR

Figure 9–6: 3-TERMINAL TRANSMISSION LINE SINGLE PHASE MODEL FOR COMPENSATION

Apportioning the total capacitance among the terminals is not critical for compensating the fundamental power system frequency charging current as long as the total capacitance is correct. Compensation at other frequencies will be approximate.

If the VTs are connected in wye, the compensation is accurate for both balanced conditions (i.e. all positive, negative and zero sequence components of the charging current are compensated). If the VTs are connected in delta, the compensation is accurate for positive and negative sequence components of the charging current. Since the zero sequence voltage is not available, the L30 cannot compensate for the zero sequence current.

The compensation scheme continues to work with the breakers open, provided the voltages are measured on the line side of the breakers.

For very long lines, the distributed nature of the line leads to the classical transmission line equations which can be solved for voltage and current profiles along the line. What is needed for the compensation model is the effective positive and zero sequence capacitance seen at the line terminals.

Finally, in some applications the effect of shunt reactors needs to be taken into account. With very long lines shunt reactors may be installed to provide some of the charging current required by the line. This reduces the amount of charging current flowing into the line. In this application, the setting for the line capacitance should be the residual capacitance remaining after subtracting the shunt inductive reactance from the total capacitive reactance at the power system frequency.

9.1.19 DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT CHARACTERISTICS

9

The differential element is completely dependent on receiving data from the relay at the remote end of the line, therefore, upon startup, the differential element is disabled until the time synchronization system has aligned both relays to a common time base. After synchronization is achieved, the differential is enabled. Should the communications channel delay time increase, such as caused by path switching in a SONET system or failure of the communications power supply, the relay will act as outlined in the next section.

The L30 incorporates an adaptive differential algorithm based on the traditional percent differential principle. In the traditional percent differential scheme, the operating parameter is based on the phasor sum of currents in the zone and the restraint parameter is based on the scalar (or average scalar) sum of the currents in the protected zone - when the operating parameter divided by the restraint parameter is above the slope setting, the relay will operate. During an external fault, the operating parameter is relatively small compared to the restraint parameter, whereas for an internal fault, the operating parameter is relatively large compared to the restraint parameter. Because the traditional scheme is not adaptive, the element settings must allow for the maximum amount of error anticipated during an out-of-zone fault, when CT errors may be high and/or CT saturation may be experienced.


GE Multilin


The major difference between the L30 differential scheme and a percent differential scheme is the use of an estimate of errors in the input currents to increase the restraint parameter during faults, permitting the use of more sensitive settings than those used in the traditional scheme. The inclusion of the adaptive feature in the scheme produces element characteristic equations that appear to be different from the traditional scheme, but the differences are minimal during system steady-state conditions. The element equations are shown in the Operating condition calculations section.

9.1.20 RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION

On startup of the relays, the channel status will be checked first. If channel status is OK, all relays will send a special

“startup” message and the synchronization process will be initiated. It will take about 5 to 7 seconds to declare PFLL status as OK and to start performing current differential calculations. If one of the relays was powered off during the operation, the synchronization process will restart from the beginning. Relays tolerate channel delay (resulting sometimes in step change in communication paths) or interruptions up to four power cycles round trip time (about 66 ms at 60 Hz) without any deterioration in performance. If communications are interrupted for more than four cycles, the following applies:

In two-terminal mode:

1.

With second redundant channel, relays will not lose functionality at all if second channel is live.

2.

With one channel only, relays have a five second time window. If the channel is restored within this time, it takes about two to three power cycles of valid PFLL calculations (and if estimated error is still within margin) to declare that PFLL is

OK. If the channel is restored later than 5 seconds, PFLL at both relays will be declared as failed and the re-synchronization process will be initiated (about 5 to 7 seconds) after channel status becomes OK.

In three-terminal mode:

1.

If one of the channels fails, the configuration reverts from master-master to master-slave where the master relay has both channels live. The master relay PFLL keeps the two slave relays in synchronization, and therefore there is no time limit for functionality. The PFLL of the slave relays will be suspended (that is, the 87L function will not be performed at these relays but they can still trip via DTT from the master relay) until the channel is restored. If the estimated error is within margin upon channel restoration and after two to three power cycles of valid PFLL calculations, the PFLL will be declared as OK and the configuration will revert back to master-master.

2.

If 2 channels fail, PFLL at all relays will be declared as failed and when the channels are back into service, the re-synchronization process will be initiated (about 5 to 7 seconds) after channel status becomes OK.

Depending on the system configuration (number of terminals and channels), the 87L function operability depends on the status of channel(s), status of synchronization, and status of channel(s) ID validation. All these states are available as Flex-

Logic™ operands, for viewing in actual values, logged in the event recorder (if events are enabled in 87L menu), and also trigger targets (if targets are enabled in the 87L function). These FlexLogic™ operands can to be used to trigger alarms, illuminate LEDs, and be captured in oscillography.

However, the

87L BLOCKED

FlexLogic™ operand reflects whether the local current differential function is blocked due to communications or settings problems. The state of this operand is based on the combination of conditions outlined above.

As such, it is recommended that it be used to enable backup protection if 87L is not available.

The

87L BLOCKED

operand is set when the 87L function is enabled and any of the following three conditions apply:

1.

At least one channel failed on a two or three-terminal single-channel system, or both channels failed on a two-terminal two-channel system.

2.

PFFL has failed or is suspended,

3.

A channel ID failure has been detected on at least one channel in a two-terminal single-channel system or in a threeterminal system, or a channel ID failure has been detected on both channels in a two-terminal dual-channel system.

All L30 communications alarms can be divided by major and minor alarms.

The major alarms are

CHANNEL FAIL

,

PFLL FAIL

, and

CHANNEL ID FAIL

. The relay is blocked automatically if any of these conditions occur. Therefore, there is no need to assign these operands to a current differential block setting.

The minor alarms are

CRC FAIL

and

LOST PACKET

, which are indicators of a poor or noisy communications channel. If the relay recognizes that a packet is lost or corrupted, the 87L feature is not processed at that protection pass. Instead, it waits for the next valid packet.

9

GE Multilin


9.2 OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS 9 THEORY OF OPERATION

9.2OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS 9.2.1 DESCRIPTION

Characteristics of differential elements can be shown in the complex plane. The operating characteristics of the L30 are fundamentally dependant on the relative ratios of the local and remote current phasor magnitudes and the angles of

I

loc

/

I

rem

as shown in the Restraint Characteristics figure.

The main factors affecting the trip-restraint decisions are:

1.

Difference in angles (+ real represents pure internal fault when currents are essentially in phase, – real represents external fault when currents are 180° apart).

2.

The magnitude of remote current.

3.

The magnitude of the local current.

4.

Dynamically estimated errors in calculations.

5.

Settings.

The following figure also shows the relay's capability to handle week-infeed conditions by increasing the restraint ellipse when the remote current is relatively small (1.5 pu). Therefore, uncertainty is greater when compared with higher remote currents (3 pu). The characteristic shown is also dependant on settings. The second graph shows how the relay's triprestraint calculation is made with respect to the variation in angle difference between local and remote currents. The characteristic for 3 terminal mode is similar where both remote currents are combined together.

9


GE Multilin

9 THEORY OF OPERATION

I I


I I

I I

GE Multilin

Figure 9–7: RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTICS


9

9

9.2 OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS 9 THEORY OF OPERATION

9.2.2 TRIP DECISION EXAMPLE

Assume the following settings:

• Slope 1: S

1

= 10%

• Slope 2: S

2

= 10%

• Breakpoint: BP = 5 pu secondary

• Pickup: P = 0.5 pu

Assume the following local and remote currents:

• Local current: I

local

= 4.0 pu

∠0°

• Remote current: I

remote

= 0.8 pu

∠180°

The assumed condition is a radial line with a high resistance fault, with the source at the local end only, and through a resistive load current. The operating current is:

2

I op

=

I_L

+

I_R

2

=

4.0 0

°

+

0.8 180

°

2

=

10.24

(EQ 9.34)

Since the current at both ends is less than the breakpoint value of 5.0, the equation for two-terminal mode is used to calculate restraint as follows.

2

I

Rest

=

(

2 S

2

1

⋅

I_L

2

)

+

( ⋅

2

1

⋅

I_R

2 2

+

σ

=

(

2

⋅ (

0.1

=

0.8328

)

2

⋅

4

2

)

+

(

2

⋅ (

0.1

)

2

⋅

0.8

2

+

⋅ ( )

2

+

0 where

σ

= 0, assuming a pure sine wave.

(EQ 9.35)

9.2.3 TRIP DECISION TEST

The trip condition is shown below.

I

------------

2

2

I

Rest

>

1

⇒

10.24

------------------

0.8328

= 12.3

>

1

⇒

Trip

(EQ 9.36)

The use of the

CURRENT DIFF PICKUP

,

CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1

,


, and

CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT

settings are discussed in the Current differential section of chapter 5.

The following figure shows how the L30 settings affect the restraint characteristics. The local and remote currents are 180° apart, which represents an external fault. The breakpoint between the two slopes indicates the point where the restraint area is becoming wider to override uncertainties from CT saturation, fault noise, harmonics, etc. Increasing the slope percentage increases the width of the restraint area.


GE Multilin

9 THEORY OF OPERATION

Iloc pu

20

OPERATE

16

10

8


RESTRAINT

BP=8, P=2, S1=30%, S2=50%

BP=4, P=1, S1=30%, S2=50%

BP=4, P=1, S1=20%, S2=40%

4

OPERATE

0

Irem pu

4 8 12 16 20

0

831725A1.CDR

Figure 9–8: SETTINGS IMPACT ON RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC

GE Multilin


9

9.3 FAULT LOCATOR 9 THEORY OF OPERATION

9.3FAULT LOCATOR 9.3.1 DESCRIPTION

Fault type determination is required for calculation of fault location – the algorithm uses the angle between the negative and positive sequence components of the relay currents. To improve accuracy and speed of operation, the fault components of the currents are used; that is, the pre-fault phasors are subtracted from the measured current phasors. In addition to the angle relationships, certain extra checks are performed on magnitudes of the negative and zero-sequence currents.

The single-ended fault location method assumes that the fault components of the currents supplied from the local (A) and remote (B) systems are in phase. The figure below shows an equivalent system for fault location.

Z

A

Local bus

I

A

distance to fault

mZ (1-m)Z

Remote bus

I

B

Z

B

E

A

V

F

R

F

E

B

V

A

V

B

9

842780A1.CDR

Figure 9–9: EQUIVALENT SYSTEM FOR FAULT LOCATION

The following equations hold true for this equivalent system.

V

A

=

A

+

R

F

⋅ (

I

A

+

I

B

)

(EQ 9.37)

where: m = sought pu distance to fault, Z = positive sequence impedance of the line.

The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault (F) and pre-fault load (pre) components:

I

A

=

I

AF

+

I

Apre

(EQ 9.38)

and neglecting shunt parameters of the line:

I

B

=

I

BF

–

I

Apre

Inserting the I

A

and I

B

equations into the V

A

equation and solving for the fault resistance yields:

R

F

=

I

V

–

-----------------------------------

AF

⋅

⎛

⎝

1 +

I

I

--------

AF

⎞

⎠

(EQ 9.39)

(EQ 9.40)

Assuming the fault components of the currents, I

AF

and I

BF

are in phase, and observing that the fault resistance, as impedance, does not have any imaginary part gives:

Im

⎛

⎝

V

–

-----------------------------------

I

AF

A

⎠

⎞

= 0

(EQ 9.41)

where: Im() represents the imaginary part of a complex number. Solving the above equation for the unknown m creates the following fault location algorithm:

m

=

(

⋅

⋅

A

⋅

I

AF

∗

)

I

AF

∗

)

(EQ 9.42)

where * denotes the complex conjugate and

I

AF

=

I

A

–

I

Apre

.

Depending on the fault type, appropriate voltage and current signals are selected from the phase quantities before applying the two equations above (the superscripts denote phases, the subscripts denote stations).

For AG faults:

V

A

=

V

A

A

, I

A

=

A

I

A

+

K

0

⋅

I

0A

(EQ 9.43)


GE Multilin

9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9.3 FAULT LOCATOR

For BG faults:

V

A

=

V

B

A

, I

A

=

B

I

A

+

K

0

⋅

I

0A

(EQ 9.44)

For CG faults:

V

A

=

V

C

A

, I

A

=

BC

I

A

+

K

0

⋅

I

0A

(EQ 9.45)

For AB and ABG faults:

V

A

=

A

V

A

–

V

B

A

, I

A

=

A

I

A

–

B

I

A

(EQ 9.46)

For BC and BCG faults:

V

A

=

B

V

A

–

C

V

A

, I

A

=

B

I

A

–

C

I

A

(EQ 9.47)

For CA and CAG faults:

V

A

=

C

V

A

–

V

A

A

, I

A

=

C

I

A

–

A

I

A

(EQ 9.48)

where K

0

is the zero sequence compensation factor (for the first six equations above)

For ABC faults, all three AB, BC, and CA loops are analyzed and the final result is selected based upon consistency of the results

The element calculates the distance to the fault (with m in miles or kilometers) and the phases involved in the fault.

The relay allows locating faults from delta-connected VTs. If the


setting is set to “None”, and the VTs are connected in wye, the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages. If the VTs are connected in delta, fault location is suspended.

If the


setting value is “V0” and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration, the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages. If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration, fault location is performed based on the delta voltages and externally supplied neutral voltage:

V

A

=

3

(

N

+

V

AB

–

V

CA

)

V

B

=

3

(

N

+

V

BC

–

V

AB

)

V

B

=

3

N

+

V

CA

–

V

BC

)

(EQ 9.49)

If the


setting value is “I0” and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration, the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages. If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration, fault location is performed based on the delta voltages and zero-sequence voltage approximated based on the zero-sequence current:

V

A

=

1

--- V

3

(

AB

–

V

CA

SYS0

I

0

V

B

=

3

BC

–

V

AB

SYS0

I

0

(EQ 9.50)

V

B

=

3

CA

–

V

BC

–

SYS0

I

0 where Z

SYS0

is the equivalent zero-sequence impedance behind the relay as entered under the fault report setting menu.

9

GE Multilin


9.3 FAULT LOCATOR 9 THEORY OF OPERATION

SETTING

FAULT REPORT

TRIG:

Off=0

SETTINGS

FAULT REPORT

SOURCE:

SRC

X

50DD OP

I

A

I

B

I

C

3I_0

VA or VAB

VB or VBC

VC or VCA

Vn or V_0

SHOT # FROM

AUTO RECLOSURE

0

3 SEC

AND

SETTINGS

FAULT REPORT 1 Z1

MAG:

FAULT REPORT 1 Z1

ANGLE:

FAULT REPORT 1 Z0

MAG:

FAULT REPORT 1 Z0

ANGLE:

FAULT REPORT 1

LENGTH UNITS:

FAULT REPORT 1

LENGTH:

FAULT REPORT 1 VT

SUBSTITUTION:

FAULT REP 1

SYSTEM Z0 MAG:

FAULT REP 1

SYSTEM Z0 ANGLE:

RUN

FAULT

LOCATOR 1

Figure 9–10: FAULT LOCATOR SCHEME

ACTUAL VALUES

FAULT REPORT #

DATE

TIME

FAULT TYPE

FAULT LOCATION

FAULT# RECLOSE SHOT

827094A5.CDR

9


GE Multilin

10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.1 CT REQUIREMENTS

10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.1CT REQUIREMENTS 10.1.1 INTRODUCTION

In general, proper CT selection is required to provide both adequate fault sensitivity and prevention of operation on highcurrent external faults that could result from CT saturation. The use of high-quality CTs (such as class X) improves relay stability during transients and CT saturation and can increase relay sensitivity. A current differential scheme is highly dependent on adequate signals from the source CTs. Ideally, CTs selected for line current differential protection should be based on the criteria described below. If the available CTs do not meet the described criteria, the L30 will still provide good security for CT saturation for external faults. The L30 adaptive restraint characteristics, based on estimates of measurement errors and CT saturation detection, allow the relay to be secure on external faults while maintaining excellent performance for severe internal faults. Where CT characteristics do not meet criteria or where CTs at both ends may have different characteristics, the differential settings should be adjusted as per section 9.2.1.

The capability of the CTs, and the connected burden, should be checked as follows:

1.

The CTs should be class TPX or TPY (class TPZ should only be used after discussion with both the manufacturer of the CT and GE Multilin) or IEC class 5P20 or better.

2.

The CT primary current rating should be somewhat higher than the maximum continuous current, but not extremely high relative to maximum load because the differential element minimum sensitivity setting is approximately 0.2

× CT rating (the L30 relay allows for different CT ratings at each of the terminals).

3.

The VA rating of the CTs should be above the Secondary Burden

× CT Rated Secondary Current. The maximum secondary burden for acceptable performance is:

R b

+

R r

<

(

CT Secondary I

rated

)

2

(EQ 10.1)

where: R

b

= total (two-way) wiring resistance plus any other load

R r

= relay burden at rated secondary current

4.

The CT kneepoint voltage (per the V

k

curves from the manufacturer) should be higher than the maximum secondary voltage during a fault. This can be estimated by:

V k

>

I fp

×

⎛

⎝

X

1

R

+

⎞

⎠

× (

R

CT

+

R

L

+

R r

)

for phase-phase faults

V k

>

I fg

×

⎛

⎝

X

1

R

+

⎞

⎠

× (

R

CT

+ 2R

L

+

R r

)

for phase-ground faults

(EQ 10.2)

where:

I fp

= maximum secondary phase-phase fault current

I fg

= maximum secondary phase-ground fault current

X / R = primary system reactance / resistance ratio

R

CT

= CT secondary winding resistance

R

L

= AC secondary wiring resistance (one-way)

10.1.2 CALCULATION EXAMPLE 1

This example illustrates how to check the performance of a class C400 ANSI/IEEE CT, ratios 2000/1800/1600/1500 : 5 A connected at 1500:5. The burden and kneepoints are verified in this example.

Given the following values:

• maximum I

fp

= 14 000 A

• maximum I

fg

= 12 000 A

• impedance angle of source and line = 78°

• CT secondary leads are 75 m of AWG 10.

The following procedure verifies the burden. ANSI/IEEE class C400 requires that the CT can deliver 1 to 20 times the rated secondary current to a standard B-4 burden (4 ohms or lower) without exceeding a maximum ratio error of 10%.

1.

The maximum allowed burden at the 1500/5 tap is

(

1500 2000

×

= 3

Ω

.

2.

The R

CT

, R

r

, and R

L

values are calculated as:

10

GE Multilin


10.1 CT REQUIREMENTS 10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

R

CT

= 0.75

Ω

R r

R

L

=

0.2 VA

-----------------=

0.008

Ω

(

5 A

)

2

= 2

×

75 m

×

3.75

Ω

1000 m

= 2

×

0.26

Ω

= 0.528

Ω

3.

This gives a total burden of:

Total Burden

=

R

CT

+

R r

+

R

L

=

0.75

+

4.

This is less than the allowed 3

Ω, which is OK.

The following procedure verifies the kneepoint voltage.

1.

The maximum voltage available from the CT

=

(

2.

The system X/R ratio

= tan 78

°

=

4.71

.

3.

The CT voltage for maximum phase fault is:

=

300 V .

=

1.28

Ω

.

V

=

14000 A ratio of 300:1

× (

4.71

+ 1

) × (

0.75

+ 0.26

+ 0.008

Ω )

= 271.26 V (< 300 V, which is OK)

4.

The CT voltage for maximum ground fault is:

V

=

12000 A ratio of 300:1

× (

4.71

+ 1

) × (

0.75

+ 0.52

+ 0.008

Ω )

= 291.89 V (< 300 V, which is OK)

5.

The CT will provide acceptable performance in this application.

(EQ 10.3)

(EQ 10.4)

(EQ 10.5)

(EQ 10.6)

10.1.3 CALCULATION EXAMPLE 2

10

To check the performance of an IEC CT of class 5P20, 15 VA, ratio 1500:5 A, assume the following values:

• maximum I

fp

= 14 000 A

• maximum I

fg

= 12 000 A

• impedance angle of source and line = 78°

• CT secondary leads are 75 m of AWG 10.

The IEC rating requires the CT deliver up to 20 times the rated secondary current without exceeding a maximum ratio error of 5%, to a burden of:

Burden

=

15 VA

=

0.6

Ω at the 5 A rated current

(

5 A

)

2

The total Burden = R

r

+ R

l

= 0.008 + 0.52 = 0.528

Ω, which is less than the allowed 0.6 Ω, which is OK.

The following procedure verifies the kneepoint voltage.

1.

The maximum voltage available from the CT =

(

2.

The system X/R ratio

= tan 78

°

=

4.71

.

= 300 V .

3.

The CT voltage for maximum phase fault is:

(EQ 10.7)

V

=

14000 A ratio of 300:1

× (

4.71

+

1

) × (

0.75

+

0.26

+

0.008

Ω )

=

271.26 V (< 300 V, which is OK)

4.

The CT voltage for maximum ground fault is:

V

=

12000 A ratio of 300:1

× (

4.71

+

1

) × (

0.75

+

0.52

+

0.008

Ω )

=

291.89 V (< 300 V, which is OK)

5.

The CT will provide acceptable performance in this application.

(EQ 10.8)

(EQ 10.9)


GE Multilin

10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS

10.2CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS 10.2.1 INTRODUCTION

NOTE

Software is available from the GE Multilin website that is helpful in selecting settings for the specific application. Checking the performance of selected element settings with respect to known power system fault parameters makes it relatively simple to choose the optimum settings for the application.

This software program is also very useful for establishing test parameters. It is strongly recommended this program be downloaded.

The differential characteristic is defined by four settings:


,


,

CURRENT DIFF

RESTRAINT 2

, and


(breakpoint). As is typical for current-based differential elements, the settings are a trade-off between operation on internal faults against restraint during external faults.

10.2.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP

This setting established the sensitivity of the element to high impedance faults, and it is therefore desirable to choose a low level, but this can cause a maloperation for an external fault causing CT saturation. The selection of this setting is influenced by the decision to use charging current compensation. If charging current compensation is Enabled, pickup should be set to a minimum of 150% of the steady-state line charging current, to a lower limit of 10% of CT rating. If charging current compensation is Disabled, pickup should be set to a minimum of 250% of the steady-state line charging current to a lower limit of 10% of CT rating.

If the CT at one terminal can saturate while the CTs at other terminals do not, this setting should be increased by approximately 20 to 50% (depending on how heavily saturated the one CT is while the other CTs are not saturated) of CT rating to prevent operation on a close-in external fault.

10.2.3 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1

This setting controls the element characteristic when current is below the breakpoint, where CT errors and saturation effects are not expected to be significant. The setting is used to provide sensitivity to high impedance internal faults, or when system configuration limits the fault current to low values. A setting of 10 to 20% is appropriate in most cases, but this should be raised to 30% if the CTs can perform quite differently during faults.

10.2.4 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2

This setting controls the element characteristic when current is above the breakpoint, where CT errors and saturation effects are expected to be significant. The setting is used to provide security against high current external faults. A setting of 30 to 40% is appropriate in most cases, but this should be raised to 70% if the CTs can perform quite differently during faults.

Assigning the

CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1(2)

settings to the same value reverts dual slope bias characteristics into single slope bias characteristics.

NOTE

10.2.5 CURRENT DIFF BREAK POINT

This setting controls the threshold where the relay changes from using the restraint 1 to the restraint 2 characteristics. Two approaches can be considered.

1.

Program the setting to 150 to 200% of the maximum emergency load current on the line, on the assumption that a maintained current above this level is a fault.

2.

Program the setting below the current level where CT saturation and spurious transient differential currents can be expected.

The first approach gives comparatively more security and less sensitivity; the second approach provides less security for more sensitivity.

10

GE Multilin


10.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS 10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

10.2.6 CT TAP

10

If the CT ratios at the line terminals are different, the

CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 1(2)

setting must be used to correct the ratios to a common base. In this case, a user should modify the


and


settings because the local current phasor is used as a reference to determine which differential equation is used, based on the value of local and remote currents. If the setting is not modified, the responses of individual relays, especially during an external fault, can be asymmetrical, as one relay can be below the breakpoint and the other above the breakpoint. There are two methods to overcome this potential problem:

1.

Set


and


to the same value (e.g. 40% or 50%). This converts the relay characteristics from dual slope into single slope and the breakpoint becomes immaterial. Next, adjust differential pickup at all terminals according to CT ratios, referencing the desired pickup to the line primary current (see below).

2.

Set the breakpoints in each relay individually in accordance with the local CT ratio and the

CT TAP

setting. Next, adjust the differential pickup setting according to the terminal CT ratios. The slope value must be identical at all terminals.

Consider a two-terminal configuration with the following CT ratios for relays 1 and 2.

CT ratio

( relay 1

)

= 1000 5

CT ratio

( relay 2

)

=

2000 5

(EQ 10.10)

Consequently, we have the following CT tap value for relays 1 and 2.

CT tap

( relay 1

)

=

2.0

CT tap

( relay 2

)

= 0.5

(EQ 10.11)

To achieve maximum differential sensitivity, the minimum pickup is set as 0.2 pu at the terminal with the higher CT primary current; in this case 2000:5 for relay 2. The other terminal pickup is adjusted accordingly. The pickup values are set as follows:

)

=

0.4

)

=

0.2

(EQ 10.12)

Choosing relay 1 as a reference with a breakpoint of 5.0, the break point at relay 2 is chosen as follows:

)

= Breakpoint relay 1

) ×

CT

----------------------------------------

CT ratio ratio

(

( relay 1 relay 2

)

)

= 5.0

×

--------------------

2000 5

= 2.5

(EQ 10.13)

Use the following equality the verify the calculated breakpoint:

× ratio

( relay 1

)

= ratio

( relay 2

)

Therefore, we have a breakpoint of 5.0 for relay 1 and 2.5 for relay 2.

Now, consider a three-terminal configuration with the following CT ratios for relays 1, 2, and 3.

CT ratio

( relay 1

)

= 1000 5

CT ratio

( relay 2

)

=

2000 5

CT ratio

( relay 3

)

= 500 5

(EQ 10.14)

(EQ 10.15)

Consequently, we have the following CT tap value for relays 1, 2, and 3.

CT tap1

( relay 1

)

=

2.00

CT tap2

( relay 1

)

=

0.50

CT tap1

( relay 2

)

= 0.50 CT tap2

( relay 2

CT tap1

( relay 3

)

=

2.00 CT tap2

( relay 3

In this case, the relay channels communicate as follows:

• For relay 1, channel 1 communicates to relay 2 and channel 2 communicates to relay 3


(EQ 10.16)


GE Multilin

10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL (87L) SETTINGS


Consequently, to achieve the maximum sensitivity of 0.2 pu at the terminal with a CT ratio of 2000/5 (400 amps line primary differential current), the following pickup values are chosen:

)

=

0.4

)

= 0.2

)

= 0.8

(EQ 10.17)

Choosing relay as a reference with a breakpoint value of 5.0 pu, breakpoints for relays 2 and 3 are calculated as follows:

)

=

Breakpoint relay 1

) ×

CT

----------------------------------------

CT ratio ratio

(

( relay 1 relay 2

)

)

(EQ 10.18)

=

5.0

×

--------------------

2000 5

=

2.5

)

=

Breakpoint relay 1

) ×

CT

----------------------------------------

CT ratio ratio

(

( relay 1 relay 3

)

)

= 5.0

×

1000 5

-------------------= 10.0

(EQ 10.19)

To verify the calculated values, we have:

× ratio

( relay 1

)

× ratio

( relay 2

) ratio

( relay 3

)

=

=

=

5.0

2.5

×

×

1000 5

2000 5

10.0

×

5000 5

=

=

=

1000

1000

1000

(EQ 10.20)

This satisfies the equality condition indicated earlier.

During on-load tests, the differential current at all terminals should be the same and generally equal to the charging current if the tap and CT ratio settings are chosen correctly.

GE Multilin


10

10

10-6

10.3 CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS 10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

10.3CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS 10.3.1 DESCRIPTION

As indicated in the Settings chapter, the L30 provides three basic methods of applying channel asymmetry compensation using GPS. Channel asymmetry can also be monitored with actual values and an indication signalled (FlexLogic™ operands

87L DIFF 1(2) MAX ASYM

asserted) if channel asymmetry exceeds preset values. Depending on the implemented relaying philosophy, the relay can be programmed to perform the following on the loss of the GPS signal:

1.

Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and continue to operate the 87L element

(using the memorized value of the last asymmetry) until a change in the channel round-trip delay is detected.

2.

Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and block the 87L element after a specified time.

3.

Continuously operate the 87L element but only enable GPS compensation when valid GPS signals are available. This provides less sensitive protection on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and runs with higher pickup and restraint settings.

10.3.2 COMPENSATION METHOD 1

Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and continue to operate the 87L element until a change in the channel round-trip delay is detected.

If GPS is enabled at all terminals and the GPS signal is present, the L30 compensates for the channel asymmetry. On the loss of the GPS signal, the L30 stores the last measured value of the channel asymmetry per channel and compensates for the asymmetry until the GPS clock is available. However, if the channel was switched to another physical path during GPS loss conditions, the 87L element must be blocked, since the channel asymmetry cannot be measured and system is no longer accurately synchronized. The value of the step change in the channel is preset in

L30 POWER SYSTEM

settings menu and signaled by the 87L DIFF 1(2) TIME CHNG FlexLogic™ operand. To implement this method, follow the steps below:

1.

Enable Channel Asymmetry compensation by setting it to ON. Assign the GPS receiver failsafe alarm contact with the setting Block GPS Time Ref.

2.

Create FlexLogic™ similar to that shown below to block the 87L element on GPS loss if step change in the channel delay occurs during GPS loss conditions or on a startup before the GPS signal is valid. For three-terminal systems, the

87L DIFF 1 TIME CHNG operand must be ORed with the 87L DIFF 2 TIME CHNG FlexLogic™ operand. The Block

87L (VO1) output is reset if the GPS signal is restored and the 87L element is ready to operate.


GE Multilin

10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.3 CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

3

4

1

2

87L DIFF GPS FAIL

87L DIFF BLOCKED

AND(2)

87L DIFF GPS FAIL

7

8

5


6

AND(2)

TIMER 1

OR(2)

87L DIFF BLOCKED

NOT

87L DIFF GPS FAIL

NOT

AND(2)

TIMER 2

LATCH

AND(2)

AND(2)

AND(2)

OR(2)

Set

LATCH

Reset

= BLOCK 87L (VO1)

16

= BLOCK 87L (VO1)

831777A1.CDR

3.

Assign virtual output BLOCK 87L (VO1) to the 87L Current Differential Block setting. It can be used to enable backup protection, raise an alarm, and perform other functions as per the given protection philosophy.


Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and block the 87L element after a specified time.

This is a simple and conservative way of using the GPS feature. Follow steps 1 and 3 in compensation method 1. The Flex-

Logic™ is simple: 87L DIFF GPS FAIL-Timer-Virtual Output Block 87L (VO1). It is recommended that the timer be set no higher than 10 seconds.


Continuously operate the 87L element but enable GPS compensation only when valid GPS signals are available. This provides less sensitive protection on GPS signal loss at any terminal and runs with higher pickup and restraint settings.

This approach can be used carefully if maximum channel asymmetry is known and doesn't exceed certain values (2.0 to

2.5 ms). The 87L DIFF MAX ASYM operand can be used to monitor and signal maximum channel asymmetry. Essentially, the L30 switches to another setting group with higher pickup and restraint settings, sacrificing sensitivity to keep the 87L function operational.

1.

Create FlexLogic™ similar to that shown below to switch the 87L element to Settings Group 2 (with most sensitive settings) if the L30 has a valid GPS time reference. If a GPS or 87L communications failure occurs, the L30 will switch back to Settings Group 1 with less sensitive settings.

GE Multilin


10

10.3 CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS 10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

17

87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM

18

NOT

19

20

87L DIFF GPS FAIL

NOT

21

AND(2)

22

87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM

23

24

87L DIFF GPS FAIL

OR(2)

25

26

TIMER 3

LATCH

OR(2)

AND(2)

Set

LATCH

Reset

= GPS ON-GR.2 (VO2)

27

= GPS ON-GR.2 (VO2)

831778A1.CDR

2.

Set the 87L element with different differential settings for Settings Groups 1 and 2 as shown below

3.

Enable GPS compensation when the GPS signal is valid and switch to Settings Group 2 (with more sensitive settings) as shown below.

10


GE Multilin

10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.4 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENTS

10.4INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENTS 10.4.1 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT ERROR DURING L30 SYNCHRONIZATION

As explained in the Theory of Operation chapter, two or three L30 relays are synchronized to each other and to system frequency to provide digital differential protection and accurate measurements for other protection and control functions.

When an L30 system is starting up, the relays adjust their frequency aggressively to bring all relays into synchronization with the system quickly. The tracking frequency can differ from nominal (or system frequency) by a few Hertz, especially during the first second of synchronization. The 87L function is blocked during synchronization; therefore, the difference between system frequency and relay sampling frequency does not affect 87L function. However, instantaneous elements have additional error caused by the sensitivity of Fourier phasor estimation to the difference between signal frequency and tracking frequency.

To secure instantaneous element operation, it is recommended either to use FlexLogic™ as shown below to block the instantaneous elements during synchronization, or to use a different setting group with more conservative pickup for this brief interval.

Figure 10–1: FLEXLOGIC™ TO BLOCK INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT DURING 87L STARTUP

The elements must be treated selectively. If, for example, the phase undervoltage setting includes margin sufficient to accommodate the maximum additional error on startup, blocking or delay are not needed for phase undervoltage. Similarly, if the phase instantaneous overcurrent setting has sufficient margin, blocking is not needed. Note that significant zerosequence and negative-sequence current or voltage error will not appear during L30 startup, therefore all elements using these quantities are safe.

The table below indicates the maximum error and recommended block durations for different elements.

ELEMENT

Phase undervoltage


MAXIMUM ERROR ON STARTUP,

(OPERATE SIGNAL VS. SETTING)

18%

9%

RECOMMENDED BLOCK

DURATION

0.7 seconds

0.5 seconds

GE Multilin


10

10.4 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENTS 10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

10


GE Multilin

11 COMMISSIONING 11.1 TESTING

11 COMMISSIONING 11.1TESTING

11.1.1 CHANNEL TESTING

The communications system transmits and receives data between two or three terminals for the 87L function. The system is designed to work with multiple channel options including direct and multiplexed optical fiber, G.703, and RS422. The speed is 64 Kbaud in a transparent synchronous mode with automatic synchronous character detection and CRC insertion.

The Local Loopback Channel Test verifies the L30 communication modules are working properly. The Remote Loopback

Channel Test verifies the communication link between the relays meets requirements (BER less than 10

–4

). All tests are verified by using the internal channel monitoring and the monitoring in the Channel Tests. All of the tests presented in this section must be either OK or PASSED.

1.

Verify that a type “W” module is placed in slot ‘W’ in both relays (e.g. W7J).

2.

Interconnect the two relays using the proper media (e.g. single mode fiber cable) observing correct connection of receiving (Rx) and transmitting (Tx) communications paths and turn power on to both relays.

3.

Verify that the Order Code in both relays is correct.

4.

Cycle power off/on in both relays.

5.

Verify and record that both relays indicate In Service on the front display.

6.

Make the following setting change in both relays:


ÖØ

GROUP 1

ÖØ

CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL ELE-

MENTS

Ö


Ö

CURRENT DIFF FUNCTION:

“Enabled”.

7.

Verify and record that both relays have established communications with the following status checks:

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

CHANNEL 1 STATUS

: “OK”

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

CHANNEL 2 STATUS

: “OK” (If used)

8.


TESTING

Ö

TEST MODE

: “Enabled”.

9.


TESTING

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST

ÖØ

LOCAL LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:

"1"

10. Initiate the Local Loopback Channel Tests by making the following setting change:

TESTING

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


ÖØ

LOCAL LOOPBACK FUNCTION:

"Yes"

Expected result: In a few seconds “Yes” should change to “Local Loopback Test PASSED” and then to “No”, signifying the test was successfully completed and the communication modules operated properly.

11. If Channel 2 is used, make the following setting change and repeat Step 10 for Channel 2 as performed for channel 1:

TESTING

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


ÖØ

LOCAL LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:

"2"

12. Verify and record that the Local Loopback Test was performed properly with the following status check:

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

CHANNEL 1(2) LOCAL LOOPBACK STATUS

: "OK"

13. Make the following setting change in one of the relays:

TESTING

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

REMOTE LOOPBACK TEST

ÖØ

REMOTE LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:

"1"

14. Initiate the Remote Loopback Channel Tests by making the following setting change:

TESTING

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

REMOTE LOOPBACK

Ö

REMOTE LOOPBACK FUNCTION:

"Yes"

Expected result: The “Running Remote Loopback Test” message appears; within 60 to 100 sec. the “Remote Loopback Test PASSED” message appears for a few seconds and then changes to “No”, signifying the test successfully completed and communications with the relay were successfully established. The

“Remote Loopback Test FAILED” message indicates that either the communication link quality does not meet requirements (BER less than 10

–4

) or the channel is not established – check the communications link connections.

15. If Channel 2 is used, make the following setting change and repeat Step 14 for Channel 2 as performed for Channel 1:

TESTING

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

REMOTE LOOPBACK TEST

ÖØ

REMOTE LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER:

"2"

16. Verify and record the Remote Loopback Test was performed properly with the following status check:

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

CHANNEL 1(2) REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS:

"OK"

11

GE Multilin


11.1 TESTING 11 COMMISSIONING

11

17. Verify and record that Remote Loopback Test fails during communications failures as follows: start test as per Steps 13 to 14 and in 2 to 5 seconds disconnect the fiber Rx cable on the corresponding channel.

Expected result: The "Running Remote Loopback Test" message appears. When the channel is momentarily cut off, the "Remote Loopback Test FAILED" message is displayed. The status check should read as follows:

ACTUAL VALUES

Ø

STATUS

Ø

CHANNEL TESTS

Ö

CHANNEL 1(2) LOCAL LOOPBACK STATUS:

"Fail"

18. Re-connect the fiber Rx cable. Repeat Steps 13 to 14 and verify that Remote Loopback Test performs properly again.

19. Verify and record that Remote Loopback Test fails if communications are not connected properly by disconnecting the fiber Rx cable and repeating Steps 13 to 14.

Expected result: The

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

CHANNEL 1(2) REMOTE LOOPBACK TEST:

"Fail" message should be constantly on the display.

20. Repeat Steps 13 to 14 and verify that Remote Loopback Test is correct.

21. Make the following setting change in both relays:

TESTING

Ö

TEST MODE

: "Disabled"

NOTE

During channel tests, verify in the

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

Ö

CHANNEL 1(2) LOST PACK-

ETS

display that the values are very low – even 0. If values are comparatively high, settings of communications equipment (if applicable) should be checked.

11.1.2 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TESTS

The 87L clock synchronization is based upon a peer-to-peer architecture in which all relays are Masters. The relays are synchronized in a distributed fashion. The clocks are phase synchronized to each other and frequency synchronized to the power system frequency. The performance requirement for the clock synchronization is a maximum error of ±130

μs.

All tests are verified by using PFLL status displays. All PFLL status displays must be either OK or Fail.

1.

Ensure that Steps 1 through 7 inclusive of the previous section are completed.

2.

Verify and record that both relays have established communications with the following checks after 60 to 120 seconds:

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

CHANNEL 1(2) STATUS:

“OK”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

REMOTE LOOPBACK STATUS:

“n/a”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

PFLL STATUS:

“OK”

3.

Disconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable for less than 66 ms (not possible with direct fiber module).

Expected result:

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


“OK”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


“n/a”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

PFLL STATUS:

“OK”

If fault conditions are applied to the relay during these tests, it trips with a specified 87L operation time.

4.

Disconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable for more than 66 ms but less than 5 seconds.

Expected result:

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


“OK”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


“n/a”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

PFLL STATUS:

“OK”

If fault conditions are applied to the relay (after the channel is brought back) during these tests, it trips with a specified

87L operation time plus 50 to 80 ms required for establishing PFLL after such interruption.

5.

Disconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable for more than 5 seconds.

Expected result:

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


“OK”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


“n/a”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

PFLL STATUS:

“Fail”

6.

Reconnect the fiber Channel 1(2) Tx cable and in 6 to 8 seconds confirm that the relays have re-established communications again with the following status checks:

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

Ö


“OK”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ


“n/a”

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

ÖØ

PFLL STATUS:

“OK”


GE Multilin

11 COMMISSIONING 11.1 TESTING

7.

Apply a current of 0.5 pu at a frequency 1 to 3% higher or lower than nominal only to local relay phase A to verify that frequency tracking will not affect PFLL when only one relay has a current input and both relays track frequency. Wait

200 seconds and verify the following:

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

Ö

PFLL STATUS:

“OK”

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

METERING

ÖØ


Ö

TRACKING FREQUENCY:

actual frequency at both relays

For 3-terminal configuration, the above-indicated tests should be carried out accordingly.

NOTE

11.1.3 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

11

The 87L element has adaptive restraint and dual slope characteristics. The pickup slope settings and the breakpoint settings determine the element characteristics. The relay displays both local and remote current magnitudes and angles and the differential current which helps with start-up activities. When a differential condition is detected, the output operands from the element will be asserted along with energization of faceplate event indicators.

1.

Ensure that relay will not issue any undesired signals to other equipment.

2.

Ensure that relays are connected to the proper communication media, communications tests have been performed and the CHANNEL and PFLL STATUS displays indicate OK.

3.

Minimum pickup test with local current only:

• Ensure that all 87L setting are properly entered into the relay and connect a test set to the relay to inject current into Phase A.

• Slowly increase the current until the relay operates and note the pickup value. The theoretical value of operating current below the breakpoint is given by the following formula, where P is the pickup setting and S

1

is the Slope 1 setting (in decimal format):

I op

= 2

×

P

2

-------------------

2

1

–

2S

1

• Repeat the above test for different slope and pickup settings, if desired.

• Repeat the above tests for Phases B and C.

(EQ 11.1)

4.

Minimum pickup test with local current and simulated remote current (pure internal fault simulation):

• Disconnect the local relay from the communications channel.

• Loop back the transmit signal to the receive input on the back of the relay.

• Wait until the CHANNEL and PFLL status displays indicate OK.

• Slowly increase the current until the relay operates and note the pickup value. The theoretical value of operating current below breakpoint is given by the following formula:

I op

=

2

(

1 + TAP

)

2

– 2S

2

1

(

1 + TAP

2

)

(EQ 11.2)

where TAP represents the CT Tap setting for the corresponding channel.

• Repeat the above test for different slope and pickup settings, if desired.

• During the tests, observe the current phasor at

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

METERING

Ö

87L DIFF CURRENT

Ö

LOCAL IA

.

This phasor should also be seen at

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

METERING

Ö


ÖØ

TERMINAL 1(2) IA

along with a phasor of twice the magnitude at

ACTUAL VALUES

ÖØ

METERING

Ö


ÖØ

IA DIFF

.

NOTE

• Repeat the above tests for Phases B and C.

• Restore the communication circuits to normal.

Download the UR Test software from the GE Multilin website ( http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin ) or contact GE

Multilin for information about the UR current differential test program which allows the user to simulate different operating conditions for verifying correct responses of the relays during commissioning activities.

GE Multilin


11.1 TESTING 11 COMMISSIONING

11

11.1.4 LOCAL-REMOTE RELAY TESTS a) DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP (DTT) TESTS

The direct transfer trip is a function by which one relay sends a signal to a remote relay to cause a trip of remote equipment.

The local relay trip outputs will close upon receiving a direct transfer trip from the remote relay. The test procedure is as follows:

1.

Ensure that relay will not issue any undesired signals to other equipment and all previous tests have been completed successfully.

2.

Cycle power off/on in both relays.

3.

Verify and record that both relays indicate In Service on the faceplate display.

4.

Make the following setting change in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

CUR-

RENT DIFFERENTIAL

menu of both relays:

CURRENT DIFF FUNCTION :

“Enabled”

5.

Verify and record that both relays have established communications by performing the following status check thorough the

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CHANNEL TESTS

menu:


“OK”

6.

At the remote relay, make the following changes in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ

LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELE-

MENTS

ÖØ


menu:

CURRENT DIFF DTT:

“Enabled”

7.

At the Local relay, make the following changes in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUT N1

menu:

CONTACT OUTPUT N1 OPERATE:

“

87L DIFF RECVD DTT A

”


“

87L DIFF RECVD DTT B

”


“

87L DIFF RECVD DTT C

”

8.

At the Local relay, verify that

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

ÖØ

Cont Op N1

is in the “Off” state.

9.

Apply current to phase A of the remote relay and increase until 87L operates.

10. At the Local relay, observe

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

ÖØ

Cont Op N1

is now in the “On” state.

11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 for phases A and B and observe Contact Outputs N2 and N3, respectively.

12. Repeat steps 8 through 11 with the Remote and Local relays inter-changed.

13. Make the following setting change in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ


ÖØ


Ö

CUR-

RENT DIFFERENTIAL

menu of both relays:

CURRENT DIFF FUNCTION :

“Disabled”

14. At the Remote relay, set

SETTINGS

ÖØ

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ


ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUT N1 OPERATE

to the

CURRENT DIFF KEY DTT

operand.

15. At the Local relay, observe under the

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

menu that

CONTACT OUTPUT

N1

,

N2

and

N3

are “Off”.

16. At the Remote relay, set

SETTINGS

ÖØ

TESTING

ÖØ

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

Ö

FORCE Cont Ip N1

to “Closed”.

17. At the Local relay, observe under

ACTUAL VALUES

Ö

STATUS

ÖØ

CONTACT OUTPUTS

that


,

N2

and

N3

are now “On”.

18. At both the Local and Remote relays, return all settings to normal.

b) FINAL TESTS

As proper operation of the relay is fundamentally dependent on the correct installation and wiring of the CTs, it must be confirmed that correct data is brought into the relays by an on-load test in which simultaneous measurements of current and voltage phasors are made at all line terminals. These phasors and differential currents can be monitored at the

ACTUAL VAL-

UES

ÖØ

METERING

Ö


menu where all current magnitudes and angles can be observed and conclusions of proper relay interconnections can be made.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX A

Appendices

APPENDIX A FlexAnalog and FlexInteger ParametersA.1Parameter Lists


A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS

A

Table A–1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 8)

6212

6214

6216

6218

6219

6221

6222

6224

6166

6168

6169

6171

6172

6174

6175

6177

6178

6180

6208

6210

6225

6227

6228

6230

6232

6233

6235

6236

6238

6239

6154

6155

6157

6158

6160

6161

6163

6164

ADDRESS

5688

5690

6144

6146

6148

6150

6152

SRC 1 Ig Mag

SRC 1 Ig Angle

SRC 1 I_0 Mag

SRC 1 I_0 Angle

SRC 1 I_1 Mag

SRC 1 I_1 Angle

SRC 1 I_2 Mag

SRC 1 I_2 Angle

SRC 1 Igd Mag

SRC 1 Igd Angle

SRC 2 Ia RMS

SRC 2 Ib RMS

SRC 2 Ic RMS

SRC 2 In RMS

SRC 2 Ia Mag

SRC 2 Ia Angle

SRC 2 Ib Mag

SRC 2 Ib Angle

SRC 2 Ic Mag

SRC 2 Ic Angle

FLEXANALOG NAME

Channel 1 Asymmetry

Channel 2 Asymmetry

SRC 1 Ia RMS

SRC 1 Ib RMS

SRC 1 Ic RMS

SRC 1 In RMS

SRC 1 Ia Mag

SRC 1 Ia Angle

SRC 1 Ib Mag

SRC 1 Ib Angle

SRC 1 Ic Mag

SRC 1 Ic Angle

SRC 1 In Mag

SRC 1 In Angle

SRC 1 Ig RMS

SRC 2 In Mag

SRC 2 In Angle

SRC 2 Ig RMS

SRC 2 Ig Mag

SRC 2 Ig Angle

SRC 2 I_0 Mag

SRC 2 I_0 Angle

SRC 2 I_1 Mag

SRC 2 I_1 Angle

SRC 2 I_2 Mag

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

UNITS

---

---

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

DESCRIPTION

Channel 1 asymmetry

Channel 2 asymmetry

Source 1 phase A current RMS

Source 1 phase B current RMS

Source 1 phase C current RMS

Source 1 neutral current RMS

Source 1 phase A current magnitude

Source 1 phase A current angle

Source 1 phase B current magnitude

Source 1 phase B current angle

Source 1 phase C current magnitude

Source 1 phase C current angle

Source 1 neutral current magnitude

Source 1 neutral current angle

Source 1 ground current RMS

Source 1 ground current magnitude

Source 1 ground current angle

Source 1 zero-sequence current magnitude

Source 1 zero-sequence current angle

Source 1 positive-sequence current magnitude

Source 1 positive-sequence current angle

Source 1 negative-sequence current magnitude

Source 1 negative-sequence current angle

Source 1 differential ground current magnitude

Source 1 differential ground current angle

Source 2 phase A current RMS

Source 2 phase B current RMS

Source 2 phase C current RMS

Source 2 neutral current RMS

Source 2 phase A current magnitude

Source 2 phase A current angle

Source 2 phase B current magnitude

Source 2 phase B current angle

Source 2 phase C current magnitude

Source 2 phase C current angle

Source 2 neutral current magnitude

Source 2 neutral current angle

Source 2 ground current RMS

Source 2 ground current magnitude

Source 2 ground current angle

Source 2 zero-sequence current magnitude

Source 2 zero-sequence current angle

Source 2 positive-sequence current magnitude

Source 2 positive-sequence current angle

Source 2 negative-sequence current magnitude

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System A-1


A


6694

6696

6697

6699

6720

6722

6724

6726

6675

6677

6679

6680

6682

6683

6685

6686

6688

6690

6691

6693

6662

6664

6665

6667

6668

6670

6671

6673

ADDRESS

6241

6242

6244

6656

6658

6660

6739

6741

6743

6744

6746

6747

6728

6729

6731

6732

6734

6735

6737

FLEXANALOG NAME

SRC 2 I_2 Angle

SRC 2 Igd Mag

SRC 2 Igd Angle

SRC 1 Vag RMS

SRC 1 Vbg RMS

SRC 1 Vcg RMS

SRC 1 Vag Mag

SRC 1 Vag Angle

SRC 1 Vbg Mag

SRC 1 Vbg Angle

SRC 1 Vcg Mag

SRC 1 Vcg Angle

SRC 1 Vab RMS

SRC 1 Vbc RMS

SRC 1 Vca RMS

SRC 1 Vab Mag

SRC 1 Vab Angle

SRC 1 Vbc Mag

SRC 1 Vbc Angle

SRC 1 Vca Mag

SRC 1 Vca Angle

SRC 1 Vx RMS

SRC 1 Vx Mag

SRC 1 Vx Angle

SRC 1 V_0 Mag

SRC 1 V_0 Angle

SRC 1 V_1 Mag

SRC 1 V_1 Angle

SRC 1 V_2 Mag

SRC 1 V_2 Angle

SRC 2 Vag RMS

SRC 2 Vbg RMS

SRC 2 Vcg RMS

SRC 2 Vag Mag

SRC 2 Vag Angle

SRC 2 Vbg Mag

SRC 2 Vbg Angle

SRC 2 Vcg Mag

SRC 2 Vcg Angle

SRC 2 Vab RMS

SRC 2 Vbc RMS

SRC 2 Vca RMS

SRC 2 Vab Mag

SRC 2 Vab Angle

SRC 2 Vbc Mag

SRC 2 Vbc Angle

SRC 2 Vca Mag

Volts

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Volts

Volts

Volts

UNITS

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Volts

Volts

Volts

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Volts

Volts

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

DESCRIPTION

Source 2 negative-sequence current angle

Source 2 differential ground current magnitude

Source 2 differential ground current angle

Source 1 phase AG voltage RMS

Source 1 phase BG voltage RMS

Source 1 phase CG voltage RMS

Source 1 phase AG voltage magnitude

Source 1 phase AG voltage angle

Source 1 phase BG voltage magnitude

Source 1 phase BG voltage angle

Source 1 phase CG voltage magnitude

Source 1 phase CG voltage angle

Source 1 phase AB voltage RMS

Source 1 phase BC voltage RMS

Source 1 phase CA voltage RMS

Source 1 phase AB voltage magnitude

Source 1 phase AB voltage angle

Source 1 phase BC voltage magnitude

Source 1 phase BC voltage angle

Source 1 phase CA voltage magnitude

Source 1 phase CA voltage angle

Source 1 auxiliary voltage RMS

Source 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude

Source 1 auxiliary voltage angle

Source 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude

Source 1 zero-sequence voltage angle

Source 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude

Source 1 positive-sequence voltage angle

Source 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude

Source 1 negative-sequence voltage angle

Source 2 phase AG voltage RMS

Source 2 phase BG voltage RMS

Source 2 phase CG voltage RMS

Source 2 phase AG voltage magnitude

Source 2 phase AG voltage angle

Source 2 phase BG voltage magnitude

Source 2 phase BG voltage angle

Source 2 phase CG voltage magnitude

Source 2 phase CG voltage angle

Source 2 phase AB voltage RMS

Source 2 phase BC voltage RMS

Source 2 phase CA voltage RMS

Source 2 phase AB voltage magnitude

Source 2 phase AB voltage angle

Source 2 phase BC voltage magnitude

Source 2 phase BC voltage angle

Source 2 phase CA voltage magnitude

APPENDIX A

A-2 L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

APPENDIX A A.1 PARAMETER LISTS


7200

7202

7204

7206

7208

7210

7212

7214

7176

7178

7180

7182

7184

7186

7188

7190

7192

7193

7194

7195

6758

6760

6761

6763

7168

7170

7172

7174

ADDRESS

6749

6750

6752

6754

6755

6757

7227

7552

7553

9024

9026

9027

7216

7218

7220

7222

7224

7225

7226

FLEXANALOG NAME

SRC 2 Vca Angle

SRC 2 Vx RMS

SRC 2 Vx Mag

SRC 2 Vx Angle

SRC 2 V_0 Mag

SRC 2 V_0 Angle

SRC 2 V_1 Mag

SRC 2 V_1 Angle

SRC 2 V_2 Mag

SRC 2 V_2 Angle

SRC 1 P

SRC 1 Pa

SRC 1 Pb

SRC 1 Pc

SRC 1 Q

SRC 1 Qa

SRC 1 Qb

SRC 1 Qc

SRC 1 S

SRC 1 Sa

SRC 1 Sb

SRC 1 Sc

SRC 1 PF

SRC 1 Phase A PF

SRC 1 Phase B PF

SRC 1 Phase C PF

SRC 2 P

SRC 2 Pa

SRC 2 Pb

SRC 2 Pc

SRC 2 Q

SRC 2 Qa

SRC 2 Qb

SRC 2 Qc

SRC 2 S

SRC 2 Sa

SRC 2 Sb

SRC 2 Sc

SRC 2 PF

SRC 2 Phase A PF

SRC 2 Phase B PF

SRC 2 Phase C PF

SRC 1 Frequency

SRC 2 Frequency

Prefault Ia Mag [0]

Prefault Ia Ang [0]

Prefault Ib Mag [0]

Watts

Watts

Watts

Watts

Vars

Vars

Vars

Vars

---

---

---

VA

VA

VA

VA

---

Vars

Vars

Vars

Vars

UNITS

Degrees

Volts

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Watts

Watts

Watts

Watts

VA

---

---

---

VA

VA

VA

---

Hz

Hz

Amps

Degrees

Amps

DESCRIPTION

Source 2 phase CA voltage angle

Source 2 auxiliary voltage RMS

Source 2 auxiliary voltage magnitude

Source 2 auxiliary voltage angle

Source 2 zero-sequence voltage magnitude

Source 2 zero-sequence voltage angle

Source 2 positive-sequence voltage magnitude

Source 2 positive-sequence voltage angle

Source 2 negative-sequence voltage magnitude

Source 2 negative-sequence voltage angle

Source 1 three-phase real power

Source 1 phase A real power

Source 1 phase B real power

Source 1 phase C real power

Source 1 three-phase reactive power

Source 1 phase A reactive power

Source 1 phase B reactive power

Source 1 phase C reactive power

Source 1 three-phase apparent power

Source 1 phase A apparent power

Source 1 phase B apparent power

Source 1 phase C apparent power

Source 1 three-phase power factor

Source 1 phase A power factor

Source 1 phase B power factor

Source 1 phase C power factor

Source 2 three-phase real power

Source 2 phase A real power

Source 2 phase B real power

Source 2 phase C real power

Source 2 three-phase reactive power

Source 2 phase A reactive power

Source 2 phase B reactive power

Source 2 phase C reactive power

Source 2 three-phase apparent power

Source 2 phase A apparent power

Source 2 phase B apparent power

Source 2 phase C apparent power

Source 2 three-phase power factor

Source 2 phase A power factor

Source 2 phase B power factor

Source 2 phase C power factor

Source 1 frequency

Source 2 frequency

Fault 1 pre-fault phase A current magnitude

Fault 1 pre-fault phase A current angle

Fault 1 pre-fault phase B current magnitude

A

GE Multilin



A


9220

9222

9223

9344

9346

9348

9350

9352

9050

9051

9053

9054

9056

9057

9059

9060

9061

9216

9218

9219

9038

9039

9041

9042

9044

9045

9047

9048

ADDRESS

9029

9030

9032

9033

9035

9036

9368

9369

9370

9371

9372

9373

9354

9356

9358

9360

9362

9364

9366

FLEXANALOG NAME

Prefault Ib Ang [0]

Prefault Ic Mag [0]

Prefault Ic Ang [0]

Prefault Va Mag [0]

Prefault Va Ang [0]

Prefault Vb Mag [0]

Prefault Vb Ang [0]

Prefault Vc Mag [0]

Prefault Vc Ang [0]

Postfault Ia Mag [0]

Postfault Ia Ang [0]

Postfault Ib Mag [0]

Postfault Ib Ang [0]

Postfault Ic Mag [0]

Postfault Ic Ang [0]

Postfault Va Mag [0]

Postfault Va Ang [0]

Postfault Vb Mag [0]

Postfault Vb Ang [0]

Postfault Vc Mag [0]

Postfault Vc Ang [0]

Fault Type [0]

Fault Location [0]

Synchchk 1 Delta V

Synchchk 1 Delta F

Synchchk 1 Delta Phs

Synchchk 2 Delta V

Synchchk 2 Delta F

Synchchk 2 Delta Phs

Local IA Mag

Local IB Mag

Local IC Mag

Terminal 1 IA Mag

Terminal 1 IB Mag

Terminal 1 IC Mag

Terminal 2 IA Mag

Terminal 2 IB Mag

Terminal 2 IC Mag

Diff Curr IA Mag

Diff Curr IB Mag

Diff Curr IC Mag

Local IA Angle

Local IB Angle

Local IC Angle

Terminal 1 IA Angle

Terminal 1 IB Angle

Terminal 1 IC Angle

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

---

---

Volts

Hz

Degrees

Volts

Hz

Degrees

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

UNITS

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

DESCRIPTION

Fault 1 pre-fault phase B current angle

Fault 1 pre-fault phase C current magnitude

Fault 1 pre-fault phase C current angle

Fault 1 pre-fault phase A voltage magnitude

Fault 1 pre-fault phase A voltage angle

Fault 1 pre-fault phase B voltage magnitude

Fault 1 pre-fault phase B voltage angle

Fault 1 pre-fault phase C voltage magnitude

Fault 1 pre-fault phase C voltage angle

Fault 1 post-fault phase A current magnitude

Fault 1 post-fault phase A current angle

Fault 1 post-fault phase B current magnitude

Fault 1 post-fault phase B current angle

Fault 1 post-fault phase C current magnitude

Fault 1 post-fault phase C current angle

Fault 1 post-fault phase A voltage magnitude

Fault 1 post-fault phase A voltage angle

Fault 1 post-fault phase B voltage magnitude

Fault 1 post-fault phase B voltage angle

Fault 1 post-fault phase C voltage magnitude

Fault 1 post-fault phase C voltage angle

Fault 1 type

Fault 1 location

Synchrocheck 1 delta voltage

Synchrocheck 1 delta frequency

Synchrocheck 1 delta phase

Synchrocheck 2 delta voltage

Synchrocheck 2 delta frequency

Synchrocheck 2 delta phase

Local terminal phase A current magnitude

Local terminal phase B current magnitude

Local terminal phase C current magnitude

Remote terminal 1 phase A current magnitude

Remote terminal 1 phase B current magnitude

Remote terminal 1 phase C current magnitude

Remote terminal 2 phase A current magnitude

Remote terminal 2 phase B current magnitude

Remote terminal 2 phase C current magnitude

Differential current phase A magnitude

Differential current phase B magnitude

Differential current phase C magnitude

Local terminal current phase A angle

Local terminal current phase B angle

Local terminal current phase C angle

Remote terminal 1 current phase A angle

Remote terminal 1 current phase B angle

Remote terminal 1 current phase C angle

APPENDIX A


GE Multilin

APPENDIX A A.1 PARAMETER LISTS


9553

9554

9556

9557

9559

9560

9562

9563

9425

9536

9538

9539

9541

9542

9544

9545

9547

9548

9550

9551

9380

9382

9384

9386

9388

9390

9421

9423

ADDRESS

9374

9375

9376

9377

9378

9379

9565

9566

9568

9569

9571

9572

9574

9575

9577

9578

9580

9581

12306

FLEXANALOG NAME

Terminal 2 IA Angle

Terminal 2 IB Angle

Terminal 2 IC Angle

Diff Curr IA Angle

Diff Curr IB Angle

Diff Curr IC Angle

Op Square Curr IA

Op Square Curr IB

Op Square Curr IC

Rest Square Curr IA

Rest Square Curr IB

Rest Square Curr IC

87L Harm2 Iad Mag

87L Harm2 Ibd Mag

87L Harm2 Icd Mag

PMU 1 Va Mag

PMU 1 Va Angle

PMU 1 Vb Mag

PMU 1 Vb Angle

PMU 1 Vc Mag

PMU 1 Vc Angle

PMU 1 Vx Mag

PMU 1 Vx Angle

PMU 1 V1 Mag

PMU 1 V1 Angle

PMU 1 V2 Mag

PMU 1 V2 Angle

PMU 1 V0 Mag

PMU 1 V0 Angle

PMU 1 Ia Mag

PMU 1 Ia Angle

PMU 1 Ib Mag

PMU 1 Ib Angle

PMU 1 Ic Mag

PMU 1 Ic Angle

PMU 1 Ig Mag

PMU 1 Ig Angle

PMU 1 I1 Mag

PMU 1 I1 Angle

PMU 1 I2 Mag

PMU 1 I2 Angle

PMU 1 I0 Mag

PMU 1 I0 Angle

PMU 1 Freq

PMU 1 df dt

PMU 1 Conf Ch

Oscill Num Triggers

Amps

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Volts

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

Amps

UNITS

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Amps

Degrees

Hz

Hz/s

---

---

DESCRIPTION

Remote terminal 2 current phase A angle

Remote terminal 2 current phase B angle

Remote terminal 2 current phase C angle

Differential current phase A angle

Differential current phase B angle

Differential current phase C angle

Phase A operating square current

Phase B operating square current

Phase C operating square current

Phase A restraint square current

Phase B restraint square current

Phase C restraint square current

Current differential second harmonic Iad magnitude

Current differential second harmonic Ibd magnitude

Current differential second harmonic Icd magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A voltage magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A voltage angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 auxiliary voltage angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence voltage angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence voltage angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence voltage angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence current magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence current angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence current magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence current angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence current magnitude

Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence current angle

Phasor measurement unit 1 frequency

Phasor measurement unit 1 rate of change of frequency

Phasor measurement unit 1 configuration change counter

Oscillography number of triggers

A

GE Multilin



A


13554

13555

13556

13557

13558

13559

13560

13561

13532

13534

13536

13538

13540

13542

13544

13546

13548

13550

13552

13553

13516

13518

13520

13522

13524

13526

13528

13530

ADDRESS

13504

13506

13508

13510

13512

13514

13562

13563

13564

13565

13566

13567

13568

13569

13570

13571

13572

13573

13574

FLEXANALOG NAME

DCMA Inputs 1 Value

DCMA Inputs 2 Value

DCMA Inputs 3 Value

DCMA Inputs 4 Value

DCMA Inputs 5 Value

DCMA Inputs 6 Value

DCMA Inputs 7 Value

DCMA Inputs 8 Value

DCMA Inputs 9 Value

DCMA Inputs 10 Value















RTD Inputs 1 Value

RTD Inputs 2 Value

RTD Inputs 3 Value

RTD Inputs 4 Value

RTD Inputs 5 Value

RTD Inputs 6 Value

RTD Inputs 7 Value

RTD Inputs 8 Value

RTD Inputs 9 Value

RTD Inputs 10 Value

RTD Inputs 11 Value

RTD Inputs 12 Value

RTD Inputs 13 Value

RTD Inputs 14 Value

RTD Inputs 15 Value

RTD Inputs 16 Value

RTD Inputs 17 Value

RTD Inputs 18 Value

RTD Inputs 19 Value

RTD Inputs 20 Value

RTD Inputs 21 Value

RTD Inputs 22 Value

RTD Inputs 23 Value

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA

---

--mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA

UNITS

mA mA mA mA mA mA

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

DESCRIPTION

dcmA input 1 actual value dcmA input 2 actual value dcmA input 3 actual value dcmA input 4 actual value dcmA input 5 actual value dcmA input 6 actual value dcmA input 7 actual value dcmA input 8 actual value dcmA input 9 actual value dcmA input 10 actual value dcmA input 11 actual value dcmA input 12 actual value dcmA input 13 actual value dcmA input 14 actual value dcmA input 15 actual value dcmA input 16 actual value dcmA input 17 actual value dcmA input 18 actual value dcmA input 19 actual value dcmA input 20 actual value dcmA input 21 actual value dcmA input 22 actual value dcmA input 23 actual value dcmA input 24 actual value

RTD input 1 actual value
























APPENDIX A

GE Multilin

APPENDIX A


32768

39425

39427

39429

39431

39433

39435

39437

13589

13590

13591

13592

13593

13594

13595

13596

13597

13598

13599

24459

13581

13582

13583

13584

13585

13586

13587

13588

ADDRESS

13575

13576

13577

13578

13579

13580

39439

45584

45586

45588

45590

45592

45594

45596

45598

45600

45602

45604

45606

FLEXANALOG NAME

RTD Inputs 24 Value

RTD Inputs 25 Value

RTD Inputs 26 Value

RTD Inputs 27 Value

RTD Inputs 28 Value

RTD Inputs 29 Value

RTD Inputs 30 Value

RTD Inputs 31 Value

RTD Inputs 32 Value

RTD Inputs 33 Value

RTD Inputs 34 Value

RTD Inputs 35 Value

RTD Inputs 36 Value

RTD Inputs 37 Value

RTD Inputs 38 Value

RTD Inputs 39 Value

RTD Inputs 40 Value

RTD Inputs 41 Value

RTD Inputs 42 Value

RTD Inputs 43 Value

RTD Inputs 44 Value

RTD Inputs 45 Value

RTD Inputs 46 Value

RTD Inputs 47 Value

RTD Inputs 48 Value

Active Setting Group

Tracking Frequency

FlexElement 1 Value

FlexElement 2 Value

FlexElement 3 Value

FlexElement 4 Value

FlexElement 5 Value

FlexElement 6 Value

FlexElement 7 Value

FlexElement 8 Value

GOOSE Analog In 1

GOOSE Analog In 2

GOOSE Analog In 3

GOOSE Analog In 4

GOOSE Analog In 5

GOOSE Analog In 6

GOOSE Analog In 7

GOOSE Analog In 8

GOOSE Analog In 9

GOOSE Analog In 10

GOOSE Analog In 11

GOOSE Analog In 12

---

---

---

---

---

Hz

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

DESCRIPTION


























Current setting group

Tracking frequency

FlexElement™ 1 actual value








IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1













A

GE Multilin


A.1 PARAMETER LISTS APPENDIX A

A


ADDRESS

45608

45610

45612

45614

61449

FLEXANALOG NAME

GOOSE Analog In 13

GOOSE Analog In 14

GOOSE Analog In 15

GOOSE Analog In 16

PMU Num Triggers

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

DESCRIPTION





Phasor measurement unit recording number of triggers

A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS

Table A–2: FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS

9976

9978

9980

9982

9984

9986

9988

9990

ADDRESS

9736

9738

9740

9968

9970

9972

9974

9992

9994

9996

9998

FLEXINTEGER NAME

PMU 1 SOC

PMU 1 FRACSEC

PMU 1 STAT

GOOSE UInt Input 1

GOOSE UInt Input 2

GOOSE UInt Input 3

GOOSE UInt Input 4

GOOSE UInt Input 5

GOOSE UInt Input 6

GOOSE UInt Input 7

GOOSE UInt Input 8

GOOSE UInt Input 9

GOOSE UInt Input 10

GOOSE UInt Input 11

GOOSE UInt Input 12

GOOSE UInt Input 13

GOOSE UInt Input 14

GOOSE UInt Input 15

GOOSE UInt Input 16

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

seconds seconds

---

DESCRIPTION

PMU 1 SOC timestamps

PMU 1 FRACSEC timestamps

PMU 1 STAT flags

IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1

















GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The UR-series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:

• The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master computer.

• For Modbus

®

, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.

B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER

B

The Modbus

®

RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10Base-T, or 10Base-F. Data flow is half-duplex in all configurations. See chapter 3 for details on communications wiring.

Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).

The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,

4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the Communications section of chapter 5 for further details.

The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay’s slave address (unless the address is the broadcast address – see below).

A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will accept any address when the Modbus

®

RTU protocol is used.

B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER

Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.

Table B–1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT

DESCRIPTION

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

DATA

CRC

DEAD TIME

SIZE

1 byte

1 byte

N bytes

2 bytes

3.5 bytes transmission time

• SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent bus contention. All of the relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see chapter 5 for details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.

A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated with function code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System B-1

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL APPENDIX B

B

• FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section for further details.

• DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.

• CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus

®

includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check

(CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC.

• DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.

B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM

The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial

(11000000000000101B). The 16-bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.

A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.

Table B–2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM

SYMBOLS:

-->

A

Alow

Ahigh

CRC i,j

(+) data transfer

16 bit working register low order byte of A high order byte of A

16 bit CRC-16 result loop counters logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator

N

Di total number of data bytes i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)

G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits are shifted right one location)

ALGORITHM:

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.

2.

3.

4.

10.

11.

FFFF (hex) --> A

0 --> i

0 --> j

Di (+) Alow --> Alow j + 1 --> j shr (A)

Is there a carry?

Is j = 8?

i + 1 --> i

Is i = N?

A --> CRC

No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.

No: go to 5; Yes: continue

No: go to 3; Yes: continue

B-2 L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES

Modbus

®

officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.

FUNCTION CODE

HEX DEC

03

04

3

4

05

06

10

5

6

16

MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION

Read holding registers

Read holding registers

Force single coil

Preset single register

Preset multiple registers

Read actual values or settings

Read actual values or settings

Execute operation

Store single setting

Store multiple settings

B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)

B

This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.

Data registers are always 16-bit (two-byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus memory map table for exact details on the data registers.

Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h. The L30 interpretation allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.

The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.

Table B–3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE

MASTER TRANSMISSION

PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low

NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high

NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low

CRC - low

CRC - high

EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

04

40

50

00

03

A7

4A

SLAVE RESPONSE

PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

DATA #1 - high

DATA #1 - low

DATA #2 - high

DATA #2 - low

DATA #3 - high

DATA #3 - low

CRC - low

CRC - high

EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

04

06

00

28

01

2C

00

00

0D

60

GE Multilin


B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B

B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)

B

This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Sum-

mary of operation codes table below.

The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the slave device 11h (17 decimal) to perform a reset. The high and low code value bytes always have the values “FF” and “00” respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code.



PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

OPERATION CODE - high

OPERATION CODE - low

CODE VALUE - high

CODE VALUE - low

CRC - low

CRC - high

EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

05

00

01

FF

00

DF

6A

SLAVE RESPONSE

PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

OPERATION CODE - high

OPERATION CODE - low

CODE VALUE - high

CODE VALUE - low

CRC - low

CRC - high

EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

05

00

01

FF

00

DF

6A

Table B–5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION

CODE (HEX)

0000

0001

0005

0006

1000 to 103F

DEFINITION

NO OPERATION

RESET

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS

CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY

VIRTUAL IN 1 to 64 ON/OFF

DESCRIPTION

Does not do anything.

Performs the same function as the faceplate

RESET key.

Performs the same function as the faceplate

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu command.

Clears all oscillography records.

Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 64 either “ON” or “OFF”.

B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)

This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device

11h (17 dec).



PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE



DATA - high

DATA - low

CRC - low

CRC - high

EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

06

40

51

00

C8

CE

DD

SLAVE RESPONSE

PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE



DATA - high

DATA - low

CRC - low

CRC - high

EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

06

40

51

00

C8

CE

DD


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)

This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to slave device 11h (17 decimal).



PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo

NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi

NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo

BYTE COUNT

DATA #1 - high order byte

DATA #1 - low order byte

DATA #2 - high order byte

DATA #2 - low order byte

CRC - low order byte

CRC - high order byte

EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

10

40

51

00

02

01

12

62

04

00

C8

00

SLAVE RESPONSE

PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo

NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi

NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo

CRC - lo

CRC - hi

EXMAPLE (HEX)

11

10

40

51

00

02

07

64

B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES

B

Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order bit of the function code set to 1.

The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.



PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE



EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

39

CD

F2

SLAVE RESPONSE

PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

ERROR CODE



EXAMPLE (HEX)

11

B9

01

93

95

GE Multilin


B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B

B

B.3FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS a) DESCRIPTION

The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)" and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from the UR relay, use the following steps:

1.

Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case sensitive.

2.

Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The

"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.

3.

Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.

4.

If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).

The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections.

b) OTHER PROTOCOLS

All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for example, TFTP or MMS).

c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES

Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.

d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography section in Chapter 5 for additional details.

The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the

Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.

The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.

Writing “Yes” (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last

Cleared Date to the present date and time.

To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:

OSCnnnn.CFG

and

OSCnnn.DAT

e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES

Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chapter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

datalog.cfg

and datalog.dat

To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files.

dataloga.cfg

and dataloga.dat

To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it:

• To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime

• To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime

• Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.

f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:

EVT.TXT

To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:

EVTnnn.TXT

(replace nnn

with the desired starting record number)

To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:

EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy

(replace xxxxx

with the starting record number and yyyyy

with the ending record number)

g) READING FAULT REPORT FILES

Fault report data has been available via the L30 file retrieval mechanism since UR firmware version 2.00. The file name is

faultReport#####.htm

. The ##### refers to the fault report record number. The fault report number is a counter that indicates how many fault reports have ever occurred. The counter rolls over at a value of 65535. Only the last ten fault reports are available for retrieval; a request for a non-existent fault report file will yield a null file. The current value fault report counter is available in “Number of Fault Reports” Modbus register at location 0x3020.

For example, if 14 fault reports have occurred then the files faultReport5.htm, faultReport6.htm, up to faultReport14.htm

are available to be read. The expected use of this feature has an external master periodically polling the “Number of Fault Reports' register. If the value changes, then the master reads all the new files.

The contents of the file is in standard HTML notation and can be viewed via any commercial browser.

B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION

B


Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.


The command password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of “0” removes command password protection.

When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. Command security is required to change the command password. Similarly, the setting password is set up at memory location 4002. These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

Ö

PASSWORD SECURITY

menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.

To gain command level security access, the command password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain setting level security access, the setting password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered setting password must match the current setting password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.

GE Multilin


B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B

B

Command and setting passwords each have a 30 minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password, and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the setting password timer and writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the command password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used to confirm whether a command password is enabled or disabled (a value of 0 represents disabled). The value read at memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a setting password is enabled or disabled.

Command or setting password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

B.4MEMORY MAPPING


B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 52)

ADDR REGISTER NAME

Product Information (Read Only)

0000

0002

UR Product Type

Product Version

Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)

0010 Serial Number

0020

0022

Manufacturing Date

Modification Number

0040

0090

0093

00A0

Order Code

Ethernet MAC Address

Reserved (13 items)

CPU Module Serial Number

00B0

00C0

CPU Supplier Serial Number

Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items)

Self Test Targets (Read Only)

0200 Self Test States (2 items)

Front Panel (Read Only)

0204 LED Column n State, n = 1 to 10 (10 items)

0220

0248

Display Message

Last Key Pressed

Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)

0280 Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke

040F

0410

0411

0412

0413

0414

0415

0416

0417

0418

0419

041A

041B

0407

0408

0409

040A

040B

040C

040D

040E

Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (64 modules)

0400 Virtual Input 1 State

0401

0402

Virtual Input 2 State


0403

0404

0405

0406


























RANGE

0 to 65535

0 to 655.35

---

0 to 4294967295

0 to 65535

---

---

---

---

---

---

0 to 4294967295

0 to 65535

---

0 to 47

0 to 42

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

0

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

1

---

1

1

STEP FORMAT

1

0.01

F001

F001

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

---

---

1

F203

F050

F001

F204

F072

F001

F203

F203

F203

F143

F501

F204

F530

F190

0

(none)

0 (None)

0 (No key -- use between real keys)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

DEFAULT

0

1

“0”

0

0

“Order Code x”

0

0

(none)

(none)

(none)

0

B

GE Multilin



B


0431

0432

0433

0434

0435

0436

0437

0438

0429

042A

042B

042C

042D

042E

042F

0430

0421

0422

0423

0424

0425

0426

0427

0428


041C Virtual Input 29 State

041D

041E

041F

0420





























0439

043A

043B

043C





043D

043E



043F Virtual Input 64 State

Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)

0800 Digital Counter 1 Value

0802 Digital Counter 1 Frozen

0804

0806

0808

0810

0818

0820

Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp

Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us

...Repeated for Digital Counter 2




0828

0830



0838 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 8

FlexStates (Read Only)

0900 FlexState Bits (16 items)

Element States (Read Only)

1000 Element Operate States (64 items)

-2147483647 to

2147483647

-2147483647 to

2147483647

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

RANGE

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

1

1

1

1

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

FORMAT

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

F108

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

F004

F004

F050

F003

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

F001

F502

APPENDIX B

0

0

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

DEFAULT

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0

0

0

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B



User Displays Actuals (Read Only)

1080 Formatted user-definable displays (16 items)

Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)

1200 User Map Values (256 items)

Element Targets (Read Only)

14C0

14C1

Target Sequence

Number of Targets

Element Targets (Read/Write)

14C2 Target to Read

Element Targets (Read Only)

14C3 Target Message

Digital Input/Output States (Read Only)

1500 Contact Input States (6 items)

1508

1510

1518

1520

Virtual Input States (8 items)

Contact Output States (4 items)

Contact Output Current States (4 items)

Contact Output Voltage States (4 items)

1528

1530

Virtual Output States (6 items)

Contact Output Detectors (4 items)

Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)

1540 Remote Device States

1542

1550

1551

1552

Remote Input States (4 items)

Remote Devices Online

Remote Double-Point Status Input 1 State


1553

1554



1555 Remote Double-Point Status Input 5 State

Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)

15A0

15A8

15B0

15B1

Direct Input 1-1 State (8 items)

Direct Input 1-2 State (8 items)

Direct Input 1 State

Direct Input 2 State

Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)

1610 Ethernet primary fibre channel status

1611 Ethernet secondary fibre channel status

Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)

1618

1619

161B

161D

Data logger channel count

Time of oldest available samples

Time of newest available samples

Data logger duration

Channel Status Commands (Read/Write Command)

1630 L90 Channel Status Clear

Channel Status Actuals (Read/Write Command)

1638 Channel 1 Asymmetry

1638 Channel 2 Asymmetry

Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)

1800

1802

Source 1 Phase A Current RMS

Source 1 Phase B Current RMS

1804

1806

1808

180A

180B

Source 1 Phase C Current RMS

Source 1 Neutral Current RMS

Source 1 Phase A Current Magnitude

Source 1 Phase A Current Angle

Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude

RANGE

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 16

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 999.9

0 to 1

-65.535 to 65.535

-99.999 to 99.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999


UNITS STEP FORMAT

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

F200

F001

F001

F001

F001

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--channel seconds seconds days

1

1

1

0.1

--ms ms

1

0.001

0.001

A

A

A

A

A degrees

A

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.1

0.001

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F108

F108

F500

F500

F134

F134

F200

F500

F500

F500

F500

F500

F500

F500

F500

F500

F126

F605

F605

F605

F605

F605

F001

F050

F050

F001

F126

F004

F004

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F002

F060

DEFAULT

(none)

0

0

0

0

“.”

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (No)

3 (Bad)

3 (Bad)

3 (Bad)

3 (Bad)

3 (Bad)

0 (No)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0

0

0 (Fail)

0 (Fail)

B

GE Multilin



B


1814

1816

1818

1819

181B

181C

181E

181F


180D Source 1 Phase B Current Angle

180E

1810

1811

1813

Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude

Source 1 Phase C Current Angle

Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude

Source 1 Neutral Current Angle

Source 1 Ground Current RMS

Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude

Source 1 Ground Current Angle

Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude

Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle

Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude

Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle

Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude

1821

1822

1824

1825

1840

1880

18C0

1900

Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle

Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude

Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle

Reserved (27 items)

...Repeated for Source 2




1940 ...Repeated for Source 6

Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)

1A00

1A02

Source 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS

Source 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS

1A04

1A06

1A08

1A09

Source 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS

Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude

Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle

Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude

1A0B Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle

1A0C Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude

1A0E Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle

1A0F Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS

1A11

1A13

1A15

1A17

Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS

Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS

Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude

Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle

1A18 Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude

1A1A Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle

1A1B Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude

1A1D Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle

1A1E Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS

1A20 Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude

1A22

1A23

Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle

Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude

1A25

1A26

1A28

1A29

Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle

Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude

Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle

Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude

1A2B Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle

1A2C Reserved (20 items)

1A40

1A80



1AC0 ...Repeated for Source 4

RANGE

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

---

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

---

0.001

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

STEP

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.1

0.001

0.1

---

UNITS

degrees

A degrees

A degrees

A

A degrees

A degrees

A degrees

A degrees

A degrees

---

FORMAT

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F001

V degrees

V degrees

V

V degrees

V degrees

V degrees

V degrees

---

V

V

V

V degrees

V degrees

V degrees

V

V

V

V degrees

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

---

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F001

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F060

F060

F060

F002

F060

F060

F060

F060

F002

F060

APPENDIX B

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.4 MEMORY MAPPING



1B00 ...Repeated for Source 5

1B40 ...Repeated for Source 6

Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)

1C00 Source 1 Three Phase Real Power

RANGE

1C02

1C04

1C06

1C08

1C0A

Source 1 Phase A Real Power

Source 1 Phase B Real Power

Source 1 Phase C Real Power

Source 1 Three Phase Reactive Power

Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

1C0C

1C0E

1C10

1C12

1C14

1C16

Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power

Source 1 Phase C Reactive Power

Source 1 Three Phase Apparent Power

Source 1 Phase A Apparent Power

Source 1 Phase B Apparent Power

Source 1 Phase C Apparent Power

1C18

1C19

Source 1 Three Phase Power Factor

Source 1 Phase A Power Factor

1C1A Source 1 Phase B Power Factor

1C1B Source 1 Phase C Power Factor

1C1C Reserved (4 items)

1C20 ...Repeated for Source 2

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

-0.999 to 1

-0.999 to 1

-0.999 to 1

-0.999 to 1

---

1C40

1C60



1C80 ...Repeated for Source 5

1CA0 ...Repeated for Source 6

Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)

1D80

1D82

1D84

Frequency for Source 1



1D86

1D88



1D8A Frequency for Source 6

Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules)

21E0

21E2

21E4

21E6

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase A

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase B

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase C

Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase A

---

---

---

---

---

---

0 to 99999999

0 to 99999999

0 to 99999999

0 to 65535

21E7

21E8

Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase B

Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase C

21E9 Breaker 1 Operating Time

21EA ...Repeated for Breaker Arcing Current 2

Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules)

2224 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Clear Command

2225 Breaker 2 Arcing Current Clear Command

Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)

2230 Reset Unauthorized Access

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1


kA

2

-cyc kA

2

-cyc kA

2

-cyc ms ms ms ms

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

---

---

---

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

--var var var var

W

W

W

W

VA

VA

VA

VA

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F013

F013

F013

F013

F001

F126

F126

F126

F060

F060

F060

F001

F001

F001

F001

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (No)

0 (No)

0 (No)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

B

GE Multilin



B



Fault Location (Read Only) (5 modules)

2340

2342

2343

2345

Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude

Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Angle

Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude

Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Angle

2346

2348

2349

234B

234C

234E

234F

2351

Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude

Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Angle

Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Magnitude

Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Angle

Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Magnitude

Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Angle

Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Magnitude

Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Angle

235E

2360

2361

2363

2364

2365

2366

238C

2352

2354

2355

2357

2358

235A

235B

235D

Fault 1 Phase A Current Magnitude

Fault 1 Phase A Current Angle

Fault 1 Phase B Current Magnitude

Fault 1 Phase B Current Angle

Fault 1 Phase C Current Magnitude

Fault 1 Phase C Current Angle

Fault 1 Phase A Voltage Magnitude

Fault 1 Phase A Voltage Angle

Fault 1 Phase B Voltage Magnitude

Fault 1 Phase B Voltage Angle

Fault 1 Phase C Voltage Magnitude

Fault 1 Phase C Voltage Angle

Fault 1 Type

Fault 1 Location based on Line length units (km or miles)

...Repeated for Fault 2


23B2

23D8



Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)

2400 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage

RANGE

-1000000000000 to

1000000000000

0 to 655.35

0 to 179.9

2402

2403

Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency

Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase

2404 ...Repeated for Synchrocheck 2

Autoreclose Status (Read Only) (6 modules)

2410

2411

Autoreclose 1 Count

Autoreclose 2 Count

2412

2413

2414

2415

Autoreclose 3 Count

Autoreclose 4 Count

Autoreclose 5 Count

Autoreclose 6 Count

Current differential actual values (Read Only)

2480 Local IA Magnitude

2482

2484

Local IB Magnitude

Local IC Magnitude

2486

2488

248A

248C

248E

2490

Terminal 1 IA Magnitude

Terminal 1 IB Magnitude

Terminal 1 IC Magnitude

Terminal 2 IA Magnitude

Terminal 2 IB Magnitude

Terminal 2 IC Magnitude

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 11

-3276.7 to 3276.7

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

V

Hz degrees

1

0.01

0.1

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

---

---

---

---

---

---

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

1

0.1

V degrees

V degrees

A degrees

A degrees

A degrees

A degrees

A degrees

V degrees

A degrees

V degrees

V degrees

V degrees

---

---


F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F148

F002

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

1

1

1

1

1

1

F060

F001

F001

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

APPENDIX B

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (NA)

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


249A

249B

249C

249D

249E

249F

24A0

24A1


2492 Differential Current IA Magnitude

2494

2496

2498

2499

Differential Current IB Magnitude

Differential Current IC Magnitude

Local IA Angle

Local IB Angle

Local IC Angle

Terminal 1 IA Angle

Terminal 1 IB Angle

Terminal 1 IC Angle

Terminal 2 IA Angle

Terminal 2 IB Angle

Terminal 2 IC Angle

Differential Current IA Angle

24A2

24A3

24A4

24A6

Differential Current IB Angle

Differential Current IC Angle

Op Square Current IA

Op Square Current IB

24A8 Op Square Current IC

24AA Restraint Square Current IA

24AC Restraint Square Current IB

24AE Restraint Square Current IC

24B0

24B2

24B4

24B6

Restraint Current IA

Restraint Current IB

Restraint Current IC

Differential Current IG Magnitude

24B8

24B9

Differential Current IG Angle

Restraint Current IG

24BB Local IG Magnitude

24BD Local IG Angle

2542

2543

2545

2546

2548

2549

254B

254C

254E

254F

2551

2552

2554

24BE Terminal 1 IG Magnitude

24C0 Terminal 1 IG Angle

24C1

24C3

Terminal 2 IG Magnitude

Terminal 2 IG Angle

Current differential second harmonics actual values (Read Only)

24CD Line current differential (87L) second harmonic Iad magnitude

24CF Line current differential (87L) second harmonic Ibd magnitude

24D1 Line current differential (87L) second harmonic Icd magnitude

Phasor Measurement Unit actual values (Read Only) (4 modules)

2540 PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Magnitude

PMU Unit 1 Phase A Voltage Angle

PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Magnitude

PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Angle

PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Magnitude

PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Angle

PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude

PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle

PMU 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude

PMU 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle

PMU 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude

PMU 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle

PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude

PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle

RANGE

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0


°

V

°

V

°

V

°

V

°

V

°

V

°

V

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.001

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

STEP

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.1

0.1

A

A

A

A degrees

A

A degrees degrees degrees

A

A

A

A

A

A

A degrees

A degrees

UNITS

A

A

A degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees

F060

F060

F060

F060

F002

F060

F060

F002

F002

F002

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F060

F002

F060

F002

FORMAT

F060

F060

F060

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

A

A

A

0.001

0.001

0.001

F060

F060

F060

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

B

GE Multilin



B


255D

255E

2560

2561

2563

2564

2566

2567


2555 PMU 1 Phase A Current Magnitude

2557

2558

255A

255B

PMU 1 Phase A Current Angle

PMU 1 Phase B Current Magnitude

PMU 1 Phase B Current Angle

PMU 1 Phase C Current Magnitude

PMU 1 Phase C Current Angle

PMU 1 Ground Current Magnitude

PMU 1 Ground Current Angle

PMU 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude

PMU 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle

PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude

PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle

PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude

RANGE

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

-359.9 to 0

0 to 999999.999

2620

2621

2622

2628

2629

2632

263B

2644

2569

256A

256C

256D

256E

2572

25A4

25D6

PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle

PMU 1 Frequency

PMU 1 df/dt

PMU 1 Configuration Change Counter

Reserved (4 items)

...Repeated for PMU 2



Remote double-point status input 1 device

Remote double-point status input 1 item

Remote double-point status input 1 name

Remote double-point status input 1 events

... Repeated for double-point status input 2




-359.9 to 0

2 to 90

-327.67 to 327.67

0 to 655.35

0 to 1

Phasor measurement unit integer values (read only actual value registers)

2608 PMU 1 SOC timestamp 0 to 4294967295

260A

260C

PMU 1 FRAMESEC timestamp

PMU 1 STAT flags

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

260E

2614



261A ...Repeated for PMU 4

Remote double-point status inputs (read/write setting registers)

1 to 32

0 to 128

1 to 64

0 to 1

IEC 61850 GGIO5 configuration (read/write setting registers)

26B0 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 1 operand

26B1

26B2

IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 2 operand


26B3

26B4

26B5

26B6





26B7

26B8



26B9 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 10 operand

26BA IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 11 operand

26BB IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 12 operand

26BC IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 13 operand

26BD IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 14 operand

26BE IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 15 operand

26BF IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 16 operand

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--seconds seconds

---

1

1

1

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

°

A

°

A

°

A

°

A

UNITS

A

°

A

°

A

°

Hz

Hz/s

---

FORMAT

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F060

F002

F003

F002

F001

F001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

STEP

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

1

F003

F003

F003

F001

F156

F205

F102

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

F612

APPENDIX B

0

0

0

1

0 (None)

"Rem Ip 1"

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B



IEC 61850 received integers (read only actual values)

26F0

26F2

26F4

26F6

IEC 61850 received uinteger 1




26F8

26FA



26FC IEC 61850 received uinteger 7

26FE IEC 61850 received uinteger 8

2700

2702

2704

2706





2708

270A

270C

270E





Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)

2B00 FlexStates, one per register (256 items)

Expanded Digital Input/Output states (Read Only)

2D00 Contact Input States, one per register (96 items)

2D80

2E00

Contact Output States, one per register (64 items)

Virtual Output States, one per register (96 items)

Expanded Remote Input/Output Status (Read Only)

2F00 Remote Device States, one per register (16 items)

2F80 Remote Input States, one per register (64 items)

Oscillography Values (Read Only)

3000

3001

Oscillography Number of Triggers

Oscillography Available Records

303E

3040

3042

3044

3046

3048

304A

304C

3002

3004

Oscillography Last Cleared Date

Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record

Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)

3005 Oscillography Force Trigger

3011

3012

Oscillography Clear Data

Oscillography Number of Triggers

Fault Report Indexing (Read Only Non-Volatile)

3020 Number of Fault Reports

Fault Report Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (15 modules)

3030 Fault Report 1 Time

3032

3034

Fault Report 2 Time

Fault Report 3 Time

3036

3038

303A

303C

Fault Report 4 Time

Fault Report 5 Time

Fault Report 6 Time

Fault Report 7 Time

Fault Report 8 Time

Fault Report 9 Time

Fault Report 10 Time






RANGE

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 400000000

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 32767

0 to 65535

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295


---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

STEP FORMAT

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

F003

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F001

F001

F050

F001

F126

F126

F001

F001

F108

F108

F108

F108

F155

F108

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

F050

0

0

0

0

0 (No)

0 (No)

0

0

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Offline)

0 (Off)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

B

GE Multilin



B



Modbus file transfer (read/write)

3100 Name of file to read

Modbus file transfer values (read only)

3200

3202

Character position of current block within file

Size of currently-available data block

3203 Block of data from requested file (122 items)

Event recorder actual values (read only)

3400

3402

Events Since Last Clear

Number of Available Events

3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date

Event recorder commands (read/write)

3406 Event Recorder Clear Command

DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)

34C0

34C2

34C4

34C6

DCMA Inputs 1 Value

DCMA Inputs 2 Value

DCMA Inputs 3 Value

DCMA Inputs 4 Value

34C8 DCMA Inputs 5 Value

34CA DCMA Inputs 6 Value

34CC DCMA Inputs 7 Value

34CE DCMA Inputs 8 Value

34D0

34D2

34D4

34D6

DCMA Inputs 9 Value




34D8 DCMA Inputs 13 Value

34DA DCMA Inputs 14 Value

34DC DCMA Inputs 15 Value

34DE DCMA Inputs 16 Value

34E0

34E2

34E4

34E6





34E8 DCMA Inputs 21 Value

34EA DCMA Inputs 22 Value

34EC DCMA Inputs 23 Value

34EE DCMA Inputs 24 Value

RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)

34F0 RTD Input 1 Value

34F1

34F2

RTD Input 2 Value

RTD Input 3 Value

34F3

34F4

34F5

34F6

RTD Input 4 Value

RTD Input 5 Value

RTD Input 6 Value

RTD Input 7 Value

34F7

34F8

34F9

34FA

RTD Input 8 Value

RTD Input 9 Value

RTD Input 10 Value

RTD Input 11 Value

34FB RTD Input 12 Value

34FC RTD Input 13 Value

34FD RTD Input 14 Value

34FE RTD Input 15 Value

34FF RTD Input 16 Value

RANGE

---

0 to 4294967295

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 1

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-9999999 to 9999999

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767


---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F204

F003

F001

F001

F003

F003

F050

F126

APPENDIX B

DEFAULT

(none)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (No)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


3515

3516

3517

3518

3519

351A

351B

351C

350D

350E

350F

3510

3511

3512

3513

3514

3505

3506

3507

3508

3509

350A

350B

350C


3500 RTD Input 17 Value

3501

3502

3503

3504

RTD Input 18 Value

RTD Input 19 Value

RTD Input 20 Value

RTD Input 21 Value

RTD Input 22 Value

RTD Input 23 Value

RTD Input 24 Value

RTD Input 25 Value

RTD Input 26 Value

RTD Input 27 Value

RTD Input 28 Value

RTD Input 29 Value

RTD Input 30 Value

RTD Input 31 Value

RTD Input 32 Value

RTD Input 33 Value

RTD Input 34 Value

RTD Input 35 Value

RTD Input 36 Value

RTD Input 37 Value

RTD Input 38 Value

RTD Input 39 Value

RTD Input 40 Value

RTD Input 41 Value

RTD Input 42 Value

RTD Input 43 Value

RTD Input 44 Value

RTD Input 45 Value

351D

351E

RTD Input 46 Value

RTD Input 47 Value

351F RTD Input 48 Value

Passwords (Read/Write Command)

4000 Command Password Setting

Passwords (Read/Write Setting)

4002 Setting Password Setting

Passwords (Read/Write)

4008

400A

Command Password Entry

Setting Password Entry

Passwords (read only actual values)

4010 Command password status

4011 Setting password status

Passwords (read/write settings)

4012

4013

Control password access timeout

Setting password access timeout

4014

4015

4016

4017

Invalid password attempts

Password lockout duration

Password access events

Local setting authorization

4018

4019

Remote setting authorization

Access authorization timeout

User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)

4040 Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu Operand

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 1

0 to 1

5 to 480

5 to 480

2 to 5

5 to 60

0 to 1

1 to 65535

0 to 65535

5 to 480

0 to 65535

RANGE

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767

-32768 to 32767


---

---

---

---

---

--minutes minutes

--minutes

---

---

--minutes

---

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

FORMAT

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

UNITS

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F003

F003

F003

F003

F102

F102

F001

F001

F001

F001

F102

F300

F300

F001

F300

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

5

30

3

5

0 (Disabled)

1

1

30

0

B

GE Multilin



B



LED Test (Read/Write Setting)

4048

4049

LED Test Function

LED Test Control

Preferences (Read/Write Setting)

404F Language

4050

4051

4052

4053

Flash Message Time

Default Message Timeout

Default Message Intensity

Screen Saver Feature

4054

4055

Screen Saver Wait Time

Current Cutoff Level

4056 Voltage Cutoff Level

87L Channel Status (Read Only)

4059

405A

405B

405C

405D

405E

405F

4060

Channel 1 Local Loopback Status

Channel 1 Loop Delay

Channel 1 Number of Lost Packets

Channel 1 Remote Loopback Status

Channel 1 Status

Channel 2 Local Loopback Status

Channel 2 Loop Delay

Channel 2 Number of Lost Packets

4061

4062

4063

4064

Channel 2 Remote Loopback Status

Channel 2 Status

Channel PFLL Status

87L Network Status

87L Channel Status (Read/Write Command)

4065 Channel Status Clear

87L Power System (Read/Write Setting)

4068 Block GPS Time Reference

4083

4084

4085

4086

4087

4089

408B

408D

409A

4069

406A

406B

406C

406D

406E

406F

4070

Channel Asymmetry Compensation

Charging Current Compensation

Local Relay ID

Maximum Channel Asymmetry

Number of Channels

Number of Terminals

Positive Sequence Reactance

Round Trip Time

4071

4072

4073

4074

Terminal 1 ID

Terminal 2 ID

Zero-Sequence Current Removal

Zero Sequence Reactance

Communications (Read/Write Setting)

407E COM1 minimum response time

407F

4080

COM2 minimum response time

Modbus Slave Address

RS485 Com1 Baud Rate

RS485 Com1 Parity

RS485 Com2 Baud Rate

RS485 Com2 Parity

IP Address

IP Subnet Mask

Gateway IP Address

Network Address NSAP

DNP Channel 1 Port

RANGE

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 3

0.5 to 10

10 to 900

0 to 3

0 to 1

1 to 65535

0.002 to 0.02

0.1 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 255

0 to 10

1 to 2

2 to 3

0.1 to 65.535

0 to 10

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 1

0.1 to 65.535

0 to 2

0 to 200

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 200

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1000

0 to 1000

1 to 254

0 to 11

0 to 2

0 to 11

0 to 2

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

---

0 to 4

APPENDIX B

1

1

1

0.001

0.1

1

1

1

0.001

1

1

1

1

0.1

1

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

10

10

1

---

---

--kohms ms

---

---

--kohms

---

---

---

--ms

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--ms ms

---


---

---

---

---

--s s min pu

V

---

--ms

---

--ms

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

0.1

1

1

1

1

0.001

0.1

1

1

0.1

1

1

0.1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F102

F300

F531

F001

F001

F101

F102

F001

F001

F001

F134

F001

F001

F134

F134

F134

F001

F001

F134

F134

F134

F134

F126

F300

F300

F102

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F102

F001

F001

F001

F001

F112

F113

F112

F113

F003

F003

F003

F074

F177

0 (No)

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0

15

1

2

100

15

0

0

0 (Disabled)

100

0

0

254

8 (115200)

0 (None)

8 (115200)

0 (None)

56554706

4294966272

56554497

0

0 (None)

DEFAULT

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (English)

10

300

0 (25%)

0 (Disabled)

30

20

10

2 (n/a)

0

0

2 (n/a)

1 (OK)

2 (n/a)

0

0

2 (n/a)

1 (OK)

1 (OK)

2 (n/a)


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B



409B DNP Channel 2 Port

409C

409D

409E

40A3

DNP Address

Reserved

DNP Client Addresses (2 items)

TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol

40A4

40A5

40A6

40A7

TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol

TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol

Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol

Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol

(zero means “automatic”) (2 items)

40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function

40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout

40AB DNP unsolicited responses maximum retries

40AC DNP unsolicited responses destination address

40AD Ethernet operation mode

40AE DNP current scale factor

40AF

40B0

40B1

40B2

DNP voltage scale factor

DNP power scale factor

DNP energy scale factor

DNP power scale factor

40B3

40B4

40B6

40B8

DNP other scale factor

DNP current default deadband

DNP voltage default deadband

DNP power default deadband

40BA DNP energy default deadband

40BE DNP other default deadband

40C0

40C1

DNP IIN time synchronization bit period

DNP message fragment size

40F0

4104

4005

4140

4141

4142

4143

4144

4145

4146

40C2

40C4

40C6

40C8

DNP client address 3



DNP number of paired binary output control points

40C9 DNP TCP connection timeout

40CA Reserved (22 items)

40E0

40E1

TCP port number for the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol

IEC 60870-5-104 protocol function

40E2

40E3

40E4

40E6

IEC 60870-5-104 protocol common address of ASDU

IEC 60870-5-104 protocol cyclic data transmit period

IEC 60870-5-104 current default threshold

IEC 60870-5-104 voltage default threshold

40E8 IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold

40EA IEC 60870-5-104 energy default threshold

40EC IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold

40EE IEC 60870-5-104 other default threshold

IEC 60870-5-104 client address (5 items)

IEC 60870-5-104 redundancy port

Reserved (59 items)

DNP object 1 default variation







RANGE

0 to 4

0 to 65519

0 to 1

0 to 4294967295

1 to 65535

1 to 65535

1 to 65535

1 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

1 to 10080

30 to 2048

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 32

10 to 65535

0 to 1

1 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

1 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 60

1 to 255

0 to 65519

0 to 1

0 to 8

0 to 8

0 to 8

0 to 8

0 to 8

0 to 8

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 4294967295

0 to 1

0 to 1

1 to 2

1 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

1 to 5


F001

F001

F001

F102

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F003

F003

F003

F001

F194

F194

F194

F194

F194

F001

F001

F001

F102

F001

F001

F001

F192

F194

F001

F523

F524

F523

F523

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F003

F126

F001

F001

FORMAT

F177

F001

F001

F003

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

--s

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--min

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--s

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

DEFAULT

0 (None)

1

0

0

502

20000

80

69

0

0

0

0

0

30000

30000

1440

240

120

0

2404

0 (Disabled)

0

60

30000

30000

0 (Disabled)

5

10

1

0 (Half-Duplex)

2 (1)

2 (1)

2 (1)

2 (1)

2 (1)

2 (1)

30000

30000

30000

2

0 (1)

0 (1)

0 (1)

0 (1)

1

30000

30000

30000

30000

0

0 (No)

0

2

B

GE Multilin



B



4147 DNP object 32 default variation

Ethernet switch (Read/Write Setting)

4148 Ethernet switch IP address

414A

414B

Ethernet switch Modbus IP port number

Ethernet switch Port 1 Events

414C

414D

414E

414F





4150 Ethernet switch Port 6 Events

Ethernet switch (Read Only Actual Values)

4151

4154

Ethernet switch MAC address

Ethernet switch Port 1 Status

4155

4156

4157

4158





4159

415A


Switch Firmware Version

Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)

4168 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) function

4169

416B

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server IP address

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP port number

Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command)

4170 Data Logger Clear

Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)

4181 Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items)

4191

4192

Data Logger Mode

Data Logger Trigger

4193 Data Logger Rate

Clock (Read/Write Command)

41A0 Real Time Clock Set Time

Clock (Read/Write Setting)

41A2

41A4

41A6

41A7

SR Date Format

SR Time Format

IRIG-B Signal Type

Clock Events Enable / Disable

41A8

41A9

Time Zone Offset from UTC

Daylight Savings Time (DST) Function

41AA Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Month

41AB Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day

41AC Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day Instance

41AD Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Hour

41AE Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Month

41AF Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day

41B0

41B1

Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day Instance

Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Hour

Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command)

41B2 Fault Reports Clear Data Command

Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)

41C0 Oscillography Number of Records

41C1

41C2

Oscillography Trigger Mode

Oscillography Trigger Position

41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source

RANGE

0 to 5

0 to 4294967295

1 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

---

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0.00 to 99.99

0 to 1

0 to 4294967295

1 to 65535

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

0 to 65535

15 to 3600000

0 to 235959

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 2

0 to 1

–24 to 24

0 to 1

0 to 11

0 to 6

0 to 4

0 to 23

0 to 11

0 to 6

0 to 4

0 to 23

0 to 1

1 to 64

0 to 1

0 to 100

0 to 65535

APPENDIX B

---

---

---

---

---

--hours

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

%

---

---

---

--ms

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.5

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

1

F239

F001

F237

F238

F239

F001

F051

F052

F114

F102

F002

F102

F237

F238

F126

F600

F260

F300

F003

F050

F001

F118

F001

F300

UNITS

---

STEP

1

FORMAT

F525

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F072

F134

F134

F134

F134

F134

F134

F001

F003

F001

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F003

F001

F126

DEFAULT

0 (1)

3232235778

502

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Fail)

0 (Fail)

0 (Fail)

0 (Fail)

0 (Fail)

0 (Fail)

0

0 (Disabled)

0

123

0 (No)

0

0 (continuous)

0

60000

0

0

0

0 (None)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (January)

0 (Sunday)

0 (First)

2

0 (January)

0 (Sunday)

0 (First)

2

0 (No)

15

0 (Auto. Overwrite)

50

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


429A

429C

429E

42A0

42A2

42A4

42A6

42A8

428A

428C

428E

4290

4292

4294

4296

4298


41C4 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms

41D0

4200

Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items)

Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items)

Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)

4260 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand

4261 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand

User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

4280

4281

FlexLogic™ Operand to Activate LED

User LED type (latched or self-resetting)

4282

4284

4286

4288

...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 2




















42AA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 22

42AC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 23

42AE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 24

42B0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 25

42B2

42B4

42B6

42B8





42BA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 30

42BC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 31

42BE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 32

42C0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 33

42C2

42C4

42C6

42C8





42CA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 38

42CC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 39

42CE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 40

42D0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 41

42D2

42D4

42D6

42D8





42DA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 46

RANGE

0 to 4

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

GE Multilin



UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

STEP

1

1

1

FORMAT

F183

F600

F300

DEFAULT

2 (16 samples/cycle)

0

0

F300

F300

F300

F127

0

0

0

1 (Self-Reset)

B

B-23


B



42DC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 47

42DE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 48

Installation (Read/Write Setting)

43E0

43E1

Relay Programmed State

Relay Name

User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)

4441 User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function

4442

4443

User Programmable Direct Device Off Function

User Programmable Remote Device Off Function

4444

4445

4446

4447

User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function

User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function

User Programmable Battery Fail Function

User Programmable SNTP Fail Function

4448

4449

User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function

User Programmable Ethernet Switch Fail Function

CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

4480 Phase CT 1 Primary

4481

4482

4483

4484

Phase CT 1 Secondary

Ground CT 1 Primary

Ground CT 1 Secondary

...Repeated for CT Bank 2

4488

448C

4490

4494





VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)

4500 Phase VT 1 Connection

4501

4502

Phase VT 1 Secondary

Phase VT 1 Ratio

4584

4585

4586

4587

458E

4595

459C

45A3

4504

4505

4506

4508

Auxiliary VT 1 Connection

Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary

Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio

...Repeated for VT Bank 2

4510 ...Repeated for VT Bank 3

Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

4580

4583

Source 1 Name

Source 1 Phase CT

Source 1 Ground CT

Source 1 Phase VT

Source 1 Auxiliary VT






Power System (Read/Write Setting)

4600 Nominal Frequency

4601

4602

Phase Rotation

Frequency And Phase Reference

4603 Frequency Tracking Function

87L Power System In-Zone Transformer (Read/Write Setting)

4605

4606

In-Zone Transformer Connection

In-Zone Transformer Location

RANGE

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

1 to 65000

0 to 1

1 to 65000

0 to 1

0 to 1

50 to 240

1 to 24000

0 to 6

50 to 240

1 to 24000

---

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 to 63

25 to 60

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 1

0 to 12

0 to 2

APPENDIX B

UNITS STEP FORMAT DEFAULT

---

---

A

---

A

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F133

F202

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F102

F001

F123

F001

F123

0 (Not Programmed)

“Relay-1”

1 (Enabled)

1 (Enabled)

1 (Enabled)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

1 (Enabled)

1 (Enabled)

1 (Enabled)

0 (Disabled)

1

0 (1 A)

1

0 (1 A)

---

V

:1

---

V

:1

1

0.1

1

1

0.1

1

F100

F001

F060

F166

F001

F060

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

F206

F400

F400

F400

F400

0 (Wye)

664

1

1 (Vag)

664

1

“SRC 1"

0

0

0

0

Hz

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

F001

F106

F167

F102

F560

F562

60

0 (ABC)

0 (SRC 1)

1 (Enabled)

0 (None)

0 (Local-Tap)


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B



Breaker control (read/write settings)

4700

4701

4704

4705

Breaker 1 function

Breaker 1 name

Breaker 1 mode

Breaker 1 open

4706

4707

4708

4709

470A

470B

470D

470E

Breaker 1 close

Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole closed

Breaker 1 phase B closed

Breaker 1 phase C closed

Breaker 1 external alarm

Breaker 1 alarm delay

Breaker 1 pushbutton control

Breaker 1 manual close recall time

4710

4711

4712

4713

4714

4715

4716

4717

Breaker 1 out of service

Breaker 1 block open

Breaker 1 block close

Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole opened

Breaker 1 phase B opened

Breaker 1 phase C opened

Breaker 1 operate time

Breaker 1 events

4718

4719

4732

474B

Reserved

...Repeated for breaker 2



Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)

47A0 Synchrocheck 1 Function

47A1

47A2

Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source

Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source

47A3

47A5

47A6

47A7

Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Voltage Difference

Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Angle Difference

Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Frequency Difference

Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select

47A8

47A9

Synchrocheck 1 Dead V1 Maximum Voltage

Synchrocheck 1 Dead V2 Maximum Voltage

47AA Synchrocheck 1 Live V1 Minimum Voltage

47AB Synchrocheck 1 Live V2 Minimum Voltage

47AC Synchrocheck 1 Target

47AD Synchrocheck 1 Events

47AE Synchrocheck 1 Block

47AF Synchrocheck 1 Frequency Hysteresis

47B0 ...Repeated for Synchrocheck 2

Flexcurves A and B (Read/Write Settings)

4800

48F0

FlexCurve A (120 items)

FlexCurve B (120 items)

Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)

4A00 Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items)

User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

4C00 User-Definable Display 1 Top Line Text

4C0A User-Definable Display 1 Bottom Line Text

4C14 Modbus Addresses of Display 1 Items (5 items)

4C19

4C20

Reserved (7 items)

...Repeated for User-Definable Display 2

4C40 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 3

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 5

0 to 400000

0 to 100

0 to 2

0 to 5

0 to 1.25

0 to 1.25

0 to 1.25

0 to 1.25

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 0.1

RANGE

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

---

---

0 to 65535

---


UNITS

---

---

---

---

--s

--s

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--s

---

---

STEP FORMAT

1

1

1

1

1

0.001

1

0.001

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

0.001

1

---

F300

F003

F102

F003

F300

F300

F300

F300

F102

F206

F157

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F001

F102

---

DEFAULT

0 (Disabled)

“Bkr 1"

0 (3-Pole)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

70

0 (Disabled)

--ms ms

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Hz pu pu pu pu

---

---

---

V degrees

Hz

---

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

0.01

1

1

0.01

1

1

1

1

F001

F001

F001

F001

F109

F102

F300

F001

F102

F167

F167

F060

F001

F001

F176

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

1 (SRC 2)

10000

30

100

1 (LV1 and DV2)

30

30

70

70

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

6

1

1

1

---

---

1

---

F011

F011

F001

F202

F202

F001

F001

0

“ “

““

0

0

0

0

B

GE Multilin



B





4CA0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 6

4CC0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 7

4CE0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 8

4D00

4D20

4D40

4D60





4D80 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 13

4DA0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 14

4DC0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 15

4DE0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 16

4E22

4E23

4E24

4E25

4E26

4E27

4E28

4E29

User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules)

4E00 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function

4E01 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line

4E0B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text

4E15

4E1F

4E20

4E21

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set

5407

5413

5426

5439

544C

545F

5472

5485

5498

4E2A ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2

4E54 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 3

4E7E ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 4

4EA8 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 5

4ED2 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 6

4EFC ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 7

4F26

4F50

...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 8


4F7A

4FA4



4FCE ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 12

Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting)

5000 FlexLogic™ Entry (512 items)

RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

5400

5401

RTD Input 1 Function

RTD Input 1 ID

RTD Input 1 Type

...Repeated for RTD Input 2








RANGE

0 to 2

---

---

---

0 to 60

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 600

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

---

0 to 3

B-26

APPENDIX B


---

---

---

---

--s

---

---

--s

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

0.05

1

1

1

---

---

---

0.05

1

1

F300

F001

F102

F300

F220

F300

F300

F300

F109

F202

F202

F202

F001

F109

F102

2 (Disabled)

(none)

(none)

(none)

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

---

---

---

---

1

1

---

1

F300

F102

F205

F174

16384

0 (Disabled)

“RTD Ip 1“

0 (100 ohm Platinum)


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


550A

551D

5530

5543

5556

5569

557C

558F


54AB ...Repeated for RTD Input 10

54BE ...Repeated for RTD Input 11

54D1 ...Repeated for RTD Input 12

54E4

54F7











55A2

55B5



55C8 ...Repeated for RTD Input 25

55DB ...Repeated for RTD Input 26

55EE ...Repeated for RTD Input 27

5601 ...Repeated for RTD Input 28

5614

5627



563A

564D

5660

5673





5686

5699



56AC ...Repeated for RTD Input 37

56BF ...Repeated for RTD Input 38

5810

5818

5820

5828

5830

5838

5840

5848

5850

56D2

56E5

56F8

570B

571E

5731

5744

5757









576A

577D



Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

5800 FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Type

5801

5802

5803

5808

FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Pickup Delay

FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Dropout Delay

Reserved (5 items)

...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 2










RANGE

0 to 2

0 to 60000

0 to 60000

0 to 65535

GE Multilin

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

F129

F001

F001

F001

0 (millisecond)

0

0

0




B-27

B


B


5880

5888

5890

5898

58A0

58A8

58B0

58B8


5858 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 12

5860

5868

5870

5878













RANGE

58C0

58C8

58D0

58D8

58E0

58E8

58F0

58F8

Phase Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5900 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Function

5901

5902

5903

5904

5905

5906









Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Input

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Curve

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Reset

5907

5908

590B

590C

590D

5910

5920

5930

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Voltage Restraint

Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase (3 items)

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Target

Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Events

Reserved (3 items)

...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 2



5940

5950



Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)

5A00 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1

5A01

5A02

5A03

5A04

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay

0 to 5

0 to 30

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 1

0 to 30

0 to 16

0 to 600

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

5A05

5A06

5A07

5A08

Phase IOC1 Block For Phase A

Phase IOC1 Block For Phase B

Phase IOC1 Block For Phase C

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target

5A09 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events

5A0A Reserved (6 items)

5A10

5A20

...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2


5A30 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 4

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

B-28

APPENDIX B


---

---

---

---

--pu

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.001

1

0.01

1

F102

F167

F122

F001

F103

F001

F104

F102

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

0 (Phasor)

1000

0 (IEEE Mod Inv)

100

0 (Instantaneous)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--pu s s

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F300

F300

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

1000

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


5C03

5C04

5C05

5C06

5C07

5C08

5C10

5C20



5A50

5A60

5A70

5A80






5AA0 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 11

5AB0 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 12

Neutral Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5B00

5B01

5B02

5B03

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Function

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Input

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup

RANGE

5B04

5B05

5B06

5B07

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Curve

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Reset

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Block

5B08

5B09

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Target

Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Events

5B0A Reserved (6 items)

5B10 ...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 2

5B20

5B30

5B40

5B50

...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 3




Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)

5C00 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1

5C01

5C02

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup

0 to 5

0 to 30

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 1

0 to 30

0 to 16

0 to 600

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events

Reserved (8 items)

...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2


5C30

5C40

5C50

5C60





5C70

5C80



5C90 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 10

5CA0 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 11

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

5CB0 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 12

Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)

5D00

5D01

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source

5D02

5D03

5D04

5D05

5D06

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 1

0 to 30

0 to 16

0 to 600

0 to 1

GE Multilin



---

---

---

---

---

---

--pu

---

---

---

1

1

1

0.001

1

0.01

1

1

1

1

1

F102

F167

F122

F001

F103

F001

F104

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

0 (Phasor)

1000

0 (IEEE Mod Inv)

100

0 (Instantaneous)

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

---

--s s

---

--pu

---

---

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

1000

0

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

---

---

--pu

---

---

---

1

1

1

0.001

1

0.01

1

F102

F167

F122

F001

F103

F001

F104

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

0 (Phasor)

1000

0 (IEEE Mod Inv)

100

0 (Instantaneous)


B

B



5E03

5E04

5E05

5E06

5E07

5E08

5E10

5E20


5D07 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block

5D08

5D09

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target

Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events

5D0A Reserved (6 items)

5D10 ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 2

RANGE

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

5D20

5D30

5D40

5D50

...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 3




Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)

5E00 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5

5E01

5E02

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup

0 to 1

0 to 30

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events

Reserved (8 items)

...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2


5E30

5E40

5E50

5E60





5E70

5E80



5E90 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 10

5EA0 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 11

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

5EB0 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 12

Stub Bus (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

5F10

5F11

Stub Bus Function

Stub Bus Disconnect

5F12

5F13

Stub Bus Trigger

Stub Bus Target

5F14 Stub Bus Events

50DD Disturbance Detection (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

5F20

5F21

5F22

5F23

50DD Function

50DD Non Current Supervision

50DD Control Logic

50DD Logic Seal In

5F24 50DD Events

Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)

5F80

5F81

Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1)

Setting Groups Block

5F82

5F89

FlexLogic to Activate Groups 2 through 6 (5 items)

Setting Group Function

5F8A Setting Group Events

Setting Groups (Read Only)

5F8B Current Setting Group

Setting Group Names (Read/Write Setting)

5F8C Setting Group 1 Name

5F94 Setting Group 2 Name

5F9C Setting Group 3 Name

0 to 1

0 to 65535

---

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 5

---

---

---

B-30

APPENDIX B

UNITS

---

---

---

---

STEP

1

1

1

1

FORMAT

F300

F109

F102

F001

DEFAULT

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

---

--s s

---

--pu

---

---

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

F167

F102

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (SRC 1)

0 (Disabled)

1000

0

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

F102

F300

F300

F109

F102

F102

F300

F300

F300

F102

F001

F300

F300

F102

F102

F001

F203

F203

F203

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0

(none)

(none)

(none)


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


6124

6125

6126

6127

6128

6129

612A

612B


5FA4 Setting Group 4 Name

5FAC Setting Group 5 Name

5FB4 Setting Group 6 Name

Current Differential 87L (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

6000 87L Current Differential Function

RANGE

---

---

---

6001

6002

6003

6004

6005

6006

6007

6008

6009

600A

600B

600C

600D

600E

600F

6010

87L Current Differential Block

87L Current Differential Signal Source 1

87L Minimum Phase Current Sensitivity

87L Current Differential Tap Setting

87L Current Differential Phase Percent Restraint 1

87L Current Differential Phase Percent Restraint 2

87L Current Differential Phase Dual Slope Breakpoint

87L Current Differential Ground Function

87L Current Differential Ground Pickup

87L Current Differential Ground Restraint

87L Current Differential Ground Delay

87L Current Differential Key DTT

87L Current Differential External Key DTT

87L Current Differential Target

87L Current Differential Event

87L Current Differential Tap 2 Setting

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 5

0.1 to 4

0.2 to 5

1 to 50

1 to 70

0 to 20

0 to 1

0.05 to 1

1 to 50

0 to 5

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0.2 to 5

Current Differential 87L In-Zone Transformer (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

601E 87L Inrush Inhibit Mode 0 to 3

601F 87L Inrush Inhibit Level

CT Failure Detector (Read/Write Setting)

1 to 40

CT Fail Function

CT Fail Block

CT Fail Current Source 1

CT Fail Current Pickup 1

CT Fail Current Source 2

CT Fail Current Pickup 2

CT Fail Voltage Source

CT Fail Voltage Pickup

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 5

0 to 2

0 to 5

0 to 2

0 to 5

0 to 2

0 to 65.535

0 to 2

0 to 1

6244

6245

6246

6247

6248

6249

624A

624B

612C

612D

CT Fail Pickup Delay

CT Fail Target

612E CT Fail Events

Autoreclose (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

6240

6241

6242

6243

Autoreclose 1 Function

Autoreclose 1 Initiate

Autoreclose 1 Block

Autoreclose 1 Max Number of Shots

Autoreclose 1 Manual Close

Autoreclose 1 Manual Reset from LO

Autoreclose 1 Reset Lockout if Breaker Closed

Autoreclose 1 Reset Lockout On Manual Close

Autoreclose 1 Breaker Closed

Autoreclose 1 Breaker Open

Autoreclose 1 Block Time Upon Manual Close

Autoreclose 1 Dead Time Shot 1

624C

624D

624E

624F

6250




Autoreclose 1 Reset Lockout Delay

Autoreclose 1 Reset Time

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

1 to 4

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 655.35

0 to 655.35

0 to 655.35

0 to 655.35

0 to 655.35

0 to 655.35

0 to 655.35


0 (Disabled)

200

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (SRC 1)

2

1 (SRC 2)

2

0 (SRC 1)

20

1000

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0

1000

100

200

300

400

6000

6000

0 (Disabled)

0

0

1

0

0

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

DEFAULT

(none)

(none)

(none)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (SRC 1)

20

100

30

50

10

0 (Disabled)

10

25

10

1 (Enabled)

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

100

1

0.1

1

0.1

1

0.01

1

1

1

0.1

0.001

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

1

0.01

1

1

1

0.1

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

0.01

UNITS

---

---

---

%

% pu

--pu

% seconds

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--pu

---

STEP

---

---

---

FORMAT

F203

F203

F203

F102

F300

F167

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F102

F001

F001

F001

F102

F300

F109

F102

F001

---

%f

0

--pu

--pu

---

---

--pu s

---

--s s s s s s

---

--s

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

F300

F300

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F102

F300

F300

F001

F300

F300

F108

F108

F561

F001

F102

F300

F167

F001

F167

F001

F167

F001

F001

F109

F102

B

GE Multilin


B.4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B

B


6401

6402

6403

6404

6405

6406

6407

6408

6256

6257

6258

6259

625A

625E

627C

629A


6251 Autoreclose 1 Incomplete Sequence Time

6252

6253

6254

6255

Autoreclose 1 Events

Autoreclose 1 Reduce Max 1



Autoreclose 1 Add Delay 1

Autoreclose 1 Delay 1

Autoreclose 1 Add Delay 2

Autoreclose 1 Delay 2

Reserved (4 items)

...Repeated for Autoreclose 2



62B8

62D6



Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

6300 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1

6301

6302

6303

6304

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Curve

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier

0 to 5

0 to 30

0 to 16

0 to 600

6305

6306

6307

6308

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Reset

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Block

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Target

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 Events

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

6309

6310

Reserved (7 items)

...Repeated for Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 2

0 to 1

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

6400 Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 1 Function 0 to 1

Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 1 Signal Source

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay

Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 1 Reset Delay

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events

Reserved (8 items)

6410 ...Repeated for Negative Sequence Instantaneous OC 2

Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

64A0

64A1

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Source

64A2

64A3

64A4

64A5

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Delay

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Reset Delay

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Block

RANGE

0 to 655.35

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 655.35

0 to 65535

0 to 655.35

0 to 0.001

0 to 5

0 to 30

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 1.25

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

64A6

64A7

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Target

Negative Sequence Overvoltage Events

Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

7000 Phase Undervoltage 1 Function

7001

7002

7003

7004

7005

Phase Undervoltage 1 Signal Source

Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup

Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve

Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay

Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 3

0 to 1

0 to 600

0 to 3

--s

--s

---

UNITS

s

---

---

---

---

---

--pu s s

---

---

---

---

--pu

--s pu

---

---

---

---

---

---

--pu

---

---

---

--pu s s

---

---

---

---

1

1

0.001

1

0.01

0.001

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.001

1

0.01

STEP

0.01

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

1

0.01

0.001

FORMAT

F001

F102

F300

F300

F300

F300

F001

F300

F001

F001

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F001

F102

F167

F001

F103

F001

F104

F300

F109

F102

F001

F102

F167

F001

F111

F001

F001

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

DEFAULT

500

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

1000

0 (IEEE Mod Inv)

100

0 (Instantaneous)

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

1000

0

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

300

50

50

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

1000

0 (Definite Time)

100

100


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


7289

728A

728B

728C

728D

728E

728F

7290


7006 Phase Undervoltage 1 Block

7007

7008

7009

700A

Phase Undervoltage 1 Target

Phase Undervoltage 1 Events

Phase Undervoltage 1 Measurement Mode

Reserved (6 items)

7013 ...Repeated for Phase Undervoltage 2

Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)

7040

7041

7042

7043

7044

7045

Phase Overvoltage 1 Function

Phase Overvoltage 1 Source

Phase Overvoltage 1 Pickup

Phase Overvoltage 1 Delay

Phase Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay

Phase Overvoltage 1 Block

RANGE

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 3

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

7046

7047

Phase Overvoltage 1 Target

Phase Overvoltage 1 Events

0 to 2

0 to 1

7048 Reserved (8 items)

Phase Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

0 to 1

7260

7261

7262

7263

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Function

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Source

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 ECA

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 65535

0 to 359

7281

7282

7283

7284

7285

7286

7287

7288

7264

7265

7266

7267

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Pol V Threshold

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Overcurrent

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Target

Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Events

0 to 3

0 to 1

0 to 2

0 to 1

7268

7270

Reserved (8 items)

...Repeated for Phase Directional Overcurrent 2

0 to 1

Neutral Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

7280 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Source

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Target

0 to 5

0 to 2

-90 to 90

40 to 90

0.002 to 30

40 to 90

0.002 to 30

0 to 2

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Block

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Events

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing Voltage

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Op Current

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint

Reserved

...Repeated for Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2

Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting)

72C0 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Function

72C1

72C2

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Source

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate A

72C3

72C4

72C5

72C6

72C7

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate B

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate C

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Delay

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Limit

Breaker 1 Arcing Current Block

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 250

0 to 0.5

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65.535

0 to 50000

0 to 65535

GE Multilin



---

--pu s s

---

---

---

--pu

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

FORMAT

F300

F109

F102

F186

F001

DEFAULT

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Phase to Ground)

0

B

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

0.001

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F001

F102

F167

F300

F001

F001

F126

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

1000

100

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

0

30

700

0 (No)

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

---

---

---

° Lag degrees pu degrees pu

---

---

---

---

--ohms

---

---

1

1

1

1

0.001

1

0.001

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.001

1

F102

F167

F230

F002

F001

F001

F001

F001

F109

F300

F102

F231

F196

F001

F001

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

0 (Voltage)

75

90

50

90

50

0 (Self-reset)

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (Calculated V0)

0 (Calculated 3I0)

0

63

0

---

---

---

---

--s kA

2

-cyc

---

1

1

1

1

1

0.001

1

1

F102

F167

F300

F300

F300

F001

F001

F300

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

0

0

0

0

1000

0

B-33


B


73C0

73D8

73F0

7408

7420

7438

7450

7468

7313

7318

7330

7348

7360

7378

7390

73A8


72C8 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Target

72C9 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Events

72CA ...Repeated for Breaker 2 Arcing Current

72D4 ...Repeated for Breaker 3 Arcing Current

72DE ...Repeated for Breaker 4 Arcing Current

dcmA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)

7300 dcmA Inputs 1 Function

7301

7307 dcmA Inputs 1 ID

Reserved 1 (4 items)

730B

730E

730F

7311 dcmA Inputs 1 Units dcmA Inputs 1 Range dcmA Inputs 1 Minimum Value dcmA Inputs 1 Maximum Value

Reserved (5 items)

...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 2















7549

754A

754B

754C

754D

754E

754F

7550

7552

7480

7498

74B0

74C8

74E0

74F8

7510

7528









Disconnect switches (read/write settings)

7540 Disconnect switch 1 function

7541

7544

Disconnect switch 1 name

Disconnect switch 1 mode

7545

7546

7547

7548

Disconnect switch 1 open

Disconnect switch 1 block open

Disconnect switch 1 close

Disconnect switch 1 block close

Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole closed

Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole opened

Disconnect switch 1 phase B closed

Disconnect switch 1 phase B opened

Disconnect switch 1 phase C closed

Disconnect switch 1 phase C opened

Disconnect switch 1 operate time

Disconnect switch 1 alarm delay

Disconnect switch 1 events

RANGE

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

---

0 to 65535

---

0 to 6

-9999.999 to 9999.999

-9999.999 to 9999.999

0 to 65535

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--s s

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

STEP

1

1

FORMAT

F109

F102

1

1

0.001

0.001

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

---

1

---

1

0.001

0.001

1

F102

F205

F001

F206

F173

F004

F004

F001

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F001

F003

F102

F102

F206

F157

F300

F300

F300

F300

APPENDIX B

DEFAULT

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

“DCMA I 1"

0

“mA”

6 (4 to 20 mA)

4000

20000

0

0 (Disabled)

“SW 1"

0 (3-Pole)

0

0

0

0

0

0

70

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B



7553 Reserved (2 items)

7555

756A

757F

7594

...Repeated for disconnect switch 2




75A9 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 6

75BE ...Repeated for disconnect switch 7

75D3

75E8



75FD ...Repeated for disconnect switch 10

7612 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 11

7627

763C



773C

773D

773E

773F

7740

7741

7742

7743

7651

7666



767B ...Repeated for disconnect switch 16

Thermal Overload Protecttion (Read/Write Settings)

7738

7739

773A

773B

Thermal Protection 1 Function

Thermal Protection 1 Source

Thermal Protection 1 Base Current

Thermal Protection 1 K Factor

Thermal Protection 1 Trip Time Constant

Thermal Protection 1 Reset Time Constant

Thermal Protection 1 Minimum Reset Time

Thermal Protection 1 Reset

Thermal Protection 1 Block

Thermal Protection 1 Target

Thermal Protection 1 Events

Reserved (2 items)

7745 Repeated for Thermal Protection 2

Broken conductor detection (Read/Write Settings)

7752

7753

Broken Conductor 1 Function

Broken Conductor 1 Source

7754

7755

7756

7757

Broken Conductor 1 I2/I1 Ratio

Broken Conductor 1 I1 Minimum

Broken Conductor 1 I1 Maximum

Broken Conductor 1 Pickup Delay

7758

7759

775A

775B

Broken Conductor 1 Block

Broken Conductor 1 Target

Broken Conductor 1 Events

Reserved (2 items)

775D ...Repeated for Broken Conductor 2

Phasor Measurement Unit Power Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

7860

7861

PMU 1 Power Trigger Function

PMU 1 Power Trigger Active

7862

7863

7864

7865

PMU 1 Power Trigger Reactive

PMU 1 Power Trigger Apparent

PMU 1 Power Trigger Pickup Time

PMU 1 Power Trigger Dropout Time

7866

7869

PMU 1 Power Trigger Block (3 items)

PMU 1 Power Trigger Target

786A PMU 1 Power Trigger Events

Phasor Measurement Unit Voltage Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

788C PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Function

RANGE

---

0 to 1

0 to 5

20 to 100

0.05 to 1

0.05 to 5

0 to 65.535

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

0 to 5

0.2 to 3

1 to 1.2

0 to 1000

0 to 1000

0 to 1000

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

0.25 to 3

0.25 to 3

0.25 to 3

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

GE Multilin

min.

min.

min.

---

---

--pu

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.05

1

---

1

1

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F300

F300

F109

F102

F001

--pu pu pu s s

---

---

---

---

1

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

F102

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F102

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

80

110

45

45

20

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

---

---

%

pu

pu

s

---

---

---

---

1

1

0.1

0.01

0.01

0.001

1

1

1

---

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

200

10

150

20000

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Disabled)

1250

1250

1250

10

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)



UNITS

---

STEP

---

FORMAT

---

DEFAULT

---

B-35

B


B



788D

788E

788F

7890

7891

PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Low Voltage

PMU 1 Voltage Trigger High Voltage

PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Pickup Time

PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Dropout Time

PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Block (3 items)

RANGE

0.25 to 1.25

0.75 to 1.75

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

7894

7895

PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Target

PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Events

Phasor Measurement Unit One-shot Command (Read/Write Setting)

78B4 PMU One-shot Function

78B5

78B6

PMU One-shot Sequence Number

PMU One-shot Time

Phasor Measurement Unit Test Values (Read/Write Setting)

78B8 PMU 1 Test Function

0 to 1

0 to 59

0 to 235959

---

---

---

78B9 PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Test Magnitude

78BB PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Test Angle

78BC PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Test Magnitude

78BE PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Test Angle

78BF

78C1

78C2

78C4

78CB

78CD

78CE

78D0

PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Test Magnitude

PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Test Angle

PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Test Magnitude

PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Test Angle

78C5

78C7

PMU 1 Phase A Current Test Magnitude

PMU 1 Phase A Current Test Angle

78C8 PMU 1 Phase B Current Test Magnitude

78CA PMU 1 Phase B Current Test Angle

PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Magnitude

PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Angle

PMU 1 Ground Current Test Magnitude

PMU 1 Ground Current Test Angle

0 to 1

0 to 700

-180 to 180

0 to 700

-180 to 180

0 to 700

-180 to 180

0 to 700

-180 to 180

0 to 9.999

-180 to 180

0 to 9.999

-180 to 180

0 to 9.999

-180 to 180

0 to 9.999

-180 to 180

78D1

78D3

PMU 1 Test Frequency

PMU 1 Test df/dt

20 to 70

-10 to 10

Hz

Hz/s

Phasor Measurement Unit Recorder Configuration Counter Command (Read/Write Command)

7928 PMU 1 Recorder Clear Configuration Counter 0 to 1 --kA

° kA

°

--kV

° kV

° kA

° kA

° kV

° kV

°

UNITS

pu pu s s

---

---

---

Phasor Measurement Unit Recording Values (Read Only)

792C PMU 1 Available Records

792D

792F

PMU 1 Second Per Record

PMU 1 Last Cleared Date

0 to 65535

0 to 6553.5

0 to 400000000

Phasor Measurement Unit Network Reporting Configuration (Read/Write Setting)

7940 PMU Network Reporting Function 0 to 1

7941

7942

PMU Network Reporting ID Code

PMU Network Reporting Rate

1 to 65534

0 to 11

---

---

---

7943

7944

7945

7946

7947

7948

PMU Network Reporting Style

PMU Network Reporting Format

PMU Network PDC Control

PMU TCP port number

PMU UDP port number 1

PMU UDP port number 2

Phasor Measurement Unit Basic Configuration (Read/Write Setting)

7949 PMU 1 Function

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

1 to 65535

1 to 65535

1 to 65535

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

794A

794B

7953

7954

PMU 1 IDcode

PMU 1 STN

PMU 1 Source

PMU 1 Post-Filter

0 to 1

1 to 65534

---

0 to 5

0 to 3

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.1

1

1

1

1

0.01

0.05

0.01

0.05

0.001

0.05

0.001

0.05

1

0.01

0.05

0.01

0.05

0.001

0.05

0.001

0.05

0.001

0.001

1

STEP

0.001

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

FORMAT

F001

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F102

F001

F050

F102

F003

F002

F003

F002

F003

F002

F003

F002

F004

F002

F004

F002

F003

F002

F004

F002

F003

F002

F126

F001

F001

F050

F102

F001

F544

F546

F547

F102

F001

F001

F001

F102

F001

F203

F167

F540

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

1

3 (10/sec.)

0 (Polar)

0 (Integer)

0 (Disabled)

4712

4713

4714

0 (Disabled)

1

“GE-UR-PMU”

0 (SRC 1)

1 (Symm-3-point)

0 (Disabled)

50000

0

50000

-120

50000

120

50000

0

1000

-10

1000

-130

1000

110

0

0

60000

0

0 (No)

DEFAULT

800

1200

10

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

1

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B



Phasor Measurement Unit Calibration (Read/Write Setting)

7979

797A

797B

797C

PMU 1 Va Calibration Angle

PMU 1 Vb Calibration Angle

PMU 1 Vc Calibration Angle

PMU 1 Vx Calibration Angle

797D

797E

797F

7980

PMU 1 Ia Calibration Angle

PMU 1 Ib Calibration Angle

PMU 1 Ic Calibration Angle

PMU 1 Ig Calibration Angle

7981

7982

PMU 1 Sequence Voltage Shift Angle

PMU 1 Sequence Current Shift Angle

Phasor Measurement Unit Triggering (Read/Write Setting)

79A1 PMU 1 User Trigger

Phasor Measurement Unit Current Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

79A5 PMU 1 Current Trigger Function

79A6

79A7

PMU 1 Current Trigger Pickup

PMU 1 Current Trigger Pickup Time

79A8

79A9

PMU 1 Current Trigger Dropout Time

PMU 1 Current Trigger Block (3 items)

79AC PMU 1 Current Trigger Target

79AD PMU 1 Current Trigger Events

Phasor Measurement Unit df/dt Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

79C9 PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Function

79CA PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Raise

79CB PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Fall

79CC PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Pickup Time

79CD PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Dropout Time

79CE PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Block (3 items)

79D1 PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Target

7B81

7B82

7B83

7B84

7B85

7B86

7B87

7B88

79D2 PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Events

User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

7B60

7B61

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line

7B6B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text

7B75 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text

7B7F

7B80

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock

User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset

7B89 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set

7B8A User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Hold

7B8B ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2

7BB6 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 3

7BE1 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 4

7C0C ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 5

7C37

7C62



7C8D ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 8

RANGE

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-180 to 180

-180 to 180

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0.1 to 30

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

0.1 to 15

0.1 to 15

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 2

---

---

---

0 to 60

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 600

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 10

GE Multilin



DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

1800

10

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

25

25

10

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

2 (Disabled)

(none)

(none)

(none)

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

1


°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

--s

---

---

---

--pu s

---

---

---

---

---

--s

---

--s

---

---

---

--s

---

---

Hz/s

Hz/s

---

--s s

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.05

1

1

0.1

1

---

---

---

0.05

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

F102

F300

F001

F102

F300

F220

F300

F300

F300

F001

F109

F202

F202

F202

F001

F109

F102

F001

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

0.05

0.05

0.05

0.05

0.05

0.05

0.05

0.05

30

30

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F002

F300

F102

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

B

B-37

B




7CB8 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 9

7CE3 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 10

7D0E ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 11

7D39

7D64



7D8F ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 14

7DBA ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 15

7DE5 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 16

Underfrequency (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

7E10

7E11

7E12

7E13

Underfrequency Function

Underfrequency 1 Block

Underfrequency 1 Minimum Current

Underfrequency 1 Pickup

7E14

7E15

7E16

7E17

7E18

7E19

7E21

7E32

Underfrequency 1 Pickup Delay

Underfrequency 1 Reset Delay

Underfrequency 1 Source

Underfrequency 1 Events

Underfrequency 1 Target

Reserved (8 items)

...Repeated for Underfrequency 2


7E43

7E54



7E65 ...Repeated for Underfrequency 6

Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)

7F30

7F31

7F32

7F33

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay

7F60

7F61

7F62

7F63

7F64

7F65

7F66

7F67

7F34

7F35

7F36

7F37

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events

7F38

7F40

Reserved (8 items)

...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 2

7F50 ...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 3

Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Function

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Signal Source

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Pickup

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Delay

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Curve

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Block

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Target

7F68

7F69

7F70

7F80

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Events

Reserved (7 items)

...Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 2

...Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 3

Frequency (Read Only)

8000 Tracking Frequency

Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)

8600 Breaker Failure 1 Function

8601 Breaker Failure 1 Mode

B-38

RANGE

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0.1 to 1.25

20 to 65

0 to 65.535

0 to 65.535

0 to 5

0 to 1

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 3

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 5

0 to 3

0 to 600

0 to 1

0 to 3

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 65535

---

0 to 1

0 to 1

APPENDIX B


---

--s s

---

--pu

Hz

---

---

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.001

0.001

1

1

1

1

F102

F300

F001

F001

F001

F001

F167

F102

F109

F001

0 (Disabled)

0

10

5950

2000

2000

0 (SRC 1)

0 (Disabled)

0 (Self-reset)

0 s

---

---

---

---

--pu s

---

1

1

0.001

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

F102

F167

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

300

100

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

--pu

---

---

---

--pu s

---

---

1

1

0.001

0.01

1

0.001

1

1

1

1

F102

F167

F001

F001

F111

F001

F300

F109

F102

F001

0 (Disabled)

0 (SRC 1)

700

100

0 (Definite Time)

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

Hz

---

---

---

1

1

F001

F102

F157

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (3-Pole)


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


8617

8618

8619

861A

861B

861C

861D

861E

860F

8610

8611

8612

8613

8614

8615

8616

8607

8608

8609

860A

860B

860C

860D

860E


8602 Breaker Failure 1 Source

8603

8604

8605

8606

Breaker Failure 1 Amp Supervision

Breaker Failure 1 Use Seal-In

Breaker Failure 1 Three Pole Initiate

Breaker Failure 1 Block

Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup

Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup

Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1

Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup





Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P

Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P

Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Test On

Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup

Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup

Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup

Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup

Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time

Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay

Breaker Failure 1 Target

Breaker Failure 1 Events

Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate

Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate

Breaker Failure 1 Phase C Initiate

Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase B

Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase C

861F

8620

8621

8642

Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase B

Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase C

...Repeated for Breaker Failure 2


8663

8684



86A5 ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 6

FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)

8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items)

Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)

8A00

8A01

Digital Element 1 Function

Digital Element 1 Name

8A09 Digital Element 1 Input

8A0A Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay

8A0C Digital Element 1 Reset Delay

8A0E Digital Element 1 Block

8A0F

8A10

8A11

8A12

Digital Element 1 Target

Digital Element 1 Events

Digital Element 1 Pickup LED

Reserved (2 items)

8A14

8A28

...Repeated for Digital Element 2


8A3C ...Repeated for Digital Element 4

8A50 ...Repeated for Digital Element 5


---

0 to 1

---

0 to 65535

0 to 999999.999

0 to 999999.999

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0.001 to 30

0.001 to 30

0.001 to 30

0.001 to 30

0 to 65.535

0 to 65.535

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

RANGE

0 to 5

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0.001 to 30

0.001 to 30

0 to 1

0 to 65.535

0 to 1

0 to 65.535

0 to 1

0 to 65.535


F001

F109

F102

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

FORMAT

F167

F126

F126

F300

F300

F001

F001

F126

F001

F126

F001

F126

F001

1

1

1

1

0.001

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

1

0.001

1

0.001

1

0.001

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

--s

---

---

---

---

--pu pu pu s

---

---

--pu

--s

--s pu pu

--s

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

0

0

0

1050

1050

1050

1050

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DEFAULT

0 (SRC 1)

1 (Yes)

1 (Yes)

0

0

1050

1050

1 (Yes)

0

1 (Yes)

0

1 (Yes)

0

---

---

---

--s s

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

---

1

0.001

0.001

1

1

---

1

1

F300

F102

F203

F300

F003

F003

F300

F109

F102

F102

F001

0

0 (Disabled)

“Dig Element 1“

0

0

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

1 (Enabled)

0

B

GE Multilin


B





8A8C ...Repeated for Digital Element 8

8AA0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 9

8AB4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 10

8AC8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 11

8ADC ...Repeated for Digital Element 12

8AF0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 13

8B04

8B18



8B2C ...Repeated for Digital Element 16

8B40 ...Repeated for Digital Element 17

8B54

8B68



8B7C ...Repeated for Digital Element 20

8B90 ...Repeated for Digital Element 21

8BA4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 22

8BB8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 23

8BCC ...Repeated for Digital Element 24

8BE0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 25

8BF4

8C08



8C1C ...Repeated for Digital Element 28

8C30 ...Repeated for Digital Element 29

8C44

8C58



8C6C ...Repeated for Digital Element 32



8CA8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 35

8CBC ...Repeated for Digital Element 36

8CD0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 37

8CE4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 38

8CF8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 39

8D0C ...Repeated for Digital Element 40

8D20 ...Repeated for Digital Element 41

8D34

8D48



8D5C ...Repeated for Digital Element 44

8D70 ...Repeated for Digital Element 45

8D84

8D98



8DAC ...Repeated for Digital Element 48

Trip Bus (Read/Write Setting)

8E00

8E01

Trip Bus 1 Function

Trip Bus 1 Block

8E02

8E03

8E04

8E05

8E06

8E07

8E08

8E09

Trip Bus 1 Pickup Delay

Trip Bus 1 Reset Delay

Trip Bus 1 Input 1

Trip Bus 1 Input 2

Trip Bus 1 Input 3

Trip Bus 1 Input 4

Trip Bus 1 Input 5

Trip Bus 1 Input 6

8E0A Trip Bus 1 Input 7

B-40

RANGE

0 to 1

---

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

APPENDIX B


---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--s s

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

0.01

0.01

1

1

F102

F300

F001

F001

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


8E10

8E11

8E12

8E13

8E14

8E15

8E16

8E16


8E0B Trip Bus 1 Input 8

8E0C Trip Bus 1 Input 9

8E0D Trip Bus 1 Input 10

8E0E Trip Bus 1 Input 11

8E0F Trip Bus 1 Input 12

Trip Bus 1 Input 13

Trip Bus 1 Input 14

Trip Bus 1 Input 15

Trip Bus 1 Input 16

Trip Bus 1 Latching

Trip Bus 1 Reset

Trip Bus 1 Target

Trip Bus 1 Events

9001

9004

9005

9006

9007

9008

9009

900A

8E18

8E20

8E40

8E60

Reserved (8 items)

...Repeated for Trip Bus 2



8E80 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 5

8EA0 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 6

FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

9000 FlexElement™ 1 Function

FlexElement™ 1 Name

FlexElement™ 1 InputP

FlexElement™ 1 InputM

FlexElement™ 1 Compare

FlexElement™ 1 Input

FlexElement™ 1 Direction

FlexElement™ 1 Hysteresis

FlexElement™ 1 Pickup

9201

9202

9203

9204

9205

9206

9207

9208

9208

900C

900D

900F

9010

9011

9012

9013

9014

FlexElement™ 1 DeltaT Units

FlexElement™ 1 DeltaT

FlexElement™ 1 Pickup Delay

FlexElement™ 1 Reset Delay

FlexElement™ 1 Block

FlexElement™ 1 Target

FlexElement™ 1 Events

...Repeated for FlexElement™ 2

9028

903C

9050

9064





9078

908C



Fault Report Settings (Read/Write Setting) (up to 5 modules)

9200 Fault Report 1 Source

Fault Report 1 Trigger

Fault Report 1 Z1 Magnitude

Fault Report 1 Z1 Angle

Fault Report 1 Z0 Magnitude

Fault Report 1 Z0 Angle

Fault Report 1 Line Length Units

Fault Report 1 Line Length

Fault Report 1 VT Substitution

Fault Report 1 System Z0 Magnitude

0 to 5

0 to 65535

0.01 to 250

25 to 90

0.01 to 650

25 to 90

0 to 1

0 to 2000

0 to 2

0.01 to 650.00

RANGE

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0.1 to 50

-90 to 90

0 to 2

20 to 86400

0 to 65.535

0 to 65.535

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1


---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

FORMAT

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F102

F300

F109

F102

F001

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0 s s

---

---

---

---

% pu

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

0.1

0.001

1

1

0.001

0.001

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

F102

F206

F600

F600

F516

F515

F517

F001

F004

F518

F003

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

0 (Disabled)

“FxE 1”

0

0

0 (LEVEL)

0 (SIGNED)

0 (OVER)

30

1000

0 (Milliseconds)

20

0

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

---

--ohms degrees ohms degrees

---

--ohms

1

1

0.1

1

0.01

1

1

0.01

1

0.01

F167

F300

F001

F001

F001

F001

F147

F001

F270

F001

0 (SRC 1)

0

300

75

900

75

0 (km)

1000

0 (None)

900

B

GE Multilin



B


9348

934E

9354

935A

9360

9366

936C

9372

9318

931E

9324

932A

9330

9336

933C

9342


9208 Fault Report 1 System Z0 Angle

920B

9216

9221

922C

...Repeated for Fault Report 2




dcmA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)

9300 dcmA Output 1 Source

9301

9302 dcmA Output 1 Range dcmA Output 1 Minimum

9304

9306

930C

9312 dcmA Output 1 Maximum

...Repeated for dcmA Output 2



















9916

9919

991C

991F

9922

9925

9928

992B

9378

937E

9384

938A





IEC 61850 received integers (read/write setting registers)

9910 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 1 default value

9912

9913

IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 mode

...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 2









992E

9931

9934

9937





993A

993D



FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)

9A01 FlexElement™ 1 Actual


RANGE

25 to 90

0 to 65535

0 to 2

–90 to 90

–90 to 90

0 to 429496295

0 to 1

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

UNITS

degrees

---

--pu pu

---

---

---

---

STEP

1

FORMAT

F001

1

1

0.001

0.001

1

1

0.001

0.001

F600

F522

F004

F004

F003

F491

F004

F004

DEFAULT

75

0

0 (–1 to 1 mA)

0

1000

1000

0 (Default Value)

0

0


GE Multilin





9A07

9A09

FlexElement™ 4 Actual

FlexElement™ 5 Actual

9A0B FlexElement™ 6 Actual

9A0D FlexElement™ 7 Actual

9A0F FlexElement™ 8 Actual

VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

A040

A041

VT Fuse Failure Function

...Repeated for module number 2

A042

A043

A044

A045





Selector switch actual values (read only)

A210 Selector switch 1 position

A211 Selector switch 2 position

Selector switch settings (read/write, 2 modules)

A280

A281

A282

A283

Selector 1 Function

Selector 1 Range

Selector 1 Timeout

Selector 1 Step Up

A284

A285

A286

A287

Selector 1 Step Mode

Selector 1 Acknowledge

Selector 1 Bit0

Selector 1 Bit1

A288

A289

Selector 1 Bit2

Selector 1 Bit Mode

A28A Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge

A28B Selector 1 Power Up Mode

A28C Selector 1 Target

A28D Selector 1 Events

A28E Reserved (10 items)

A298 ...Repeated for Selector 2

DNP/IEC Points (Read/Write Setting)

A300 DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Binary Input Points (256 items)

A400 DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Analog Input Points (256 items)

Flexcurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)

A600

A680

FlexCurve C (120 items)

FlexCurve D (120 items)

Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

A700 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Function

A701

A702

A703

A704

Non-Volatile Latch 1 Type

Non-Volatile Latch 1 Set

Non-Volatile Latch 1 Reset

Non-Volatile Latch 1 Target

A705

A706

Non-Volatile Latch 1 Events

Reserved (4 items)

A70A ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 2

A714 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 3

A71E ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 4



A73C ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 7


RANGE

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

-2147483.647 to 2147483.647

0 to 1

1 to 7

1 to 7

0 to 1

1 to 7

3 to 60

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 1

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--ms ms

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--s

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

STEP

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

FORMAT

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

F004

1 F102

F001

F001

F300

F083

F300

F084

F109

F102

F001

F102

F001

F001

F300

F083

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F011

F011

F102

F519

F300

F300

F109

F102

F001

DEFAULT

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (Reset Dominant)

0

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

0

1

0 (Disabled)

7

50

0

0 (Time-out)

0

0

0

0

0 (Time-out)

0

0 (Restore)

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

0

B

GE Multilin



B




A75A ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 10


A76E ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 12



A78C ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 15


Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

A800

A801

Digital Counter 1 Function

Digital Counter 1 Name

A807 Digital Counter 1 Units

A80A Digital Counter 1 Block

A80B Digital Counter 1 Up

A80C Digital Counter 1 Down

A80D Digital Counter 1 Preset

A80F Digital Counter 1 Compare

RANGE

0 to 1

---

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

–2147483647 to

2147483647

–2147483647 to

2147483647

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

---

A811

A812

A813

A814

A815

A820

A840

A860

Digital Counter 1 Reset

Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset

Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count

Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset

Reserved (11 items)




A880 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 5

A8A0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 6

A8C0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 7

A8E0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 8

IEC 61850 received analog settings (read/write)

AA00 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog 1 default value

AA02 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 mode

AA03 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 units

AA05 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 per-unit base

AA07 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2

AA0E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 3


AA1C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 5


AA2A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 7



AA3F ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 10


AA4D ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 12


AA5B ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 14



IEC 61850 XCBR configuration (read/write settings)

AB24 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR1.ST.Loc status

AB25 Command to clear XCBR1 OpCnt (operation counter)


–1000000 to 1000000

0 to 1

---

0 to 999999999.999

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535


1

1

1

1

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

0.001

1

---

0.001

1

1

1

F060

F491

F207

F060

F300

F126

F300

F102

F205

F206

F300

F300

F300

F004

F004

F300

F300

F300

F300

F001

DEFAULT

1000

0 (Default Value)

(none)

1

0

0 (No)

0

0 (Disabled)

“Counter 1"

(none)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B






AB2A Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR4.ST.Loc status

AB2B Command to clear XCBR4 OpCnt (operation counter)

AB2C Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR5.ST.Loc status

AB2D Command to clear XCBR5 OpCnt (operation counter)

AB2E Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR6.ST.Loc status

AB2F Command to clear XCBR6 OpCnt (operation counter)

IEC 61850 LN name prefixes (read/write settings)

AB30 IEC 61850 logical node LPHD1 name prefix

AB33 IEC 61850 logical node PIOCx name prefix (72 items)

AC0B IEC 61850 logical node PTOCx name prefix (24 items)

AC53 IEC 61850 logical node PTUVx name prefix (13 items)

AC7A IEC 61850 logical node PTOVx name prefix (10 items)

AC98 IEC 61850 logical node PDISx name prefix (10 items)

ACB6 IEC 61850 logical node RBRFx name prefix (24 items)

ACFE IEC 61850 logical node RPSBx name prefix

AD01 IEC 61850 logical node RRECx name prefix (6 items)

AD13 IEC 61850 logical node MMXUx name prefix (6 items)

AD25 IEC 61850 logical node GGIOx name prefix (5 items)

AD34 IEC 61850 logical node RFLOx name prefix (5 items)

AD43 IEC 61850 logical node XCBRx name prefix (6 items)

AD55 IEC 61850 logical node PTRCx name prefix (6 items)

AD67 IEC 61850 logical node PDIFx name prefix (6 items)

AD73 IEC 61850 logical node MMXNx name prefix (6 items)

ADE2 IEC 61850 logical node CSWIx name prefix (6 items)

AE3C IEC 61850 logical node XSWIx name prefix (6 items)

IEC 61850 XSWI configuration (read/write settings)

AECF Operand for IEC 61850 XSWI1.ST.Loc status

AED0 Command to clear XSWI1 OpCnt (operation counter)

AED1 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI2





AEDB Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI7

AEDD Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI8

AEDF Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI9

AEE1 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI10





AEEB Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI15

AEED Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI16

AEEF Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI17

AEF1 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI18





AEFB Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI23

AEFD Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI24

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

RANGE

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 1

GE Multilin



---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

FORMAT

F126

F300

F126

F300

F126

F300

F126

F300

F126

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F300

F126

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

(none)

DEFAULT

0 (No)

0

0 (No)

0

0 (No)

0

0 (No)

0

0 (No)

0

0 (No)

B-45

B


B



IEC 61850 GGIO4 general analog configuration settings (read/write)

RANGE

AF00 Number of analog points in GGIO4

IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input points configuration settings (read/write)

4 to 32

AF10

AF11

IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 value

IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 deadband

---

0.001 to 100

AF13

AF15

IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 minimum

IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 maximum

–1000000000000 to

1000000000000

–1000000000000 to

1000000000000

AF17 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 2

AF1E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 3


AF2C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 5


AF3A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 7

AF41

AF48

...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 8


AF4F ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 10


AF5D ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 12


AF6B ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 14


AF79

AF80




AF8E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 19


AF9C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 21

AFA3 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 22

AFAA ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 23

AFB1 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 24

AFB8 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 25

AFBF ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 26

AFC6 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 27

AFCD ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 28

AFD4 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 29

AFDB ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 30

AFE2 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 31

AFE9 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 32

IEC 61850 Logical Node Name Prefixes (Read/Write Setting)

AB30 IEC 61850 Logical Node LPHD1 Name Prefix

AB33 IEC 61850 Logical Node PIOCx Name Prefix (72 items)

AC0B IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOCx Name Prefix (24 items)

AC53 IEC 61850 Logical Node PTUVx Name Prefix (12 items)

AC77 IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOVx Name Prefix (8 items)

AC8F IEC 61850 Logical Node PDISx Name Prefix (10 items)

ACAD IEC 61850 Logical Node RRBFx Name Prefix (24 items)

ACF5 IEC 61850 Logical Node RPSBx Name Prefix

ACF8 IEC 61850 Logical Node RRECx Name Prefix (6 items)

AD0A IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXUx Name Prefix (6 items)

AD1C IEC 61850 Logical Node GGIOx Name Prefix (4 items)

AD28 IEC 61850 Logical Node RFLOx Name Prefix (5 items)

AD37 IEC 61850 Logical Node XCBRx Name Prefix (2 items)

AD3D IEC 61850 Logical Node PTRCx Name Prefix (2 items)

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---


---

---

%

---

---

4

---

0.001

0.001

0.001

F001

F600

F003

F060

F060

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

F206

APPENDIX B

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

(None)

DEFAULT

4

0

100000

0

1000000


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B



AD43 IEC 61850 Logical Node PDIFx Name Prefix (4 items)

AD4F IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXNx Name Prefix (37 items)

IEC 61850 GOOSE/GSSE Configuration (Read/Write Setting)

B01C Default GOOSE/GSSE Update Time

B01D IEC 61850 GSSE Function (GsEna)

B013

B03F

B040

B043

B064

B067

B068

B069

IEC 61850 GSSE ID

IEC 61850 GOOSE Function (GoEna)

IEC 61850 GSSE Destination MAC Address

IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE ID

IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE Destination MAC Address

IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority

IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN ID

IEC 61850 GOOSE ETYPE APPID

B06A Reserved (2 items)

IEC 61850 Server Configuration (Read/Write Settings/Commands)

B06C TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 / MMS Protocol

B06D IEC 61850 Logical Device Name

B07D IEC 61850 Logical Device Instance

B08D IEC 61850 LPHD Location

B0B5 Include non-IEC 61850 Data

B06B IEC 61850 Server Data Scanning Function

B0B7 Reserved (15 items)

IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)

B0C0 IEC 61850 MMXU TotW Deadband 1

B0C2 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVAr Deadband 1

B0C4 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVA Deadband 1

B0C6 IEC 61850 MMXU TotPF Deadband 1

B0C8 IEC 61850 MMXU Hz Deadband 1

B0CA IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsAB Deadband 1

B0CC IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsBC Deadband 1

B0CE IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsCA Deadband 1

B0D0 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsADeadband 1

B0D2 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsB Deadband 1

B0D4 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsC Deadband 1

B0D6 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsA Deadband 1

B0D8 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsB Deadband 1

B0DA IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsC Deadband 1

B0DC IEC 61850 MMXU A.neut Deadband 1

B0DE IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsA Deadband 1

B0E0 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsB Deadband 1

B0E2 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsC Deadband 1

B0E4 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsA Deadband 1

B0E6 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsB Deadband 1

B0E8 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsC Deadband 1

B0EA IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsA Deadband 1

B0EC IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsB Deadband 1

B0EE IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsC Deadband 1

B0F0

B0F2

IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsA Deadband 1

IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsB Deadband 1

B0F4

B0F6

IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsC Deadband 1

...Repeated for Deadband 2

B12C ...Repeated for Deadband 3

B162 ...Repeated for Deadband 4

B198 ...Repeated for Deadband 5

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

0.001 to 100

RANGE

0 to 65534

0 to 65534

1 to 60

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

---

---

---

0 to 7

0 to 4095

0 to 16383

0 to 1

1 to 65535

---

---

---

0 to 1

0 to 1

GE Multilin



B-47

B


B



B1CE ...Repeated for Deadband 6

IEC 61850 Configurable Report Settings (Read/Write Setting)

B290 IEC 61850 configurable reports dataset items (64 items)

IEC 61850 GGIO1 Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting)

B500 Number of Status Indications in GGIO1

RANGE

0 to 848

8 to 128

B501 IEC 61850 GGIO1 Indication operands (128 items) ---

IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Transmission (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

B5A0 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function

B5A1 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID

0 to 1

---

B5C2

B5C5

B5C6

B5C7

Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address

IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority

IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID

IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID

B5C8 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev

B5CA IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransmission Curve

B5CB Configurable GOOSE dataset items for transmission

(64 items)

B60B ...Repeated for Module 2

B676 ...Repeated for Module 3

B6E1 ...Repeated for Module 4

---

0 to 7

0 to 4095

0 to 16383

1 to 4294967295

0 to 3

0 to 542

B74C ...Repeated for Module 5

B7B7 ...Repeated for Module 6

B822 ...Repeated for Module 7

B88D ...Repeated for Module 8

IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Reception (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

B900 Configurable GOOSE dataset items for reception

(32 items)

0 to 32

B940

B980

...Repeated for Module 2

...Repeated for Module 3

B9C0 ...Repeated for Module 4

BA00 ...Repeated for Module 5



BAC0 ...Repeated for Module 8

Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

---

0 to 1

0 to 16

BB00 Contact Input 1 Name

BB06 Contact Input 1 Events

BB07 Contact Input 1 Debounce Time

BB08 ...Repeated for Contact Input 2


















---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--ms

1

8

1

1

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F615

F001

F300

F102

F209

F072

F001

F001

F001

F003

F611

F616

0 (None)

8

0

0 (None)

“GOOSEOut_x_”

0

0

0

4

1

3 (Relaxed)

0 (None)

F233

---

1

0.5

F205

F102

F001

APPENDIX B

DEFAULT

0 (None)

“Cont Ip 1“

0 (Disabled)

20


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B





BBA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 21

BBA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 22

BBB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 23

BBB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 24

BBC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 25

BBC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 26

BBD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 27

BBD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 28

BBE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 29

BBE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 30

BBF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 31

BBF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 32

BC00 ...Repeated for Contact Input 33




















BCA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 53

BCA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 54

BCB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 55

BCB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 56

BCC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 57

BCC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 58

BCD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 59

BCD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 60

BCE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 61

BCE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 62

BCF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 63

BCF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 64

BD00 ...Repeated for Contact Input 65








RANGE

GE Multilin




B-49

B


B















BDA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 85

BDA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 86

BDB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 87

BDB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 88

BDC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 89

BDC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 90

BDD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 91

BDD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 92

BDE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 93

BDE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 94

BDF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 95

BDF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 96

Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)

BE00 Contact Input n Threshold, n = 1 to 24 (24 items)

Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

BE30 Virtual Input 1 Function

BE31 Virtual Input 1 Name

BE37 Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type

BE38 Virtual Input 1 Events

BE39 Reserved (3 items)

BE3C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 2

BE48 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 3








BEA8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 11

BEB4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 12

BEC0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 13

BECC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 14

BED8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 15

BEE4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 16

BEF0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 17

BEFC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 18

BF08

BF14

...Repeated for Virtual Input 19


BF20 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 21

BF2C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 22


RANGE

0 to 3

0 to 1

---

0 to 1

0 to 1

---

B-50

APPENDIX B


---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

---

1

1

---

F128

F102

F205

F127

F102

F001

1 (33 Vdc)

0 (Disabled)

“Virt Ip 1“

0 (Latched)

0 (Disabled)

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B






BF68

BF74






BFA4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 32

BFB0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 33

BFBC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 34

BFC8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 35

BFD4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 36

BFE0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 37

BFEC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 38

BFF8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 39

C004 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 40


C01C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 42

C028

C034





C058

C064





C088

C094



C138

C140

C148

C150

C158

C160

C168

C170

C178

C0A0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 53

C0AC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 54

C0B8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 55

C0C4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 56

C0D0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 57

C0DC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 58

C0E8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 59

C0F4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 60



C118

C124



Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)

C130 Virtual Output 1 Name

C136

C137

Virtual Output 1 Events

Reserved

...Repeated for Virtual Output 2









RANGE

---

0 to 1

---

GE Multilin

---

---

---

---

1

---

F205

F102

F001

“Virt Op 1 “

0 (Disabled)

0




B-51

B


B



C180 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 11

C188

C190




C1A0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 15


C1B0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 17


C1C0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 19


C1D0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 21


C1E0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 23

C228

C230

C238

C240

C248

C250

C258

C260


C1F0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 25



C208

C210

C218

C220













C268

C270

C278

C280





C288

C290

















C308

C310

C318

C320

C328






RANGE

B-52

APPENDIX B



GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


C358

C360

C368

C370

C378

C380

C388

C390



C338

C340

C348

C350



























C408

C410



C418

C420




Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)

C430

C431

Test Mode Function

Force VFD and LED

C432 Test Mode Forcing

Clear commands (read/write)

C433 Clear All Relay Records Command

Synchrophasor actual values (read only)

C435 Synchrophasors active

Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

C440

C446

C447

C448

Contact Output 1 Name

Contact Output 1 Operation

Contact Output 1 Seal In

Latching Output 1 Reset

C449 Contact Output 1 Events

C44A Latching Output 1 Type

C44B Reserved

C44C ...Repeated for Contact Output 2

C458

C464

...Repeated for Contact Output 3


C470 ...Repeated for Contact Output 5



RANGE

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

---

GE Multilin

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

1

1

1

F245

F126

F300

F126

F126

0 (Disabled)

0 (No)

1

0 (No)

0 (No)

F205

F300

F300

F300

F102

F090

F001

“Cont Op 1"

0

0

0

1 (Enabled)

0 (Operate-dominant)

0




B-53

B


B




C4A0 ...Repeated for Contact Output 9

C4AC ...Repeated for Contact Output 10

C4B8 ...Repeated for Contact Output 11

C4C4 ...Repeated for Contact Output 12

C4D0 ...Repeated for Contact Output 13

C4DC ...Repeated for Contact Output 14

C4E8 ...Repeated for Contact Output 15

C4F4 ...Repeated for Contact Output 16



C518

C524





C548

C554





C578

C584








C5CC ...Repeated for Contact Output 34




C5FC ...Repeated for Contact Output 38

C608

C614





C638

C644





C668

C674








C6BC ...Repeated for Contact Output 54




C6EC ...Repeated for Contact Output 58




RANGE

B-54

APPENDIX B



GE Multilin

APPENDIX B




C728

C734



Reset (Read/Write Setting)

C750 FlexLogic™ operand which initiates a reset

Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)

C760 Control Pushbutton 1 Function

C761

C762

Control Pushbutton 1 Events

...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 2

C764

C766



C768 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 5

C76A ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 6

C76C ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 7

Clear Records (Read/Write Setting)

C770

C772

Clear Fault Reports operand

Clear Event Records operand

C773

C774

C775

C776

Clear Oscillography operand

Clear Data Logger operand

Clear Breaker 1 Arcing Current operand


C777

C778



C77C Clear Channel Status operand

C77F Clear Unauthorized Access operand

C782 Reserved (13 items)

Force Contact Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)

C7A0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items)

C800 Force Contact Output x State (64 items)

Channel Tests (Read/Write)

C840 Local Loopback Function

C841

C842

Local Loopback Channel

Remote Loopback Function

C843

C844

Remote Loopback Channel

Remote Diagnostics Transmit

Direct Input/Output Settings (Read/Write Setting)

C850 Direct Input Default States (8 items)

C858

C860

Direct Input Default States (8 items)

Direct Output x 1 Operand (8 items)

C868 Direct Output x 2 Operand (8 items)

Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)

CB00 Remote Device 1 GSSE/GOOSE Application ID

CB21 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Ethernet APPID

CB22 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Dataset

CB23 Remote Device 1 in PMU Scheme

CB24 ...Repeated for Device 2


CB6C ...Repeated for Device 4


CBB4 ...Repeated for Device 6

CBD8 ...Repeated for Device 7

CBFC ...Repeated for Device 8

CC20 ...Repeated for Device 9


RANGE

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

1 to 2

0 to 1

1 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

---

0 to 16383

0 to 16

0 to 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

---

0 to 2

0 to 3

GE Multilin

---

---

---

1

1

1

F300

F102

F102

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (Disabled)

0 (Disabled)

0 (No)

1

0 (No)

1

0 (NO TEST)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0

0

“Remote Device 1“

0

0 (Fixed)

0 (No)

F126

F001

F126

F001

F223

F108

F108

F300

F300

F209

F001

F184

F126

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F300

F001

F144

F131




B-55

B


B




CC8C ...Repeated for Device 12

CCB0 ...Repeated for Device 13

CCD4 ...Repeated for Device 14

CCF8 ...Repeated for Device 15

CD1C ...Repeated for Device 16

Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

CFA0 Remote Input 1 Device

CFA1 Remote Input 1 Item

CFA2 Remote Input 1 Default State

CFA3 Remote Input 1 Events

CFA4 Remote Input 1 Name

CFAA ...Repeated for Remote Input 2

CFB4 ...Repeated for Remote Input 3

CFBE ...Repeated for Remote Input 4

CFC8 ...Repeated for Remote Input 5

CFD2 ...Repeated for Remote Input 6

CFDC ...Repeated for Remote Input 7

CFE6 ...Repeated for Remote Input 8

CFF0 ...Repeated for Remote Input 9

CFFA ...Repeated for Remote Input 10

D004 ...Repeated for Remote Input 11

D00E ...Repeated for Remote Input 12

D018

D022

...Repeated for Remote Input 13


D02C ...Repeated for Remote Input 15



D04A ...Repeated for Remote Input 18


D05E ...Repeated for Remote Input 20

D068

D072



D07C ...Repeated for Remote Input 23



D09A ...Repeated for Remote Input 26

D0A4 ...Repeated for Remote Input 27

D0AE ...Repeated for Remote Input 28

D0B8 ...Repeated for Remote Input 29

D0C2 ...Repeated for Remote Input 30

D0CC ...Repeated for Remote Input 31

D0D6 ...Repeated for Remote Input 32

Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

D220 Remote Output DNA 1 Operand

D221

D222

D224

D228

Remote Output DNA 1 Events

Reserved (2 items)

...Repeated for Remote Output 2


D22C ...Repeated for Remote Output 4

D230 ...Repeated for Remote Output 5

D234

D238




RANGE

1 to 16

0 to 64

0 to 3

0 to 1

1 to 64

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

B-56

APPENDIX B


---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

F001

F156

F086

F102

F205

1

0 (None)

0 (Off)

0 (Disabled)

“Rem Ip 1”

---

---

---

1

1

1

F300

F102

F001

0

0 (Disabled)

0


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B




D244

D248





D254

D258





D264

D268





D274

D278





D284

D288





D294

D298




Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

D2A0 Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand

D2A1 Remote Output UserSt 1 Events

D2A2 Reserved (2 items)

D2A4 ...Repeated for Remote Output 2

D2A8 ...Repeated for Remote Output 3

D2AC ...Repeated for Remote Output 4

D2B0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 5



D2BC ...Repeated for Remote Output 8

D2C0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 9



D2CC ...Repeated for Remote Output 12

D2D0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 13



D2DC ...Repeated for Remote Output 16

D2E0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 17



D2EC ...Repeated for Remote Output 20

D2F0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 21



D2FC ...Repeated for Remote Output 24

D300

D304




RANGE

0 to 65535

0 to 1

0 to 1

GE Multilin

---

---

---

1

1

1

F300

F102

F001

0

0 (Disabled)

0




B-57

B


B




D310

D314





RANGE

IEC 61850 GGIO2 Control Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

D320 IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO1.ctlModel Value 0 to 2

D321

D322

IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO2.ctlModel Value


0 to 2

0 to 2

D323

D324

D325

D326





0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

D327

D328



D329 IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO10.ctlModel Value

D32A IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO11.ctlModel Value

D32B IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO12.ctlModel Value

D32C IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO13.ctlModel Value

D32D IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO14.ctlModel Value

D32E IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO15.ctlModel Value

D32F IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO16.ctlModel Value


D331

D332



D333

D334

D335

D336





0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

D337

D338











D341

D342



D343

D344

D345

D346





D347

D348










0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

B-58

APPENDIX B


F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---


2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B




D351

D352

D353

D354





D355

D356

D357

D358











Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)

D380 Remote Device 1 StNum

D382

D384

Remote Device 1 SqNum

...Repeated for Remote Device 2

D388 ...Repeated for Remote Device 3

D38C ...Repeated for Remote Device 4

D390

D394



D398 ...Repeated for Remote Device 7

D39C ...Repeated for Remote Device 8

D3A0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 9



D3AC ...Repeated for Remote Device 12

D3B0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 13



D3BC ...Repeated for Remote Device 16

D3C0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 17



D3CC ...Repeated for Remote Device 20

D3D0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 21



D3DC ...Repeated for Remote Device 24

D3E0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 25



D3EC ...Repeated for Remote Device 28

D3F0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 29



D3FC ...Repeated for Remote Device 32

Phasor Measurement Unit Communication (Read/Write Setting)

D400 PMU 1 Communication Port 1 Type

D401

D402

PMU 1 Communication Port 2 Type

PMU 1 Communication Port 3 Type

D403 PMU 1 Port 1 PHS-x (14 items)

0 to 4294967295

0 to 4294967295

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 14

RANGE

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2

0 to 2


---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

STEP

1

1

1

1

1

FORMAT

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

F001

1

1

F003

F003

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

F545

F545

F545

F543

0 (Network)

0 (Network)

0 (Network)

1 (Va)

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

DEFAULT

2

2

2

2

2

0

0

B

GE Multilin



B



D411 PMU 1 Port 2 PHS-x (14 items)

D41F PMU 1 Port 3 PHS-x (14 items)

D42D PMU 1 Communication Port 1 PHS-x Name (14 items)

D49D PMU 1 Port 2 PHS-x Name (14 items)

D50D PMU 1 Port 3 PHS-x Name (14 items)

D57D PMU 1 Port 1 A-CH-x (8 items)

D585 PMU 1 Port 2 A-CH-x (8 items)

D58D PMU 1 Port 3 A-CH-x (8 items)

D595 PMU 1 Port 1 A-CH-x Name (8 items)

D5D5 PMU 1 Port 2 A-CH-x Name (8 items)

D615 PMU 1 Port 3 A-CH-x Name (8 items)

D655

D665

PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x (16 items)


D675

D685

D705

D785


PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x Name (16 items)



D705

D715

PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x Normal State (16 items)

PMU 1 Port 2 D-CH-x Normal State (16 items)

D725 PMU 1 Port 3 D-CH-x Normal State (16 items)

Phasor Measurement Unit Recording Command (Read/Write Command)

0 to 65535

---

---

---

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

0 to 1

E4D4 PMU 1 Recording Clear Command

E4D5 PMU 1 Recording Force Trigger

Phasor Measurement Unit Recording (Read/Write Setting)

E4DC PMU 1 Recording Rate

E4DD Reserved

E4DE PMU 1 No Of Timed Records

E4DF PMU 1 Trigger Mode

E4E0 PMU 1 Timed Trigger Position

0 to 10

---

1 to 128

0 to 1

1 to 50

E4E1 Reserved

E4E2 PMU 1 Record PHS-1 (14 items)

E4F0

E560

PMU 1 Record PHS-x Name (14 items)

PMU 1 Record A-CH-x (8 items)

E568 PMU 1 Record A-CH-x Name (8 items)

E5A8 PMU 1 Record D-CH-x (16 items)

E5B8 PMU 1 Record D-CH-x Name (16 items)

Phasor Measurement Unit Frequency Trigger (Read/Write Setting)

EB00 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Function

EB01 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Low Frequency

EB02 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger High Frequency

EB03 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Pickup Time

EB04 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Dropout Time

EB05 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Block (3 items)

EB08 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Target

EB09 PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Events

RANGE

0 to 14

0 to 14

---

---

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

---

---

---

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

---

0 to 14

---

0 to 65535

---

0 to 65535

---

0 to 1

20 to 70

20 to 70

0 to 600

0 to 600

0 to 65535

0 to 2

0 to 1

Setting file template values (read only)

ED00 FlexLogic™ displays active

ED01 Reserved (6 items)

ED07 Last settings change date

ED09 Template bitmask (750 items)

Phasor Measurement Unit Records (Read Only)

EFFF PMU Recording Number of Triggers

0 to 1

---

0 to 4294967295

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

APPENDIX B

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

%

---

1

---

---

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

UNITS

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

1

1

1

---

1

1

STEP

1

1

---

---

---

1

1

1

1

---

---

---

FORMAT

F543

F543

F203

F203

F203

F600

F600

F600

F203

F203

F203

F300

F300

F300

F203

F203

F203

F108

F108

F108

DEFAULT

1 (Va)

1 (Va)

“GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1”



0

0

0

“AnalogChannel 1”



0

0

0

“Dig Channel 1”

“Dig Channel 1”

“Dig Channel 1”

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

0 (Off)

F126

F126

F544

F001

F001

F542

F001

F001

F543

F203

F600

F203

F300

F203

0 (No)

0 (No)

3 (10/sec.)

0

3

0 (Auto Overwrite)

10

0

1 (Va)

GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1

0

AnalogChannel 1

0

Dig Channel 1

---

---

---

--samples s

---

---

---

---

Hz

Hz s

1

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

1

1

1

1

---

1

1

1

F102

---

F050

F001

F001

F102

F001

F001

F001

F001

F300

F109

F102

0 (Disabled)

4900

6100

10

100

0

0 (Self-reset)

0 (Disabled)

1 (Enabled)

---

0

0

0


GE Multilin


B.4.2 DATA FORMATS

F001

UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER

F040

UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER

F002

UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER

F050

UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)

Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January

1, 1970.

B

F003

UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)

High order word is stored in the first register.

Low order word is stored in the second register.

F051

UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)

First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,

2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1

Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1

F004

UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)

High order word is stored in the first register/

Low order word is stored in the second register.

F005

UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER

F052

UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)

First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).

Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;

Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1

Last 16 bits are Seconds (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,

1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)

F006

UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER

F011

UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)

A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time value is stored.

F060

FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)

F070

HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS

F071


F072


F012

DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING

(unsigned 16-bit integer)

MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the number of decimal points to display.

Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is

12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.

F073


F074


F013

POWER_FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)

Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indicate leading.

F080

ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE MODE

0 = 1 & 3 Pole, 1 = 1 Pole, 2 = 3 Pole-A, 3 = 3 Pole-B

F083

ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES

0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge

GE Multilin



F084

ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP

0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore

B

F086

ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE

0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On

F090

ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE

0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant

F100

ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE

0 = Wye; 1 = Delta

F101

ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY

0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%

F102

ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED

0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled

F103

ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES bitmask curve shape

0 IEEE Mod Inv

1

2

IEEE Very Inv

IEEE Ext Inv

5

6

3

4

7

8

IEC Curve A

IEC Curve B

IEC Curve C

IEC Short Inv

IAC Ext Inv

IAC Very Inv

bitmask curve shape

9 IAC Inverse

10

11

IAC Short Inv

I2t

12

13

14

15

16

Definite Time

FlexCurve™ A

FlexCurve™ B

FlexCurve™ C

FlexCurve™ D

F104

ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE

0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear

F105

ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT

0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2

APPENDIX B

F106

ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION

0 = ABC, 1 = ACB

F108

ENUMERATION: OFF/ON

0 = Off, 1 = On

F109

ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION

0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled

F110

ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL

0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None

F111

ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES

0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time

F112

ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES bitmask value

0 300

1

2

3

1200

2400

4800

bitmask value

4 9600

5

6

7

19200

38400

57600

bitmask value

8 115200

9

10

11

14400

28800

33600

F113

ENUMERATION: PARITY

0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even

F114

ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE

0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated

F115

ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS

0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B

F116

ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE CURVES

0 = Definite Time, 1 = FlexCurve™ A, 2 = FlexCurve™ B,

3 = FlexCurve™ C


GE Multilin


F117

ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS

0 = 1

×72 cycles, 1 = 3×36 cycles, 2 = 7×18 cycles, 3 = 15×9 cycles

F118

ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE

0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected

F119

ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE™ PICKUP RATIOS

F122

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

58

59

41

42

43

44

45

46

37

38

39

40

mask value

30 0.88

31

32

0.90

0.91

33

34

35

36

0.92

0.93

0.94

0.95

0.96

0.97

0.98

1.03

1.05

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.40

1.50

1.60

1.70

1.80

1.90

2.00

2.10

2.20

2.30

2.40

2.50

2.60

2.70

2.80

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

25

26

27

28

29

11

12

13

14

15

16

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

mask value

0 0.00

1

2

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.48

0.50

0.52

0.54

0.56

0.58

0.60

0.62

0.64

0.66

0.68

0.70

0.72

0.74

0.76

0.78

0.80

0.82

0.84

0.86

111

112

113

114

107

108

109

110

115

116

117

118

119

101

102

103

104

105

106

97

98

99

100

mask value

90 5.90

91

92

6.00

6.50

93

94

95

96

7.00

7.50

8.00

8.50

9.00

9.50

10.00

10.50

11.00

11.50

12.00

12.50

13.00

13.50

14.00

14.50

15.00

15.50

16.00

16.50

17.00

17.50

18.00

18.50

19.00

19.50

20.00

81

82

83

84

77

78

79

80

85

86

87

88

89

71

72

73

74

75

76

67

68

69

70

63

64

65

66

mask value

60 2.90

61

62

3.00

3.10

3.20

3.30

3.40

3.50

3.60

3.70

3.80

3.90

4.00

4.10

4.20

4.30

4.40

4.50

4.60

4.70

4.80

4.90

5.00

5.10

5.20

5.30

5.40

5.50

5.60

5.70

5.80

ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE

0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS

F123

ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY

0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A

F124

ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS

57

64

65

66

49

50

51

56

37

38

39

48

33

34

35

36

19

24

25

32

7

16

17

18

bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

113

120

140

144

83

96

97

112

145

148

71

80

81

82

67

68

69

70

element

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1








Phase Time Overcurrent 1




Phase Directional Overcurrent 1

Phase Directional Overcurrent 2

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1








Neutral Time Overcurrent 1




Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1

Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2

Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1








Ground Time Overcurrent 1




Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1

Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 2

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1

Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 2

Negative Sequence Overvoltage

Auxiliary Undervoltage 1

Phase Undervoltage 1

Phase Undervoltage 2

Auxiliary Overvoltage 1

B

GE Multilin


B


FlexElement™ 3

FlexElement™ 4

FlexElement™ 5

FlexElement™ 6

FlexElement™ 7

FlexElement™ 8

Non-volatile Latch 1
















Digital Counter 1

element

Phase Overvoltage 1

Compensated Overvoltage 1

SRC1 VT Fuse Failure

SRC2 VT Fuse Failure

SRC1 50DD (Disturbance Detection)

SRC2 50DD (Disturbance Detection)

87L Current Differential

CT Failure

Stub Bus

Breaker Failure 1

Breaker Failure 2

Breaker Arcing Current 1

Breaker Arcing Current 2

Autoreclose (three-pole) 1

Phasor measurement unit one-shot

Synchrocheck 1

Synchrocheck 2

Setting Group

Reset

Selector 1

Selector 2

Control pushbutton 1







FlexElement™ 1

FlexElement™ 2

426

427

428

429

422

423

424

425

406

407

420

421

402

403

404

405

430

431

432

433

434

435

544

395

396

400

401

391

392

393

394

337

388

389

390

311

312

313

336

281

288

289

304

240

246

255

280

bitmask

152

154

224

225

232

233

B-64

Digital Element 24

Digital Element 25

Digital Element 26

Digital Element 27

Digital Element 28

Digital Element 29

Digital Element 30

Digital Element 31

Digital Element 32

Digital Element 33

Digital Element 34

Digital Element 35

Digital Element 36

Digital Element 37

Digital Element 38

Digital Element 39

Digital Element 40

Digital Element 41

Digital Element 42

Digital Element 43

Digital Element 44

Digital Element 45

Digital Element 46

element

Digital Counter 2

Digital Counter 3

Digital Counter 4

Digital Counter 5

Digital Counter 6

Digital Counter 7

Digital Counter 8

Digital Element 1

Digital Element 2

Digital Element 3

Digital Element 4

Digital Element 5

Digital Element 6

Digital Element 7

Digital Element 8

Digital Element 9

Digital Element 10

Digital Element 11

Digital Element 12

Digital Element 13

Digital Element 14

Digital Element 15

Digital Element 16

Digital Element 17

Digital Element 18

Digital Element 19

Digital Element 20

Digital Element 21

Digital Element 22

Digital Element 23

727

728

729

730

723

724

725

726

719

720

721

722

715

716

717

718

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

711

712

713

714

707

708

709

710

703

704

705

706

699

700

701

702

695

696

697

698

551

692

693

694

bitmask

545

546

547

548

549

550


APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

RTD Input 17

RTD Input 18

RTD Input 19

RTD Input 20

RTD Input 21

RTD Input 22

RTD Input 23

RTD Input 24

RTD Input 25

RTD Input 26

RTD Input 27

RTD Input 28

RTD Input 29

RTD Input 30

RTD Input 31

RTD Input 32

RTD Input 33

RTD Input 34

RTD Input 35

RTD Input 36

RTD Input 37

RTD Input 38

RTD Input 39

RTD Input 1

RTD Input 2

RTD Input 3

RTD Input 4

RTD Input 5

RTD Input 6

RTD Input 7

RTD Input 8

RTD Input 9

RTD Input 10

RTD Input 11

RTD Input 12

RTD Input 13

RTD Input 14

RTD Input 15

RTD Input 16

element

Digital Element 47

Digital Element 48

Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Frequency

Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Voltage

Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Current

Phasor Measurement Unit 1 Power

PMU 1 Rate of Change of Frequency

Phasor Measurement Unit 1

Trip Bus 1

Trip Bus 2

Trip Bus 3

Trip Bus 4

Trip Bus 5

Trip Bus 6

877

878

879

880

873

874

875

876

869

870

871

872

865

866

867

868

881

882

883

884

885

886

887

861

862

863

864

857

858

859

860

853

854

855

856

849

850

851

852

844

845

846

847

764

770

842

843

bitmask

738

739

740

746

752

758

GE Multilin


B.4 MEMORY MAPPING element

RTD Input 40

RTD Input 41

RTD Input 42

RTD Input 43

RTD Input 44

RTD Input 45

RTD Input 46

RTD Input 47

RTD Input 48

User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
















Disconnect switch 1

Disconnect switch 2

Disconnect switch 3

Disconnect switch 4

Disconnect switch 5

Disconnect switch 6

Disconnect switch 7

Disconnect switch 8

Disconnect switch 9

Disconnect switch 10







Breaker 1

Breaker 2

Breaker 3

Breaker 4

Thermal overload protection 1

Thermal overload protection 2

Broken conductor detection 1

Broken conductor detection 2

921

922

923

924

913

914

915

920

909

910

911

912

905

906

907

908

901

902

903

904

894

895

896

900

bitmask

888

889

890

891

892

893

933

934

935

968

969

970

971

1012

929

930

931

932

925

926

927

928

1013

1014

1015

B

B-65


F125

ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL

0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service

B

F126

ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE

0 = No, 1 = Yes

F127

ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING

0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset

F128

ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD

0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC

F129

ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE

0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute

F130

ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE

0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault

F131

ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE

0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze

F133

ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE

0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed

F134

ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL

0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a

F135

ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION

0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16

F136

ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS

0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles

3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles

F137

ENUMERATION: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON

FUNCTION

0 = Disabled, 1 = Self-Reset, 2 = Latched

F138

ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE

0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File

F140

ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,

DISABLED

0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V,

3 = Current 4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A,

6 = Notched 2 A

F141

ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERRORS

27

28

29

30

31

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

Bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

Error

Any Self Tests

IRIG-B Failure

Port 1 Offline

Port 2 Offline

Port 3 Offline

Port 4 Offline

Port 5 Offline

Port 6 Offline

RRTD Communcations Failure

Voltage Monitor

FlexLogic Error Token

Equipment Mismatch

Process Bus Failure

Unit Not Programmed

System Exception

Latching Output Discrepancy

Ethernet Switch Fail

Maintenance Alert 01

SNTP Failure

---

Primary Ethernet Fail

Secondary Ethernet Fail

Temperature Monitor

Process Bus Trouble

Brick Trouble

Field RTD Trouble

Field TDR Trouble

Remote Device Offline

Direct Device Offline

Direct Input/Output Ring Break

Any Minor Error

Any Major Error


GE Multilin


46

47

48

49

38

43

44

45

Bitmask

32

33

34

35

36

37

50

51

52

53

54

55

Error

IEC 61850 Data Set

---

---

---

Watchdog Error

Low On Memory

---

Module Failure 01

Module Failure 02

Module Failure 03

Module Failure 04

Module Failure 05

Module Failure 06

Module Failure 07

Module Failure 08

Module Failure 09

Incompatible Hardware

Module Failure 10

Module Failure 11

Module Failure 12

F142

ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE

0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause

F143

UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)

A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error

F144

ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE

0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed

F146

ENUMERATION: MISCELLANEOUS EVENT CAUSES

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

31

32

33

34

definition

Events Cleared

Oscillography Triggered

Date/time Changed

Default Settings Loaded

Test Mode Forcing On

Test Mode Forcing Off

Power On

Power Off

Relay In Service

Relay Out Of Service

Watchdog Reset

Oscillography Clear

Reboot Command

Led Test Initiated

Flash Programming

Fault Report Trigger

User Programmable Fault Report Trigger

---

Reload CT/VT module Settings

---

Ethernet Port 1 Offline






Test Mode Isolated

Test Mode Forcible

Test Mode Disabled

Temperature Warning On

Temperature Warning Off

Unauthorized Access

System Integrity Recovery

System Integrity Recovery 06

System Integrity Recovery 07

F145

ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER bitmask type

0 null

1

2

A

B

5

6

3

4

E

F

C

D

bitmask type

7 G

8

9

H

I

10

11

12

13

L

M

J

K

bitmask type

14 N

15

16

O

P

17

18

19

20

S

T

Q

R

bitmask type

21 U

22

23

V

W

24

25

26

X

Y

Z

F148

ENUMERATION: FAULT TYPE bitmask

0

1

2

3

4

5

fault type

NA

AG

BG

CG

AB

BC

bitmask

6

7

8

9

10

11

fault type

AC

ABG

BCG

ACG

ABC

ABCG

B

GE Multilin



B

F151

ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION

RTD 7

RTD 8

RTD 9

RTD 10

RTD 11

RTD 12

RTD 13

RTD 14

RTD 15

RTD 16

RTD#

NONE

RTD 1

RTD 2

RTD 3

RTD 4

RTD 5

RTD 6

11

12

13

14

15

16

7

8

9

10

bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

28

29

30

31

32

24

25

26

27

bitmask

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

RTD 24

RTD 25

RTD 26

RTD 27

RTD 28

RTD 29

RTD 30

RTD 31

RTD 32

RTD#

RTD 17

RTD 18

RTD 19

RTD 20

RTD 21

RTD 22

RTD 23

44

45

46

47

48

40

41

42

43

bitmask

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

RTD 40

RTD 41

RTD 42

RTD 43

RTD 44

RTD 45

RTD 46

RTD 47

RTD 48

RTD#

RTD 33

RTD 34

RTD 35

RTD 36

RTD 37

RTD 38

RTD 39

F152

ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP

0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3

4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6

F155

ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE

0 = Offline, 1 = Online

APPENDIX B

F156

ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

31

32

33

34

DNA-23

DNA-24

DNA-25

DNA-26

DNA-27

DNA-28

DNA-29

DNA-30

DNA-15

DNA-16

DNA-17

DNA-18

DNA-19

DNA-20

DNA-21

DNA-22

DNA-7

DNA-8

DNA-9

DNA-10

DNA-11

DNA-12

DNA-13

DNA-14

value

NONE

DNA-1

DNA-2

DNA-3

DNA-4

DNA-5

DNA-6

DNA-31

DNA-32

UserSt-1

UserSt-2

62

63

64

65

58

59

60

61

54

55

56

57

50

51

52

53

46

47

48

49

42

43

44

45

bitmask

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

66

67

↓

96

UserSt-18

UserSt-19

UserSt-20

UserSt-21

UserSt-22

UserSt-23

UserSt-24

UserSt-25

UserSt-26

UserSt-27

UserSt-28

UserSt-29

UserSt-30

UserSt-31

UserSt-32

Dataset Item 1

value

UserSt-3

UserSt-4

UserSt-5

UserSt-6

UserSt-7

UserSt-8

UserSt-9

UserSt-10

UserSt-11

UserSt-12

UserSt-13

UserSt-14

UserSt-15

UserSt-16

UserSt-17

Dataset Item 2

Dataset Item 3

↓

Dataset Item 32

F157

ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE

0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole

F158

ENUMERATION: SCHEME CALIBRATION TEST

0 = Normal, 1 = Symmetry 1, 2 = Symmetry 2, 3 = Delay 1

4 = Delay 2

F159

ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING

0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None


GE Multilin


F166

ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE

0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca

F167

ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE

0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4,

4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6

F168

ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION

0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd

F170

ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET and GAIN

TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT SELECTION

0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH

F171

ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE

0 = dcmA IN, 1 = Ohms IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT,

4 = RRTD IN

F172

ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS bitmask slot

0 F

1

2

3

G

H

J

bitmask slot

4 K

5

6

7

L

M

N

bitmask slot

8 P

9

10

11

R

S

T

bitmask slot

12 U

13

14

15

V

W

X

F173

ENUMERATION: DCMA INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

dcmA input/output range

0 to –1 mA

0 to 1 mA

–1 to 1 mA

0 to 5 mA

0 to 10 mA

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

F174

ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE

0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,

2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper

F175

ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS

0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C

F176

ENUMERATION: SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT bitmask

0

1

2

3

4

5

synchrocheck dead source

None

LV1 and DV2

DV1 and LV2

DV1 or DV2

DV1 Xor DV2

DV1 and DV2

B

F177

ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT

0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,

3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network - TCP, 5 = Network - UDP

F178

ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES

0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min,

5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min, 8 = 15 ms, 9 = 30 ms,

10 = 100 ms, 11 = 500 ms

F180

ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND

0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND

F181

ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE

0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE

F183

ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS bitmask

0

1

2

3

4

definition

Off

8 samples/cycle

16 samples/cycle

32 samples/cycle

64 samples/cycle

GE Multilin



B

F184

ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE GOOSE DATASET

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

15

16

5

6

3

4

value

0

1

2

GOOSE dataset

Off

GooseIn 1

GooseIn 2

GooseIn 3

GooseIn 4

GooseIn 5

GooseIn 6

GooseIn 7

GooseIn 8

GooseIn 9

GooseIn 10

GooseIn 11

GooseIn 12

GooseIn 13

GooseIn 14

GooseIn 15

GooseIn 16

bitmsk keypress

17

18

Message Left

Message Right

19

20

21

22

Menu

Help

Escape

---

bitmsk keypress

45

46

User-programmable key 15


47

48

49

50

User 4 (control pushbutton)




F192

ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE

0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex

F194

ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE

0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 6 = 10000,

7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001

F196

ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

OPERATING CURRENT

0 = Calculated 3I0, 1 = Measured IG

F185

ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR

0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G

F199

ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM

0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom

F186

ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE

0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase

F200

TEXT40: 40-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT

20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB

F190

ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS bitmsk keypress

0 --use between real keys

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Decimal Point

Plus/Minus

Value Up

Value Down

Message Up

Message Down

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33

bitmsk keypress

23 Reset

24

25

User 1

User 2

26

27

28

29

User 3




38

43

44












F201

TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE


F202



F203


F204


F205


F206



GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

F207


F208


F211

ENUMERATION: SOURCE SELECTION

0 = None, 1 = SRC 1, 2 = SRC 2, 3 = SRC 3, 4 = SRC 4,

5 = SRC 5, 6 = SRC 6

F213


F220

ENUMERATION: PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY value

0

1

2

priority

Disabled

Normal

High Priority

F222

ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION

0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1

F223

ENUMERATION: DIAGNOSTIC TEST

0 = No Test, 1 = Run Test, 2 = End Test

F226

ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT/OUTPUT TRANSFER

METHOD

0 = None, 1 = GSSE, 2 = GOOSE

F227

ENUMERATION: RELAY SERVICE STATUS

0 = Unknown, 1 = Relay In Service, 2 = Relay Out Of Service

F230

ENUMERATION: DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING

0 = Voltage, 1 = Current, 2 = Dual

F232

ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS

FOR TRANSMISSION value

0

GOOSE dataset item

None

GE Multilin



GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal

↓

GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind128.stVal

MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.TotVAr.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.TotVA.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.TotPF.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f

MMXU1.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f

MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f

MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f





291

292

293

294

287

288

289

290

283

284

285

286

279

280

281

282

299

300

301

302

295

296

297

298

275

276

277

278

271

272

273

274

267

268

269

270

263

264

265

266

259

260

261

262

255

256

257

258

value

1

2

3

4

↓

B


B































MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f





















345

346

347

348

341

342

343

344

337

338

339

340

333

334

335

336

349

350

351

352

353

354

355

329

330

331

332

325

326

327

328

321

322

323

324

317

318

319

320

313

314

315

316

309

310

311

312

value

303

304

305

306

307

308

B-72














MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f

































MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f




398

399

400

401

394

395

396

397

390

391

392

393

386

387

388

389

402

403

404

405

406

407

408

382

383

384

385

378

379

380

381

374

375

376

377

370

371

372

373

366

367

368

369

362

363

364

365

value

356

357

358

359

360

361


APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f

































MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f
















451

452

453

454

447

448

449

450

443

444

445

446

439

440

441

442

455

456

457

458

459

460

461

435

436

437

438

431

432

433

434

427

428

429

430

423

424

425

426

419

420

421

422

415

416

417

418

value

409

410

411

412

413

414

GE Multilin



488

489

490

491

484

485

486

487

480

481

482

483

476

477

478

479

472

473

474

475

468

469

470

471

value

462

463

464

465

466

467

504

505

506

507

500

501

502

503

496

497

498

499

492

493

494

495

GGIO4.MX.AnIn14.mag.f
















508

509



510 GGIO4.MX.AnIn32.mag.f

511 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q

512 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal


































B

B-73


B value GOOSE dataset item





























F233

ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS

FOR RECEPTION

131

132

133

134

127

128

129

130

135

136

137

138

139

value

0

1

2

3

4

↓


None

GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q

GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal

GGIO3.ST.Ind2.q

GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal

↓

GGIO1.ST.Ind64q













B-74

value

140

141

142

143

144

145








146

147

148

149
















161 GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal

































APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B value GOOSE dataset item






F237

ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK MONTH

5

6

3

4

value

0

1

2

7

8

9

10

11

month

January

February

March

April

May

June

July

August

September

October

November

December

F238

ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAY

5

6

3

4

value

0

1

2

day

Sunday

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

F239

ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

TIME START DAY INSTANCE value

0

1

2

3

4

instance

First

Second

Third

Fourth

Last


F254

ENUMERATION: TEST MODE FUNCTION

Value

0

1

2

Function

Disabled

Isolated

Forcible

F260

ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER MODE

0 = Continuous, 1 = Trigger

F270

ENUMERATION: FAULT REPORT VT SUBSTITUTION

Value

0

1

2

Description

None

I_0

V_0

F300

UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC™ BASE TYPE (6-bit type)

The FlexLogic™ BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value.

The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD, where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic™ type is associated with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.

The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix

[PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range.

[0] Off(0) – this is boolean FALSE value

[0] On (1) – this is boolean TRUE value

[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 to 96)

[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1 to 96)

[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1 to 64)

[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1 to 96)

[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1 to 64)

[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)

[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1 to 64)

[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)

[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1 to 32)

[28] INSERT (via keypad only)

[32] END

[34] NOT (1 INPUT)

[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)

[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)

[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)

[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)

[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)

[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)

[48] TIMER (1 to 32)

[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 96)

[52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)

[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6)

[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)

[64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES

B

GE Multilin



B

F400

UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION bitmask

0

1

2

3

4

5

bank selection

Card 1 Contact 1 to 4






F504

BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

element state

Pickup

Operate

Pickup Phase A

Pickup Phase B

Pickup Phase C

Operate Phase A

Operate Phase B

Operate Phase C

F491

ENUMERATION: ANALOG INPUT MODE

0 = Default Value, 1 = Last Known

F505

BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE

0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected

F500

UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD

First register indicates input/output state with bits 0 (MSB) to 15

(LSB) corresponding to input/output state 1 to 16. The second register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 17 to 32 (if required) The third register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 33 to 48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 49 to

64 (if required).

The number of registers required is determined by the specific data item. A bit value of 0 = Off and 1 = On.

F507

BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE

0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than

F509

BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE

0 = Operate

F501

UR_UINT16: LED STATUS

Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.

F502

BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES

Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID

X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].

F510

BITFIELD: 87L ELEMENT STATE

11

12

13

7

8

9

10

bitmask

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

87L Element State

Operate A

Operate B

Operate C

Received DTT

Operate

Key DTT

PFLL FAIL

PFLL OK

Channel 1 FAIL

Channel 2 FAIL

Channel 1 Lost Packet

Channel 2 Lost Packet

Channel 1 CRC Fail

Channel 2 CRC Fail

F511

BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE

0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C

F515

ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE

0 = Signed, 1 = Absolute


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

F516

ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE

0 = Level, 1 = Delta

F518

ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT™ UNITS

0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes

F519

ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH

0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant

F522

ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA OUTPUT RANGE

0 = –1 to 1 mA; 1 = 0 to 1 mA; 2 = 4 to 20 mA

F523

ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT

VARIATION bitmask

0

1

2

3

default variation

1

2

5

6

F524

ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION bitmask

0

1

2

3

Default Variation

1

2

9

10

F525

ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION bitmask

0

1

2

3

4

5

default variation

1

2

3

4

5

7


F530

ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS value

0

1

2

keypress

None

Menu

Message Up

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

Help

Message Left

4

5

6

Escape

Message

Right

1

2

22

23

24

25

26

31

~

18

19

20

21

value keypress

15 3

16

17

Enter

Message

Down

0

Decimal

+/–

Value Up

Value Down

Reset

User 1

User 2

User 3

User PB 1

32 User PB 2

~

value

33

34

35

40

41

42

44

36

37

38

39

45

46

47

keypress

User PB 3

User PB 4

User PB 5

User PB 6

User PB 7

User PB 8

User PB 9

User PB 10

User PB 11

User PB 12

User 4

User 5

User 6

User 7

B

F531

ENUMERATION: LANGUAGE

0 = English, 1 = French, 2 = Chinese, 3 = Russian

F540

ENUMERATION: PMU POST-FILTER

0 = None, 1 = Symm-3-Point, 2 = Symm-5-Point,

3 = Symm-7-Point, 4 = Class M, 5 = Class P

F542

ENUMERATION: PMU TRIGGERING MODE

0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected

F543

ENUMERATION: PMU PHASORS

5

6

3

4

7

value

0

1

2

phasor

Off

Va

Vb

Vc

Vx

Ia

Ib

Ic

11

12

13

14

value

8

9

10

phasor

Ig

V_1

V_2

V_0

I_1

I_2

I_0

GE Multilin



B

F544

ENUMERATION: PMU RECORDING/REPORTING RATE value

0

1

2

3

4

5

rate

1/second

2/second

4/second

5/second

10/second

12/second

value

6

7

8

9

10

11

rate

15/second

20second

25/second

30/second

50/second

60/second

F562

ENUMERATION: 87L IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER LOCATION

Enumeration In-zone transformer location

0 Local-tap

1

2

Remote 1-tap

Remote 2-tap

F545

ENUMERATION: PMU COM PORT TYPE

0 = Network, 1 = RS485, 2 = Dir Comm Ch1, 3 = Dir Comm Ch2,

4 = GOOSE, 5 = None

F600

UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER

Corresponds to the Modbus address of the value used when this parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as Flex-

Analogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection).

F546

ENUMERATION: PMU REPORTING STYLE

0 = Polar, 1 = Rectangular

F547

ENUMERATION: PMU REPORTING FORMAT

0 = Integer, 1 = Floating

F605

ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT

STATUS

Enumeration Remote DPS input status

0 Intermediate

1

2

3

Off

On

Bad

F560

ENUMERATION: IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

Enumeration In-zone transformer connnection

0 None

1

2

0° lag

30° lag

3

4

60° lag

90° lag

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

120° lag

150° lag

180° lag

210° lag

240° lag

270° lag

300° lag

330° lag

F561

ENUMERATION: 87L INRUSH INHIBIT MODE

Enumeration Inrush inhibit mode

0 Disabled

1

2

3

Per phase

Two out of three

Average

F606

ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT

Enumeration Remote double-point status input

0 None

1

2

Remote input 1

Remote input 2

3

↓

64

Remote input 3

↓

Remote input 64

F611

ENUMERATION: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEME

Enumeration Configurable GOOSE retransmission scheme

0 Heartbeat

1

2

3

Aggressive

Medium

Relaxed

F612

UR_UINT16: FLEXINTEGER PARAMETER

This 16-bit value corresponds to the Modbus address of the selected FlexInteger paramter. Only certain values may be used as FlexIntegers.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

F615

ENUMERATION: IEC 61850 REPORT DATASET ITEMS

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

35

36

37

38

39

40

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items

0 None

1

2

PDIF1.ST.Str.general

PDIF1.ST.Op.general

3

4

5

6


PDIF2.ST.Op.general


PDIF3.ST.Op.general


PDIF4.ST.Op.general

PDIS1.ST.Str.general

PDIS1.ST.Op.general


PDIS2.ST.Op.general


PDIS3.ST.Op.general


PDIS4.ST.Op.general


PDIS5.ST.Op.general


PDIS6.ST.Op.general


PDIS7.ST.Op.general


PDIS8.ST.Op.general


PDIS9.ST.Op.general


PDIS10.ST.Op.general

PIOC1.ST.Str.general

PIOC1.ST.Op.general


PIOC2.ST.Op.general


PIOC3.ST.Op.general


PIOC4.ST.Op.general


PIOC5.ST.Op.general


PIOC6.ST.Op.general


PIOC7.ST.Op.general


PIOC8.ST.Op.general


PIOC9.ST.Op.general


PIOC10.ST.Op.general

GE Multilin


91

92

93

94

87

88

89

90

83

84

85

86

79

80

81

82

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

75

76

77

78

71

72

73

74

67

68

69

70

63

64

65

66


49

50



51

52

53

54





59

60

61

62

55

56

57

58
















































B


B


140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

120

121

122

123

116

117

118

119


102

103



104

105

106

107





108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115
















































B-80

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176


155

156



157

158

159

160





161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168













PTOC1.ST.Str.general

PTOC1.ST.Op.general


PTOC2.ST.Op.general


PTOC3.ST.Op.general


PTOC4.ST.Op.general


PTOC5.ST.Op.general


PTOC6.ST.Op.general


PTOC7.ST.Op.general


PTOC8.ST.Op.general


PTOC9.ST.Op.general


PTOC10.ST.Op.general

















APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229


208

209



210

211

212

213





214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221








PTOV1.ST.Str.general

PTOV1.ST.Op.general


PTOV2.ST.Op.general


PTOV3.ST.Op.general


PTOV4.ST.Op.general


PTOV5.ST.Op.general


PTOV6.ST.Op.general


PTOV7.ST.Op.general


PTOV8.ST.Op.general


PTOV9.ST.Op.general


PTOV10.ST.Op.general

PTRC1.ST.Tr.general

PTRC1.ST.Op.general

PTRC2.ST.Tr.general

PTRC2.ST.Op.general

PTRC3.ST.Tr.general

PTRC3.ST.Op.general

PTRC4.ST.Tr.general

PTRC4.ST.Op.general

PTRC5.ST.Tr.general

PTRC5.ST.Op.general

PTRC6.ST.Tr.general

PTRC6.ST.Op.general

PTUV1.ST.Str.general

PTUV1.ST.Op.general


PTUV2.ST.Op.general


PTUV3.ST.Op.general


PTUV4.ST.Op.general

GE Multilin



299

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

291

292

293

294

295

296

297

298

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

283

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282


261

262


PTUV5.ST.Op.general

263

264

265

266


PTUV6.ST.Op.general


PTUV7.ST.Op.general

267

268

269

270

271

272

273

274


PTUV8.ST.Op.general


PTUV9.ST.Op.general


PTUV10.ST.Op.general







RBRF1.ST.OpEx.general

RBRF1.ST.OpIn.general


































B

B-81

B


352

353

354

355

356

357

358

359

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

351

360

361

362

363

364

365

366

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

335


314

315



316

317

318

319





320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327








RFLO1.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f





RPSB1.ST.Str.general

RPSB1.ST.Op.general

RPSB1.ST.BlkZn.stVal

RREC1.ST.Op.general

RREC1.ST.AutoRecSt.stVal

RREC2.ST.Op.general


RREC3.ST.Op.general


RREC4.ST.Op.general


RREC5.ST.Op.general


RREC6.ST.Op.general


CSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal

B-82

405

406

407

408

409

410

411

412

397

398

399

400

401

402

403

404

413

414

415

416

417

418

419

389

390

391

392

393

394

395

396

381

382

383

384

385

386

387

388


367

368

CSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal

369

370

371

372

CSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal

373

374

375

376

377

378

379

380

CSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI25.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI25.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI26.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI26.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI27.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI27.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI28.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI28.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI29.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI29.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI30.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI30.ST.Pos.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind3.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind4.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind5.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind6.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind7.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind8.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind9.stVal






APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

458

459

460

461

462

463

464

465

450

451

452

453

454

455

456

457

466

467

468

469

470

471

472

442

443

444

445

446

447

448

449

434

435

436

437

438

439

440

441


420

421



422

423

424

425





426

427

428

429

430

431

432

433
















































GE Multilin



511

512

513

514

515

516

517

518

503

504

505

506

507

508

509

510

519

520

521

522

523

524

525

495

496

497

498

499

500

501

502

487

488

489

490

491

492

493

494


473

474



475

476

477

478





479

480

481

482

483

484

485

486
















































B

B-83

B


564

565

566

567

568

569

570

571

556

557

558

559

560

561

562

563

572

573

574

575

576

577

578

548

549

550

551

552

553

554

555

540

541

542

543

544

545

546

547


526

527



528

529

530

531





532

533

534

535

536

537

538

539




MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f

































MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f



B-84

617

618

619

620

621

622

623

624

609

610

611

612

613

614

615

616

625

626

627

628

629

630

631

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

593

594

595

596

597

598

599

600


579

580



581

582

583

584





585

586

587

588

589

590

591

592

























MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f



















APPENDIX B


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

670

671

672

673

674

675

676

677

662

663

664

665

666

667

668

669

678

679

680

681

682

683

684

654

655

656

657

658

659

660

661

646

647

648

649

650

651

652

653


632

633



634

635

636

637





638

639

640

641

642

643

644

645









MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f

































MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f


GE Multilin



723

724

725

726

727

728

729

730

715

716

717

718

719

720

721

722

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

707

708

709

710

711

712

713

714

699

700

701

702

703

704

705

706


685

686



687

688

689

690

MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f




691

692

693

694

695

696

697

698






























MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f














B

B-85

B


776

777

778

779

780

781

782

783

768

769

770

771

772

773

774

775

784

785

786

787

788

789

790

760

761

762

763

764

765

766

767

752

753

754

755

756

757

758

759


738

739



740

741

742

743





744

745

746

747

748

749

750

751














































XSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal

B-86

829

830

831

832

833

834

835

836

821

822

823

824

825

826

827

828

837

838

839

840

841

842

843

813

814

815

816

817

818

819

820

805

806

807

808

809

810

811

812


791

792

XSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal

793

794

795

796

XSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal

797

798

799

800

801

802

803

804

XSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR1.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR1.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR2.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR2.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR3.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR3.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR4.ST.Loc.stVal


APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B


844

845

XCBR4.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR5.ST.Loc.stVal

846

847

848

XCBR5.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR6.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR6.ST.Pos.stVal

F616

ENUMERATION: IEC 61850 GOOSE DATASET ITEMS

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

39

40

41

42

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

Enumeration GOOSE dataset items

0 None

1

2

GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal

3

4

5

6

GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind3.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind3.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind4.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind4.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind5.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind5.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind6.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind6.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind7.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind7.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind8.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind8.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind9.q

GGIO1.ST.Ind9.stVal

GGIO1.ST.Ind10.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind11.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind12.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind13.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind14.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind15.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind16.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind17.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind18.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind19.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind20.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind21.q


GE Multilin


85

86

87

88

81

82

83

84

77

78

79

80

73

74

75

76

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

69

70

71

72

65

66

67

68

61

62

63

64

57

58

59

60


43

44

GGIO1.ST.Ind22.q


45

46

47

48

GGIO1.ST.Ind23.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind24.q


53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

GGIO1.ST.Ind25.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind26.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind27.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind28.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind29.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind30.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind31.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind32.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind33.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind34.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind35.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind36.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind37.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind38.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind39.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind40.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind41.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind42.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind43.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind44.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind45.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind46.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind47.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind48.q

B


B


134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117


96

97


GGIO1.ST.Ind49.q

98

99

100

101


GGIO1.ST.Ind50.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind51.q

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109


GGIO1.ST.Ind52.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind53.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind54.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind55.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind56.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind57.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind58.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind59.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind60.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind61.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind62.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind63.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind64.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind65.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind66.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind67.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind68.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind69.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind70.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind71.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind72.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind73.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind74.q


B-88

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170


149

150

GGIO1.ST.Ind75.q


151

152

153

154

GGIO1.ST.Ind76.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind77.q


155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

GGIO1.ST.Ind78.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind79.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind80.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind81.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind82.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind83.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind84.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind85.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind86.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind87.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind88.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind89.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind90.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind91.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind92.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind93.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind94.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind95.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind96.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind97.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind98.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind99.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind100.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind101.q


APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223


202

203


GGIO1.ST.Ind102.q

204

205

206

207


GGIO1.ST.Ind103.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind104.q

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215


GGIO1.ST.Ind105.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind106.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind107.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind108.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind109.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind110.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind111.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind112.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind113.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind114.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind115.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind116.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind117.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind118.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind119.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind120.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind121.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind122.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind123.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind124.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind125.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind126.q


GGIO1.ST.Ind127.q


GE Multilin


293

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

269

270

271

272

273

274

275

276


255

256

GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q


257

258

259

260

MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f




261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f

































MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f










B


B


346

347

348

349

350

351

352

353

338

339

340

341

342

343

344

345

354

355

356

357

358

359

360

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329


308

309



310

311

312

313





314

315

316

317

318

319

320

321


















MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f


























B-90

399

400

401

402

403

404

405

406

391

392

393

394

395

396

397

398

407

408

409

410

411

412

413

383

384

385

386

387

388

389

390

375

376

377

378

379

380

381

382


361

362



363

364

365

366





367

368

369

370

371

372

373

374


MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f

































MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f





APPENDIX B


GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

452

453

454

455

456

457

458

459

444

445

446

447

448

449

450

451

460

461

462

463

464

465

466

436

437

438

439

440

441

442

443

428

429

430

431

432

433

434

435


414

415



416

417

418

419





420

421

422

423

424

425

426

427























MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f




MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f





















GE Multilin



505

506

507

508

509

510

511

512

497

498

499

500

501

502

503

504

513

514

515

516

517

518

519

489

490

491

492

493

494

495

496

481

482

483

484

485

486

487

488


467

468



469

470

471

472





473

474

475

476

477

478

479

480







































GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q

GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal

GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.q

B

B-91

B


558

559

560

561

562

563

564

565

550

551

552

553

554

555

556

557

566

567

568

569

570

571

572

542

543

544

545

546

547

548

549

534

535

536

537

538

539

540

541


520

521


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.q

522

523

524

525


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.q

526

527

528

529

530

531

532

533


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn13.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn14.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn15.q


GGIO5.ST.UIntIn16.q



PDIF1.ST.Op.general


PDIF2.ST.Op.general


PDIF3.ST.Op.general


PDIF4.ST.Op.general


PDIS1.ST.Op.general


PDIS2.ST.Op.general


PDIS3.ST.Op.general


PDIS4.ST.Op.general


PDIS5.ST.Op.general


PDIS6.ST.Op.general


PDIS7.ST.Op.general


PDIS8.ST.Op.general


PDIS9.ST.Op.general


PDIS10.ST.Op.general


PIOC1.ST.Op.general

B-92

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

618

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

610

619

620

621

622

623

624

625

595

596

597

598

599

600

601

602

587

588

589

590

591

592

593

594


573

574


PIOC2.ST.Op.general

575

576

577

578


PIOC3.ST.Op.general


PIOC4.ST.Op.general

579

580

581

582

583

584

585

586


PIOC5.ST.Op.general


PIOC6.ST.Op.general


PIOC7.ST.Op.general


PIOC8.ST.Op.general


PIOC9.ST.Op.general







































APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

664

665

666

667

668

669

670

671

656

657

658

659

660

661

662

663

672

673

674

675

676

677

678

648

649

650

651

652

653

654

655

640

641

642

643

644

645

646

647


626

627



628

629

630

631





632

633

634

635

636

637

638

639
















































GE Multilin


717

718

719

720

721

722

723

724

709

710

711

712

713

714

715

716

725

726

727

728

729

730

731

701

702

703

704

705

706

707

708

693

694

695

696

697

698

699

700


679

680



681

682

683

684





685

686

687

688

689

690

691

692
































PTOC1.ST.Op.general


PTOC2.ST.Op.general


PTOC3.ST.Op.general


PTOC4.ST.Op.general


PTOC5.ST.Op.general


PTOC6.ST.Op.general


PTOC7.ST.Op.general


PTOC8.ST.Op.general


B


B


770

771

772

773

774

775

776

777

762

763

764

765

766

767

768

769

778

779

780

781

782

783

784

754

755

756

757

758

759

760

761

746

747

748

749

750

751

752

753


732

733

PTOC9.ST.Op.general


734

735

736

737





738

739

740

741

742

743

744

745



























PTOV1.ST.Op.general


PTOV2.ST.Op.general


PTOV3.ST.Op.general


PTOV4.ST.Op.general


PTOV5.ST.Op.general


PTOV6.ST.Op.general


PTOV7.ST.Op.general


PTOV8.ST.Op.general


PTOV9.ST.Op.general


PTOV10.ST.Op.general

PTRC1.ST.Tr.general

PTRC1.ST.Op.general

B-94

823

824

825

826

827

828

829

830

815

816

817

818

819

820

821

822

831

832

833

834

835

836

837

807

808

809

810

811

812

813

814

799

800

801

802

803

804

805

806


785

786

PTRC2.ST.Tr.general

PTRC2.ST.Op.general

787

788

789

790

PTRC3.ST.Tr.general

PTRC3.ST.Op.general

PTRC4.ST.Tr.general

PTRC4.ST.Op.general

791

792

793

794

795

796

797

798

PTRC5.ST.Tr.general

PTRC5.ST.Op.general

PTRC6.ST.Tr.general

PTRC6.ST.Op.general


PTUV1.ST.Op.general


PTUV2.ST.Op.general


PTUV3.ST.Op.general


PTUV4.ST.Op.general


PTUV5.ST.Op.general


PTUV6.ST.Op.general


PTUV7.ST.Op.general


PTUV8.ST.Op.general


PTUV9.ST.Op.general



























APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

876

877

878

879

880

881

882

883

868

869

870

871

872

873

874

875

884

885

886

887

888

889

890

860

861

862

863

864

865

866

867

852

853

854

855

856

857

858

859


838

839



840

841

842

843





844

845

846

847

848

849

850

851































RPSB1.ST.Str.general

RPSB1.ST.Op.general

RPSB1.ST.BlkZn.stVal

RREC1.ST.Op.general


RREC2.ST.Op.general


RREC3.ST.Op.general


RREC4.ST.Op.general


RREC5.ST.Op.general


RREC6.ST.Op.general


CSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal

GE Multilin



929

930

931

932

933

934

935

936

921

922

923

924

925

926

927

928

937

938

939

940

941

942

943

913

914

915

916

917

918

919

920

905

906

907

908

909

910

911

912


891

892

CSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal

893

894

895

896

CSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal

897

898

899

900

901

902

903

904

CSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI25.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI25.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI26.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI26.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI27.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI27.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI28.ST.Loc.stVal

B

B-95

B


982

983

984

985

986

987

988

989

974

975

976

977

978

979

980

981

990

991

992

993

994

995

996

966

967

968

969

970

971

972

973

958

959

960

961

962

963

964

965


944

945

CSWI28.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI29.ST.Loc.stVal

946

947

948

949

CSWI29.ST.Pos.stVal

CSWI30.ST.Loc.stVal

CSWI30.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal

950

951

952

953

954

955

956

957

XSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI12.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI13.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI13.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI14.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI15.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI16.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI17.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI19.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI22.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI23.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI23.ST.Pos.stVal

XSWI24.ST.Loc.stVal

XSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal

B-96


997

998

XCBR1.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR1.ST.Pos.stVal

999

1000

1001

1002

XCBR2.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR2.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR3.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR3.ST.Pos.stVal

1003

1004

1005

1006

1007

1008

XCBR4.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR4.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR5.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR5.ST.Pos.stVal

XCBR6.ST.Loc.stVal

XCBR6.ST.Pos.stVal


APPENDIX B

GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.1 OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW

C.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The IEC 61850 standard is the result of electric utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration, testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

• IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

• IEC 61850-2: Glossary

• IEC 61850-3: General requirements

• IEC 61850-4: System and project management

• IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

• IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs

• IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Principles and models

• IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract communication service interface (ACSI)

• IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment – Common data classes

• IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment – Compatible logical node classes and data classes

• IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

• IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

• IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3

• IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC ( http://www.iec.ch

). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES

C

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract services in IEC 61850-8-1.

The L30 relay supports IEC 61850 server services over both TCP/IP and TP4/CLNP (OSI) communication protocol stacks.

The TP4/CLNP profile requires the L30 to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the L30 to have an IP address to establish communications. These addresses are located in the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

NETWORK

menu. Note that the L30 supports IEC 61850 over the TP4/CLNP or TCP/IP stacks, and also operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to five simultaneous connections (in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-IEC 61850) connections).

• Client/server: This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC 61850 clients are often substation computers running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer tap changers, or bay controllers.

• Peer-to-peer: This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation equipment such as protection relays. GSSE and GOOSE are methods of peer-to-peer communication.

• Substation configuration language (SCL): A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe the configuration of substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file. The substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file.

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System C-1

C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION APPENDIX C

C.2SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION C.2.1 OVERVIEW

IEC 61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC 61850 physical device can contain one or more logical device(s). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. Each logical node can contain many data

objects. Each data object is composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.

Each L30 IED represents one IEC 61850 physical device. The physical device contains one logical device, and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD1 contains information about the L30 IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information about the L30 IED logical device.

C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES

C

The GGIO1 logical node is available in the L30 to provide access to as many 128 digital status points and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO1 provides digital status points for access by clients.

It is intended that clients use GGIO1 in order to access digital status values from the L30. Configuration settings are provided to allow the selection of the number of digital status indications available in GGIO1 (8 to 128), and to allow the choice of the L30 FlexLogic™ operands that drive the status of the GGIO1 status indications. Clients can utilize the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting features available from GGIO1 in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display.

C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES

The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the L30 virtual inputs. Virtual inputs are single-point control

(binary) values that can be written by clients. They are generally used as control inputs. GGIO2 provides access to the virtual inputs through the IEC 61850 standard control model (ctlModel) services:

• Status only.

• Direct control with normal security.

• SBO control with normal security.

Configuration settings are available to select the control model for each point. Each virtual input used through GGIO2 should have its

VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64) FUNCTION

setting programmed as “Enabled” and its corresponding

GGIO2 CF SPSCO1(64)

CTLMODEL

setting programmed to the appropriate control configuration.

C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATA

The GGIO3 logical node is available to provide access for clients to values received via configurable GOOSE messages.

The values of the digital status indications and analog values in GGIO3 originate in GOOSE messages sent from other devices.

C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES

The GGIO4 logical node provides access to as many as 32 analog value points, as well as associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO4 provides analog values for access by clients.

It is intended that clients use GGIO4 to access generic analog values from the L30. Configuration settings allow the selection of the number of analog values available in GGIO4 (4 to 32) and the choice of the FlexAnalog™ values that determine the value of the GGIO4 analog inputs. Clients can utilize polling or the IEC 61850 unbuffered reporting feature available from GGIO4 in order to obtain the analog values provided by GGIO4.

C-2 L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION

C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES

A limited number of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes.

Each MMXU logical node provides data from a L30 current and voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source (programmed in the

SETTINGS

ÖØ

SYSTEM SETUP

ÖØ

SIGNAL SOURCES

menu). MMXU1 provides data from L30 source 1, and MMXU2 provides data from L30 source 2.

MMXU data is provided in two forms: instantaneous and deadband. The instantaneous values are updated every time a read operation is performed by a client. The deadband values are calculated as described in IEC 61850 parts 7-1 and 7-3.

The selection of appropriate deadband settings for the L30 is described in chapter 5 of this manual.

IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting capability is available in all MMXU logical nodes. MMXUx logical nodes provide the following data for each source:

• MMXU1.MX.TotW: three-phase real power

• MMXU1.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power

• MMXU1.MX.TotVA: three-phase apparent power

• MMXU1.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor

• MMXU1.MX.Hz: frequency

• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle

• MMXU1.MX.W.phsA: phase A real power

• MMXU1.MX.W.phsB: phase B real power

• MMXU1.MX.W.phsC: phase C real power

• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA: phase A reactive power

• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB: phase B reactive power

• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC: phase C reactive power

• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA: phase A apparent power

• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB: phase B apparent power

• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC: phase C apparent power

• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA: phase A power factor

• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB: phase B power factor

• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC: phase C power factor

C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES

C

The following list describes the protection elements for all UR-series relays. The L30 relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

• PDIF: bus differential, transformer instantaneous differential, transformer percent differential, current differential

GE Multilin


C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION APPENDIX C

C

• PDIS: phase distance, ground distance

• PIOC: phase instantaneous overcurrent, neutral instantaneous overcurrent, ground instantaneous overcurrent, negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent.

• PTOC: phase time overcurrent, neutral time overcurrent, ground time overcurrent, negative-sequence time overcurrent, neutral directional overcurrent, negative-sequence directional overcurrent

• PTUV: phase undervoltage, auxiliary undervoltage, third harmonic neutral undervoltage

• PTOV: phase overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, auxiliary overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage

• RBRF: breaker failure

• RREC: autoreclosure

• RPSB: power swing detection

• RFLO: fault locator

• XCBR: breaker control

• XSWI: circuit switch

• CSWI: switch controller

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags. For example, the start flag for PIOC1 is

PIOC1.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PIOC1 is PIOC1.ST.Op.general. For the L30 protection elements, these flags take their values from the pickup and operate FlexLogic™ operands for the corresponding element.

Some protection elements listed above contain directional start values. For example, the directional start value for PDIS1 is

PDIS1.ST.Str.dirGeneral. This value is built from the directional FlexLogic™ operands for the element.

The RFLO logical node contains the measurement of the distance to fault calculation in kilometers. This value originates in the fault locator function.

The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature.

• XCBR1.ST.Loc: This is the state of the XCBR1 local/remote switch. A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic™ operand to determine the state. When local mode is true, IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected.

• XCBR1.ST.Opcnt: This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850. Command settings are provided to allow the counter to be cleared.

• XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. The breaker control FlexLogic™ operands are used to determine this state.

– Intermediate state (00) is indicated when the

BREAKER 1 OPEN

and

BREAKER 1 CLOSED

operands are both On.

– Off state (01) is indicated when the

BREAKER 1 OPEN

operand is On.

– On state (10) is indicated when the

BREAKER 1 CLOSED

operand is On.

– Bad state (11) is indicated when the

BREAKER 1 OPEN

and

BREAKER 1 CLOSED

operands are Off.

• XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true, breaker open commands from IEC

61850 clients will be rejected.

• XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true, breaker close commands from IEC

61850 clients will be rejected.

• XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue open or close commands to the breaker. SBO control with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.

• XCBR1.CO.BlkOpn: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block open commands to the breaker. Direct control with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.

• XCBR1.CO.BlkCls: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block close commands to the breaker. Direct control with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION

C.3SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING

IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting is provided in the GGIO1 logical nodes (for binary status values) and MMXU1 to MMXU6 (for analog measured values). Report settings can be configured using the EnerVista UR Setup software, substation configurator software, or via an IEC 61850 client. The following items can be configured:

• TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the L30:

– Bit 1: data-change

– Bit 4: integrity

– Bit 5: general interrogation

• OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the L30:

– Bit 1: sequence-number

– Bit 2: report-time-stamp

– Bit 3: reason-for-inclusion

– Bit 4: data-set-name

– Bit 5: data-reference

– Bit 6: buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)

– Bit 7: entryID (for buffered reports only)

– Bit 8: conf-revision

– Bit 9: segmentation

• IntgPd: Integrity period.

• BufTm: Buffer time.

C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER

C

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record, or other files from a L30 relay.

C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING

The timestamp values associated with all IEC 61850 data items represent the time of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item. To accomplish this functionality, all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes, and the timestamp updated when a change is detected, regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 clients. For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use, the IEC 61850

SERVER SCANNING

setting can be programmed as “Disabled”. If a client is in use, this setting should be programmed as “Enabled” to ensure the proper generation of IEC 61850 timestamps.

C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME

The logical device name is used to identify the IEC 61850 logical device that exists within the L30. This name is composed of two parts: the IED name setting and the logical device instance. The complete logical device name is the combination of the two character strings programmed in the

IEDNAME

and

LD INST

settings. The default values for these strings are “IED-

Name” and “LDInst”. These values should be changed to reflect a logical naming convention for all IEC 61850 logical devices in the system.

C.3.5 LOCATION

The LPHD1 logical node contains a data attribute called location (LPHD1.DC.PhyNam.location). This is a character string meant to describe the physical location of the L30. This attribute is programmed through the

LOCATION

setting and its default value is “Location”. This value should be changed to describe the actual physical location of the L30.

GE Multilin


C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION APPENDIX C

C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES

IEC 61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters. The name is composed of:

• A five or six-character name prefix.

• A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

• A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPIOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC 61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.

C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING

C

A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the L30 to detect ‘dead’ connections. If there is no data traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the L30. This frees up the connection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using IEC 61850 reporting, clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the L30 will not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.

C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA

The L30 relay makes available a number of non-IEC 61850 data items. These data items can be accessed through the

“UR” MMS domain. IEC 61850 data can be accessed through the standard IEC 61850 logical device. To access the non-

IEC data items, the

INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA

setting must be “Enabled”.

C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES

The exact structure and values of the supported IEC 61850 logical nodes can be seen by connecting to a L30 relay with an

MMS browser, such as the “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS” DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE

C.4GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE C.4.1 OVERVIEW

IEC 61850 specifies two types of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Substation State Events (GSSE) and Generic

Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). GSSE services are compatible with UCA 2.0 GOOSE. IEC 61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet priority tagging, and Ethertype Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Because of the additional features of GOOSE services versus GSSE services, it is recommended that GOOSE be used wherever backwards compatibility with GSSE (or UCA 2.0 GOOSE) is not required.

Devices that transmit GSSE and/or GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GSSE publisher contains a “GSSE control block” to configure and control the transmission. Each GOOSE publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission. The transmission is also controlled via device settings. These settings can be seen in the ICD and/or SCD files, or in the device configuration software or files.

IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a default priority of 1. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1.

IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source. In the

L30, the transmitted GOOSE Application ID number must match the configured receive Application ID number in the receiver. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1.

C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION

C

IEC 61850 Generic Substation Status Event (GSSE) communication is compatible with UCA GOOSE communication.

GSSE messages contain a number of double point status data items. These items are transmitted in two pre-defined data structures named DNA and UserSt. Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a ‘bit pair’. GSSE messages are transmitted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message. GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs. Depending the on the configuration, only some of these bit pairs may have values that are of interest to receiving devices.

The

GSSE FUNCTION

,

GSSE ID

, and

GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS

settings are used to configure GSSE transmission.

GSSE FUNCTION

is set to “Enabled” to enable the transmission. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is entered for the

GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS

setting, this address will be used as the destination MAC address for GSSE messages. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is not entered (for example, 00 00 00 00 00 00), the L30 will use the source Ethernet MAC address as the destination, with the multicast bit set.

C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE

The L30 supports two types of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) communication: fixed

GOOSE and configurable GOOSE. All GOOSE messages contain IEC 61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The dataset transferred using the L30 fixed GOOSE is the same data that is transferred using the GSSE feature; that is, the DNA and UserSt bit pairs. The FlexLogic™ operands that determine the state of the DNA and UserSt bit pairs are configurable via settings, but the fixed GOOSE dataset always contains the same DNA/UserSt data structure. Upgrading from GSSE to GOOSE services is simply a matter of enabling fixed GOOSE and disabling GSSE. The remote inputs and outputs are configured in the same manner for both GSSE and fixed GOOSE.

It is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between URseries IEDs. Configurable GOOSE may be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series

IEDs and devices from other manufacturers.

C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE

The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the L30.

The L30 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data transfer between devices.

GE Multilin


C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE APPENDIX C

C

Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.

Dataset 1 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in dataset 1 to enable transmission of all data configured for dataset 1. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 will not activate transmission.

Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every

100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a

GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.

For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected.

The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.

The L30 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the L30 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the L30 will continue to block transmission of the dataset. The L30 will assert the

MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill

self-test error message on the front panel display, where

XXX

denotes the data item detected as oscillating.

The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series

IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs.

IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setupsoftware can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).

The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The general steps required for transmission configuration are:

1.

Configure the transmission dataset.

2.


3.

Configure the data.

The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1.

Configure the reception dataset.

2.


3.

Configure the data.

This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.

The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.

1.

Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ


Ö

CONFIGURABLE

GOOSE 1

ÖØ


settings menu:

– Set

ITEM 1


– Set

ITEM 2


The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.

2.


PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ


Ö


Ö

TRANSMISSION

ÖØ


Ö

CONFIGU-

RABLE GOOSE 1

settings menu:


GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE

– Set


to “Enabled”.

– Set

CONFIG GSE 1 ID

to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is “GOOSEOut_1”).

– Set

CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC

to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY

; the default value of “4” is OK for this example.

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID

value; the default value is “0”, but some switches may require this value to be “1”.

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID

value. This setting represents the Ethertype application ID and must match the configuration on the receiver (the default value is “0”).

– Set the

CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV

value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For this example it can be left at its default value.

3.


PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ


COL

Ö


settings menu:

– Set


to a FlexLogic™ operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).

The L30 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.

The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.

1.

Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATION

ÖØ

IEC

61850 PROTOCOL

Ö


ÖØ

RECEPTION

ÖØ


Ö


1

ÖØ


settings menu:

– Set

ITEM 1


– Set

ITEM 2


The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.

2.


INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE DEVICES

ÖØ

REMOTE DEVICE 1

settings menu:

– Set

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID

to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter “GOOSEOut_1”.

– Set


to match the Ethertype application ID from the transmitting device. This is “0” in the example above.

– Set the


value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as “GOOSEIn 1”.

3.


INPUTS/OUTPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE INPUTS

ÖØ

REMOTE INPUT 1

settings menu:

– Set


to “GOOSEOut_1”.

– Set


to “Dataset Item 2”. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status item to remote input 1.

Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic™ equations or other settings. The L30 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.

The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.

C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE

C

Ethernet capable devices each contain a unique identifying address called a Media Access Control (MAC) address. This address cannot be changed and is unique for each Ethernet device produced worldwide. The address is six bytes in length and is usually represented as six hexadecimal values (for example, 00 A0 F4 01 02 03). It is used in all Ethernet frames as the ‘source’ address of the frame. Each Ethernet frame also contains a destination address. The destination address can be different for each Ethernet frame depending on the intended destination of the frame.

GE Multilin


C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE APPENDIX C

A special type of destination address called a multicast address is used when the Ethernet frame can be received by more than one device. An Ethernet MAC address is multicast when the least significant bit of the first byte is set (for example, 01

00 00 00 00 00 is a multicast address).

GSSE and GOOSE messages must have multicast destination MAC addresses.

By default, the L30 is configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme. If the L30 destination MAC address setting is not a valid multicast address (that is, the least significant bit of the first byte is not set), the address used as the destination MAC will be the same as the local MAC address, but with the multicast bit set. Thus, if the local MAC address is 00 A0

F4 01 02 03, then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0 F4 01 02 03.

C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS

C

GSSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in IEC

61850 part 8-1 as GsID. This is a programmable 65-character string. This string should be chosen to provide a descriptive name of the originator of the GSSE message.

GOOSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in

IEC 61850 part 8-1 as GoID. This programmable 65-character string should be a descriptive name of the originator of the

GOOSE message. GOOSE messages also contain two additional character strings used for identification of the message:

DatSet - the name of the associated dataset, and GoCBRef - the reference (name) of the associated GOOSE control block.

These strings are automatically populated and interpreted by the L30; no settings are required.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP

C.5IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP C.5.1 OVERVIEW

The L30 can be configured for IEC 61850 via the EnerVista UR Setup software as follows.

1.

An ICD file is generated for the L30 by the EnerVista UR Setup software that describe the capabilities of the IED.

2.

The ICD file is then imported into a system configurator along with other ICD files for other IEDs (from GE or other vendors) for system configuration.

3.

The result is saved to a SCD file, which is then imported back to EnerVista UR Setup to create one or more settings file(s). The settings file(s) can then be used to update the relay(s) with the new configuration information.

The configuration process is illustrated below.

IED (UR-series)

OR

Setting files

(.URS)

Creating ICD (GE Multilin)

EnerVista

UR Setup

IEC 61850 related configuration for the

IED (GSSE/GOOSE, server, logical node prefixes, MMXU deadbands, GGIO2 control, etc.)

Process of creating ICD

(vendor 2)


(vendor 3)


(vendor )

C

ICD file

N

ICD file 2 ICD file 3

ICD file 1

Import

System specification data

System specification tool

SSD file

System configurator

System Configuration

(network, crosscommunications, IED setting modification, etc.)

SCD file

Updating IED with new configuration (GE Multilin)

EnerVista UR Setup

URS 1 URS 2

URS

X

Vendor specific tool for updating new configuration to IED

(vendor 2)


(vendor 3)


(vendor )

Write settings file to device

Write settings file to other devices

UR relay 2

Vendor relay 2 Vendor relay 3 Vendor relay

N

UR relay 1

UR relay

X

Ethernet

842790A1.CDR

Figure 0–1: IED CONFIGURATION PROCESS

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in the procedures describing the IED configuration process for IEC

61850:

• BDA: Basic Data Attribute, that is not structured

• DAI: Instantiated Data Attribute

• DO: Data Object type or instance, depending on the context

GE Multilin


C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP APPENDIX C

C

• DOI: Instantiated Data Object

• IED: Intelligent Electronic Device

• LDInst: Instantiated Logical Device

• LNInst: Instantiated Logical Node

• SCL: Substation Configuration Description Language. The configuration language is an application of the Extensible

Markup Language (XML) version 1.0.

• SDI: Instantiated Sub DATA; middle name part of a structured DATA name

• UR: GE Multilin Universal Relay series

• URI: Universal Resource Identifier

• URS: UR-series relay setting file

• XML: Extensible Markup Language

The following SCL variants are also used:

• ICD: IED Capability Description

• CID: Configured IED Description

• SSD: System Specification Description

• SCD: Substation Configuration Description

The following IEC related tools are referenced in the procedures that describe the IED configuration process for IEC 61850:

• System configurator or Substation configurator: This is an IED independent system level tool that can import or export configuration files defined by IEC 61850-6. It can import configuration files (ICD) from several IEDs for system level engineering and is used to add system information shared by different IEDs. The system configuration generates a substation related configuration file (SCD) which is fed back to the IED configurator (for example, EnerVista UR

Setup) for system related IED configuration. The system configurator should also be able to read a system specification file (SSD) to use as base for starting system engineering, or to compare it with an engineered system for the same substation.

• IED configurator: This is a vendor specific tool that can directly or indirectly generate an ICD file from the IED (for example, from a settings file). It can also import a system SCL file (SCD) to set communication configuration parameters (that is, required addresses, reception GOOSE datasets, IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets, etc.) for the IED. The

IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software.

C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS

Before creating an ICD file, the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED. For example, the IED name and logical device instance can be specified to uniquely identify the IED within the substation, or transmission GOOSE datasets created so that the system configurator can configure the cross-communication links to send GOOSE messages from the IED. Once the IEC 61850 settings are configured, the ICD creation process will recognize the changes and generate an ICD file that contains the updated settings.

Some of the IED settings will be modified during they system configuration process. For example, a new IP address may be assigned, line items in a Transmission GOOSE dataset may be added or deleted, or prefixes of some logical nodes may be changed. While all new configurations will be mapped to the L30 settings file when importing an SCD file, all unchanged settings will preserve the same values in the new settings file.

These settings can be configured either directly through the relay panel or through the EnerVista UR Setup software (preferred method). The full list of IEC 61850 related settings for are as follows:

• Network configuration: IP address, IP subnet mask, and default gateway IP address (access through the Settings >

Product Setup > Communications > Network menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• Server configuration: IED name and logical device instance (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Com-

munications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• Logical node prefixes, which includes prefixes for all logical nodes except LLN0 (access through the Settings > Prod-

uct Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Logical Node Prefixes menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).


GE Multilin


• MMXU deadbands, which includes deadbands for all available MMXUs. The number of MMXUs is related to the number of CT/VT modules in the relay. There are two MMXUs for each CT/VT module. For example, if a relay contains two

CT/VT modules, there will be four MMXUs available (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communica-

tions > IEC 61850 > MMXU Deadbands menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• GGIO1 status configuration, which includes the number of status points in GGIO1 as well as the potential internal mappings for each GGIO1 indication. However only the number of status points will be used in the ICD creation process

(access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO1 Status Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• GGIO2 control configuration, which includes ctlModels for all SPCSOs within GGIO2 (access through the Settings >

Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO2 Control Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR

Setup).

• Configurable transmission GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE transmission. The GOOSE ID can be specified for each dataset (it must be unique within the IED as well as across the whole substation), as well as the destination MAC address, VLAN priority, VLAN ID, ETYPE APPID, and the dataset items.

The selection of the dataset item is restricted by firmware version; for version 5.9x, only GGIO1.ST.Indx.stVal and

GGIO1.ST.Indx.q are valid selection (where x is between 1 to N, and N is determined by number of GGIO1 status points). Although configurable transmission GOOSE can also be created and altered by some third-party system configurators, we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD, and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Com-

munications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Transmission > Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• Configurable reception GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE reception.

However, unlike datasets for transmission, datasets for reception only contains dataset items, and they are usually created automatically by process of importing the SCD file (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communi-

cations > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Reception > Rx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in

EnerVista UR Setup).

• Remote devices configuration, which includes remote device ID (GOOSE ID or GoID of the incoming transmission

GOOSE dataset), ETYPE APPID (of the GSE communication block for the incoming transmission GOOSE), and

DATASET (which is the name of the associated reception GOOSE dataset). These settings are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Devices menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• Remote inputs configuration, which includes device (remote device ID) and item (which dataset item in the associated reception GOOSE dataset to map) values. Only the items with cross-communication link created in SCD file should be mapped. These configurations are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the

Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES

C

The SCL language is based on XML, and its syntax definition is described as a W3C XML Schema. ICD is one type of SCL file (which also includes SSD, CID and SCD files). The ICD file describes the capabilities of an IED and consists of four major sections:

• Header

• Communication

• IEDs

• DataTypeTemplates

GE Multilin



The root file structure of an ICD file is illustrated below.

SCL

Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)

C

Communication

IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)

DataTypeTemplates

842795A1.CDR

Figure 0–2: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

The Header node identifies the ICD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals

The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.

Communication

SubNetwork (name)

ConnectedAP (iedName, apName)

Address

P (type)

Other P elements

Text

GSE (IdInst, cbName)

Address

P (type)

Other GSE elements Other P elements

842796A1.CDR

Figure 0–3: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

Text

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The

Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the

IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.

The IED node describes the (pre-)configuration of an IED: its access points, the logical devices, and logical nodes instantiated on it. Furthermore, it defines the capabilities of an IED in terms of communication services offered and, together with its LNType, instantiated data (DO) and its default or configuration values. There should be only one IED section in an ICD since it only describes one IED.


GE Multilin


IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)

Services

DynAssoication

GetDirectory

GetDateObjectDefinition

DataObjectDirectory

AccessPoint (name)

Server

GetDataSetValue

SetDataSetValue

DataSetDirectory

ConfDataSet (max, maxAttributes)

ReadWrite

TimerActivatedControl

ConfReportControl (max)

GetCBValues

Authentication (none)

LDevice (inst)

LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)

DataSet (name)

FCDA (fc, doName, daName, IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst)

Other FCDA elements

Other DataSet elements

ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)

TrgOps (dchg) OptFields (seqNum) RptEnabled

Other ReportControl elements

DOI (name)

Other DOI elements

SDI (name)

Other DOI elements SDI (name)

GSEControl (name, datSet, type, confRev, appID)

Other GSEControl elements

LN (InType, InClass, prefix, inst)

DataSet (name)

FCDA (IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst, doName, fc)

Other FCDA elements

Other DataSet elements

ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)

OptFields (seqNum) TrgOps (dchg)

Other ReportControl elements

DOI (name)

DAI (name)

SDI (name) DAI (name)

SDI (name)

DAI (name)

Val

Val

Text

Val

RptEnabled

Text

DAI (name)

Val

Other LN elements

Other LDevice elements

Figure 0–4: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE

Text

Text

ConfLogControl (max)

GSEDir

GOOSE (max)

GSSE (max)

842797A1.CDR

C

GE Multilin



C

The DataTypeTemplates node defines instantiable logical node types. A logical node type is an instantiable template of the data of a logical node. A LnodeType is referenced each time that this instantiable type is needed with an IED. A logical node type template is built from DATA (DO) elements, which again have a DO type, which is derived from the DATA classes

(CDC). DOs consist of attributes (DA) or of elements of already defined DO types (SDO). The attribute (DA) has a functional constraint, and can either have a basic type, be an enumeration, or a structure of a DAType. The DAType is built from

BDA elements, defining the structure elements, which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA.

DataTypeTemplates

LNodeType (id, InClass)

DO (name, type)

Other DO elements

Other LNodeType elements

DOType (id, cdc)

SDO (name, type)

Other SDO elements

DA (name, fc, bType, type)

Other DA elements

Val

Text

DAType (id)

BDA (name, bType, type)

EnumType (id)

EnumVal (ord) Text

Other EnumVal elements

Other EnumType elements

Figure 0–5: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE

842798A1.CDR


GE Multilin


C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

An ICD file can be created directly from a connected L30 IED or from an offline L30 settings file with the EnerVista UR

Setup software using the following procedure:

1.

Right-click the connected UR-series relay or settings file and select Create ICD File.

C

2.

The EnerVista UR Setup will prompt to save the file. Select the file path and enter the name for the ICD file, then click

OK to generate the file.

The time to create an ICD file from the offline L30 settings file is typically much quicker than create an ICD file directly from the relay.

C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES

System configuration is performed in the system configurator. While many vendors (including GE Multilin) are working their own system configuration tools, there are some system configurators available in the market (for example, Siemens DIGSI version 4.6 or above and ASE Visual SCL Beta 0.12).

Although the configuration tools vary from one vendor to another, the procedure is pretty much the same. First, a substation project must be created, either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file (SSD). Then, IEDs are added to the substation. Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD, the ICD files are imported into the substation project, and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing process. If the

ICD files are successfully imported into the substation project, it may be necessary to perform some additional minor steps to attach the IEDs to the substation (see the system configurator manual for details).

Once all IEDs are inserted into the substation, further configuration is possible, such as:

• Assigning network addresses to individual IEDs.

• Customizing the prefixes of logical nodes.

• Creating cross-communication links (configuring GOOSE messages to send from one IED to others).

When system configurations are complete, the results are saved to an SCD file, which contains not only the configuration for each IED in the substation, but also the system configuration for the entire substation. Finally, the SCD file is passed back to the IED configurator (vendor specific tool) to update the new configuration into the IED.

The SCD file consists of at least five major sections:

GE Multilin



C

• Header.

• Substation.

• Communication.

• IED section (one or more).

• DataTypeTemplates.

The root file structure of an SCD file is illustrated below.

SCL

Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)

Substation

Communication

IED Section (IED 1)

IED Section (IED 2)

Other IED Sections

DataTypeTemplates

842791A1.CDR

Figure 0–6: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

Like ICD files, the Header node identifies the SCD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals.

The Substation node describes the substation parameters:

Substation

EquipmentContainer

PowerSystemResource

Power Transformer

GeneralEquipment

VoltageLevel

EquipmentContainer

Bay

Voltage

PowerSystemResource

Function

SubFunction

GeneralEquipment

842792A1.CDR

Figure 0–7: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SUBSTATION NODE


GE Multilin


The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.

Communication

SubNetwork (name)

ConnectedAP (IED 1)

Address

P (type)

Text

Other P elements


Address

Other GSE elements

P (type)

Other P elements

Text

ConnectedAP (IED 2)

Address

P (type)

Other P elements


Text

Address

P (type)

Text

Other P elements

Other GSE elements

C

Other ConnectedAP elements

842793A1.CDR

Figure 0–8: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The

Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the

IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.

GE Multilin



C

The IED Section node describes the configuration of an IED.

IED Section (IED 1)

AccessPoint (name)

Server

Authentication (none)

LDevice (inst)

LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)

DataSet elements

ReportControl elements

DOI elements

Inputs

ExtRef (iedName, ldInst, prefix, lnClass, lnInst, doName, daName, intAddr)

Other ExtRef elements

GSEControl elements

Figure 0–9: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE

842794A1.CDR

C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

The following procedure describes how to update the L30 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista

UR Setup software.

1.

Right-click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item.

2.

Select the saved SCD file and click Open.


GE Multilin


3.

The software will open the SCD file and then prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file. Select a location and name for the URS (UR-series relay settings) file.

If there is more than one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file, the software prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file for each IED.

4.

After the URS file is created, modify any settings (if required).

5.

To update the relay with the new settings, right-click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set-

tings File to Device item.

6.

The software will prompt for the target device. Select the target device from the list provided and click Send. The new settings will be updated to the selected device.

C

GE Multilin



C.6ACSI CONFORMANCE

APPENDIX C

C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT

C

SERVICES

CLIENT-SERVER ROLES

B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)

B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)

SCSMS SUPPORTED

B21

B22

B23

B24

SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used

SCSM: other

GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE)

B31 Publisher side

B32 Subscriber side

TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL (SVC)

B41

B42

Publisher side

Subscriber side

SERVER/

PUBLISHER c1

---

O

---

UR-FAMILY

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

O

---

NOTE

c1: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared

O: Optional

M: Mandatory

C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT

SERVICES

IF SERVER SIDE (B11) SUPPORTED

M1

Logical device

M2

Logical node

M3

M4

M5

M6

Data

Data set

Substitution

Setting group control

REPORTING

Buffered report control

M7

M7-1

M7-2

M7-3 sequence-number report-time-stamp reason-for-inclusion

M7-4

M7-5

M7-6

M7-7

M7-8 data-set-name data-reference buffer-overflow entryID

BufTm

M7-9

M7-10

M8

M8-1

M8-2

M8-3

IntgPd

GI

Unbuffered report control

sequence-number report-time-stamp reason-for-inclusion

C-22

SERVER/

PUBLISHER c2 c3 c4 c5

O

O

O

UR-FAMILY

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

O


Yes

GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

SERVICES SERVER/

PUBLISHER

UR-FAMILY

M8-4

M8-5

M8-6 data-set-name data-reference

BufTm

M8-7

M8-8

IntgPd

GI

Logging

Log control

M9

M9-1

M10

IntgPd

Log

M11

Control

IF GSE (B31/32) IS SUPPORTED

M12-1

M12-2

M13

GOOSE

entryID

DataReflnc

GSSE

IF SVC (B41/B42) IS SUPPORTED

M14 Multicast SVC

M15

M16

M17

Unicast SVC

Time

File transfer

O

O

O

M

O

O

O

O

M

O

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

NOTE

c2: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared

c3: shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared

c4: shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has been declared

c5: shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared

M: Mandatory

C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT

C

In the table below, the acronym AA refers to Application Associations (TP: Two Party / MC: Multicast). The c6 to c10 entries are defined in the notes following the table.

SERVICES

SERVER (CLAUSE 6)

S1 ServerDirectory

APPLICATION ASSOCIATION (CLAUSE 7)

S2

S3

S4

Associate

Abort

Release

LOGICAL DEVICE (CLAUSE 8)

S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory

LOGICAL NODE (CLAUSE 9)

S6 LogicalNodeDirectory

S7 GetAllDataValues

DATA (CLAUSE 10)

S8

S9

GetDataValues

SetDataValues

S10

S11

GetDataDirectory

GetDataDefinition

AA: TP/MC

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

SERVER/

PUBLISHER

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

O

M

M

UR FAMILY

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

GE Multilin



C

SERVICES AA: TP/MC

DATA SET (CLAUSE 11)

S12

S13

GetDataSetValues

SetDataSetValues

S14

S15

CreateDataSet

DeleteDataSet

S16 GetDataSetDirectory

SUBSTITUTION (CLAUSE 12)

S17 SetDataValues

SETTING GROUP CONTROL (CLAUSE 13)

S18

S19

S20

S21

S22

S23

S24

S24-1

SelectActiveSG

SelectEditSG

SetSGValues

ConfirmEditSGValues

GetSGValues

GetSGCBValues

Report data-change (dchg)

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

REPORTING (CLAUSE 14)

BUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (BRCB)

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

S35

S36

S37

S38

S39

S24-2

S24-3

S25

S26 qchg-change (qchg) data-update (dupd)

GetBRCBValues TP

SetBRCBValues TP

UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (URCB)

Report TP S27

S27-1

S27-2

S27-3

S28

S29

data-change (dchg) qchg-change (qchg) data-update (dupd)

GetURCBValues

SetURCBValues

TP

TP

LOGGING (CLAUSE 14)

LOG CONTROL BLOCK

S30 GetLCBValues

S31

S32

S33

S34

SetLCBValues

LOG

QueryLogByTime

QueryLogByEntry

GetLogStatusValues

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE) (CLAUSE 14.3.5.3.4)

GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK

S40

S41

SendGOOSEMessage

GetReference

GetGOOSEElementNumber

GetGoCBValues

SetGoCBValues

GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK

SendGSSEMessage

GetReference

MC

TP

TP

TP

TP

MC

TP

SERVER/

PUBLISHER

O

O

M

O

O

M

O

O

O

O

O

O c6

M

M

M

M

M c6 c6 c6 c6 c6 c8 c9 c9

O

O c8 c9

UR FAMILY

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

APPENDIX C


GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

SERVICES AA: TP/MC

S42

S43

S44

GetGSSEElementNumber

GetGsCBValues

SetGsCBValues

TP

TP

TP

TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLE VALUE MODEL (SVC) (CLAUSE 16)

MULTICAST SVC

S45

S46

S47

SendMSVMessage

GetMSVCBValues

SetMSVCBValues

UNICAST SVC

MC

TP

TP

S48

S49

S50

S51

S52

S53

S54

SendUSVMessage

GetUSVCBValues

SetUSVCBValues

CONTROL (CLAUSE 16.4.8)

Select

SelectWithValue

Cancel

Operate

MC

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

S55

S56

Command-Termination

TimeActivated-Operate

FILE TRANSFER (CLAUSE 20)

S57 GetFile

S58 SetFile

S59

S60

DeleteFile

GetFileAttributeValues

TIME (CLAUSE 5.5)

T1

T2

T3

Time resolution of internal clock

(nearest negative power of 2 in seconds)

Time accuracy of internal clock supported TimeStamp resolution

(nearest value of 2

–n

in seconds, accoridng to 5.5.3.7.3.3)

TP

TP

TP

TP

SERVER/

PUBLISHER

c9

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

M

M

O

O

M c10

O

O c10

O

O

UR FAMILY

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

20

20

NOTE

c6: shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)

c7: shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter)

c8: shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)

c9: shall declare support if TP association is available

c10: shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage)

C

GE Multilin


C.7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C

C.7LOGICAL NODES C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE

The UR-series of relays supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code. For example. the logical node “PDIS” (distance protection) is available only in the D60 Line Distance Relay.

C

Table C–1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 1 of 3)

NODES

L: SYSTEM LOGICAL NODES

LPHD: Physical device information

LLN0: Logical node zero

P: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

PDIF: Differential

PDIR: Direction comparison

PDIS: Distance

PDOP: Directional overpower

PDUP: Directional underpower

PFRC: Rate of change of frequency

PHAR: Harmonic restraint

PHIZ: Ground detector

PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent

PMRI Motor restart inhibition

PMSS: Motor starting time supervision

POPF: Over power factor

PPAM: Phase angle measuring

PSCH: Protection scheme

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault

PTEF: Transient earth fault

PTOC: Time overcurrent

PTOF: Overfrequency

PTOV: Overvoltage

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning

PTTR: Thermal overload

PTUC: Undercurrent

PTUV: Undervoltage

PUPF: Underpower factor

PTUF: Underfrequency

PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent

PVPH: Volts per Hz

PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed

R: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION RELATED FUNCTIONS

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function

RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue

RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary

RDRS: Disturbance record handling

RBRF: Breaker failure

RDIR: Directional element

RFLO: Fault locator

RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking

RREC: Autoreclosing

UR-FAMILY

Yes

Yes

---

Yes

---

---

---

---

---

---

Yes

---

Yes

Yes

Yes

---

Yes

---

---

---

---

---

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Yes

---

Yes

Yes

Yes


GE Multilin

APPENDIX C


NODES

RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing

C: LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL

CALH: Alarm handling

CCGR: Cooling group control

CILO: Interlocking

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching

CSWI: Switch controller

G: LOGICAL NODES FOR GENERIC REFERENCES

GAPC: Generic automatic process control

GGIO: Generic process I/O

GSAL: Generic security application

I: LOGICAL NODES FOR INTERFACING AND ARCHIVING

IARC: Archiving

IHMI: Human machine interface

ITCI: Telecontrol interface

ITMI: Telemonitoring interface

A: LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL

ANCR: Neutral current regulator

ARCO: Reactive power control

ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller

AVCO: Voltage control

M: LOGICAL NODES FOR METERING AND MEASUREMENT

MDIF: Differential measurements

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics

MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic

MMTR: Metering

MMXN: Non phase related measurement

MMXU: Measurement

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance

MSTA: Metering statistics

S: LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING

SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs

SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)

SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges

X: LOGICAL NODES FOR SWITCHGEAR

XCBR: Circuit breaker

XSWI: Circuit switch

T: LOGICAL NODES FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

TCTR: Current transformer

TVTR: Voltage transformer

Y: LOGICAL NODES FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS

YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)

YLTC: Tap changer

YPSH: Power shunt

YPTR: Power transformer

GE Multilin

Yes

Yes

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Yes

Yes

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Yes

---

---

---

---

---

UR-FAMILY

---

---

---

---

---

Yes



C-27

C


C


NODES

Z: LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

ZAXN: Auxiliary network

ZBAT: Battery

ZBSH: Bushing

ZCAB: Power cable

ZCAP: Capacitor bank

ZCON: Converter

ZGEN: Generator

ZGIL: Gas insulated line

ZLIN: Power overhead line

ZMOT: Motor

ZREA: Reactor

ZRRC: Rotating reactive component

ZSAR: Surge arrestor

ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter

ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component

UR-FAMILY

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

APPENDIX C


GE Multilin

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONSD.1IEC 60870-5-104 D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT

This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following:

4 – used in standard direction;

– not used; – cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.

1.

SYSTEM OR DEVICE:

System Definition

Controlling Station Definition (Master)

4 Controlled Station Definition (Slave)

2.

NETWORK CONFIGURATION:

Point-to-Point

Multiple Point-to-Point

3.

PHYSICAL LAYER

Transmission Speed (control direction):

Multipoint

Multipoint Star

Unbalanced Interchange

Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:

100 bits/sec.

200 bits/sec.

300 bits/sec.

600 bits/sec.

1200 bits/sec.


Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s:

2400 bits/sec.

4800 bits/sec.

9600 bits/sec.

Balanced Interchange Circuit

X.24/X.27:

2400 bits/sec.

4800 bits/sec.

9600 bits/sec.

19200 bits/sec.

38400 bits/sec.

56000 bits/sec.

64000 bits/sec.

Transmission Speed (monitor direction):


Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:

100 bits/sec.

200 bits/sec.

300 bits/sec.

600 bits/sec.

1200 bits/sec.


Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s:

2400 bits/sec.

4800 bits/sec.

9600 bits/sec.

Balanced Interchange Circuit

X.24/X.27:

2400 bits/sec.

4800 bits/sec.

9600 bits/sec.

19200 bits/sec.

38400 bits/sec.

56000 bits/sec.

64000 bits/sec.

4.

LINK LAYER

Link Transmission Procedure:

Balanced Transmision

Unbalanced Transmission

Address Field of the Link:

Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)

One Octet

Two Octets

Structured

Unstructured

Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard

D

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System D-1

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 APPENDIX D

When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission:

The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:

A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:

D

5.

APPLICATION LAYER

Transmission Mode for Application Data:

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion stanadard.

Common Address of ADSU:

One Octet

4 Two Octets

Information Object Address:

One Octet

Two Octets

4 Three Octets

4 Structured

4 Unstructured

Cause of Transmission:

One Octet

4 Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.

Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.

Selection of standard ASDUs:

For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following:

4 – used in standard direction; – not used; – cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.

Process information in monitor direction

4 <1> := Single-point information

<2> := Single-point information with time tag

<3> := Double-point information

<4> := Double-point information with time tag

<5> := Step position information

<6> := Step position information with time tag

<7> := Bitstring of 32 bits

<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag

<9> := Measured value, normalized value

<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag

<11> := Measured value, scaled value

<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag

4 <13> := Measured value, short floating point value

<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag

4 <15> := Integrated totals

<16> := Integrated totals with time tag

<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag

<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag

<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag

<20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection

M_SP_NA_1

M_SP_TA_1

M_DP_NA_1

M_DP_TA_1

M_ST_NA_1

M_ST_TA_1

M_BO_NA_1

M_BO_TA_1

M_ME_NA_1

M_NE_TA_1

M_ME_NB_1

M_NE_TB_1

M_ME_NC_1

M_NE_TC_1

M_IT_NA_1

M_IT_TA_1

M_EP_TA_1

M_EP_TB_1

M_EP_TC_1

M_SP_NA_1

D-2 L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

<21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor

4 <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a

<31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a

<32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a

<33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a

<34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a

<35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a

<36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a

4 <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a

<38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a

<39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a

<40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a

M_ME_ND_1

M_SP_TB_1

M_DP_TB_1

M_ST_TB_1

M_BO_TB_1

M_ME_TD_1

M_ME_TE_1

M_ME_TF_1

M_IT_TB_1

M_EP_TD_1

M_EP_TE_1

M_EP_TF_1

Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set

<30> to <40> are used.

Process information in control direction

4 <45> := Single command

<46> := Double command

<47> := Regulating step command

<48> := Set point command, normalized value

<49> := Set point command, scaled value

<50> := Set point command, short floating point value

<51> := Bitstring of 32 bits

C_SC_NA_1

C_DC_NA_1

C_RC_NA_1

C_SE_NA_1

C_SE_NB_1

C_SE_NC_1

C_BO_NA_1

4 <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a

<59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a

<60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a

<61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a

<62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a

<63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a

<64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a

C_SC_TA_1

C_DC_TA_1

C_RC_TA_1

C_SE_TA_1

C_SE_TB_1

C_SE_TC_1

C_BO_TA_1

D

Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.

System information in monitor direction

4 <70> := End of initialization

M_EI_NA_1

System information in control direction

4 <100> := Interrogation command

4 <101> := Counter interrogation command

4 <102> := Read command

4 <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard)

<104> := Test command

4 <105> := Reset process command

<106> := Delay acquisition command

4 <107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a

C_IC_NA_1

C_CI_NA_1

C_RD_NA_1

C_CS_NA_1

C_TS_NA_1

C_RP_NA_1

C_CD_NA_1

C_TS_TA_1

GE Multilin


D

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

Parameter in control direction

<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value

<111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value

4 <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value

<113> := Parameter activation

File transfer

<120> := File Ready

<121> := Section Ready

<122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section

<123> := Last section, last segment

<124> := Ack file, ack section

<125> := Segment

<126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction)

Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

(station-specific parameters)

In the following table:

•Shaded boxes are not required.

•Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.

•Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.

•‘X’ if only used in the standard direction

TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION

PE_ME_NA_1

PE_ME_NB_1

PE_ME_NC_1

PE_AC_NA_1

F_FR_NA_1

F_SR_NA_1

F_SC_NA_1

F_LS_NA_1

F_AF_NA_1

F_SG_NA_1

C_CD_NA_1

APPENDIX D

D-4

NO.

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

<6>

<7>

<8>

<9>

MNEMONIC

M_SP_NA_1

M_SP_TA_1

M_DP_NA_1

M_DP_TA_1

M_ST_NA_1

M_ST_TA_1

M_BO_NA_1

M_BO_TA_1

M_ME_NA_1

1 2 3

X

4 5

X

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

X X

20 to

36

X

37 to

41

44 45 46 47


GE Multilin

APPENDIX D


D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

GE Multilin

NO.

<45>

<46>

<47>

<48>

<49>

<50>

<51>

<58>

<59>

<60>

<33>

<34>

<35>

<36>

<37>

<38>

<39>

<40>

<17>

<18>

<19>

<20>

<21>

<30>

<31>

<32>

<10>

<11>

<12>

<13>

<14>

<15>

<16>

MNEMONIC

M_BO_TB_1

M_ME_TD_1

M_ME_TE_1

M_ME_TF_1

M_IT_TB_1

M_EP_TD_1

M_EP_TE_1

M_EP_TF_1

C_SC_NA_1

C_DC_NA_1

C_RC_NA_1

C_SE_NA_1

C_SE_NB_1

C_SE_NC_1

C_BO_NA_1

C_SC_TA_1

C_DC_TA_1

C_RC_TA_1

M_ME_TA_1

M_ME_NB_1

M_ME_TB_1

M_ME_NC_1

M_ME_TC_1

M_IT_NA_1

M_IT_TA_1

M_EP_TA_1

M_EP_TB_1

M_EP_TC_1

M_PS_NA_1

M_ME_ND_1

M_SP_TB_1

M_DP_TB_1

M_ST_TB_1

X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

20 to

36

37 to

41

44 45 46 47

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

D


D.1 IEC 60870-5-104


APPENDIX D

D

NO.

MNEMONIC 1 2

<102>

<103>

<104>

<105>

<106>

<107>

<110>

<111>

<61>

<62>

<63>

<64>

<70>

<100>

<101>

<112>

<113>

<120>

<121>

<122>

<123>

<124>

<125>

<126>

C_SE_TA_1

C_SE_TB_1

C_SE_TC_1

C_BO_TA_1

M_EI_NA_1*)

C_IC_NA_1

C_CI_NA_1

C_RD_NA_1

C_CS_NA_1

C_TS_NA_1

C_RP_NA_1

C_CD_NA_1

C_TS_TA_1

P_ME_NA_1

P_ME_NB_1

P_ME_NC_1

P_AC_NA_1

F_FR_NA_1

F_SR_NA_1

F_SC_NA_1

F_LS_NA_1

F_AF_NA_1

F_SG_NA_1

F_DR_TA_1*)

6.

BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:

4 Remote initialization

Cyclic Data Transmission:

4 Cyclic data transmission

Read Procedure:

4 Read procedure

3 4 5

X

X

X

6 7 8

X X

X X

X X

9 10 11 12 13

20 to

36

37 to

41

44 45 46 47

X X X X X

X X X

X


GE Multilin

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

Spontaneous Transmission:

4 Spontaneous transmission

Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:

The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a projectspecific list.

Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1

Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1

Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1

Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)

Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1

Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1

Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1

Station interrogation:

4 Global

4 Group 1

4 Group 2

4 Group 3

4 Group 4

4 Group 5

4 Group 6

4 Group 7

4 Group 8

4 Group 9

4 Group 10

4 Group 11

4 Group 12

4 Group 13

4 Group 14

4 Group 15

4 Group 16

Clock synchronization:

4

Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)

Command transmission:

4 Direct command transmission

Direct setpoint command transmission

4 Select and execute command

Select and execute setpoint command

4 C_SE ACTTERM used

4 No additional definition

4 Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)

4 Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)

4 Persistent output

D

4 Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands

Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s

Transmission of integrated totals:

4 Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission

4 Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation

4 Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands

4 Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously

4 Counter read

4 Counter freeze without reset

GE Multilin


D

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 APPENDIX D

4 Counter freeze with reset

4 Counter reset

4 General request counter

4 Request counter group 1




Parameter loading:

4 Threshold value

Smoothing factor

Low limit for transmission of measured values

High limit for transmission of measured values

Parameter activation:

Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

Test procedure:

Test procedure

File transfer:

File transfer in monitor direction:

Transparent file

Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment

Transmission of sequences of events

Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values

File transfer in control direction:

Transparent file

Background scan:

Background scan

Acquisition of transmission delay:

Acquisition of transmission delay

Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER

t t t t

0

1

2

3

DEFAULT

VALUE

30 s

15 s

10 s

20 s

REMARKS

Timeout of connection establishment

Timeout of send or test APDUs

Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages

t

2

<

t

1

Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state

Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):

PARAMETER

k w

DEFAULT

VALUE

REMARKS

12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable

8 APDUs

Latest acknowledge after receiving

w

I-format APDUs

SELECTED

VALUE

120 s

15 s

10 s

20 s

SELECTED

VALUE

12 APDUs

8 APDUs


GE Multilin

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (2

15

– 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.

Portnumber:

PARAMETER

Portnumber

VALUE

2404

REMARKS

In all cases

RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard.

4 Ethernet 802.3

Serial X.21 interface

Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)

D.1.2 POINT LIST

D

The IEC 60870-5-104 data points are configured through the

SETTINGS

Ö

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

DNP /

IEC104 POINT LISTS

menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.

GE Multilin


D

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 APPENDIX D


GE Multilin

APPENDIX E E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE

The following table provides a ‘Device Profile Document’ in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions

Document.

Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)

(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)

Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin

Device Name: UR Series Relay

Highest DNP Level Supported:

For Requests:

Level 2

For Responses: Level 2

Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):

Transmitted: 292

Received: 292

Device Function:

Master

4 Slave

Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):

Binary Inputs (Object 1)

Binary Input Changes (Object 2)

Binary Outputs (Object 10)

Control Relay Output Block (Object 12)

Binary Counters (Object 20)

Frozen Counters (Object 21)

Counter Change Event (Object 22)

Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)

Analog Inputs (Object 30)

Analog Input Changes (Object 32)

Analog Deadbands (Object 34)

Time and Date (Object 50)

File Transfer (Object 70)

Internal Indications (Object 80)

Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):

Transmitted: configurable up to 2048

Received: 2048

Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

4 None

Configurable

Maximum Data Link Re-tries:

4 None

Fixed at 3

Configurable

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:

4 Never

Always

Sometimes

Configurable

E

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System E-1

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT APPENDIX E

E


Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Never

Always

4 When reporting Event Data

4 When sending multi-fragment responses

Sometimes

Configurable

Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm:

Complete Appl. Fragment:

Application Confirm:

Complete Appl. Response:

4 None

4 None

None

4 None

Fixed at ____

Fixed at ____

4 Fixed at 10 s

Fixed at ____

Others:

Transmission Delay:

Need Time Interval:

Select/Operate Arm Timeout:

Binary input change scanning period:

Analog input change scanning period:

Counter change scanning period:

Frozen counter event scanning period:

Unsolicited response notification delay:

Unsolicited response retry delay

Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs

4 Never

SELECT/OPERATE

DIRECT OPERATE

Never

Never

DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK

Never

Count

> 1

Pulse On

Pulse Off

Latch On

Latch Off

4 Never

Never

Never

Never

Never

Always

Always

Always

Always

Always

Queue

4 Never

Clear Queue

4 Never

Always

Always

No intentional delay

Variable

Variable

Variable

Variable

Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)

10 s

8 times per power system cycle

500 ms

500 ms

500 ms

100 ms configurable 0 to 60 sec.

Always

4 Always

4 Always

4 Always

Sometimes

4 Sometimes

4 Sometimes

4 Sometimes

4 Sometimes

Sometimes

Sometimes

Sometimes

Sometimes

Sometimes

Sometimes

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is determined by the

VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE

settings. Both “Pulse On” and “Latch On” operations perform the same function in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the “On” state. If the Virtual Input is set to “Self-Reset”, it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic™. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. “Pulse Off” and “Latch Off” operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the “Off” state. “Trip” and “Close” operations both put the appropriate

Virtual Input into the “On” state.

E-2 L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin



Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Never

4 Only time-tagged

Only non-time-tagged

Configurable

Sends Unsolicited Responses:

Never

4 Configurable

Only certain objects

Sometimes (attach explanation)

4 ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported

Default Counter Object/Variation:

No Counters Reported

Configurable (attach explanation)

4 Default Object:

20

Default Variation: 1

4 Point-by-point list attached

Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Never

4 Binary Input Change With Time

Binary Input Change With Relative Time


Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

4 Never

When Device Restarts

When Status Flags Change

No other options are permitted.

Counters Roll Over at:

No Counters Reported


4 16 Bits (Counter 8)

4 32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)

Other Value: _____

4 Point-by-point list attached

Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

4 Yes

No

E

GE Multilin



E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

E

The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the L30 in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or

28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.

Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)

OBJECT

OBJECT

NO.

1

VARIATION

NO.

DESCRIPTION

0

1

2

Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

Binary Input

Binary Input with Status

REQUEST

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

1

(read)

22

(assign class)

1

1

(read)

22

(read)

22

(assign class)

(assign class)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

RESPONSE

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

00, 01

17, 28

( see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(start-stop)

(index)

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

1

(read)

Binary Input Change without Time 1

(read)

10

1

2

3

0

Binary Input Change with Time

Binary Input Change with Relative Time

Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

1

1

1

(read)

(read)

(read)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

129

(response

130

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

17, 28

17, 28

(index)

(index)

12

20

2

1

0

Binary Output Status

Control Relay Output Block

Binary Counter

(Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

1

(read)

3

(select)

4

(operate)

5

(direct op)

6 ( dir. op, noack)

1

(read)

7

(freeze)

8

(freeze noack)

9

(freeze clear)

10

(frz. cl. noack)

22

(assign class)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

00, 01

06

(start-stop)

(start-stop)

(no range, or all)

07, 08

17, 28

(limited quantity)

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

17, 28

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

echo of request

1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1

(read)

7

(freeze)

8

(freeze noack)

9

(freeze clear)

10

(frz. cl. noack)

22

(assign class)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

17, 28

(index)

(see Note 2)

Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5 for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.

Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)

Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the L30 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.


GE Multilin



OBJECT

OBJECT

NO.

20 cont’d

VARIATION

NO.

DESCRIPTION

2

5

6

16-Bit Binary Counter

32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag

16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag

REQUEST

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

1

(read)

7

(freeze)

8

(freeze noack)

9

(freeze clear)

10

(frz. cl. noack)

22

(assign class)

1

(read)

7

(freeze)

8

(freeze noack)

9

(freeze clear)

10

(frz. cl. noack)

22

(assign class)

1

(read)

7

(freeze)

8

(freeze noack)

9

(freeze clear)

10

(frz. cl. noack)

22

(assign class)

1

(read)

22

(assign class)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

00, 01

(index)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

RESPONSE

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

129

129

129

(response)

(response)

(response)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

00, 01

(start-stop)

17, 28

(index)

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(see Note 2)

00, 01

(start-stop)

(index)

(start-stop)

17, 28

(index)

(see Note 2)

21 0

1

2

9

Frozen Counter


32-Bit Frozen Counter

16-Bit Frozen Counter

32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag

1

(read)

22

1

(read)

22

1

22

(assign class)

(assign class)

(read)

(assign class)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

17, 28

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(start-stop)

(index)

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

22

23

10

0

1

2

5

6

0

1

16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag

Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

32-Bit Counter Change Event

16-Bit Counter Change Event

32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time

16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time

Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

32-Bit Frozen Counter Event

1

(read)

22

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

(assign class)

(read)

(read)

(read)

(read)

(read)

(read)

(read)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

00, 01

(start-stop)

17, 28

(index)

(see Note 2)

17, 28

17, 28

17, 28

17, 28

17, 28

(index)

(index)

(index)

(index)

(index)

2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1

(read)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

17, 28

(index)




E

GE Multilin



E


OBJECT

OBJECT

NO.

23 cont’d

30

VARIATION

NO.

DESCRIPTION

5

6

0

1

2

3

4

32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time

16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time

Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

32-Bit Analog Input

16-Bit Analog Input

32-Bit Analog Input without Flag

16-Bit Analog Input without Flag

REQUEST

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

1

1

1

22

1

(read)

22

1

(read)

22

1

(read)

22

1

(read)

(read)

(read)

(read)

22

(assign class)

(assign class)

(assign class)

(assign class)

(assign class)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

RESPONSE

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

17, 28

17, 28

00, 01

17, 28

(index)

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(index)

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(index)

(start-stop)

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

32

5

0

1

2

3 short floating point

Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)

1

(read)

32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1

(read)

16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time

32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time

1

22

1

1

(read)

(assign class)

(read)

(read)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

00, 01

17, 28

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

17, 28

17, 28

17, 28

(index)

(index)

(index)

34

4

5

7

0

1

16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time short floating point Analog Change Event without Time short floating point Analog Change Event with Time

Analog Input Reporting Deadband


16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband

(default – see Note 1)

1

1

1

1

1

(read)

(read)

(read)

(read)

(read)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

130

(response)

(unsol. resp.)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

17, 28

17, 28

17, 28

00, 01

17, 28

(index)

(index)

(index)

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

2

(write)

00, 01

(start-stop)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)





GE Multilin



OBJECT

OBJECT

NO.

34 cont’d

50

VARIATION

NO.

2

3

1

DESCRIPTION

Short floating point Analog Input Reporting

Deadband

Time and Date

(default – see Note 1)

REQUEST

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1

(read)

2

1

1

2

(write)

(read)

(read)

(write)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

00, 01

(start-stop)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

RESPONSE

FUNCTION

CODES (DEC)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

00, 01

(start-stop)

06

(no range, or all)

07

(limited qty=1)

08

(limited quantity)

17, 28

(index)

129

(response)

129

(response)

QUALIFIER

CODES (HEX)

00, 01

(start-stop)

17, 28

(index)

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(see Note 2)

00, 01

17, 28

(start-stop)

(index)

(start-stop)

(index)

(see Note 2)

52 2 Time Delay Fine 07

(limited quantity)

(quantity = 1)

60 0

1

2

3

4

Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data

Class 0 Data

Class 1 Data

Class 2 Data

Class 3 Data

1

(read)

20

(enable unsol)

21

(disable unsol)

22

(assign class)

1

(read)

22

(assign class)

1

(read)

20

(enable unsol)

21

(disable unsol)

22

(assign class)

1

(read)

06

06

06

(no range, or all)

(no range, or all)

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

70 0

2

3

4

File event - any variation

File authentication

File command

File command status

22

(assign class)

29

(authenticate)

25

(open)

27

(delete)

26

(close)

30

(abort)

06

(no range, or all)

07, 08

(limited quantity)

06

(no range, or all)

5b

(free format)

5b

5b

(free format)

(free format)

129

129

130

(response)

(response)

(unsol. resp.)

5b

5b

(free format)

(free format)

5 File transfer 1

(read)

2

(write)

5b

(free format)

129

130

(response)

(unsol. resp.)

5b

(free format)

6

7

File transfer status

File descriptor 28

(get file info.)

5b

(free format)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

129

(response)

130

(unsol. resp.)

129

(response)

5b

5b

(free format)

(free format)

80 1 Internal Indications 1

(read)

2

(write)

(see Note 3)

13

(cold restart)

00, 01

(start-stop)

(index =7)

00

(start-stop)

(index =7)

00, 01

(start-stop)

--No Object (function code only)

see Note 3

---

---

No Object (function code only)

No Object (function code only)

14

23

(warm restart)

(delay meas.)




E

GE Multilin


E

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX E

E.2DNP POINT LISTS E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS

The DNP binary input data points are configured through the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

DNP / IEC104 POINT

LISTS

Ö

BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS

menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details. When a freeze function is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point.

BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1

Change Event Object Number: 2

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)

Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable

Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time), Configurable

Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle

Change Event Buffer Size: 500

Default Class for All Points: 1


GE Multilin

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT

Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.

BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)

Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)

CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS

Object Number: 12

Request Function Codes supported:

3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)

Table E–3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

7

8

9

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

30

31

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION

0 Virtual Input 1

1 Virtual Input 2

4

5

6

2

3

Virtual Input 3

Virtual Input 4

Virtual Input 5

Virtual Input 6

Virtual Input 7

Virtual Input 8

Virtual Input 9

Virtual Input 10

Virtual Input 11

Virtual Input 12

Virtual Input 13

Virtual Input 14

Virtual Input 15

Virtual Input 16

Virtual Input 17

Virtual Input 18

Virtual Input 19

Virtual Input 20

Virtual Input 21

Virtual Input 22

Virtual Input 23

Virtual Input 24

Virtual Input 25

Virtual Input 26

Virtual Input 27

Virtual Input 28

Virtual Input 29

Virtual Input 30

Virtual Input 31

Virtual Input 32

Table E–3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

58

59

60

61

54

55

56

57

62

63

50

51

52

53

46

47

48

49

42

43

44

45

39

40

41

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION

32 Virtual Input 33

33

34

35

36

37

38

Virtual Input 34

Virtual Input 35

Virtual Input 36

Virtual Input 37

Virtual Input 38

Virtual Input 39

Virtual Input 40

Virtual Input 41

Virtual Input 42

Virtual Input 43

Virtual Input 44

Virtual Input 45

Virtual Input 46

Virtual Input 47

Virtual Input 48

Virtual Input 49

Virtual Input 50

Virtual Input 51

Virtual Input 52

Virtual Input 53

Virtual Input 54

Virtual Input 55

Virtual Input 56

Virtual Input 57

Virtual Input 58

Virtual Input 59

Virtual Input 60

Virtual Input 61

Virtual Input 62

Virtual Input 63

Virtual Input 64

E

GE Multilin



E.2.3 COUNTERS

The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.

E

BINARY COUNTERS



Request Function Codes supported:

1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),

10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)

Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)

Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)

Change Event Buffer Size: 10

Default Class for all points: 3

FROZEN COUNTERS



Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)

Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)

Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)

Change Event Buffer Size: 10

Default Class for all points: 3

Table E–4: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

4

0

1

POINT

INDEX

NAME/DESCRIPTION

Digital Counter 1

Digital Counter 2

Digital Counter 3

Digital Counter 4

Digital Counter 5

Digital Counter 6

Digital Counter 7

Digital Counter 8

Oscillography Trigger Count

Events Since Last Clear

A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. L30 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative counter values.


GE Multilin

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS

The DNP analog input data points are configured through the

PRODUCT SETUP

ÖØ

COMMUNICATIONS

ÖØ

DNP / IEC104 POINT

LISTS

Ö

ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS

menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.

It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.

Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.

The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bulletin 9809-001: Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.



Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)

Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)

Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)

Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms

Change Event Buffer Size: 256

Default Class for all Points: 2

E

GE Multilin


E



GE Multilin

APPENDIX F

APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES


F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY

Table F–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N

1601-9050-T1

1601-9050-U1

1601-9050-U2

1601-9050-V1

1601-9050-V2

1601-9050-W1

L30 REVISION

5.6x

5.7x

5.7x

5.8x

5.8x

5.9x

RELEASE DATE

27 June 2008

29 May 2009

30 September 2009

29 May 2010

04 January 2011

12 January 2011

ECO

08-0390

09-0938

09-1165

09-1457

11-2237

11-2227

F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE L30 MANUAL

Table F–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L30 MANUAL REVISION W1

PAGE

(V2)

Title

PAGE

(W1)

Title

CHANGE

Update

DESCRIPTION

Manual part number to 1601-9050-W1

A-1

B-9

C-3

2-1

2-3

2-4

2-17

3-40

4-1

5-121

5-136

5-141

5-197

5-199

5-209

5-21

5-40

5-55

5-69

5-70

5-74

5-84

5-102

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Add

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Add

Add

Add

Add

Update

Update

Update

Update

A-1

B-9

C-3

2-1

2-3

2-4

2-17

---

4-1

5-117

---

---

---

---

5-193

5-21

5-38

5-52

---

5-66

5-70

5-80

5-98

Updated OVERVIEW section

Updated FEATURES section

Updated ORDERING section

Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section

Added INITIAL SETUP OF THE ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE section

Updated USING SETTING FILES section

Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL section

Updated OSCILLOGRAPHY section

Updated USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section

Added IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER section

Updated BREAKERS section

Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section

Updated PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT section

Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table

Updated CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL section

Added PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section

Added NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section

Added BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION section

Added THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION section

Updated REMOTE INPUTS section

Updated FLEXANALOG ITEMS section

Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section

Updated PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES section

F

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System F-1


Table F–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L30 MANUAL REVISION V2

PAGE

(V1)

Title

PAGE

(V2)

Title

CHANGE

Update

DESCRIPTION

Manual part number to 1601-9050-V2

2-4

3-23

2-4

3-23

Update

Update


Updated RS485 PORTS section

Table F–4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L30 MANUAL REVISION V1

PAGE

(U2)

Title

PAGE

(V1)

Title

CHANGE

Update

DESCRIPTION

Manual part number to 1601-9050-V1

2-4

2-8

3-22

3-39

4-28

2-4

2-9

3-22

3-38

4-28

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update


Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section

Updated CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS section

Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section

Updated INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY section

5-10

5-21

B-9

C-3

5-10

5-21

B-9

C-3

Update

Update

Update

Update

Updated ACCESS SUPERVISION section



Updated PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES section

F

Table F–5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L30 MANUAL REVISION U2

PAGE

(U1)

Title

PAGE

(U2)

Title

CHANGE

Update

DESCRIPTION

Manual part number to 1601-9050-U2

1-1 1-1 Update Updated INSPECTION CHECKLIST section

2-19

2-25

2-25

2-26

4-14

5-21

5-70

5-183

9-15

C-7

2-19

2-25

2-26

2-27

4-14

5-21

5-70

5-183

9-15

C-7

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS specifications section

Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section

Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section

Updated APPROVALS specifications section

Updated LED INDICATORS section



Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section

Updated RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION section

Updated CONFIGURABLE GOOSE section

APPENDIX F

F-2 L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

APPENDIX F F.1 CHANGE NOTES

7-2

7-7

---

---

---

B-9

B-59

2-20

2-21

2-25

2-25

3-2

3-12

4-1

5-144

5-160

5-170

5-180

5-186

---

---

5-8

5-21

5-64

5-68

---

5-96

5-115

5-126

---

6-12

6-21

7-3

7-8

8-1

9-

A-8

B-9

B-60

2-20

2-21

2-25

2-25

3-2

3-13

4-1

5-147

5-163

5-173

5-183

5-189

5-198

5-199

5-8

5-21

5-66

5-70

5-85

5-98

5-117

5-129

6-8

6-13

6-22

Update

Update

Add

Add

Add

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Add

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Update

Add

Add

Add

Update

Update

Table F–6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR L30 MANUAL REVISION U1

PAGE

(T1)

Title

PAGE

(U1)

Title

CHANGE

Update

DESCRIPTION

Manual part number to 1601-9050-U1

2-17 2-17 Update Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS section for changes to line current differential and underfrequency specifications

Updated MONITORING specifications section

Updated INPUTS specifications section

Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section

Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section

Updated VERTICAL UNITS sub-section

Updated CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS section

Updated USING SETTINGS FILES section

Updated SECURITY section

Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section

Updated BREAKERS section


Added USER TRIGGERING sub-section

Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table

Updated CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL section

Updated PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT section

Updated PHASE OVERVOLTAGE section

Updated SYNCHROCHECK section

Updated DIGITAL ELEMENTS section

Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section

Updated CONTACT OUTPUTS section

Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS section

Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section

Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section

Updated DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT section

Updated PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITS RECORDS section

Updated RELAY MAINTENANCE section

Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERRORS section

Added SECURITY chapter

Added GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT section

Added FLEXINTEGER ITEMS section


Updated DATA FORMATS section

F

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System F-3


F

F.2ABBREVIATIONS

A..................... Ampere

AC .................. Alternating Current

A/D ................. Analog to Digital

AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity

AMP ............... Ampere

ANG ............... Angle

ANSI............... American National Standards Institute

AR .................. Automatic Reclosure

ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit

ASYM ............. Asymmetry

AUTO ............. Automatic

AUX................ Auxiliary

AVG ................ Average

BER................ Bit Error Rate

BF................... Breaker Fail

BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate

BKR................ Breaker

BLK ................ Block

BLKG.............. Blocking

BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic

BRKR ............. Breaker

CAP................ Capacitor

CC .................. Coupling Capacitor

CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer

CFG................ Configure / Configurable

.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files

CHK................ Check

CHNL ............. Channel

CLS ................ Close

CLSD.............. Closed

CMND ............ Command

CMPRSN........ Comparison

CO.................. Contact Output

COM............... Communication

COMM............ Communications

COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison

CONN............. Connection

CONT ............. Continuous, Contact

CO-ORD......... Coordination

CPU................ Central Processing Unit

CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code

CRT, CRNT .... Current

CSA................ Canadian Standards Association

CT .................. Current Transformer

CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer

D/A ................. Digital to Analog

DC (dc) ........... Direct Current

DD .................. Disturbance Detector

DFLT .............. Default

DGNST........... Diagnostics

DI.................... Digital Input

DIFF ............... Differential

DIR ................. Directional

DISCREP ....... Discrepancy

DIST ............... Distance

DMD ............... Demand

DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol

DPO ............... Dropout

DSP................ Digital Signal Processor dt .................... Rate of Change

DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip

DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip

ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment

EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute

.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files

EXT ................ Extension, External

F ..................... Field

FAIL................ Failure

FD .................. Fault Detector

FDH................ Fault Detector high-set

FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set

FLA................. Full Load Current

FO .................. Fiber Optic


APPENDIX F

F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

FREQ ............. Frequency

FSK ................ Frequency-Shift Keying

FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol

FxE ................ FlexElement™

FWD............... Forward

G .................... Generator

GE.................. General Electric

GND ............... Ground

GNTR............. Generator

GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event

GPS ............... Global Positioning System

HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics

HCT ............... High Current Time

HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)

HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground

HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface

HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

HYB ............... Hybrid

I...................... Instantaneous

I_0 .................. Zero Sequence current

I_1 .................. Positive Sequence current

I_2 .................. Negative Sequence current

IA ................... Phase A current

IAB ................. Phase A minus B current

IB ................... Phase B current

IBC ................. Phase B minus C current

IC ................... Phase C current

ICA ................. Phase C minus A current

ID ................... Identification

IED ................. Intelligent Electronic Device

IEC ................. International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IG ................... Ground (not residual) current

Igd .................. Differential Ground current

IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input

INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence

INIT ................ Initiate

INST............... Instantaneous

INV ................. Inverse

I/O .................. Input/Output

IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent

IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage

IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group

ISO................. International Standards Organization

IUV ................. Instantaneous Undervoltage

K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation kA................... kiloAmpere kV................... kiloVolt

LED ................ Light Emitting Diode

LEO................ Line End Open

LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder

LOOP ............. Loopback

LPU ................ Line Pickup

LRA ................ Locked-Rotor Current

LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer

M .................... Machine mA ................. MilliAmpere

MAG............... Magnitude

MAN ............... Manual / Manually

MAX ............... Maximum

MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance

MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes

MMI ................ Man Machine Interface

MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification

MRT ............... Minimum Response Time

MSG............... Message

MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle

MTR ............... Motor

MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)

MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)

MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)

MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)

GE Multilin

APPENDIX F

MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase)

MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A)

MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B)

MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C)

MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour

MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase)

MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A)

MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B)

MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C)

MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour

N..................... Neutral

N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable

NEG ............... Negative

NMPLT ........... Nameplate

NOM............... Nominal

NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol

NTR................ Neutral

O .................... Over

OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent

O/P, Op........... Output

OP .................. Operate

OPER ............. Operate

OPERATG...... Operating

O/S ................. Operating System

OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect

OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking

OUT................ Output

OV .................. Overvoltage

OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency

OVLD ............. Overload

P..................... Phase

PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer

PCNT ............. Percent

PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase)

PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A)

PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B)

PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C)

PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop

PHS................ Phase

PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance

Statement

PKP ................ Pickup

PLC ................ Power Line Carrier

POS................ Positive

POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip

PRESS ........... Pressure

PRI ................. Primary

PROT ............. Protection

PSEL .............. Presentation Selector pu ................... Per Unit

PUIB............... Pickup Current Block

PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip

PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton

PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip

PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated

PWR............... Power

QUAD............. Quadrilateral

R..................... Rate, Reverse

RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle

REF ................ Reference

REM ............... Remote

REV................ Reverse

RI.................... Reclose Initiate

RIP ................. Reclose In Progress

RGT BLD........ Right Blinder

ROD ............... Remote Open Detector

RST ................ Reset

RSTR ............. Restrained

RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector

RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit

RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver s ..................... second

S..................... Sensitive

GE Multilin



SAT .................CT Saturation

SBO ................Select Before Operate

SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

SEC ................Secondary

SEL .................Select / Selector / Selection

SENS ..............Sensitive

SEQ ................Sequence

SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio

SNTP ..............Simple Network Time Protocol

SRC ................Source

SSB.................Single Side Band

SSEL...............Session Selector

STATS.............Statistics

SUPN..............Supervision

SUPV ..............Supervise / Supervision

SV ...................Supervision, Service

SYNC..............Synchrocheck

SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck

T......................Time, transformer

TC ...................Thermal Capacity

TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol

TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used

TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier

TEMP..............Temperature

TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol

THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion

TMR ................Timer

TOC ................Time Overcurrent

TOV ................Time Overvoltage

TRANS............Transient

TRANSF .........Transfer

TSEL...............Transport Selector

TUC ................Time Undercurrent

TUV.................Time Undervoltage

TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter

U .....................Under

UC...................Undercurrent

UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture

UDP ................User Datagram Protocol

UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories

UNBAL............Unbalance

UR...................Universal Relay

URC ................Universal Recloser Control

.URS ...............Filename extension for settings files

UV...................Undervoltage

V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz

V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage

V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage

V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage

VA ...................Phase A voltage

VAB.................Phase A to B voltage

VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage

VARH ..............Var-hour voltage

VB ...................Phase B voltage

VBA.................Phase B to A voltage

VBG ................Phase B to Ground voltage

VC...................Phase C voltage

VCA ................Phase C to A voltage

VCG ................Phase C to Ground voltage

VF ...................Variable Frequency

VIBR ...............Vibration

VT ...................Voltage Transformer

VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure

VTLOS ............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal

WDG ...............Winding

WH..................Watt-hour w/ opt ..............With Option

WRT................With Respect To

X .....................Reactance

XDUCER.........Transducer

XFMR..............Transformer

Z......................Impedance, Zone

F

F-5

F.3 WARRANTY

F.3WARRANTY

APPENDIX F

F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY

F

GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory.

In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge.

Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.

GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.

For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard

Conditions of Sale.


GE Multilin

INDEX

Index

Numerics

10BASE-F

communications options ................................................. 3-22

description .................................................................... 3-25

interface ........................................................................ 3-34

redundant option ........................................................... 3-22

settings ......................................................................... 5-16

2 TERMINAL MODE ......................................................... 2-12

3 TERMINAL MODE ......................................................... 2-12

87L

see index entry for CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

87L DIFFERENTIAL

Modbus registers ........................................................... B-31

87L TRIP

FlexLogic™ operands .................................................. 5-102

A

ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-4

AC CURRENT INPUTS ................................... 2-21, 3-11, 5-59

AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................2-21, 3-12

ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-17, 4-27

ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................. 5-120

ACTUAL VALUES

description .................................................................... 2-14

main menu ...................................................................... 6-1

maintenance ................................................................. 6-23

metering ........................................................................ 6-10

product information ........................................................ 6-24

records ......................................................................... 6-21

status .............................................................................. 6-3

ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-46

ALARMS .......................................................................... 2-15

ANSI DEVICES .................................................................. 2-1

APPARENT POWER ................................................2-21, 6-16

APPLICATION EXAMPLES

breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-189

contact inputs .............................................................. 5-203

APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-27

AR

see entry for AUTORECLOSE

ARCHITECTURE ........................................................... 5-100

ARCING CURRENT ....................................................... 5-193

AUTORECLOSE

actual values ................................................................... 6-5


logic .................................................................. 5-184, 5-185

Modbus registers .................................................. B-14, B-31

settings ............................................................. 5-181, 5-183

single shot sequence ................................................... 5-186

specifications ................................................................ 2-19

AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE


logic ............................................................................ 5-164


settings ....................................................................... 5-163

specifications ................................................................ 2-18

AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE


logic ............................................................................ 5-163


settings ....................................................................... 5-162

specifications ................................................................ 2-18

AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ..................................... 3-12

AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-16

B

BANKS ............................................................ 5-6, 5-59, 5-60

BATTERY FAILURE ........................................................... 7-8

BINARY INPUT POINTS .................................................... E-8

BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ................................................. E-9

BLOCK DIAGRAM ..................................................... 1-3, 2-15

BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-5

BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

actual values ................................................................. 6-23

clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2

FlexLogic™ operands ................................................... 5-102

logic ............................................................................ 5-194

measurement ............................................................... 5-193

Modbus registers ................................................. B-13, B-33

settings ....................................................................... 5-192

specifications ................................................................. 2-19

BREAKER CONTROL

control of 2 breakers ...................................................... 4-24

description ..................................................................... 4-23

dual breaker logic ................................................. 5-72, 5-73


Modbus registers .......................................................... B-25

settings ......................................................................... 5-70

BREAKER FAILURE

description ................................................................... 5-151

determination ............................................................... 5-152


logic ....................................................... 5-155, 5-156, 5-157

main path sequence ..................................................... 5-152


settings ............................................................ 5-150, 5-153

specifications ................................................................. 2-18

BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-6

BRIGHTNESS .................................................................. 5-12

BROKEN CONDUCTOR


settings ....................................................................... 5-197

BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION


C

C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-35, 3-36, 3-38

C37.94SM COMMUNICATIONS ........................................ 3-37

CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-27

CHANGES TO L90 MANUAL ...............................................F-1

CHANNEL ASYMMETRY

settings ......................................................................... 5-66

CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-27

CHANNEL MONITOR ....................................................... 2-12

CHANNEL STATUS


CHANNEL TESTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-6

commands .............................................................. 5-14, 7-2


procedures .................................................................... 11-1

settings ....................................................................... 5-225

CHANNELS

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System i

INDEX

banks ................................................................... 5-59, 5-60

number of ...................................................................... 5-64

CHARGING CURRENT COMPENSATION ................ 5-64, 9-13

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-187

CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-27

CLEAR RECORDS .................................................... 5-14, 7-2

CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

Modbus registers ...........................................................B-55

settings ......................................................................... 5-14

CLOCK

setting date and time ....................................................... 7-2

settings ......................................................................... 5-38

synchronization tests ..................................................... 11-2

COMMANDS MENU ........................................................... 7-1

COMMUNICATIONS

10BASE-F ....................................................3-22, 3-25, 5-16

channel ................................................................ 2-12, 3-27

connecting to the UR .............................................. 1-8, 1-15

CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2

direct transfer trip .......................................................... 2-13

dnp ........................................................................ 5-17, E-1

G.703 ............................................................................ 3-30

half duplex ...................................................................... B-1

HTTP ............................................................................ 5-34

IEC 60870-5-104 protocol .............................................. 5-35

IEC 61850 ................................................................... 5-208

inter-relay communications .................................... 2-11, 2-25

loopback test ...................................................... 2-13, 5-225

Modbus .................................................. 5-16, 5-37, B-1, B-3


network ......................................................................... 5-16

overview ............................................................... 1-16, 2-11

path diagram ................................................................. 2-12

RS232 ........................................................................... 3-22

RS485 ..........................................................3-22, 3-24, 5-15

settings ...................................... 5-16, 5-17, 5-22, 5-35, 5-37

specifications ........................................................ 2-24, 2-25

UCA/MMS ................................................................... 5-210

web server ..................................................................... 5-34

COMTRADE ...................................................................... B-6

CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-26

CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1

CONTACT INPUTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-3

dry connections ............................................................. 3-19


Modbus registers ............................... B-11, B-17, B-48, B-50

settings ....................................................................... 5-202

specifications ................................................................. 2-21

thresholds ................................................................... 5-202

wet connections ............................................................. 3-19

CONTACT OUTPUTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-4


Modbus registers .........................................B-11, B-17, B-53

settings ....................................................................... 5-205

CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-167

CONTROL POWER

description ..................................................................... 3-11

specifications ................................................................. 2-23

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS



settings ......................................................................... 5-47

specifications ................................................................. 2-20

COUNTERS

actual values ................................................................... 6-7

settings ....................................................................... 5-190

CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2

CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ..................................... 2-23, 3-10

CSA APPROVAL ..............................................................2-27

CT BANKS

settings ..........................................................................5-59

CT FAILURE

logic ............................................................................ 5-196


settings ........................................................................ 5-195

CT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-12, 5-6, 5-59

CT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................10-1

CT WIRING ......................................................................3-12

CURRENT BANK ..............................................................5-59

CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

applications ...................................................................10-3

description .....................................................................2-14


logic ............................................................................ 5-124

metering ........................................................................6-13


settings ........................................................................ 5-121

specifications .................................................................2-17

testing ...........................................................................11-3

CURRENT METERING

actual values ..................................................................6-14


specifications .................................................................2-21

CURVES

definite time ...................................................... 5-131, 5-158

FlexCurves™ ...................................................... 5-77, 5-131

I2T ............................................................................... 5-131

IAC .............................................................................. 5-130

IEC .............................................................................. 5-129

IEEE ............................................................................ 5-128

inverse time undervoltage ............................................. 5-158

types ........................................................................... 5-127

D

DATA FORMATS, MODBUS ............................................. B-61

DATA LOGGER

clearing ................................................................... 5-14, 7-2

Modbus ........................................................................... B-6


settings ..........................................................................5-42

specifications .................................................................2-20

via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6

DATE ................................................................................ 7-2

DCMA INPUTS .................................................................6-20


settings ........................................................................ 5-216

specifications .................................................................2-22

DCMA OUTPUTS

description .....................................................................3-21


settings ........................................................................ 5-219

specifications .................................................................2-23

DD

see entry for DISTURBANCE DETECTOR

DEFINITE TIME CURVE ...................................... 5-131, 5-158

DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-3

DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-209

DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... E-1

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH .................................................3-10

DIFFERENTIAL

applications ...................................................................10-3

ii L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

INDEX

current ....................................................... 2-14, 2-17, 5-121

current metering ............................................................ 6-13

element characteristics .................................................. 9-14

line elements ............................................................... 5-120

stub bus ...................................................................... 5-125

theory ............................................................................. 9-1

DIGITAL COUNTERS

actual values ................................................................... 6-7


logic ............................................................................ 5-191


settings ....................................................................... 5-190

DIGITAL ELEMENTS

application example ..................................................... 5-188


logic ............................................................................ 5-187


settings ....................................................................... 5-187

DIGITAL OUTPUTS

see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS

DIMENSIONS ............................................................. 3-1, 3-2

DIRECT INPUTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-4

description .................................................................. 5-211


logic ............................................................................ 5-213


settings ....................................................................... 5-212

DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

error messages ............................................................... 7-8

DIRECT MESSAGES ..................................................... 5-208

DIRECT OUTPUTS

description .................................................................. 5-211

logic ............................................................................ 5-213

settings ....................................................................... 5-212

DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP ........................................2-13, 11-4

DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL entries

DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION ...................................... 5-137

DISCONNECT SWITCH


logic .............................................................................. 5-76


settings ......................................................................... 5-74

DISPLAY ........................................................ 1-16, 4-23, 5-12

DISTURBANCE DETECTOR


internal ......................................................................... 5-62

logic ............................................................................ 5-166


settings ....................................................................... 5-165

theory ............................................................................. 9-3

DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................ 5-211

DNP COMMUNICATIONS

binary counters ............................................................. E-10

binary input points ........................................................... E-8

binary output points ......................................................... E-9 control relay output blocks ............................................... E-9

device profile document ................................................... E-1

frozen counters ............................................................. E-10

implementation table ....................................................... E-4


settings ......................................................................... 5-17

DTT .........................................................................2-13, 11-4

DUPLEX, HALF .................................................................. B-1

E

EGD PROTOCOL

actual values ................................................................. 6-23

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ........................................ 2-26

ELEMENTS ........................................................................ 5-4

ENERVISTA UR SETUP

creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1

event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2

installation ....................................................................... 1-5

introduction ..................................................................... 4-1

oscillography ................................................................... 4-2

overview .......................................................................... 4-1

requirements ................................................................... 1-5

EQUATIONS

definite time curve ............................................ 5-131, 5-158

FlexCurve™ ................................................................. 5-131

I²t curves ..................................................................... 5-131

IAC curves ................................................................... 5-130

IEC curves ................................................................... 5-129

IEEE curves ................................................................. 5-128

EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ERROR ....................................... 7-7

ETHERNET

actual values ................................................................... 6-8

configuration .................................................................... 1-8

error messages ................................................................ 7-9


quick connect ................................................................ 1-10

settings ......................................................................... 5-16

ETHERNET SWITCH

actual values ................................................................... 6-9

configuration ......................................................... 3-44, 3-45

hardware ....................................................................... 3-39


overview ........................................................................ 3-39

saving setting files ......................................................... 3-45

settings ......................................................................... 5-36

uploading setting files .................................................... 3-46

EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS .................................. 4-15, 4-16

EVENT RECORDER

actual values ................................................................. 6-21

clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2

description ..................................................................... 2-14

Modbus .......................................................................... B-7


specifications ................................................................. 2-20

via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2

EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-5

EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................ B-5

F

F485 ................................................................................ 1-16

FACEPLATE ............................................................... 3-1, 3-2

FACEPLATE PANELS ............................................. 4-13, 4-23

FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-23

FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-26

FAULT DETECTION ........................................................... 9-3

FAULT LOCATOR

logic .............................................................................. 9-22


operation ....................................................................... 9-20

specifications ................................................................. 2-21

FAULT REPORT

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System iii

INDEX

actual values ................................................................. 6-21

clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2

Modbus .......................................................................... B-7

Modbus registers ..................................................B-17, B-22

settings ......................................................................... 5-38

FAULT REPORTS


FAULT TYPE ................................................................... 9-20

FAX NUMBERS .................................................................. 1-1

FEATURES ................................................................. 2-1, 2-3

Fiber ................................................................................ 3-28

FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS ....................................... 3-28

FIRMWARE REVISION ..................................................... 6-24

FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2

FLASH MESSAGES ......................................................... 5-12

FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

actual values ................................................................... 6-8


settings ......................................................................... 5-54

specifications ................................................................. 2-19

FLEXCURVES™

equation ...................................................................... 5-131


settings ......................................................................... 5-77

specifications ................................................................. 2-19

table .............................................................................. 5-77

FLEXELEMENTS™

actual values ................................................................. 6-18

direction ...................................................................... 5-117


hysteresis .................................................................... 5-117


pickup ......................................................................... 5-117

scheme logic ............................................................... 5-116

settings .................................................. 5-115, 5-116, 5-118

specifications ................................................................. 2-19

FLEXLOGIC

locking to a serial number ....................................... 4-9, 8-11

FLEXLOGIC™

editing with EnerVista UR Setup ....................................... 4-2

equation editor ............................................................ 5-114

error messages ................................................................ 7-7

evaluation .................................................................... 5-109

example ............................................................5-100, 5-110

example equation ........................................................ 5-169

gate characteristics ...................................................... 5-108

locking equation entries .......................................... 4-8, 8-10


operands ...........................................................5-101, 5-102

operators ..................................................................... 5-109 rules ............................................................................ 5-109

security .................................................................. 4-8, 8-10

specifications ................................................................. 2-19

timers .......................................................................... 5-114

worksheet .................................................................... 5-111

FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR ................................ 5-114

FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS


settings ....................................................................... 5-115

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-223

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-224

FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-22

FORM-A RELAY

high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-14

outputs .........................................................3-13, 3-14, 3-19

specifications ................................................................. 2-22

FORM-C RELAY

outputs ................................................................. 3-13, 3-19

I

specifications .................................................................2-23

FREQUENCY

detection ......................................................................... 9-7

tracking ........................................................................... 9-6

FREQUENCY METERING

actual values ..................................................................6-17


settings ..........................................................................5-61

specifications .................................................................2-21

FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-61, 6-17

FREQUENCY, NOMINAL ..................................................5-60

FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4

FUNCTIONALITY ............................................................... 2-2

FUSE ...............................................................................2-22

FUSE FAILURE

see VT FUSE FAILURE

G

G.703 .................................................... 3-29, 3-30, 3-31, 3-34

GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-130

GROUND CURRENT METERING ......................................6-15

GROUND IOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-147


settings ........................................................................ 5-147

GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT

see entry for GROUND TOC

GROUND TOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-146


settings ........................................................................ 5-146

specifications .................................................................2-17

GROUPED ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-120

GSSE ................................................. 5-209, 5-210, 5-211, 6-6

H

HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1

HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS .........................................9-11

HTTP PROTOCOL ............................................................5-34

I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-131

IAC CURVES .................................................................. 5-130

IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

interoperability document ................................................. D-1


points list ........................................................................ D-9

settings ..........................................................................5-35

IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS

settings ........................................................................ 5-214

IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS

settings ........................................................................ 5-215

IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

device ID ..................................................................... 5-209

DNA2 assignments ....................................................... 5-211

error messages ............................................................... 7-9

Modbus registers .............. B-44, B-45, B-46, B-47, B-48, B-58

remote device settings .................................................. 5-208

remote inputs ............................................................... 5-209

iv L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

INDEX

settings ......................................................................... 5-21

UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-211

IEC CURVES ................................................................. 5-129

IED .................................................................................... 1-2

IED SETUP ........................................................................ 1-5

IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ................... 3-35, 3-36, 3-38

IEEE CURVES ............................................................... 5-128

IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4

IN SERVICE INDICATOR .......................................... 1-17, 7-6

INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR ................................ 7-7

INPUTS

AC current .............................................................2-21, 5-59

AC voltage ............................................................2-21, 5-60

contact inputs ........................................... 2-21, 5-202, 5-223

dcmA inputs ..........................................................2-22, 3-21

direct inputs ................................................................ 5-212

IRIG-B ..................................................................2-22, 3-25

remote inputs .................................2-22, 5-208, 5-209, 5-210

RTD inputs ............................................................2-22, 3-21

virtual ......................................................................... 5-204

INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................. 1-1

INSTALLATION

communications ............................................................ 3-23

CT inputs ..............................................................3-11, 3-12

RS485 ........................................................................... 3-24

settings ......................................................................... 5-57

INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries

INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................ 1-2

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ..........................2-11, 2-25

INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2

INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................. 5-159

IN-ZONE TRANSFORMER ............................................... 5-69

IOC

see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries

IP ADDRESS ................................................................... 5-16

IRIG-B

connection .................................................................... 3-25

error messages ............................................................... 7-9

settings ......................................................................... 5-38

specifications ........................................................2-22, 2-23

ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ............................................... 2-27

K

KEYPAD ..................................................................1-17, 4-23

L

L90 POWER SYSTEM


LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-3

LANGUAGE ..................................................................... 5-12

LASER MODULE ............................................................. 3-28

LATCHING OUTPUTS

application example ........................................... 5-206, 5-207

error messages ............................................................... 7-9

settings ....................................................................... 5-205

specifications ................................................................ 2-22

LED INDICATORS ........................ 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-22, 5-46

LED TEST

FlexLogic™ operand .................................................... 5-107

settings ......................................................................... 5-44

specifications ................................................................ 2-20

LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS ................................... 5-120

LINK POWER BUDGET .................................................... 2-25

LOCAL LOOPBACK ........................................................ 5-225

LOGIC GATES ............................................................... 5-109

LOOP FILTER BLOCK DIAGRAM ...................................... 9-10

LOOPBACK ........................................................... 2-13, 5-225

LOST PASSWORD ...................................... 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3

M

MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-3

MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................. 6-24

MATCHING PHASELETS .................................................. 9-11

MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ..................................... B-61

MENU HEIRARCHY ................................................. 1-17, 4-25

MENU NAVIGATION ....................................... 1-17, 4-24, 4-25

METERING

conventions .......................................................... 6-10, 6-11

current ........................................................................... 2-21

description ..................................................................... 2-14

frequency ...................................................................... 2-21 power ............................................................................ 2-21 voltage .......................................................................... 2-21

METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................. 6-11

MODBUS

data logger ..................................................................... B-6

event recorder ................................................................ B-7

exception responses ....................................................... B-5

execute operation ........................................................... B-4

fault report ...................................................................... B-7

flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-55

function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3

function code 05h ........................................................... B-4 function code 06h ........................................................... B-4

function code 10h ........................................................... B-5

introduction .................................................................... B-1

memory map data formats ............................................. B-61

obtaining files ................................................................. B-6 oscillography .................................................................. B-6

passwords ...................................................................... B-7

read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3

settings ................................................................ 5-16, 5-37

store multiple settings ..................................................... B-5

store single setting .......................................................... B-4

supported function codes ................................................ B-3

user map ..................................................... 5-37, B-11, B-25

MODEL INFORMATION .................................................... 6-24

MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ........................................ 6-24

MODULE FAILURE ERROR ................................................ 7-7

MODULES

communications ............................................................. 3-23

CT ................................................................................. 3-12

CT/VT ..................................................................... 3-11, 5-6

direct inputs/outputs ....................................................... 3-28

insertion ................................................................... 3-6, 3-7

order codes ..................................................................... 2-9

power supply ................................................................. 3-10

transducer I/O ................................................................ 3-21

VT ................................................................................. 3-12

withdrawal ................................................................ 3-6, 3-7

MONITORING ELEMENTS .............................................. 5-192

MOTOR

settings .................................................. 5-126, 5-138, 5-145

MOUNTING ................................................................. 3-1, 3-2

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System v

N

NAMEPLATE ...................................................................... 1-1

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-149


settings ....................................................................... 5-149

specifications ................................................................. 2-17

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE


logic ............................................................................ 5-162


settings ....................................................................... 5-161

specifications ................................................................. 2-18

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-148


settings ....................................................................... 5-148

specifications ................................................................. 2-17

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC


NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT


logic ............................................................................ 5-145

polarization .................................................................. 5-143

settings ....................................................................... 5-141

specifications ................................................................. 2-18

NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

see entry for NEUTRAL IOC

NEUTRAL IOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-140


settings ....................................................................... 5-140

specifications ................................................................. 2-17

NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT

see entry for NEUTRAL TOC

NEUTRAL TOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-139


settings ....................................................................... 5-139

specifications ................................................................. 2-17

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES



settings ....................................................................... 5-119

specifications ................................................................. 2-19

NSAP ADDRESS .............................................................. 5-16

O

ONE SHOTS .................................................................. 5-109

OPERATING CONDITION CALCULATIONS ...................... 9-16

OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-25

OPERATING TIMES ......................................................... 2-17

ORDER CODES ............................. 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 6-24, 7-3

ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-3

ORDERING ............................................ 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8

OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-26

OSCILLOGRAPHY

actual values ................................................................. 6-22

clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2

INDEX

description .....................................................................2-14

Modbus ........................................................................... B-6


settings ..........................................................................5-40

specifications .................................................................2-20

via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6

via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2

OSI NETWORK ADDRESS ................................................5-16

OUTPUTS

contact outputs ............................................................ 5-205

control power .................................................................2-23 critical failure relay .........................................................2-23

direct outputs ............................................................... 5-212

Fast Form-C relay ..........................................................2-23

Form-A relay ....................................... 2-22, 3-13, 3-14, 3-19

Form-C relay ................................................ 2-23, 3-13, 3-19

IRIG-B ...........................................................................2-23

latching outputs ................................................... 2-22, 5-205

remote outputs ............................................................. 5-211

virtual outputs .............................................................. 5-207

OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................... 5-127

OVERCURRENT CURVES

definite time ................................................................. 5-131

FlexCurves™ ............................................................... 5-131

I2T ............................................................................... 5-131

IAC .............................................................................. 5-130

IEC .............................................................................. 5-129

IEEE ............................................................................ 5-128

OVERVIEW ....................................................................... 2-3

OVERVOLTAGE

auxiliary .............................................................. 2-18, 5-163

negative sequence ....................................................... 5-161

negative-sequence .........................................................2-18

phase ................................................................. 2-18, 5-160

P

PANEL CUTOUT ........................................................ 3-1, 3-2

PARITY ............................................................................5-15

PASSWORD SECURITY .............................. 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3

FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-107

PASSWORDS

changing ........................................................................4-28

for settings templates ............................................... 4-5, 8-7

lost password ................................... 4-28, 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3

Modbus ........................................................................... B-7


overview ........................................................................1-18

security .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1 settings .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1

PC SOFTWARE

see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP

PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS .............................................. 5-158

PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4

PFLL STATUS ................................................................... 6-7

PHASE ANGLE METERING ..............................................6-11

PHASE CURRENT METERING .........................................6-14

PHASE DETECTION .......................................................... 9-7

PHASE DIRECTIONAL OC


PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT


logic ............................................................................ 5-138

phase A polarization ..................................................... 5-136

settings ............................................................. 5-136, 5-137

specifications .................................................................2-18

vi L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

INDEX

PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

see entry for PHASE IOC

PHASE IOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-135


specifications ................................................................ 2-17

PHASE LOCKING ..................................................... 9-6, 9-10

PHASE MEASUREMENT UNIT

see entry for SYNCHROPHASOR

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE


logic ............................................................................ 5-161


settings ....................................................................... 5-160

specifications ................................................................ 2-18

PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-60

PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT

see entry for PHASE TOC

PHASE TOC


logic ............................................................................ 5-133


settings ....................................................................... 5-132

specifications ................................................................ 2-17

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE


logic ............................................................................ 5-160


settings ....................................................................... 5-159

specifications ................................................................ 2-18

PHASELETS ............................................................... 9-1, 9-2

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

actual values ................................................................. 6-22

PHASORS .................................................................. 9-1, 9-2

PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................ 1-1

PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING ........................................... 2-11

PMU

see entry for SYNCHROPHASOR

POWER METERING


specifications ................................................................ 2-21

values ........................................................................... 6-16

POWER SUPPLY

description .................................................................... 3-10

low range ...................................................................... 2-22 specifications ................................................................ 2-22

POWER SYSTEM


settings for L90 ............................................................. 5-64

PREFERENCES


PROCESS BUS

overview ....................................................................... 3-13

PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................ 6-24, B-9

PRODUCT SETUP ...................................................... 5-8, 8-2

PRODUCTION TESTS ..................................................... 2-26

PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-4

PROTECTION FEATURES ................................................. 2-1

PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4

PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE

see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS

R

REACTIVE POWER ................................................. 2-21, 6-16

REAL POWER ......................................................... 2-21, 6-16

REAL TIME CLOCK


settings ......................................................................... 5-38

REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 3-8

RECLOSER CURVES ............................................ 5-80, 5-131

REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-22

RELAY ACTIVATION ........................................................ 4-27

RELAY ARCHITECTURE ................................................ 5-100

RELAY MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 7-3

RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-57

RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................ 1-17

RELAY SYNCHRONIZATION ............................................ 9-15

REMOTE DEVICES

actual values ................................................................... 6-5

device ID ..................................................................... 5-209

error messages .............................................................. 7-10


Modbus registers ............................... B-11, B-17, B-55, B-59

settings ....................................................................... 5-208

statistics .......................................................................... 6-6

REMOTE DPS INPUTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-4

settings ....................................................................... 5-210

REMOTE INPUTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-3


Modbus registers ........................................ B-11, B-17, B-56

settings ....................................................................... 5-209

specifications ................................................................. 2-22

REMOTE LOOPBACK ..................................................... 5-225

REMOTE OUTPUTS

DNA-1 bit pair .............................................................. 5-211


UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-211

REPLACEMENT MODULES ....................................... 2-9, 2-10

REQUIREMENTS, HARDWARE ........................................ 9-11

RESETTING ........................................................ 5-108, 5-214

RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTICS ..................................... 9-17

REVISION HISTORY ..........................................................F-1

RF IMMUNITY .................................................................. 2-26

RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-26

RMS CURRENT ............................................................... 2-21

RMS VOLTAGE ................................................................ 2-21

RS232

configuration .................................................................... 1-9

specifications ................................................................. 2-24

wiring ............................................................................ 3-22

RS422

configuration .................................................................. 3-32

timing ............................................................................ 3-33 two-channel application .................................................. 3-33

with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-34

RS485

communications ............................................................. 3-22

configuration .................................................................... 1-7

description ..................................................................... 3-24

specifications ................................................................. 2-24

RTD INPUTS

actual values ................................................................. 6-20


settings ....................................................................... 5-217

specifications ................................................................. 2-22

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System vii

S

SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1

SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4

SELECTOR SWITCH

actual values ................................................................... 6-7

application example ..................................................... 5-174


logic ............................................................................ 5-175


settings ....................................................................... 5-170

specifications ................................................................. 2-20

timing ................................................................5-173, 5-174

SELF-TESTS

description .............................................................. 2-15, 7-6

error messages ................................................................ 7-8


Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9

SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................ 6-24

SERIAL PORTS


settings ......................................................................... 5-15

SETTING GROUPS .......................... 5-105, 5-120, 5-169, B-30

SETTINGS TEMPLATES

description ................................................................ 4-4, 8-6 editing ...................................................................... 4-4, 8-6 enabling ................................................................... 4-4, 8-6


password protection .................................................. 4-5, 8-7

removing .................................................................. 4-7, 8-9

viewing ..................................................................... 4-6, 8-8

SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-26

SIGNAL SOURCES

description ....................................................................... 5-5

metering ........................................................................ 6-14

settings ......................................................................... 5-62

SIGNAL TYPES .................................................................. 1-3

SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM .................................................... 2-2

SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1

SNTP PROTOCOL

error messages ................................................................ 7-9


settings ......................................................................... 5-36

SOFTWARE

installation ....................................................................... 1-5 see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP

SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4

SOFTWARE MODULES .................................................... 2-16

SOFTWARE, PC

see entry for EnerVista UR Setup

SOURCE FREQUENCY .................................................... 6-17

SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES .................................... 5-158

SOURCES

description ....................................................................... 5-5

example use of .............................................................. 5-62

metering ........................................................................ 6-14


settings ................................................................ 5-61, 5-62

ST TYPE CONNECTORS ................................................. 3-25

STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ............................................ F-4

START-UP ....................................................................... 9-11

STATUS INDICATORS ............................................ 4-14, 4-16

STORAGE TEMPERATURE .............................................. 2-25

STUB BUS


logic ............................................................................ 5-126


INDEX

settings ........................................................................ 5-125

SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT


SUPERVISING ELEMENTS ............................................. 5-165

SURGE IMMUNITY ...........................................................2-26

SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING .....................6-11

SYNCHROCHECK

actual values .................................................. 6-8, 6-17, 6-18


logic ............................................................................ 5-180


settings ............................................................. 5-177, 5-178

specifications .................................................................2-19

SYNCHRONIZATION RELAY ............................................9-15

SYNCHROPHASORS

actual values ..................................................................6-19

clearing PMU records ...................................................... 7-2

commands ...................................................................... 7-3

FlexLogic™ operands ........................................ 5-104, 5-105

network connection ........................................................5-98

phase measurement unit triggering .................................5-89

phasor measurement configuration .................................5-85

phasor measurement unit ...............................................5-84

phasor measurement unit calibration ...............................5-86

phasor measurement unit communications ......................5-87

phasor measurement unit recording ................................5-96

test values ................................................................... 5-225

SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-60

SYSTEM SETUP ..............................................................5-59

T

TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-6

TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-5

TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-6

TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-34

TEMPERATURE MONITOR .................................... 5-108, 7-10

TERMINALS ..............................................................3-8, 5-64

TESTING

channel tests ............................................................... 5-225

clock synchronization .....................................................11-2

final tests .......................................................................11-4

force contact inputs ...................................................... 5-223

force contact outputs .................................................... 5-224

lamp test ......................................................................... 7-3

local-remote relay tests ..................................................11-4

self-test error messages .................................................. 7-6

synchrophasors ............................................................ 5-225

THEORY OF OPERATION ................................................. 9-1

THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION


settings ........................................................................ 5-199

specifications .................................................................2-19

TIME ................................................................................. 7-2

TIME OVERCURRENT

see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries

TIMERS ......................................................................... 5-114

TOC

ground ......................................................................... 5-146

neutral ......................................................................... 5-139

phase .......................................................................... 5-132

specifications .................................................................2-17

TRACEABILITY

data .................................................... 4-11, 4-12, 8-13, 8-14

overview ............................................................... 4-10, 8-12

rules ..................................................................... 4-12, 8-14

viii L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

INDEX

TRACKING FREQUENCY ........................................ 6-17, B-38

TRANSDUCER I/O

actual values ................................................................. 6-20

settings ............................................................. 5-216, 5-217

specifications ................................................................ 2-22

wiring ............................................................................ 3-21

TRIP BUS



settings ....................................................................... 5-167

TRIP DECISION EXAMPLE .............................................. 9-18

TRIP LEDs ...................................................................... 5-46

TROUBLE INDICATOR ............................................. 1-17, 7-6

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM .............................................. 3-9

U

UL APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-27

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS

commands .................................................................... 5-14

resetting .......................................................................... 7-2

UNDERFREQUENCY


logic ............................................................................ 5-176


settings ....................................................................... 5-176

specifications ................................................................ 2-18

UNDERVOLTAGE

auxiliary ........................................................................ 2-18

phase .................................................................. 2-18, 5-159

UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS .......................... 5-158

UNEXPECTED RESTART ERROR .................................... 7-10

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ....................................... 5-57, 7-7

UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1

UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-3

URPC

see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

example ........................................................................ 5-57

invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-55


settings .................................................................5-55, 5-57

specifications ................................................................ 2-20

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs

custom labeling ............................................................. 4-22

defaults ......................................................................... 4-16 description ............................................................4-15, 4-16


settings ......................................................................... 5-46

specifications ................................................................ 2-19

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS



settings ......................................................................... 5-49

specifications ................................................................. 2-20

USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS


settings ......................................................................... 5-47

USERST-1 BIT PAIR ...................................................... 5-211

V

VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-26

VIRTUAL INPUTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-3

commands ....................................................................... 7-1


logic ............................................................................ 5-204

Modbus registers ................................................... B-9, B-50

settings ....................................................................... 5-204

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

actual values ................................................................... 6-5



settings ....................................................................... 5-207

VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-60

VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-26

VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-158

VOLTAGE METERING


specifications ................................................................. 2-21

values ........................................................................... 6-15

VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ..................... 5-132

VT FUSE FAILURE

logic ............................................................................ 5-197


settings ....................................................................... 5-196

VT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-12, 5-6, 5-60

VT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-12

VTFF

see VT FUSE FAILURE

W

WARRANTY .......................................................................F-6

WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-34

WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-1

WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................. 3-9

Z

ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE ................................ 3-12

ZERO-SEQUENCE CURRENT REMOVAL ......................... 5-66

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System ix

INDEX

x L30 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential System

Title Page

GE Multilin

L30 Line Current Differential

System

UR Series Instruction Manual

Addendum

GE Multilin

ADDENDUM

Table of Contents

Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new GE Mutilin structured template.

Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all NOTE, CAUTION and WARNING icons in this document are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, or downtime.

Line Differential Relay

Input Elements

CPU Module

Output Elements

LAN

Programming

Device

Operator

Interface

Read Inputs

Solve Logic

Set Outputs

°

°

°

Push in and gently lift up the cover.

τ

τ

τ

PER IEEE CONVENTIONS

Appendices

GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

Related manuals

GE

L30

GE Digital Energy

L30

Carrier

MOTORMASTER 48/50P2

GE Multilin

UR Series N60

GE Multilin

C60 UR series

GE

B30

Table of contents